// vmm LIBRARY. NO-
H. P. PISK.
<
Price, _LlASL— ^
Purehasec!,, Mcv. IS^M-
ity Publishing Company's
of //a-u^oy j!^s Geographical Works.
I First Lessons in Geography. Small 4to. 63 cts.
IFlortbwestern Xllníversíty Xtbrarp
Evanston, Illinois
THE GIFT OF
Educational Works.
Holmes' Grammars, Readers, Histories.
First Lessons in English Grammar.
Illustrated. 16r»o. 160 pages. 50 cts.
Its simple method, appropriate illustrations, and abundant exercises, cannot
fail to beguile the young pupil into a familiarity with the leading principles
of Grammar.
English Grammar. i2mo. 240 pages. 90 cts.
Its acute observations condense in small compass a large amount of infor¬
mation for advanced scholars and teachers without interfering with the sim¬
plicity of method appropriate to an elementary book..
School History of the United States.
Illustrated with numerous engravings and maps. 12mo.
366 pages. S 1.50.
Holmes' Primer. i6mo. 86 pages, lo cts.
Holmes' Elementary Speller. 12mo. 156 pages.
18 cts.
Holmes' First Reader. i2mo. 60 pages. 20 cts.
Holmes' Second Reader. i2mo. 120 pages. 85 cts.
Holmes' Third Reader. 12mo. 192 pages. 50 cts.
Holmes' Fourth Reader. i2mo. 276 pages. 75 cts.
Holmes' Fifth Reader. i2mo. 408 pages. $1.25.
Holmes' Sixth Reader. i2rao. 48o pages. $1.50.
These Readers are carefully graduated, thoroughly practical, and attractive
in pictorial and mechanical features. The type is clear and bold, the paper
good, and tho binding firm and substantial. The varied selections are admi¬
rably adapted to sustain the interest of the pupil. The classification of words
in the Speller is adapted to simplify the study^of orthography, and secure a
correct pronunciation by thorough training in all the oral elements.
English Literature.
An Historical Sketch of English Literature from the earli¬
est times. By Prof. R. M. Johnston and Wm. Hand
Browne. , 12mo. 395 pages. $1.50.
A faithful outline map of the wide and fair domain of English literature, —not
difllcult to fix in memory, and serving to locate and elucidate subsequent reading.
REVISED LATIN GRAMMAR.
LATIN GEAMMAE
BY
B. L. GILDERSLEEVE, Ph.D. (Güttingen), LL
Fbofsssob op Gbeek in the Univebsitt of Viboinu.
UNIVERSITY PUBLISHING COMPANY,
NEW YORK AND BALTIMORE.
1873.
Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1867, by
RICHARDSON & COMPANY,
In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States, for the
Southern District of New York.
Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1872, by the
UNIVERSITY PUBLISHING COMPANY,
In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington.
\ Is
^ V-Cioc VC
C« '-C L C-C. cc c
c tr c co' cccc
c oOcCCc e
çO cv r, ^ e
tc Û. c C€«Ccc t
fA<©CfC^ tc c
C C«. Co C^CECCCC
t c
e c
etc c c c
PREFACE
TO THE REVISED EDITION.
• »•
In this new edition of my Latin Grammar, I have not made any essen¬
tial change in the Inflections, as I am thoroughly in accord with the wise
self-restraint of the German authors, Professors Lattmann and Müller,
who have presented simply the results and not the processes of Compara¬
tive Grammar. A few sections and a few notes have been added, and
here and there I have allowed myself to vary from the original, but in the
main I have kept to the translation, as made by Professor Thomas R.
Price, of Randolph Macon College, a scholar whose attainments need no
testimonial from me, a man whose friendship I count among my most
valued possessions.
To the revision of the Syntax, which was originally based on Kritz,
and largely indebted for its practical features to Lattmann and Müller,
especial attention has been given ; and, whilst I have not deviated from
the general arrangement, which was dictated by the design of writing a
parallel Greek Grammar, the variations in detail are so numerous that
this part of the book may be considered a new work.
The orthography has been brought nearer to recent results, but I have,
not aimed at a painful consistency.
In the treatment of the metres I have had regard to the system of
Heinrich Schmidt.
It would be pedantry to enumerate all the grammars that I have con¬
sulted, worse than pedantry to acknowledge my obligations to the great
4 peeface.
masters of the department, without whose aid no tolerable Latin grammar
can be written, and unworthy of the aims of my life to advertise my own
efforts or to call attention to the supposed excellences of my own methods.
To all who have encouraged me by their sympathy, or aided me by
corrections and suggestions, I am truly grateful. To none do I owe
more, both for encouragement and for aid, than to my tried friend and
esteemed colleague. Professor Peters, whose acute criticism and practical
experience have been of great service to me in the prosecution of my
Latin studies.
B. L. GILDERSLEEVE.
Bepteivíber, 1873.
CONTENTS.
The references are to the paragraphs.
Inflections 1—191
Alphabet 1
Vowels 2
Consonants 6
Syllables 8
Quantity 10
Accentuation 14
Parts of Speech 15
Inflection 16
Substantive 17
Gender 18
Cases 21
Declensions 25
First 27
Second 29
Third 36
Fourth 67
Fifth 69
Greek Nouns 71
Irregular Nouns 74
Adjectives 81
Comparison 86
Adverbs 90
Numerals 92
Pronouns 97
Verb 109
Conjugation of Sum 112
Systems of Conjugation 116
First Conjugation 119
Second Conjugation 128
Third Conjugation 181
Fourth Conjugation 135
Appendix to Third Conj 189
Deponents of First Conj 141
Deponents of Second Conj 143
Deponents of Third Conj 145
Deponents of Fourth Conj 147
Periphrastic Conjugation 149
Abbreviations 151
Present Stem 152
Perfect " 158
Supine " 154
Euphonic Laws 155
Change of Conjugation 156
Stems in a P-mute 157
Stems in a K-mute 159
Aspirate Stems in H and V ... 163
Stems in a T-mute 164
Liquid Stems 169
Stems in S 172
Stems in U 173
Deponents 175
Change of Conjugation 176
Inchoative Verbs 181
Irregular Verbs 183
Obsolete forms of the Verb.. 191
Syntax 192—697
Syntax of Simple Sentence 192
Nominative and Vocative....'. 193
Concord 201
Voices 203
Tenses 213
Present Tense 218
Imperfect 222
Perfect 226
Pluperfect 233
Future 234
Future Perfect 236
Periphrastic Tenses 238
Tenses in Letters 244
Moods 245
Indicative 246
Subjunctive 247
Imperative 259
Tenses of Moods and Verbal
Nouns 270
Simple Sentence Expanded 280
Multiplication of Subject 281
Qualiflcation of Subject 284
Attribute 285
Demonstrative Pronouns 290
Determinative and Reflexive
Pronouns 293
Possessive Pronouns 299
Indefinite Pronouns 300
Numerals 307
Comparatives and Superla¬
tives 311
6
contents.
Apposition 318
Predicative Attribution, and
Apposition 824
Multiplication of Predicate.... 825
Qualification of Predicate 826
Accusative 827
Dative 848
Genitive 857
Ablative 888
Names of Towns and Islands.. 410
Prepositions 414
With Accusative 417
With Ablative 418
With Acc. and Ahl 419
Infinitive as a Substantive .... 420
Gerund and Gerundive 426
Supine 485
Adverb 440
Negatives 442
rncomplete Sentence 451
Interrogative Sentences 452
Syntax of Compound Sentence.. 474
Coordination 475
Copulative Sentences 476
Adversative Sentences 485
Disjunctive Sentences 494
Causal and Illative Sentences. 500
Subordination 505
Sequence of Tenses 510
Reflexive 520
Object Sentences 528
With Quod 524
With Acc. and Inf. 526
Object Sentences with Parti¬
ciple 586
Causal Sentences 588
Sentences of Design and Ten¬
dency 548
Final Sentences 544
Consecutive Sentences 558
Temporal Sentences 561
Antecedent Action 568
Contemporaneous Action. 570
Prior Action 576
Cum (Quum) 580
Conditional Sentences 590
Logical 597
Ideal 598
Unreal 599
Incomplete 600
Of Comparison 604
Concessive Sentences 605
Relative Sentences 612
Comparative Sentences 641
Correlative 645
With atque 646
With quam 647
Abridged Sentence 648
Infinitive 649
Oratio Obliqua 651
Participle 669
Arrangement of Words 671
Arrangement of Glauses 682
Figures of Syntax 685
Prosody 698
Versification 723
INFLECTIONS
or THB
LATIN LANGUAGE,
ON THE BASIS OF LATTMANN AND MÜLLER
ALPHABET.
1. The Latin alphabet is the same as the English, except that
it has no W.
Remabk.—K is used chiefly in abbreviations—K. (Caeso), Kal. (Ka-
lendae). Y and Z occur in Greek words only. Originally, there was no
difference in character between I and J, between V and U. In the olden
time U did not come after V : servos (servus) equos or ecus (equus),
quem (cum).
VOWELS.
2. The vowels are a, e, i, o, n; and are divided :
1. According to their quality^ into
<ypen^ a, e, o.
dose^ i, u.
2. According to their quantity, into
long, —
short, —'
common, i. e., sometimes short, and sometimes long, 3
The following distinction is made :
common : by preference short, ^
common : by preference long, —
In this grammar, «very long vowel sonnd is marked. But see 700 K. 2.
8
VOWELS—CONSONANTS.
3. Sounds of the Vowels.
ä = a in father. ö = o in bone.
ë = e in proy. ü = oo in moon.
Î = i in capr/ce. y = u in sûr (French).
Kemabk.—The short sounds are only less prolonged in prononciation than tke long
sounds, and have no exact English equivalents.
DIPHTHONGS.
4. There are hut few diphthongs or double sounds in Latin. The theory
of the diphthong requires that both elements be heai'd in a slur. The tend¬
ency in Latin was to reduce diphthongs to simple sounds ; hence frequent
variations in spelling : so glaeba and gleba, sod ; oboedire and obedire,
obey ; faenum (foenum) and fenum, Tiay.
ae and ce = ae in Grodme.
au = ou in OUT.
ei = ei in feint (drawled),
eu = eu in Spanish dowda.
ui = oui in French oui.
Diaeeesis.
5. The sign •• {Diœrèsis—Greek = separation) over the second vowel
shows that each sound is to be pronounced separately : âër, air ¡ Oeno-
maiis, aloe.
CONSONANTS.
6. Consonants are divided:
1. According to the principal organs by which they are pronounced,
into
Labials (lip-sounds); b, p, (ph), i, v, m.
Dentals (tooth-sounds) : d, t, (th), 1, n, r, s.
Gutturals (throat-sounds) : g, o, k, qu, (oh), h.
2. According to their prolongation^ into
A. Semi-vowels: of which
1, m, n, r, are liquids, (m and n being nasals).
h, j, and v, are breathings, and
s ia a sibilant.
B. Mutes : to which belong
P-mutes, p, b, (ph), ^ labials.
T-mutes, t, d, (th), dentals.
K-mutes, k, o, qu, g, (oh), gutturals.
division op syllables.
9
Those on the same line are said to be of the same organ.
Mutes are further divided into
Tenues (thin) : p, t, k, c, qu, hard (surd).
Mediae (middle) : b, d, g, ioft (sonant).
[Aspîrâtae (aspirate) : ph, th, ch,] aspirate.
The aspirates occur chiefly in Greek words.
Those on the same line are said to be of the same order.
3. Double consonants are : z = dz in adze ; x = cs (ks) ; j between two
vowels is a double sound, half vowel, half consonant, and always length¬
ens the preceding vowel ; jejünus, hungry.
Sounds op the Consonants.
T. The consonants are sounded as in English, with the following
exceptions :
O is hard throughout = k, commonly assibilated before e (ae, oe) and i.
Ch is not a genuine Latin sound. In Latin words it is a k ; in Greek
words a kh ; commonly pronounced as ch in German.
G is hard throughout, as in get., give.
J has the sound of a broad y ; much fuller than y in your.
N has a guttural nasal sound before c, g, q, as in a?2chor, awguish.
Qu = kw (nearly) ; before u, qu = c ; quum = cum j equus = ecus.
Quum is a late spelling, retained for convenience' sake.
R must be trilled.
S and X are always hard, as in hiss, aa:e.
T is hard throughout.
V was nearer our w than our v j still nearer the French ou in oui.
SYLLABLES.
8. The syllable is the unit of pronunciation, and consists of a
vowel, or a vowel and one or more consonants.
A consonant, between two vowels, belongs to the second:
a-mo, I love.
Two or more consonants belong to the following vowel:
a-sper, rough; fau-stus, lucTcy; li-bri, hoohs.
Exceptions.—1. Liquids, I, m, n, r, join the preceding vowel : al-mus,
fostering; am-bo, both; an-guis, snake; ar-bor, tree; mn follows the
general rule : a-mnis, river.
2. When the consonant is doubled, the first belongs to the first, the
I*
10
quantitt—accentuation.
second to the second syllable : cas-sis, hdmet ; al-lium, garlic ; map-pa
napkin; an-nus, mit-to, JsemZ.
3. Compounds are treated as if their parts were separate words : ab-igo,
I drive off ; rës-pûblica, commonwealth.
9. The last syllable of a word is called the ultima ; the next
to the last, the penult ; the one before the penult, the ante-
penult.
10. Quantity.—A syllable is said to be long ly nature,
when it contains a long vowel or diphthong ; hy position, when
a short vowel is followed by two or more consonants, or a dou¬
ble consonant: ö^rs, art; coUum, nech ; abrumpo, I ireaJc off ;
per mare, through the sea ; nex, murder.
Remark.—ns, and j make a preceding vowel sound long, not merely
the syllable.
Exception.—J in the compounds of jugtun, yoke ; bi-jugns, two-horse.
11. A syllable ending in a short vowel, followed by a mute
with 1 or r, is common (anceps) : tenlbrae, darkness.
12. Every diphthong, and every vowel derived from a diph¬
thong, or contracted from other vowels, is long: saevus, cruel;
conclude, I shut tip (from ciando, I shut) ; cögo (from co-igo),
I drive together.
13. One simple vowel before another vowel-sound makes a
short syllable : dens, God ; puer, loy.
Remarks.—1. h does not count : nihil, nothing.
2. Exceptions will be noted as they occur.
3. On the quantity of final syllables see Prosody.
14. Accentuation.—1. Dissyllabic words have the accent
or stress on the penult : eqnns, horse.
2. Polysyllabic words have the accent on the penult, when
the penult is long; on the antepenult, when the penult is short
or common: mandare, to commit ; máhdére, to cheto ; mtëgmm,
entire.
Remarks.—1. The little appendages (enclitics), que, ve, ne, add an
accent to the ultimate of words accented on the antepenult : lûminaque,
atid lights ; flûminave, or Hvers ; v5merene,/ro77i a ploughshare ?
2. Other exceptions will be noted as they occm*. In the older language
the accent was not bounded by the antepenult : accipio (accipio), con-
cutio (ccncutio).
SUBSTANTIVE.
11
PAETS OF SPEECH.
15. The parts of speech are:
I. The Noun, embracing :
1. The Substantive, which gives a name: vir, a man; Codes,
Codes ; döniiin, a gift.
2. The Adjective, which adds a quality to the substantive.
II. The Pronoun, which points out.
III. The Verb, which says.
IV. The Particles, which are mainly mutilated forms of the
noun, and embrace :
1. The Adverb, which shows circumstances.
2. The Preposition, which shows local relation.
3. The Conjunction, which shows connection.
Remarks,—1. Noun and pronoun have essentially the same inflec¬
tion ; but they are commonly separated, partly on account of the differ¬
ence in signification, partly on account of the greater antiquity of the
pronominal forms. The pronominal element is the formative element of
language.
2. The Inteijection is either a mere cry of feeling: âh! ah! and does
not belong to language, or falls under one of the above-mentioned classes.
INFLECTION.
16. Inßection is that bending or change, chiefly in the end of
a word, which shows a change in the relations of that word.
The noun, pronoun, and verb are inflected ; the particles are not
capable of further inflection.
The inflection of nouns and pronouns is called declension,
and nouns and pronouns are said to be declined.
The inflection of verbs is called conjugation, and verbs are
said to be conjugated.
SUBSTANTIVE.
17. The substantive gives the name of a person or thing
(concrete), or of a quality (abstract).
Concrete substantives are qiÚíQíV proper or commoii.
12
GENDER.
The proper noun is proper, or peculiar, to certain persons or
things: Horätius, Horace; Neapolis, Naples; Fadus, Po.
Common nouns are common to a whole class : dominus, a lord ;
urbs, a city ; amnls, a river.
GENDER.
16, For the names of animate beings, the gender is deter¬
mined by the signification; for things and qualities, by the
termination.
Males are masculine ; Females, feminine. Masculine : Romu¬
lus; Jtipiter; vir, man; equus, horse. Feminine: Cornelia; Juno;
femina, woman ; equa, mare.
19. Some classes of words, without natural gender, have their
gender determined by the signification :
1. Names of months (menses, masc.), winds (ventî, mase.),
rivers (fluvil, masc.), and mountains (montes, mase.), are mascu¬
line : Aprllis, the opening month, A pril ; Aquilo, the north wind ;
Albis, the River Elbe ; Athös, Mount Athos.
Exceptions.—1. Feminine are the rivers Allia; Albula; Matröna,
the Marne ; Styx ; Lëthë.
2. Of the mountains, the Alps, Alpës, are feminine, and sundry (Greek)
names in a (Gen. ae), ë (Gen. ës) : Aetna, Cyllënë ; Söracte, and Pëlion
are neuter, and so are names of mountains in a (Gen. orum) ; Maenala,
Maenalôrum.
H. Names of countries (terrae, fem.), islands (insulae,/m.),
cities (urbes, fem.), plants (plantae, fern.), and trees (arbores,
fem.), are feminine : Aegyptus, Egypt ; Rhodus, Rhodes ; pirus,
a pear-tree ; abies, a fir-tree,
Exceptions.—The exceptions, which are numerous, are chiefly Greek,
and follow the termination, instead of the signification.
III. All indeclinable nouns, and all words and phrases treated
as indeclinable nouns, are neuter ; fas, right; à longum, ä long ;
scire tuum, thy Jcnowing ; triste vale, a sad '^farewell."
20. 1. Nouns which have but one form for masculine and
feminine are said to be of common gender: clvrs citizen (male
or female) ; comes, companion ; judex, judge.
CASES.
13
2. Substantiva möbilia are words of the same origin, whose
different terminations designate difference of gender: magister,
master, teacher ; magistra, mistress ; servus, serva, slave (m. and
f.) ; victor, victrix, conqueror (m. and f.)
3. If the male and female of animals have but one designa¬
tion, mas, male, and fêmina, female, are added, when it is neces¬
sary to be exact : pavo más (masculus), peacoch, pavo femina, pea¬
hen. These nouns are called epicene.
Cases.
21. The Latin noun has six cases :
1. Nominative (Case of the Subject).
Answers: who? what?
2. Genitive (Case of the Complement).
Answers : whom? whereof?
3. Dative (Case of Indirect Object or Personal Interest).
Answers : For or To whom ?
4. Accusative (Case of Direct Object).
Answers : whom ? what?
5. Vocative (Case of Direct Address).
6. Ablative (Case of Adverbial Kelation).
Answers : where ? whence ? wherewith ?
22. According to their syntactical use, the cases are divided
into Casus Eectl, or Independent Cases, and Casus ObllquI, or De¬
pendent Cases. Nominative and Vocative are Casus Eectl, the
rest Casus ObllquI.
23. According to their form, the cases are divided into
strong and lueah : The strong cases are Nominative, Accusative,
and Vocative. The weak cases are Genitive, Dative, and Ablative.
Eehakks.—These six cases are the remains of a larger number. The Locative, which
Is akin to the Dative, and coincident with it in the 1st and 3d Declensions, is lost in the
Genitive of the 2d Declension, and olten blended with the Ablative in form, regularly in
sirntax. The Instrumental, which is found in other members of the family, is likewise
merged in the Ablative.
24. The case-forms arise from the combination of the ending
with the stem.
The stem is that which is common to a class of formations.
14
DECLENSIONS.
Remarks.—1. The stem is often so much altered by contact with the ending, the end¬
ing so much altered by the wearing away of vowels and consonants, that they can be de¬
termined only by scientific analysis. So in the paradigm mensa, the stem is not mens,
but mensa, the final a having been absorbed by the ending in the Dative and Ablative
Plural mensis. So -d, the characteristic of the Ablative Singular, has disappeared, and
the locative ending has undergone many changes (g, el, Ï, ë). The " crude form " it is
often impossible to ascertain.
2. The root is an ultimate stem, and the determination of the root belongs to compara¬
tive etymology. The stem may be of any length, the root must be a mo^o^svllabl^e. In
penna the stem is penna- ; in pennula, pennula- ; in pennätulus, penuätulo- ; the
root is PET (petna, pesna, penna), and is found in pet-ere, to fall upon, to fly at / Greek,
Ttir-Oßai^ TtTEpóv ; English,
Declensions.
25. There are five declensions in Latin, which are character¬
ized by the final sound of their respective stems :
The stems of the First Declension end in
The stems of the Second Declension end in
The stems of the Third Declension end in
or the close vowels ....
The stems of the Fourth Declension end in
The stems of the Fifth Declension end in
Stem
characteristic.
w
a
Ö
a consonant,
i and u
u
e
ons are called Vowel De-
26. 1. The First, Second, and Fifth Declensi
clensions ; the Third and Fourth, which really form but one, the Conso¬
nant Declension, i and u being semi-consonants.
2. General Kules of Declension.
I. For the strong cases :
Neuter nouns have Nominative and Vocative like the Accusative ; in
the Plural the strong cases always end in ä.
In the Third, Fourth, and Fifth Declensions the strong cases are alike
in the Plural.
The Vocative is like the Nominative, except in the Second Declension,
when the Nom. ends in -us.
II. For the weak cases :
Dative and Ablative Plural have a common form.
Remarks.—In declining neuter nouns, follow the order of strong cases and weak
cases. It saves time, and shows connection.
First Declension.
27. The stem ends in á, which disappears in the ending -Is
of the Dative and Ablative plural.
DECLENSIONS.
15
Féminins.
SING. —N.
mensa,
the, or a, table.
G.
mensae.
of the, or a, table.
D.
mensae,
to, for the, or a, table.
Ac.
mensa-m.
the, or a, table.
V.
mensa,
0 table ! or table !
Abl.
mensa,
from, with, by, the, or a, table.
PLUB.—N.
mensae.
the tables, or tables.
Gr.
mensärum, of the tables, or tables.
D.
mensis.
to, for tlte tables, or tables.
Ac.
mensas,
the tables, or tables.
V.
mensae,
0 tables !
Abl.
mensis.
from, with, by, the tables, or tables.
Kemabes.—1. The Gen. -äi is found in poetry. The Gen. in -äs occurs
in the word familia, family^ when combined with pater, father, mäter,
mother, filius, &on, filia, daughter, viz. : paterfamilias, mäterfamiliäs,
filius familias, filia familias.
The Gen. Pl. sometimes takes the form -um instead of -arum, chiefly in
the Greek words amphora (amphora, measure of tonnage), and drachma,
franc—{Greek coin). The poets make frequent use of this form in patro¬
nymics and compounds of -cola (from colo, I inhabit) and -gena (from gen,
beget).
2. The Locative Dative case singular is like jühe Genitive Romae,
at Rome.
3. "DesLj goddess, filia, daughter, z.Tc\\iz&.,hoth, and duae, two, have the form
-abus in the Dative and Ablative Plural, viz. : deabus, fîliâbus, ambäbus,
duäbus.
28. Rule of Gender,—The gender is feminine, except when
males are meant.
Hadria, the Adriatic, is masculine.
Second Declension.
29. The stem ends in -o, which appears in the older forms of
the Nom. and Acc. singular, servo-s, servo-m. In the ordinary
forms it is changed into u, ë, lengthened into o, or disappears
wholly.
Masculine.
SING.—N. hortus, garden. plur.—horti, gardens.
G.
horti.
hortôrum.
D.
horto.
hortîs.
Ac.
hortiun,
hortös.
V.
horte.
horti.
Abl.
hortö,
hortîs.
16
SECOND DECLENSION.
Neuter.
sing.—N. Ac. Y. bellum, war,
G. belli,
D. Abl. bellö,
PLUR.—bella, wars,
bellorum,
bellis.
Eemarks.—1. In the Genitive Singular, ii is often contracted into i,
the accent remaining unchanged : ingeim, of genius, into ingénî.
2. In the Vocative Singular, ie (je) is commonly contracted into ï in
proper names in -ius, -ëius (ejus), -aius (^us), the accent remaining un¬
changed; as, Antoni, Tullí, Gäi, Vergîlî. Pïlius, «on, genius, genius, and
meus, my, form their Vocatives in like manner: fili, geni, mi.
3. In the Genitive Plural, -um for -örum is found in words denoting
coins and measures ; as, nummum {of moneys) — sestertium, of sesterces ;
medium, of measures. Faber, workman, has both fabrum and fabrorum j
liberï, children, both liberum and liberörum ; and vir, man, in compounds
has triumvirum, of the triumvirs, and the like.
4. The Locative Singular, which has a restricted use, ends in i (Appa¬
rent Genitive), as Rhodi, at Bhodes, Tarenti, at Tarentum.
5. Deus, Ood, is irregular. Singular Vocative, deus. Plural Nomina¬
tive (dei), dii, di ; Genitive, deôrum, deum ; Accusative, deos j Dative
and Ablative (deis), diis, dis.
30. Rule of Gender.—Nouns in -us are masculine; in -urn,
neuter.
Exceptions.—Feminine are: 1st. Cities and islands, as, Oorinthus,
Samus. 2d. Most trees, as, fagus, beech j pirus, pear-tree. 8d. Many Greek
nouns, as, atomus, atom ; paragraphus, paragraph ; methodus, method ;
periodus, period; dialectus, dialect. 4th. Alvus, belly ; colus, distaff ;
humus, ground ; vannus, wheat-fan.
Neuters are : virus, venom ; pelagus, sea ; vulgus, the rdbble (sometimes
masculine).
31. Most masculines in r drop -us in the Nominative and e
in the Vocative Singular :
SINO. PLUR.
SING.
agar, field.
PLUR.
agri.
N. puer, boy. puerî.
G. pueri, puerorum.
D. puerö, pueris.
Ac. puerum, pueros.
V. puer, pueri.
Abl. puero, pueris.
agri,
agro,
ager,
agro,
agrum.
agris.
agros,
agri.
agris.
agrorum.
DECLENSION CE ADJECTIVES.
17
32. The e belongs to the stem, and is retained through all the cases in
adulter, adulterer ; alter, the other ; asper, rough ; dexter, on the right
(which has either dextri or dexteri) ; exter, outside ; gener, son-in-law ;
gibber, hump-backed ; lacer, torn; liber,lüber, god of wine ; miser,
wretched ; prosper, lucky ; puer, hoy ; socer, father-in-law ; tener, soft ;
vesper, evening ; and in words ending in -fer and -ger, from fero, I hear,
and gero, I carry, as, signi fer, standard-hearer, armi ger, armor-hearer.
Iber and Oeltiber (names of nations) have in the Plural Ibërî and
Celtiberi.
In other words, the e is inserted only in the Nominative and Vocative
Singular.
33. Declension of Adjectives in -us, -a, -uin.
Bonus, bona, bonum, good.
M. F. N.
SING.—N. bonus, bona, bonum.
G. boni, bonae, boni.
D. bond, bonae, bono.
Ac. bonum, bonam, bonum.
V. bone, bona, bonum.
Abl. bonS, bona, bonS.
M. F. N.
PLUR.—boni, bonae, bona.
bonörum, bonärum, bonörum.
bonis, bonis, bonis.
bonQs, bonas, bona,
boni, bonae, bona,
bonis, bonis, bonis.
34.
Miser, misera, miserum, wretched.
SINGULAR.
n. miser, misera,
G. miseri, miserae,
D. miserS, miserae,
Ac. miserum, miseram, miserum.
V. miser,
Abl. miserS,
misera,
misera,
ÄURAL.
miserum. miseri, miserae, misera,
miseri. miserorum, miserarum, miserbrum.
miserS. miseris, miserls, miserls.
miserbs, miseras, misera,
miserum. miseri, miserae, misera,
miserb. miserls, miseris, miserls.
SING.—N. piger, pigra, pigrum
G. pigri, pigrae, pigri.
D. pigrb, pigrae, pigrb.
Ac. pigrum, pigram, pigrum.
V. piger, pigra, pigrum.
Piger, pigra, pigrum, slow.
PLUR.—pigri, pigrae, pigra.
pigrbrum, pigrarum, pigrbrum.
pigris, pigris, pigris.
pigrbs, pigras, pigra,
pigri, pigrae, pigra,
pigris, pigris, pigris.
Abl. pigrb, pigra, pigro.
35. The following have Genitive Singular in -lus, and Dative
Singular in 1 :
ünus, ullus,
solus, totus,
uter, alter,
nullus, one, any, none.
alius, sole, whole, other,
neuter, which of the two, one of the two, neither.
Eemakk.—In poetry, the i of the Genitive ending -ius is often shortened,
except in alius (rare), sôlîus, utrius, neutrius. For alius use alienus (adj.).
18
THIRD DECLENSION.
BING.—N. nuUus, nulla, nullvun, none. alius, alia, aliud, otíier,
G. nullius, nullius, nullius. alius, alius, alius.
D. nulli, nulli, nullL alii, alii, aliL
Ac. nullum, nullam, nulliun. alium, aliam, aliud.
Abi. nuUö, nulla, null5. alio, aliä, aliö.
The Plural is regular. Regular forms of the G. and D. sing, occur, but
rarely.
Third Declension.
36. The stem ends in a consonant, or the close vowels i and u.
37. The stems are divided according to their last letter, called
the stem-characteristic, following the subdivisions of the letters
of the alphabet :
I.—Consonant Stems. H.—Vowel Stems.
A. Liquid stems, ending in 1, m, n, r. 1. Ending in i.
B. Sibilant stems, ending in s. 2. Ending in u.
Í1. Ending in a P-mute, b, p. (Compare the Fourth
2. Ending in a K-mute, c, g. Declension.)
3. Ending in a T-mute, d, t.
38. The sign of the Nominative Singular, masculine and
feminine, is s, which, however, is dropped after 1, Û, r, s.
The Nominative Singular undergoes various changes.
The Vocative is like the Nominative. In the other cases, the
endings are added to the unchanged stem.
the Nominative without the case-
ending s.
oo A 1 p the Accusative and Vocative cases
39. hi enters always form ^ i i i
in both numbers like the
Nominative.
the Nominative Plural in ä.
Remark.—Onginally coincident with the Dative, the Locative of the Third Declension
was finally blended with Ablative, both in form and in syntax. In the names of nouns
the old form is frequently retained : EartllSginl, at Carthage., SulmQnl, at Sulmo. Ac¬
cording to some, rûri, in the country, is an Ablative.
I.—Consonant Stems.
A.—LIQUID STEMS.
1. Liquid stems in 1.
40. Nominative without s, as, consul, the consul.
THIRD DECLENSION.
19
sing.—N. consul, consul. plur.—^N. consul-es, the consuls.
Qt. consul-is, Gr. consul-um.
D. consul-i, D. consul-ibus.
Ac. consul-em, Ac. consul-es.
V. consul, V. consul-is.
Abl. consul-e, Abl. consul-ibus.
Rule of Gender.—Stems in 1 are masculine : sol, the sun, sôlis ;
6äl, salt, sâlis.
Exceptions.—Neuters are : mel, honey, mellis ; fel, gall, fellis.
2. Liquid stems in m.
41. Nominative with s. One example only: liiem(p)s, winter ;
Genitive, hiem-is ffem.).
3. Liquid stems in n.
42. The Nominative Singular of masculine and feminine stems
is formed without s, drops the n of the stem, and ends in ö.
The Genitive Singular has, in some nouns, -onls; in others,
-ïnis.
The Nominative Singular of the neuter stems retains the n,
and terminates in -ën.
The Genitive Singular of neuters ends in -inis.
sing.
>. mascttlinb.
feminine.
neuter.
—N.
leö, lion.
imagS, likeness.
nômen, name.
G.
leon-is.
imägin-is.
nômin-is,
D.
leon-i.
imägin-i.
nömin-i.
Ac.
leon-em.
imägin-em.
nömen.
V.
leo.
imägö.
nômen.
Abl.
leon-e.
imagine.
nômin-e.
—N.
le5n-es.
imâgin-ës.
nômin-a,
G.
leon-um.
imägin-um.
nôxnin-um.
D.
leon-ibus.
imägin-ibus.
nômin-ibus.
Ac.
le5n-es.
imâgin-ës.
nômin-a.
V.
le5n-es.
imâgin-ës.
nômin-a,
Abl. leon-ibus.
imâgin-ibus.
nômin-ibus.
Remares.—1. Nouns in -do and -go have in the Genitive -inis, whilst
the rest in -o have -5nis; as, grando, haU, grandinis; virgo, maid,
virginis.
Exceptions.--Praedo, robber ; harpago, grappling-Twok ; ligo, tnattook, have önis
homo, man ; turbo, whirlwind, have ïnis.
20
third declension.
2. To the stems in n belong sanguis, blood, sanguin-is ; pollis,^wr, pollin
-is (both masc.). In these, n of the stem is dropped before s of the Nom.
3. Masculines in -en, Genitive mis, are: pecten, comb, and the personal
designations : tibicen, fluier ; tubicen, trumpeter ; cornicen, horn-blower ;
and flamen, priest.
Masculines in -en, -enis, are only : splen and liën^ spleen, and the Plural
renes, kidneys.
44. Rules of Gender:—
1. Masculine are nouns in -o, save those in -do, -go, and -io,
With fiesli: but ordo, cardo, are masculine, with ligo,
margo ;
Addharpago, and in -io, all concrete nouns likepügio.
ordo, rarúc ; cardo, hinae ; ligo, mattock ; margo, horder ; harpago, grappling-
hook; pûgio, dagger ; vespertilio, hat; \\\xo,fird)rand.
2. Nouns in -en (men) are neuter. See exceptions 43, 3.
4. Liquid stems in r.
45. Nominative vrithout s.
Kemark.—In several words in -br and -ür, the r has arisen from s.
Hence, labös, as well as labbr, toil ; robus and röbür, oak ; vomis and
vomer, ploughshare.
MASCtJLINR.
e. passer, sparrow.
passer-is.
0, labor, toü.
labör-is.
pater,
patr-is.
orator,
5rätör-is.
father,
speaker.
NEUTER.
cadaver, dead body.
cadaver-is.
u. fur,
fur-is.
thief.
vultur, mXture.
vultur-is.
robur,
r5bor-is.
fulgur,
fulgur-is.
oak.
lightning.
46- Words in -ter, syncopate, i. e., leave out the e, except later, brick,
later-is.
SINGULAR.
N. labor, toil.
G. labör-is,
D. labor-i,
Ac. labor-em,
V labor,
Ahl. labor-e.
PLURAL
labôr-ës.
labör-um.
labör-ibus.
labôr-ës.
labôr-ës.
labôr-ibus.
SINGXn,AR.
pater, father.
patr-is,
patr-î,
patr-em,
pater,
patr-e.
PLURAL.
patr-ës.
patr-um.
patr-ibus.
patr-ës.
patr-ës.
patr-ibus
47- Rules of Gender.—Words in -er and -or are masculine
those in -nr, neuter.
THIED DECLENSION.
21
Exceptions.—The only feminine is arbor.
Neuters are : far, nectar, marmor,
Aequor, iter, acer, piper,
Verber, über, ver, cadaver.
Ador, tüber, and papa ver.
acer, maple ; ador, spdt ; aequor, sea ; arbor, tree ; cadaver, dead, body ; far, ^It,
marmor, marble; nectar, nectar; piper, ; papa ver, poppy; tüber, tumor;
fiber, teat; v5r, spring.
Furfur, is masculine, and so are names of animals in -ur.
B.—SIBILANT STEMS.
48. The Nominative has no additional s.
In the other cases, the s of the stem passes over, between two
vowels, into r.
Instead of the final stem-vowel e, the Nominative of Mascu¬
lines has 1.
Instead of the final stem-vowels e and o, the Nominative of
neuters has u.
Remare.—S is retained throughout in the neuter : vas, disJi, vasis.
SS occurs in äs, a copper, genitive assis (mase.), and os, hone, ossis (neut.).
Gen. Plur. assium, ossium (originally i-stems).
49 SINGULAB. PLURAL. 8IKGULAB. PLURAL.
N. A. V. genus, kind. gener-a. corpus, body, corpor-a.
G. gener-is, gener-um. corpor-is, corpor-um.
D. gener-ï, gener-ibus. corpor-ï, corpor-ibus.
Ahl. gener-e, gener-ibus. corpor-e, corpor-ibus.
50. Rule of Gender.—Masculine are nouns in -is (-eris), and
-öS, -oris : except ôs, mouth ; genitive 5ris, neuter.
Neuter are nouns in -us, genitive -eris, -oris, and in -ûs, -ûris ;
except tellûs, earth, tellûris, which is feminine ; and the mascu¬
lines, lepus, hare, leporis ; mûs, mouse, mûris. G. Pl. mûrium.
C.—MUTE STEMS.
51. AU masculines and feminines of mute stems have s in the
Nominative,
Most polysyllabic mute stems change their final vowel i into
e in the Nominative.
22
third declension.
A K-mute, combining with s, becomes x, as, pâc-s = päx, peace ;
reg-s = rex, hing.
A T-mute before s is dropped, as, aetat-s = aetas, age ; ped-s =
pes, foot.
52. Stems in a P-mute.
▲ k i o c
trab-s, beam, pleb-s, commons, stip-s, dole, princep-s, chief, (op-s), power.
trab-is (fem.) pleb-is (fem.) stip-is (fem.) princlp-is, op-is (fem.)
With consonant preceding the stem-characteristic :
Urb-s, dtp, urb-is (fern.) ; stirp-s, stock, stirp-is (fem.).
53. Stems in a "K-mute.
päx, peaae. rSx, king, radix, root. vox, voice. IxLx, light.
pac-is (fem.) rëg-is (mas.) râdîc-is (fem.) v5c-is (fem.) lûc-is (fem.)
fax, torch, grex, herd, sallx, wíí&w. judex, judge. dux, leader.
fac-is (fem.) grëg-is (mas.) salic-is (fem.) jüdic-is. due-is.
54. With consonant preceding the stem-characteristic :
Arx, citadel, arc-is (fem.) ; faix, sickle, falc-is (fern.).
Sing.—N.
priucep-s.
chief.
Pltjr.—^princip-ës,
G.
princip-is,
princip-tun,
D.
princip-ï,
princip-ibus,
Ac.
princip-em,
princip-ës,
V.
princep-s,
princip-ës.
Ahl.
princip-e,
princip-ibus.
Sing.—N.
rex,
king.
Plur.—rëg-ës,
G.
reg-is,
rëg-um,
D.
rëg-i,
rëg-ibus,
Ac.
rëg-em,
rëg-ës,
V.
rëx,
rëg-ës.
Ahl.
rëg-e,
rëg-ibus.
Bemabe.—All monosyllabic mute stems, with the characteristic pre¬
ceded by a consonant, have the Genitive Plural in -ium, as, urbium, of
dties; arcimn, of dtadels; montium, of mountains ; partium, of 'parts ;
noctium, of the nights. The polysyllabic stems also in -nt and -rt have
more frequently -ium, as, clientium, of clients; cohortium, of companies.
Stems in -at have sometimes both -um and -irun, as, cïvitâtum and cïvitâ-
tium. See 59, R. 3. Some monosyllabic stems preceded by a long vowel
have -ium in the Gen. Pl., some both -um and -ium. Notice fauc-ium,
fraud-ium ( um), laud-um (-ium), lit-ium and döt-ium (55). Some have no
Gen, PI. at all. 76, D.
THIRD DBCLENSION.
23
Stems in a T-mute,
65. A. Characteristic preceded by a vowel.
t. d.
a. aetSs, anas, duck. vas, baü.
aetSt-is, (fem.) anät-is, (fem.) vädis, (mase.)
e. qniSs, rest. pariSs, waU. hërës, Mr. pës, foot.
qniët-is, (fem.) pariët-is, (mase.) hërëd-is, (mase.) pëd-is, (mase.)
i. lis, suit. lapis, stow.
lit-is, (fem.) G. P. ium. lapïd-is, (mase.)
miles, soldier.
mllît-is.
0. sacerdSs, priest. custôs, keeper.
sacerdöt-is. custëd-is-
u. virtus, mardirms. palûs, hog. laus, praise.
virtdt-is, (fem.) palüd-is, (fera.) laudis, (fem.)
pëcus, sheep.
pecdd-is, (fem.)
56. B. Characteristic preceded by a consonant.
nt. irons, hrow. nd. frons, leafy hranclu
front-is, (fem.) frond-is, (fem.)
rt. pars, part. It. puis, porridge. rd. cor, heart.
part-is, (fem.) pult-is, (fem.) cord-is, (neut.)
et. nox, night. lac, milk.
nect-is, (fem.) lact-is, (neut.)
Sing.—n. aetas, age. Plub.—aetât-ës, Sing.—pës, foot. Plub.—ped-ës,
G. aetät-is, aetät-um, ped-is, ped-um,
D. aetät-i, aetät-ibus, ped-I, ped-ibus.
Ac. aetät-em, aetât-ës, ped-em, ped-ës,
Y. aetâs, aetât-ës, pës, ped-ës,
Abl. aetât-e, aetât-ibus. ped-e, ped-ibus.
57. Riile of Gender.—All mute stems, with Nominative in s,
are feminine. See 18.
Exceptions in a "K-mute.
Masculines are -unx and -ex,
Saving forfex, forpex, nex,
Iiëx, T^bëx, faex, and forms of prex.
faex, dregs. lex. law.
forfex, shears. nex, slaughter.
forpex, tongs. prece, with prayer.
deunx, cw. vibex, weal (better viblx.)
Calix, cwp, and fornix, arc\ are masculine. Calx, Jml, and calx, cTmlk.
vary.
24
THIED DECLENSION.
Exceptions in a T-mute.—Nouns in -ës, -ïtis, are masculine, as, csespes,
turf^ caespitis ; as are also pes, foot, and its compounds ; paries, wall : and,
of the nouns in -is, lapis, stone. Merges, -itis, sheaf is feminine.
Masculines in -ns are: mens, mountain; bridge ; fons, spring,
dens, tooth ; torrens, torrent ; rudens, rope.
Neuters are only : cor, heart, and lac, milk, which drop the character¬
istic ; and caput, head, capitis.
n.—Vowel Stems.
1.—VOWEL STEMS IN I.
58. Masculines and feminines form their ISTominative in s.
Some feminines change, in the Nominative, the stem-vowel i
into e.
Neuters change, in the Nominative, the stem-vowel 1 into e.
This e is generally dropped by polysyllabic neuters after 1 and r.
All stems in i have Genitive Plural in -ium.
All neuter stems in i have the Ablative Singular in i, and
Nominative Plural in -la.
Remarks.—The stems of Nominatives in -is and -es are easily distin¬
guished.
Consonant stems in -is and -es increase in the Genitive ; but vowel stems
iu i do not increase in the Genitive, as :
Consonant : lapis, stone ; Genitive, lapid-ls. miles, soldier ; Genitive, mllit-is.
Vowel : civis, (Atizen. clvis. nûbSs, doud. nübis.
59.
Sejg.—N.
G. Collis,
D. colli,
Ac. collem,
V. Collis,
Abi. colle,
m. i*.
colli-s, hïU. turri-s, tower.
turris, vulpis,
turrl, vulpl,
turrem (turri-m), vulpem.
p. N.
vulpBs,/oa;. mare, sea. animal, living being.
turris,
turre (turrl),
Plttb.—N. collës, turrSs,
G. colli-um, turri-um,
D. colli-bus, turri-bus,
Ac. collës, turrës,
V. collës, turrës,
Abl. colli-bus. turri-bus.
vulpës,
vulpe,
vulpës,
vulpi-um.
maris,
mari,
mare,
mare,
mari.
animâlis,
animâll,
animal,
animal,
animâll.
mari-a, animâli-a,
mari-um, animâli-um,
vulpi-bus, mari-bus, animâli-bus,
vulpës, mari-a, animâli-a,
vulpës, mari-a, animâli-a,
vulpi-bus. mari-bus. animâli-bus.
Rema.rks.—1. In Genitive Plural, -um instead of -ium.
Always in: juvenis, young; senex, old; cards, dog; vates, bard:
strues, heap ; panis, bread.
Usually in : apis, bee ; sedes, seat ; volucris, lùrd.
THIBD DECLENSION.
26
2. The Genitive Plural in -ium occurs in the apparently consonant
stems : imber, rain-storm ; üter, bottle ; venter, belly ; linter, skiff ; which
form the Nominative without s, dropping the i, and inserting e. Genitive,
imbris, ütris, ventris, lintris, All are masculine, except linter, which
is feminine. As, os, bone, mus (48) are properly i-stems. (G. PI. -iiun.)
3. Under the vowel stems in -i are sometimes classed those mute stems
which take -ium in the Gen. Plural ; urbi-um, monti-um. See 54, li.
60. Observations.—Several stems in i, with Nominative in
-is, have Accusative and Ablative Singular and Accusative
Plural in -un, I, Is, respectively :
1. The Accusative Plural in -Is occurs, side by side with -6s:
In all vowel stems in 1, which have Nominative Singular in -is ;
In mute stems, which have Genitive Plural in -ium.
2. The Accusative Singular in -Im is used :
a. Always in names of towns and rivers in is, as, Neapolis, Accusative,
Neâpolim; Tiberis, Accusative, Tiberimj and in yria, force; sitis, thirst ;
tussis, cough.
b. Usually in secüris, axe ; febris, ferer ; puppis, poop ; turris, tower.
3. The Ablative Singular in I is used :
a. In all nouns which have Accusative Singular invariably in -im, and
in ignis, fire, in the phrases, ferrö ignîque, aqua et ignï interdïcere. Nouns
which have Accusative in -im or -em have Ablative in ï or e.
b. In the neuter vowel stems, which have Nominative in ë, al, är. Names
of cities in -e have Ablative also in -e, as, Praeneste, Genitive, Praenestis.
c. In the adjective vowel stems of the Third Declension, as, facilis, easy ;
Ablative, facilï ; äcer, sharp ; Ablative, âcrî.
Rbmakk.---So also the adjectives of this class, when used as substantives by ellipsis:
annalis (sc. liber, ftooA;), chronicle; nätälis (sc. diës, day), birthday; Aprilis (sc. men-
sis, month), and all the other mouths of the Third Declension : Ablative, anuâlî, nätäll,
Aprlli, Septembri, etc.
Exceptions.—Juvenis, young man; and aedile; Ablative, juvene, aedlle.
A-djectives used as proper nouns have generally Ablative in -e, as, Juvenâlis ; Ablative,
Tuvenale.
61. Rule of Gender.—1. Of stems in i, Nominative in -is,
some are masculine, some feminine.
Masculine are :
Amnis, axis, callis, crïnis.
Cassis, Gaulis, fascis, fînis,
Fûnis, fustis, ignis, ensis,
Orbis, pänis, piséis, mensis,
Pestis, scrobis, büris, Collis,
Sentis, torquis, atque follis.
Terris, unguis et annälis,
Vectis, vermis et canälis.
26
THIRD DECLENSION.
amnis, rïmr.
axis, axle.
biiris, plough-tail.
callis, footpath.
canalis, canal.
cassés, toils.
Gaulis, stalk.
Collis, hill.
crînis, hair.
ensis, glaive.
fascis, fagot.
finis, end.
follis, bellows.
funis, rope.
fustis, cudgel.
ignis, Jtfí'e.
mensis, month.
orbis, cirde.
panis, bread.
piscis, fish.
postis, doorpost.
sentis, bramble.
scrobis, ditch.
torquis, necklace.
torris, fire-brand,
unguis, nail.
vectis, lever.
vermis, worm.
Callis, finis, scrobis, torquis, are used also as feminines.
Other nouns in -is, and all in -es, are feminine. Vepres, bramble, is
usually masculine.
2. Vowel stems, with. N"orainative in -e, -al, -ar, are neuter.
Remark.—Of the names of animals in -is, some are masculine ; tigris, tiger ; canis,
dog ; piscis, fish ; others feminine : apis, bee ; avis, lArd ; ovis, sheep ; fëlis, cat (usu¬
ally fëlës).
2. VOWEL STEMS IN U.
62. Of stems in u, only the monosyllabic belong to the Third
Declension.
Sing.—N. grüs
G. gruis
D. gruí
Ac, gru-em
V. grüs
Abi, gru-e
grüs, crane (fem.).
Plur.—gru-ës
gru-um
gru-ibus
gru-ës
gru-ës
gru-ibus.
Süs, swine, commonly fem., usually subus, in D. and Abl. Plural.
Table op Nominative and Genitive Endings op the Third Declension.
A * before the ending denotes that it occurs only in the one word cited.
63- A. NOMINATIVES ENDING WITH A LIQUID.
Nom.
Gen.
Nom.
Gen.
-al
-älis
animal.
animal.
-är
*-arris
fär.
spdt.
-àlis
Hannibal, proper name.
-ër
-eris
anser.
goose.
-äl
*-älis
sal,
salt.
-ris
pater.
father.
-el
-ellis
mel.
honey.
*-ineris
iter.
journey.
-il
-ilis
púgil.
boxer.
-ër
*-ëris
vër.
spring.
-ïlis
Tanaquil, proper name.
-ör
-oris
color.
color.
-51
*-51is
sol.
the sun.
-oris
aequor.
expanse.
-ul
-Ulis
consul.
consul.
*-ordis
cor.
heart.
-ën
-ënis
rën.
kidney.
-ür
-uris
fulgur.
lightning.
-en
-inis
nomen.
name.
-oris
röbur.
oak.
-ar
-âris
calcar.
spur.
-ür
-üris
für.
thief.
-aris
nectar.
nectar.
j
TUIRD DECLENSION.
27
04. B. NOMINATIVES ENDING WITH S, OR A COM¬
POUND OF S (GS, CS), X :
Nom.
Gen.
Nom.
Gen.
•äs
•ätis
aetas.
age.
-aus
-audis
&aus, cheatery. Gen.
♦-äsis
väs.
dish.
PI. fraudium.
*-aris
mäs.
male.
-Is
*-ltis
puls,
porridge.
*-assis
äs.
a copper.
-m(p)s
*-mis
hiems,
winter.
-äs
*-adis
vas.
surety.
-ns
-ndis
frons,
leafy branch.
*-atis
anas,
duck.
-ntis
frons.
forehead.
aes
*-aedis
praes,
surety.
-rs
-rdis
Concors,
concordant.
*-aeris
aes.
brass.
-rtis
pars.
part.
-ës
-is
nûbês.
cloud.
-bs
-bis
Urbs,
city.
*-eris
Cerës.
Ceres.
-ps
-pis
stirps.
stalk.
-edis
pës,
foot.
-ipis
princeps
, chief.
-etis
abiës,
fir.
*-upis
auceps.
fowler.
-etis
qui es,
rest.
-ax
-äcis
päx.
peace.
-ès
-etis
seges.
crop.
-ax
*-acis
fax.
torch.
-idis
obses.
hostage.
-ex
-icis
judex.
judge.
-itis
miles.
soldier.
-ecis
nex.
death.
-ïs
-is
amnis.
river.
-egis
grex,
fiock.
-idis
lapis.
stone.
*igis
rëmex.
rower.
-eris
cinis.
ashes.
-ëx
*-ecis
älex.
pickle.
-inis
sanguis, blood.
*-icis
Vibex(ix),weai (fem.)
-Is
*-itis
lis.
suit at law. Gen.
-ëgis
rix,
king.
PI. litium.
-ix
-icis
cervix.
neck.
*-iris
glis,
dormouse. Gen.
-ix
-icis
calix.
cup.
PI. glirium.
*-igis
strix.
screech-owl.
-öS
*-ôdis
custös.
keeper.
*-ivis
nix,
snow. Gen.
-Otis
cos.
whetstone.
PI. nivium.
-oris
flös.
fiower.
-öx
-öcis
vöx.
voice.
*-ovis
bös.
ox.
-ox
*ocis
praecox,
early-ripe.
-öS
-Otis
compos.
possessed of.
*-ogis
Allobrox.
*ossis
os.
bom.
*-octis
nox.
night.
-üs
*-udis
pecus.
cattle, sheep.
-ux
-ucis
crux.
cross.
*-utis
intercus, under the sJân.
-ugis
conjux.
spouse.
*-uris
Ligus,
a Liguñan.
-üx
-ücis
lux,
light.
-oris
corpus.
body.
-ügis
(früx,)
fruit.
-eris
scelus.
crime.
-aex
-aecis
faex.
dregs.
-üs
-uis
sûs.
swine.
-aux
-aucis
faux.
throat. Gen.
PI. faucium.
-üris
jus,
right.
-Ix
-Icis
faix.
sickle.
-üdis
incus.
anvil.
-nx
-neis
lanx.
dish.
-ütis
salüs.
weed.
-rx
-reis
arx.
citadd.
65. C. NOMINATIVES ENDING WITH A MUTE.
-ac *-actis lac, miVk.
-6c *-6cis âlëc, picMe.
-ttt ♦-itis caput, head.
28
FOURTH DECLENSION.
66. D. NOMINATIVES ENDING WITH A VOWEL.
-e -Í3 mare, sea.
-5nis pavo, peacock.
-onis Saxo, Saxon.
-inis homo, man.
♦-nis caro, flesh.
Fourth Declension.
67. The Fourth Declension embraces only dissyllabic and
polysyllabic stems in u.
The endings are those of the Third Declension.
In the Genitive and Ablative Singular, and the Nominative,
Accusative, and Vocative Plural (sometimes, too, in the Dative
Singular), the u of the stem absorbs the vowel of the ending,
and becomes long, as fructu-is becomes fructûs, of fruit ; finictu-e
becomes fructû, from fruit ; fnictu-es becomes fructûs, fruits.
This u, on the contrary, is lost before the ending -thus in the
Dative and Ablative Plural.
The Accusative Singular, as always in vowel stems, has the
ending m, without a connecting vowel (compare the Accusative
in -im of the stems in i), hence u-m.
masculine. neuter.
Sing.—N. fructu-8,Pl. fructûs, cornû, Tiorn. Pl. comu-a,
G. fructûs, fructu-um, cornus, cornu-um,
D. fructu-i (fructû), fructibus, cornû, cornibus,
Ac. fi:uctu-m, fructûs, cornû, cornu-a,
V. fructus, fructûs, cornû, comu-a,
Abl. fructû, fructibus, cornû, cornibus.
Remakks.—1. Dative and Ablative Plurals in -ubus occur in nouns in
-cus, and in tribus, tribe; stxtw&j joint ; partus, childbirth ; portus, harbor ;
ûnus, fold.
2. Domus, home., Ablative Singular, domo ; Genitive Plural, domuum
and domorum ; Accusative Plural, domus and domos. Domî (a locative
form) means, at home.
68. Rule of Gender.—Nouns in -us are masculine ; those in
-Û are neuter.
Exceptions.—^Feminines are îdûs, pl., the 15iä day of the month, tribus,
tribe, porticus, piazza, acus, needle, manus, hand, domus, house.
FIFTH DECLENSION.
29
Fifth Declension.
69- The stem ends in e. Nominative in s.
MASCULINB.
FEMININE.
-N.
dië-s, day. Pl. dië-s.
tíing. rë-s, thing.
Pl. rë-s.
G.
dië-ï, dië-rum.
re-î,
rë-rum.
D.
dië-x, dië-bus.
re-ï.
rë-bus.
Ac.
die-m, dië-s.
re-m.
rë-s.
V.
dië-s, dië-s.
rë-s.
rë-s.
Abi.
dië, dië-bus.
rë.
rë-bus.
Kemabks.—1. The Plural is used throughout in three words only : res,
thing ; dies, day ; and in later Latin, species, appearance. In some words,
only Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Plural occur ; others have no
Plural at all.
2. The stem-characteristic e, in the Genitive and Dative Singular, is
long after a vowel and short after a consonant, as species, Genitive specie! ;
res, thing, G. reí. Contraction into -ë sometimes occurs : diiï, G. D. die.
3. Some nouns of the Fifth Declension have a secondary form, which
follows the First Declension, as mollities, softness, and mollitia. Where
the double form exists, only Nominative, Accusative, and Ablative Singu¬
lar commonly follow the Fifth Declension.
70. Rule of Gender.—Koiins of the Fifth Declension are
feminine, except dies (which in the Singular is of the common
gender, and in the Plural masculine), and the masculine merî-
diës, mid-day.
Declension of Gkeek N'ouns.
71. Greek substantives, especially proper names, are com¬
monly Latinized, and declined regularly according to their
stem-characteristic. Many nouns, however, either retain their
Greek form exclusively, or have the Greek and Latin forms side
by side.
72. singulae Foems of Geeek ivouns.
I. II.
N. Pënelopë, LeSnidäs, Anchisës, Dëlos (us), Ilion (um).
G. Pënelopës, Leonidae, Anchisae, Dëli, Iliî.
D. Pënelopae, Leonidae, Anchisae, Dëlô, |li5.
Ac. Pënelopën, Leënidam (au), Anchîsën (am), Dëlon (um), Ilion (um).
Y. Pënelopë, Leönidä, Anchîsë, ä, ä, Dële, Ilion (um).
Abi. Pënelopâ. Leönidä. Anchisä. Dëlô. îliô.
30
GREEK NOUNS.
ii.
N. Pantllüs,
Q. Panthi,
D, Pantho,
A.c. Pantliüii,
V. Panthü,
Abi. Pantho.
n. ni.
m.
Androgeôs (us), Athos,
Androgeî, Athô, ônis,
Androgeô,
Androgeôn,
ô, ôna,
Androgeôs, Athos,
Androgeô. Athône-
Orphëus, Solôn, Solo,
Orphei (êi), Solônis.
Athô, Orpheô, Solônî.
Athô, ôn, ônem, Orpheum (ea), Solôna (em).
Orpheu,
Orpheô.
Solôn.
Solône.
N. Aër, air.
G. Âeris,
D. Âerï,
Ac. Aera (em),
V. Âër,
Abi. Aere.
Xenophön, Atlas,
Xenophôntis, Atlantis,
Xenophôntî, Atlantî,
Xenophônta Atlanta,
(em),
Xenophôn, Atlâ,
Xenophônte. Atlante.
Thalës, Paris.
ThalSíi?, is, Paridis, os.
Thal?ß, î, Paridi, i.
Thalé^a, ën, em. Paréela, im, in.
Thalë,
Thalë.
Pari, Paris.
Paride-
N. Oedipüs, Achillës, eus, Sôcratës, Dîdô, hërôs.
G. Oedipocii^. î, Achillis, eî, i, Sôcratis, ï, Dîdûs, ônis, hërôis.
eôs,
D. Oedipodî, Achillî, Sôcrati, Dîdô, ônî, hërôl.
Aa Oedipum (oda), Achillem, ea, Sôcratën, em, Dîdô, ônem, hërôa, em.
ën,
V. Oedipe, Achillës, ë, ëû, Sôcratë (es), Dîdô, hërôs.
Abl. Oedipocié. ô- Achille. Sôcrate. Dîdô, ône. hërôe.
Remarks.—1. Many other forms are found, for which the dictionaries
must be consulted. So poësis, G. poësis, eos, D. poësî, Acc. poësin, poesy.
Many of them are transliterations of Greek words, quoted as Greek.
2. In transferring Greek nouns into Latin, the Accusative Singular was
sometimes taken as the stem.
So nparrjfj, Acc. xparifpa, {punch) howl.
crâtër, crâtëris (mase.), and crâtëra (crëterra) crâtërae (fem.)
'SaXapí'í, Acc. 'SaXapïva, Salamis.
Salamis, Salamïnis, and Salamîna, ae.
73. Plural Forms of Greek Nouns.
N. Pl. -ce : canëphoroe, hasTcet-hearers.
-ë : epë, epic poetry.
-es : Arcades, Arcadians. How often in prose we can¬
not tell.
G, Pl. -5n : Geörgicön, of the Georgics. In Titles of Books, so
-eon : Metamorphöseön, of the Metamorphoses.
D. Pl. -si : Liëmniasï (rare), to the Lemnian women.
Acc. Pl. -äs : Macedonas. Common even In words that are not
Greek : Allobrogas.
lEEEGULAE NOUNS.
31
Ieeegular Nouks.
74. I. Redundant Nouns.
ABUNDANTIA.
A. Different genders in the same declension :
baculus, baculum,
balteus, balteum,
clipeus, clipeum,
calamister, calamistrum,
B. Change of declension :
1.1st and 2d. esseda, ae, essedum, I.
vespera, ae, vesper, ï,
düritia, ae, dûritiës,
materia, ae, mâteriës,
diluvium, I, dîluviës,
ëveutum, I, ëveutus, üs,
plëbs, is, plëbës, ei.
2. 1st and 5th.
3. 2d and 5th.
4. 2d and 4th.
5. 3d and 4th.
6. 3d and 2d.
staff.
sword-hdi.
shield.
curling-iron.
war-chariot, gig.
evening.
hardness.
stuff.
flood.
issue.
commons.
tribüuus plëbî, tribune of the people.
imbëcillis, imbëcillus,
And a few others (adjectives).
weak.
75.
II. Defective Nouns.
1. NOUNS DEFECTIVE IN NUMBER.
A. Nouns used in Singular only : Singularia tantum.
Most abstract nouns, and names of materials :
jiistitia, justice, aurum,
B. Nouns used in Plural only : Plürälia tantum.
gold.
angustiae, straits
arma, orum, arms,
bigae, quadrigae, two-horse, four-horse chariot.
casses, lum,
cervicës, um,
dîvitiae,
epulae (epulum),
forës, um, f.
babënae,
indütiae.
llberl, children.
mânës, shades of the dead,
minae, threats.
moenia, ium, N. tomrv-wall.
nuptiae, wedding.
SCälae, stairway.
tenebrae, darkness.
valvae, folding-doors.
viscera, entrails.
toils {snare),
neck (preferred to cervix),
riches,
banquet,
door,
reins,
truce.
Kalendae, NSnae, îdûs. Calends, Nones^ Ides.
ambâgës, -um, round about,
compedës, -ium,. fetters.
These four have the Ablative Singular in -e; ambäge, COmpede, fauce, prece.
Akin to Plürälia tantum are :
C. Nouns used in Plural with a special sense : Heterologa.
aedës, is, temple, (better aedis) aedës, ium, house, palace.
auxilium, help, auxilia, auxiliaries, reinforcements.
Castrum, fort, castra, camp.
fauces -ium, f., guUet.
precës -um, f., prayer.
32
ieeegxjlae nouns.
copia, aJmndance, copiae, forces, troops.
finis, end, limit, fînSs, territory, borders.
litera, letter (of the alphabet). literae, epistle, literature.
opera, work, operae, workmen.
76. 2. NOUNS DEFECTIVE IN CASE.
A. Used only in Nominative and Accusative Singular : fas, right, nefas,
wrong, and Greek Neuters in -os.
B. In Ablative Singular: Bronte, of free will, and many verbals in ü:
promptù, in readiness ; jussü, hy order ; monitù, by advice.
C. In tbe oblique cases tbe forms from :
(daps), t., feast, S. and PI. (ops), f., help (No Dat.), S. and Pl.
(dicio), f., sway, S. (vix), f., change (No Dat.), S. and Pl.
(frûx), f., fmit, S. and Pl.
D. The Genitive Plural of many monosyllabic words does not occur :
cos, whetstone, liix, light, 5s, mouth.
"Vis, force : G. and D. are wanting ; Ac. vim; Abl. vi. Pl. vires, virium,
viribus.
nemo, nobody : G. nullius hominis ; D. nëmini ; Ac. neminem ; Abi.
nuUö homine.
77. III. Vakiable Nouns.
A. Hetekoclites : Different stems with the same Nominative.
domus (domu- and domo ) ; Ahl. domS ; Pl. G. domuum, domdrum ; Acc. domûs
and domos.
pecas (pecad- and pecor-), pecudis, sheep ; pecoris, cattle.
ficus, fig-tree ; laurus, bay-tree ; pinus, pine-tree ; are declined regularly
according to the Second Declension, but have secondary forms in use
from the Fourth Declension in the Ablative Singular, and in the Nomina¬
tive and Accusative Plural.
senatus, senate ; G. senätüs or senati (rare),
requies, -ëtis, f. : Ac. requiëtem and requiem, rest.
famës, -is ; Ahl. fame and famë, hunger.
satrapës, G. satrapae and satrapis ; D. satrapae, &c., Persian governor.
78. B. Heterogeneous Nouns have the same stem with different
gender in Singular and Plural :
Singular. Plural.
frënam, bridle. frëni, and frëna.
jocas, jest. joci, and joca,
locas, place. ( loca, localities.
' loci, passages in books, topics.
rästrum, mattock. rastri, and rastra.
ADJECTIVES OP THIRD DECLENSION.
33
79- C. Metaplasts are nouns which have isolated cases from another
than the Nominative stem :
vas, väsis, n., vessel. PI. vasa, väsörum, väsis (as if from vaso-),
poema, poëmatis, n., "poem. Pl. poëmata, poëmatum, ïbus.
G. poëmatorum, D. poëmatis (as if from poëmato-).
So all Greek nouns in -a, -atis.
Bacchanalia, -ium (-iorum), -ibiis,/ea«¿ of Bacchus.
So several other names of feasts in -ia.
80. iv.
Anio, G. Aniënis, the (river) Anio.
as, assis, m., a copper.
auceps, aucupis,/otffer.
bSs (bovs), bovis, c., ox, cow.
G. PI. boum.
D. Abl. bubus. bSbus.
caput, capitis, n., head.
So anceps, ancipitis, two-headed.
praeceps, -cipitis, headlong.
caro, carnis (for carinis), t, flesh.
G. PI. carnium,
Cerës, Cereris, Ceres.
för, farris, u., spdt.
fel, fellis, n., gall.
femur, femoris, n., thigh.
feminis.
vrities.
iter, itineris, n., way, route.
jecur, jecoris, n., liver.
jecinoris.
Júpiter (for Jov(i)piter), Jovis.
mel, mellis, n., honey.
nix=(s)nig(v)s, ni vis, f., snow.
OS, ossis, n., bone.
ÖS, Öris, n., mouth.
pollis, pollinis, Tü..,jkmr.
sanguis, sanguinis, m., blood.
senex, senis, old man.
supellex, supellectilis, î.,furniture.
Venus, Veneris, Venus.
Adjectives of the Third Declension.
81. The declension of the adjectives of the Third Declension
follows the rules given for the substantives.
Most of the adjectives of the Third Declension are vowel
stems in i. They form the masculine and feminine alike, with
Nominative in s; but the neuter Nominative weakens the char¬
acteristic i into e. (Compare mare, sea.)
Adjectives op Two Endings.
82. Several stems in i, preceded by r (cr, tr, br), form the
Nominative masculine, not by affixing s, but by dropping the i
and inserting e short before the r, as, stem acri, sharp, Nom.
Mase, âcer, Nom. Fem. äcris. (Compare 60, 3 c.)
The e belongs to the stem only in celer, celeris, celere, swift.
2*
34
ADJECTIVES OP THIRD DECLENSION.
Masc. and Fem. Neüter.
Sing.—N. facili-s, easy. facile,
G. faoilis,
D. facili,
Ac. facilem, facile,
V. facilis, facile,
Abl. facilî.
Mabc.
acer,
âcris,
äcri,
äcrem,
äcer,
äcri.
Fem.
äcri-s.
acns,
Neuteb.
acre.
acre,
acre.
PLUR.—N.
G.
D.
Ac.
V.
faciles,
facili-um,
facili-bus,
faciles,
faciles.
Abl. facili-bus.
facili-a, acres,
facili-a,
facili-a,
acri-vun,
âcri-bus,
acres,
acres,
âcri-bus.
acri-a.
acn-a.
âcri-a.
83. The consonant stems have the same forms in all the
genders, except that in the Accusative Singular, and in the
Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Plural, the neuter is
distinguished from the masculine and feminine.
Sing.—n.
G.
D.
Ac.
V.
Abl.
peub.—n.
G.
D.
Ac.
V.
Abl, fëlic-ibus,
M.and F.
fëlïx, lucky^
fëlic-is,
fëlic-ï,
fëlic-em,
fëlîx,
fëlici (and -e),
M. and P.
fëlïc-ës,
fëlic-ium,
fëlic-ibus,
fëlic-ës,
fëlic-ës,
N. M. and F. N. M. and F,
fëlîx, prûdens, wise., prûdens, vêtus, old,
prûdent-is, veter-is,
prûdent-I, veter-i,
fëlix, prûdent-em, prûdens, veter-em,
prûdens, vêtus,
prûdentî (and e), veter-e (or i)
N. M. and F. N. M. and F.
fêlîcia, prûdent-ës, prûdentia, veter-ës,
prûdentium, veter-um,
prûdent-ibus, veter-ibus,
fëlîcia, prûdent-ës, prûdentia, veter-ës,
fëlicia, prûdent-ës, prûdentia, veter-ës,
prûdent-ibus, veter-ibus.
N.
vêtus.
vêtus.
N.
veter-a
veter a
veter-a
Adjectives of One Ending.
84. Adjective stems of one ending close with 1, r, s, or a p,
k, or t mute.
vigil, alert, memor, mindf ul, pauper, poor, cicur, tame, pûbës, adult, vetus, old.
vigil-is,
memor-is,
Abl. i (e).
particep s, sharing,
particip-is, Abl. e.
audax, bold, fëlix, lucky,
audac-is. fëlîc-is.
pauper-is,
Abl. e.
cicur-is,
Abl. e.
pûber-is,
Abl. e.
veter-is.
oaeleb-s, unmarried,
' caelib-is, Abl. e.
duplex, double,
duplic-is.
ietQ-%., fierce,
feröc-is.
inop-s, poor.
inop-is, Abl. i (e).
trux, savage.
truc-is.
COMPARISON OP ADJECTIVES.
35
dives, ricA, dëses, slothful, compos, possessed of, prüdens, wise, Concors, harmonious.
divit-is, desid-is, compot-is, prüdent-is, concord-is,
Abl. e. Abl. e. Abl. e. Abl. 6.
85. Observations.—The adjectives of one ending, including
the present participle, follow in part the declension of vowel
stems :
1. In the neuter Plural they have -la; only vetus, old, has
Vetera. Many have no neuter.
2. In the Ablative Singular they have I and e—when used as
adjectives commonly I; when used as substantives commonly e.
The participles, as such, have e; but used as nouns or adjec¬
tives, either e or I, with tendency to I.
3. In the Genitive Plural the consonant-stems have: -ium,
when the characteristic is preceded by a long vowel or a con¬
sonant; -tun, when the characteristic is preceded by a short
vowel, as :
audax, lx)ld,
audacium,
supplex, suppliant,
supplicnm,
caelebs, unmarried,
caelibom.
Exceptions occur, as :
multiplex, manifold, multiplicium. Phoenices, Phoenicians, Pboenlcum.
The participles have -ium; as, amans, loving, amantium.
Used as nouns, tkey have sometimes -urn, as :
sapiens, a sage, sapientum. parens, a parent, parentum.
4. Compound adjectives follow the declension of the word
from which they are formed, as :
Concors, harmonious, anceps, double, quadrupés,/<wír/oo¿éíí,
concordum, ancipitum, quadrupedum.
Even these, however, have the neuter plural commonly in -ia, as, anoi-
pitia, quadrupedia.
Comparison of Adjectives.
86. The Degrees of comparison are : Positive, Comparative,
and Superlative.
prüdens, wise.
prûdentium,
dives, rich.
divitum or ditum.
compos, possessed of,
compotum,
Samnltës, Samnites.
Samnltium.
memor, mindful.
memorum.
38
ADVERBS.
ADVEEBS.
90. Adverbs are either oblique cases or mutilated forms of
oblique cases of the adjectives.
1. Adjectives in -us and -er form the adverb in ë (mutilated
Ablative).
altus, lofty^ alte, pulcher, beautiful, pulchre. miser, wretched, misaré.
2. The adjectives of the Third Declension form their adverbs by adding
-ter to the stem ; stems in -nt dropping the t, and stems in a K-mnte in¬
serting the connecting vowel i before the ending.
fortis, brave, fortiter. feröx, icild, feröciter. -prüdi&DB,foreseeing, prüdenter.
Exceptions :
audäx, hold, audäc-ter (seldom audäciter). difldcilis, hard to do, dificultar and
dificiliter.
But instead of these, generally, non facile, vix, aegrg.
3. The Ablative of some adjectives serves as an adverb:
tûtus, safe, tütö ; falso, falsely ; perpetuó, ceaselessly ; continuo, forth¬
with ; improvisé, unexpectedly ; primé, at first.
consulté and consulté, purposely ; certé, at least, and certé, certainly.
râré, thinly, and râré, seldom ; véré, in truth, and véré, true but.
recté, correctly, and recta, straightway : dextera or dexträ, to the right,
and dexteré, skillfully.
sinistra and laeVa, to the left hand.
4. The Accusative neuter of many adjectives is used as an
adverb. This is true of all Comparatives.
Multum, much ; paulum, a little ; nimium, too much ; céterum, for th.6
rest ; primum, first ; postrémum, finally ; potissimum, chiefly ; facile,
easily ; dulce, sweetly ; triste, sadly ; impune, scot-free.
91 ■ Comparison of Adverbs.
Positive.
Comparative.
Superlative.
alte,
loftily.
altius.
altissimë.
pulchrë,
beautifully.
pulcbrius.
pulcberrimë.
miserë.
poorly.
miserius.
miserrimë-
fortiter,
bravely.
fortius.
fortissimë.
audäcter,
boldly.
audacius,
audâcissimë-
tütö,
safely.
tutius,
tûtissimë.
facile,
easily.
facilius.
facillimë-
bene.
well.
melius,
optimë-
male.
ill.
pejus,
pessimë.
[parvus].
small,
minus, less.
minimë, least.
[magnus], great.
magis, more.
maximë, most.
multum,
much.
plus, more.
plürimum.
cito.
quickly.
citius.
citissimë-
diû,
long.
diutius.
diûtissimë.
saepe,
often.
saepius.
saepissimë.
nüper,
recently.
nûperrimë.
satis,
enough.
satius, better.
NUMERALS.
39
ÍÍUMEEALS.
Numeral Adjectives.
92. The Cardinal numerals are indeclinable, except: ünns,
one, duo, two, très, three, the hundreds beginning with ducentl,
two hundred, and the plui-al milia, thousands, which forms
milium and milibus.
N. duo, two,
G. duorum,
D. duöbus,
A. duos, duo.
Ab. duöbus.
duae, duo,
duärum, duorum,
duabus, duöbus,
duäs, duo,
duäbus, duöbus.
Like duo is declined ambo, -ae, -o, both.
93. 1. Cardinal Numbers.
très,
trium.
tribus.
tres,
tribus.
2. Ordinal Numbers.
tria.
tria.
1
I
ûnus, ûna, ünum
primus, -a, -um (prior).
2
II
duo, duae, duo
secundus (alter).
3
III
très, tria
tertius
4
IV
quattuor
quartus
5
V
quinqué
quintus
6
VI
sex
sextus
7
VII
Septem
septimus
8
VIII
octo
octâvus
9
IX
novem
nönus
10
X
decem
decimus
11
XI
undecim
undecimus
12
XII
duodeoim
duodecimus
13
XIII
tredecim
tertius decimus
14
XIV
quattuordeoim
quartus decimus
15
XV
quindecim
quintus decimus
16
XVI
sëdecim
sextus decimus
17
XVII
septendeoim
septimus decimus
18
XVIII
duodëvïginti
duodëvîcësimus
19
XIX
undëvigintî
undëvîcësimus
20
XX
vîginti
vîcësimus
21
XXI
vîgintï ûnus
vîcësimus primus
22
XXII
vigfintî duo
vîcësimus secundus
23
XXIII
vîginti trës
vîcësimus tertius
24
XXIV
vîgintï quattuor
vîcësimus quartus
25
XXV
vîgintî quinqué
vîcësimus quintus
26
XXVI
vîgintï sex
vîcësimus sextus
40
NÜMEEALS.
I. Cardinal Numerals.
2. Ordinal Numerals.
27
XXVII
vîgintî Septem
vîcësimus Septimus
28
XXVIII
duodëtrîgintâ
duodëtrîcësimus
29
XXIX
undëtrîgintâ
undëtrîcësimus
30
XXX
trîgintâ
trîcësimus
40
XL
quadrâgintâ
quadrâgësimus
50
L
quinquâgintâ
quinquâgësimus
60
LX
sexägintä
sexâgësimus
70
LXX
septMägintä
septuâgësimus
80
LXXX
octiigintâ
octôgësimus
90
XC
nönägintä
nônâgësimus
100
C
centum
centësimus
101
CI
centum et ûnus
centësimus prîmus [mus
115
CXV
centum et quindecim
centësimus et quintus deci-
120
CXX
centum et vîgintî
centësimus vîcësimus [mus
121
CXXI
centum et vîgintî ûnus centësimus vîcësimus prî-
200
CO
ducentî, -ae, -a
ducentësimus
300
CGC
trecentî
trecentësimus
400
CCCC
quadrt«,gen1i
quadringentësimus
500
i>(io)
quingenil
quingentësimus
600
DC
seècenti
sescentësimus
700
DCC
septmgentî
septingentësimus
800
DCCC
octùigentî
octingentësimus
900
DCCCC
wongentî
nongentësimus
1000
M (Cío)
mille
millësimus
1001
MI
mille et ûnus
millësimus prîmus
1101
MCI
mille centum ûnus
millësimus centësimus prî-
1120 MCXX
1121 MCXXI
1200 MCC
2000 MM
2222
5000 loo
10.000 ccioo
21,000
100,000
mille centum vlginti
[ûnus
mille centum vïgintï
mille ducentî
duo mîlia (millia) "
bina mîlia
duo mîlia ducentî vï¬
gintï duo
quinqué n^a
quîna mîlia
decem mîlia
dëna mîlia
ûnum et vîgintî nülia
centum mîlia
centena mîlia
deciês centena mîlia
mus
millësimus centësimus vî-
cësimus [cësimus prîmus
millësimus centësimus vî-
millësimus ducentësimus
bis millësimus
bis millësimus ducentësi¬
mus vîcësimus secundus
quinquiës millësimus
deciës millësimus
semel et viciës millësimus
centiës millësimus
deciës centiës millësimus
.,000,000
centena mîlia is often omitted after the numeral adverb deciës = 1,000,000.
NUMERALS.
41
Rümark.—D is short for Tq, M for CIq. Adding q on the right of I multiplies by 10 :
loo = 5000 ; Iqoo = 50,000. Putting C before as often as o stands after multiplies by 2 :
CIo = 1000; CCIoo = 10,000; CCCIooo = 100,000.
1. From 10 to 20, as in the tables, or separately: decern et tres.
2. The numbers 18, 19, 28, 29, &c., are commonly expressed by subtrac¬
tion ; occasionally, as in English.
3. From 20 to 100, the compound numerals stand in the same order as
the English : twenty-one, vîgintî ünus ; or one and twenty, ûnus et vïgintï.
As, 21 years old : annos ûnmn et vïgintï (vïgintï ùnum), ûnum et vï¬
gintï annos nâtus.
4. From 100 on, et is inserted after the first çumeral, or omitted alto¬
gether : mille et centum ûnus, or mille centum ûnus = 1101.
1125 mille et centum vïgintï çLuinque mille centum vïgintï quinqué.
2222 duo mîlia et ducenti vîgintî duo duo mîlia ducentî vîgintî duo
94.
Compound Numerals.
Cardinals.
21-27 vîgintî ûnus
101 centum et ûnus
120 centum et vîgintî
121 centum et vîgintî ûnus
1001 mille et ûnus
1101 mille et centum ûnus
or ûnus et vîgintî
centum ûnus
centum vîgintî
centum vîgintî ûnus
mille ûnus
mille centum ûnus
Ordinals.
13-17 tertius decimus
18 duodëvîcësimus
19 undëvicësimus
or decimus et tertius
octâvus decimus
nônus decimus
21 vîcësimus primus
22 vîcësimus secundus
ûnus et vîcësimus
alter et vîcësimus
23 vîcësimus tertius
tertius et vîcësimus
95
3. Distributive Numerals,
1 singulï, -ae, -a, one each.
2 bïnï, -ae, -a, two each.
3 ternï
4 quateriû
5 quïnï
6 sënï
7 septënî
8 octônï
9 novënî
10 dënï
11 imdënï
12 duodënl
13 ternï dënï
14 quaternï dënï
15 quïnï dënï
16 sënï dënï
17 septënî dënï
18 octônï dënï, duodëvïcënï
19 novënî dënï, undëvïcënï
20 vïcënî
21 vïcënï singulï
22 vïcënï bïnï, bïnï et vïcënî
28 duodëtrïcënï
29 undëtrîcenï
30 trïcënï
40 quadrâgënl
42
NUMERAL ADVERBS.
50
quinquâgënî
600
sexcënl
60
sexâgëni
700
septingënî
70
septuâgëni
800
octingënî
80
octogëni
900
nongënî
90
nônâgënî
1000
singula mîlia
100
cëntëni
2000
bina mîlia
200
ducënï
3000
trina milla
300
trecënï
10,000
dëna mîlia
400
quadringënî
100,000
centëna mîlia
500
quingëni
Remarks.—1. The distributives are used with an exactness, which is foreign to our
Idiom, whenever repetition is involved, as in the multiplication table. But when singull
is expressed, the cardinal ma;^ be used.
2. The distributives are used with Plürälia tantinn ; bïnae literae, two epistles.
But with these uní is used for one., trini for three ; ûnae literae, trinae literae.
3. The poets occasionally use the distributives for cardinals.
4. Multiplicative Numerals.
1 simplex, single,
2 duplex, double,
3 triplex, triple,
4 quadruplex.
These answer the question, how many fold?
5
7
10
100
5. Proportional Numerals.
1 simplus, -a, -urn, single, 4
2 duplus, double, 7
3 triplus, 8
These answer the question, how many times as great?
Remark.—Only a few forms can be proved.
quincuplex.
septemplex.
decemplex.
centuplex.
quadruplus.
septuplus.
octuplus.
96.
Numéral Adverbs.
once,
twice.
1 semel,
2 bis,
3 ter
4 quater
5 quinquiës, quinquiens
6 sexiës
7 septiës
8 octiës
9 noviës
10 deciës
11 undeciës
12 duodeciës
13 ter deciës, tredeciës
14 quater deciës, quattuordeciës
15 quinquiës deciës, quindeciës
16 sexiës deciës, së deciës
17 septiës deciës
18 duodëvïciës, octiës deciës
19 undëvïciës, noviës deciës
20 vïciës
21 semel et vïciës, vïciës et
semel, vïciës semel,*
* Not semel vicies, bis viciés, etc., because that would be, once twenty times = 20
times ; twice twenty times = 40 times.
PRONOUNS.
43
22 bis et vicies, vicies et
bis, vicies bis *
30 triciës
40 quadrâgiës
50 quinquâgiës
60 sexâgiës
70 septuâgiës
80 octôgiës
90 nôuâgiës
100 centiës
200 ducentiës
800 trecentiës
400 quadringentiës
500 quingentiës
600 sexcentiës
700 septingentiës
800 octingentiës
900 nongentiës
1,000 milliës
2,000 bis milliës
100,000 centiës milliës
1,000,000 milliës milliës, deciës cen¬
tiës milliës.
PEOKOUNS.
97- Pronouns designate without describing.
Kemabk.—The pronoun is not a word used instead of a noun. The noun says too
much, for all nouns (proper as well as common) are originally descriptive ; the pronoun
simply points out. The noun says too little, because it cannot express person, as egO, /,
tü, thou ; it cannot express local appurtenance, as hic, this {here), ille, that (there).
98. A. Personal Pronouns.
I. Personal Pronouns op the First Person.
SUBSTANTIVE. POSSESSIVE.
Sing.—N. ego, I,
G. mei, of me, mens, -a, -um, mine or my.
D. mïhï, to, for me, Voc. (masc.), mi.
Ac. më, rne,
Ahl. më, from,, with, try me.
Plur.—N. nos, we,
G. nSstri, of us,
nostrum, noster, nSstra, nostrum, our or ours.
D. nobis, to, for us,
Ac. nSs, us,
Ahl. nobis, from, with, by us.
99. n. Personal Pronouns op the Second Person.
SUBSTANTIVE. POSSESSIVE.
Sing.—N. tü, thou,
G. tui, of thee,
D. tibi, to, for thee, tuus, a, um, thy or thine.
Ac. të, thee,
Ahl. të, from, with, by thee.
* Not samel vicîës, bis viciës, etc., because that would be, once twenty times = 20
times ; twice twenty times = 40 times.
44
PEONOUNS.
SUBSTANTIVE. POSSESSIVE.
PxuR.—N. v5s. ye or yow,
G. vestri, 0/ you,
vestnun, vester, vestra, vestnun, your or yours.
D. vöbis, to, for you,
Ac. vos, you,
Abl. vobis, from, with, by you.
Eemarks.—1. The foi-ms of the Genitive Plural, nSstrtini and vestrum, are used as
partitive genitives in reference to number.
2. From noster and vester and also from cujus, whose? (104) are formed the Gentile
adjectives of one ending: nostras, oi our country ; vestras, of your country ; cüjäs, of
whose country? Gen. nösträtis, vesträtis, cûjâtis.
m. Personal Pronouns op the Third Person.
100. The personal pronoun of the third person is represented
by the determinative in the oblique cases, with special forms for
the reflexive.
Determinative.
SUBSTANTIVE.
Sing.—N. [is, ea, id], he, she, it,
G. ëjus, of him, etc.,
D. ei, to, for him,
Ac. eum, earn, idi him, her, it,
Ahl. eö, eâ, eö, from,, with, by him, etc.
Plur.—N. [ei, orii, eae, ea], they,
G. eorum, eârum, eöruin, of them,
D. eis, or ils, to, for them,
Ac. eos, eäs, ea, them,
Abl. eis, or iis, from, with, by them.
POSSESSIVE.
(supplied by the genitive."*
ëjus, his, hers, its.
eSrum. eârum, eörum, thdr,
or theirs.
Befiexxve.
SUBSTANTIVE.
Sing.—n.
G.
sui¿
of him, her, itiself).
D.
sibi,
to, for, him{self), her{sdf).
Ac.
së (sësë).
him{self), her{self).
Abl.
së (sësë),
from, with, by him{sdf).
Plue.—n.
G.
suñ
of themtselves).
D.
sibi.
to, for them{selves).
Ac.
së (sësë).
them{sdves).
Abl.
së (sësë)
from, with, by fhem{sdves).
POSSESSIVE.
8UUS, -a,
{own).
-urn, his, heris), its
suus, -a, -urn,
theirs.
their {own).
renaeks.—1. The enclitic -met may be added to all the forms of ego (except nSs-
trum), to all the forms of tû (except tü and vestrum), to sibi, Së, and the forms of
SUUS : egomet, Imtjself.
2. The enclitic -pte is joined to the Ablative Singular of the Possessives ; it is espe¬
cially common with suo ; suôpte ingeniS, by his own genius.
3. From tü are formed tüte and tütemet.
PRONOUNS.
45
101. B. Determinative Pronouns.
1. is, he, that, etc.
Singular. Plural.
N. is, ea, id, ei, or ii, eae, ea,
G. ejus, eorum, earum, eonun,
D. eï, eis, or iïs,
Ac. euiii, earn, id, eos, eäs, ea,
Abi. eö, eä, eö. eis, or iis.
2. idem, the same.
Singular. Plural.
N. idem, eadem, idem, eidem, or iidem, eaedem, eadem,
G. ejusdem, eorundem, earundem, eorundem,
D. eidem, eisdem, or iisdem,
Ac. eundem, eandem, idem, eosdem, easdem, eadem,
Abl. eödem, eädem, eödem. eisdem, or iisdem.
3. ipse, he, self.
Singular. Plural.
K. ipse, ipsa, ipsum, ipsi, ipsae, ipsa,
G. ipsius, ipsörum, ipsärum, ipsörum,
D. ipsi, ipsis,
Ac. ipsum, ipsam, ipsum, ipsôs, ipsâs, ipsa,
Abl. ipso, ipsa, ipso. ipsis.
102. C. Demonstrative Pronouns.
I. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN FOR THE FIRST PERSON.
hie, this.
Sing. N. hie, haeo, hoc, Pl. N. hi, hae, haec, these,
G. hujus, horum, harum, horum,
D. huic, his,
Ac. huno, haue, hoc, hos, has, haec,
Abl. hoc, hac, hoc. his.
II. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN FOR THE SECOND PERSON,
iste, that.
Sing. N. iste, ista, istud, Pl. N. isti, istae, ista,
G. istius, istbrum, istärum, istörum,
D. isti, istis,
Ac. istum, istam, istud, istos, istas, ista,
Abl istô, ista, isto. istis.
46
PRONOUNS.
III. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN FOR THE THIRD PERSON.
Sing. N. ille,
G. illîus,
D. illi,
Ac. illvim,
Abl. illo,
ilia, illud,
illam,
ilia,
Ulud,
U15.
Pl. N. illi, Ulae, üla,
illönim, illärum, illörum,
illis,
illös, illäs, illa,
illis.
Remauks.—1. Hic: the forms in -c arise from the enclitic-ce. So hice, hunce, are
found in older Latin ; and -ci in the interrogative form with në, hîcine ? This -ce íb
sometimes appended io the other foi-ms : hüjusce, hösce.
2. Iste and Ille have, like hiC, forms in -c, but only in Nom. Acc. Abl.
istic.
istaec.
istunc,
istanc.
istoc.
istac.
istoc
istoc
istoc,
or istüc,
or istüc.
So illic, illoc, etc.
103.
qui,
cujus,
oui,
quae,
quörum,
quae,
D. Relative Pronouns.
qui, who.
quae, quod. Pl. N. qui, quae,
quorum, quorum,
quibus,
quam, quod, quös, quâs,
qua, quo. quibus.
Remauks.—Queis, quis, is also found as a Plural Dat. Abl. The form qui is used as
the Abl. Sing, quo, qua, qu5, chiefly with -cum ; quicum for quöcum, with whom.
Qui, interrogative, means Aow.?
General Relatives are :
Substantive, quisquís, quidquid, whatever.
Adjective. quiqui, quaequae, quodquod, whosoever. •
quicunque, quaecunque, quodcunque, whichever.
Sing. N.
G.
D,
Ac. quem,
Abl. quo.
104.
Substantive. quis ?
Adjective. qui ?
Subst. and Adj. uter ?
E. Interrogative Pronouns.
Sing. N.
G.
D.
Ac.
quis?
cujus?
cm?
quem ?
quid ? what ?
quod ? lohich ?
utrum ? whx), which of two ?
Possessive.
cujus, cuja, cüjum, whose ?
(rare).
who?
quae?
utra?
quid? who? what?
— whose ?
— for whom ?
— whom ? what ?
Abl. quo? from, with, by whom or what?
Remakk.—The plural of the substantive interrogative pronoun and both numbers of
the adjective interrogative pronoun coincide with the forms of the relative qui, quae,
quod, who, which.
Strengthened Interrogatives.
Substantive, quisnam? who pray? quidnam? what pray?
Adjective. qmnam? quaenam? quodnam? which pray}
CORRELATIVES.
47
some^ any.
105. F. Indefinite Peonouns.
1. Substantive, aliquis, aliqua, aliquid, ) somebody, some one or
quis, qua, quid, ) other.
Adjective. aliqui, aliquae (or aliqua*), aliquod, )
r I
qui, quae (or qua*), quod, )
2. quidam, quaedam, quiddam (and quoddam), a certain, certain one.
3. quispiam, quaepiam, quidpiam (and quodpiam), some one, some.
4. quisquam, , quidquam, any one {at all). No plural.
5. quivis, quaevis, quidvis (and quodvis), ) any one you please,
quilibet, quaelibet, quidlibet (and quodlibet), Í you Mice.
6. quisque, quaeque, quidque and quodque, each one.
ünusquisque, ünaquaeque, üniunquidque and ünumquodque, each
one severally.
The distinction between the substantive and adjective form is observed
rigorously only in the neuter.
Eemakk.—Quisquam is used only as a substantive, except with designations of
persons ; scriptor quisquam, any writer {at alt), Gallus quisquam, a.ny Gaul {at alt).
The corresponding adjective is ullus.
ullus, -a, -um, any ; nullus, -a, -um, no one, not o'oe. The corresponding
substantives are nemo (76), and nihil, which forms nihili and nihilô
(Abi.) only in certain combinations.
nonnullus, -a, -um, some, many a.
alius, -a, -ud, another ; alter, -era, -erum, the other, one {of two) ; neuter,
neutra, neutrum, neither of two.
alteruter, alterutra, alterutrum, the one or the other of the two. Gen.
alterutrïus.
(or alter uter, altera utra, alterum utrum. Gen. alterius utrius.)
uterque, utraque, utrumque, each of two, either, ambo, -ae, -o, both.
utervîs, utravis, utrumvis.
ris, )
ibet ) please of the two.
uterlibet, utralibet, utrumlibet
COKEELATIVES.
100. I. CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.
Interkogatives. Demonstratives. Relatives.
quis? who? is, that, qui, who.
quälis ? of what kind f talis, such {of that qualis, as {of which kind).
kind),
quantus ? how much ? tantus, so much, quantus, as much,
quot? how many? tot, so many. quot, as many.
» In neuter plural, aliquae or aliqua, quae or qua.
48
COMPOUND RELATIVES.
107. II. CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADVERBS.
1. Pronominal adverbs oí place.
ubi ? where ?
qua ? where ? which
way?
unde ? whence ?
ibï, there, ubi^
hie, hac, here, this way, qua,
where.
where, whi<Â way.
istic, istac, there, that way,
illic, iliac, there, yonder way.
quo ? whither ?
inde,
hinc,
istinc,
illinc,
e5,
hue,
istüc,
illûc,
thence,
hence,
thence.
thence, from yonder,
thither. qu5,
hither,
thither.
thither, yonder.
unde, whence.
whither.
2. Pronominal adverbs of time.
V..;
quando? when? tiun,
tunc.
nunc.
then,
at that time,
now.
quandd,
quum.
quotiës, as often as.
quoties ? how often ? toties, so often.
3. Pronominal adverbs of manner.
quomodo ? qui ? how ? ita, sic, so, thus, ut, uti, as.
quam ? how much ? tam, so much, quam, as.
108- HI. COMPOUNDS OF THE RELATIVE FORMS.
1. The relative pronouns become indefi7iite by prefixing ali- :
aliquantus, somewhat great ; aliquot, several, some ; alicubi, somewhere :
alicunde,/rom somewhere ; aliquandS, at some time.
2. The simple relatives become nniversal by doubling them¬
selves, or by suffixing -cunque (cumque) :
quantuscunque, however great ; quäliscunque, of whatever kind; quot-
quot, however many ; ubicunque, wheresoever ; quandocunque, whenever ;
quotiescunque, however often ; utut, in whatever way ; utcunque, howso¬
ever ; quamquam, however, although.
3. Many of the relatives are further compounded with -vis or
-libet :
quantuslibet, quantusvis, as great as you please ; ubivis, where you will;
quamvis, as you please, though.
THE VEEB.
49
THE VERB.
109. The Inflection given to the verbal stem is called Con¬
jugation, and expresses :
1. Person and îlumber;
2. Voice—Active or Passive ;
3. Tense—Present, Imperfect, Future,
Perfect, Pluperfect, Future Perfect;
4. Mood—Indicative, Subjunctive, Imperative.
110. These forms belong to the Finite Verb. Outside of the
Finite Verb, and akin to the noun, are the verbal forms called
Infinitive, Supine, Participle, Gerund.
111. The Inflection of the Verb is effected by means of—
1. Personal endings,
2. Connecting vowels,
3. Tense-signs.
1. The personal endings are pronominal forms, which serve to
indicate not only person, but also number and voice.
2. The connecting vowels are either euphonic or symbolic.
3. The tense-signs occur only in the compound tenses (weak
tenses).
The compound or weak tenses are :
The Imperfect, Active and Passive. The Perfect in vï (ttí) and sí.
The Pluperfect Active. The Futures in -bo, -bor.
The Future Perfect. The Perf. and Pluperf. Subj.
So in amä-ba-m, I loved, b is the tense-sign, a the connecting vowel, m
the personal ending (comp, më), 1st P. Singular Active.
Remarkp.—1. The tense-signs are themselves auxiliary verbs, as: -r(am) for-s(am),
from (e)s-(se) ; v(i), u(i) from fu(i) ; si from (e)s (se) ; -b(am) -b(o) from fu-(am), fu(o).
2. No adequate uniform translation can be given to all the moods and tenses. Espe¬
cially is this true of the subjunctive. See Syntax.
Several parts of the verb are formed with the verb sum, I am.
3
50
THE VERB SUM.
112.
The Verb sum,
I am (ste
m es-).
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pbbsent.
Sing.—1.
sum,
I am,
sim,
I be.
3.
es,
thou art,
sis.
thou be.
3.
est,
he, she, it is.
sit.
he, she, it be.
Plur.—1.
sumus.
we are.
simus.
we be.
2. estis,
you are.
sitis,
you be.
8.
sunt,
they are.
sint,
they be.
Imperfect.
Sing.—1.
eram,
1 was.
essem.
I were (forem).
3.
eras.
thou wast.
esses.
thou wert (forës),
3.
erat,
he was,
esset.
he were (foret).
Plur.—1.
erämus.
we were.
essëmus.
we were.
3.
érâtis.
you were,
essëtis.
you were.
3.
ersint.
they were,
essent,
they were (forent).
Future.
Sing.—1.
eré.
I shall be.
3.
eris.
thou wilt be,
3.
erit.
he will be.
Plur.—1.
erimus.
we shall be.
3.
eritis.
you will be,
3.
erunt.
they will be.
Perfect.
Sing.—1.
fui.
I hare been, I was, fuerim,
I hare, may hare, been.
3. fuistî,
thou hast been, thou faerîs.
thou hare, mayest hare.
wast.
been.
3.
fuit.
Tie has been, he was, fuerit,
he hare, may hare, been.
Plur.—1.
fuimus.
\J
we hare been, we fuerimus,
we hare, may hare, been.
were.
3. fuistis,
you hare been, you fuerîtis.
you hare, may hare, been.
were.
3.
fuerunt.
they hare been, they fuerint.
they hare, may hare, been.
were,
Pluperfect.
Sing.—1.
fueram,
I had been.
fuissem.
I had, might hare, been.
3.
fueras.
thou hadst been.
fuissës.
thou hadst, mightst hare,
been.
3.
fuerat,
he had been.
fuisset.
he had, might hare, been.
Plur.—1.
fuerämus,we had heen^
fuissëmus, we had, might hare, been.
3.
fueräüs.
you had been.
fuissëtis.
you had, might hare, been.
3.
fuerant.
they had been,
fuissent.
they had, might hare, been.
compounds of SUM.
51
INDICATIVE.
Future Perfect,
gïNG,—1. fuerô, I shall have been,
2. fuerîs, thou wilt have been,
3. fuerit, Jie shall have been,
Plur.—1- fuerimus, we shall ham been,
2. fueritis, you will have been,
3. fuerint, they will have been.
IMPERATIVE.
INFINITIVE.
Sing.
1. -
2. es. be thou, esto, thou shalt be,
3. esto, he shall be.
Plur.
1. ,
2. este, be ye, esXöte,you shall be,
3. suntö, they shall be.
Pres. esse, to be,
Perp. fuisse, to have been.
Fut. futürum (-am, -um), esse
(fore), to be about to be.
PARTICIPLE.
Fut. íutürus, -a, -um, about to be.
113.
Compounds of sum, I am.
ab-sum, I am away, absent. Y Qxi.
(abfui) âfuï.
ad-sum, I am present. Vert aüvlI.
dë-sum, I am wanting.
in-sum, I am in.
inter-sum, I am between.
ob-sum, I am against, I hurt.
Perf. obfuî or ofïuî.
prae-sum, I am over, I superintend.
pro-sum, I am for, I profit.
sub-sum, I am under. No Perf.
super-sum, I am, or remain, over.
Remark.—Only absum and praesum form present participles: absens, absent, and
praesens, present.
Prösum, I profit.
114. In the forms of prösum, prod- is used before vowels.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE
Present, pro-sum, prod-es, pr5d-est,
pro-sumus, pr5d-estis, pro-sunt,
Imperfect, pröd-eram,
w
Future, pröd-erö.
Perfect, prö-fui.
Pluperfect, prö-fueram,
Fut. Perf., prö-fuerö,
INFINITIVE. Pres. prod-esse ; Perf. pro-fuisse.
prö-sim,
pröd-essem,
prö-fuerim,
prö-fuissem.
52
the verb possum.
Possom, I am alle, I can.
115. Possum is compounded of pot (potis, pote) and sum; t
becomes s before s.
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
Sing.—1. pos-sum, I am able, can, pos-sim,
2. pot-es, pos-sis,
8. pot-est, pos-sit.
Pluk.—1. pos-sumus,
2. pot-estis,
3. pos-sunt,
I he able.
pos-simus,
pos-sitis,
pos-sint.
Imperfect.
Sing.—1. pot-eram,
could,
2. pot-eras,
8. pot-erat,
Plur.—1. pot-eramus,
2. pot-erätis,
8. pot-erant,
I was able.
Future.
Sing.
-1. pot-er5,1 shall he able.
2. pot-eris,
8. pot-erit.
Plur.—1. pot-erimus,
2. pot-eritis,
3. pot-erunt.
pos-sem, I were, might he, able.
pos-sës,
pos-set.
pos-sëmus,
pos-sëtis,
pos-sent.
Perfect.
Sing.—1. pot-uî, I hare heen able,
2. pot-uisti,
8. pot-uit,
Plur.—1. pot-uimus,
2. pot-uistis^
3. pot-uërunt,
pot-uerim, I hare, may hare, heen
(Me.
kJ
pot-uetTs,
pot-uerit.
pot-uerTmus,
pot-ueritis,
pot-uerint.
SYSTEMS OF CONJUGATION.
53
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
PrtrPEKFECT.
Sing.—1. pot-ueram, I had been pot-uissem, I had^ might have^
dble^ been able,
2. pot-ueräs, pot-uissës,
3. pot-uerat, pot-uisset.
Plub.—1. pot-ueramus, pot-uissëmus,
2. pot-uerätis, pot-uissëtis,
8. pot-uerant, pot-uissent.
Future Perfect.
Sing.—1. pot-uero, I shall haw been able.
2. pot-ueiis,
8. pot-uerit.
Pluk.—1. pot-uenmus,
2. pot-ueiitis,
8. pot-uerint.
INFINITIVE. Pres. Posse, to be able. Perf. Potuisse, to haw been able.
Systems of Conjugation.
116. There are two Systems of Conjugation, distinguished
by the stem-characteristic, viz., the Vowel Conjugation and the
Consonant Conjugation.
117. Vowel verbal stems end in â, ô, I (First, Second, and
Fourth Conjugations).
Consonant verbal stems end in one of the consonants (Third
Conjugation).
Stems in n follow the Consonant Conjugation.
118.
PRES. IND.
I. am-ö.
II. dële-5,
mone-o,
III. em-o,
statu-5,
sczlb-ö,
IV. audi-5,
The Stem-Forms.
PRES. INFIN. PERF. IND.
ama-re.
dëlë-re,
monë-re,
em-e-re,
statu-e-re,
scrïb-e-re,
audï-re,
amâ-vi,
dëlë-vï,
mon-uî,
ëm-î,
statu-î,
scxîp-sî,
audî-vî,
SUPINE.
amâ-tum,
dëlë-tum,
mon-i-tum,
em-ttun,
statû-tum,
scrip-tmn,
audî-tum.
to hve.
to blot out.
to remind,
to buy.
to settle,
to write,
to hear.
54
first conjugation.
119. First Conjugation.
active.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
Be lomng, may love.
ainé-m,
amé-s,
amß-t.
amé-mus,
amë-tis,
amé-nt.
Imperfect.
Were loving^ might hve.
amä-re-m,
amâ-rë-s,
amâ-re-t.
amâ-rê-mus,
amâ-rë-tis,
amä-re-nt.
Future.
Shall he loving, shall love.
Sing.—1. amä-b-o,
2. amä-bi-s,
3. amä-bi-t.
Plur.—1. amä-bi-mus,
2. amâ-bi-tis,
3. amä-bu-nt.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing.—1. ,
\j
2. amä, love thou, amä-tö, thou shalt love.
3. amä-tö, he shall love.
Plur.—1. ,
2. amä-te, love ye, amä-töte, ye shall love.
3. ama-ntö, ihey shall love.
PARTICIPLE.
Present. N. ama-n-s, G. ama-nt-is, loving.
Future, amä-tür-us, -a, -um, being about to love.
Am loving, do love, lote.
Sing.—1. am-5,
2. amä-s,
3. ama-t,
Plur.—1. ama-mus,
2. ama-tis,
3. ama-nt,
Was loving, loved.
Sing.—1. amä-ba-m,
2. amä-bä-s,
3. amä-ba-t,
PIjUR.—1. amä-bä-mus,
2. amä-bä-tis,
3. amä-ba-nt,
FIEST CONJUGATION.
120.
Fikst Conjugation.
active.
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Have loved^ did love.
Seng.—1. amâ-vï,
2. amâ-vi-stî,
3. amä-vi-t,
plur.—1. amä-vi-mus,
2. amä-vi-stis,
3. amâ-vê-runt,
Had loved.
Sing.—1. amä-ve-ra-m,
amä-ve-rä-s.
2.
3.
ama-ve-ra-t,
Plur.—1. amä-ve-rä-mus,
2. amä-ve-rä-tis,
3. amä-ve-ra-nt,
Shall have loved.
Sing.—1. ama-ve-r-o,
2. ama-ve-ri-s,
3. ama-ve-ri-t.
Plur.—1. ama-ve-ií-mus,
2. amâ-ve-rï-tis,
3. amä-ve-ri-nt.
Pekpect.
Have., may have, loved.
amä-ve-ri-m,
amâ-ve-rï-s,
amä-ve-ri-t.
amä-ve-ri-mus,
amâ-ve-rï-tis,
amä-ve-ri-nt.
Plttperpect.
Had, might have, loved.
amä-vi-sse-m,
amâ-vi-ssë-s,
amä-vi-sse-t.
amâ-vi-ssë-mus,
amâ-vi-ssë-tis,
amä-vi-sse-nt.
Future Perfect.
INFINITIVE.
Pres. amä-re, to love.
Phrp. ama-vi-sse, to have loved.
Fut. ama tûr-um, -am, -um, esse, to he about to love.
GERUND. SUPINE.
N. [amä-re], loving.
G. ama-nd-i, of loving.
D. ama-nd-5, to loving.
Ac. [amä-re], (ad) ama-nd-um,îoww5', to Zöüö. 1. amä-tum, to toîje.
Abi. ama-nd-ö, by loving. 2. amä-tü, to love, in the loving.
56
FIRST CONJUGATION.
121.
First Conjugation.
PASSIVE.
INDICATIVE.
Am loted.
Sing.—1. amo-r,
2. amä-ris,
8. amä-tur,
Plur.—1. amä-mur,
2. amâ-minî,
8. ama-ntur,
Was loved.
Sing.—1. amâ-ba-r,
2. axnä-bä-ris,
8. amä-bä-tur,
Plur.—1. amä-bä-mur,
2. amä-bä-minl,
3. amä-ba-ntur.
Shall be loved.
Sing.—1. amä-bo-r,
2. amä-be-ris,
8. amä-bi-tur.
Plur.—1. amä-bi-mur,
2. amä-bi-mini,
8. amä-bu-ntiir.
Sing.—1. ,
2. amä-re,
8.
Plur.—1. ,
Present.
Imperfect.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Be^ may Je, hv^.
am^r,
amë-ris,
amê-tur.
amê*mur,
amé-minî,
amß-ntur.
Were y might be, loved,
amä-re-r,
amâ-rê-xis,
amâ-rë-tur.
amâ-rë-mur,
amâ-rë-minl,
amä-re-ntiir.
Futurs.
IMPERATIVE
be thou loved,
2. amâ-minî, be ye loved.
8.
amâ-tor, thou shall be loved,
ama-tor, he shall be loved.
ama-ntor, they shall be loved.
INFINITIVE.
Pres. amâ-rî, to be loved.
Perp. amä-t-um, -am, -um, esse, to hßve been loved.
Fut. amä-tum îrï, to be about to be loved.
F. P. ama-t-um, -am, -um, fore.
first conjugation.
122. Fiest Conjugation.
PASSIVE.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pebfect.
Hme been loved. Have^ may have, been loved.
Sing.—1. amä-t-us, -a, -urn, s-u-m, ama-t-us, -a, -urn, s-i-m,
2. es, s-î-s,
3. es-t, s-i t.
Plur.—1. amä-t-ü, -ae, -a, s-u-mus, amä-t-i, -ae, -a, s-î-mus,
2. es-tis, s-i-tis,
3. s-u-nt, s-i-nt.
Pluperfect.
Had been loved. Had, might have, been loved.
Sing.—1. amä-t-us, -a, -urn, er-a-m, amä-t-us, -a, -um, es-se-m,
2. er-ä-s, es-sê-s,
3. er-a-t, es-se-t.
Plur.—1. amä-t-ü, -ae, -a, er-ä-mus, amä-t-i, -ae, -a, es-sê-mus,
2. er-ä-tis, es-së-tis,
3. er-a-nt, es-se-ut.
Future Perfect.
Shall have been loved.
Sing.—1. amä-t-us, -a, -lun, er-ë,
2. er-i-s,
3. er-i-t.
Plur.—1. amä-t-i, -ae, -a, er-i-mus,
2. er-i-tis,
8. er-u-nt.
PARTICIPLE.
Perfect. amä-t-us, -a, -tun, loved.
Geruedive. ama-nd-us, -a, -um, {one) to be loved.
3*
58
SECOND CONJUGATION.
123. Second Conjugation.
ACTIVE.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
Destroy (bht out).
Sing.—1. dële-5,
2. dêlë-s,
3. dële-t,
Plur.—1. dêlë-mus,
2. dëlë-tis,
8. dële-ut,
Was destroying.
Sing.—1. dëlë-ba-m,
2. dëlë-bâ-s,
3. dëlë-ba-t,
Plur.—1. dëlë-bâ-mus.
2. dëlë-bâ-tis.
3. dëlë-ba-nt,
Shall destroy.
Sing.—1. dëlë-b-o,
2. dëlë-bi-s,
3. dëlë-bi-t.
Plur.—1. dëlë-bi-mus,
2. dëlë-bi-tis,
3. dëlë-bu-nt.
SiNG.—1. ,
Be destroying^ may destroy.
dële-a-m,
dële-â-s,
dële-a-t.
dële-â-mus,
dële-â-tis,
dële-a-nt.
Imperfect.
Were destroying, might destroy.
dëlë-re-m,
dëlë-rë-s,
dëlë-re-t.
dëlë-rë-mus,
dëlë-rë-tis,
dëlë-re-nt.
Future.
IMPERATIVE.
2. dëlë, destroy thou.
dëlë-tô,
dëlë-td,
Plur.—1.
thou shalt destroy,
he shaU destroy.
2. dëlë-te, destroy ye,
dëlë-tôte, ye shall destroy.
dële-ntô, they shall destroy.
PARTICIPLE.
Present. N". dële-n-s j G. dele-nt-is, destroying.
Future, dëlë-tûr-us, -a, -tun, about to destroy.
SECOND CONJUGATION.
59
124 Second Conjugation.
active,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perfect.
Have, may have, destroyed.
dëlë-ve-ri-m,
dëlë-ve-n-s,
dëlë-ve-ri-t.
dëlë-ve-xi-mus,
dëlë-ve-ri-tis
dëlë-ve-ri-nt.
Pluperfect.
Had,might have, destroyed.
dëlë-vi-sse-m,
dëlë-vi-ssë-s,
dëlë-vi-sse-t.
dëlë-vi-ssë-mus,
dëlë-vi-ssë-tis,
dëlë-vi-sse-nt.
Future Perfect.
Shall have destroyed.
Sing.—1. dëIë-ve-r-6,
2. dëlë-ve-rî-s,
3. dëlë-ve-ri-t.
Plur.—1. dëlë-ve-rî-mus,
2. dëlë-ve-rï-tis,
3. dëlë-ve-ri-nt.
INFINITIVE.
Present, dëlë-re, to destroy.
Perfect, dëlë-vi-sse, to have destroyed.
Future, dëlë-tûr-iun, -am, -um, esse, to be about to destroy.
GERUND. SUPINE.
N. [dëlë-re], destroying, to destroy.
G. dële-nd-î, of destroying.
D. dële-nd-5, to, for destroying.
Ac. [dëlë-re] (ad) dële-nd-um, destroying, 1. dëlë-tum, to destroy,
to destroy,
Abl. dële-nd-ô, by destroying, 2. dëlë-tû, to destroy, in ihç
destroying.
INDICATIVE.
Have dest)'oyed, destroyed.
Sing.—1. dëlë-vî,
2. dëlë-vi-stï,
3. dëlë-vi-t,
Plur.—1. dëlë-vi-mus,
2. dëlë-vi-stis,
3. dëlë-vë-runt.
Had destroyed.
Sing.—1. dëlë-ve-ra-m,
2. dëlë-ve-râ-s,
3. dëlë-ve-ra-t,
Plur.—1. dëlë-ve-râ-mus,
2. dëlë-ve-râ-tis,
3. dëlë-ve-ra-nt.
60
SECOND CONJUGATION.
125. Second Conjugation.
PASSIVE.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pbesent.
Am destroyed. Be^ may he, destroyed.
Sing.—1.
dële-o-r,
dële-a-r,
2.
dëlë-ris,
dële-â-ris,
3.
dëlë-tur,
dële-â-tur.
Plur.—1.
dëlë-miir,
dële-â-mur,
2.
dëlë-minî,
dële-â-minJ
3.
dële-ntur,
dële-a-ntur.
Was destroyed.
Sing.—1. dëlë-ba-r,
2. dëlë-bâ-ris,
3. dëlë-bâ-tur,
Plue.—1. dëlë-bâ-mur,
2. dëlë-bâ-minï,
8. dëlë-ba-ntur,
Shall he destroyed.
Sing.—1. dëlë-bo-r,
2. dëlë-be-ris,
3. dëlë-bi-tur.
Pluk.—1. dëlë-bi-mur,
2. dëlë-bi-minî,
3. dëlë-bu-ntur.
luferfect.
Were destroyed.
dëlë-re-r,
dëlë-rë-ris,
dëlë-rë-tur.
dëlë-rë-mur,
dëlë-rë-minî,
dëlë-re-ntur.
PUTUBK.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing.—1.
2. dëlë-re, he thou destroyed, dëlë-tor, thou shalt he destroyed,
3. dëlë-tor, he shall he destroyed.
PLUR.—1. ,
2. dëlë-miiu, he ye destroyed,
3. dële-ntor, they shall he destroyed..
SECOND CONJUGATION.
126. Second Conjugation.
PASSIVE.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perfect.
Have been destroyed, was destroyed. Have, may have, been destroyed.
Sing.—1. dëlë-t-us, -a, -urn, s-u-m, dëlë-t-us, -a, -um, s-i-m,
2. es, s-ï-s,
3. est, s-i-t.
Plue.—1. dëlë-t-i, -ae, -a, s-u-mus, dëlë-t-î, -ae, -a, s-i-mus,
2. es-tis, s-I-tis,
8. s-u-nt, s-i-nt.
Pluperfect.
Had been destroyed. Had, might have, been destroyed.
Sing.—1. dëlë-t-us, -a, -urn, er-a-m, dëlë-t-us, -a, -um, es-se-m,
2. er-a-s, es-së-s,
3, er-a-t, es-se-t.
Pluk.—1. dëlë-t-ï, -ae, -a, er-a-mus, dëlë-t-ï, -ae, -a, es-së-mus,
2. er-ä-tis, essë-tis,
3. er-a-nt, es-se-nt.
Future Perfect.
Shall have been destroyed.
Sing.—1. dëlë-t-us, -a, -um, er-5,
2. er-i-s,
3. er-i-t.
Plur.—1. dëlë-t-ï, -ae, -a, er-i-mus,
2. er-i-tis,
3. er-u-nt.
INFINITIVE.
Pres. dëlë-rï, to be destroyed.
Perf. dëlë-t-um, -am, -um, esse, to have been destroyed.
Fut. dëlë-tum ïrï, to be about to be destroyed.
F. P. dëlë-t-um, -am, -lun, fore.
PARTICIPLES.
Perfect. dëlë-t-us, -a, -um, destroyed.
Gerundive, dële-nd-us, -a, -um, [öiie] to be destroyed.
62
SECOND CONJUGATION.
127. Second Conjugation.
Like dêlëre, to destroy, are conjugated only,n6re, to spin, flêre,
to weep, and the compounds of -plere,y?//, and -olere (-olôscere),
grow ; but aboleo, I abolish, forms abolitum.
All other verbs of the Second Conjugation retain the char¬
acteristic 6 in the forms of the Present Stem, and drop it in the
rest of the verbal forms. In the Perfect, the ending vl becomes
ul. In the Supine, the connecting vowel i is used.
128. Five verbs of the Second Conjugation form their Sir
pine without a connecting vowel, viz. :
cSnseS, cënsëre, cënsuî, cënsum, to think.
doceë, docëre, docuí, doctum, to teach.
misceë. miscëre, miscui, mixtum (mistum), to mix.
teneë, tenëre, tenui, (tentum), to hold.
torreö, torrëre, torruL tostum, io parch.
Synopsis ce mone-o, I remind.
129.
ACTIVE.
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pres. mone-5,
Imff. monë-ba-m,
\j
Fut. monë-b-5,
Pbrf. mon-uî,
PiPF. mon-ue-ra-m,
F. Pp. mon-ue-r-5.
mone-a-m.
monë-re-m.
mon-ue-ri-m.
mon-u-isse-m.
SECOND CONJUGATION.
63
Second Conjugation.
ACTIVE
IMPERATIVE.
mone,
mone-to,
Pakticiple. Pkbs. mone-n-s.
Gerund. mone-nd-ï.
Supine. 1. mon-itum.
130.
INDICATIVE.
Pre8. mone-o-r,
[mpf. monë-ba-r,
Fut. monë-bo-r,
Perf. mon-it-us, -a, -um, s-u-m,
Plpf. er-a-m,
\j
P. Pf er-5.
IMPERATIVE.
monë-re,
monë-tor.
Participle.
INFINITIVE.
Pres. monë-re.
Perf. mon-ui-sse.
Fut. mon-itûr-um, -am, um, esse.
Fut. mon-itür-us, -a, -um.
2. mon-itû.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
mone-a-r.
monë-re-r.
mon-it-us, -a, -lun, s-i-m.
es-se-m.
INFINITIVE.
Pres. monë-rï.
Perf. mon-it-um, -am, -um, -es-se.
Fut. mon-it-um îri.
F. Pf. mon-it-tun, -am, -um, fore,
mon-it-us, -a. -um.
mone-nd-us, -a, -um.
PASSIVE.
Perfect.
Gerundive.
64
THIRD CONJUGATION.
131.
Third Conjugation.
INDICATIVE.
Buy,
Sing.—1. em-ö,
2. em-i-s,
3. em-i-t,
Plur.—1. em-i-mus,
2. em-i-tis,
8. em-u-nt,
Was buying.
Sing.—1. em-ë-ba-m,
2. em-i-bä-s,
3. em-ë-ba-t,
Flur.—1. em-ë-bâ-mus,
2. em-ë-bâ-tis,
3. em-ë-ba-nt,
Shall be buying^ shall buy.
Sing.—1. em-a-m,
2. em-ë-s,
3. em-e-t.
Plur.—1. em-ë-mus,
2. em-ë-tis,
3. em-e-nt.
Sing.—1.
2.
3.
Plur.—1.
2.
3.
ACTIVE.
Present.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Be buying y may buy.
em-a-m,
em-ä-s,
em-a-t.
em-ä-mus,
em-ä-tis,
em-a-nt.
Imperfect.
Were buying., might buy.
em-e-re-m,
em-e-rë-s,
em-e-re-t.
em-e-rë-mus,
em-e-rë-tis,
em-e-re-nt.
Füturb.
IMPERATIVE.
em-e, buy thou, em-i-tô,
• i"
em-i-to,
em-i-te, buy ye,
em-i-tote,
em-u-ntô,
thou shalt buy.
he shall buy.
ye shall buy.
they shall buy.
PARTICIPLE.
Present. N. em-e-n-s ; G. em-e-nt-is, buying.
Future, em-tür-us, -a, -um, ahout to buy
THIRD CONJUGATION.
C5
132.
Third Conjugation.
INDICATIVE.
Hme bought, bought.
Sing.—1. ëm-ï,
2. ëm-i-sti,
3. ëm-i-t,
Plur.—1. ëm-i-mus,
2. ëm-i-stis,
8. ëm-ë-ru-nt,
Had bought.
Sing.—1. ëm-e-ra-m,
2. ëm-e-râ-s,
8. ëm-e-ira-t,
Plur.—1. ëm-e-râ-mus,
2. ëm-e-râ-tis,
8. ëm-e-ra-nt,
Shall ham bought.
Sing.—1. ëm-e-r-5,
2. ëm-e-n-s,
8. ëm-e-ri-t.
Plur.—1. ëm-e-rï-mus,
2 ëm-e-rÎ-tis,
8 ëm-e-ri-nt.
ACTIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perfect.
Ham, may have, bought.
ëm-e-ri-m,
ëm-e-rî-s,
ëm-e-ri-t.
ëm-e-rï-mus,
ëm-e-rï-tis,
ëm-e-ri-nt.
Pluperfect.
Had, might have, bought,
ëm-i-sse-m,
ëm-i-ssë-s,
ëm-i-sse-t.
ëm-i-ssë-mus,
ëm-i-ssë-tis,
ëm-i-sse-nt.
Future Perfect.
INFINITIVE.
.îi?
SUPINE.
Pres. em-e-re, to buy.
Pbrf. ëm-i-sse, to have bought.
Fut. em-tür-um, -am, -um, esse, to be about to buy.
GERUND.
N. [em-e-re], to buy, buying.
G. em-e-nd-ï, of buying.
D. em-e-nd-5, to, for buying.
Ac. [em-e-re] (ad) em-e-ndum, to buy. 1. em-tum, to buy.
Abl. em-e-nd-5, by buying. 2. em-tû, to buy, in the buying.
06
THIRD CONJUGATION.
133.
Third Conjugation.
PASSIVE.
INDICATIVE.
Am bought.
Sing.—1. em-o-r,
2. em-e-ris,
3. em-i-tur,
Plur.—1.
2.
em-i-mur,
em-i-minî,
3. em-u-ntur,
Was bought.
Sing.—1. em-ë-ba-r,
2. em-ë-bâ-ris,
3. em-ë-bâ-tur,
Plur.—1. em-ë-bâ-mur,
2. em-ë-bâ-minï,
3. em-ë-ba-ntur,
Shall be bought.
Sing.—1. em-a-r,
2. em-ë-ris,
3. em-ë-tur.
Plur.—1. em-ë-mur,
2. em-ë-minî,
3. em-e-ntur.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
Be, may be, bought.
em-a-r,
em-ä-ris,
em-ä-tur.
em-ä-mur,
em-â-minî,
em-a-ntur.
Imperfect.
Were, might be, bought.
em-e-re-r,
em-e-rë-ris,
em-e-rë-tur.
em-e-rë-mur,
em-e-rë-minï,
em-e-re-ntur.
Future.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing.—1.
2. em-ere, be thou bought, em-i-tor, thou shalt be bought.
3. em-i-tor, he shall be bought.
Plur.—1.
2. em-i-minï, be ye bought.
3. em-n-ntor, they shall be bought.
third conjügatioií.
134. Third Conjugation.
PASSIVE.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perfect.
Rave heen^ was bought. Have, may have, been bought.
Sing.—1. em-t-us, -a, -urn, s-u-m, em-t-us, -a, -urn, s-i-m,
2. es, s-î-s,
3. es-t, s-i-t.
Plub.—1. em-t-î, -ae, -a, s-u-mus, em-t-î, -ae, -a, s-i-mus,
2. es-tis, s-i-tis,
3. s-u-nt, s-i-nt.
Pltjpbrpect.
Had been bought. Had, might have, been bought.
Sing.—1. em-t-us, -a, -um, er-a-m, em-t-us, -a, -um, es-se-m,
2. er-ä-s, es-sê-s,
3. er-a-t, es-se-t.
Plus.—1. em-t-î, -ae, -a, er-a-mus, em-t-ï, -ae, -a, es-se-mus,
2. er-a-tis, es-se-tis,
3. er-a-nt, es-se-nt.
Future Perfect.
Shall have been bought.
Sing.—1. em-t-us, -a, -um, er-5,
2. er-i-s,
3. er-i-t.
Plus.—1. em-t-î, -ae, -a, er-i-mus,
2. er-i-tis,
3. er-u-nt.
INFINITIVE.
Pres. em-î, to be bought.
Perf. em-t-um, -am, -um, esse, to have been bought.
Put. em-tum íñ, to be about to be bought.
p. p. em-t-um, -am, -um, fore.
PARTICIPLE.
Perfect. em-t-us, -a, -um, bought, (em (p) tus)
Gerundive, em-e-nd-us, -a, -um, to be bought.
68
fourth conjugation.
135. Fourth Conjugation.
The stems in i follow in several forms the Third Conjugation,
and take the same connecting vowels.
ACTIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
Be hearing^ may hear.
audi-a-m,
audi-arS,
audi-a-t.
INDICATIVE.
Hear.
Sing.—1. audi-ö,
2. audi-s,
3. audi-t,
Plur.—1. audî-mua,
2. audî-tis,
8. audi-u-nt,
Was hearing.
Seng.—1. audi-e-ba-m,
2. audi-ë-bâ-s,
8. audi-ë-ba-t,
Plur.—1. audi-ë-bâ-mus,
2. audi-ë-bâ-tis,
8. audi-ë-ba-nt,
Bhall hear.
Seng.—1. audi-a-m,
2. audi-ë-s,
8. audi-e-t.
Plur.—1. audl-ë-mus,
2. audi-ë-ûs,
8. audi-e-nt.
Seng.—1. ,
audi-3-mus,
audi-3-tis,
audi-a-nt.
Imperfect.
Were hearing^ might hear.
audî-re-m,
audî-rë-s,
audi-re-t.
audî-rë-mus,
audï-rë-tis,
audî-re-nti
Future.
2. audi, hear thou.,
Q
O.
IMPERATIVE.
audi-t5,
\j
audi-to,
thxm shall hear,
he shall hear.
Plur.—1.
2. audl-te, hear ye,
8.
ye shall hear,
they shall hear.
audi-töte,
audi-u-nto,
PARTICIPLE.
Present. N. audi-e-n-s, G. audi-e-nt-is, hearing.
Future, audï-tùr-us, -a, -um, about to hear.
FOUETH CONJUGATION.
69
136.
Foueth Conjugation.
INDICATIVE.
ACTIVE.
Perfect.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Have heard, heard
Sing.—1. audï-vï,
2. audî-vi-stï,
3. audï-vi-t,
PlUr—1. audi-vi-mus,
2. audï-vl-stis,
3. audi-vë-runt.
Had heard.
Sing.—1. audi-ve-ra-m,
2. audi-ve ra-s,
3. audi-ve-ra-t,
Flue.—1. audi-ve-rä-mus,
2. audi-ve-râ-tis,
3. audî-ve-ra-nt.
Have, may have, heard.
audi-ve-ri-m,
audi-ve-ri-s,
audi-ve-ri-t.
audi-ve-ri-mus,
audi-ve-ri-tis,
audi-ve-rint.
plupeefect.
Had, might have, heard.
audi-vi-sse-m,
audi-vi-ssë-s,
audi-vi-sse-t,
audî-vi-ssë-mus,
audï-vi-ssë-tis,
audi-vi-sse-nt.
Future Perfect.
Shall have heard.
Sing.—1. audi-ve-r-5,
2. audî-ve-rï-s,
3. audi-ve-ri-t,
Plur.—1. audi-ve-ri-mus,
2. audi-ve-ri-tis,
3. audi-ve-ri-nt.
INFINITIVE.
Present, audi-re, to hear.
Perfect, audi-vi-sse, to have heard.
Future, audi-tür-um, -am, -um, esse, to he about to hear,
GERUND. SUPINE.
N [audi-re], hearing, to hear.
G. audi-e-nd-i, of hearing.
D. audi-e-nd-ô, to, for hearing.
Ac. [audi-re] (ad) audi-e-nd-um, hear¬
ing, to hear. 1. audi-tum, to hear.
Abl. audi-e-nd-5, by hearing. 2. audi-tû, to hear, in the hearing.
70
FOUETH CONJUGATION.
137.
Foueth Conjugation.
INDICATIVE.
Am heard.
Sing.—1. audi-o-r,
2. audi-ris,
8. audi-tur,
Pluh.—1. audi-mur,
2. audî-minî,
8. audi-u-ntur.
PASSIVE.
Pbbsbnt.
SUBJUNCTIVK
Be, may ie, heard.
audi-a-r,
audi-ä-ris,
audi-â-tur,
audi-S-mtir,
audi-ä-mini,
audi-a-ntur.
Impekfect.
Was heard.
Sing.—1. audi p,-ba-r,
2. audi-5-bä-ris,
8. audi-5-bä-tur,
Pluk.—1. audi-5-bä-miir,
2. audi-S-bâ minî,
8. audi-S-ba-ntur.
Were, might be, heard.
audi-re-r,
audï-rë-ris,
audï-rê-ttir,
audï-rë-mur,
audî-rë-minî,
audî-re-ntur.
Future.
Shall be heard.
Sing.—1. audi-a-r,
2. audi-5-ris,
8. audi-B-tur,
Flue.—1. audi-B-mur,
2. audi-B-mini,
8. audi-e-ntur.
Sing.—1.
IMPERATIVE.
2. audï-re, be thou heard, audl-tor, thou shalt be heard.,
8, audl-tor, he shall be heard.
PLUR.—1.
2. audî-mlnî, be ye heard.
3. audi-u-ntor, they shaU be heard.
FOTJETH CONJUGATION.
71
138.
Foukth Conjugation.
PASSIVE.
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pbefbct.
Have been beard,, was heard.
SmG.—1. audi-t-us, -a, -um, s-u-m,
es,
2.
3.
Plue.—1. audî-t-î, -ae, -a,
2.
est,
s-u-mus,
es-tis,
s-u-nt.
Have, may have, been heard.
audi-t-us, -a, -um, s-i-m,
s-i-s.
audi-t-i, -ae, -a.
s-i-t,
s-I-mus,
s-i-tis,
s-i-ut.
Pluperfect.
Had been heard.
Sing.—1. audi-t-us, -a, -um, er-a-m,
er-â s,
Plur.-
2.
8.
-1.
2.
8.
er-a-t,
audi-t-i, -ae, -a, er-á-mus, audi-t-i, -ae, -a,
er-ä-tis,
er-a-nt.
Had, might have, been heard.
audi-tu-s, -a, -um, es-se-m,
es-se-s,
es-se-t,
es-se-mus,
es-se-tis,
es-se-nt.
Future Perfect.
Bhcdl hâve been heard.
Sing.—1. audi-t-us, -a, -um, er-ô,
2. er-i-s,
8. er-i-t.
Flue.—1. audi-t-i, -ae, -a, er-i- mus,
2. er-i-tis,
8. er-u-nt.
INFINITIVE.
Presert. audi-ri, to be heard.
Perfect, audi-t-um, -am, um, esse, to have been heard.
Future, audi-tum iri, to be about to be heard.
F. P. audi-t-um, -am, -um, fore.
PARTICIPLE.
Perfect. audi-t-us, -a, -um, heard.
Gerundive, audi-e-nd-us, -a, -um, \one\ to be heard.
n
APPENDIX TO THE THIRD CONJUGATION.
Appendix to the Third Conjugation.
139. Several verbs of the Third Conjugation in the Present-
stem add i to the stem. This i is dropped when it would come
before ë or ï, except before et ; as, cap-it, cap-eret, but capi-et.
ACTIVE.
INDICATIVE.
Take.
Sing.—1. capi-ô,
2. cap-i-s,
•3. cap-i-t,
Plur.—1. cap-i-mus,
2. cap-i-tis,
8. capi-u-nt.
Present.
Imperfect.
Was taking.
Sing.—1. capi-e-ba-m,
2. capi-ë-bâ-s,
3. capi-ë-ba-t,
Flur.—1. capi-ë-bâ-mus,
2. capi-ë-bâ-tis,
3. capi-ë-ba-nt.
Shall take.
Sing.—1. capi-a-m,
2. capi-ë s,
3. capi-e-t,
Plur.—1. capi-ë-mus,
2. capi-ë-tis,
3. capi-e-nt.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing.—2. cap-e, take thou,
cap-i-t5,
3. cap-i-to,
Plur.—2. cap-i-te, take ye,
cap-i-töte,
3. capi-u-ntö.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Be taking.
capi-a-m,
capi-ä-s,
capi-a-t,
capi-a-mus,
capl-a-tis,
capi-a-nt.
Were taking.
cap-e-re-m,
cap-e-rë-s,
cap-e-re-t,
cap-e-rë-mus,
cap-e-rë-tis,
cap-e-re-nt.
Future.
INFINITIVE.
Pres. cap-e-re,
to take.
PARTICIPLE.
Pres. capi-e-n-s,
taking.
GERUND.
G. capi-e-nd-î,
of taking.
APPENDIX TO THE THIED CONJUGATION.
140.
INDICATIVE.
Am taken.
Sing.—1. capi-o-r,
2. cap-e-ris,
3. cap-i-tur,
Plüb.—1. cap-i-mur,
2. cap-i-mini,
3. capi-u-ntur.
PASSIVE.
Pbesbnt.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Be, may he, taken.
capi-a-r,
capi-ä-ris,
capi-ä-tur,
capi-ä-mur,
capi-ä-mim,
capî-a-ntur.
Imperfect.
Was taken.
Sing.—1. capi-e-ba-r,
2. capi-ë-bâ-ris,
3. capi-ë-bâ-tur,
Flur.—1. capi-ë-bâ-mur,
2. capî-ë-bâ-minï,
3. capi-ë-ba-ntur.
Were, might he, taken.
cap-e-re-r,
cap-e-rë-ris,
cap-e-rë-tur,
cap-e-rë-mur,
cap-e-rë-minî,
cap-e-re-ntur.
Future.
ShaU he taken.
Sing.—1. capi-a-r,
2. capi-ë-ris,
3. capi-ë-tur,
Plue.—1. capi-ë-mur,
2. capi-ë-minî,
3. capi-e-ntur.
IMPERATIVE.
INPINITIVK
Pres. cap-ï,
to he taken.
Sing.—2. cap-e-re,
he thou taken,
cap-i-tor,
thou shalt he taken,
8. cap-i-tor,
Jie shall he taken,
Plur.—2. cap-i-minî,
he ye taken, ye shall he taken, GERUNDIVE.
3. capi-u-ntor, capi-e-nd-us, -a, -um,
they shall he taken. \one'\ to he taken.
4
74
DEPONENT OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION.
141. Deponent op the First Conjugation.
INDICATIVE.
Exhort.
Sing.—1. hort-(7-r,
2. horta-ris,
3. horta-tur,
Pluk.—1. horta-mur,
2. hortâ-minî,
8. horta-ntur.
Was exhorting.
Sing.—1. horta-ba-r,
2- hortâ-bâ-ris,
3. hortä-bä-tur,
Flur.—1. hortä-bä-mur,
2. hortä-bä-mini,
3. hortä-ba-ntur.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
Be exhorting.^ may exhort.
horte-r,
hortë-ris,
hortê-tur,
hortê-mur,
hort^mini,
hortë^iilur.
Imperfect.
Were exhorting, might exlwt.
horta-re-r,
hortâ-rë-ris,
hortâ-rë-tur,
hortâ-rë-mur,
hortâ-rë-minî,
hortä-re-ntur.
Future.
Shall exhort.
Sing.—1. hortä-bo-r,
2. hortä-be-ris,
3. hortä-bi-tur,
Plur.—1. hortä-bi-mur,
2. hortä-bi-mini,
3. hortä-bu-ntur.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing.—2. hortä-re,
exhort thou,
hortä-tor,
thou shall exhort,
3. hortä-tor,
he shall exhort.
ACTIVE FORMS.
PART. Pres. horta-n-s,
exhorting.
Fut. hortä-tür-us, -a, -um,
about to exhort.
INF. Fut. hortä-tür-um, -am, -um, esse,
to he about to exhoi't.
Plur.—2. hortâ-minî,
exhort ye, ye shall exhort, PASSIVE IN MEANING.
3. horta-ntor, GERUNomE, horta-nd-us, -a, -um,
they shall exhort. \oné\ to he exhorted.
DEPONENT OF THE FIEST CONJUGATION.
75
142. Deponent oe the First Conjugation.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perfect.
Have exhorted^ exTwrted.
SmG.—1. horta-t-us, -a, -am, s-u-m,
2. es,
3. es-t,
Plur.—1. hortâ-t-î, -ae, -a, s-u-mus,
2. es-üs,
3. s-u-nt.
Have, may have, exTwrted.
horta-t-us, -a, -urn, s-i-m,
S-Ï-S,
s-i-t,
hortâ-t-ï, -ae, -a, s-i-mus,
s-î-tis,
s-i-nt.
Plcperfect.
Had exTwrted. Had, might have, exTwrted,
Sing.—1. horta-t-us, -a, -um, er-a-m, horta-t-us, -a, -um, es-se-m,
2. er-a-s, es-se-s,
3. er-a-t, es-se-t,
Plur.—1. hortâ-t-î, -ae, -a, er-a-mus, hortâ-t-ï, -ae, -a, es-se-mus,
2. er-â-tis, es-së-tis,
3. er-a-nt. es-se-nt.
Future Perfect.
Shall Tmve exhorted.
bing.—1. hortâ-t-us, -a, -um, er-5,
2. er-i-s,
3. er-i-t,
Plur.—1. hortâ-t-ï, -ae, -a, er-i-mus,
2.
3.
er-i-tis,
er-u-nt.
INFINITIVE.
Pbeb. hortâ-rï,
to exhort.
Perf. hortâ-t-um, -am, -um, esse
to have exTwrted.
F. p. hortâ-t-um, -am, -um, fore
Supine. 1. hortâ-tum,
to exTwrt, for exhorting.
Gerund, [hortâ-rï],
to exTwrt, exTwrting.
PARTICIPLE.
Perfect, hortâtus, -a, -um,
having exhorted.
2. hortâ-tû,
to exhort, in the exhorting
G. horta-nd-ï,
of exTwrting.
76
DEPONENT OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION.
143. Deponent of the Seoohd Conjugation.
INDICATIVE.
Fear.
Sing.—1. vere-o-r,
2. verë-ris,
3. verë-tur,
Plur.-
-1. verë-miir,
2. verë-minî,
3. vere-ntur.
Was fearing.
Sing.—1. verë-ba-r,
2. verë-bâ-ris,
3. verë-bâ-tur,
Plur.—1. verë-bâ-mur,
2. verë-bâ-minï,
3. verë-ba-ntur.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
Be fearing^ may fear.
vere-a-r,
vere-ä-ris,
vere-ä-tur,
vere-ä-mur,
vere-â-minî,
vere-a-ntur.
Imperfect.
Were fearing, might feon'.
verë-re-r,
verë-rë-ris,
verë-rë-tur,
verë-rë-mur,
verë-rë-mini,
verë-re-ntur.
Future.
Shall fear.
Sing.—1. verë-bo-r,
2. verë-be-ris,
3. verë-bi-tur,
Plur.—1. verë-bi-mur,
2. verë-bi-minî,
3. verë-bu-ntur.
IMPERATIVE,
ACTIVE FORMS.
Sing.—2. verë-re,
fear thou,
verë-tor,
thou shalt fear,
3. verë-tor,
he shall fear,
Plur.—2. verë-minî,
fear ye, ye shall fear,
PART. Pres.
Fut.
3. vere-ntor,
they shall fear.
vere n-s,
fearing,
ver-i-tür-us, -a, urn,
about to fear.
INF. Fut. ver-i-tür-um, -am, -um, esse,
to be about to fear.
PASSIVE IN MEANING.
Gerundive, vere-nd-us, -a, -um,
{oné\ to be feared.
DEPONENT OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION.
144. Deponent of the Second Conjugation.
INDICATIVE.
Pbrpect.
Have feared, feared.
Sing.—1. ver-i-t-us, -a, -urn, s-u-m,
2. es,
8. es-t,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Have, may have, feared.
ver-i-t-us, -a, -um, s-i-m,
s-ï-s,
Plur.—1. ver-i-t-ï, -ae, -a,
2.
3.
Had feared.
s-u-mus, ver-i-t-ï, -ae, -a,
es-tis,
s-u-nt.
Plupekpect.
s-i-t,
s-i-mus,
s-i-tis,
s-i-nt.
Had, might have, feared.
Sing.—1. ver-i-t-us, -a, -urn, er-a-m, ver-i-t-us, -a, -um, es-se-m.
2.
3.
Plur.—1. ver-i-t-ï, -ae, -a,
2.
3.
er-a-s,
er-a-t.
es-sê-s,
es-se-t.
er-a-mus, ver-i-t-ï, -ae, -a, es-se-mus,
er-a-tis, es-se-tis,
er-a-ut. es-se-nt.
Future Perfect.
Shall have feared.
Sing.—1. ver-i-t-us, -a, -lun, er-5,
2.
3.
Plur.—1. ver-i-t-ï, -ae, -a,
2.
3.
INFINITIVE.
Pres. vere-ri,
to fear.
Perp. ver-i-t-um, -am, -um, esse,
to have feared.
F, P. ver-i-tum fore.
er-i-s,
er-i-t,
er-i-mus,
er-i-tis,
er-u-nt.
PARTICIPLE.
Perpect. ver-i-tus, -a, um.
Supine. 1. ver-i-tum,
to fear, for fearing.
Gerund, [vera- ñ]i
to fear, fearing.
2. ver-i-tü,
to fear, in fearing.
G. vere-nd-ï,
of fearing.
78
DEPONENT OF THE TRIED CONJUGATION.
145. Deponent oe the Third Conjugation.
INDICATIVE.
Speak.
loqu-o-r,
loqu-e-ris,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Sing.—1.
2.
3. loqu-i-tur,
Present.
Plur.—1. loqu-i-mur,
2. loqu-i-minî,
8. loqu-u-ntur,
Was speaking.
Sing.—1. loqu-ë-ba-r,
2. loqu-ê-bâ-ris,
8. loqu-ë-bâ-tur,
Plue.—1. loqu-ë-bâ-mur,
2. loqu-ë-bâ-minî,
8. loqu-ë-ba-ntur,
Shall speak.
Sing.—1. loqu-a-r,
2. loqu-ë-ris,
8. loqu-ë-tur.
Plue.—1. loqu-ë-mur,
2. loqu-ë-minï,
8. loqu-e-ntur.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing.—2. loqu-e-re,
speak thou^
loqu-i-tor,
thou shall speak^
8. loqu-i-tor,
he shall speak.
Plue.—2. loqu-i-minî,
speak ye.
8. loqu-u-ntor,
they shall sveak.
Be speaking^ may speak.
loqu-a-r,
loqu-ä-ris,
loqu-ä-tur.
loqu-â-mur,
loqu-ä mini,
loqu-a-ntur.
Imperfect.
Were speaking^ might speak.
loqu-e-re-r,
loqu-e-rë-ris,
loqu-e-rë-tur.
loqu-e-rë-mur,
loqu-e-rë-minl,
loqu-e-re-ntur.
Future.
ACTIVE FORMS.
PART. Pres. loqu-e-n-s,
speaking.
Fut. locû-tûr-us, -a, -um,
about to speak.
INF. Fut. locü-tür-um, -am, -um, esse,
to be about to speak.
PASSIVE IN MEANING.
Geeundive, loqu e-ndus, -a, -um,
to be spoken.
deponent of the third conjugation.
146. Deponent oe the Third Conjugation.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perfect.
Have spoken^ spoke. Have, may have, spoken.
Sing.—1. locü-t-us, -a, -urn, s-u-m, locü-t-us, -a, -urn, s-i-m,
2. es, s-îs,
3. est, s-i-t.
Plur,—1. locü-t-í, -ae, -a, s-u-mus, locû-t-ï, -ae, -a, s-i-mus,
2. es-tis, s-i-tis,
8. s-u-nt, s-i-nt.
Pluperfect.
Had spoken. Had, migJd have, spoken.
Sing.—1. locû-t-us, -a, -um, er-a-m, locù-t-us, -a, -urn, es-se-m,
2. er-a-s, es-se-s,
3, er-a-t, es-se-t.
Plur.—1. locü-t-i, -ae, -a, er-a-mus, locû-t-ï, -ae, -a, es-se-mus,
2. er-ä-tis, es-së-tis,
3. er-a-nt. es-se-nt.
Future Perfect.
Shall have spoken.
Sing.—1. locü-t-us, -a, -urn, er-o,
2. er-i-s,
3. er-i-t.
Plur.—1. locû-t-ï, -ae, -a, er-i-mus,
2. er-i-tis,
3. er-u-nt.
INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
Pres. loqu-I, Perf. locû-tus, -a, -um,
to speak. having spoken.
Perf. locû-t-um, -am, -um, esse,
to have spoken.
F. Pf. locû-t-um, -am, -um, fore.
Supine. 1. locû-tum, 2. locû-tû,
to speak, for speaking. to speak, in speaking.
Gerund, [loqu-ï], G. loqu-e-nd-ï,
to speak, speaking. of speaking.
ÖO
DEPONENT OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION.
147. Deponent of the Fourth Conjugation.
INDICATIVE.
Lie.
Sing.—1. menti-o-r,
2. mentí ris,
3. mentí-tur,
Plur.—1. mentí-mur,
2. mentí-miní,
3. mentí-u-ntur.
Was lying.
Sing.—1. menti-5-ba-r,
2. menti-5-bä-ris,
3. menti-5-bä-tur.
Plur.—1. menti-5-bä-mur,
2. menti-5-bä-mini,
3. menti-5-ba-ntur.
Shall lie.
Sing.—1. menti-a-r,
2. menti-ë-ris,
3. menti-ë-tur.
Plur.—1. menti-ë-mur,
2. menti-ë-mini,
3. menti-e-ntur.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
IMPERATIVE.
Presbnt.
Be lying, may lie.
menti-a-r,
menti-S-ris,
menti-ä-tur.
menti-a-mur,
menti-E-mini,
menti-Si-ntur.
Impbkpect.
Were lying, might lie.
menti-re-r,
menti-rë-xis,
menti-rë-tur,
menti-rë-mur,
menll-rë-mini,
mentí-re-ntur.
Future.
ACTIVE FORMS.
Sing.—2. mentí-re,
lie thou,
mentí-tor,
thou shalt lie,
3. mentí-tor,
he shall lie.
Plur.—2. mentí-miní,
lie ye,
3. menti-u-ntor,
they shall lie.
PART. Pres. menti-e-n-s,
lying.
Fut. mentí-tür-us, -a, -um,
about to lie.
INF. Put. mentí-tür-um, -am, -um,
to he about to lie.
PASSIVE IN MEANING.
Gerundive, menti-e-nd-us, -a, -um.
deponent of the poueth conjugation.
81
148. Deponent oe the Foueth Conjugation.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perfect.
Have lied, lied.
Sing.—1. menti-t-us, -a, -urn, s-u-m,
2.
3.
3.
es,
es-t,
Pluk.—1. mentï-t-ï, -ae, -a, s-u-mus,
2. es-tis,
s-u-nt
Have, may have, lied.
mentî-t-us, -a, -urn, s-i-m,
S-Ï-S,
s-i-t.
mentï-t-ï, -ae, -a, s-ï-mus,
s-i-tis,
s-i-nt.
Pluperfect.
Had lied.
Sing.—1. mentï-t-us, -a, -urn, er-a-m,
2. er-ä-s,
3.
er-a-t.
Had, might have, lied.
mentï-t-us, -a, -um, es-se-m,
es-se-s,
es-se-t.
Plur.—1. mentï-t-ï, -ae, -a, er-ä-mus, mentï-t-ï, -ae, -a,
2. er-a-tis,
3. er-a-nt.
Future Perfect.
Shall have lied.
\j
Sing.—1. mentï-t-us, -a, -um, er-5,
2. er-i s,
3. er-i-t.
Plur.—1. mentï-t-ï, -ae, -a, er-i-mus,
2. er-i-tis,
3. er-u-nt.
es-se-mus,
es-se-tis,
es-se-nt.
INFINITIVE.
Pres. mentï-rï,
to lie.
Perf. mentï-t-um, -am, -um, esse,
to have lied.
F. p. mentï-t-um, -am, -um, fore.
Supine. 1. mentï-tum,
to lie, for lying,
Gerund, [mentï-rï],
to lie, lying.
PARTICIPLE.
Perfect, mentï-t-us, -a, -urn,
having lied.
2. mentï-tû,
to lie, in lying.
G. menti-e-nd-î,
of lying.
82
PEEIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION.
149.
Peeiphrastig Conjugation.
ACTIVE.
Pres.
Imperp.
Fut.
Perp.
INDICATIVE.
amätür-us, -a, -um, sum,
Am about to love.
amätürus eram,
Was about to love.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
amâtûr-us, -a, -um, sim.
Be about to love.
amätürus essem.
Were about to love.
\j
amätürus ero, Shall be about to love.
amätürus fui,
Have been, was, about to love.
ruuPERP. amätürus fueram,
Had been about to love.
amätürus fuerim.
Have, may have, been about to
love.
amätürus fuissem,
Had, might have, been about
to love.
Fut. Perp. amätürus fuero.
INFINITIVE. Present, amätür-um, -am, -um, esse, to be about to love.
Perfect, amätür-um fuisse, to have been about to love.
150.
Pres.
Imperp.
Fut.
Perp.
Pluperp.
PASSIVE.
amand-us, -a, -um, sum.
Have to be loved.
amandus eram.
Had to be loved.
amand-us, -a, -tun, sim.
Have to be loved.
amandus essem, forem,
Had to be loved.
amandus ero. Shall have to be loved.
amandus fui, amandus fuèrim,
Have had to be loved.
amandus fueram.
Had had to be loved.
Have had to be loved.
amandus fuissem.
Should have had to be loved.
INFINITIVE. Present, amand-um, -am, -um, esse, to have to be loved.
Perfect, amand-um fuisse, to have had to be loved.
ABBREVIATIONS IN CERTAIN FORMS OP THE VERB. 83
151. Abbreviatioîîs occurring in certain Forms of
the Verb.
1. The Perfects in -ävi, -êvï, -îvï, drop the V before S or R, and con¬
tract the vowels throughout, except those in -îvï, which admit the con¬
traction only before S.
Perfect.
Seng.—1.
2. amävistl, amästl- dëlëvistî, dëlëstl. audïvistî, audîstl-
Plub.—1.
2. amâvistis, amâstis. dëlëvistis, dëlëstis- andîvistis, audîstis.
3. amâvërunt, amârant- dëlëvërunt, dëJërunt- audîvërunt, attdiërunt-
SuBj. amäverim, amärim- dëlëverim, dëlërim- audîverim, audierim.
Pluperfect.
Ind. amäveram, amäram- dëlëveram, dëlëram. audîveram, audieram.
SoBj. amâvissexn, amâssem. dëlëvissem, dëlëssem. audivissem, audissem.
Future Perfect.
ama vero, amaro- dëlëvero, dëlëro. audivero, audiero-
Infinitive Perfect.
amävisse, amasse- dëlëvisse, dëlësse- audîvisse, audlsse-
In like manner, nôvï, I kn-ow, and moví, I have moved, are, in their com¬
pounds especially, contracted :
Sing.—2- nosti- Plur-—2. nostls, 3. norunt- Subj. nörim-
Pluperfect. noram- Subj. nossem- Inf. nosse- But the Future is novero, un
coutracted.
Remark.—In petere, to fail upon, dësinere, to give over, and in the compounds of ire,
to go, the V of the Perfect is dropped in 1 and 3 Pers. Sing., and in 1 Pers. PL, hut no
contraction ensues, as :
petivl, petii ; petivit, petiit- So dësivi, dësii; dësivit, dësiit, etc.
.^d rediï, rediit, from redire, to go bock.
2- In 3 Pl. Perf. Act. instead of the ending -ërunt, -ëre is often found,
but never in the contracted Perfects mentioned above : amâvëre, they have
loved ; dëlëvëre, they have destroyed ; ëmëre, they have bought ; audîvëre,
they have heard. But amäre, for amärunt, is not admissible.
3. Instead of -ris in 2 Sing. Pass, we find often -re ;
amäbäre, thou wast loved ; amârëre, thou, mightest be loved ¡ amäbere, thou wüt be loved.
This is rare, however, in Present Indicative.
4. The Imperatives of dicere, to say, dûcere, to lead, facere, to make,
and ferre, to hear, are die, dúo, fac, fer. These shortened forms occur in
their respective compounds, except in those compounds of facie, which
change a into i, as : perfice, achieve thou. (188 R.)
5. The Gerund and Gerundive of the 3d and 4th Conjugations, instead
of -endi, -endus, may, especially after i, end in -undi and -undus, as :
faciundus, to be doue ; gerundus, to be carried.
84
the stem.
152. THE STEM.
L In the Present.
The stem of many verbs appears in the Present, not in the
pure, but in a strengthened form.
Hence verbs are classified according to the relation of the
Present Stem to the Verb Stem.
I. Stem class : To this class belong those verbs whose present
stem is the same as the verb stem.
Such are the verbs of the vowel coujugations ; and in the Third Conju¬
gation such verbs as leg-o, I ready ed-o, I eaty em-o, I buy.
II. The Protracted or Intensified class : In this class the
vowel of the Verb Stem is lengthened in the Present Stem:
dûc-o, I lead, stem due- ; dîe-o, I say, stem die.
Remark.—This change arises from a diphthongäT strengthening of the
stem : douc-o, deic-o ; but the class is treated as a stem-class in formation.
III. The Nasal class: In this class the stem is strengthened
by n.
A. In vowel-stems : si-, sino, I let ; Ii-, lino, 1 hemiear.
B. After the characteristic r or m : oer-, cerno, I sift, separate ; tem-,
temno, I scorn.
C. Before the characteristic mute : "vic-, vinco, I conquer ; frag-, frange,
I break ; fud-, fundo,/powr.
Before a P-mute N becomes M: rup-, rumpo, I rend; cub-, cmnbo,
1 lie down.
IV. The T class : flee-, flecto, I hend.
V. The Inchoative class : The stem strengthened by so or isc :
so after vowel stems, isc after consonant stems.
1. ira-, irascor, ore-, crë-sco, dormi-, obdormî-sco,
I am in a rage. I grow. I fall asleep.
2. ap-, ap-iscor, fap-, profic-iscor, nao-, nanc-iscor,
I reach. 1 set out. I get.
VI. Reduplicated class : Eeduplication in the Present stem :
gen-, gi-gno, I beget, (for gi-gen-o) ; sta-, si-sto, si-st-ere, to set, stand.
Compare stare, to stand.
VII. V-class : IT suflBxed to the stem :
ting-, tingu-o, J'waA:.
SUPINE.
85
VIIL 1-class : I suffixed to the stem :
cap-, capi-o, I talce.
IX. Geminated class :
The Liquids 1 and r may be doubled : pel-, pello, I drive ; cur-,
curro, I run.
So t is doubled in mit-, mitto, I send.
Kemaek.—This small class is probably a subdivision of the 8th class (I-class) ; pello,
forpeljo, palio; curro, for curjo, curio.
X. Change of Conjugation :
Many consonant-stems assume in the Present the character¬
istic of one of the three vowel-conjugations:
vid-, vide-o, I see, vide-re. ven-, veni-o, I come, veni-ra
153. IT. In the Perfect.
The Perfect is formed from the pure stem.
Exceptions : see change of conjugation. (1^6, 176).
1. The vowel-stems take -vl : amà-vï, I have loved ; dëlê-vi,
I have destroyed ; audi-vl, I have heard.
However, most verbs of the 2d Conjugation drop the vowel-character¬
istic, and change -vi into -m. (See 128.)
2. Consonant-stems with short stem-syllable take ï in the
Perfect, before which the stem-syllable becomes long, and â is
changed into ê.
lego, I read, vid-eo, I see, fod-io, I dig, fug-io, I flee, ag-o, I do,
lëg-ï. vid-i. fod-L fûg-i. ëgî.
3. Consonant-stems with long stem-syllables take si in the
Perfect :
rëp-o, I creep, rëp-sï. scribe, J write, scrip-si dic-c, I say, dixi = dic-sL
aug-ec, I increase, auxi = aug-si. räd-c, I scrape, ra-si = rad-si.
Even when the stem-syllable is lo7ig ly position only :
carp-c, I pluck, carp-si. ping-c, I paint, pinxi = ping-si.
Exceptions.—Exceptions are stems in -nd, which take i in the Perfect :
dëfend-c, I strike {ward) off, dëfend-i j perhaps because the stems in -nd
formed originally a reduplicated perfect :
maud-o, I chew, man(di)di ; so (fe)fendi, I hare struck.
86
FUTURE ACTIVE PARTICIPLE.
4. The stems in u have ï in the Perfect: acu-o, I sharpen^
acu-L
5. Sundry verbs reduplicate in the Perfect, i. e., repeat the
initial consonant of the stem with the vowel following it:
pend-o, Iwdgh, pe-pend-ï. posc-o, I demand, po-posc-i, curr-o, Iran, cu-curr-I.
When a change of vowel occurs in the stem, e is always found in the
syllable of reduplication :
cad-o, I fall, ce-cid-I. caed-o, I fell, ce-cïd-î.
parc-o, I spare, pe-perc-i. pel-lo, I push, pe-pul-i.
These reduplicated Perfects are always formed in -L They do not
lengthen the stem-vowel, but change a into i, ae into i, a before two con¬
sonants into e, and e and o into u before 1.
Remark.—In compounds with monosyllabic prepositions reduplication is generally
dropped except in disco, i learn, do, I give, poseo, I demand, sto, Island. The com¬
pounds of curro, I run, sometimes retain it, excucurri. With dissyllabic prepositions
the reduplication is commonly retained.
III. The Supine.
154. 1. The Supine is formed from the pure stem.
1. Vowel-stems and stems in TJ take -tum in the Supine:
am-o, I love, ama-tum. dële-o, I destroy, dëlë-tum.
audi-o, / hear, audi-tum. tribu-o, I allot, tribû-tum.
Most verbs of the Second Conjugation drop, however, their own char¬
acteristic vowel before -turn, and insert the connecting-vowel i : mone-o,
I remind, moni-tum. Some have no connecting-vowel. (See 128.)
2. Consonant-stems in a P- or K-mute take -turn in the Supine :
cap-io, I take, cap-tum. rëp-o, I creep, rep-tum.
fac-io, I do, fac-tum. dïc-o, I say, dic-tum.
Exceptions.—1. Among the P-stems, only labor, I slip, lap-sus.
2. Among the K-stems, the Supine in -sum occurs :
A. In verbs whose Present-stem is strengthened by t :
Ihend, flexum. plect-o,plexum.
pect-o, Icornb, pexum. nect-o, I Tenet, bind, nexum.
B. Some, whose characteristic is preceded by a Liquid : merg-o, I dip,
mer-sumj terg-o, I wipe, ter-sum; parc-o, I spare, par-sum; sparg-o,
I sow, scatter, spar-sum ; mulce-o, 1 stroke, mul-sum.
C. In some the ending -sum prevents confusion with othei- words :
fingo, I shape, makes fic-tum ; but figo, I fasten, fix-um; So mul-sum,
from mulc-eo, I stroke, distinguishes it from multum, much.
CHANGE OP CONJUGATION. 87
Remakk.—The K-mutes are dropped in the Perfect and Supine between 1-s, 1-t, r-s,
r-t: fulc-io, ful(c)-sî, ful(c)-tuin; torqu-eo, / twist, tor(qu)-sï, tor(qu)-tum
(See 160.)
3. Consonant-stems in a T-mute take "Snm in the Supine :
ed-o, I eat, i-sum (for ed-sum) ; lüd-o, I play, lü-sum ; dëfend-o, I ward
off, defensum.
4. Liquid-stems have partly -turn, partly -sum. Stems in m
and n take -tum ; stems in 1 and r take -sum :
em-o, Ihuy^ em-tum; veni-o, I come, ven-tum ; can-o, I idng, can-turn.
ver-sum, from ver-ro, I sweep; fal-sum, from fall-o, I cheat; vul-sum,
from vell-o, I pluck.
Exceptions.—A. Liquid-stems which in the Perfect pass over to the
2d Conjugation have -tum, with or without connecting-vowels : al-o,
I nourish, al-i-tiun or al-tum.
B. To be distinguished from other forms : par-turn, from pari-o, I bring
forth ; but par-sum, from paro-ere, to spare : sal-tum, from sali-o, I leap ;
but sal-sum, from sali-o, I salt.
C. Man-smn, from mane-o, I remain.
II. The Future Active Participle is formed regularly from
the Supine ; in some verbs, however, from the Present-stem.
Juvätürus, ahout to help, from juvare ; secätürus, from secare, to cut ;
sonätürus, from sonare, to sound ; lavätürus, from lavare, to wash ; but
adjütürus, from adjuvare, to help ; moritürus, from morior, I die ; oritü-
rus, from orior, I rise ; paritùrus, from parlo, I bring forth ; agnötürus,
from agnosoo, I recognize ; näsoitürus, from nasoor, I am born.
In some U-stems it is formed by means of the connecting-vowel I : arguitürus, from
arguo, I accuse; abnuitûrus, from abnuo, I refuse ; luitürus, from lu-o, I wash off,
ruitürus, from ruo, I rush ; fruitürus, from fruor, I enjoy.
155. Euphonic Laws
in the conversion op the consonant-characteristic.
Characteristic b before s and t becomes p :
sorib-o, I write, sorip-si, sorip-tum.
Characteristic g and qu before t become c :
leg-o, I read, leo-tum ; ooqu-o, I bake, ooo-tum.
Characteristic c, g, and qu with s become x :
dio-o, I say, dixi {= dio-si).
jung-o, I join, junxi {= jung-si).
88
CHANGE OF CONJUGATION.
coqu-o, I cook, coxî (= coqu-sî),
stingu-o, I poke {out), stinxL
Characteristic t and d before s are dropped, or become by as¬
similation ss :
ed-o, I eat, e-sum (=: ed-sum) ; ced-o, I give way, cës-sï (= ced-si).
mitt-o, I send, mi-si (= mit-si), mis-siun (= mit-sum).
156.
Change of Conjugation.
A change of Conjugation arises when a vowel (e, i, a), or one
of the strengthening suffixes of the Present, is added to the pure
stem. The following instances occur :
1. Consonant-stems, regular in the Perfect and Supine, pass over in the
Present-stem into one of tlie vowel-conjugations.
auge-0,
augë-re,
aux-I,
auc-tam,
to increase.
senti-o,
senti-re,
sen-si.
sen-sum.
to feel.
sëpi-o,
sëpi-re,
sêp-si,
septum,
to hedge in.
veni-o,
venire,
vën-i,
ven-tum.
to come.
video,
vidë-re,
vid-i,
vi-sum.
to see.
vinci-o,
vinci-re.
vinx-i,
vinc-tum.
to bind.
Remark. —As these verbs form Perfect and Supine from the pure stem regularly, like
the others of the 3d or Consonant-Conjugation, they are placed among the verbs of the 3d
Conjugation in the list below.
2. Vowel-stems, in consequence of a strengthened Present, pass over
into the 3d Conjugation, but form Perfect and Supine from the vowel-
stem.
ere sc-''
li-n-t
cre-sc-ere,
lin-ere,
crë-vî,
li-vi (lë-vî),
crë-tum,
li-tum,
to grow,
to besmear.
3. Consonant-stems form the Present regularly according to the 3d
Conjugation, but pass in the Perfect and Supine into the 2d or 4th Con¬
jugation.
frem-o,
pet-o,
frem-ere,
pet-ere,
frem-ui,
pet-ivx,
frem-i-tum,
pet-itum,
4. Vowel-stems vary among the Vowel-Conjugations.
crep-o, I. crepa-re, I. crep-ui, II. crep-ituin, II.,
aperi-o, IV. aperi-re, IV. aper-ui, II. aper-tum,
to growl,
to fall upon.
to cracMe.
to uncover.
5. dare, to give, and stare, to stand, in the Perfect, in consequence of
reduplication, pass over to the 3d Conjugation.
Remark.—Verbs mentioned under 2, 3, 4, and 5 as suffering change of Conjugation,
are specially marked in 176-180.
MUTE-STEMS.
89
157-
capi-o (cap-),
ac-cipi-o,
rump-o (rup ),
158.
carp-o,
dë-cerp-o,
nüb-o,
rëp-o,
soalp-o,
scrib-o,
sculp-o,
serp-o,
sëpi-o (saepi-o),
5orbe-o,
Stems im a P-mute.
Supine: -tum.
Perfect.—1. After a short stem-syllable, Perfect m -ï.
cap-ere,
ac-cip-ere,
rump-ere.
cëp-î,
ac-cëp-i,
rüp-i.
cap-turn,
ac-cep-tum,
rup-tum.
2. After a long stem-syllable, Perfect in -si.
carp-ere,
de-cerp-ere,
nub-ere,
rëp-ere,
scalp-ere,
scrib-ere,
sculp-ere,
serp-ere,
carp-sl,
dë-cerp-si,
nüp-si,
rëp-si,
scalp-si,
scrip-si,
sculp-si,
serp-si.
carp-tum,
dë-cerp-tum,
nup-tum,
rep-tum,
scalp-tum,
scrip-tum,
sculp-tum,
serp-tum.
clep-o,
lamb-o.
sëpi-re,
sorbë-re.
clep-ere,
lamb-ere.
With change of Conjugation.
sëp-tum.
sëp-si,
(sorp-si) sorbui.
Exceptions.
clep-si (clëp-i),
lamb-i.
clep-tum,
(lamb-i-tum).
to take,
to receive,
to break.
to pluck,
to pluck off.
to put on a veil
(as a brid^).
to creep,
to scrape,
to write,
to chisel,
t/) creep.
to hedge in.
to sup up.
to filch,
to lick.
Stems im a K-mute.
Supine : -tum.
159. Perfect.—After a short stem-syllable. Perfect in -i.
a. Pure stem.
ago,
ag-ere.
ëg-i,
actum.
to do, drive.
c5-g-o.
co-g-ere.
co-ëg-i.
co-ac-tum,
to compel.
dë-g-o.
dë-g-ere.
—
to pass (time).
red-ig-o.
red-ig-ere,
red-ëg-i.
red-ac-tum,
to bring back.
faci-o.
fac-ere.
fëc-i.
fac-tum.
to make.
cale-faci-o (calf.),
cale-fac-ere
cale-fëc-i.
cale-fac-tum.
to make warm.
per-fici-o.
per-fic-ere.
per-fëc-i,
per-fec-tum.
to achieve.
fugi-o.
fug-ere,
fûg-i.
fug-i-tum.
to flee.
jaci^,
jac-ere.
jëc-i,
jac-tum.
to cast.
con-jici-o.
con-jic-ere.
con-jëc-i.
con-jec-tum.
ta gather.
;eg-o.
leg-ere,
lëg-i.
lec-tum.
topick up,read.
col-lig-o.
col-lig-ere.
col-lëg-i.
col-lec-tum,
to gather.
So the other compounds, except di-lig-0, intel-lig-o, neg-lig-0, see 161.
90
MUTE-STEMS.
I>. Stem strengthened by N.
frang-o,
per-fring-o,
linqu-o,
re-linqu-o,
(pang-o),
com-ping-o,
vinc-o (VIC),
frang-ere, frëg-ï,
per-fring-ere,per-fr6g-î,
linqu-ere, liqu-ï,
re-linqu-ere, re-liqu-i,
(pang-ere), (p5g-ï),
com-pingere,com-pëg-ï,
vine-ere, vio-i,
frac-tum,
per-frac-tum,
re-lic-tum,
(pac-tum),
com-pac-tum,
vic-tum,
io break,
to shiver,
to leave,
to leave behind.
comp. 2 b and 3,
to drive in.
to drive tight,
to conquer.
160. 3. After long stem-syllable, Perfect in -si.
a. Pure stem.
dic-o,
diic-o,
fig-o,
-flig-o (con-, af-, in-),
frig-o,
sñg-o,
dio-ere,
düc-ere,
fîg-ere,
-fiig-ere,
frig-ere,
süg-ere,
dixi (dio-si),
dûxi,
fixi,
-flixi,
frixï,
sûxi,
dio-tum,
duo-tum,
fixum,*
-flio-tum,
frio-tum,
suo-tum.
With change of Conjugation.
auo-tum,
auge-o, aug-ëre, auxi,
frige-o, frig-ëre, (frixi), —
lûoe-o, lûoë-re, lûxi,
lûge-o, lüge re, lûxi, —
ô. Stem strengthened by N, which is retained in Perfect
in Supine ; the stem-syllable is therefore long by Position,
Supine without N.
to say.
to lead.
0 fasten,
to strike,
to parch,
to suek.
to cause to vtax.
to be chilled,
to give light,
to bein mourning.
and generally
fing-o.
fingere,
finxi,
fio-tum.
to form.
ping-o,
plng-ere,
pinxi.
pio-tum,
to paint.
string-o.
string-ere,
strinxi.
strio-tum.
to draw tight.
Supine with N.
ang-o,
ang-ere.
anxi.
to throttle., vex.
oing-o,
oing-ere,
oinxi.
oino-tum.
to gird.
ë-mung-o.
ë-mung-ere.
e-munxi.
ë-muno-tum.
to wipe the nose.
jung-o.
jung-ere,
junxi.
junc-tnm.
to yoke, join.
lingo,
ling-ere.
linxi.
lino-turn.
to lick.
ning-o,
ning-ere,
ninxi,
to snow.
pang-o,
pang-ere,
panxi.
pano-tum.
to drive in.
plang 0.
plang-ere,
planxi.
plano-tum.
to smite.
-stingu-o (ex-, dis-, re ), -stingu-ere,
-stinxi.
-s tino-turn.
to {stick) put out.
ting-o (tingu-o).
ting(u)-ere.
tinxi.
tino-tum.
to tvet, dye.
ung-o (ungu-o).
ung(u)-ere.
nnxi.
unc-tum.
to anoint.
With change of Conjugation.
sanoi-o.
sanoi-re.
sanxi.
sano-tum and
sanoitum.
to hallow.
vinoi-o.
vinoi-re.
vinxi.
vinc-tum,
to bind.
♦ The exceptions mentioned, 154, are marked with *.
MUTE-STEMS.
91
c. stem strengthened by T, Supine in -sum.
flect-o,
flect-ere.
flexi.
flexum,*
to bend.
nect-o,
nect-ere.
nexi (nexui), nexum,*
to knot.
pect-o,
pect-ere,
pexî.
pexum,*
to comb.
plect-o,
plect-ere;
(plexi).
plexum,*
to plait.
d. The K-mute dropped after L or R, and
before S or T.
merg-o,
merg-ere.
mer-sî.
mer-sum,*
to dip in.
sparg-o,
sparg-ere.
spar-si.
spar-sum,*
to strew.
con-sperg-o,
con sperg-er e, con-sper-si.
con-sper-sum.
to besprinkle.
terg-o (e-o),
terg-ere (ë-re),ter-sï.
ter-sum,*
to wipe.
With change of Conjugation.
alge-o,
algë-re.
al-sî.
—
to freeze.
farci-o (-ferci-o).
farci-re.
far-sl,
far-tum
to stuff.
fulci-o,
fulci-re.
ful-sl,
ful-tum.
to prop.
falge-o.
fulgë-re.
ful-si.
to glow.
indulge-o.
indulgë-re.
indul-si.
(indul-tum).
to give way.
mulce-o,
mulcë-re.
mul-si.
mul-sum,*
to stroke.
mulge-o.
mulgë-re.
mul-si.
mul-sum (ctum),* to milk.
sarci-o,
sarci-re.
sar-sî.
sar-tum.
to patch.
torque-o,
torquë-re.
tor-si.
tor-tum,
to twist.
ttirge-o,
turgë-re.
tur-si.
to swell.
urge-o,
urgë-re.
nr-sl.
to press.
Exceptions.
161. 1.
Stem-syllable short, but Perfect in -sï.
coqu-o,
coqu-ere.
coxî.
coc-tum,
to cook.
[-lig-o (leg-),
-lig-ere.
-lexi.
-lec-tum,]
di-lig-o,
di-lig-ere.
dl-lexi.
dîlec-tum.
to love.
intelligo or intellego,intellig-ere,
intel-lexï.
intel-lec-tum.
to understand.
negligo or neg-leg-o, neg-lig-ere,
neg-lexi.
neg-lec-tum.
to neglect.
(col-lig-ere, ë-lig-ere, 159)
[-lici-o (lac),
lic-ere.
-lexî.
-lec-tum,J
to lure.
(al-, il ) pel-lici-o.
pel-lic-ere.
pel-lexi.
pel-lec-tum.
to allure.
ë-llci-o,
ë-lic-ere.
ë-lic-nl.
ë-lic-i-tum.
to lure foidh.
[-spici-o (spec),
-spic-ere.
-spexî.
-spec-ttun,j
to peer.
(ad-, con-, dë-, in-).
per-spici-o.
per-spic-ere.
per-spexi.
per-spec-tum,
to see through.
reg-o.
reg-ere.
rexî.
rectum,
to keep right.
di-rig-o,
di-rig-ere.
di-rexi,
di-rec-tum.
to guide.
per-g-o,
per-g-ere.
per-rexî.
per-rec-tum.
to go on.
su-rg-o,
su-rg-ere.
sur-rexi.
sur-rec-tum.
to rise up.
teg-o,
tegere,
texî.
tectum.
to cover.
2.
Stem-syllable long, but
Perfect in -ï.
IC-O (defective),
ïc-ere.
ïc-ï.
ic-tum.
to strike.
Present stem rare : ic-it, Ic-itur, Ic-imur.
92
MUTE-STEMS.
162.
disc-0,
(pang-0,159, b),
parc-o,
3. With reduplicated Perfect,
disc-ere, di-dic-I, (disc-itûnis),
Compounds retain reduplication,
(pang-ere), pe-pig-î, pactum,
parc-ere,
com-parco (-perco), com-parc-ere, com-pars-i,
pe-perc-i (par-si), (par-sûrus),
posc-o,
pung-o,
inter-pungo,
tang-o (tag),
at ting-o,
163.
posc-ere, po-posc-i,
pung-ere, pu-pug-i,
inter pungere, inter-punxl.
to learn.
to drive a bar¬
gain,
to spare,
to save,
to claim,
to prick.
tang-ere,
at-ting-ere.
te-tig-I,
at-tig-i.
com-par-sum,
punctum,
inter-punc-tum,iío place points
between.
tac-tum, to tmch.
at-tac-tum, toborderupon.
Aspirate Stems m H and V.
The stems in H, and some in V, follow the Conjugation of the
K-mute stems.
Remark.—In these stems an original K-mute reappears, as, viv-0 for vi(g)V0, and
vixi for vig(v)si. Compare nix, (s) nig(v)s, snow.
Perfect, -si. Supine, -turn,
flu-ere, fluxi, (flux-us), to flow.
stru-ere, struxi, struc-tum, to build.
trah-ere, traxi, trac-tum, to drag.
veh-ere, vexi, vec-tum, to carry.
viV-ere, vixi, vie-tum, to live.
flu-o (flugv-),
stru-o (strugv-),
trah-o,
veh-o,
viv-o (vigv-),
co-nive-o (nigv-),
164.
With change of Conjugation.
c5-nivë-re, cö-nixi and ivi, —
to close
eyes.
the
Stems in a T-mute.
Supine : -sum.
Perfect.—1. The steins in D with short stem-syllable and all stems in
nd, have Perfect in -i.
(Many stems in -nd, with reduplicated Perfect, see 4 below.)
ac-cend-o.
ac-cend-ere,
ac-cend-i,
ac-cen-sum,
to kindle.
dë-fend-o,
dë-fend-ere.
dë-fend-i.
dë-fen-sum,
to strike away.
defend.
ed-o.
ed-ere,
ëd-i.
ë-sum (es-sum), to eat.
com-ed-o,
com-ed-ere.
com-ëd-i.
com-ë-sum and
com-es-tum,
to eat up.
fund-o (pud).
fund-ere,
füd-i,
fû-sum,
to pour.
mand-o,
mand-ere,
mand-i,
man-sum,
to chew.
prehend-o.
prehend-ere.
prehend-i.
prehen sum,
to seize.
scand-o,
scand-ere,
scand-i,
scan sum.
to climb.
a(d)-, de-scend-o,
de-scend-ere,
dê-scend-i,
dë-scen-sum,
to climb up.
down.
With change of Conjugation.
prande-o,
vide-o.
prandë-re,
vidë-re.
prand-i,
vidi,
pran-sum,
vi-sum.
to breakfast,
to see.
mute-stems.
93
165. 2, Stems in D and T, with long stem-syllable, have Perfect in -si.
claud-o.
claud-ere.
clau-sî.
clau-sum.
to shut.
con-, ex-olüd-o,
ex-clüd-ere,
ex-clû-si.
ex-clû-sum.
to shut up.
out.
laed-o.
laed-ere.
lae-sï.
lae-sum.
to harm.
col-lid-o,
col-lid-ere.
col-li-si.
col-li-sum.
to strike to¬
gether.
lüd-o.
lûd-ere.
lû-si.
la-sum,
to play.
plaud-o (ap-pland-o).
plaud-ere.
plau-sï.
plau-sum.
to clap.
ex-pl5d-o.
ex-pl5d-ere.
ex-plô-sï.
ex-plô-sum.
to hoot off.
rad-o.
räd-ere,
râ-si.
râ-sum.
to scratch.
rod-o.
rod-ere,
rô-sï.
ro-sum,
to gnaw.
trüd-o.
trüd-ere.
trû-sï.
trû-sum.
to push.
väd-o (in-, ë-).
-väd-ere.
-vâ-si.
-vâ-sum.
to go.
With change of Conjugation.
arde-o.
ardë-re.
ar-si.
ar-sum.
to be onßre.
ride-o.
rïdë-re.
rí-sí.
ri-sum.
to laugh
(at).
senti-o.
sentï-re.
sen-sî.
sen-sum.
to feel.
suâde-o.
suâdë-re.
suâ-sî.
suâ-sum.
to {make
sweet)
counsel.
166.
8. With assimilation.
a. In the Supine.
fodi-o.
fod-ere.
fôd-î.
fos-sum.
to dig.
mltt-o.
mitt-ere,
mi-si.
mis-sum,
to send.
pand-o.
pand-ere.
pand-ï.
pas-sum (pansum), to spread
out.
sede-o.
sedé re.
sëd-i,
ses-sum,
to sit.
h. In the Perfect and the Supine.
cëd-o,
cëd-ere,
ces-si.
ces-sum.
to yield.
quati-o.
quat-ere.
(quas-si).
quas-sum.
to shake.
con-cutio (per-, ex-), con-cut-ere.
coh-cus-sï.
con-cus-sum.
to shatter.
167.
di-vid-o,
quati-o,
cüd-o,
sid-o,
con-sid-o,
stride-o (-do),
vert-o,
re-vert-or,
Exceptions.
1. With short stem-syllable, but Perfect in -si.
di-vid-ere, di-vi-si, di-vi-sum,
quat-ere, (quas-si), quas-sum,
2. With long stem-syllable, but Perfect in -i.
cüd-ere, cüd-i, cü-sum,
síd-ere, sid-i,
In composition -sëdi, -sessuni,/ríwi sede-o-
con sid-ere, con-sëd-i, con-ses-sum,
stridëre (-ere),strïd-î,
vert-ere, vert-ï, ver-sum,
re-vert-ï, revert-i (active), re-ver-sum,
to part,
to shake.
to hammer,
to sit down.
to settle
down,
to whistle.,
screech,
to turn,
to turn
hack.
94
LIQUID-STEMS.
168. 4. With reduplicated Perfect.
The reduplication of the Perfect is dropped in compound verbs. (153 R.)
cad-o,
cad-ere,
ce-cid-I,
ca-sum.
to fall.
oc-cid-o,
oc-cid-ere,
oc-cid-i,
oc-ca-sum.
to'perish.
caed-o,
caedere,
ce-cid-i,
cae-sum,
to fell.
oc-cid 0,
oc-cid-ere,
oc-cld-l,
oc-ci-sum,
to kUl.
pend-o,
pend-ere,
pe-pend-i,
pen-sum,
to hang (tran-
cî ^ \
tend-o,
tend-ere,
te-tend-I,
ten-sum and -turn.
DlU ),
to stretch.
ex-tend-o
, ex-tend-ere
, ex-tend-i,
ex-ten-sum and -tum.
to stretch out.
os-tend-o,
os-tend-ere,
os-tend-i,
os-ten-sum (-tus),
to stretch at.
show (obs-t-).
With change of Conjugation.
morde-o,
mord5-re,
mo-mord-i,
mor-sum.
to bite.
pende-o,
pendë-re,
pe-pend-i,
to hangifaix.)
sponde-o,
spondë-re,
spo-pond-i,
spon-sùm,
to pledge one¬
self.
tonde-o,
tondS-re,
to-tond-i,
ton-sum.
to shear.
In some
verbs the strengthening N of the Present has been dropped.
In two verbs
even the reduplicated syllable has been dropped.
find-o,
find-ere,
fid-i,
fis-sum.
to cleave.
scind-o,
scind-ere,
scid-i.
scis-sum.
to split.
tund-o,
tund-ere,
tu-tud-I,
tun-sum and tü-sum.
to thump.
169. Liquid-Stems.
1. All liquid-stems have the stem-syllable short.
Exceptions.—1. Contracted forms : sü-mo (sub-imo) ; p5-no (po-sino,
or posi-n-o).
2. Original sibilant stems : haere-o, haes-.
2. Most liquid-stems, by means of the suffix e, pass over into
the 2d Conjugation, or in the Perfect, at least, suffer change of
Conjugation.
3. Those which follow the Bd Conjugation throughout take 1
in the Perfect, and in the Supine either -simi or -tum. They
lengthen the stem-syllable in the Perfect, or retain the double
letter (rr, 11). Some form the reduplicated Perfect.
em-o, em-ere, ëm-I, em-tum, to take, to buy.
So, too, co-em-o, I buy up. But the compounds with ad-, ex-, inter-,
red-, take -im-o. So dir-im-o, I sever.
inter-im-o, inter-im-ere, inter-ëm-I, inter-em-tum, to make way with.
The other compounds of em-o contract : c5-mo, dë-mo. prö-mo, sü-mo,
and have -si in the Perfect, generally with a p between, which is gene¬
rated by the coming together of a labial and sibilant or dental. Comp.
hiem(p)s.
STEMS m s.
95
côm-0, cöm-ere, cômp-sï, cömp-tum, to adorn.
dëm-o, dëm-ere, dêmp-sî, dëmp-tum, to take away.
pröm-o, prom ere, prömp-si (prôm-sï), prömp-tum (prSmtum), to take out.
süm-o, süm-ere, sümp-si (sûm-si), sümp-tum (sûmtum), to take.
The same formation occurs in the stem -tem-. Present, temn-o, I scorn.
con-temn-o.
-temn-ere, -temp-si (msi).
-temp-tum (mtum).
to despise.
170. 1.
With the characteristic doubled.
psall-o.
psall-ere, psall-i.
—
to play oti the
cithern.
sall-o.
sall-ere, sall-i.
sal-sum.
to salt.
vell-o.
vell-ere, vell-i (vul-si).
vul-sum.
to pluck.
verr-o.
verr-ere, verr-i (rare),
ver-sum,
to sweep.
2. With
change of Conjugation in
the Present.
veni-o.
veni-re, vën-i.
ven-tum.
to come.
3. With
reduplicated Perfect.
can-o.
can-era, ce-cin-i.
can-turn.
to sing.
curr-o.
curr-ere, cu-curr-i.
cur-sum.
to run.
fall-o.
fall-ere, fe-fell-i.
fal-sum.
to cheat.
pari-o.
par-ere, pe-per-i.
par-tum * (paritürus).
tobring forth.
com-peri-o
, com-peri-re, com-per-i.
com-per-tum.
to find out.
re-peri-o.
re-peri-re, rep-per-i,
re-per-tum.
to find.
pell-o.
pell-ere, pe-pul-i.
pul-sum.
to push, drive
back.
per-cell-o.
per-cell-ere, per-cul-i.
per-cul-sum.
to smite down.
toll-o,
toll-ere, sus-tul-i.
sub-la-tum,
to lift up.
171. Appaebnt liquid-stems in" r.—In the liquid-stems in
r with long stem-syllable, the r has arisen from s. The original
s reappears in the Perfect and Supine : hence the endings -si in
the Perfect (or by assimilation -ssl), and -stum (-sum) in the
Supine.
haere-o, haerë-re, hae-si,
hauri-o, hauri-re, hau-si,
ùr-o, üre-re, ûs-si,
com-bür-o, com-bür-ere, com-bús-sl,
With short stem-syllable,
ger-o, gerere, ges-sï,
haes-um,
haus-tum,
üs-tum.
com-büs-tum,
to stick (to),
to drain,
to bum.
to tmrn up.
to carry.
ges-tum (see tostum, 128),
Stems in S.
172. 1. The stems in s preceded by a vowel have in general
changed it to r. Unchanged appears only:
vis-o, vis-ere, vi-si, vi-sum, to visit.
2. Stems in s preceded by a consona/nt are :
deps-o, deps-ere, deps-uï, depa-tum, to knead.
pins-o, pins-ere, pins-ui, -i, pins-i-tum (pis-txim, pin-
sum), to pound.
tex-o, tex-ere, tex-uî, tex-tum, to weave.
These have undergone change of Conjugation in the Perfect. (See
176.)
96
STEMS IN U.
Stems in U.
PERFECT IN -L SUPINE IN -turn.
173. 1. With characteristic preceded by a consonant.
ab-lu-o,
ab-lu-ere,
ab-lu-î,
ab-lff-tum.
to wash off.
ab-nu-o,
ab-nu-ere,
ab-nu-i,
(ab-nu-itur-us),
to dissent.
acu-o,
acu-ere,
acu-i,
acu-tum,
to sharpen.
ad-nuo (an-nu-o),
ad-nu-ere,
ad-nu-i,
to nod assent-
argu-o,
argu-ere,
argu-i.
argu-tum,
to accuse.
con-gru-o,
con-gru ere,
con-gru-I,
to agree.
ex-u-o,
ex-u-ere,
ex-u-i,
ex-ü-tum.
to put off, doff.
im-bu-o.
im-bu-ere,
im-bu-i,
im-bü-tum,
to dip, dye.
in-du-o.
in-du-ere,
in-du-i,
in-dû-tum,
to jmt on, don.
lu-o.
lu-ere.
lu-i.
lu-itflr-us.
to atone foi'.
metu-o.
metu-ere.
metu Î,
to fear.
minu-o,
minu-ere,
minu i,
minü-tum,
to lessen.
plu-o,
plu-ere,
plu-it, plüv-it,
to rain.
ru-o,
ru-ere,
ru-î,
ru-tum (ruitürus),
to rush down.
spu-o,
spu-ere,
spu-i,
sputum,
to spew.
statu-o,
statu-ere,
statu-i,
statü-tum,
to settle.
sternu-o,
sternu-ere,
sternu-i,
—
to sneeze.
su-o.
su-ere,
su-I,
sû-tum.
to sew.
tribu-o,
tribu-ere,
trlbu-I,
tribü-tum.
to allot.
174. 2. With characteristic preceded by a vowel.
After a vowel, u appears as v, but in the Supine it suffers, as a vowel, contraction with
the vowel preceding it (generally with change of conjugation).
cave-0.
cavë-re,
câv-I,
cau-tum,
to take heed.
fave-o.
favë-re.
fiiv-i,
fau-tum,
to he well-dis¬
posed.
fove-o.
fovë-re.
fëv-I,
fë-tum.
to keep warm.
juv-o,
juvä-re.
jûv-î.
jû-tum (juvâtûrus).
to help.
ad-juv-o.
-juvä-re.
-jûv-i,
-jû-tum (-jû tûrus).
to stand by as
aid.
(lav-o,)
(lav-ere,)
lâv-i,
lau-tum (15-tum),
to wash.
lav-o.
lavä-re.
(lavä-vl,)
lavâ-tum,
to wash.
move-o.
movë-re.
mov-I,
mô-tum.
to move.
pave-o.
pavë-re.
pâv-i,
to quake {with
fear).
vove-o.
vovë-re,
v5v-I,
vS-tum,
to vow.
The same reappearance of v occurs in :
ferve-0 (o),
fervë-re (ere), ferv-i (ferb-ui),
to seethe.
solv-o,
solv-ere.
solv-i,
solû-tum.
to loose, pay.
volv-o,
volv-ere.
volv-î,
volû-tum.
to rdl.
deponents.
97
DEPONENTS.
175. Kemaeks.—1. Deponent verbs are passive forms which
have lost their passive or reflexive signification.
2. Stems strengthened by so or isc have generally an inchoa¬
tive meaning. Comp. 152, V.
1. Stems
in a P-müte.
1. ad-ip-isc-or,
ad-ip-isc-l,
ad-ep-tus sum.
to (fasten to one's
self) attain.
2. läb-or,
lab-I,
lap-sus sum.
to glide.
2, Stems
in a k-mute.
1, a. pro-fic-isc-or,
pro-fic-iso-ï,
pro-fec-tus sum.
to (get forward)
set out.
2, b. fung-or.
fungi,
func-tus sum.
to discharge.
nanc-isc-or.
nanc-isc-i.
nac-tus (nanc-tus) sum.
to get.
c. am-plect-or,
am-plect-i.
am-plex-us sum.
to twine ro/und.
embrace.
d. ulc-isc-or,
ulo-isc-i,
ul-tus sum.
to avenge.
Ex.e.experg-isc-or, (-reg-) ex-per-g-isc-i, ex-per-rec-tus sum,
to (right one''s self
up) awalce.
4. pac-isc-or,
pac-isc-I,
pac-tus sum (pepigi).
to drive (a bar¬
3. Stems
gain).
in H and V.
fru-or (frugv-),
fru-i,
fruc-tus, fru-i-tus sum.
to enjoy.
veh-or,
veb-i,
vec-tus sum.
to (waggon) ride.
4. Stems
in a T-mute.
2. assenti-or,
assenti-ri,
assen-sus sum.
to assent.
3, fate-or,
fate-ri,
fas-sus sum.
to confess.
con-fite-or.
con-fitë-ri,
con-fes-sus sum.
to confess.
3. gradi-or,
grad-i,
gres-sus sum.
to step.
ag-gredi-or,
ag-gred-i,
ag-gres-sus sum.
to attack.
2. nït-or(gnict-) i
nit-i,
ni-sus (nix-US) sum, i
to stay one's self
from genu, f
n!-sürus, 1
on.
2, ordi-or.
ordi-ri,
or-sus sum.
to begin.
3, pati-or.
pat-i.
pas-sus sum.
to suffer.
per-peti-or,
per-pet-i.
per-pes-sus sum.
to endure to the
end.
2. ut-or.
ût-ï,
Ü-SUS sum,
to use.
5. Stems in a Liquid.
com-min-isc-or.
com-min-isc-I, com-men-tus sum,
to think up, de¬
vise.
ex-peri-or,
ex-peri-ri.
ex-per-tus sum.
to try.
misere-or,
miserë-ri.
miser-i-tus sum.
to pity.
6. Stems in R eoe S.
quer-or.
quer-i.
ques-tus sum,
to complain.
7. Stems in TJ.
1. loqu-or^
loqu-i.
locü-tus sum.
to speak.
sequ-or,
£.equ-i.
secu-tus sum,
to follow
2. ob-]iv-isc-or.
ob-liv-isc-I,
ob-li-tus sum.
to forget.
o
CHANGE OP CONJUGATION.
Change of Conjugation.
(Compare 156.)
A.
176. 1. Verbs of the 1st Conjugation which pass over into the 2d in
the Perfect and the Supine.
WITH CONNECTING-VOWEL.
crep-o,
cub-o,
dom-o,
mic-o,
di-mic-Oi
crepa-re,
cubs-re,
domS-re,
micS-re,
dl-micS-re,
sona-re,
plic-o (ex-plic-o), plica-re,
(The Bimple rare.)
son-0,
ton-o,
vet-o,
fric 0,
nec-o,
ë-nec-o,
sec-o,
crep-ul,
cub-ul,
dom-ul,
mic-ul,
dl-micS-vI,
plic-ul (plicS-vI),
son-ul,
crep-itum,
cub-itum,
dom-itum,
dl-micS-tum,
to rattle,
to lie.
to tame,
to quiver, flash,
to flght (omQ.
plic-itum (-S-tum), to fold.
son-itum (sonS-tu-
rus).
tonS-re, ton-ul,
vetS-re, vet-ul, vet-itum,
WITHOUT CONNECTING-VOWEL.
fricS-re, £ric-ul, fric-tum (-S-tum),
uecS-re, necS-vI, necS-tum,
ë-necS-re, ë-nec-ui (-S-vî), ë-nec-tum,
secS-re, sec-uï, sec-tum.
to sound,
to thunder,
to forbid.
to rub.
to kill,
to kill off.
to cut.
2. Verbs of the 3d Conjugation which pass over into the 2d in the Per-
feet and the Supine.
WITH
CONNECTING-VOWEL.
ac-cumb-o.
ac cumb-ere, ac-cub-ui.
ac-cub-ltum.
to lie down.
frem-o.
frem-ere.
frem-ui.
frem-itum.
to roar, rage.
gem-o.
gem-ere.
gem-ul.
gem-itum.
to groan.
gi-gn-O (SEN-),
gi-gn-ere.
gen-ui.
gen-itum.
to beget.
mol-o.
mol-ere.
mol-uï.
mol-itum.
to grind.
strep-o.
strep-ere.
strep-ul.
strep-itum.
to make a din.
vom-o.
vom-ere.
vom-ul.
vom-itum.
to vomit.
WITHOUT CONNECTING-VOWEL.
al-o.
al-ere.
al-ul.
al-tum, al-itum.
to nourish.
col-o.
col-ere.
col-ul,
cul-tum.
to cultivate.
consul-o.
consul-ere.
consul-ul.
consul-turn.
to consult.
frend-o (e-o).
frend-ere.
(frend-ui).
&ë-sum, fres-sum, to gnash.
occul-o.
occul-ere.
occul-ul.
occul-tum.
to conceal.
rapi-o.
rap-ere.
rap-ul.
rap-tum.
to snatch.
cor-ripi-o.
cor-rip-ere.
cor-rip-ui.
cor-rep-tum.
to seize.
ser-o.
ser-ere.
—
to string (ov,C).
dë-ser-o.
dë-ser-ere.
dë-ser-ul.
dë-sertum.
to abandon.
So, too, deps-o, I knead, tex-o, I tveave, and pinso, I pound.
(See 172.)
WITHOUT
SUPINE.
compesc-o.
compesc-ere, compesc-ul.
to curb in.
cou-cin-o (oc-.
con-cin-ere.
con-cin-ul.
to sing togetJm
prae-).
ex-cel-sus.
to surpass.
ex-cell-o, (ante-,
ex-cell-ere.
ex-cell-ul.
prae).
to snore.
stert-o.
stert-ere.
stert-ui.
trem-o.
trem-ere.
trem-ul.
to tremble.
CHANGE OF CONJUGATION.
99
3. Verbs of the 4th Conjugation which pass over into the 2d in the Per¬
fect and the Supine.
amici-o, amici-re, amic-uî (amixi), amic-tum, to clothe.
aperi-o, aperi-re, aper-ui, aper-tum, to open.
operi-o, operi-re, oper-ui, oper-tum, to cover up.
sali-o, sali-re, sal-ui, sal-tum, to leap.
d6-sili-o, dë-sili-re, dë-sil-ui, (dë-sul-tum,) ta leap down.
4. Verbs of the 3d Conjugation which pass over into the 4th in the Per¬
fect and Supine.
arcess-o, arcess-ere, arcess-ivï, arcess-ïtum, ta send for.
So, too, lacess-o, I tease., capess-o, Hay hold of.
in-cess-o, in-cess-ivi (cessi), to attack.
So facess-o, 1 cause., make off.
cupi 0, cup-ere, cup-ivi, cup-itum, to desire.
pet-o, pet-ere, pet-ivi, pet-itum, to seek (fly at).
quaer-o, quaer-ere, quaes-ïvî, quaes-itum, to seek.
quaeso, quaesumus, are old colloquial forms, prythee.
con-quîr-0, con-quir-ere, conquis-ivi, con-quis-itum, to hunt up.
rud-o, rud-ere, rud-ivi, rud-itum, to roar.
sapi-o, sap-ere, sapivi(-uï), to have a flavor.
5. Verbs which vary between the 2d and the 4th Conjugation,
cie-o (ci-o), cië-re (ci-re), ci-vi, ci-tum(ci-tum), to stir up.
con-citus, per-cit-us, ex-ci-tus, or excitus, but ac-ci-tus.
6. Verbs which pass over into the 3d Conjugation in the Supine.
p5t-o, pötä-re, pötä-vi, po-tum (po) or
p5t-atum,
pö-türus,
potä-türiis, to drink.
1 ? •
177. Change op Conjugation as result op Keduplioation.
d-5, da-re, ded-i, da-tum, to give, put, do.
Eemabk.—Everywhere a-short, except in däs, thou givest, and dä, give thou.
1. Like do, are conjugated the compounds with dissyllabic words, such as :
circum-do, I surround ; satis-do, I give bail ; pessum do, / ruin ; vënum-do, I sell / as :
circum-d-o, circum-da-re, circum-de-di, ciroum-da-tum, to swrrowwif.
2. The compounds of da-re with monosyllabic words pass over wholly
into the 3d Conjugation.
ab-d-o, ab-d-ere, ab-did-i, ab-d-itum, ta put away.
ad-d-o, ad-d-ere, ad-did-i, ad-d-itum, ta put to.
con-d-o, con-d-ere, con-did-i, con-d-itum, to put up
(found).
abs-con-do, abs-con-d-ere, abs-con-d-i, abs-con-d-itum,toi>«i/aratoay.
( didi),
crëd-o, crë-d-ere, crë-did-i, crë-d-itum, to put faith.
dë-d-o, dë-d-ere, dë-did-i, dë-d-itum, ta give up,
ë-d-o, ë-d-ere, ë-did-i, ë-d-itum, ta put ou,t.
in-d-o, in-d-ere, in-did-i, in-d-itum, to put in.
per-d-o. per-d-ere, per-did i, per-d-itum, ta fordo (ruin).
prö-d-o, pr5-d-ere, prö-did-i, prö-d-itum, to betray.
red-d-o, red-d-ere, red-did-i, red-d-itum, to give back.
tra-d-o, trä-d-ere, trä-did-i, trä-d-itum, to give over.
vën-d-o, vën-d-ere, vën-did-i, vën-d-itum, to put up to sale
100
CHANGE OP CONJUGATION.
178.
sto, I stand.
st-o,
sta-re.
st et-ï.
(stâ-tu-rus
i), to stand.
ad-st-0,
ad-sta-re,
ad-stit-I,
to stand l/y.
con-st-o,
con-sta-re.
con-stit-i.
to stand fast.
in-st-o,
in-sta-re.
in-stit-i.
to stand upon.
ob-st-o,
ob-sta-re.
ob-stit-i.
to stand out
against.
per-st-o,
per-sta-re,
per-stit-i.
to stand firm.
prae-st-o,
prae-sta-re.
prae-stit-i,
to stand ahead.
re-st-o,
re-sta-re.
re-stit-i,
—
to stand over.
dl-st-o.
dî-stâ-re.
—
to stand apart.
ex-st-o.
ex-stä-re.
—
to stand out.
circnm-st-o.
circum-stä-re.
circnm-stet-I
>
to stand round.
1. Like circum-sto, all compounds of stare with dissyllabic prepositions
have -stetî in the Perfect, as :
ante-sto, lam superior ¡ inter-sto, lam between; super-sto, I stand upon.
2. In other compounds the reduplicated fonn sisto is used, which, as a
simple verb, has the transitive meaning, I {cause to) stand, but in its com¬
pounds, the intransitive, I stand.
s i s t -0,
sist-ere,
(stit-i),
sta-tum,
to {cause to)
stand.
con-sist-o,
con-sist-ere.
con-stit-i.
con-sti-tnm.
to cometo a stand.
dë-sist-o (ab-).
dë-sist-ere.
dë-stit-i.
dë-sti-tum,
to stand off.
ex-sist-o,
ex-sist-ere.
ex-stit-i,
ex-sti-tnm,
to stand up.
ob-sist-o.
ob-sist-ere.
ob-stit-i.
ob-sti-tnm.
to take a stand
against.
re-sist-q.
re-sist-ere.
re-stit-i.
re-sti-tnm,
to withstand.
ad-sist-o,
ad-sist-ere.
ad-stit-i,
to stand near.
in-sist-o.
in-sist-ere,
in-stit-i.
to stand upon.
circnm-sist-o.
circum-sist-ere.
circum-stet-i.
to take a stand
round.
179.
c.
Change op Conjugation
as kesult op
stllengthened
Pkesent.
1. Present strengthened by n.
li-n-o.
lin-ere.
li-vi, or lëvi.
li-tuin.
to besmear.
si-n-o.
sin-ere.
si-vi,
si-tnm.
to let.
dë-sin-o.
dë-sin-ere.
de-sî-vi (iï).
dë-si-tum.
to leave of.
p5n-o (po-siNo),
pon-ere.
pos-ui.
posi-tnm.
to place, leave bo-
hind.
2. Present strengthened by sc- : compare
E (181).
cri-sc-o,
crësc-ere.
cpë-vi,
crë-tum.
to grow.
no SC O,
nösc-ere.
nô-vï,
(Adj. notas).
to learn to know.
co-gnosc-o.
co-gnösc-ere.
co-gnô-vi,
co-gn-itum.
to recognize.
So the other compounds of nosco, except ignosco, Ipardon, take no notice of, which
has Sup. ign5tum(adj. ignotas, nnknowri).
pä-vi, pas-tnm, to graze (trans.)
qniS-vI, qniS-ttun, to rest.
snë-vî, suS-tnm, to accustom one's
"df
pa-sc-o, pase-ere,
quie-sc-o, qniesc-ere,
sue-sc-o (as-, con-), snesc-ere.
INCHOATIVE VERBS.
101
D.
180. Some stems iii-r (-er) undergo change of conjugation as result of
Metathesis, which also is a strengthening of the Present. Ser-o, I sow, is a
reduplicated form for se-so.
cer-n-o,
dë-cern-o,
ser-o,
con-ser-o,
sper-n-o,
ster-n-o,
ter-o,
cern-ere,
dë-cern-ere,
ser-ere,
oon-ser-ere,
spern-ere,
stern-ere,
ter-ere,
(crë-vî),
dë-crë-vi,
së-vi,
con-së-vi,
sprë-vi,
strâ-vi,
tri-vi,
(crë-tum),
dë-crë-tum,
sa-tum,
con-s-itum,
sprë-tum,
strâ-tum,
tri-ttun,
to separate,
to decide,
to sow.
to despise,
to strew,
to rub.
E.
Inchoative Verbs.
[by
181. 1. The inchoatives are formed <(
y adding to the vowel-
stems -sc-,
] by adding to the conso¬
le nant-stems -isc-.
Perfect and Supine are formed from the pure stem.
inveterä-sc-o, inveteräsc-ere, invetera-vi, invetera-tum,
nä-sc-or, näsc-i, nä-tus sum,
ex-olë-sc-o, ex-olësc-ere, ex-olë-vl, ex-olë-tum,
to grow old.
to be bom.
to get one's growth.
Like exolësco, conjugate obsolësco, I grow old; but abolësco, I disappear, follows
aboleo, and inolësco has no supine.
ad-olë-sc-0,
ad-olësc-ere,
ad-olë-vî,
ad-ul-tum,
to grow up.
co-alë-sco.
co-alësc-ere,
co-al-ui.
(co-al-itum),
to grow together.
con-valë-sc-o,
con-valësc-ere.
con-val-ui,
con-val-i-tum,
to get wcU.
in-calô-sc-o.
in-calësc-ere,
in-cal-uï,
■—-
to get warm.
exardë-so-o,
ex-ardësc-ere,
ex-ar-si.
ex- ar-sum,
to take fire.
sci-sc-o.
scisc-ere,
sci-vi,
sci-tum,
to decree.
ad-sci-sc-o,
ad-scîsc-ere,
ad-sci-vi,
ad-sci-tum,
to take on.
ob-dormi-sc-o,
ob-dormisc-ere,
ob-dormi-vî,
ob-dormi tum,
to fall asleep.
oon-oup-isc-o.
con-cupisc-ere.
con-cup-ivi,
con-cupi-tum,
to long for.
(cup-ere).
in-gem-isc-o,
in-gemisc-ere,
in-gem-ul,
to sigh.
re-sip-isc-o.
re-sipisc-ere,
re-sip-ivi,
—
to come to one's senses.
(sap-ere),
re-viv-isc-o.
re-vivisc-ere.
re-vi-xi,
re-vic-tum,
to come to life again.
2. Inchoative Verba may be formed likewise from Nouns or Adjectives.
ë-vSn-esc-o,
ë-vânesc-ere.
ë-vân-ui.
(vänus).
to disappear.
irâ-sc-or,
îrâ-sci,
îrS-tus sum,
1 (ira),
to grow angry.
I am angry.
)
nöt-esc-o.
nôtesc-ere,
nöt-ui,
(nStus),
to become known.
vesper-asc-o,
vesperasc-ere,
—
(vesper).
to become evening.
102
IRRfiGULAP VERTÍS.
182, Change of Voice.
Neuter Passive Verbs.
aude-0, audS-re, au-sus sum, to dare.
fid-o, fîd-ere, fí-sus sum, to trust.
gaude-o, gaudê-re, gäv-isus sum, to rejoice.
[re-vert-or re-vert-I, re-vert-i, re-versus sum], to tum back.
sole-o, solë-re, sol-itus sum, to be wont.
Remarks.—1. Some Active Verbs have a Perfect Passive Participle with Active mean¬
ing, as : cënâtus, one whx) has dined., from cënâre, to dine ; pränsus, having breakfasted.,
from prandeo, I breakfast ; potus, drunken, from pöto, I drink ; jürätus, having taken
the oath, sworn, from jiiro, I swear ; conjürätus, a conspirator, from conjuro, I con¬
spire. Many such are used purely as Adjectives : consîderâtUS, circumspect, from con¬
sidero ; cautus, wary, from caveo, I beware.
2. The Perfect Participle of many Deponent Verbs has both Active and Passive mean¬
ing: adeptus (adipiscor), having acquired, or being acquired; comitâtus (comitor,
1 accompany) ; expertus (experior, I try) ; exsecrStus (exsecror, I curse) ; imitatus
(imitor, I copy) ; meritus imereor, I deserve) ; opinStus, necopinatus (opinor, 1
think) ; pactus (paciscor, I contract) ; partitus (partior, I distribute) ; sortitus (sortior,
Ï cast lots) ; tueor, 1 protect ; tütus« safe ; the Perf. Participle in ordinary use is tütätus
183. Irregular Verbs.
A.
Irregular in the Formation of the Tense-Stems.
Irresrular in the formation of the tense-stems are :
o
1. Two Verbs in a P-mute of the 3d conjugation, viz. :
depo, Ißlch. lambo, I lick. See 158.
2. Six Verbs of the 3d conjugation in a K-mute, which have, in spite of
the short stem-syllable, the Perfect in -si, viz. :
rego, I keep right. tego, I cover in. co^uo, I bake, and the compounds of
lego, Ipick up. lacio, Hure. specio, I spy (-ligo, -licio, -spicio).
From lego, however, only diligo, I love ; intellego, I understand ; and neglego,
I neglect; are irregular. The other compounds are regular. See 161.
3. Two Verbs of the 3d conjugation in a T-mute, which, in spite of the
short stem-syllable, have the Perfect in -si, viz. :
divido, Ipart. quatio, I shake. See 16T.
4. Four Verbs of the 3d conjugation in a T-mute, which, in spite of long
stem-syllable, have the Perfect in -i, viz. :
cüdo, 1 hammer ; sido, I sit ; strldeo, I whistle ; verto, I turn. See 167.
irregular verbs.
103
5. Assimilation between bs and ms occurs in the Perfect and Supine of
to order,
to press.
jube-o,
jub6-re,
jus-sl.
jus-sum.
prem-o (-prim-o),
prem-ere,
pres-sl,
pres-sum,
6. Special irregularities occur
in :
bib-o,
bib-ere,
bib-I,
(bib-itum).
mane-o,
manë-re,
man-sl,
man-sum.
mSti-or,
mëtl-rl,
men-sus sum,
met-o,
met-ere,
mes-sul.
mes-sum,
mori-or,
mor I,
mor tuus sum,
rauci-o,
raucl-re,
rau-sl,
rau-sum,
re-or.
r6-ri,
ra-tus sum,
This verb has no present participle.
7.
fer-o,
toll-o,
fer-re,
toll-ere,
tul-I,
sus-tul-i,
la-tum,
sub-la-tum,
to drink,
to remain,
to measure,
to^mow.
to die.
to be hoarse,
to think.
to bear,
to lift.
See 186.
184. B.
Irregular in the Conjugation of the Present-Stem.
Irregular in the conjugation of the Present-stem are:
1. ori-or, orï-rî, or-tus sum, to arise.
Present : ori-or, or-eris, or-itur, or-imur, or-imini, ori-untur.
Imperfect : ori-rer and or-erer. Gerund : ori-undus.
The compounds follow the simple verb, except ad-orï-rî, rise up at^ at-
taok, which follows the Fourth Conjugation.
2. i-re, to go. Stem i, which, before a, o, u, becomes e.
185. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
I go.
I he going.
—1. e-o,
e-a-m,
2. Î-S,
e-ä-s,
3. i-t,
e-a-t,
—1. i-mus,
e-a-mus,
2. i-tis,
e-ä-tis,
3. e-u-nt.
e-a-nt.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing.—2. i,
3.
Plub.—2. i-te,
8.
go thou,
go ye.
ï-t5,
i-tö.
thou shalt go,
he shall go,
i-töte, ye shall go,
e-u-nto, they shall go.
104
irregular verbs.
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Impbbpect.
i-ba-m, I went.
i-re-m, I were going.
Ï-VÎ (compos, -i-i), I have gone, i-veri-m (ex-i-eri-m).
Pluperfect.
î-vera-m (ex-i-era-m), I had gone, i-visse-m (ex-i-sse-m).
Future Perfect.
î-ver-5 (ex-i-er-ö).
INFINITIVE : Pres. i-re. Perf. î-visse (I-sse).
PARTICIPLES : Pres. i-e-ns. G. e-u-ntis. put. ACT. i-tür-us.
GERUND : e-u-nd-ï.
SUPINE : i-tum, to go.
The Passive occurs in some of the compounds : circum-ï-rï.
Compounds of eo are : vën-eo, I am for sale, and per-eo, I perish, which
serve as passives to ven-do and per-do, whose regular passives occur only
in the forms vend-itus, vênd-endus, and per-ditus.
The compound ambi-o, I solicit, follows the Fourth Conjugation
throughout.
Like î-re, to go, are conjugated qui-re, to he able, and ne-quï-re, to he unable,
which, however, are usual only in Present Indicative and Subjunctive.
3. fer-re, to hear.
186. The connecting-vowel 1 is dropped before t and s, and ô
before r. Some parts are supplied by tnl- (toi- tla-).
ACTIVE.
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
I hear.
Sing.—1. fer-5,
I he hearing.
Plur.—1. fer-i-mus.
3. fer-tis,
3. fer-u-nt.
3. fer-s,
3. fer-t,
fer-a-m,
fer-a-s,
fer-a-t,
ier-a-mus.
fer-a-tis,
fer-a-nt.
lEEEGULAR VEEBS.
105
SmG.—2. fer,
3.
Plue.—2. fer-te,
3.
IMPERATIVE.
bear tJiou,
bea/r ye,
fer-to,
fer-to,
fer-töte,
ihou ehalt bear,
he shall bear,
ye shall bear.
fer-u-ntô, they shall bear.
INDICATIVE.
Imperfect.
fer-ëba-m, 1 icas bearing.
Future.
fer-a-m, I shall bear.
Perfect.
tiil-x, I hare borne,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
fer-re-m, I were bearing.
INFINITIVE ; Pbes. fer-re.
PART. fer-e-ns, bearing.
SUPINE : la tum (t{o)la-tum).
tul-eri-m.
Perf. tul-isse.
Put, Act. lä-tür-us.
INDICATIVE.
PASSIVE.
Present.
I am borne..
Sing.—1. fer-o-r,
2. fer-ris,
3. fer-tur,
Pluk.—1. fer-i-mur,
2. fer-i-minl,
3. fer-u-ntur.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
I he borne.
fer-a-r,
fer-a-ris,
fer-a-tur,
fer-a-mur,
fer-ä-mini,
fer-a-ntur.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing.—2. fer-re,
3.
be thou borne,
Plur.—2. fer-i-minî, be ye borne.
3.
INDICATIVE.
Imperf. : fer-ëba-r.
Future : fer-a-r.
Perfect : lu-tus sum,
INF. fer-ri, to be borne.
fer-tor, thou shalt he borne,
fer-tor, he shall be borne.
fer-u-ntor, they shall be borne.
SUBJUNCTIVE,
fer-re-r.
la-tus sim.
GER. : fer-e-nd-us.
5Hc
106
IRREGULAR VERBS.
af-fer-0,
au-fer-o,
con-fer-o,
dif-fer-o,
ef-fer-o,
of-fer-o,
af-fer-re,
au-fer-re,
con-fer-re,
dif-fer-re,
ef-fer-re,
of-fer-re,
COMPOUNDS.
at-tul-i,
abs-tul-i.
con-tul-i,
dis-tuM,
ex-tul-i,
ob-tul-i,
al-lS-tum,
ab-la-tum,
col-la-tum,
dMS-tum,
ë-lâ-tum,
ob-lä-tum,
to hear to.
to bear away,
to collect,
to put off.
to carry out.
to offer.
Remark.—Suf-fero, I undergo, has the Perfect sus-tin-ul (sns-tul-l, sub-la-tum,
being appropriated to toll-o). (183.)
4. ed-ere, to eat.
187. In certain forms the connecting-vowels i and e are dropped
before s, t, and r j d before s (r) is dropped or assimilated (as ss), and before
t becomes s.
INDICATIVE.
I eut.
Sing.—1. ed-o,
2. ed-i-s, e-s,
3. ed-i-t, ë-st,
Plur.—1. ed-i-mus,
2. ed-i-tis, ês-tis,
3. ed-u-nt.
ed-ëba-m,
Sing.—2. ed-e, es,
'3.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
I be eating,
ed-a-m,
ed-ä-s,
ed-a-t,
ed-ä-mus,
ed-ä-tis,
ed-a-nt.
Imperfect,
ed-ere-m, ës-sem, I were eating.
I ate,
IMPERATIVE
eat thoUy
Plur.—2. ed-i-te, ës-te, eat ye,
3.
ed-i-to, ës-t5, tJiou shalt eat,
ed-i-to, ës-tô, he shall eat,
editöte, ës-tôte, ye shall eat.
ed-u-nto, they shall eat.
INFINITIVE,
ed-ere, ës-se, to eat.
5. fi-erl, to lecome.
188. Fï-o is conjugated in the Present, Imperfect, and Future, accord¬
ing to the 4th Conjugation, but receives a connecting-vowel in the Sub¬
junctive Imperfect and in the Infinitive, viz., fi-e-rem, I were becoming ;
fi-e-ri, to become. In these forms the i is short, but elsewhere it is long,
even before another vowel.
lEEEGULAE VEEBS.
íor
Pees.
ACTIVE,
fació, I make.
iMPEEF. faciëbam, I made.
Futukb. faciam, I shall make.
Peefect. fooL
Plupeef. ficerana.
r. Pbbf. ficero.
The infinitive ends in -ri, and the whole Verb in the Present-stem is
treated as the Passive to facio, I make The rest of the Passive is formed
regularly from facio.
PASSIVE.
IND. fio, I am made., I become.
fis, fit (fimus, fitis), fiunt.
fîëbam, I icas made, I became.
fiam, I shall be made {become).
factus sum.
factus eram.
factus er5.
SUB. fîam, fias, fiat, etc.
fierem, fierës, etc.
INF. Peef. factum esse, to have become.
Fut. futurum esse or fore.
F. P. factum fore.
eemaek. -The componiids of facio with Prepositions change the a of the stem into
i, and form the Passive regularly from the same stem : perflcio, I achieve. Pass, perficior ;
interficio, Pass, interficior, I am destroyed. But when compounded with words other
than prepositions, facio retains its a, and uses fio as its Passive :
patefacio, I lay open. Pass, patefio : calefacio, I ^varm. Pass, caleflo.
The accent remains the same as in the simple verb : calefáois, thou warmest.
189. 6. Vel-le, to be willing.
nolle, to be unwilling ; malle, to be willing rather.
volo,
vis,
vult,
volumus,
vultis,
volimt.
INDICATIVE.
Peesent.
nolo,
non vis,
non vult,
nolumus,
non vultis,
nölvmt.
malo,
mavis,
mävult,
mâlumus,
mävultis,
mälunt.
vclëbam.
volam,
volës.
Impeefect,
nôlëbam,
Futuee.
nölam,
nôlës,
Peefeot.
mâlëbam.
mâlam,
mâlës.
volui,
nôlui.
mâlui.
108
defective veebs.
velim,
veils,
velit,
velîmus,
velltis,
velint.
Vellern,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
nölim,
nolis,
nölit,
nölimus,
nölitis,
nölint.
IlIPERPECT.
nöllem,
mälim,
mälis,
mälit,
mälimus,
mälltis,
mälint.
mällem.
IMP.:
INF. Pres, velle,
Pbrp. voluisse,
PART. Velens.
190.
Sing.—noli, nölitö.
v*
Flur.—nölite, nölitöte, n5limt5.
nolle, malle,
nöluisse, mäluisse.
nölens.
Defective Verbs.
1. äjo, I say ay,
IND. Pres, 1. äjo, 2. ais, 3. ait. Plur.—3. äjunt.
Impbrp. âjëbam, etc. Perp. alt.
SUBJ. ^äs, äjat, s^ant.
PART, ëjens (as adj.), aßrmatwe.
2. inquam, I say, quoth I.
IND. Pres. Sing.— 1. inquam, 2. inquis, 3. inquit.
Plur.—1. inquimus, 2. inquitis, 3. inq-fliunt.
Imperp. 3. inquiebat.
Fut. 2. inquiës, 3. inquiet.
Perf. 2. inquisti, 3. inquit.
Plur.—2. inquistis.
Pres. fatur.
IMPER. fare.
ave,
avëte,
avëre.
3. fa-rl, to speah.
Fut. fäbor, fäbittir. Perp. fätus stun, etc. SUP. latü
GER. fandî, fandö. PART. Pres. fantis, fañtem.
4. avê-re, salvé-re, valë-re.
salvë, salvëbis, Tiaü thou ! valë, farewdl.
salvëte, hail ye ! farewell.
salvëre. valëre.
age, agite, cmn£ f apage, begone !
cedo,
gire,
Plur.—cette.
obsolete foems op the verb.
109
5.
In use only in the Perfect-stem are coepî, I liave begun, to which incipio
serves as a Present ; meminï, I remember ; odi, I hate ; novi (from nosco,
see 179), I know, am aware; consuivi (from consuesco), I am wont.
IND. coepî, I have begun. SUB J. coeperim,
coeperam, coepissem.
coeperS. INF. coepisse, to have begun.
IND. meminï, I remember, SUBJ. meminerim,
memineram, meminissem.
meminero. INF. meminisse, to remember.
IMPER. Seng.—memento. Plur.—mementote.
IND. ödi, I hate, SUBJ. öderim,
öderam, ödissem,
ödero. INF. ödisse, to hate.
coepî and ödi have passive forms of the same meaning :
coeptus sum, I have begun (which is used with the Passive Inf.).
osus sum, I hate.
191. Obsolete Forms of the Verb.
1. The Future of Verbs in -io is sometimes formed like ïbo, I shall go :
venibo, I shall come ; seibo, 1 shall know.
2. The Pres. Inf. Pass, was originally longer by -er : monsträrier,
miscërier, admittier, experirier.
3. The Pres. Subj. Act. had an ending -im (compare sim, velim) : edim,
edis, edit, edint, eat. Other examples, such as effodint, coquint, temperint,
cariut, seem to be doubtful. Dare formed duim; so, perduim, crêduim.
4. In older poetry ie of the Imperf. Ind. Act. 4th^conj. is sometimes con¬
tracted into i : scibam.
5. In the Perfect stem there was a shorter formation. So in the 2 Pers.
Perf. Act. Ind. 3 conj., dixti, dixtis (only from mute stems). The termi¬
nations -sim and -sem (Perf. and Pluperf. Subj.), -so (Put. Perf.), -se (Perf.
Inf.), are added to the verb stem. After a vowel s becomes ss. So dixim,
faxim, adaxim, rapsim; locassim, negassim; faxem, extinxem; faxo,
capso, jusso, amasso; surrexe, prötraxe, dixe. The Inf. forms of the
vowel conjugations coincide with amasse, flösse, audisse, as creasti, dë-
lësti, audisti with dixti. A Future Inf. in -sere is also found : impetras-
sere, prohibëssere. Compare, however, facessere, capessere.
The antiquated forms of facio are often found in old formulae.
6. Old forms of esse.
(1) siem, siës, siet, Pr. Subj.
(2) escit, escunt. Inchoative for Fut.
(3) fuam, fuas, fuat, fuant, Pr. Subj. (stem fu-).
(4) füvi, fovi, Pf. Ind.
110
IJÏiDEX OF VERES.
INDEX OF VERBS.
This Index is intended to serve as a supplement also, and contains
many verbs not mentioned in the text, defectives in supine or in perfect
and supine, compounds, isolated forms, rare words.
A.
Ab-do, ere, -didi, -ditum, 177.
Ab-igo (ago), ere, -5gl, -actum, 159.
Ab-jicio (jacio), ere, -jecl, -jectum,
159.
Ab-luo, ere, -lui, -lûtum, 173.
Ab-nuo, ere, -nut (-nuitûrus), 173.
Ab-oleo, 5re, Bvl, itum, 127.
Ab-ol5sco, ere, -ol5vI, 181.
Ab-ripio (rapio), ere, -ripui, -rep-
tum, 176. [177.
Abs-condo (do), ere, -di (-didi), ditum,
Ab-sisto, ere, -stitl, 178.
Ab-sum, -esse, ab-ful, ä-fui, 113.
Ac-cendo, ere, -cendi, -censum, 164.
Ac-cido (gado), ere, -cidi, 168.
Ac-cipio (cAPio), ere, -c5pl, -ceptum,
157.
Ac-colo (coLo), ere, -colul, -cultum,
176.
Ac-cumbo, ere, -cubul, -cubitum,
176.
Ac-curro, ere, ac-curri, -cursum, 170.
Aceo, 5re, acul, to he sour.
Acesco, ere, acul, 181, to get sour-
Ac-quiro (quaero), ere, -quisïvl,
-quisitum, 176.
Acuo, ere, acul, acutum, 173.
Ad-do, ere, -didi, -ditum, 177.
Ad-imo (emo), ere, -5ml, -emtum, 131.
Ad-ipiscor, I, ad-eptus sum, 175,182.
Ad-ol5sco, ere, -olSvI, -ultum, 181.
Ad-orior, -orlil, -ortus sum, 184.
Ad-sclsco, ere, -scivl, -scitum, 181.
Ad-sisto, ere, -stitl, 178.
Ad-spicio, ere, -spexl, -spectum, 161.
Ad-sto, -stäre, -stitl, 178.
Ad-sum, ad-esse, ad-ful, af-ful, 113.
Aegresco, ere, to fall sick.
Af-fero, -ferre, at-tull, al-lätum, 186.
Age, 190.
Ag-grediof, -gredi, -gressus, 175.
A-gnösco, ere, a-gnövl, a-gnitum
(agnötürus), 179.
Ago, ere, egl, actum, 159.
Ajo, 190.
Albeo, 5re, to be white.
Algeo, 5re, alsl, 160.
Al-licio, ere, -lectum, 161.
Al-luo, ere, -luí, lütura, 173.
Alo, ere, alul, al(i)tum, 176.
Amb-igo (ago), ere, 159.
Amb-io (eo), Ire, IvI (il), Itum, 185.
Amicio, Ire, amictum, 176.
Amo, äre, ävl, ätum. See 119.
Amplector, I, amplexus, 175.
Ango, ere, anxl, 160.
An-nuo, ere, annul (annütum), 173.
Ante-cello, ere, 176.
Ante-sto, -stäre, -steti, 178.
Apage, 190.
A-perio, -Ire, aperul, apertum, 176.
Apiscor, I, aptus sum. See adipiscor,
175.
Ap-peto, ere, Ivi, Itum, 176.
tum).
Ap-pöno (179), ere, -posul, -positum.
Arceo, 5re, arcul ( arctus,
(comp. 128) ( artus (adj.)
Arcesso (accemo), ere, arcessivl,
-Itum, 176.
Ardeo, 5re, arsi, arsum, 165.
ArSsco, ere, ärul, 181, to become dry.
Arguo. ere, argüí, ^ailSus,) "ä''
Ar-rÍDÍo (rapio), ere, ul, -reptum,
176.
A-scendo (scando), ere, I, scensum,
164.
A-spicio, ere, a-spexl, a-spectum, 161.
As-sentior, Irl, assensus sum, 175.
As-sideo (sedeo), 5re, -s5dl, -sessum,
166.
As-suesco, ere, -su5vl, -suBtum, 179.
At-texo, ere, -texul, -textum, 172.
At-tineo (teneo), ere, ul, -tentum,
128.
index of veebs.
Ill
At-tingo (tango), ere, attigl, attac-
tum, 162.
At-tollo, ere, to raise up.
Audeo, 5re, ausus sum, 182.
Audio, Ire, IvI, Itum. See 136.
Au-fero, -ferre, abstull, ablätum, 186.
Augeo, 5re, auxl, auctum, 156.
Av5, 190.
B.
Balbutie, Ire, to stutter.
Batuo, ere, ul, to pummel, fence.
Bibo, ere, bibi, (bibitum), 183.
C.
Cade, ere, cecidi, cäsum, 168.
Caecûtio, Ire, to he blind.
Caedo, ere, cecldl, caesum, 168.
Calefacio, ere, -fScI, -factum, 159,188.
CalBsco, ere, calul, to get warm.
Calleo, 5re, ul, to be skilled.
Calveo, ere, to be bald.
Candeo, ere, ul, to shine.
CSneo, ere, to be gray.
Cano, ere, cecini, cantum, 170.
Capesso, ere, capesslvl, Itum, 176.
Capio, ere, cbpl, captum, 157. See
139.
Carpo, ere, carpsi, carptum, 158.
Caveo, ere, cSvI, cautum, 174,
Cedo, ere, cessi, cessum, 166.
Cenätus, 182, R. 1.
C6n3eo,m-e.«I,,—
Cerno, ere, (crevi), (cretum), 180.
c!r [ Sé!' I''»-
Cingo, ere, cinxl, cinctum, 160.
Circum-do, -dare, -dedl, -datum, 177.
Circum-sisto, ere, stetl, 178.
Circum-sto, stäre, stetl, 178.
Claudo, ere, clausi, clausum, 165.
Clepo, ere, cleptum, 158, 183.
Co-alesco, ere, -alul, (-alitum), 181.
Co-arguo, ere, ul, 173.
Co-emo, ere, -emi, -em(p)tum, 169.
CoepI, coepisse, 190.
Co-gnosco, ere, -gnovl, -gnitum, 156,
179.
Cö-go (ago), ere, co-egl, co-actum,
159.
Col-lldo (laedo), ere, -llsl, -llsum,
165.
Col-ligo (lego), ere, -l5gl, -lectum,
159.
Col-lûceo, ere, -lûxl, 160.
Colo, ere, colul, cultum, 176.
Com-bûro, ere, -ñssl, -ûstum, 171.
Com-edo, ere, -edi, -esum (estum), 164.
Comitâtus, 182, R. 2.
Comminiscor, I, commentus sum,
175.
Com-moveo, ere, -mövl, -mötum, 174.
Cö-mo (emo), ere, cömpsl, cömptum,
169.
Com-parco, ere, -parsi, -parsum, 162.
Com-pello, ere, com-pull, -pulsum,
168, 170.
Com-perio (parto), Ire, com-perl,
com-per-tum, 170.
Compesco, ere, ul, 176.
Com-pingo, ere, -pegl, -pactum, 159.
Com-plector, I, com-plexus, 175.
Com-pleo, ere, evi, etuin, 127.
Com-primo (premo), ere, -pressl,
-pressum, 183.
Com-pungo, ere, -punxl, -punctum,
162.
Con-cido (cado), ere, -cidl, 168.
Con-cido (cabdo), ere, -cldl, -cisum,
168.
Con-cino (cano), ere, -cinul, 176.
Concitus (oxeo), 176.
Con-clûdo (claudo), ere,-clüsl,-clû-
sum, 165.
Con-cupisco, ere, -cupivl, cupitum,
181.
Con-cutio (quatio), ere, -cussi, -cus-
sum, 167.
Con-do, ere, -didi, -ditum, 177.
Con-fercio (parcio). Ire (fersl), fer-
lum, 160.
Con-fero, -ferre, -tull, collatum, 186.
Con-ficio (PACio), ere, -fëcl, -fectum,
159,188.
Con-fiteor (pateor), en, -fessus, 175.
Con-fringo (prango), ere, -fregi,
-fractum, 159.
Con-gruo, ere, congrui, 173.
Con-iicio (jacio), ere, -jeci, -jectum,
159.
Conjûratus, 182, R. 1.
Con.olveo,5re.p°«j).163.
Con-quii'o (quaero), ere, -quisivl,
-quisitum, 176.
112
INDEX OF VERBS.
Con-sero, ere, -serul, -sertum, 176.
Con-sero, ere, -s5vl, -situm, 180.
Con-siderStus, 182, R. 1.
Con-sldo, ere, consSdl, -sessum, 167.
Con-sisto, ere, -stiti, -stitum, 178.
Con-spicio, ere, -spexl,-spectum, 161.
Con-stituo (sTATUo), ere, ul, -stitii-
tum, 173.
Con-sto, -stare, -stitI, (coustätürus),
178.
Coü-suesco, ere, -suBvI, -su5tum, 179,
190.
Consulo, ere, consulul, -snltum, 176.
Con-temno, ere, -tem(p)sl, -tem(p)-
tum, 169.
Con-texo, ere, -texul, -textura, 172.
Con-tineo (teneo, 128), ere, ul, -ten¬
tara. .
Con-tingo (tango), ere, contigl, con¬
tactara, 162.
Convalesce, ere, -valul, -valitum, 181.
Coquo, ere, coxt, coctara, 161, 183.
Cor-rlpio (rapio), ere, -ripal, -rep¬
tara, 176.
Cor-rno, ere, corral, 173.
Crebresco, ere, crebrul, to get fre¬
quent.
Cre-do, ere, -didî, -ditara, 177.
Crepo, âre, crepui, crepitara, 176.
Cresco, ere, crevi, crëtam, 179.
Cabo, äre, cabal, cabitura, 176.
Cûdo, ere cüdl, casum, 167.
Cupio, ere, cuplvl, cupitura, 176.
Curro, ere, cacurrl, cursara, 170.
D.
De-cerno, ere, -erevi, -cretnra, 180.
De-cerpo (carpo), ere, si, tura, 158.
De-do, dedere, dedidi, deditura, 177.
De-fendo, ere, -fendi, -fensura, 164.
Defetiscor, I, to he worn out.
De-go (ago), ere, 159.
Deleo. See Paradigm, 123-126.
De-ligo (lego), ere, -legi, -lectura,
159.
De-rao (emo), ere, derapsi, deraptura,
169.
Depello (170), ere, depull, depulsum.
De-prirao (premo, 183), ere, -press!,
pressura.
Depso, ere, depsul, depstura, 172.
De-scendo (scando), ere, -scendl,
-scensura, 164.
De-sero, ere, -serai, -sertura, 176.
De-silio (SALIO), ire, S?'
DE-sino, ere, desilum, 179.
De-sipio (SAPio), -ere, X76.
De-sisto, ere, -stiti, -stitum, 178.
De-spicio, ere, -spexl, -spectum, 161.
De-sum, -esse, -ful, 113.
De-tendo (168), ere, -tendí, -tentara.
De-tineo (teneo, 128), ere, -ul, -ten-
turn.
De-vertor, -1,182.
Dico, ere, dixl, dictum, 160.
Dif-fero, -feiTe, distal!, diiätum, 186.
Dl-gnösco (nösco, 179), ere, -gnôvl.
Dl-ligo, ere, -lexl, -lectura, 161.
Dl-mico, äre, ävl, âtura, 176.
Dl-rigo, ere, -rexl, -rectum, 161.
Dir-irao (emo, 169), ere, -eral, -era-
tura.
Disco, ere, didicl, 162.
Dis-crepo, äre, -crepui (ävl), 176.
Dis-curabo (176), ere, -cuba!, -cubi
tum.
Dis-pesco, ere, [-pesca!,] -pestum, to
divide.
Dis-sideo (sedeo, 166), ere, -sed!.
Dl-stinguo, ere, -stinxl, -stinctum, 160.
Dl-sto, -stäre, 178.
Ditesco, ere, to grow rich.
Divido, ere, divisl, divisara, 167.
D5, dare, dedi, datara, 177.
Doceo, ere, docul, doctura, 128.
Domo, äre, ul, itum, 176.
Dûco, ere, düxl, düctura, 160.
Dulcesco, ere, to grow sweet.
Dûresco, ere, dùrul, to grow hard.
E.
Edo, ere, edi, esura, 164,187.
E-do (do), edere, edidi, editara, 177.
Ef-fero, -ferre, extall, elätura, 186.
Egeo, ere, egal, to want.
E-licio, ere, -lical, -licitara, 161.
E-ligo (lego), ere, -legi, -lectura, 159.
E-mico (176), äre, ul (ätürus).
Eraineo, ere, ul, to stand out.
Erao, ere, eral, emtura, 169. See 131.
Ë-neco, äre, enectura, 176.
Eo, Ire, Ivl, itum, 185.
E-vädo, ere, eväsl, eväsura, 165.
E-vänesco, ere, evänul, 181.
Ex-ardesco, ere, exarsi, exarsum, 181.
INDEX OF VERBS.
113
Ex-cello, ere, ul (excelsas), 176.
Excitas, 176.
Ex-clïido (CLAUDo), ere, -si, -sam,
165.
Ex-carro (170), ere, excacarri, -car-
sam.
Ex-ol5sco, ere, -olSvI, -olstam, 181.
Ex-pello (170), ere, -pall, -palsam.
Expergiscor, I, experrectas sam, 175.
Ex-perior, Irl, -pertas sam, 175,
182, K. 2.
Ex-pleo, 5re, 5vl, 5tam, 127.
Ex-plico, are, al (ävi), itam (ätam),
176.
Ex-plödo (PLAUDo), ere, -si, -sam, 165.
Exsecrätas, 182, R. 2.
Ex-stingao, ere, -stinxl, -stlnctam,
160.
Ex-sisto, ere, -stiti, -stitam, 178.
Ex-sto, äre (exstätüras), 178.
Ex-tendo, ere, dl, -sam (-tam), 168.
Ex-tollo, ere.
Ex-ao, ere, -al, -ätam, 173.
F.
Pacesso (176), ere, IvI (-1), Itam.
Pacio, ere, ffecl, lactam, 159, 188.
Fallo, ere, fefelll, falsam, 170.
Farcio, Ire, farsi, fartam, 160.
Färl, 190.
Pateor, 5rl, fassas sam, 175.
Patisco, ere, to fall apart.
Patiscor, I (fessas, adj).
Paveo, ere, fävl, faatam, 174.
Ferio, Ire, to strike.
Pero, ferre, tall, latam, 188,186.
Perveo, 5re, fervl (ferbal), 174.
Fido, ere, fisas sam, 182.
Figo, ere, fixl, fixam, 160.
Findo, ere, fidi, fissam, 168.
Pingo, ere, fiuxl, fictam, 160.
Flo, fieri, factas sam, 188.
Flecto, ere, flexi, flexam, 160.
Fleo, 5re, gyl, gtam, 127.
Fllgo, ere, fllxl, flictam, 160.
Floreo, Bre, al, to bloom.
Flao, ere, flaxi (fiaxas, adj.), 163.
Podio, ere, fodi, fossam, 166.
Forem, 112.
Poveo, 5re, fôvl, fStam, 174.
Frango, ere, frggl, fractam, 159.
Fremo, ere, al, itam, 176.
Frendo (eo), ere (al), fresam, fres-
sam, 176.
Frico, are, al, frictam (ätam), 176.
Frigeo, 5re (frixl), 160.
Frigo, ere, frixl, frictam (frixam),
160.
Frondeo, Bre, al, to be leafy.
Fraor, I, fractas (fraitas) sam, 175.
Fagio, ere, fügl, fagitam, 159.
Falcio, Ire, falsi, faltam, 160.
Falgeo, Bre, falsi, 160.
Fando, ere, fadl, füsum, 164.
Fangor, I, functns sam, 175.
(Faro, def.), farere, to rave.
Gr.
Gannio, Ire, to yelp.
Gaadeo, Bre, gavlsas sam, 182.
Gemo, ere, al, itam, 176.
Gero, ere, gessi, gestam, 171.
Gigno, ere, genal, genitam, 176.
Glisco, ere, to swell.
Gradior, I, gressas sam, 175.
H.
Haereo, Bre, haesl, haesam, 171.
Haario, Ire, haasi, liaastam,
(haasüras, liaasturas),
Hisco, ere, to yawn.
Horreo, Bre, al, to stand on end.
riortor, ârl, atas sam, 141,142.
I.
Ico, ere. Id, ictam, 161.
I-gnosco, ere, -gnovl, -gnötam, 179.
II-licio, ere, -lexl, -lectam, 161.
Il-lldo (laedo), ere, -llsl, -llsam, 165.
Imbao, ere, al, utam, 173.
Imitatas, 182, R. 2.
Immineo, Bre, to overhang.
Im-pingo (pango, 160), ere, -p5gl,
-pactam.
In-calesco, ere, -calal, 181.
In-cendo, ere, -cendl, -censam, 164.
Incesso, ere, IvI (I), 176.
In-cido (gado, 168), ere, -cidi, -ca-
sam.
In-cldo (caedo, 168), ere, -cidl, -cl-
sum.
In-cipio (capto, 157), ere, -cBpl, -cep-
tam.
In-crepo (crepo, 176), are, al, itam,
In-cnmbo (176), ere, -cabal, -cabi-
tam.
114
index of verbs.
In-cutio (qtjatio, 167), ere, -cussi,
-cussuin.
Ind-igeo (egeo), 5re, ul, to want.
Ind-ipiscor, i, indeptus sum, 175.
In-do, ere, -didi, -ditum, 177.
Indulgeo, 5re, indulsl (indultum), 160.
In-duo, ere, -dul, -dütum, 173.
Ineptio, Ire, to be silly.
Ingemisco, ere, ingemul, 181.
Ingruo, ere, ul. See congruo, 178.
Iu-nöt.esco (181), ere, nötui.
In-ol5sco, ere, -olövl, -olitum, 181.
Inquam, 190.
In-sideo (sedeo, 166), 5re, -sedl, -ses-
sum.
lu-sisto, ere, -stitl, 178.
In-spicio, ere, -spexl, -spectum, 161.
loter-ficio, ere, -fScI, -fectum, 159.
In-sto, äre, -stitl, (instatOrus), 178.
In-sum, -esse, -ful, 118.
Intel-ligo, ere,-lexl, lectum, 161, 183.
Inter-imo (emo), ere, -5ml, -emtuui,
169.
Inter-pungo, ere, -punxl, -punctum,
162.
Inter-sto, äre, -steti, 178.
Inter-sum, -esse, -ful, 113.
Inveterasco, ere, -ävl, 181.
In-vädo, ere, inväsl, -väsum, 165.
Iräscor, l, Irätus sum, 181.
J.
Jaceo, 5re, jacul, to lie.
Jacio, ere, j5cl, jactum, 159.
Jubeo, ere, jussl, jussum, 183.
Jungo, ere, junxl, junctum, 160.
Jürätus, 182, R. 1.
Juvo, äre, jüvl, jütum (juvätürus),
174.
L.
Labor, I, lapsus sum, 175.
Lacesso, ere, lacessivi, -Itum, 176.
Lacio, 161.
Laedo, ere, laesi, laesum, 165.
Lambo, ere, I, 158, 183.
Langueo, ere, I, to be languid.
Lateo, ere, ul, ta lie hid.
Lavo, are (ere), lävl, lautum, lötum,
lavätum, 174.
Lego, ere, legi, lectum, 159.
Libet, libere, libuit (libitum est), it
pleases.
Licet, licere, licuit (licitum est), it is
permitted.
Lingo, ere, linxl, linctum, 160.
Lino, ere, llvl (15vl), litum, 179.
Linquo, ere, llqui, 159.
Liqueo, ere, licul, to be clear.
Liveo, ere, to be livid.
Loquor, i, locutus sum. Paradigm^
145, 146.
Lüceo, ere, liixl, 160.
Ludo, ere, lûsl, íüsum, 165.
Lûgeo, ere, lûxl, 160.
Lno, ere, luí ] ^
' ' ( luitum, to atone for.
M.
Maereo, ere, to grieve.
Malo, malle, malul, 189.
Mando, ere, mandi, mansum, 164.
Maneo, ere, mansi, mansum, 183.
Medeor, en, to heal.
MeminI, 190.
Mentior, Irl, Itus. Paradigm^ 147.
Mereor, en, meritus sum, 182, R. 2.
Mergo, ere, mersl, mersum, 160.
Metior, Irl, mensus sum, 183.
Meto, ere, messul (rare), messum,
183.
Metuo, ere, ul, 173.
Mico, are, ul, 176.
Minuo, ere, minul, minütum, 173.
Misceo, ere, ul, mixtum, (mistum),
128.
Misereor, eri miseritus, (misertus)
sum, 175.
Mitto, ere, misl, missum, 166.
Molo, ere, molul, molitum, 176.
Moneo, ere, ul, itum, 129, 130.
Mordeo, ere, momordi, moisum, 168.
Morlor. morí. sum, 183.
Moveo, ere, moví, mötum, 174.
Mulceo, ere, mulsl, mulsum, 160.
Mulgeo, ere, mulsl, mulsum(ctum),
160.
Mungo, ere, munxl, munctum, 160.
N.
Nauciscor, i, nactus (nanctus), 175.
Näscor, i, nätus sum (nasciturus),
181.
Ñeco, are, ävl, âtum, 176.
Necto, ere, nexl (nexul), nexum, 160.
Neg-ligo, ere, -lexl, -lectum, 161.
Necopinatus, 182, R. 2.
Neo, nere, nevi, netum, 127.
INDEX OP VERBS.
115
Nequeo, ïre, 185.
Nötesco, ere, nötui, 181.
Ningo, ere, ninxl, 160.
Niteo, 5re, ul, to shim.
Nitor, I, nixus (nisus) sum, 175.
Nolo, nolle, nôluî, 189.
Noceo, ere, ul (nocitürus), ta he hurt¬
ful.
Nösco, ere, növl, nötum, 179.
Nûbo, ere, nüpsi, nûptum, 158.
O.
Ob-do, ere, -didi, -ditum, 177.
Ob-dormisco, ere, -dormívi, -dorml-
tum, 181.
Obllviscor, I, oblltus sum, 175.
Ob-sideo (sedeo, 166), ere, -sedi, -ses-
sum.
Ob-sisto, ere, -stitl, -stitum, 178.
Obs olesco, ere, -olevi, -oletum, 181.
Ob-sto, stare, stitl (obstätOrus), 178.
Obtineo (teneo, 128), ere, -tinul,
-tentum.
Oc-cido, (gado), ere, -cidi, -cäsum,
168.
Oc-cido (caedo), ere, -cidl, -cisum,
168.
Oc-cino (cano), ere, -einul, 176.
Oe-cipio (cAPio), (157), ere, -cepl,
-ceptum.
Occulo, ere, occulul, occultum, 176.
OdI, def, 190.
Of-fendo (164), ere, -fendi, -fensum.
Of fero, -ierre, obtull, oblatura, 186.
Oleo, ere, ul, to smell.
Olesco. See 181.
Operio, Ire, operui, opertum, 176.
Opinatus, 182, R 2.
Opperior, Irl, oppertus {or Itus).
Comp. 175, 5.
Ordior, Irl, orsus sum, 175.
Orior, Irl, ortus sum (oritürus), 184.
Os-tendo, ere, -tendí, -ten-sum (-ten-
tus), 168.
P.
Paciscor, l, pactus sum, 175,182, R. 2.
Palleo, -ere, -ul, to he pale.
Pando, ere, pandi, passum (pansum),
166.
Pango, ere | f pactum.
Parco, ere, pepercl (parsi), parsürus,
162,
Parlo, ere, peperi, partum (paritûrus),
170.
Partior, Irl, Itus, 182, R. 2.
Pasco, ere, pavi, pastum, 179.
Pate-facio, ere, -ífeci, -factum, 188.
Pateo, ere, ul, to he open.
Patior, I, passus sum, 175.
Paveo, ere, pavi, 174.
Pecto, ere, pexl, pexum, 160.
Pel-licio, -licere, -lectum,161.
Pello, ere, pepull, pulsum, 170.
Pendeo, ere, pependi, 168.
Pendo, ere, pependi, pensum, 168.
Per-cello, ere, percull, perculsum,
170.
Percenseo (censeo), ere, -censul,
-ceusum.
Percitus (cieo), 176.
Per-do, ere, -didi, -ditum, 177.
Per-eo, Ire, peril, itum, 185.
Per-ficio, ere, -feci, fectum, 188.
Pergo (regó), ere, perrexl, perrec-
tum, 161.
Per-petior (patior, 175), I, perpessus
sum.
Per-spicio, ere, -spexl, -spectum, 161.
Per-sto, -stare, -stitl, 178.
Per-tineo (teneo, 128), ere, ul.
Pessum-do, -dare, -dedi, -datum,
177.
Peto, ere, Ivi (il), Itum, 156,176.
Piget, pigere, piguit, pigitum est, it
irks.
Pingo, ere, pinxl, pictum, 160.
Pinso, ere, ul (I), pinsitum (pistum,
pinsum), 172.
Plango, ere, planxl, planctum, 160.
Plaudo, ere, plausi, plausum, 165.
Plecto, ere, plexl, plexum, 160.
Plector, I, to he punished.
Pleo. See 127.
Plico, are, ul (avi), itum (atum), 176.
Polleo, ere, to he potent.
Pöno (169), ere, posul, positum, 179.
Poseo, ere, poposci, 162.
Pos-sideo (sedeo, 166),ere,-sedi, ses-
sum.
Pos-sum, posse, potul, 115.
Pöto, are, avi, potum, pötätum, 176.
Pötus, 182, R. 1.
Prae-cello, ere, cellul, 176.
Prae-cino, ere, cinul, 176.
Prae-curro, ere, -cucunl, -cursum,
170.
Prae-sideo (sedeo, 166), ere, sedl.
INDEX OF VERBS.
Prae-sum, -esse, -ful, 113.
Prae-sto, -stäre, -still, (-stätürus),
178.
Prandeo, Cre, prandl, pransum, 164,
182, R. 1.
Prebendo, ere, preliendl, prehensum,
164.
Premo, ere, pressi, pressum, 188.
Prod-igo (ago, 159), ere, -5gl.
Pro-do, ere, -didi, -ditum, Í77.
Pro-ficiscor, I, profectus sum, 175.
Pro-fiteor (fateor, 175), 5rl, -fessus
sum.
Promo (emo), ere, prompsi, prömp-
tum, 169.
Pro-sum, prödesse, pröfui, 114,
Prö-tendo (tendo, 168), ere, -tendí,
-tentum, -tensum.
Psallo, ere, I, 170.
Pudet, ere, puduit, puditum est, it
shames.
Pueräsco, ere, to become a boy.
Pungo, ere, pupugl, punctum, 162.
Q.
Quaero, ) ere, quaeslvl, quaesltum,
Quaeso, f 176.
Quatio, ere, (quassi), quassum, 166.
Queo, quire, 185.
Queror, querl, questiis sum, 175.
Quiesco, ere, quievi, quietum, 179.
R.
Rädo, ere, räsl, räsum, 165.
Rapio, ere, rapui, raptura, 176.
Raucio, Ire, rausî, rausum, 183.
Re-censeo (censeo, 128), ere, -censul,
-censum (recensitum).
Recrüdesco, ere, -crüdul, to get raw
again.
Red-arguo (173), ere, -argüí.
Red-do, ere, -didi, -ditum, 177.
Red-igo (ago), ere, -egl, -actum, 159.
Re-fello (fallo, 170), ere, refelll.
Re-tero (183, 186), -ferre, -tull, -la-
tura.
Regó, ere, rexl, rectum, 161,183.
Re-linquo, ere, -llqul, -lictum, 159.
Reminiscor, I, to recollect.
Renideo, ere, to glitter.
Reor, reíd, ratus sum, 183.
Re-perio, Ire, reperi, repertum, 170.
Repo, ere, repsi, reptum, 158.
Re-sipisco, ere, -sipivl (-sipul), 181.
Re-sisto, ere, -stitl, -stitum, 178.
Re-spondeo (168), ere, -spondi, -spon-
sum.
Re-sto, stäre, -stitl, 178.
Restingue, ere, -stinxl, -stinctum, 160.
Re-tineo (teneo, 128), ere, ul, -ten¬
tum.
Re-vertor, I, revertí, reversum, 167.
Re-vivisco, ere, vixl, victum, 181.
Rideo, ere, risl, risum, 165.
Rigeo, ere, ul, to be stiff.
Rödo, ere, rösl, rösum, 165.
Rúbeo, ere, ul, to be red.
Rudo, ere, rudivl, Itum, 176.
Rumpo, ere, rüpl, ruptura, 157.
Ruó, ere, rul, rutum (ruitürus), 173.
S.
Salió, Ire, saltum, 176.
Sallo, ere, salll, salsum, 170.
Salve, def., 190.
Sancio, Ii-e, sanxl, (XcUum),
Sapio, ere (sapivl), sapul, 176.
Sarcio, Ire, sarsi, sartum, 160.
Satis-do, -dare, -dedi, -datum, 177.
Scabo, ere, scäbl, to scratch.
Scalpo, ere, scalpsl, scalptum, 158.
Scando, ere, scandi, scansum, 164.
Scateo, ere, to gush forth.
Scindo, ere, scidi, scissum, 168.
Sclsco, ere, sclvl, scltura, 181.
Scrlbo, ere, scrlpsi, scriptum, 158.
Sculpo, ere, sculpsi, sculptum, 158.
Seco, are, secul, /ecSs,
Sedeo, ere, sedl, sessum, 166.
Seligo (lego, 159), ere, -legi, -lectura.
Sentio, Ire, sensi, sensum, 165.
Sepelio, Ire, IvI, sepultura, 176.
Sepio, ire, sepsi, septum, 158.
Sequor, I, secutus sum, 175.
Sero, ere, 176.
Sero, ere, sevi, satura, 180.
Serpo, ere, serpsi, serptum, 158.
Sido, ere, sidl, 167.
Sileo, ere, ul, to be silent.
Sino, ere, sivl, si tum. 179.
Sisto, ere, stitl, statum, 178.
Sitio, Ire, IvI, to thirst.
Soleo, ere, solitus sum, 182.
Solvo, ere, solví, solûtum, 174.
n T sonitum,
Sono, are, sonul, ^6.
Sorbeo, ere (sorp-si), sorbul, 158.
INDEX TO VERBS.
117
Sordeo, Ere, ul, to he dirty.
Sortior, in, sortltus sum, 182, R. 2.
Spargo, ere, sparsi, sparsum, 160.
Sperno, ere, sprEvI, sprEtum, 180.
-Spicio. See ad-spicio.
Splendeo, Ere, ul, to shine.
Spondeo, Ere, spPpondl, sponsum,
168.
Spuo, ere, spul, sputum, 173.
Squäleo, Ere, to he rough., foul.
Statuo, ere, statui, statutum, 173.
Sterno, ere, strävl, stratum, 180.
Sternuo, ere, steruuï, 173.
Sterto, ere, stertul, 176.
-Stinguo, ere, 160.
Sto, stare, stetl, statum, 178.
Strepo, ere, strepul, strepitum, 176.
Strldeo, Ere (ere), stridï, 167. .
Stringo, ere, strinxi, strictum, 160.
Struo, ere, struxt, structum, 163.
Studeo, Ere, ui, to he zealous.
Stupeo, Ere, ul, to he astounded.
Suadeo, Ere, suasl, suasum, 165.
Sub-do, ere, -didi, -ditum, 177.
Sub-igo (ago, 159), ere, -Egl, -actum.
Suc-cEdo (cedo, 166), ere, -cessi,
-cessum.
Suc-cendo {see ac-cendo, 164), ere,
-cendl, -censum.
Suc-cénseo (128), Ere, ul, -censum.
Suesco, ere, suEvi, suEtum, 179.
Suf-fero, -ferre, sus-tinul, 186, R.
Suf-ficio (PACio, 159), ere, -ffeci, -fec-
tum.
Suf-fodio (166), ere, -iodi, -fossum.
Sug-gero [see 171), ere, -gessl, -ges-
tum.
Silgo, ere, suxl, suctum, 160.
Sum, esse, ful, 112.
Sümo (emo), ere, sumpsi, sumptum,
169.
Suo, ere, sul, sûtum, 173.
Superbio, Ire, to he haughty.
Super-sto, -stare, -stetl, 178.
Super-sum, -esse, -ful, 113.
Sup-pöno {see 179), ere, -posul, -posi-
tum.
Surgo (rego), ere, surrexl, surrec-
tum, 161.
T.
Taedet, pertaesum est, it tires.
Tango, ere, tetigl, tactum, 162.
Tego, ere, texl, tectum, 161, 183.
Tenmo, ere, 169.
Tendo, ere, tetendl, tensum (-turn),
168.
Teneo, Ere, tenul, (tentum), 128.
Tergo (eo), ere, tersi, tersum, 160.
Tero, ei'e, trivl, tritum, 180.
Texo, ere, texul, textum, 172.
Timeo, Ere, ul, to fear.
Ting(u)o, ere, tinxl, tinctum, 160.
Tollo, ere (sustull, sublatum), 170.
Tondeo, Ere, tbtondl, tonsum, 168.
Tono, are, ul, 176.
Torpeo, Ere, ul, to he torpid.
Torqueo, Ere, torsi, tortum, 160.
Torreo, Ere, torrul, tostum, 128.
Tra-do, ere, -didI, -ditum, 177.
Trabo, ere, traxi, trac turn, 163.
Tremo, ere, ul, 176.
Tribuo, ere, ul, tribütum, 173.
Trûdo, ere, trüsl, trûsum, 165.
Tueor, Erl tûtatus sum, 182,
R. 2.
Tumeo, Ere, ul, to swell.
Tundo, ere, tutudi, tunsum, tüsum,
168.
Turgeo, Ere, tursi, 160.
u.
Ulciscor, I, ultus sum, 175.
Ungo, ere, unxl, uuctum, 160.
IJrgeo, Ere, ursi, 160.
Uro, ere, ussi, ustum, 171.
Utor, I, usus sum, 175.
V.
Vado, ere, 165.
ValE, 190.
Veho, ere, vexl, vectum, 163.
Velio, ere, velll (vulsl), vulsum, 170.
VEn-do, ere, -didI, -ditum, 177.
VEn-eo, ire, IvI (il), 185.
Venio, Ire, vEnI, ventum, 170.
VEnum-do, -dare, dedl, -datum,
177.
Vereor, Erl, veritus sum. See 143.
Verro, ere, verri, versum, 170.
Verto, ere, vertí, yersum, 167.
Vescor, I, to feed.
Vesperasco, ere, 181.
Veto, are, vetul, vetitum, 176.
Video, Ere, vidi, visum, 164.
118
INDEX OP VERBS.
Vieo, 5re, etum, to plait. See 127.
Vigeo, ere, ul, to flourish.
Vincio, Ire, vinxl, vinctnm, 160.
Vinco, ere, viel, victum, 159.
Viso, ere, visi, visum, 172.
Vivo, ere, vixl, victum, 163.
Vole, velle, volul, 189.
Volvo, ere, volví, volùtum, 174.
^Vomo, ere, vomul, vomitum, 176.
Voveo, 5re, vövl, vötum, 174.
SYNTAX.
SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.
192. Syntax treats of the formation and combination of
sentences.
Sentences are diyided into simple and compound.
A simple sentence is one in which the necessary parts occur
but once.
The necessary parts of the sentence are the subject and the
predicate.
The predicate is that which is said of the subject.
The subject is that of which the predicate is said.
Lûna splendet, The moon shines.
Lûna is the sutôect ; splendet, the predicate.
193. The most simple form of the sentence is the finite verb :
s-u-m, I am ; doce-s, thou teachest ; scrîb-i-t, he writes.
Eemark.—Here the form contains in itself all the necessary elements (compare 111) :
m is the first person, s the second, t the third. From the expansion and modification of
the finite verb arise all the complicated forms of the compound sentence.
194. The subject of the finite verb is always in the Nomina¬
tive Case, or so considered.
Remarks.—1. The subject of the Infinitive is in the Accusative. (341.)
2. The use of the Nominative in Latin is the same as in English.
3. The Vocative (the case of Direct Address) is not affected by the
structure of the sentence, and does not enter as an element into Syntax,
except in the matter of Concord. The form differs from the Nominative
in the Second Declension only, and even there the Nominative is some¬
times used instead, especially in poetry and solemn prose. (See further,
324, R. 1.)
Almae fîlius M^ae. Hor. Son of mild Maia !
Audi tû, populas Albäuus. Liv. Hear thou, people of AJba !
Ö is prefixed to give emphasis to the address :
120
FOEMS OF THE SUBJECT.
0 formSse puer, nimium nS crëde col5rI. Verq, o shapely lay! trust not com-
plexion all too much.
The vocative is commonly interjected in prose, except in highly emotional passages.
195. The Subject may be a noun or pronoun, or some other
word or phrase used as a noun :
Deus mundum gubernat, God steers the universe.
Ego reges ëjëcî, I drove out Mugs.
Sapiens rës adversas non timet, The sage does not fear adverdty.
Victi in servitûtem rediguntur, The vanquished are reduced to slavery.
Contendisse decorum est. Ov. To have struggled is honorable.
Magnum est beneficium naturae quod necesse est morí. Sen. It is
a great boon of nature, that we must needs die.
Vidës habet duäs syllabäs, (The word) " vides " has two syllables.
The following remarks may he omitted by the beginner.
Eemarks.—1. Masculine and Feminine adjectives and participles are used as sub¬
stantives, chiefly in the plural number : pauperës, the poor ; divitës, the rich ; docti,
the learned ; whereas, in the singular, the substantive is generally expressed: vir bonus,
a good man ; homo doctus, a learned person ; mulier peregrina, a foreign woman.
When persons are not meant, a substantive is understood : can! (capilll), grey hairs ;
calida (aqua), warm water ; dextra (manus), right hand.
2. Neuter adjectives and participles are freely employed as substantives in both num¬
bers: medium, the midst; extrëmum, the end ; reliquum, the residue; futurum, the
future ; bonum, good; bona, blessings, possessions; malum, evil; mala, misfortunes
The plural is frequently employed when the English idiom prefers the singular : vëra, the
truth ; omnia, everything.
3. Adjectives of the Second Declension are sometimes used as neuter substantives in
the Genitive case, after words of quantity or pronouns : aliquid boni, something good ;
nihil mall, nothing bad. Adjectives of the Third Declension are thus employed only
in combination with those of the Second. (See 371, R. 2.)
4. Instead of the neuter adjective the word rëS, thing, is frequently used, especially in
forms which are identical for different genders ; so bonarum rërum, of blessings, rather
than bonorum (m. and n.).
5. In Latin the plural of abstract nouns occurs more frequently than in English :
adventüs imperätörum, the arrivals) of the generals (because there were several
generals, or because they arrived at different times). Pluralizing abstract nouns makes
them concrete : fortitûdinës, gallant actions ; formîdinës, bugbears ; irae, guctrrels.
6. Other plural expressions to be noted are : nivës, snow{-ßakes) • grandinës, hail
{-stones) ; plu viae, {streams of) rain ; ligna, Qogs of) wood ; carnës, pieces o/" meat ; aera,
articles of bronze ; also symmetrical parts of the human body : cervîcës, neck ; pectora,
breast.
The Plural is freely used in poetry :
Otia si tollas, periëre Cupídinis arcüs. Ov. If you do away with holidays, Cupid's
bow (and arrows) are ruined.
7. The rhetorical Roman often uses the First Person plural for the First Person singu¬
lar. The usage originates in modesty, but mock modesty is the worst form of pomposity.
In poetry there is often an element of shyness.
Librum dë senectûte ad të mîsimus. Cic. We (I) have sent you a treatise on old
age.
Sitque memor nostrl necne, referte mibL Ov. Bririg me back {word) whether she
thinks of us (me among others) or no.
COPULA AND COPULATIVE VERBS.
121
8. The Singular, in a collective sense, is also used for the Plural, hut more rarely: faba,
beans ; porous, {meat) ; gallina,/owil (as articles of food) ; vestis, clothing ¡ hostis,
the enemy ; miles, the soldiery ; pedes, infantry ; eques, cavalry.
196. Copula.—When the predicate is not in the form of a
verb, the so-called Copula is generally employed, in order to
couple the adjective or substantive with the subject.
The chief Copula is the verb sum, I am.
Fortuna caeca est. Cic. Fortune is blind.
Usus magister est cptimus. Cic. Practice is the best teacher.
Remark.—Strictly speaking, the copula is itself a predicate, as is shown by the
translation when it stands alone or with an adverb : est Deus, there is a God, God exists ;
rectS semper erunt rës, things will always be (go on) well ; sic vita hominum est,
such is human life; " So runs the world awayl""
197. Other copulative verbs are: vidérl, to seem; appârêre,
to appear ; manêre, to remain ; näscl, to he horn ; fieri, to become ;
évadera, to turn out ; creärl, to he created ; déligî, to he rJiosen ;
putarl, to he thought ; habërl, to he held ; did, to he said ; appel-
lârî, to he called ; nöminärl, to he named. Hence the rule :
Verbs of Seeming, Remaining, Becoming, with the Passive of
verbs of Making and Choosing, Showing, Thinking, and Call¬
ing, take two nominatives, one of the Subject, one of the Predi¬
cate :
Nemo dives nascitur. Sen. No one is born rich.
Aristîdës Justus appellatur, Aristides is called just.
Servius Tullius rex est dëclârâtus. Liv. Servius Tullius was declared
king.
Thûcydidës nunquam numeratas est orator. CiC. Thucydides has
never been accounted an orator.
Remarks.—1. All copulative verbs retain the Nominative with the Infinitive after
auxiliary verbs. (424.)
Beatus esse sine virtúte nëmo potest. Cic. No one can be happy without virtue.
2. On the Double Accusative construction after Active Verbs, see 334.
198. Subject Omitted.—The personal pronoun is not. ex¬
pressed, unless it is emphatic, as for example in contrasts :
Amämus parentës, We love (our) parents.
Ego rëgës ëjëcî, vos tyrannös intrödücitis. Cic. I drove out kings, ye
are bringing in tyrants.
199. Verbs that have no definite subject are called imper¬
sonal Verbs, chiefiy relating to the state of the weather :
6
122
CONCORD.
Tonat, it thunders ; fulgurat, fulminât, it lightens; pluit, it raim;
ningit, it snows.
Remarks.—1. The passive of intransitive verbs (201) is often used impersonally:
vïvitur, people live ; curritur, there is a running. The subject is contained in the verb
itself : sic vivitur = sic vita vivitur, smcä. is life. In the same way explain taedet,
it wearies; miseret, it moves to pity ; piget, it disgusts ; pudet, it puts to shame.
2. All other so-called Impersonal Verbs have au Infinitive or an equivalent for a sub¬
ject.
3. Other uses coincide with the English. So the Third Person Plural of verbs of Saying,
Thinking, and Calling. So the Ideal Second Person Singular. (252.) To be noticed is
the occasional use of inquit, quoth he., of an imaginary person :
Non concëdo, inquit, Epicürö. Cío. I do not yield the point, quoth he {me), to
Epicurus.
200. Copula Omitted.—Est or sunt is often omitted in saws
and proverbs, in short questions, in rapid changes, and in tenses
compounded with participles :
Summum jus summa injuria, The height of right (is) the height of wrong.
Nemo malus fëlïx. Juv. No had man (is) happy. Quid dulcius quam
habere qiûcum omnia audeäs loquî. Cic. What sweeter than, to haw some¬
one, with whom you can wnture to talk about ewrything ? Aliquamdiü cer-
tatum. Ball. The struggle was kept up for some time.
So also esse with participles and the like.
Caesar statuit exspeotandam clässem. Caes. Caesar resolved that the
fleet must be waited for.
Concord.
201. The Three Concords.—There are three great con¬
cords in Latin :
1. The agreement of the predicate with the subject.
2. The agreement of attributive or appositive with the substantive. (281,
319.)
3. The agreement of the Pronoun with the Noun (Relative with ante¬
cedent.) (616.)
Remark.—It may be well for the beginner to study these together.
202. Agreement of the Predicate with the Subject.
The verbal predicate j- agrees with its subject | ^nd^p^son^
S( in number,
agrees with its subject •< gender, and
( case.
The substantive predicate agrees with its subject in case.
CONCORD.
123
Substantiva mobilia (21) are treated as adjectives, and follow the num-
•ber and gender of the subject.
Ego rëgës ëjëoi, vôstyrannës intrôdùcitis (198).
Vërae amîoitiae sempitemae sunt«. Cic. True friendships are abiding.
Dös est deoem talenta. Ter. The dowry is ten talents.
Usus magister est optimus. Cic. Practice is the best teacher.
Athënae sunt omnium dootrinanun inventrîcës. Cic. Athens is the
imentor of all branches of learning.
Arx est monosyllabum. " Aiw" is a monosyUable.
Remarks.—1. The violation of the rules of agreement is due chiefly to
one of two causes :
1. The natural relation is preferred to the artificial (oonstruotio ad sen-
sum, per synesin, according to the sense).
II. The nearer is preferred to the more remote. Hence :
Exceptions.—1) Nouns of multitude often take the predicate in the
Plural : pars, part; vis, quantity ; multitùdo, crowd; organized bodies
more rarely.
Pars major recëperant sësë. Liv. The greater part had retired.
Omnis multitüdo abeunt. Lrv. All the crowd depart.
2) The adjective predicate often follows the natural gender of the sub¬
ject :
Capita conjürätiönis virgos caesi sunt. Lrv. The heads of the con¬
spiracy were flogged.
3) The copula often agrees with the number of the predicate (" the wages
of sin is death") :
Amantium irae (195, R. 5) amöris integrätio est. Ter. Lovers^ quarrels
are lords renewal.
2. A superlative adjective defined by a partitive genitive follows the
gender of the subject when it precedes :
Hordeum omnium frügum mollissimum est. Plin. Barley is the softest
of all grains.
Otherwise it follows the genitive :
Vëlôoissimum omnium animälium est delphinus. Plin. The dolphin
is the swiftest of all animals.
3. The Vocative is sometimes used by the poets in the predicate, either
by anticipation or by assimilation. (See 324, R. 1.)
4. The neuter adjective is often used as the substantive predicate of
a masculine or feminine subject :
Triste lupus stabulis. Vero. The wolf is destruction to the folds.
Omnium rërum (195, R. 4) mors est extrëmum. Cic. Death is the end
of all things.
5. The demonstrative pronoun is commonly attracted into the gender
of the predicate :
124
VOICES.
Ea non media sed nulla via est. Lrv. That is riot a middle course^ lut
no course at all.
Non ego illam mihi düco dötem esse, quae dös dîcitur. Plaut. That
which is called a dowry I deem not my dowry., no, not L
When the pronoun is the predicate there is no change. So in defini¬
tions.
Quid est Deus ? Wfiat is God ?
Fgkms of the Verbal Predicate.
Voices of the Vekb.
203. There are two Voices in Latin—Active and Passive.
The latter seems to have been Reflexive in its origin.
204. The Active Voice denotes that the action proceeds
from the subject.
Verbs are called Transitive when their action goes over to an
object; Intransitive when their action does not go beyond Ûïq
subject : occldere, to fell =■ to kill (Transitive) ; occidere, to fall
(Intransitive).
Remark.—Transitive verbs are often used intransitively, and Intransitive verbs
transitively : suppeditäre, to supply (Transitive), to be on hand (Intransitive) ; queror,
Z complain (Intransitive), I complain of (Transitive). When transitive verbs are used in¬
transitively they serve simply to characterize the agent. When intransitive verbs are
used transitively it is chiefly with an accusative of the Inner object. (331, R. 2.)
206. The Passive Voice denotes that the subject receives the
action of the Verb.
The instrument is put in the Ablative.
Virgis caeditur, He is beaten with rods.
The agent is put in the Ablative with ab (â).
Á pâtre caeditur, He ü beaten by (his) father.
Remarks.—1. Intransitive verbs of Passive signiflcation are construed as Passives :
fam.6 perire, to perish of hunger.
Ab reo fustibus väpulävit. Quint. He was whacked with cudgels by the defendant.
2. When the instrument is considered as an agent, or the agent as an instrument, the
constructions are reversed :
Vinoï S Yoluptâte, to be overcome by Pleasure. Cic.
Poeno milite portas frangimus. Juv. break down the gates with the Punic
soldiery (as if with a battering-ram).
Animals, as independent agents, are treated like Persons.
A cane n5n magnd saepe tenStur aper. Ov. A boar is often held fast by a little
dog.
VOICES.
125
Animais, as instruments, are treated like Things.
£quô veh-i, to ride a horse {to be borne by a horse) ; in equ5, on horseback.
206. The person in whose interest an action is done is put
in the Dative. Hence, the frequent inference that the person
interested is the agent.
With the Perfect Passive it is the natural inference, and com¬
mon in prose.
Res mihi tota prôvîsa est. Cic. I ham had the whole thing promded
for.
Carmina scripta mihi sunt nulla. Ov. Poems—I ham none written (I
have written no poems).
With the Gerundive it is the necessary inference, and the
Dative is the reigning combination.
Nihil est homini tam timendum quam invidia. Cic. There is nothing
that one has to fear to the same extent as envy. See 352.
207. The Direct Object of the Active Verb (the Accusative
Case) becomes the Subject of the Passive.
Alexander Dârëum vicit, Alexander conquered Darius.
Darens ab Alexandrô victus est, Darius was conquered Jyy Alexander.
208. The Indirect Object of the Active Verb (Dative Case)
cannot be properly used as the Subject of the Passive. The
Dative remains unchanged, and the verb becomes a Passive in
the Third Person Singular (Impersonal Verb). This Passive
form may have a neuter subject corresponding to the Inner
object. (331, K. 2.)
Active : Miseri invident bonis, The wretched envy the well-to-do.
Passive : mihi invidëtur, I am envied.,
tibi invidëtur, thou art envied,
ei invidëtur, he is envied,
ixobis invidëtur, we are envied,
vobis invidëtur, you are envied,
iis invidëtur, they are envied,
ab aliquo, ôy some one.
Nihil facile persuâdëtur invitis. Quint. People are not easily per¬
suaded of anything against their will.
Anulis nostris plus quam animis crëditur. Sen. Our seals are more
trusted than our souls.
126
TBIíSES.
Remark.—The same rule applies to Genitive and Ablative. The poets are more free
in imitation of the Greek. Cür invideor } Hon. for Cur iuvidëtur mihi t Wñt/ am
I envied f
209. Eeflexive relations, when emphatic, are expressed as in
English :
Omne animal së ipsum diligit. Cic. Every living creature loves itself.
But when the reflexive relation is more general, the Passive
is employed :
Lavor, I bathe, I bathe myself.
Purgârï nequïvërunt. Lrv. They could not clear themselves.
Cûrâbar propriïs aeger Podalïrius herbîs. O v. A sick Podálirius, 1
was trying to cure myself by my own herbs.
210. As the Active in all languages is often used to express
what the subject suffers or causes to be done, so the Passive in
Latin in its reflexive sense is often used to express an action
which th.e subject suffers or causes to be done to itself: trahor,
I let myself le dragged ; tondeor, I have myself shaved.
Ipse docet quid agam ; fas est et ab hoste docërï. Ov. He líimsélf
teaches {me) what to do ; it is {but) right to let oneself be taught even by an
enemy {to take a lesson from a foe).
211. The Deponent is a Passive form which has lost, in most
instances, its Passive (or Eeflexive) signification. It is commonly
translated as a Transitive or Intransitive Active : hortor, I am
exhorting (Trans.) ; morior, I ayn dying (Intrans.).
212. Eeciprocal relations one another'^') are expressed by
inter, among, and the Personal Pronouns, nos, us ; vos, you ; së,
themselves : Inter së amant. They love one another.
TENSES.
213. The Tenses express the relations of time, embracing:
1. The stage of the action (duration in time).
2. The period of the action (position in time).
The first tells whether the action is gomg on, or finished.
The second tells whether the action is, f)ast, present, or future.
Both these sets of relations are expressed by the tenses of the
Indicative or Declarative mood—less clearly by the Subjunctive.
TABLE OF TEMPORAL RELATIONS.
127
214. There are six tenses in Latin :
1. The Present, denoting continuance in \h.Q, present.
2. The Futurs, denoting continuance in íYiq future.
3. The Imperfect, denoting continuance in the past.
4. The Perfect, denoting completion in the present.
5. The Future Perfect, denoting completion in the future.
6. The Pluperfect, denoting completion in the
215. An action may further be regarded simply as attained,
without reference to its continuance or completion. Continuance
and completion require a point of reference for definition ; atr
tainment does not. This gives rise to the aoristic or indefinite
stage of the action, which has no especial tense-form. It is
expressed by the Present tense for the present; by the Future
and Future Perfect tenses for the future ; and by the Perfect
tense for the past.
Of especial importance is the Indefinite or Historical Perfect
(Aorist), which differs materially in syntax from the Definite or
Pure Perfect.
216. The Tenses are divided into Principal and Historical.
The Principal Tenses have to do with the Present and Future.
The Historical Tenses have to do with the Past.
The Present, Pure Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect are
Prmcipal Tenses.
The Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Historical Perfect are Histor¬
ical Tenses.
Remark.—The Historical Tenses are well embodied in the following distich ;
Tälia tentabat, sic et tentäverat ante,
Yizque de dit viotäs ütilitäte manüs. Ov.
217. Table op Temporal Relations.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
ACTIVE.
Continuance. Completion. [Attainment.
Present : scribo, scripsi, scribo,
I am writing. I have written. I write.
Future : scribam, scripsero, scribam (scripsero),
I shall he writing. I shall have written. I shall write.
Past : scrîbëbam, scripseram, scripsi,
I was writing. I had written. I wrotei\
138
PRESENT.
Continuance.
Present: scribitur (epístola),
passive.
Completion.
scripta est,
has been written,
is written.
Future
Past ;
The letter is written,
(writing),
scrîbëtur.
The letter will be written
(writing),
scrîbêbâtur, scripta erat.
The letter was written, had been written,
(writing), was written.
scripta erit,
will have been,
will be written.
Attainment.
scribitur,
is written.
scrîbëtur,
will be written
scripta est,
was written.
Remark.—The English Passive is ambiguous. The same form is currently used for
continuance, attainment, and completion. The context alone can decide. A convenient
test is the substitution of the Active.
( Continuance, Some one was writing a letter.
A Utter was written: ) Completion, Some one had written a letter.
( Attainment, Some one wrote a letter.
1^" The detailed consideration of the Tenses may be omitted by the beginner.
Present Tense.
218. The Present Tense is used as in English of that vihich
is going on now (Specific Present), and of statements that apply
to all time (Universal Present).
Specific Present :
Auribus teneö lupum. Ter. I am holding the wolf by the ears.
Universal Present :
Prcbitas laudatur et alget. Juv. Honesty is bepraised and freezes.
Remarks.—1. The Specific Present is often to be translated by the English Progress¬
ive Present. The Universal Present is Aoristic, true at any point.
2. As continuance involves the notion of incompleteness the Present is used of at¬
tempted and intended action (Present of Endeavor). But on account of the double use of
the Present this signification is less prominent and less important than in the Imperfect.
Do not mistake the Endeavor which lies in the Verb for the Endeavor which lies in the
Tense. So in the traditional example :
Quintus fräter Tusculänum vënditat. Crc. Brother Quintas is " trying to sell" his
Tusculan villa : vënditâre itself means to offer for sale. Translate : interims to offer for
sale, if the notion lies in the Tense.
3. The ambiguity of our English Passive often suggests other translations. Use and
Wont make Law ; hence, the frequent inference that what is done is what ought to be
done ; what is not done is not to be done.
(Deus) nee bene promeritis capitur, neo tangitur ira. Lucr. God is not to be in-
vúgUd by good service, nor touched by anger.
IMPERFECT.
129
219. The Present Tense is used more rarely than in English
in anticipation of the future, chiefly in compound sentences:
Si vincimus, omnia tüta erunt, Salu. If we conquer (= shall conquer),
everything will be safe.
Antequam ad sententiam redeo de më pauca dicam. Cic. Before 1
return to the subject, I will say a few things of myself.
Exspectâbô dum lile venit. Ter. I will wait all the time that he is
coming, or, until he comes.
220. The Present Tense is used far more frequently than in
English, as a lively representation of the past (Historical Pres¬
ent) :
R5mam profíciscitur. Sall. He sets out foi' Borne.
Mâtûrat proficisci. Caes. He hastens to depart.
Remark.—Dum, while, commonly takes the Historical Present : Dum haec in COl-
loquio geruntur, Caesar! nüntiätum est- Caes. While these things were transacting
in the conference, word was brought to Ccesar. Dum, so long as, follows the ordinary law
(See 571.)
221. The Present is used in Latin of actions that are con¬
tinued into the present, especially with jam, now ; jam diu, now
for a long time ; jam pridem, noto long since. In English we
often translate by a Progressive Perfect.
Mithridâtës annum jam tertium et vicisimum regnat. CiC. Mithri-
dates has been reigning now going on twenty-three years.
liiberäre vos ä Philippö jam diu magis vultis quam audetis. Liv.
You have this long time had the wish rather than (= though not) the courage
to deliver yourselves from Philip.
Impereect Tense.
222. The Imperfect Tense denotes Continuance in the Past :
pugnàbam, I was fighting.
The Imperfect is employed to represent manners, customs,
situations ; to describe and to particularize.
The Imperfect and the Historical Perfect serve to illustrate
one another. The Imperfect dwells on th.e process ; the His¬
torical Perfect states the result. The Imperfect counts out the
items J the Historical Perfect gives the sum.
223. The two tenses are often so combined that the general
6*
130
PERFECT.
statement is given by the Historical Perfect, the particulars of
the action by the Imperfect :
Verres in forum venit; ardëbant oculï; tötö ex ore crüdelitäs
ëminëbat. Cíe. Verres came into the forum, Ms eyes were Uazing, cruelty
was standing out f rom his whole countenance.
224. The Imperfect is used of attempted and interrupted,
intended and expected actions (Imperfect of Endeavor). It is
the Tense of Disappointment and (with the negative) of Eesist-
ance to Pressure. (Mere negation is regularly Perfect.)
Cûriam relinquëbat. Tac. He teas for leaving the senate-house.
Lëx abrogäbätur. Liv. The law teas to he abrogated.
Öreum et Eretriam Eumenï dabant : senätus libertätem hüs cîvitâtibus
dédit. Lrv. They were for giving Oreus and Eretria to Eumenes; the senate
gave these cities liberty.
Aditum non dabat. Nep. He would not grant access (dedit, did not).
Remarks.—1. The Imperfect as the Tense of Evolution is a Tense of Vision. But
in English, Imperfect and Historical Perfect coincide ; hence the various translations to
put the reader in the place of the spectator.
2. The continuance is in the mind of the narrator ; it has nothing to do with the ab¬
solute duration of the action. The mind may dwell on a rapid action or hurry over a
slow one. With definite numbers, however large, the Historical Perfect must be used,
unless there is a notion of continuance into another stage (overlapping).
Gorgias centum et novem annos vixit- Quint. Gorgias lived 109 years.
3. As the Tense of Disappointment, the Imperfect is occasionally used, as in Greek, to
express a startling appreciation of the real state of things. Greek infiuence is not
unlikely.
Hie aderas. Ter. (So it turns out that) you were here (all the time).
Hence the modal use of dëbëbam and poteram. (246, R. 2.)
225. The Imperfect is used as the English Progressive Plu¬
perfect : especially with jam, jam diu, jam düdum.
Jam dûdum tibi adversäbar. Plaut. 1 had long been opposing you.
Remark.—As the Historical Present is used in lively narrative, so the Historical Infin¬
itive is used in lively description, parallel with the Imperfect. (650.)
Perfect Tense.
226. The Perfect Tense has two distinct uses :
I. Pure Perfect. 2. Historical Perfect (Aorist).
1. PURE PERFECT.
227. The Pure Perfect Tense expresses completion in the
Present, and hence is sometimes called the Present Perfect.
PEEFBCT.
131
The Pure Perfect looks at both ends of an action, and the
time between is regarded as a Present. The Historical Present
looks at but one end ; or, rather, beginning and end are one.
228. The Pure Perfect is used :
1. Of an action that is oyer and gone.
Pilium ûnicum habeo, imo habm. Ter. I have an only son—nay^ 1
have had an only son.
Tempora quid faciunt : banc volo, të voluî. Mart. What difference
times make ! (Time is) I want her, (Time has been) I wanted you.
2. Far more frequently of the present result of a more remote
action : Eesulting condition.
Pquum et mülum Brundisiî tibi relîquî. Cic. I have left a horse and
mule for you at Brundusium—(they are still there).
Perdidi spem qua më obleotâbam. Plaut. Pve lost the hope with
which 1 entertained myself.
Actum est, peristï. Ter. It is all over ; youWe undone.
Remakks. 1.—The Pure Perfect is often translated by the English Present : xüQyXfhave
become acquainted with, I know ; memini. I have recalled., I remember ; ôdî, I have con¬
ceived a haired of, I hate ; consuëvi, I have made it a rule., I am accustomed.
Ôdërunt hilar em tristës tristemque jocôsî. Hon, The long femed hate the lively
man, the jokers hate the long-faced man.
2. The Perfect is used of that which has been and shall be (Sententious Perfect) almost
always with an indefinite Adjective or Adverb of number or a negative. It is seldom an
Aorist (Greek).
Nëmo repente fuit turpissimus. Juv. None of a sudden Qiath ever) reach{ed) the
depth of baseness
229. As the Present stands for the Future, so the Perfect
stands for the Future Perfect.
Brutus sï conservatus erit, vîcimus. Cic. Brutus!—if he is saved, we
are victorious, we (shall) have gained the victory.
230. Haheo or teneo, I hold, I have, with the Accusative of
the Perfect Participle Passive, is not a mere circumlocution for
the Perfect, but lays peculiar stress on the maintenance of the
result.
Habeo statûtum, I have resolved, and hold to my resolution.
Habeo perspectum, I have perceived, and I have full insight'
Bxcüsätum habeas më rogo, cëno doixü. Mart. I pray you have
excused, I dine at home.
132
FüTFRB.
2. HISTORICAL PERFECT.
231. The Historical or Indefinite Perfect (Aorist) states -i
'pañt action, without reference to its duration, simply as a thing
attained.
Vënî, vidi, vici. Suet. I came, saw, overcame.
Milo domum venit, calceos et vestimenta mütävit, paulisper com-
morätus est. Cic. Milo came home, changed shoes and garments, tarried a
little while.
Gorgiâs centum et novem vixit annSs. Quint. Oorgias lived 109
years.
232. The Historical Perfect is the great narrative tense of
the Latin language, and is best studied in long connected pas¬
sages, and by careful comparison with the Imperfect.
piiupbrpect Tense.
233. The Pluperfect denotes Completion in the Past, and is
used of an action that was completed before another was begun.
It is, so to speak, the Perfect of the Imperfect. Hence it is used :
1. Of an action that is over and gone.
Putäram, I had' thought (before such and such a thing happened).
2. Of a Resulting Condition.
Massiliensës portas Caesarî clauserant. Caes. The Marseillese had
shut their gates against Caesar. (Their gates were shut.)
Remarks.—1. When the Perfect of resulting Condition is translated by an English
Present (228 R.), the Pluperfect is translated by an English Imperfect ; noveram, I had
become acquainted with, I knew ; memineram, / remembered ; 5deram, I hated ; con-
SuSveram, I was accustomed.
2. The Periphrastic Pluperfect with habeo corresponds to the Perfect. (230.)
Future Tense.
234. The Future Tense denotes Continuance in the Future.
scribam, I shall he writing.
The Future Tense is also used to express indefinite action in
the Future : scribam, I shall write.
Remarks.—1. In subordinate clauses the Latin language is more exact than the En¬
glish in the expression of future relations.
Donee er i s fëlîx, multös numeräbis amIcSs. Ov. So long as you shall be oxre)
happy, you, will count tnany friends.
FUTUIÎE PERFECT.
133
Quidquid er i s, mea semper eris. Ov. Whatever you shall be (axe), you will al¬
ways he mine own.
2. Observe especially the verbs volo, I will, and possum, 1 can.
Ödere si p o t e r 5 ; si non, in Vitus amâbo. Ov. I will hate if I shall he able (can) ;
if not, I shall love against my will.
Si qua volet regnâre diu, dëlûdat amantem. Ov. She who shall wish to queen
it long must fool her lover.
235. The Future is used in an imperative sense, as in English,
chiefly in familiar language.
TÜ nihil dices. Hon. Tou shall, are to, say nothing {do you say nothing).
Quum. volet accedes, quum té vitäbit abîbis. Ov. When she wants you,
approach ; and when she avoids you, begone, sir.
Future Pereect Tense.
286. The Future Perfect is the Perfect, both Pure and His¬
torical, transferred to the future, and embraces both completion
and attainment : fëcero, I shall ha,ve done it, or I shall do it
(once for all); videro, Iloill see to it ; prôfêcerit, it ivill prove
profitable.
Remarks—1. Hence, when the Perfect is used as a Present, the Future Perfect is used
as a Future : _
Novero, I shall Tcnow ; consuëvero, 1 shall be accustomed ; 0 d e r o, si poterö. Ov.
(234, R. 2.)
2. In subordinate sentences, the Latin language is more exact than the English in the
use of the Future Perfect.
When one action precedes another in the future, the action that precedes is expressed
by the Future Perfect.
Qui prior strinxerit ferrum, ëjus victoria erit. Lrv. Who first draws the
sword, his shall be the victory.
8. The Future Perfect is frequently used in volo, I will ; nolo, 1 will not ; possum,
/ can ; licet, it is left free ; libet, it is agreeable ; placet, it is the pleasure ; whereas the
English idiom familiarly employs the Present.
Si p 01 u e r 0, faciam vobis satis. Cic. If I can, I shall satisfy you.
4. The Future Perfect in both clauses denotes simultaneous accomplishment or attain¬
ment ; one action involves the other.
Qui Marcum Antonium oppresserit, is bellum confScerit. Oic. He who
shall have crushed (crushes) Mark Antony, will have finished (will finish) the war.
Ea vitia qui fügerit, is omnia ferë vitia vitaverit. Cic. He who shall have es¬
caped these faults, will have avoided almost all faults.
Sometimes, however, the first seems to Aeooie antecedence, finality. An
Imperative is often used in the first clause.
Immütä verbSrum collocätiönem, perierit tSta rSs. Cic. Change the arrange¬
ment of the words, the whole thing falls dead.
287. As the Future is used as an Imperative, so the Future
Perfect approaches the Imperative.
De hoc tü ipse videris. CiC. You may see to that yourself hereafter
134
PERIPHRASTIC TENSES.
Periphbastic Tenses.
238. The Periphrastic Tenses are formed by combining the
various tenses of esse, to le, with participles and verbal ad¬
jectives.
I. PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION—ACTIVE VOICE.
239. The Periphrastic Tenses of the Active are chiefly com¬
binations of esse and its forms with the so-called Puture Par¬
ticiple Active. The Future Participle is a verbal adjective
denoting capability and tendency. Compare amator and amä-
tùrus. The translation is verv various :
«/
1. Scriptùrus siim, lam about to write, I am to write, I purpose to write,
I am likely to torite.
3. Scriptürus eram, I was about to write, etc.
3. Scriptürus fui, I have been or was about to write (often =: I should have
written).
4. Scriptürus fueram, I had been about to write, etc.
5. Scriptürus ero, I shall be about to write, etc.
C. Scriptürus fuero, I shall have made up my mind to write, etc. (of
course very rare).
1. Bellum scriptürus sum quod populus Römänus cum Jugurtha
gessit. Sall. I purpose to write the history of the war which the Roman
people carried on with Jugurtha.
3. Rex nön interfutürus nâvâlî certâminî erat. Liv. The king did not
intend to be present at the naval combat.
8. Oato qua nocte peritürus fuit lëgit. Sen. Gato read on the night
when he was about to die (kill himself).
Dë ditos ultimîs cruciätibus aflfectüri fuërunt. Liv. They would have
put the surrendered to extreme tortures.
4. Major Römänörum gratia fuit quam quanta Carthäginiensium fu-
türa fuerat. Liv. The Romans^ credit for this was greater than the Cartha¬
ginians^ would have been.
5. P1ÜS mihi dëtractûrus ero, quam illî collätürus. Sen. I shall in all
likelihood take away morefrdWi myself than I shall bestow on him.
6. Sapiens nön vïvet, si fuerit sine homine victürus. Sen. The wise
man will not continue to live, if he finds that he is to live without human
society.
Remark.—The Subjunctives and Infinitives, scriptürus sim, essem, fuerim, scrip'
türum esse, and scriptürum fuisse, are of great importance in dependent discourse.
PERIPHRASTIC TENSES.
135
IL PERIPHRASTIC TENSES OF THE PASSIVE.
A.—Of Future Belations.
240. The following periphrases are used both in Active and
Passive, but more frequently in the Passive.
1. Futürum est, it is to he, \
erat, ) , , í ut, that, with the subjunctive,
fuit,
This circumlocution is used:
1. Rarely in the Indicative.
2. Often in the Infinitive, and necessarily so, when the verb forms no
Supine or Future Participle :
{ ut metuäs, that you will fear.
Futürum esse (fore), metuaris, that you will he feared.
In the Passive it is more common than the Supine with ïrï.
Spëro fore u t oontingat id nobis. Cic. I hope that we shall have that
good fortune.
In fâtïs scriptum Véjente s habëbant fore ut brevi ä Gallîs Roma
caperëtur. Cic. The Veientes had it written down in their pi^ophetic hooks
that Rome would shortly he taken hy the Gauls.
Remarks.—1. Fore ut is used chiefly with Present and Imperfect Subjunctive;
Perf. and Pluperf. are very rare. Cic. ad Att. xvi. 16 E. 16.
2. The form futurum fuisse ut... is used with Passive and Supineless verbs, to ex¬
press the dependent apodosis of an unreal conditional sentence.
Nisi eo ipso tempore nuntii de Caesaris victoria essent allati, existimabant
plerique futurum fuisse ut oppidum âmitterëtur. Caes. (662.)
3. Posse, to be able, and velle, to will, on account of their future sense, do not require
a periphrasis. In the absence of periphrastic forms, the forms of posse are often used
instead. (659.)
4. The Subjunctive forms futurum sit, esset, fuerit, ut . .. are used in the gram¬
mars to supply theperiphrastic subjunctive of Passive aud Supineless verbs. (See 515,R. 2.)
Warrant in real usage is scarce.
An utiqus futürum sit ut Carthaginem superent Roman! 1 Quikt. I. O.
III. 8. 7. (not merely periphrastic).
241. 2. In eöest, it is on the point, '
erat, ) .j
fuit ) (Impersonal),
In eo erat ut Pausanias comprehenderëtur. Nep. It was on the point
that Pausanias should he (P. was on the point of) heing arrested.
ut, that {of), with the
subjunctive.
Remark.—This phrase occurs in Nepos and Livr, seldom in earlier writers.
136
TENSES IN LETTERS.
B.—Of Past Belations.
242. The Perfect Participle Passive is used in combination with sum^
I am, and fuï, I have been, lunas, to express the Pure Perfect and Historical
Perfect of the Passive Yoice. Cram, I was, and fueram, I had been, stand
for the Pluperfect ; and ero, I shall be, and fuero, I shall have been, for the
Future Perfect.
Remark.—Fui is the favorite form when the participle is frequently used as an ad¬
jective: convivium exornätum fuit, the banquet was furnished forth; fui is the
necessary form when the Perfect denotes that the action is over and gone : amätus fui,
1 have been loved (but I am loved no longer). The same principle applies to fueram and
fuero, though not so regularly.
Simulacrum ë marmore in sepulcrS positum fuit; hoc quidam homo n5-
hilis dëportâvit- Cic. A marble effigy was deposited in the tomb ; a certain man of rank
has carried it off.
Arma quae fixa in parietibus fuer ant, humi inventa sunt. Cic. The
arms which had been fastened to the walls were found on the ground.
Nec mäter fuero dicta nec orba diu. Ov. I shall not have been called mother nor
childless long.
243. The combination of the Tenses of esse, to he, with the
Gerundive (verbal in -ndus), is called the Periphrastic Conjuga¬
tion of the Passive, and follows the laws of the simple conjuga¬
tion. (See 150.)
Remarks.—!. The Gerundive has the form of a Present Participle Passive, (-ndus
for -ntus). Whenever a participle is used as a predicate it becomes characteristic, and
good for all time. Compare 439, R.
As amans not only = qui amat, but also = qui amet, so amandus = qui amëtur.
2. According to the rnle (208) the Gerundive of Intransitive verbs can be used only in
the Impersonal form ;
Farcendum est victis. The vanquished must be spared.
244. The Eoman letter-writer not unfrequently puts him¬
self in the position of the receiver, more especially at the begin¬
ning and at the end of the letter, often in the phrase Nihil erat
quod scrlberem, "I have nothing to write." This permutation of
tenses is never kept up long, and applies only to temporary situ¬
ations, never to general statements.
C.—Periphrastic Conjugation—Passive Voice.
TENSES IN LETTERS.
Table of Permutations.
scribo, I am writing, becomes i
I write,
scripsi, I have wHtten,
I wrote, \
or remains unchanged,
scrlbam, I sltall write, i
scriptûrus eram.
scripseram,
scripseram,
scrîbëbam,
scripsL
MOODS.
137
The adverbial designations of time remain unchanged—or
Herí, yesterday, becomes prïdië.
hodië, to-day, " quo dië has litteras dedi, dabam,
eras, to-morrow, " posterö dië, postrîdië.
Pormiäs më continuó recipere cögitäbam. Cíe. I am thinking of re¬
tiring forthwith to Formiae.
Quum mihi Caecilius dixisset puerum së Römam mittere, haec scripsi
raptim. Cic. As Cœcilius has told me that he is sending a servant to Borne,
I write in a hurry.
latieras eram datürus positidië ei qui mihi primus obviam vënisset.
Cíe. I will give the letter to-morrow to the first man that comes my way.
Moods.
245. Mood signifies manner. The mood of a verb signifies
the manner in which the predicate is said of the subject.
There are three moods in Latin :
1. The Indicative.
2. The Subjunctive.
3. The Imperative.
Beuâbk.—The Infinitive form of the verb is generally, but improperly, called a mood.
The Indicative Mood.
246. The Indicative Mood represents the predicate as a
reality. It is sometimes called the Declarative Mood, as the
mood of direct assertion.
The use of the Latin Indicative difiPers little from the English.
The beginner may omit the Eemarks.
Remarks.—1. The Latin language expresses and jpoí¿'er, obligation and neces¬
sity, and abstract relations generally, as facts ; whereas, our translation often implies the
failure to realize. Such expressions are : dëbeo, 1 ought, it is my duty ; oportet, it be¬
hooves ; necesse est, it is absolutely necessary ; possum, I can, I have it in my power ;
OOnvenit, it is fitting ; par, aequum est, it is fair ; infinitum, endless ; difficile, hard
todo ; longum, tedious ; and the Indicative form of the Passive Periphrastic Conjuga¬
tion :
Possum persequi multa oblectâmenta rërum rüsticärum. Cío. I might rehearse
many delights of country life.
Longum est ûtilitâtës persequi asinorum. Cio. It would be tedious to rehearse
the useful qualities of asses (I will not do it).
Ad mortem të düci oportëbat- Cíe. It behooved you to be led to execution (you were
not), you ought to have been led off.
Volumnia dëbuît in të officiösior esse, et id ipsum, quod fëcit, potuit
facere dlligen tius. Cic. 11 was Vdumnials duty tobe {V. ought to have been) more at¬
tentive to you; and the little she did do, she had it in her power to do, {she might have done)
more carefully
138
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Quae condicio nSn accipienda fuit potius quam patria relinquendal Cic.
What terms ought not to have been accepted in preference to leaving thy country f
Nil mihi dëbuerat cumversibus amplius esse. Ov. Naught more should 1
have had (ere then) to do with verses.
The Perfect and Pluperfect always refer to a special case.
2. The Imperfect as the Tense of Disappointment is sometimes used in these verbs to
denote opposition to a present state of things : dëbëbam, lought (but do not) ; peteras,
you could (but do not). These may be considered as conditionals in disguise. (See R. 3.)
Foteram morbos appelläre, sed nön conveniret ad omnia. Cic. lmight trans¬
late (that Greek wordl diseasesf but that would not suit all the cases. (Poteram si con¬
veniret.)
At pot er äs, inquis, melius mala ferre silendö. Ov. '■'■Butf ym say, '•'■you
could (you do not) bear your misfortunes better by keeping silent.'''' (Foteräs si silërës.)
3. The Indicative is sometimes used in the leading clause of conditional sentences (the
Apodosis), thereby implying the certainty of the result, had it not been for the interrup¬
tion.
The Indicative clause generally precedes, which is sufficient to show the rhetorical
character of the construction.
With the Imperfect the action is often really begun :
Lâbëbar longius, nisi më retinuissem. Cic. I^vas letting myself go on {should have
let myself go on) too far, had I not checked mysdf.
Omnino erat supervacua doctrina, si natura sufficeret. Quint. Training
were wholly superfluous, did nature suffice.
Fraeclârë vicerämus, nisi Lepidus recëpisset Antônium. Cíe. We had (should
have) gained a brilliant victory, had not Lepidus received Antony.
In all these sentences the English idiom requires the Subjunctive, which is disguised
by coinciding with the Indicative in form except in " were."
4. In general relative expressions, such as the double formations, quisquis, no matter
who, quotquot, no matter how many, and all forms in -cunque, -ever, the Indicative is
employed where we may use in English a Subjunctive or its equivalent : quisquís est,
no matter who he is, be, may be ; qualecunque est, whatever sort of thing it is, be, may
be.
Quidquid id est, timeo DanaSs et dona ferentëa. Vibg. Whatever it {may)
be, I fear the Danai even when they bring presents.
Subjunctive Mood.
247. The Subjunctive Mood represents the predicate as an
idea, as something merely conceived in the mind (abstracts
from reality).
Remark.—The Latin Subjunctive is often translated into English by the auxiliary
verbs may, can, must, might, could, would, should. When these verbs have their full
signification of possibility and power, obligation and necessity, they are represented in
Latin by the corresponding verhs: may, can, might, could, by the forms of possc, to be
able, licet, it is left free ; will and would, by velle, to will, to be willing ¡ must, by dëbco
or oportet (of moral obligation), by necesse est (of absolute obligation).
Nostras injurias neo potest neo possit alius ulciscï quam v5s. Liv. Our wrongs
no other than you has the power or can well have the power to avenge. Here potest gives
the simple affirmation, possit, the moral conviction of the speaker.
248. The realization of the idea may be in suspense, or it
may be ley and control. The first, or purely Ideal Subjunctive,
POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE.
139
is represented by the Present and Perfect Tenses ; the second,
or Unreal, is represented by the Imperfect and Pluperfect.
Eemarks.—1. The Subjunctive, as the name implies (subjungo, I subjoin), is largely
used in dependent sentences, and will be treated at length in that connection.
2. The following modifications of the above principles must he carefully observed :
A. The Eomans, in lively discourse, often represent the unreal as ideal, that which is
beyond control as still in suspense. (598, E. 2.)
B. In transfers to the past, the Imperfect represents the Present, and the Pluperfect
the Perfect Subjunctive. (510.)
249. Tlie idea may be a view, or a wish. Hence the division of the
Subjunctive into the Potential and the Optative. The Potential Subjunc¬
tive is nearer the Indicative, from which it differs in tone ; the Optative
Subjunctive is nearer the Imperative, for which it is often used.
The beginner may omit to 259.
POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE.
250. The Potential Subjunctive represents the opinion of the
speaker as an opinion. The tone varies from vague surmise to
moral certainty, from "may" and "might" to "must." The
negative is the negative of the Indicative non.
The Potential of the Present or Future is the Present or
Perfect Subjunctive. The verification is in suspense, and so
future; the action may be present or future : with Perfect some¬
times past.
Velim, I should wish; I should he unwilling ; mälim, I should,
prefer ; dïcâs, you would say ; crëdâs, you would helieve, you must believe ;
dicat, dixerit aliquis, some one may undertake to say, go so far as to say.
Caedï discípulos minimë velim. Quint. I should by no means like
pupils to be flogged.
TÛ Platënem neo nimis valdë unquam neonimis saepe laudâverïs.
Cic. You canH praise Plato too much nor too often.
251. The Mood of the Question is the Mood of the expected
or anticipated answer (464). Hence the Potential Subjunctive
is used in questions which serve to convey a negative opinion on
the part of thé speaker.
Quis dubitet(= nëmo dubitet) q u x n in virtüte dîvitiae sint ? CiC.
Who can doubt that there is wealth in virtue ? (No one).
Quis tule rit Gracchös dë sëdiUône querentës ? Juv. Whc could
bear the Oracchi complaining of rebellion ? (No one).
Apud exercitum fueris ? Cic. Tou were with the army J
140
OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.
252. The Potential of the Past is the Imperfect Subjunctive,
chiefly in the Ideal Second Person, an imaginary you."
Statement :
Ciëderës victos. Tou would, might, have thought them, beaten.
Haud facile dëcernerës utrum Hannibal imperätöri an exerci-
tul cärior esset. Lrv. Not readüy could you have decided whether Hannibal
was dearer to general or to army.
Mirârëtnr qui turn cerneret. Liv. Any one who saw it then must have
been astonished.
Vellern, I should have wished; nöllem, I should have been unwilling ;
mallem, I should have preferred (it is too late).
Question :
Hoc tantum bellum quis unquam arbitrârëtur ab ünö imperâtëre con-
fici posse ? Cic. Who would, could, should have thought that this great war
could be brought to a close by one general ?
Remarks.—1. The Potential Subjunctive is sometimes explained by the ellipsis of an
Ideal or of an Unreal Conditional Protasis. But the free Potential Subjunctive differs
from an elliptical conditional sentence in the absence of definite ellipsis, and hence of
definite translation. Compare the first two sentences above with :
£um qui palam est adversarius facile cayendo (si caveas) vitare possis- Cic.
An open adversary you can readily avoid by caution {if you are cautious).
Nil ego contulerim jûcundo sänus (= dum sänus ero) amicô. Hon. Thercis
naught 1 should compare to an agreeable friend, while I am in my sound senses.
2. The Unreal of the Present and the Ideal of the Past coincide. What is unreal of a
real person is simply ideal of an imaginary person. The Imperfect is used as the tense
of Description.
The Aoristic Perfect Subj. is rarely used as the Ideal of the Past.
3. The Potential Subjunctive, as a modified form of the Indicative, is often found
where the Indicative would be the regular construction. So after quanquam (607, R. 1).
OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.
253. The Subjunctive is used as an Optative or wishing
mood.
The regular negative is në. Non is used chiefly to negative a single
word.
The Present and Perfect Subjunctive are used lohen the decision is in
suspense, no matter how extravagant the wish ; the Imperfect and Plu¬
perfect are used when the decision is adverse. The Perfect is rare and old.
Stet haeo urbs. Cic. May this city continue to stand !
Di faxint = fëoerint. The gods grant !
Në istüc Jûppiter optimus maximus sîrit (= sïverit)! Lrv. May Jupi¬
ter, supremely great and good, suffer it not !
254. The Optative Subjunctive frequently takes TJtinam, uti-
nam nô, utinam non—in poetry also 0 sí, Oh if.
OPTATIYE SUBJUNCTIVE.
141
Utinam modo cônâta efficere p o s s im. Cic. May / but have it in my
power to accomplish my endeavors.
Utinam reviviscat fräter ! Gell. Would that my brother would come to
life again !
Utinam inserere jocös moris esset. Quint, Would that it were usual
to introduce jokes !
Illud utinam ne vërë scriberem. CiC. Would that what I am writing
were not true !
Utinam susceptus nön e s s e m. Cíe. Would I had not been born !
Ö mihi praeteritös référât sï Jüppíter annös. Verg. 0 if Jove
were to bring me back the years that are gone by !
Remarks.—1. TJtinam was originally an interrogative, How, pray? and belongs
partly to the potential. Ö Si is an elliptical conditional sentence, which is not intended
to have an Apodosis. When the Apodosis comes, it may come in a different form. So in
the example : Verg. Aen. viii. 560, 568.
2. For the wish with adverse decision vellem, mällem, and uöllem are often used
with Imperf. and Plpf. Subj.
Vellern adesse posset Fanaetius- Cic. Would that Panaetius could be present !
Nollem dixissem. Cic. Would that 1 had not said it !
So velim, nolim, etc., for the simple wish (546, R. 3).
255. The Optative Subjunctive is used in asseverations :
Ita V i V a m ut máximos sumptüs fació. Cío. As I Uve, I am spending
very largely (literally, so may I live as 1 am making very great outlay).
256. The Subjunctive is used as an Imperative—
1. In the First Person, which has no Imperative form:
Amëmus patriam. Cic. Let us love our country.
Në diíficilia optëmus. Cic. Let us not desire what is hard to do.
2. In the Second Person—In the Present chiefly of an imagi¬
nary "you."
Utare, you- may use it; në requiräs, you must not pine for it.
In the Perfect negatively :
Në transferís Hibërum. Liv. Do not cross the Ebro.
3. In the Third Person (regularly) :
Amet, let him love ; në amet, let him not love. (See 265.)
257. The Subjunctive is used as a concessive:
Sit für. Cic. {Granted that) hebe a thief.
Fëcerit, si ita vis. Cic. {Suppose) he have done it, if you wiUtfidWQ it ^o)
Other examples with ut and në, see 610.
142
IMPERATIVE.
258. The Subjunctive is used in Questions whieb expect an
Imperative answer (conjunctlvus dêllberâtlvus).
Genuine questions are commonly put in the First Person, or
the representative of the First Person :
Quid faciam ? roger anne rogem ? quid deinde rogabo ? Ov. WTiat
shall I do f shall I ask or he asked? what then shall I ask him ?
Magna fuit contentio utrum moenibus se dëfenderent an obviam
ïrent hostlbus. Nep. There was a great dispute whether they should defend
themselms behind the walls or go to meet the enemy. (Utrum nos dëfendâmus
an obviam eamus ?). [Example of Third Pei-son, 429 E. 1.]
Rhetorical questions (questions which anticipate the answer)
under this head, are hardly to be distinguished from Potential.
Quo më nunc vertam? Undique custodier. Cic. Whither shall T
now turn ? Sentinels on every side.
Quid agerem ? CiC. What was I to do ?
Imperative Mood.
259. The Imperative is the mood of the will. It wills that
the predicate be made a reality. The tone of the Imperative
varies from stern command to piteous entreaty. It may appear
as a demand, an order, an exhortation, a permission, a prayer.
Abî in malam rem. Plaut. Go {to the mischief), and he hanged.
Compasee mentem. Hor. Gurh your temper.
Dâ mihi hoc, mal meum ! Plaut. Give me this, honey dear !
260. The Imperative has two forms, known as the First and
the Second Imperative. The First Imperative has only the
Second person; the Second Imperative has both Second and
Third persons. The First Person is represented by the Sub¬
junctive.
Ame mus patriam. Cic. Let us love our country.
Remark.—Some verbs have only the second form. This may be due to the signifi¬
cation : so scîtô, know thou ; mementS, remember thou ; and habëtS, in the sense of
know, remember.
261. The First Imperative looks forward to immediate fulfil¬
ment (Absolute Imperative) :
Special : Patent portas ; proficiscere. Cic. Open stand the
gates ; depart.
IMPERATIVE.
143
General: Jûstitiam cole et pietâtem. Oic. Cultivate justice
and piety.
262. The Second Imperative looks forward to contingent ful¬
filment (Eelative Imperative), and is chiefiy used in laws, legal
documents, maxims, and the like:
Regio imperio duo s u n t o, there shall hd two {officers) with royal power.
Cónsules appellantor, they shall be called consuls.
Nêminî p ä r e n t o, they are to obey no one.
Ulis salüs populî suprema leK esto. Cic. To them the welfare of the
people must be the paramount law.
Rem vobis pröpönam : v5s eam penditote. Cic. I will propound the
matter to you ; do you thereupon perpend it.
Peroontätörem f u g i t ö, nam garrulus idem est. HoR. Avoid your
questionerffior he is a tell-tale too.
263. Negative oe the Imperative.—The regular negative
of the Imperative is né (neve, neu), which is found with the
Second Imperative ; with the First Imperative, in poetry only.
Hominem mortuum in urbe neve sepelito neve ürito, thou shall not
bury nor burn a dead man in the city.
Impius në audëto placare dönis iram deörxun. cic. The impious man
must not dare attempt to appease by gifts the anger of the gods.
Tü në cëde malïs, sed contra audentior îtô. Vero. Yield not thou to
misfortunes, but go more boldly (than ever) to meet them.
Remark.—Non may be used to negative a single ivord.
Ä lëgibtis non recëdâmus. Let us not recede from (let us stick to) the laws.
Opus poliat lima, non exterat- Quint. Let the file rub the work up, not rub it
out.
264. Periphrases.—I. Cûrà ut, tahe care that ; fac ut, cause
that ; fac, do, with the Subjunctive, are common circumlocutions
for the Positive Imperative.
O Ü r ä u t quam primum (317) venias. CiC. Manage to come as soon
as possible.
Fac côgitës. Cic. Reflect !
II. Cave ne, beware lest, and cave, with the subjunctive, and
noli, be unwilling, with the Infinitive, for the Negative Impera¬
tive (Prohibitive).
O a V ë festînës. Cíe. Bo not be in a hurry.
144
IMPER^VTIVE.
Tantum quum finges n ë sis manifesta caveto. Ov. Only, when you
pretend, beware that you be not detected.
Noli vexare, qmescit. Juv. Don't disturb her ; she's sleeping.
265. Representatives of the Imperative.—Instead of
the Positive Imperative, may be employed :
1. The Second Person of the Future Indicative ;
2. The Third Person of the Present Subjunctive:
F a ci ë s, ut sciam, let me know ; v i v ë s, live on.
Quod quia habet dominae conférât omne suae. Ov. Let a man
give everything that he has to his lady-love.
Quaedam cum prima resecentur crimina barbâ. Juv. Let cer¬
tain faults be clipped off with the sprouting beard.
266. Instead of the Negative Imperative (Prohibitive), may
be employed :
The Second Person of the Perfect Subjunctive, with ne.
The Second Person of the Future, with non.
The Third Person of the Present or Perfect Subjunctive, with
ne.
Hocfacito, hoc në fëceris. Cío. This do, that leave undone.
Non cessäbis. Cíe. You must not be idle.
Puer tëlum në habeat. Cío. A boy is not to have a deadly weapon.
Në metus quemquam c ë p e rit. Lrv. Let not fear seize any one.
Misericordia commötus në sis. Cíe. Don't let yourself be moved by pity.
Remarks.—1. Hon is often used in poetry for nS, and neque, nec for nSve, neu.
Aut nön tentârls aut perfice. Ov. Mther do not try (at all), or effect (your
object).
Nec, si quern fallës, tüperjüräre tiniStS. Ov. Nor i/yow (shall try to) de¬
ceive a man, do you fear to forswear yourself.
On the negative nSn with a single word, see 263 R. With the Perfect Subjunctive,
neque, nihil, nëmo, nullus are freely used, as well as nëve, neu, nëquis, nëquid-
2. The Present Subjunctive is employed when stress is laid on the continuance of the
action ; the Perfect, when stress is laid on the completion. Hence in total prohibitions,
the Perfect Subjunctive is the favorite form.
3. The Imperative of the Past is expressed by the Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunc¬
tive (unfulfilled duties).
Dötem darëtis ; alium quaereret virum. Ter. Tou should have given her a por¬
tion ; she should have sought another match.
Cras ïrës potius, hodië hic cënârës- Valë. Plaut. You ought rather to have
put off going till to-morrow, you ought to (have) dine{d) with us to-day. Good-bye. Any¬
thing decided is regarded as past.
Në poposcissëtis librSs. Cic. You ought not to have asked for the books.
267. The Second Person Singular of the Present Subjunc-
TENSES OF MOODS AND VEEBAL NOUNS. 145
tive is used both positÍYelj and negatively ; but in prose, only
of an imaginary subject (" you^^) :
Corporis viribus ütäre, dum adsint; cum absint ne reqmräs. Cic.
Enjoy your rigor of body while you have it ; when it is gone, you must not
pine for it.
268. Passionate questions are equivalent to a command :
Non taces ? wonH you hold your tongue ? quin taces ? why dovüt you
hold you tongue f
Cûr non ut plënus vîtae conviva recëdis ? LuCR. "Why do you, not
withdraw as a guest sated with life ?
269. SUMMARY OF IMPERATIVE CONSTRUCTIONS.
Positive.
2d P. Audi, hear thou ; auditö (legal or contingent) ; audiës (familiar) ;
audiâs (ideal 2d Person).
3d P. Auditö (legal), let him hear ; audiat.
Negative.
2d P. Në audi, hear not (poetic) ; në auditö (legal) ; nön audiës (fami¬
liar) ; në audiäs (ideal) ; në audiverïs j nöli audire.
3d P. Në auditö (legal), let him not hear ; në audiat j në audiverit.
Tenses op the Moods and Verbal Nouns.
270. The Indicative alone expresses with uniform directness
the period of time.
271. 1. The Present and Imperfect Subjunctive have to do
with continued action, the Perfect and Pluperfect with completed
action. The Perfect Subjunctive is also used to express the
attainment.
2. In simple sentences Present and Perfect Subjunctive post¬
pone the ascertainment of the Predicate to the Future. The
action itself may be Present or Future for the Present Subjunc¬
tive; Present, Past, or Future for the Perfect Subjunctive.
Crëdat. He may believe (now or hereafter).
Crëdiderit. Let him have had the (heretofore), he may have come
to the belief (now), he may come to the belief (hereafter.)
3. In simple sentences the Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunc-
7
146
tenses op moods and verbal nouns.
tive are Past Tenses. The notion of unreality lies in the past
tense, rather than in the Subjunctive Mood. Compare 243, K. 2.
4. In dependent sentences the Subjunctive is future if the
leading verb has a future signification ; otherwise the Subjunc¬
tive represents the Indicative. The tense is regulated by the
law of sequence. (See 510.)
272. The Imperative is necessarily Future.
273. The Infinitive has two uses :
1. Its use as a Noun.
2. Its use as a representative of the Indicative.
274. 1. As a Noun, the Infinitive has two tenses, Present and
Perfect.
The Present Infinitive has to do with continued action. It is
tbe common form of the Infinitive, used as a noun.
The Perfect Infinitive has to do with completed action, and
is also used to express attainment.
The Present Infinitive is used as a subject.
Valere est vita, Being well is life.
The Present Infinitive is used as the object of verbs of crea¬
tion (Auxiliary Verbs, Verbs that help the Infinitive into being).
(424.)
Metui quam amârî malo, I prefer being feared to being loved.
275. The Perfect Infinitive is comparatively little used as a
noun.
1. As a Subject, it is used chiefly in fixed expressions or in
marked opposition to the Present.
Plus pröderit dëmonstrâsse rectam protinus vi am quam r e-
V o cär e ab errore jam lapsos. Quint. It will be more profitable to have
painted out the right path immediately than to recaU from wandering those
that have already gone astray.
Non tam turpe fuit v i n c i quam contendisse decôrum est. Ov.
^ Two» not so much dishonor to be beaten as 'tis an honor to have struggled.
So by a kind of attraction with deouit, became^ oportuit, behooved^ and
the like, especially in earlier and late Latin.
Tunc decuit fl ê s s e. *Lrv. That was the time when it would have been
becoming to weep {to have wept).
TENSES OP MOODS AND VEEBAL NOUNS. 14:7
2. As an Object, the Perfect Infinitive is seldom found in the
active ; so after velle, to wish.
Neminem nota strënuî aut ignâvî mîlitis notasse voluî. Liv. I wühed
to ham marked {to mark finally) no soldier with the mark of bravery oi' of
cowardice.
Otherwise it is found only in the poets (after the fashion of the Greek
Aorist Infinitive) :
Frâtrës tendentës opaco Pëlion imposuisse Ol3rmpö. Hör. The
brothers striving to pile Pelion on shady Olympus.
In the Passive, the Perfect Infinitive is used after verbs of
Will and Desire, to denote impatience of anything except entire
fulfilment. See 537.
Here the Infinitive esse is seldom expressed.
Dëmocritum nollem (esse) vituperatum. Cic. I should rather not have
had Democritus abused.
276. 2. As the representative of the Indicative, the Infinitive
has all its Tenses : Present, Fast, Future, and Future Periphras-
tics.
277. The Present Infinitive represents contemporaneous action
—hence the Present Indicative after a Principal Tense, and the
Imperfect after a Historical Tense :
Dico eum venire, I say that he is coming ; dïcêbam eum venire,
I said that he was coming.
The Perfect Infinitive represents Prior Action — hence the
Perfect and Imperfect Indicative after a Principal Tense :
Dico eum vënisse, I say that he came, has come, used to come j
and the Pluperfect, Imperfect, and Historical Perfect Indicative
after a Historical Tense :
Dm eum vënisse, I said that he had come, used to come, did
come.
Eemabk.—Memini,/reïnemôér, when used of personal experience commonly takes
the present.
Tum më rëgem appellSrî ä vëbîs memini, nunc tyrannum vocârî video. Liv.
J remember being styled by you a king then., I see that I am called a tyrant now. So also
memoria teneo and recordor, I remember^ I recall. VTTien the experience is not per¬
sonal, the ordinary construction is followed ;
Memineram Marium ad infimôrum hominum misericordiam confiiglsse. Cic.
I remembered that Marius had thrown himsdf on the mercy of a set of low creatures.
The peculiar construction with the Present arises from the liveliness of the recollec-
148
SIMPLE SENTENCE EXPANDED.
tion. When the action is to he regarded as a bygone, the Perfect may he used even of
personal experience :
Më memini îrâtum dominae turbasse capillös. Ov. 1 remember in my anger
having tousled my sweethearVs hair.
278. The Present Participle Active denotes continuance; the
Perfect Passive, completion or attainment.
Rbmabk.—The Perfect Participle is often used where we should employ a Present ;
ratas, thinking ; complexas, embracing ; hortätas, exhorting.
279. The Future Participle (Active) is a verbal adjective,
denoting capability and tendency, chiefly employed in the older
language with sum, I am, as a periphrastic tense. In later Latin
it is used freely, just as the Present and Perfect Participles, to
express subordinate relations.
Eemark.—The so-called Future Participle Passive is more properly called the Gerun¬
dive, and has already been discussed. (243.)
SIMPLE SENTENCE EXPANDED.
280. The sentence may be expanded by the multiplication
or by the qualification, A, of the subject, B, of the predicate.
A.
1. Multiplication of the Subject.
Concord.
281. Number: The common predicate of two or more sub¬
jects is put in the plural number :
Jùs et ii^ûria nâtûrâ dîjûdicantur. Cic. RigM and wrong are
distinguished by nature.
Pater et avus mortui sunt. Ter. Father and grandfather are dead.
Exceptions.—1. The common predicate may agree with a singular
subject when that subject is the nearest or the most important : (" My flesh
and my h.eBxX failethf Psa. Ixxiii. 26.)
Aetas et forma et super omnia Römänum nömen të feröciörem facit.
Liv. Your youth and beauty, and, above all, the name of Roman, makes you
too mettlesome.
Naves et praesidium exoessit. Liv. The fleet and garrison departed.
2. Two abstracts in combination, when they are conceived as a unit,
take a singular verb : (" When distress and anguish cometh upon you,"
Prov. i. 27.)
CONCORD.
149
Religio et fides antepönätur amîcitiae. Cic. Let the religious obliga¬
tion of a promise he preferred to friendship.
So any close fflion : (" Your gold and silver is cankered," Jas. v. 3.)
Senatus populusgue Römänus intell eg i t. Cío. The senate and
people of Rome perceives {= Rome perceives.)
Remarks.—1. Neque—neque, neither—mr., allows the Plural chiefly when the Per¬
sons are different :
Haec ne que ego neque tûfëcinius. Ter. Neither you nor I did this.
2. A singular subject combined with another word by cum, with, is treated some¬
times as a singular, sometimes as a plural :
Mago cum omnibus ferg armâtîs refügerat. Liv. Mago with almost all the
armed men had retreated.
Taurus cum quinqué vaccis ünö ictû fulminis ezanimätl sunt. Lit. A
hud with five cows were killed by me stroke of lightning.
282. Gender : When the genders of combined subjects are
different, the adjective predicate takes either the strongest gen¬
der or the nearest.
In things with life, the masculine gender is the strongest; in
things without life, the neuter.
The strongest :
Pater et mäter mortui sunt. Ter. Father and mother are dead.
Mürus et porta dë caelö t a o t a. Liv. Wall and gate had been struck
by lightning.
The nearest:
Convicta est Messalina et Silius. Tag. Messalinawas convicted and
(so was) Silius.
Hippolochus Lärissaeörumque dëditum est praesidium. LiV.
Hippolochus and the Larissaean garrison {were) surrendered.
When things with life and things without life are combined,
the gender varies.
Both as persons :
Rex rëgiaque clässis profectî sunt. Liv. The king and the king''s
feet set out.
Both as things :
Natura inimica sunt libera civitas et rëx. Liv. A free state and a
king are natural enemies.
Remark.—On the neuter as a predicate see R. 4.
Pax et concordia victis ûtilia, victöribus tantum pulchra sunt. Tag. Peace
and harmony are useful (things) to the cmquered, to the cmguerors akme are they orna¬
ments.
150
ADJECTIVE ATTRIBUTE.
283. Persons : When the persons of combined subjects are
different, the First Person is preferred to the Second, the Second
to the Third :
Si tû et Tullía, lux nostra, valëtis, ego et suâvissimus Cicero valë-
mus. Cic. If Tullía, light of my eyes, and you are well, dearest Cicero and
I are well.
Remarks.—1. The order is commonly the order of the persons, not of modern polite¬
ness : Ego et uxor mea. Wife and 1. " ~
2. Exception.—In contrasts, and when each person is considered separately, the pred¬
icate agrees with the person of the nearest subject :
Ego sententiam, tü verba défendis. lam the champion of the spirit, you of the
letter.
Et ego et Cicero mens flägitäbit. Cic. My Cicero will demand it and (so will) I.
So regularly with disjunctives. On neque—neq[ue, see 281, R. 1.
2. Qualification of the Subject.
284. The subject may be qualified by giving it an attribute.
An attribute is that which serves to give a specific character.
The chief forms of the attribute are :
I. The adjective and its equivalents : amîci^ certus, a sure
friend.
II. The substantive in apposition: Cicero orator, Cicero the
orator.
Remark.—The equivalents of the adjective are : 1. The pronouns bic, this, ille,
that, etc. 2. Substantives denoting rank, age, trade ; servus homo, a slave person •
homo senex, an old fellow ; homo gladiator, a gladiator-fellow ; mulier ancilla, a
servant-wench. 3. The genitive (357). 4. The ablative (402). 5. Preposition and case ;
excessus 6 vita, departure from life. 6. Adverbs chiefly witii participial nouns : rectS
facta, good actions. 7. Relative clauses (506).
I. Adjective Attribute.
Concord.
285. The Adjective Attribute agrees with its substantive, in
gender, number, and case:
Gender. Number.
Vir sapiens, a wise man, viri sapientës, wise men.
Mulier pulchra, a beautiful woman, mulierës pulchrae, beautiful
women.
Rëgitun donum, royal gift, rëgia dona, royal gifts.
PECULIAR FORMS OP THE ADJECTIVE ATTRIBUTE. 15]
Cash.
Viri sapientis, of a wise man.
bone fïK ! good son !
Mulieri pulchrae,/ör a beautiful woman, regio dono, by royal gift.
women.
286. The common attribute of two or more substantives
agrees with the nearest:
Remarks.—1. The Latin language repeats the common attribute more frequently
than the English : o m n ë S agri et o m n i a maria, ciU lands and (oE) seas. Generally,
the Latin language has a strong tendency to rhetorical repetition.
2. A common surname is put in the plural : M. et Q. CicerënëS, Marcus and Quintus
Cicero; C., Cn., M. Carbënës, Gains, Gnaeus {&nd)Marcus Uarôo/otherwise, M. Cicero
et Q. Cicero, Marcus and Quintu^ Cicero.
287. Position of the Attribute.—When the Attribute is em¬
phatic, it is commonly put before the substantive, ordinarily
after it.
1. Pugitïvus servus, a runaway slam (one complex).
2. Servus fugitivas, œ slam (that is) a runaway (two notions).
Many expressions, however, have become fixed formulae, such as civis
Römänus, Roman citizen ; populus Römänus, people of Rome.
Remark.—The. superlatives which denote order and sequence in time and space are
often used partitively, and then generally precede their substantive : summa aqua, the
surface of the water ; summus mons, the top of the mountain; vëre prImS, primo
vëre, in the beginning of spring ; in media urbe, in the midst of the city. So also, re-
liqua, cëtera Graecia, the rest of Greece.
288. When the attribute belongs to two or more words, it is
placed sometimes before them all, sometimes after them all,
sometimes after the first.
All lands and seas, omnês agri et maria; agri et maña om¬
ni a ; agrî o m n ê s et maria.
The beginner may omit to 318.
289. The following forms of the Adjective Attribute present
important peculiarities.
1. Demonstrative Pronouns.
2. .Determinative and Keflexive Pronouns.
Virum sapjentem, wise man.
mulieres pulchras, beautiful
Peculiar Forms of the Adjective Attribute.
153
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
3. Possessive Pronouns.
4. Indefinite Pronouns.
5. iSTupierals.
6. Comparatives and Superlatives.
1. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
290. Ifíc, this (the Demonstrative of the First Person), refers
to that which is nearer the speaker^ and may mean :
1. The speaker himself : hie homo = ego.
3. The judges in a suit of law : si ego h 5 s nôvï, if I know these men
(= the jury).
3. The most important subject immediately in hand: hi o sapiens dë
qu5 loquor, this (imaginary) wise man of whom I am speaking.
4. That in which the speaker is peculiarly interested : h 5 o Studium,
this pursuit of mine^ of ours.
5. That which has just been mentioned: haeo haotenus, things
thus far — so much for that.
6. Very frequently, that which is about to be mentioned : his oondi-
oionibus, on the following terms.
7. The current period of time : h i o dies, to-day ; haeo nox, the night
just past ov just coming / hi o mënsis, the current month.
291. Iste, that (of thine, of yours), refers to that ivhich belongs
more peculiarly to the Second Person (Demonstrative of the
Second Person) :
Perfer i s t a m militiam. Cic. Endure that military service of yours.
Adventü tu5 i s t a subsellia vaouefaota sunt. CiC. At your approach
the benches in your neighborhood were mcated.
Remark.—The supposed contemptuous character of Iste arises from the refusal to
take any direct notice of the person under discussion, " the person oí whom."
292. Hie, that (the Demonstrative of the Third Person), de¬
notes that lohich is more remote from the speaker, and is often
used in contrast to hie, this.
Heu quantum h a e c Niobë Niobä distäbat ab illa. Ov. Alas ! how
far this Niobe differed from that Niobe.
nie may mean :
1. That, which has been previously mentioned (often ille quidem):
il lud quod initio vobis pröposiü, that which 1 propounded to you at first,
2. That which is well known, notorious (often put after the substantive) :
DETEEMIÎTATIVE AND EEFLEXIVE PEONOUNS. 153
testula illa, that (notorious) pots?ierd — institution of ostracism ; i 11 u d
Solönis, that (famoiis saying) of Solones.
3. That which is to be recalled : ill u d imprimis miräbile, that (which
I am going to remind you of) is especially wonderful.
4. That which is expected :
Ilia dies veniet mea qua lûgubria ponam. Ov. The day will come
when I shall lay aside (cease) my mournful strains.
Eemakks.—1. Hie and ille are used together in contrasts : as, the latter—the former,
the former—the latter.
When both ai-e matters of indiflference the natural signification is observed : hic, the
latter ; ille, the former.
Ignavia corpus hebetat, labor firmat ; i 11 a mâtûram seneetütem, hic long-
am adulescentiam reddit. Cels. Laziness weakens the body, toil strengthens it ; the one
(the former) hastens old age, the other (the latter) prolongs youth.
When the former is the more important, hic is the former, ille the latter ;
Melior tUtiorque est certa pax quam spërâta victoria ; h a e c in nSstra, ilia
in deorum manû est. Lrv. Better and safer is certain peace than hoped-for victory ; the
former is in our hand{s), the latter in the handis) of the gods.
2. Hic et ille ; ille et ille ; ille aut ille, this man and (or) that man = one or two.
Hon dicam hoc signum ablatum esse et i 11 u d ; hoc dico, nullum të Signum
rellquisse. Cic. Iwill not say that this statue was taken off and thai(what)/say (is)
this, thai you left no statue at all.
3. The derived adverbs retain the personal relations of hic, iste, ille : hïC, here
(where I am) ; hinc, hence (from where I am) ; hüc, hither (where I am) ; istic, there
(where you are) ; illic, there (where he is), etc.
4. The Demonstrative Pronouns hic, iste, ille, and the Determinative is, are often
strengthened by quidem, indeed. The sentence often requires that either the demon¬
strative or the particle be left untranslated.
Optare hoc quidem est, non docëre. Cic. That is a (pious) wish, not a (logical)
proof.
Nihil perfertur ad nos praeter rûmërës satis istSs quidem constantës
sed adhüc sine auctöre. Cíe. Nothing is brought to us except reports, quite consistent, it
is true but thus far not authxyritative.
2. DETERMINATIVE AND REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
293. Is, that, is the determinative pronoun, and the regular
antecedent of the relative.
Mihi obviam vënit tuus puer j i s mihi lîtterâs abs të reddidit. CiC.
I was met by your servant ; Tie delivered to me a letter from you.
I s minimo eget mortälis qui minimum cupit. Syrus. That mortal
is in want of least, who wanteth least.
Eemarks.—1. Is, as the antecedent of the relative, is often omitted, chiefly in the
Nominative, more rarely in an oblique case.
Sis dat qui cito dat. Puov. He gives twice who gives in a trice.
2. Is, with a copulative or adversative particle, is used as he or that in English, for the
purpose of emphasis. Such expressions are : et is, atque is, isque, and he too, and that
154
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
too ; neque is, et is n5n, and he not, and that not ; sed is, Init he, further strengthened
by quidem, indeed.
Exempla quaerimus e t e a non antiqua. Cic. We are looking for examples^ and
those, too, not of ancient date.
Epicûrus una in domo et eä quidem augusta quam magnos tenuit amî-
cörum gregës. Cíe. What shoals of friends Epicurus had in one house, and that a xAnched-
up one !
3. Is does not represent a noun before a Genitive, as in the English that of. In Latin
the noun is omitted, or repeated, or a word of like meaning substituted.
Non jüdiciö discipulörum dicere dëbet magister sed discipuli magistrï.
Quint. The master is not to speak according to the judgment of the pupils, but the pupils
according to that of the master.
Nulla est celeritas quae possit cum animi celeritate contendere. Cic. There
is no speed that can possiUy vie with that of the mind.
M. Coelius tribunal suum juzta G. Trëbôni sëllam collocävit. Caes. Marcas
Cœlius placed his chair of office next to that Of Gaius Trebcmius.
Of course Hie, Hie, and Iste can be used with the Genitive in their proper sense.
294. Reflexive : Akin to is is the Reflexive Pronoun sul,
sibi, sé. Instead of the Genitives ëjus, eömm, eärum, eönun, the
Possessive of the Reflexive, suus, sua, suum, is employed when
reference is made to the subject of the sentence :
Alexander moriens anulum suum dederat Perdiccae. Nep. alex'
ander (when) dying had given his ring to Ferdiccas.
Quod quis habet domiuae conférât omne suae. Ov. (365.)
On the other hand :
Deum agnoscis ex operibus ejus. God you recognize hy his works.
The same principle applies to the other cases of is and of
the Reflexive. Hence the general rule :
295. The forms of the Reflexive Pronoun are used when
reference is made to the subject of the sentence.
Ipse s ë quisque dïligit. CiC. Everybody loves himself.
Remarks.—1. Suus, when used in an emphatic sense {own, peculiar, proper), may
refer to another case than that of the subject :
Hannibalem su i cîvës ë civitâte ëjëcërunt. Cic. HannihaVs own countrymen
exUed him.
Jüstitia suum cuïque distribuit- Cic. Justice gives each man that is his own =
his due.
Inque sues volui cogere verba pedës- Ov. And I wished to force the words into
their proper feet (places in the verse).
Suo tempore, at the proper, fitting time. So sue loco :
Cömoediae quem üsum in puerís putem s u ö locö dîcam. Quint. What 1
consider to be the good of comedy in the case of boys I will mention in the proper place.
2. In dependent clauses the reflexive is used with reference either to the principal or
to the subordinate subject. See for fuller treatment 521.
DISTINCTIVE PKONOUN.
155
296. ídem, the same, serves to unite two or more attributes or
predicates on a person or thing.
idem is often to be translated by at the same time ; likewise,
also ; yet, notwithstanding.
Cimön incidit in e a n d e m invidiam quam pater suus. Hep. Cimon
fell into tlie same odium as his father.
Quidqiiid honestum est idem est ûtile. Cic. Whatever is honorable
is also (at the same time) useful.
Nil prödest quod non laedere possit idem. Ov. Nothing helps that
may not likewise hurt.
Spicûrus, quum optimam et praestantissimam nätüram deî dîcat esse,
negat idem esse in deö grätiam. Cic. Although Epicurus says that the
nature of Ood is transcendently good and great, yet (at the same time) he says
that there is no sense of favor in God.
Difficilis facilis, jûcundus acerbus, es idem. Mart. Grabbed (and)
kindly, sweet (and) sour, are you at once.
Remarks.—l.'The same as is expressed by idem with qui, with atque or ac, with ut,
with cum, and poetically with the Dative :
Servi mSribus iisdem erant quihus dominus. Cic. The servants had the same
character as the master.
Est animus ergS te idem a c fuit. Ter. Her feelings toward you are the same as
they were.
Disputâtiônem exp5nim4is iisdem ferS verbis ut actum disputätumque
est. Cic. We are setting forth the discussion in very much the same words in which it
was actually carried an.
Tibi mëcum in eodem pistrinb vivendum. Cic. You have to live in the same
treadmill with me.
Invitum qui servat idem facit occidenti. Hor. He who saves a mantes, life)
against his will, does the same thing as one who kills him (as if he killed him).
2. Idem cannot be used with is, of which it is only a stronger form (is + dem).
297. Ipse, self, is the distinctive pronoun, and separates a
subject or an object from all others :
Ipse feci, I myself did it and none other, I alone did it, I did it of my own
accord, I am the very man that did it.
Nunc i p s u m, af this very instant, at this precise moment.
Conön non quaesïvit ubi ipse tûtô vîveret, sed unde praesidiö
esse posset cïvibus suis. Nep. Gonon did not seek aplace to live in safely
himself, but a place from which he could be of assistance to his countrymen.
Valvae subito se ipsae aperuêrunt. CiC. The folding-doors suddenly
opened of their own accord.
Cato mortuus est annis octögintä sex ipsis ante Cicerönem con-
sulem. Cic. Gato died just eighty-six years before Gicerf s consulship.
156
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
Remarks.—1. Owing to this distinctive character, ipse is often used of persons in
opposition to things; riders in opposition to horses ^ inhabitants m opposition to the
towns which they inhabit ; the master of the house in opposition to his hmisehxold.
Eo quo më ipsa misit. Plaut. 1 am going where mistress sent me.
2. Et ipse, likewise., as well., is used when a new subject takes an old predicate :
Virtûtës et ipsae taedium pariunt nisi gratia varietätis adjütae. Quint.
Yirluet likewise (as well as faults) produce weariness unless they are flavored with variety.
Camillus ex Volscis in Aequös trSnsiit et ips5s bellum molientes. Liv.
CamiUus went across from the Volsàans to the Aeguians, who were likewise (as well as the
Volscians) getting up war.
298, Ipse is used to lay stress on the reflexive relation ; in the
Nominative when the subject is emphatic, in the Oblique Cases
when the object is emphatic.
Se ipse laudat, he (and not another) praises himself.
Se i p s u m laudat, he praises himself (and not another).
Piger ipse sibi obstat. Pbov. The lazy man stands in his own way,
is his own obstacle.
Non egeo medicina ; më ipse consSIor. Cic. I do not need medicine ;
I comfort myself (I am my only comforter).
Omnibus potius quam i p s î s nobis consuluimus, we hare consulted the
interest of all rather than our own.
Exceptions are common :
Quique aliis cavit nön cavet ipse sibi. Ov. And he who took pre¬
cautions for others takes none for himself.
3. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
299. The Possessive Pronouns are more rarely used in Latin
than in English, and chiefly for the purpose of contrast or clear¬
ness.
Manûs lava et cênâ. Cíe. Wash (your) hands and dine.
Praedia mea tû possidës, ego aliena misericordia vivo. Cic.
You are in possession of my estates, (while) I live on the charity of others.
Remark.—Observe the intense use of the Possessive in the sense of property, peculi¬
arity., fitness : s u u m e s s e, to belong to one's self, to be one's own man.
Tempore t u 5 pugnasti* Lw. Tou have fought at your own time (= when you
wished).
Ego anno meo consul factus sum. Cic. I was made consul in my own year (=
the flrst year in which I could be made consul).
Pugna suum fînem quum jacethostis habet* Ov. A fight has reached its fit
end when the foe is down.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
157
4. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
300. Quidam means 07ie, a, a certam one (definite or indefinite
to the speaker, not definitely designated to the hearer) : q u I -
dam rhetor, a certain rhetorician.
In the plural, it is equivalent to some, sundry, without emphasis.
Quidam is often used with or without quasi, as if, to modify
an expression :
Est quaedam virtütum vitiöriunque vicïnia. Quint. TJiere is a cer¬
tain neighbwly relation between virtues and vices.
Non sunt isti audiendi qui virtûtem dûram et quasi ferream
q u a n d a m esse volunt. Cic. Tlwse friends of yours are not to be lis¬
tened to who will have it (maintain) that virtue is hard, and as it were made
of iron.
301. Aliquis (aliqul), means, some one (wholly indefinite),
some one or other: fecit hoc aliquis tul similis, some one or
other like you did this ; aliqul scrüpus, some scruple or other.
In the predicate it is emphatic (by Litotes, 448, R. 2) : sum aliquis,
aliquid,/ am somebody =: a person of importance, something = of some
weight, opposed to : nullus sum, nihil sum, I am a nobody, nothing.
Est a 1 i q u i d fatale malmn per verba levare. Ov. It is something to
relieve the fated misfortune by wo'vds.
302. Quis (qui), fainter than aliquis, is used chiefly in relative
sentences and after quum, when, si, if, ne, lest, num, whether, quo
the ... 400.
Nê quid nimis ! nothing in excess !
Si qua volet regnäre diu, dëlûdat amantem. O v. (234, R. 2.)
Quod quis habet dominae conférât omne suae. Ov. (265.)
Remark.—Aliquis is used after si, and the rest when there is stress : si quis, if
any ; si aliquis, if some.
Si aliquid dandum est voluptati, modicis conviviis senectüs dëlectârî potest.
Cic. If something is to be given to pleasure (as something or other must), old age can take
delight in mild festivities. Si quid, if anything ; si quidquam, if anything at all.
When used with negatives, the negative itself is commonly negatived : Verrës
nihil unquam fëcit sine aliquS quaestu. Cic. (445.)
303. Quispiam is rarer than aliquis, but not to be distin¬
guished from it, except that quispiam never intimates impor¬
tance. Dixerit qiiispiam, some one may say.
304. Quisquam and ullus (adjective) mtotn .any one (at all).
158
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
and are used chiefly in negative sentences, in sentences that
imply total negation, and in sweeping conditions:
Jûstitia nunquam nocet c u î q u a m. Cic. Justice never hurts anybody,
Quis unquam Graecorum rhetonun ä Thucydide quidquam
duxit? Cic. What Greek rhetorician ever drew anything from Thucydides?
[None].
Siquisquam, ille sapiens fuit. Cic. If any one at all (was) wise, he was.
£st u 11 a res tanti, ut viri boni et splendörem et nömen ämittäs ?
Cic. Is anything of such importance as that you should lose (for its sake) ihe
splendid title of a good man ?
The negative of qnisqnam is nëmo, nobody ; nihil, nothing (105).
Nemo, however, is sometimes used as an adjective :
Nemo discipulus, no scholar.
The negative of ullus is nullus, no, none, which is also used regularly as
a substantive in the Genitive and Ablative instead of nêminis and nëmine.
Remarks.—1. On ne^ue quisquam and et nëmo, pee 482.
2. N Ullas is used in familiar language instead of non (so sometimes in English) :
Philippus nullus usquam- Liv. No Philip anywhere.
305. Quisque (from quisquís) means each one.
Laudäü sunt cmnes dönätique pro mérito quisque. Lrv. All were
praised and rewarded, each one according to his desert.
Quam quisque nörit artem in häc se exerceat. (618.)
With superlatives and ordinals quisque is loosely translated
every :
Optimum quidque rärissimum est. Cic. Every good thing is rare,
more accurately, The better a thing, the rarer it is. (645, R. 2.)
Quintó quôque anno Sicilia tóta censëtur. Cic. Every fifth year all
Sicily is assessed.
Primó quóque tempore, The sooner the better, as soon as possible.
Remarks.—1. Quisque is commonly postpositive, almost invariably after the reflex¬
ive : ipse së quisque dîligit (295) ; suumcuïque (295, R. 1), except when the reflex¬
ive is especially emphatic.
2. Nägelsbach's formulae :
a. NSn omnia omnibus tribuenda sunt, sed suum cuique ;
b. Omnës idem faciunt, sed optimus quisque optimë ;
c. Non omnibus anuís hoc fit, sed tertio quöque annö ;
d. Non omnës idem faciunt, sed quod quisque vult-
306. Alter and alius are both translated other, another, but
alter refers to one of two, alius to diversity.
NUMERALS.
159
Solus aut cum alteró, alone or with (only) one other ; alter Nero,
a aecond Nero.
Alter alterum quaerit, one (definite person) seeks the other (definite
person); alius alium one seeks one., another another; alteri—
alterî, one party—another party (already defined) ; alü—alii, some—others.
Alter often means neighbor, brother, fellow-man ; alius, third person.
Alter :
Ägesiläüs olaudus fuit alteró pede. Nef. Agesilaüs wa,slame of one
foot.
Altera manu fert lapidem, panem ostentat altera. Plaut. In
one hand a stone he carries, in the other holds out bread.
Mors nee ad vivós pertinet nec ad mortuós : alterï null! (304, K. 2)
sunt, a 11 e r ó s nón attinget. Cic. Death concerns neither the living nor
the dead : the latter are not, the former it will not reach.
Alius:
Fallacia alia aliam trüdit. Tek. One lie treads on the heels of another
(indefinite series).
Dïvitiâs alii praepónunt, alii honóres. CiC. Some pi^efer riches, others
honors.
Aliud alii natura iter ostendit. Sall. Nature shows one path to one
man, another path to another man.
Alter and alius:
Ab alió expectës alteri quod fêceris. Syrus. Tou may look for
from another what you've done unto your brother (from No. 3, wliat No. 1
has done to No. 2).
5. NUMERALS.
307. Duo means simply Udo, ambo, loth (two considered to¬
gether), uterque, either (two considered apart, as, " They cruci¬
fied two others with him, on either side one," John xix. 18) :
Supplioätio a m b ó r u m nómine et trivunphus u t r i q u e dëcrëtus
est. Liv. A thanksgiving in the name of both and a triumph to either (each
of the two) was decreed.
Remark.—Uterque is seldom plural, except of sets :
Utrique [plëbis fautôrës et senätus] victöriam crûdëliter exeroëbant- Sall.
Mther party (democrats and senate) made a cruel me of victory.
Buae fuërunt Ariovisti uxôrës: utraeque ineä fuga periërunt. Caes.
Ariovistus's wines were two in number ; both perished on that flight.
On uterque with the Genitive, see 370 R. 3.
308. Mille, a thousand, is in the Singular an indeclinable Adjective,
and is less frequently used with the Genitive : mille militës, rather than
mille militum, a thousand soldiers ; in the Plural it is a declinable Substan¬
tive, and must have the Genitive : duo milia militum, two thousand{s of)
soldiers = two regiments of soldiers.
160
COMPAEATIVES.
3500 cavalry,
But if a smaller number comes between, the noun follows the smaller
number :
tria milla quingentî équités,
tria milla equitum et quingentî, but
équités tria milla quingentî, or
equitum tria milla quingentî.
309. The ordinals are used for the cardinals with a careless¬
ness which gives rise to ambiguity:
Quattuor anni sunt, \ ex quo té non vidi,
It is four years, v tJiat I have not seen you (since I saw you).
Quartus annus est, /
It is the fourth year (four years, going on four years).
Remark.—To avoid this ambiguity inceptus, begun, and finished,, seem to
have been used. Qellius, N. A. iii. 16.
310. The distributives are used with an exactness which is
foreign to our idiom wherever repetition is involved, as in the
multiplication table.
With singuli either cardinal or distributive may be used.
Antonius [pollicitus est] dénâriôs quingénôs (or quingentSs) singulis
militibus datûrum. Cic. Antonius promised to give 500 denarii to each sol¬
dier.
Scriptum eculeum cum quinqué pedibus, pull5s gallînâceés très
cum ternis pedibus nätös esse. Ltv. A letter was written to say that a colt
had been foaled with five feet (and) three chickens hatched with three feet
(apiece).
Carmen ab ter novénîs virginibus cani jussérunt. Lit. They or¬
dered a chant to be sung by thrice nine virgins.
Remark.—The poets often use the distributive where the cardinal would be the
rule, and the cardinals are sometimes found even in prose, where we should expect the
distributives. Bini is not unfrequently used of a pair : Bini scypM, a pair of cups.
On the distributives with Plûrâlia tantum, see 95, R. 2.
6. COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES.
311. Comparative.—The comparative degree generally takes
a term of comparison either with quam, than, or in the Ablative :
Ignörätio futürörum malörum ûtilior est quam scientia. CiC. Igno-
rance of future evils is better than knowledge (of them).
Tullus Hostilius ferScior etiam R ô m u 1 ö fuit. Lrv. Tullus Eostilius
was even more mettlesome than Romulus.
Remarks.—1. The Ablative is used only when the word with quam would stand in
the Nom. or Acc.
COMPARATIVES.
161
Caesar minor est-i Pompëjus, I ig younger than Pompey.
' Pompëjô, '
Caesarem magis amämus | f Caesar more than Pompey.
But—
Caesarî magis favëmus quam Pompëjô, we favor Caesar more than Pompey (MT).
2. The Ablative is very commou in negative sentences, and is used exclusively in
negative relative sentences.
NSn adeo cecidi quamvls dëj actus ut Infrd të queque sim, Inferius quo nihil
esse potest. Ov. l have not fallen so far., however cast down, as to be lower than you,
than whom nothing can be lower.
3. Measure of difference is put in the ablative, 400.
4. Quam is often omitted after plus, amplius, rrwre, and minus, less, and the like,
without affecting the construction.
Hominî miserë plûs quingeutös colaphës infrëgit mihi. Ter. He has dealt me,
luckless creature, more than five hundred crushing boxes on the ear.
Spatium est non amplius pedum sexcentorum. Cabs. The space is not more than
(of) six hundred feet.
More than thirty years old: 1. Natus plüs (quam) trigintä anuos.
2. Nätus plüs trigintä annis (rare).
3. Major (quam) trigintä annös nätus.
4. Major trigintä annls (nätus).
5. Mäjor trigintä annörum.
Palüs non lätior pedihus quinquägintä. Caes. A swamp not broader than fifty
feet (or pedës quinquägintä).
5. On the combination of the comparative with opIniSne, opinion, spë, hope, and the
like, see .399, R. 1.
6. Atque for quam is poetical.
312. standard of Comparison omitted.—When the standard
of comparison is omitted, it is supplied : 1. By the context ;
2. By the usual or proper standard ; 3. By the opposite.
1. By the context :
Solent reges Persärum p 1 û r ë s uxôrës habere. Cic. The kings of
Persia usually have more wives [than one].
2. By the proper standard :
Senectüs est nätürä loquäcior. CiC. Old age is naturally rather (or too)
talkative.
3. By the opposite :
Sed melius nëscïsse fuit. Ov. But it had leen letter not to have known
(than to have known), ignorance had leen Hiss.
313. Disproportion.—Disproportion is expressed by the com¬
parative with quam pro, than for, and the Ablative, or with ut,
that, or qui, loho, and the subjunctive :
Minor caedës quam pro tantä victoria fuit. Liv. The loss was
(too) small for so great a victory.
162
SUPERLATIVES.
Major sum quam ut mancipium sim meî corporis. Sen. I am
too great to be the slave of my body.
Major sum quam ouï possit Fortuna nocëre. Ov. lam too great
for Foi'tune possibly to hurt me.
314. Two Qualities comjmred.—When two qualities of the
same substantive are compared, we find either mag^ and quam
with the positive, or a double comparative :
Oeler tuus disertus magis est quam sapiens. Cic. Tour (friend)
Geler is eloquent rather than wise—more eloquent than wise.
Faullî cöntio fuit v ë r i o r quam g r ä t i o r populö. Lrv. Paullus^s
speech was more true than agreeable to the people.
Remark.—There is no distinction to he made between the two expressions. In the
latter turn, mainly post-Ciceronian, the second comparative is merely attracted into the
same form as the first. The same rule applies to the adverb : fortius quam fëllcius,
with more bravery than good luck.
815. Restriction to the Comparative.—When hut two objects
are compared, the comparative exhausts the degrees of com¬
parison, whereas, in English, the superlative is employed, unless
the idea of duality is emphatic.
Nâtû major, the eldest (of two), the elder; nätü minor, the young¬
est, the younger.
Prior, the first ; posterior, the last.
Posteriôrës côgitâtiônës, ut äjunt, sapientiôrës soient esse. CiC. After¬
thoughts, as the saying is, are usually the wisest.
Remark.—The same rule applies to the interrogative uter, which of two ? l^Jiether?) :
Quaeritur: exduobus uter dignior;explûribus,quisdignissimus. Quint.
The question is ; Of two, which is the worthier ; of more (than two), which is the worthiest.
Exceptions are rare.
316. Superlative.—The Latin superlativeis often to be ren¬
dered by the English positive, especially of persons :
Quintus Fabius M a x i m u s, Quintis Fabius the Great.
Tam fëlïx essës quam formösissima vellem. Ov. W^ould thou
wert fortunate as (thou art)/aw'.
Maximo impetù, msgöre fortùnâ. Liv. With great vigor, with greater
luck.
317. Superlative strengthened.—The superlative is strength¬
ened by longé, hy far; multo, much; vel, even; ûnus, ünus
APPOSITION.
163
omnium, one above all others; quam, quantus—^potuit, as—as
possible.
Ex Britannis omnibus longe sunt hümänlssinü qui Cantium incolunt.
Caes. Of all the Britons by far the most cultivated are those that inhabit
Kent.
Protagoras sophistes illis temporibus v e 1 maximus. Cic. Protago¬
ras, the very greatest sophist (= professor of wisdom) in those times.
Urbem unam mihi amicissimam dëclïnâT^. CiC. I turned aside from
a city above all others friendly to me.
Caesar quam aequissimö loco potest castra oommûnit. Caes. Oaesar
fortifies a camp in as favorable a position as possible.
remabk.—Quam aequissimus locus = tarn aequus quam aequissimus. For
other expressione, see 645, R. 5.
Apposition.
318. By apposition one substantive is placed by the side of
another, which contains it :
Cicero orator, Cicero the orator.
Rhenus flümen, the river Rhine.
concokd.
319. The word in apposition agrees with the principal word
in number and case, and as far as it can in gender :
Norn. Herodotus pater historiae, Herodotus the father of history ;
Gen. Hërodotî patris historiae : D. Hërodotô patri historiae.
Aestus exësor mürörum. Lucr. Tide the devourer of walls.
Athëna e omnium doctrinarum inventricës. CiC. Athens the in¬
ventor of all branches of learning. (See 202.)
Remarks.—1. The predicate sometimes agrees with the word in apposition, especially
in names of towns : Corioli oppidum captum est. Liv. Coriolh-town was taken.
Otherwise regularly :
Pompëjus, nôstrï amôrës, ipse së afflïxit. CiG. Pompey, our bosom
friend, has fiooi'ed himself.
2. The Possessive Pronoun takes the Genitive in apposition :
T u u m, hominis simplicis, pectus vidimus. Cio. We have seen your
bosom bared, you open-hearted creature !
Urbs meä ünius opera aalva fuit. Cío. The city was saved by my exer¬
tions alone.
320. Partitive Apposition.—Partitive Apposition is that
form of Apposition in which a part is taken out of the whole :
164
PEEDICATIVE ATTRIBUTION AND APPOSITION.
Cetera multitude sorte decimus quisque ad supplicium
leotï sunt. Liv. (Of) the rest of the crowd every tenth man was chosen by lot
for punishment. (Sometimes called Restrictive Apposition.)
321. Distributive Apposition.—Distributive Apposition is
that form of Apposition in which the whole is subdivided into
its parts, chiefly with alter—alter, the one—the other ; quisque,
each one; alii—alii, some—others. (Often called Partitive.)
Duae filiae altera occisa altera capta est. Caes. (Of) two
daughters, the one was Mlled, the other captured.
Remark.—The Partitive Genitive is more commonly employed than either of these
forms of apposition.
322. Mihi nom en est. Instead of the apposition with
n Ö m e n, name, the name of the person is more frequently at¬
tracted into the Dative.
Í1. Mihi Ciceroni nomen est ; most common.
2. Mihi nömen Cicero est ; less common.
3. Mihi nomen Cicerönis estj least common.
Nömen Arctûrô est mihi. Plaut. My name is Arcturus.
Tibi nömen insänö posuëre. HoR. They called you cracked.'"
Samnitës Maleventum, oui nunc urbi Beneventum nömen est, perfu-
gërunt. Liv. The Samnites fled to Maleventum (Ilcome), a city which now
bears the name Beneventum (Welcome).
Nömen Mercurii est mihi. Plaut. My name is Mercury.
323. Apposition to a Sentence.—Sometimes an accusative
stands in apposition to a whole preceding sentence :
Admoneor ut aliquid etiam dë sepultura dicendum exlstimem, rem
nön difficile m. Cic. I am reminded to take into consideration that
something is to be said about burial also—an easy matter.
Remark.—This accusative may follow a Passive or Neuter verb as the object effected.
Others regard such Neut. Accusatives as Nominatives.
PREDICATIVE ATTRIBUTION AND PREDICATIVE APPOSI¬
TION.
324. Any case may be attended by the same case in Predica¬
tive Attribution or Apposition, which differ from the ordinary
Attribution or Apposition in translation only.
Nominative : Filius aegrötus rediit.
Ordinary Attribution : The «ick son returned.
PEEDICATIVE APPOSITION AND ATTRIBUTION. 165
Predicative Attribution : The son returned sitk = he was sick when he
returned.
Hercules juvenis leönem interfëcit.
Ordinary Apposition : The young man Hercules slew a lion.
Predicative Apposition : Hercules, when a young man, slew a lion =
he was a young man when he slew a lion.
Genitive : Potestâs ejus adhibendae uxöris, The •permission to take her
to wife.
Dative : Amicö viv5 non subvënistï, Tou did not help your friend
(while he was) alive.
Accusative : Herculës cervam vivam cëpit.
Ordinary Attribution : Hercules caught a living doe.
Predicative Attribution : Hercules caught a doe alive.
Ablative : Aere ûtuntur importätö, They use impoi^ted copper = the
copper which they use is imported.
Remarks.—1. The vocative, not being a case proper, is not used predicatively. Ex¬
ceptions are apparent or poetical.
Quo, moritûre, ruis ? Vero. " 'Whither dost thou rush to die?'''' = "Whither dost thou
rush, thou doomed to die ?
Notice here the old phrase :
Macte virtüte esto. Vero. Increase in virtue = Heaven speed thee in thy high career.
Macte is regarded by some as an old vocative, from the same stem as magnus ; by
others as an adverb.
2. Victôrës rediërunt may mean, the conquerors returned, or they returned conquer¬
ors ; and a similar predicative use is to be noticed in idem, the same.
lidem abeunt qui vënerant, they go away just as they had come (literally, the same
persons as they had come).
3. Predicative Attribution and Apposition are often to be turned into an abstract
noun :
Ego nSn eadem volo senex, quae puer volui, I do not viish the same things {as an
eld man) in my old age, that I wished {as a hoy) in my boyhood.
So with prepositions :
Ante CicerSnem cSnsulem, before the consulship of Cicero ; ante urbem conditam,
before the building of the city.
4. Do not confound the " as " of apposition with the " as " of comparison—ut, qua¬
si, tanquam. (645, R. 4).
Cicero ea quae nunc ûsii veniunt cecinit ut vâtës. Nef. Cicero foretold all that
is coming to pass now as {if he were) an inspired prophet.
5. When especial stress is laid on the Adjective or Substantive predicate, in combina¬
tion with the verbal predicate, it is well to resolve the sentence into its elements :
Themistoclës ünus restitit, Themistocles alone withstood = Themistocles was the
only one that withstood.
Argonautae p r i m î in Pontum Euxinum intrâvërunt, the Argonauts first
entered the Euxine {Black) Sea = were the first to enter the Black Sea.
Una salüs victîs nullam spërâre salütem. Vero. The only safety which the
vanquished have, is to hope for none.
Fragilem truel commîsit pelagë ratem primus- Hör. He was the first to trust
his frail bark to the wild waves.
6. The English idiom often uses the adverb and adverbial expressions instead of the
Latin adjective ; so in adjectives of inclination and disinclination, knowledge and igno-
166
QUALIFICATIOlSr OF THE PREDICATE.
ranee, of order &nà. position, of time and season, and of temporary condition generally t
libens, with pleasure ; volens, willingly) ; nolens, unwillingQy) ; invitus, against mrn's
will ; prudens, aware ; imprüdens, unawares ; sciens, knowingly) ; primus, prior,
first ; ultimus, last ; medius, in, about the middle ; hodiernus, to-day ; mätütinus, in
the "¡mming ; tct({Mem,frequent{ly) ; sublimis, aloft.
Odero si poterö, si non, invitus amabo. Ot. (234, R. 2.)
Plus bodië boni fëcl imprüdens quam sciens ante liunc diem unquam. Ter.
I have done more good to-day unawares than I have ever done knowingly before.
Adcurrit, mediam mulierem complectitur. Ter. He runs up, puts his arms
about the woman''s waist.
Qui prior strinxerit ferrum Sjus victSria erit- Lit. Who draws the sword first,
his shall be the victory.
Vespertinus pete tectum. Hor. Seek thy dwelling at eventide.
R ä r u s venit in cënâcula miles. Juv. The soldiery rarely comes into the garret.
So also tStus, wholly.
PMlosophiae nos tôtës trädimus. Cío. We give ourselves wholly to philosophy.
Soli boo contingit sapienti. Cic. This good luck happens to the wise man alone =
it is only the wise man who has this good luck.
7. Carefully to be distinguished are the uses of primus, and the adverbs primum,
first, for the first time, and primo, at first.
Primus ; Ego primus banc örätiSnem lëgi, 1 was the first to read this speech.
Hanc p r i m a m örätiönem lëgi, this was the first speech that I read.
Primum : Hanc örätiönem primum lëgi deinde transcripsi, I first read (and)
then copied this speech.
Hodië banc örätiönem primum lëgi. Tread this speech to-day for the first timo.
Primö : Hanc örätiönem primö libenter lëgi, posteä magis magisque mibi
jëjûna visa est, at first I read this speech with pleasure, afterward it seemed to me drier
and drier.—Lattmann and Müller.
B.
1. Multiplicatioií- of the Predicate.
325. The Multiplication of the Predicate requires no further
rules than those that have been given in the general doctrine of
Concord.
2. Qualification of the Predicate.
326. The Qualification of the Predicate may be regarded as
an External or an Internal change :
I. External change : combination with an object.
1. Direct object, Accusative.
2. Indirect object, Dative.
II. Internal change: combination with an attribute, which
may be in the form of
1. The Genitive case.
2. The Ablative.
ACCUSATIVE.
167
3. Preposition with a case.
4. An Adverb.
Remark.—The Infinitive forms (Infinitive, Gerund, Gerundive, and Supine) appear
now as objects, now as attributes, and require a separate treatment.
327. The Accnsative is the case of the Direct Object.
The Object may be contained in the verb (Inner Object, Ob¬
ject Effected) :
Deus mundum creavit, God made a creation—tJie universe.
Akin to this is the Accusative of Extent :
Ä recta conscientia transversum unguem non oportet discêdere. Cic.
One ought not to swerve a nailhreadth from a right conscience.
Decern annos Troja oppugnäta est. Lrv. Ten years was Troy besieged.
Maximam partem lacte vivunt. Caes. For the most part they live on
milk.
From the Accnsative of Extent arises the Accusative of the
Outer Object (Object Affected) :
Deus mundum gubernat, God steers the universe.
Remark.—The Accusative of the Inner Object is the characteristic use of the case ;
the Accusative of the Outer Object the most common use. It is sometimes impossible to
determine which element preponderates ; so in verbs compounded with prepositions.
The so-called Terminal Accusative may be conceived as an Inner or an Outer Object.
Hence the following table is only approximate :
General View of the Accusative.
328. !■ Inner Object : Object effected.
Cognate Accusative.
Accusative of Extent. .
I. external change.
Accusative.
1. In Space.
2. In Time.
3. Of Adverbial Relation.
Verbs com-
I-pounded with
Prepositions.
Terminal Accusative
(Point Reached).
n. Outer Object : Object affected.
com-
with
1. Whole.
2. Part (so-called Creek
Prepositions.
Accusative).
168
ACCUSATIVE.
III. Double Accusative : Asking and Teaching,
Making and Taking.
IV. Accusative as the most general form of the object (object created
or called up by the mind) :
In Exclamations.
Accusative and Infinitive.
329. Active Transitive Verbs take the Accusative case:
Romulus Urbem R5mam condidit, Romulus founded the City of Rome.
(Object Effected.)
Mens regit corpus, Mind governs body. (Object Affected.)
Remarks.—1. Many verbs are intransitive in English which are transitive in Latin .
dolëre, to grieve (for) ; dëspSrSre, to despair (of) ; horrëre. to shudder (at) ; mirari,
to wonder (at) ; ridëre, to laugh (at). Especially to he noted is the wide scope of the
Inner Object :
Honôrës dëspërant, Cíe. They despair of honors (give them up in despair).
Necata est Vitia quod fllii necem flëvlsset (541). Tac. Vitia was executed for hav¬
ing wept (for) her son's exeadion.
Consola inëns recti FSmae mendacia rlsit. Ov. Conscious of right, her soul (but)
laughed (at) the falsehoods of Rumor.
Verbs of Smell and Taste have the Inner Object :
Piscis ipsum mare sapit. Sen. The fish tastes of the very sea.
N on omnës possunt olëre ungüenta exotica. Plaut. It is not every one can smell
of foreign perfumes.
2. The Accusative with Verbal nouns, such as tactio, touching, is comic.
380. Verbs compounded with the prepositions ad, ante, cir-
cum, con, in, inter, ob, per, praeter, snb, subter, super, and trans,
become transitive, and take the accusative :
All with oircum, per, praeter, trans, and subter.
Many with ad, in, and super.
Some with ante and con.
Pythagoras Persarum magos adiit. Cic. Pythagoras applied to {con¬
sulted) the Persian magi.
Stella Veneris antegreditur solem. Cic. The star Venus goes in
advance of the sun
Tam me oiroumstant densorum turba malörum. Ov. So dense a
crowd of evils encompasses) me.
Ram, si opus esse vidëbitur, ipse conveniam. CiC. I will go to see her
myself, if it shall seem expedient.
Consilium multae calliditatis init. Ov. He engages in {devises) a plan of
deep cunning.
Tanais Rurôpam et Asiam interfluit. CtJRT. The Don flows between
Europe and Asia.
ACCUSATIVE.
169
Mortem obiit, ë mediS abiit. Ter. 8Iie went to face Death (died), she
left the world.
Caesar omnem agrum Pïcënum percurrit. Caes. Caesar traversed
rapidly all the Picenian district
Populus solet dignos praeterîre. Cío. The people is wont to pass hy the
worthy.
Epanünöndäs paenam subiit. Nep. Epammondas svhmitted to the pun¬
ishment.
Flûminaque autiquös subterlâbentia mûrôs. Verg. And rivers
gliding under ancient walls.
Römäni ruinas mûri supervâdëbant. Lrv. The Bomans marched over
the ruins of the wall.
Crassus Eluphratem nulla belli causa transiit. Cic. Orassus crossed
the Euphrates without any cause for war.
Remarks.—1. If the simple verb is a transitive, it can take two accusatives :
ÄgSsiläus Hellëspontum cSpiäs träjScit- Nef. Agesüaüs threw his troops across
the Hellespont
2. With marij"^ of these verbs the preposition may he repeated :
Cöpiäs trâjëcit Ehodanum, or trans Rhodanum, He threw his troops across the
Bhone.
Sometimes with difference of signification :
Adir6 ad aliquem, to go ta a man ; adire aliquem, to apply to (to consult) a man.
331. Any verb can take an Accusative of tbe Inner Object,
when that object serves to define more narrowly or to explain
more fully the contents of the verb.
When the dependent word is of the same origin or of kindred
meaning with the verb, it is called the Cognate Accusative.
Faciam ut mel memineris dum vîtam vïvâs. Plaut. TU make
you think of me tlte longest day you live.
Servus est qui ut antïquî dixërunt servitütem servit. Quint.
He is a slave whOy as old-style people said, slaves a slavery —who is a slave that
is a slave.
Remarks.—1. The Cognate Accusative, when a substantive proper, is commonly at¬
tended by an attribute :
Consimilem Ifiserat j am Slim ille liidum- Ter. He had long before played a
like game.
Cantilënam e a n d e m canis. Ter. Tou are singing the same song.
M Î rn m atque inscltum somniavl somnium- Plaut. A marvellous and uncanny
dream Tve dreamed.
2. Much more common is the Inner Accusative of neuter pronouns and adjectives
treated as substantives :
XenopbSn e a d e m ferë p e'c c a t- Cio. Xenophon makes very much the same mis¬
takes.
Equidem posse vellem idem glSriSrl quod C^us. Cic. Foi' my part I could
wish that it were in my power to make the same boast as Cyrus.
8
170
DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE.
Quidquid dëlîrant rëgës plëctuntur ÂchîvL Hob. Whutever mad freak
the kings play, the Achivi are punished for it.
Quid lacrumäs Î Ter. What are you crying for ?
With transitive verbs an accusative of the person can be employed beside :
Discípulos id iinum moneo ut praeceptôrës su5s non minus quam ipsa
studia ament. Quint. I give pupils this one piece of advice, that they love their teachers
no less than their studies themselves.
3. From this the accusative neuter gradually passes over into an adverb, such as
allquantum, somewhat. ; nihil, nothing (" nothing loath") ; summum, at most. Especi¬
ally to be noted are : magnam partem, to a great extent; id temporis, <xt that time; id
aetatis, of that age ; id genus, of that kind; omne genus, of every kind.
Haec vulnera vltae nön minimam partem mortis formldine aluntur. Lucb.
These wounds of life are for not the least part fostered by the fear of death.
Nöstram vicem ultus est ipse sësë. Cic. He took vengeance on himself in our
stead.
4. Instead of the Inner Accusative the Ablative is occasionally found : lapidihus
pluere, to rain stones ; sanguine sudare, to sweat blood.
Herculis simulacrum multö südöre mânâvit. Cíe. The statue of Hercules rwtx
freely with sweat.
332. A part of the object aifected is sometimes put in the
Accusative case after a passive or intransitive verb or an
adjective :
Tacita cûrâ animum incensus. Liv. His soul on fire with silent care.
Jam vulgatum actis queque saucius pectus. Quint. Now-a-days
" breast-wounded^^ is actually a common newspaper phrase.
eemabks.—1. This is commonly called the Greek Accusative, and is found chiefly in
poetry. The common prose construction is the Ablative.
Nëscit Stare loco ; micat auribus et tremit artüs. Vebg. He cannot stand stiU ;
he. twitches with his ears and quivers in his limbs.
2. Somewhat different is the Accusative with induor, I don ; exuor, I doff ; cingor,
7 gird on myself ; in which verbs the reflexive signification is retained :
Inutile ferrum cingitur. Verg. He girds on (himself) a useless blade.
Lôrîcam induitur fidoque accingitur ense. Veeg. He dons a corselet andbegirds
himself with his trusty glaive.
Arminias impetû equi perväsit oblitus faciem su5cruSrenënôscerëtur.
Tac. Hermann got through, thanks to his fiery charger, having smeared his face with his
own gore to keep from being recognized.
DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE,
333. "When two Accusatives depend on the same verb, one is the In¬
ner, the other the Outer object.
Active verbs signifying to Inquire, to Kequire, to Teach, and
celare, to conceal, take two Accusatives, one of the Person, and
the other of the Thing.
Püsiönem quendam Socrates interrogat quaedam geômetrica. CiC.
Socrates asks an urchin sundry questions in geometry.
DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE.
171
Caesar Aeduös frümentum fiägitäbat. Caes. Caesar kept demand'
ing the corn of the Aedui.
Quid nunc të, asina, litteräs doceam ? (258). Cío. Why should I now
give you a lesson in literature^ you donkey ?
Iter omnes celat. Nep. He Jceeps all in the dark about his route, conceals
his route from all.
Kemarks.—1. The Passive form with the Nominative of the Person and the Accusa¬
tive of the Thing is sparing!}' used. Discere is more common than docëri.
Môtûs docërl gaudet Iónicos matura virgS. Hob. The rare ripe maid de¬
lights to learn Ionic dances.
OmnSs militiae artës ëdoctus fuerat- Liv. He had learned (been taught) thoroughly
aU (he arts of war.
2. The expressions vary a good deal. Observe :
This then is not the only way, POSCO, I claim., and flagito,
For it is also right to say, And always peto, postulo,
Docëre and cëlâre dë, Take aliquid ab aliquö,
Interrogare dë qua rë. While quaere takes ex, ab, dë, quS.
Adberbal Romam lëgâtôs miserat, qui senatum docërent dë caede frätris.
Sall. Adherbal had sent envoys to Borne to inform the senate of the murder of his brother.
Bassus noster më dë boo libro cëlâvit. Cío. Our friend Bassus has kept me in the
dark about this book. (So commonly in the Passive.)
Aquam ä pUmice nunc postulas. Plaut. You are now asking water of a pumice-
stone (blood of a turnip).
3. With doceo the Ahl. of the Instrument is also used : doCëre fidibus, equ5, to teach
the lyre, to teath riding. Doctus generally takes the Ahl. : Doctus Graecis litteris, a
good Grecian.
4. Quid më vis ! what do you want of me? what do you want me for? belongs to this
general class.
5. On Double Accusative with compound verbs, see .330, R. 1 ; on the accus, neuter of
the Inner Object, see 331, R. 2.
334. Verbs of Ii"aming, Making, Taking, Choosing, Showing,
may have two Accusatives of the same Person or Thing :
îram bene Ennius initium dixit insaniae. Cic. Well did Ennius
call anger the beginning of madness.
Ancum Marcitun r ë g e m populus c r e ä v i t. Liv. The people made
Ancus Marcius king.
Cato Valerium Flaccum G oil ë ga m h abuit. Nef. Cato had Va¬
lerius Flaccus (as) colleague.
Söcratem Apollo sapientissimum jûdicâvit. Cic. Apollo
judged Socrates (to be) the wisest.
Athëniënsibus Pythia praecipit ut Miltiadem sibi imperàtôrem
sümerent. Nef. The Pythia instructed the Athenians to take Miltiades
(as) their commander.
Praestá të virum. Cic. Show yourself a man.
Quern intellegimus divitem? Cic. Whom do we understand by the
rich man ?
172
ACCUSATIVE OP EXTENT.
Remark.—The Double Accusative is turned into the Double Nominative with the
Passive (197). Beddo, / render, is not used in the Passive, but, instead thereof, flo, 1
become.
Habeo, with two Accusatives, commonly means to home ; in the sense of hold, regard,
other turns are used :
Utrum pro ancilla m ë habës an pro filiä ? Plaut. Bo you look upon meas a
maid-servant or a daughter?
So habëre servörum loco, (in) numerS deSrum, to regard as slaves, as gods.
ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT IN SPACE AND TIME.
335. The Accusative of Extent in Space accompanies the
verb, either with or without per, through.
1. "With per to denote entire occupancy {from one end to the
other, all through).
Sparsi per provinciam nûlitës, the soldiers scattered all through the
province.
Phoebidas iter per Thëbâs fëcit. Nep. Phoehidas marched through
Thebes.
2. Without per to denote distance, how far, hov} long.
Trabës inter sëbïnôs pedë^ distäbant. Caes. The beams were
two feet apart.
Campus Marathon abest ab oppido Athëniënsium circiter m ï 1 i a
passuum d e c e m. Nep. The plain (of) Marathon is about ten miles from
the city of Athens.
 recta conscientia transversum unguem non oportet discë-
dere. Cic. (327.)
Remarks.—1. With abesse and distSre, an Ablative of measure may also be em¬
ployed :
Milibus passuum quattuor et viginti abesse, to be twenty-four miles from —
2. When the point of refei-ence is taken for granted, ab (ä) with the Ablative may be
used:
Hostës ab milibus passuum minus duSbus castra posuërunt- Caes. The enemy
pitched their camp less than two miles off.
336. The Accusative of Extent in Space accompanies the
adjectives longus, long ; latus, wide ; altus, high (deep).
Possa pedës trecentös longa est, sex pedës alta, the ditch
is three hundred feet long, six feet deep.
Mîlitës aggerem latum pedës trecentös trîgintâ altum pedës
octögintä exstruxërunt. Caes. The soldiers raised an embankment
three hundred and thirty feet wide (and) eighty feet high.
ACCUSATIVE AS A GENERAL OBJECTIVE.
173
337. The Accusative of Extent in Time accompanies the
verb, either with or without per, in answer to the question, Hoiö
long ?
Gorgias centum et novem vixit ann5s. Quint. Qorgias lived 109
years.
Tenuistï prövinoiam per decern annös. Cic. Tou have held on to the
province for 10 years (10 years long).
Est mecum per totum diem. Plin. Ep. He is with me the livelong day.
Remark.—-Per with the Accusative is frequently used like the Ablative of Time
within which. Per ilia tempera = illis temporibus, in those times.
So especially with the negative :
Nulla rësper triennium nisi ad nutum istius judicata est. Cic. Ko
matter was decicled during {in) the three years except at his beck.
338. The Accusative of Extent in Time accompanies the
adjective nàtus, old (born) :
Puer decem anuos nätus est, the hoy is ten years old.
Cyrus regnavit annös trigintä ; quadrägintä annös nätus regnäre
coepit. Cic. Cyrus reigned thirty years ; (he was) forty years old (when)
ha began to reign.
ACCUSATIVE AS A GENERAL OBJECTIVE CASE.
339. The Accusative as the Objective Case generally is used
as an object of Thought, Perception, Emotion ; an object cre¬
ated by the mind, evoked or deprecated by the will. Hence the
use of the Accusative :
1. In Exclamations.
2. With the Infinitive.
340. The Accusative is used in Exclamations as the general
object of Thought, Perception, or Emotion:
Më miserum, poor me !
Me caecum qui haec ante nön viderim, CiO. Blind me ! nx>t to have
seen all this before.
So in Exclamatory Questions :
Quö mihi fortünam, si nön concëditur üti ? Hör. What (is the object
of) fortune to me if Im not allowed to enjoy it?
Interjections are used :
Heu më misenun ! Alas ! poor me !
174
TERMINAL ACCUSATIVE.
Ö miseras hominum mentes, Ó pectora caeca. LubR. OA, the Vïretched
minds of men, oh, the blind hearts !
Remarks.—!. 0 with the Vocative is an address; with the Nom. a characteristic;
with the Accus, an object of emotion.
2. Èn, Lo ! and Ecce, Lo here ! take the Nominative :
Ën Varus, Lo Yarns ! Ecce homo ! Behold the man!
;^n the earlier language the Accusative was used :
En tibi hominem ! Plaut. Here's your man !
Ecce më ! Plaut. Here am I!
So Eccum, ellum, eccam, eccillam, in comic poetry.
There seems to be some confusion between the interrogative Ën and Em (Hem).
Pr5 takes the Vocative : Pro di immortâlës ! Ye immortal gods ! The Accusative
occurs in : Pro deum (hominum, deum atque hominum) fidem ! ibr heaven^s sake.
Hei ! and Vae ! take the Dative.
Hei mihi ! Ah me ! Vae victis ! TYoe to the conquered!
341. The Accusative as the most general form of the substantive, and
the Infinitive as tlie most general form of the verb, are combined so as to
present the general notion of Subject and Predicate as an object of thought
or perception (537).
The Accusative with the Infinitive is used
1. In Exclamations :
Hem, mea lûx, të nunc, mea Terentia, sic vexärl ! H'm, light of my
eyes, for you to he so harassed now, Terentia dear. (The idea of) youif) be¬
ing so harassed ! So in idiomatic English, Me write I
2. As an Object. (See 527.)
3. As a Subject. (See 535.)
Ebmabk.—The Infinitive was originally a Dative-Locative, but almost every syntac¬
tical trace has vanished, and practically it has become an Accusative Neuter.
ACCUSATIVE OF THE LOCAL OBJECT.
Terminal Accusative.
342. The Accusative of the Local Object, Whither? com¬
monly takes a preposition, such as: in, into; ad, to; versus,
-luard :
In Graeciam proficisci, to set out for Greece.
Remarks.—1. The omission of the pi'eposition, except as below stated, is poetical :
Italiam vënit- Vero. He came to Italy.
2. Names of Towns and Smaller Islands are put in the Accusative of the place
Whither? without a preposition. So also rûs, into the country; domum, domos, home.
For further explanations, see 410.
DATIVE WITH TRANSITIVE VERBS. 175
Dative.
343. The Dative is the case of the Indirect Object, and al¬
ways implies an object effected which may be contained in the
verb or expressed by the complex of verb and object.
Nemo errat ùnï sibi. Sen. No one errs (makes mistakes) to, for himself
alone.
Fortûna multîs dat nimis, satis nulli. Mart. Fortune to many
gives too much, enough to none. Dat-nimis is the Object Effected.
Remarks.—1. In English the form of the Indirect Object is the same as that of the
Direct : " He shewed me (Dat.) a pure river ; " He shewed me (Acc.) to the priest. Origi¬
nally a case of Personal Interest, it is used freely of Personified Things, sparingly of
Local Relations, and this despite the fact that Locative and Dative are blended in the
First and Third Declensions. If a locative, the Dative is a sentient locative.
2. When parts of the body and the like are involved, the English Possessive is often a
convenient though not an exact translation.
Tu5 viro oculí dolent. Ter. Tour husband's eyes ache. Nearer : Tour husband
has apain in the eyes. Tui viri ocull. Tour husband's eyes.
DATIVE WITH TRANSITIVE VERBS.
344. The Indirect Object is put in the Dative with Transi¬
tive verbs, which already have a Direct Object in the Accusa¬
tive. Translation, to, for, from. This Accusative becomes the
Nominative of the Passive. The Dative depends on the complex.
Active Form :
To : Facile omnes, cum valemus, recta consilia aegrôtïs damus. Ter.
Readily all of us, when well, give good counsel to the sick.
For : Frangam tonsöri crura manüsque simul. Mart. Id break the
barber's legs for him and hands at once.
From : Somnum mihi adëmit. Cic. It took my sleep away from me.
Passive Form :
Perpetuus nulli datur ûsus. Hor. Perpetual enjoyment (of a thing) is
given to no one.
Immeritis franguntur crura caballis. Juv. The innocent hacks get their
legs broken for them.
Arma adimuntur militibus. Liv. The soldiers have their arms taken
from them.
Domus pulchra dominis aedificatur non müribus. CiC. A handsome
house is built for its owners, not for the mice.
Remarks.—1. For is nearer the Dative than To; but for {in defence of) is pro : pro
patria morí, to die for one's country. To {with a view to) is ad or in, and when the idea
of motion is involved the preposition must be used, even with dare, Which gives its name
to the Dative :
176
DATIVE WITH INTRANSITIVE VERBS.
Hostis est uxor invita quae a d virum nuptum datur. Plaut. An enemy is the
wife who is given to a man in marriage against her will.
Lîtterâs alicui dare, to give one a letter (to carry or to have).
Litteras ad aliquem dare, to indite a letter to one.
Rogas ut mea tibi scripta mittam- Cic. You ask me to send you my writings
(you wish to have them).
Librös jam pridem ad t5 misissem si esse ëdendôs putässem. Cíe. I should
have sent the books to you long since if 1 had thought they ought to be published.
2. From is allowable, and even then merely approximate, when the relation of Per
eonal Interest is involved, otherwise the Ablative is used. Both combined in
Aegrötö domino (Dat.) dëduxit corpore (Abi.) febrës. Hob. From the sick mas-
ter's body drained the ague {for the sick master from his body).
3. The poets are more free in their use of the Dative, inasmuch as their personifications
are holder :
Kartbagini jam n5n ego nüntiSs mittam superbös. Hob. Carthage no more
shall I send haughty tidings.
Jam satis terris ni vis atque dirae grandinis misit pater. Hob. FvU,fuU
enough of snow and dire hail the Sire hath sent the Land.
The extreme is reached when the Dative follows ire and the like ;
It caelo clamorque virum clangorque tubärum. Vebg. Mounts to High Heaven
warriors'' shout and trumpets'' blare.
DATIVE WITH INTRANSITIVE VERBS.
345. The Indirect Object is put in the Dative with many In¬
transitive Verbs of Advantage or Disadvantage, Yielding and
Resisting, Pleasure and Displeasure, Bidding and Forbidding,
such as : prödesse, to do good ; nocère, to do harm ; indulgere, to
give up J cedere, to y ield j servire, to he a slave ; pârëre, oboedire,
to he ohedient j credere, to lend belief ; ignöscere, to grant forgive¬
ness ; placêre, to give pleasure ; imperare, to give orders ; resist-
ere, to make resistance.
Nec prosunt domino quae prosunt omnibus artes. Ov.
And the arts which do good to all do none to their master.
Verba n 5 b i s magis nocent, minus prosunt nostra quam aliena.
Quint. Our own words do us more harm (and) less good than the words of
others.
Induisit lacrimis. Ov. She gam free course to her tears.
Turpe servire puellae. Ov. It is disgraceful to play the slam to a
girl.
TÜ ne cede m a 1 i s. Verg. Yield not thou to misfortunes.
IVEundus deö päret et huîc oboediunt maria terraeque. CiC.
The universe is obedient to God, and seas and lands hearken unto him.
Nimium në crëde colorí. Verg. Trust not complexion all too
much.
DATIVE.
177
Ignösce timöri. Prop. Grant pardon to my fear. (Be to my fear as
if you knew it not.)
Oui placeo prötinus ipsa placet. Ov. The girl I please straight pleases
me herself.
Reliquum est ut tüte tibi imperes. Cic. It remaim that you give orders
to yourself {have absolute command over yourself).
Arbor resistit ventis. Ov. The tree offers resistance to the winds.
Remarks.—1. Among the most notable exceptions are : aequäre, to be'equal ; de
cere {to distinguish), to be becoming ; dëficere, to be wanting ; juväre, to be a help ;
jubere, to order ; and vetarei to forbid, which take the Accusative :
Earn picturam imitati sunt multl, aequä vit nSmo. Plin. That style of
painting many have imitated, rume equalled.
Forma v i r 5 s neglecta d e c e t- Ov. A careless beauty is becoming to men.
Ms dies dëfioiat- Cic. The day would fail me.
F 0 r 16 s fortuna a d j u v a t- Ter, Fortune favors the brave.
On jubeo and veto see 424, R. 3. Fido and oonfldo take the Ablative as well as the
Dative.
2. The Dative use is often obscured by the absence of etymological translation. So
nübere alicul, to marry a man (to veil for him) ; mederi alicuî, to heal (to take one's
measures for) a man ; supplied, I beg (I bow the knee to) ; persuädeo, I persuade (I
make it sweet).
3. The novice is again reminded that the passives of these verbs are used impersonally :
(208).
Qui invident egent, illi quibus invidëtur rem habent. Plaut. Those
who envy are the needy, those who are envied have the stuff.
DATIVE AND VERBS COMPOUNDED WITH PREPOSITIONS.
346. Many verbs compounded with the prepositions
ad, ante, con, in, inter,
ob, post, prae, sub and super,
take the Dative, especially in moral relations.
Transitive Verbs have an accusative case besides.
Felopidäs omnibus perïculîs adfuit. Nep. Pelopidas was present
{to help) in all dangers.
Virtüs omnibus rebus anteit. Plaut. Virtue goes before all
things.
Non omnis aetas, Lüde, lüdö convenit. Plaut. Not every age,
(good) Lydus (Playfair), sorts with play.
At lupus et turpês instant morientibus ursï. Ov. But the
wolf and foul bears pi-ess the dying hard.
Probus invidet nëminî. Cic. The upright man {looks hard at) envies no
one.
8*
178
DATIVE.
Aristîdës interfuit pugnae nâvâlî apud Salamïnem. Kep,
Aristides was engaged in the naval battle off Salamis.
Obsta principiïs. Ov. Oppose the beginnings.
Hannibal Alexandre Magno non postpônendus est.
jüst. Hannibal is not to be put below Alexander the Great.
Onmibus Druidibus praeest ünus. Caes. At the head of all the
Druids is one man.
Blanda quiës victïs fürtim subrëpsit ooellïs. Ov. Caressing
sleep crept stealthily o'er her vanquished eyes.
Miseris succurrere disco. Verg. I leam to succor the wretched.
Anatum ova gallinis saepe supponimus. Cic. yfe often-pit
ducM eggs under hens (for them to hatch).
Lucumo superfuit patrî. Liv. Lucumo survived his father.
So with Transitive Verbs, compounded with dë and ex.
Caesar Bëjotarô tetrarchiam ëripuit, eîdemque dëtraxit
Armeniam. Cíe. Caesar wrested from Dejotarus his tetrarchy, and stripped
from him Armenia.
Remarks.—1. When the local significaron preponderates, the preposition is repeated
with its proper case :
Adhaeret navis a d scopulum, the ship sticks to the rock.
Ajax incubuit in gladium, Ajax fell on his sword.
Congredî cum hoste, to engage the enemy.
Dêtrahere änulum d 6 digitö, to draw a ring from one's finger.
The tendency in later Latin is to neglect this distinction, which even in the best period
is not rigidly observed. Compounds with cum (COn-) commonly repeat the preposition :
always commünicäre aliquid cum aliquS, to communicate something to a man
(share it with him).
2. The analogy of this class of verbs, which imply Nearness, is followed in poetry and
.ater prose by haereo, misceo, jungo, and others.
Haeret lateri lëtâlis arundö. Vero. Sticks to the side the lethal shaft.
Quod haerëre in e qu5 senex posset (542) admirari solëbâmus. Cic. We used
to wonder that the old man could stick to his horse.
Miscë stultitiam consiliis brevem. Hor. JiRx with sense a little nonsense {add
to sense a little spice of nonsense).
Nën potest amor cum timore miscëri. Sen. Love cannot mingle with fear.
Jungitur Ursidio- Juv. She is yoked to Orson.
Junctus is found in Cicero with the Dative.
VERBS WITH ACCUSATIVE AND DATIVE.
347. Some verbs are construed both with the Accusative and
with the Dative.
Sometimes there is hardly an appreciable difference; sometimes the
Dative emphasizes the personal relation.
Oomitor aliquem, I accompany a man ; comitor alicui, I act as cam-
dative.
179
some one.
panîon to a man; adülor, generally Accusative, I fawn on; aemulor,
I rival, I am a rival ; praestölor, I wait for.
Sometimes the difference follows naturally from the difference of case :
Oavere alicui, to take precautions for
aliquem, against
Quique aliis cavit n5n c a v e t ipse s i b i. Ov. (298.)
V.»
Hic niger est, h u n c tû, Romane, caveto. Hob. He is a black fellow ;
against him be thou on thy guard, oh Boman !
Metuere alicui, to fear for )
' J J \ some one.
ahquem, to dread )
So all Verbs of Fearing.
Consulere alicui, to take measures for, consult the interest of )
auquem, to consult )
Convenire alicui, to be suitable for )
^ f some one.
aliquem, to meet )
Moderari ) ^ moderate ]
emperäre ^ bounds toY^ matter.
aliquid, to manage J
To be noticed are the constructions of invideo, I envy.
Invidère a^uî aliqmd (Cic.) ) ^ ^ ^
(in) aliqua rë )
alicüjus rei (once in Horace).
alicujus alicui rei, to envy something belonging to a man.
Non in vider unt laudes suas mulíeribus viii Rômânî. Lrv. The men
of Home did not begrudge the women the honors that were due them.
Invidet igne rogi miseris. Lucan. Begrudges the hapless men the
funeral fire.
Vacare rei [ ^ )
) to attend to Va matter.
Vacare rë, ä rë, to be at leisure from )
DATIVE WITH VERBS OF GIVING AND PUTTING.
348. A few verbs, chiefly of Giving and Putting, take a
Dative with an Accusative, or an Accusative with an Ablative,
according to the conception.
Dono tibi librum, I present (to) you a book.
Dono të libro, I present you with a book.
Circumdo ^ mürum, I put round the city a wall.
i urbem mûrô, I surround the city with a wall.
So also aspergere, to besprinkle and to sprinkle on ; impertiré, to endow
180
DATIVE.
and to give ; induere, to clothe and to put on ; exuere, to si/rip of and to
strip off ; miscere, to mix and to mix in.
DATIVE OF POSSESSOR
349. Esse, to he, with the Dative, denotes an inner connection
between its subject and the Dative, and is commonly translated
by the verb to have:
Mihi est amicus, I have a friend.
An nëscîs longäs rëgibus esse manûs ? Ov. Or perhaps you do not
know thai kings have long arms f
Rbmakks.—1. The predicate of esse with the Dative is translated in the ordinary
manner :
Caesar amicus est mihi, Caesar is a friend to me (amicus meus, my friend., friend
of mine).
2. The Dative is never simply equivalent to the Genitive. The Dative is the Person
. interested in the Possession, hence the Possession is emphatic ; the Genitive character-
( izes the Possession by the Possessor, hence the Possessor is emphatic.
Latini concedunt Bomam caput Latió esse. Liv. The Latins concede that Lativm
has its capital in Rome. (Latii : that Latium's capital is Rome.)
3. On the attraction of the Dative with nomen esse (322).
4. The possession of qualities is expressed by in and the Ablative or some other turn;
In Cicerone magna fuit ëloquentia, Cicero had great eloquence.
Clmon hahSbat satis ëloquentiae. Nep. Cimon had eloquence enough.
DATIVE OF THE OBJECT TOR WHICH.
350. Certain verbs take the Dative of the Object for Which
(to what end), and often at the same time a Dative of the Per¬
sonal Object For Whom, or To Whom, as in the legal phrase, cul
bono ? To whom is it (for) an advantage 9 = loho is advantaged 9 *
Nimia fidûcia magnae calamitâtî solet esse. Nep. Excessive com
fidence is usually a great calamity.
Virtus sola neque datur dono ñeque accipitux. Sall. Virtue alone
is neither given nor taken as a present.
Faupertäs p r o b r 5 habëri coepit. Sall. Poverty legan to he held {as)
a disgrace.
Pausaniäs rëx Lacedaemoniörum vënit Atticïs auxilio. Nep.
Pausanias, king of the Lacedaemonians, came to the help of the Attics.
Vitio mihi dant quod hominis necessâriï mortem graviter fero.
* Such verbs are: esse, to be ; fieri, to become, to turn out ; dare, to put ; mittere, to
send; accipere, to receive; venire, to come; relinquere, to leave; habêre, to hold;
vertere, to interpret ; dücere, to count, and the like.
DATIVE.
181
Matius ap. Cic. Tliey charge it to me as a fault that I resent the murder of
one so near to me.
Oaesar receptui cani jussit. Caes. Caesar ordered a retreat to le
sounded.
Kemark.—The origin of this usage seems to he mercantile (Key). In English we treat
Profit and Loss as persons.
Quern fors diërum cumque dabit lucre appone. Hor. '■'Every day that Fate
shall give, set down to Profit.''''
On the Dative of the Gerund and Gerundive in a similar sense, see 430.
ETHICAL DATIVE.
351. The Ethical Dative indicates special interest in the
action. It may be called the Dative of Feeling, and its nse in,
Latin (and Old English) is confined to the personal pronouns.
TÛ mihi Antönü exempl5 istîus audäciam défendis? CiC. Do you
defend me {to my face) by Antony's example that fellow's audacity ?
Ecce tibi Sebösus ! CiC. Here's your Sebosus !
" She's a civil modest wife, one (I tell you) that will not miss you morn¬
ing nor evening prayer."—Shakespeare.
Et quöscunque meo fëcistî nomine versüs, üre mihi, laudes desine
habere meas. Prof. And whatever verses you have made on my account^
burn them me (I beg) ; cease to keep praises of me.
Remark.—Especially to be noted is sibi velle, to want, to mean : Quid tibi vis,
mulier î Hör. What do you want, woman f Quid sibi vult haec orStio î What
does this speech mean?
DATIVE OF THE AGENT.
352. The Dative is used with Passive Verbs, in prose chiefiy
with the Perfect Passive, to show the interest which the agent
takes in the result. That the person interested is the agent is
only an inference. (See 206.)
Res mihi tota prôvïsa est. CiC. I have had the whole matter provided
for.
Carmina scripta mihi sunt nulla. Ov. I have no poems written, (there¬
fore) have written no poems.
Remark.—Instances of this Dative with the Tenses of continuance are poetical, or
admit of a difierent explanation :
Barbarus hie ego sum quia non intellegor ulli. Ov. I am a barbarian here be¬
cause I canH make myself intelligible to any one.
Whenever an Adjective or an equivalent is used, the Dative Plural may bean Ablative :
Sic dissimillimis bestiolis communiter cibus quaeritur. Cic. So, though these
little creatures are so very unlike, their food is sought in common.
182
DATIVE.
Carmina quae scrlbuntur aquae potSribus. Hor. Poems which are written when
people are v)ater-drinkers.
Gêna ministrätur puerîs tribus. Hor. Pinner is served^ {the waiters being) the
waiters are (but) three.
353. The agent of the Gerund and Gerundive is put in the
Dative.
Hoc mihi faciendum est, I have this to he doTie (J,hÍ8 is to he done hy me, I
must do this).
Est mala sed cûnctîs ista terenda via, Pnop. That is a had road., hut
one all have to travel.
Dêspëranda tibi salva concordia socrû. Juv. You must despair of
harmony while Mother-in-law's alive.
Compare the Dative with verbals in -bilis : mihi amâbilis, lovable in
my eyes.
Remark.—When the vei*b itself takes the Datire, the Ablative with ab (S) is em¬
ployed for the sake of clearness :
Civibus ä vôbîs consulendum. Cic. The interest of the citizens must be consulted by
you.
Where there is no ambiguity there is no need of ab.
Linguae moderandum est mihi. Plaut. 1 must put bounds to my tongue.
DATIVE OF PARTICIPLES.
354. Datives of Participles are used as predicative attributes.
Phaselis conspicitur prima terramim Rhodtun à Ciliciä petentibus.
Lrv. Phaselis is the first land sighted as you make for Rhodes from Cilicia
(to people as they make for Rhodes).
In Universum aestimanti (=: Si aestimês) plus penes peditem roboris.
Tac. If you look at it as a whole, there is more real strength in the infantry.
Remark.—Notice the Qreekish phrase : mihi volenti est, lom gladfor it to be so.
DATIVE WITH DERIVATIVE SUBSTANTIVES.
355. A few derivative substantives take the Dative of their
primitives :
Jûstitia est obtemperätio legibus. Cío. Justice is ohedience to the laws.
Remark.—Otherwise the Dative must have a verb to produce the Object Effected.
DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES.
356. Adjectives of Likeness, Fitness, Friendliness, Nearness,
and the like, with their opposites, take the Dative :
GENITIVE.
183
Râra avis in terris nigröque simillima cycnö. Juv. A
rare bird in this worlds and very like a black swan.
Non ego sum 1 au di non nätus idöneus armïs. Prop. I am
not fitted by nature for glorynot fitted for arms.
Ütilis urbi. Hor. Useful to the city.
Arnica lut5 sus. Hor. A hog, devoted to the mire.
Semper, tú soito, flamma f ù m ö est p ro x i m a. Plaut. Bear thou
in mind, that fire is aye next door to smoke.
Testis id dicit quod illi causae maxime est alienum. Cic. The
witness says what is especially damaging to that case (side).
Remarks.—1. Many adjectives which belong to this class become substantives, and
as such are construed with the Genitive : amicus,/rierad; affinia, connection ; aequâlis,
contemporary / aliënus, foreign, strange / cognStus, kinsman ; commünis, common ;
contrarius, opposite ; par, match ; proprius, pecüliäris, own, peculiar ; similis, like ;
("we ne'er shall look upon Ms like again"), especially of gods and men; sacer, set apart,
sacred / superstes, survivor.
Domini similis es. Ter. You are like your master.
Virtüte sis par dispar fortünis p a t r i s. Attius. Be thou thy father^s match
in valor, not in luck.
2. The object toward which is expressed by the Accusative with in, ergS, adversus :
Manlius fuit sevërus in filium- Cic. Manlius was severe toward his son.
Më esse seit ergS së benevolum- Plaut. He knows that I am kindly disposed
toward him.
Adversus deös immortâlês impii jüdicandi sunt. Cío. They are to he judged im¬
pious toward the immortal gods.
3. The object for which may be expressed by the Accusative with ad, to :
Homo ad nullam rem ütilis. Cic. A good-for-nothing fellow.
This is the more common construction with adjectives of fitness.
4. Propior, nearer, proximus, next, are construed also (like prope, rsear) with the
Accusative and the Ablative with ab, off :
Fropius est fidem, it is nearer belief, i. e., more likely.
Qui të proximus est, he who is next to you.
Proximus ä tectis ignis dëfenditur aegrë. Ov. A fire next door is kept off with
difficulty (is hard to keep off).
5. Aliënus,/oi'öiö'ra, strange, is also construed with the Ablative, with or without ab
(ä) :
Homo sum, bümäni nihil ä më aliënum puto. Ter. I am a man, and nothing
that pertains to man do I consider foreign to me.
6. In poetry, idem, the same, is often construed after the analogy of the Greek, with
the Dative.
Invitum qui servat idem facit occidenti. Hor. (296, E. 1.)
7. Derived adverbs take the Dative.
IL INTERNAL CHANGE.
Genitive.
357. The Genitive Case is the Case of the Complement, and
is akin to the Adjective with which it is often parallel. It is the
substantive form of the Specific Characteristic.
184
GENITIVE.
The chief English representatives of the Genitive are ;
The Possessive case ;
Domus regis, the king''s palace.
The Objective case with of :
Domus regis, the palace of the king.
Substantives used as adjectives or in composition :
Arbor abietis, fir-tree.
Remarks.—1. Other prepositions than 0/are not unfrequently used, especially with
the Objective Genitive. (361, R. 1.)
Patriae quis exsul së quoque fûgitî Hok. What exUe from his cmntry ever fled
himself as well ?
Boiorum triumph! spem collëgae rellquit. Lit. He left the hope of a triumph
OVER the Boil to his colleague.
Via mortis. Lit. The death-path, thewayio death. Elsewhere; via ad mortem.
2. An abstract Noun with the Genitive is often to be translated as an attribute :
Verni temporis sua vitas, the sweet spring-time.
And, on the other hand, the predicative attribute is often to be translated as an ab-
stract'noun with of ;
Ante Bomam conditam, before the founding of Rome. (324, R. 3.)
Notice also hic metus, this fear — fear of this, and kindred expressions.
358. The Genitive is employed:
I. and II. Chiefly as the complement of Nouns Substantive
and Adjective.
III. Occasionally as the complement of Verbs.
Remark.—The Locative of the Second Declension coincides in form with the Geni¬
tive, and is generally treated under the head of the Genitive. (See 412.)
I. GENITIVE WITH NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE.
Adnominal Genitive.
APrOSITIVE GENITIVE, OR GENITIVE OF SPECIFICATION.
359. The Genitive is sometimes used to specify the contents
of generic words instead of Apposition in the same case :
Vitium nimiae tarditatis. Quint. The fault of excessive slowness.
Virtus continentiae. Cic. The virtue of self-control.
So especially with vox, expression ; nömen, name ; verbum,
ivord, verb: vox voluptätis, the word pleasurenömen regis,
the name or title of hing.
Sulla nömen Fëlîcis assumpsit. Vell. Sulla assumed the surname {of)
" the Lucky."
GENITIVE.
185
Remark.—So also occasionally other words, such as :
Urbs Kömae, the city of Borne. (Poet.)
Arbor abietis, fir-tree.
Sprëtae injuria formae- Verg. The insult of despised beauty.
POSSESSIVE GENITIVE.
Oeniiive of Property.
360. The Possessive Genitive is the substantive form of an
adjective attribute with which it is often parallel :
Domus regis = domus regia, the palace of the king, the king's palace =
the royal palace.
Remarks.—1. The adjective form is often preferred. So always with the possessive
pronoun : amicus m eus, a friend of mine, canis aliSnus, a strange dog. another man's
dog; fîlius erilis, master's son. So of cities: Thalës Mîlësius, Thaies of MBetus.
2. The attention of the student is called to the variety of forms which possession may
take. Statua Myrönis, Myron's statue, may mean : 1. A statue which Myron owns ;
2. Which Myron has made ; 3. Which represents Myron.
3. Observe the brief expressions : Ventum erat ad Vestae, We {they) had come to
Vesta's (i. e., temple, aedem) ; Hasdrubal Gisgonis, Gisgo's Easdrubal, Hasdrubal
Gisgo's son (as it were, Hasdrubal 0' Gisgo) ; Flaccus Claudii, Claudius's Flaccus =
Flaccus the slave or freedrnan of Claudius.
4. The chorographic (geographic) Genitive is rare and late :
Rëx Chalcidem Euboeae vënit. Liv. The king came to Chaléis of (in) Euboea.
ACTIVE AND PASSIVE GENITIVE.
861. When the Substantive on which the Genitive depends
contains the idea of an action, the possession may be active or
passive. Hence the division into
1. The Active or Subjective Genitive : amor Del, the love of
God, the love which God feels (God loves).
2. Passive or Objective Genitive : amor Del, love of God, love
toward God (God is loved).
Remarks.—1. The English form in of is used either actively or passively : the love of
wcmen. Hence, to avoid ambiguity, other, prepositions than of are often substituted for
the Passive Genitive, such as for, toward, and the like. So, also, sometimes in Latin :
Voluntas prëvinciae ergä Caesarem, the good-will of the province toward Caesar.
Odium in hominum Universum genus, Hate toward all mankind.
2. Both Genitives may be connected with the same Substantive :
Quanta sit aviditäs hominum talis victöriae scio. Cic. How great the eagerness
of men for such a victory is, 1 know.
362. The Genitive, of the Personal Pronouns, except nostrum
and vestrum, is used as the Passive Genitive :
186
GENITIVE.
Amor meï, love to me.
Dësîderium tuï, longing for thee.
Memoria nôstiî, memory of us (oiir memory).
Remark.—NSstrum and vestrum are used as Partitive Genitives :
Magna pars nostrum, a great part of us ; uterque vestrum, either {both) ofymi.
Nöstri melier pars means the better part of our being, our better part.
With omnium, the forms nostrum and vestrum must be used.
363. The Possessive Pronoun is generally used as the Active
Genitive.
Amor meus, my love {the love which I feel).
Dësîderium tuum, your longing {the longing which you feel).
Additional attributives are put in the Genitive :
Hoc negotium meä ipsïus (söHus, ûnïus) opera perfectum est. This
business was finished by my exertions alone.
Remark.—Occasionally, however, in Latin, as in English, the Possessive Pronoun
is used passively : dësîderium tuum, longing for thee; injuria tua, your wrong (" The
deep damnation of his taking off").
GENITIVE OF QUALITY.
364. The Genitive of Quality must always have an Adjective
or its equivalent :
Mîtis ingeniîjuvenís. Liv. A youth of müd disposition.
Homo nihilî (= nullius pretiî). Flaut. A fellow of no account.
Trîduî via. Caes. A three days^ journey.
N5n multî cibî hospitem accipiës, multî jocî. Gic. You will receive a
guest who is a small eater but a great joker.
Remark.—The Genitive of Quality is less common than the Ablative, being found
chiefly of the essentials. The Genitive always of Number, Measure, Time, Space ; the
Ablative always of externals, so of parts of the body. Often the use seems indifferent.
(402.)
GENITIVE AS A PREDICATE.
365. The Genitives of Possession and Quality may be used
as Predicates :
Domus est regis, the house is the king's.
Vir est magnî ingeniî, the man is (one) of great genius.
Remarks.—1. The Possession appears Ina variety of forms, and takes a variety of
translations :
Hiijus erö vîvus, mortuus hûjus ero. Prop. Hers I shall be, living ; dead, hers 1
shall be.
GEISITIVE.
187
Omnia quae mulieris fuSrunt viri flunt. Cic. All that was the wifé's (property)
becomes the husbancTs.
Is [Herculës] dîcëbâtur esse MyrSnis- Cic. That (statue of Hercules) was said, to
be Myron's (work), by Myron. (Genitlvus Auctoris.)
Nölae senâtus Eömänörum. plêbs Hannibalis erat. Liv. At Nola the senate ivas
(on the side) of the Eomans, the comman folk (on) Hannibal's.
Damnatio est jüdicum, paena lëgis, Condemning is the judges' (business), punish¬
ment the law's.
Est animi ingenul cul multum dëbeâs eîdem plürimum velle dëbëre. Cío. It
shows the feeling of a gentleman to be willing to owe very much to him to whom you already
owe much.
Pauperis est numerare pecus, ''Tis only the poor man that counts his ßock QTis the
mark of a poor man to count the flock).
Stultitiae est, it is folly ; Möris est, it is customary.
So also with facere, to make (cause to be) : Bömänae diciënis facere, to Irring under
the Roman sway.
f¿. In the Third Declension of the Adjective, the Genitive is the usual form :
Ämentis est superstitione praeceptorum contra ratiönem causae trahi.
Quint. It is madness to let oneself be carried by a superstitious regard for rules counter to
the requirements of the case.
Sometimes the Nom. of the Third Declension is used in combination with the Nom.
of the Second.
Figrum et iners vidëtur südöre adquîrere quod possis sanguine parare- Tac.
It is thought sloio and spiritless to acquire by sweat what you can get by blood.
3. The same methods of translation apply to the Possessive Pronoun in the Predicate
(" Vengeance is mine") : meum est, it is my property, business, way.
Nön est meum mentlrl. Ter. Lying is not my way {Ido not lie).
PAETITIVE GENITIVE.
366. The Grenitive stands for the Whole to which a Part be¬
longs :
Magna vis militum, a great number of soldiers.
Centum militum, a hundred {of the) soldiers.
n militum, those {of the) soldiers.
Fortissimi militum, the bravest {of the) soldiers.
Satis militum, enough {of) soldiers {soldiers enough).
367. The Partitive Genitive is used with substantives of
Quantity, Number, Weight:
Modius tritici, a measure of wheat.
Libra farris, a pound of spelt.
Ala equitum, a squadron of cavalry.
Eemark.—This is sometimes called the Genitlvus Generis. Whether the conception
be partitive or not, depends on circumstances.
Medimnus tritici, a medimnus of wheat may be a medimnus of wheat (Genitlvus
Generis) or a medimnus of wheat (Partitive).
868. The Partitive Genitive is used with numerals, both
special and general :
188
GENITIVE.
Special:
Centum militum, a hundred (of the) soldiers^ a hundred (of) soldiers.
(Centum milites, a, the hundred soldiers.)
"Quintus regum, the fifth {of the) king{s).
(Quintus rex, the fifth king.)
General :
Multi militum, many of the soldiers, many soldiers.
(Multi milites, many soldiers.)
Rehiarks.—1. The English language commonly omits the partition, unless it is
especially emphatic :
Quot ci vi um adsuntî How many citizens are present f Quot civSs adsunti
How MANT are the citizens present f
2. When all are embraced, there is no partition :
Nos trecenti conjiiravimus, three hundred of us hare bound ourselves by an oath.
Amicös quös multSs habet,/niemZ« whom he has in great number tpf whom he has
many).
Qui omnës, all of whom.
Quot estis ? How many are {there of) you?
Here the English language familiarly employs the partition. Exceptions are very rare.
On mille and milia see 308.
369. The Partitive Genitive is used with Pronouns :
lï militum, those (of the) soldiers.
E milites, those soldiers.
111! Graecôrum, those (of the) Greeks.
370. The Partitive Genitive is used with Comparatiyes and
Superlatives :
Prior horum. Liv. The former of these.
Regum ultimus ille bonorum. Juv. The last of the good kings.
Remarks.—1. When there are only two, the comparative exhausts the degrees of
comparison. (315.)
2. Uterque, ^ther (both), is commonly used as an adjective with substantives :
uterque consul, either consul = both consuls ; as a substantive with pronouns : uterque
horum, both of these.
3. On the concord of the Superlative see 202, R. 2.
371. The Partitive Genitive is used with the Neuter Singu¬
lar of the following and kindred words, but only in the Nomi¬
native or Accusative :
tantum, so much^ quantum, as {how much), aliquantum, somewhat.
multum, much, plus, nwre, plürimum, most.
paulum, littU, minus, less, minimum, least.
satis, enough, parum, too little, nihil, nothing.
hoc, this, id, illud, istud, that, idem, the same.
quod and quid, which and what ? with their compounds.
GENITIVE.
189
Garnis plus habet Aeschinës, minus lacertörum. Quint. Aeschine»
has more ßesh, less muscle.
Cimön habëbat satis ëloquentiae. Nep. (349, R. 4.)
Surgit amârî aliquid, quod in ipsîs flöribus angat. LuCR. Uprises
something hitter to choke us mid the very flowers.
Nihil reliquî faoere. 1, To leave nothing {not a thing). 2. (Occasionally),
to leave nothing undone.
Remarks.—1. The conception is often not so much partitive as characteristic. As we
say : Scelus pueri es. Plaut. You are a rascal of a ôoy—where the boy is the rascal,
so Quodcumque hoc regni. Vbrg. This realm., what (little) there is of it {what little
realm I have).
2. Neuter Adjectives of the Second Declension can he treated as substantives in the
Genitive ; not so Adjectives of the Third, except in combination with Adjectives of the
Second : aliquid bonum, or boni, something good ; aliquid memoräbile, something
memorable ; aliquid boni et memoräbilis, something good and memorable.
Vixque tenet lacrimas quia nil lacrimabile cernit- Ov. And scarce restrains
her tears, because she descries naught to shed tears for.
.3. The partitive construction is not admissible with a preposition: ad tantum Stu¬
dium, to so much zeal. (Exceptions are late : ad multum diei,/«r into the day.)
4. The Partitive Genitive is also used with Adverbs of Qtianiity, Place, Extent : ar-
morum affatim, abundance of arms ; ubi terrärum, gentium ? where in the world?
hue, eö arrogantiae processit, he got to this, that pitch of presumption. (Later Latin,
tum XQvcvgoviñ, at that time). Notice especially the phrase: quoad ëjus facere pos¬
sum, as far as lean do so.
5. Instead of the Partitive Genitive with Numerals, Pronouns, Comparatives, and
Superlatives, the Ablative may be employed with ex. out of, à.ë,from (especially with
proper names and singulars), or the Accusative with inter, among'/ Gallus prövocat
Qnum e x Eomanis, The Gaul challenges one of the Romans ; ûnus d ë multis, one of
the many (the masses) ; Croesus inter rëgës opulentissimus, Croesus, wealthiest of
kings. With ûnus, ex or dë is the more common construction.
6. On the Attribute used partitively, see 287, R.
7. Qualitative Adjectives are combined with the Genitive in later Latin :
Dëgenerës canum caudam sub alvum flectunt. Plin. Currish dogs curl the tail
up under the belly.
In poetry and silver prose the Neuter of Qualitative Adjectives is frequently used be¬
fore the Genitive :
Ardua dum metuunt Smittunt vëra vial. (27, R. 1.) Lucr. The while they fear
the steeper road, they miss the true.
So amära cürärum, bitter elements of cares, bitter cares ; strSta viarum, stratae
viae, the paved streets.
8. The Partitive Genitive as a Predicate is Greekish :
Fiës nöbilium tû quoque fontium. Hor. Thou too shalt count among the famous
fountains.
GENITIVE WITH PREPOSITIONAL SUBSTANTIVES.
372. Causa, gratia, ergo, and instar, are construed with the
Genitive :
Causa and gratia, for the sake, commonly follow the Genitive. So also
]90
GENITIVE.
ergo, on account (in old formulae). Instar is an old Accusative, as it were,
an "instead."
Sophistae quaestûs causa philosophabantur. Cic. The profess¬
ors of wisdom dealt in philosophy for the sake of gain.
Tü më a m oris magls quam honoris servâvistî gratia. Enn.
Thou didst saw me more for fore's (sake) iÄan (thou didst)/or honor's sake.
Virtütis ergo, Ow account of valor.
Instar montis equus. Verg. A horse to stand in mountain's
stead {a horse that stood a mountain high).
Plato mihi ûnus instar est omnium. CiC. Plato hy himself is in
my eyes worth them all.
Remark.—So meä, tuS, sua causS, seldom grStiS-
II. GENITIVE WITH NOUNS ADJECTIVE.
373. Adjectives of Fulness, of Participation, and of Power,
of Knowledge and Ignorance, of Desire and Disgust, take the
Genitive :
Plënus rîmârum, full of chinks ("a leaky vessel").
Particeps cônsiliî,« sharer in the plan.
Compos mentis, in possession, of (one's) mind.
Peritus belli, versed in war.
Cupidus gloria e, grasping after gloi'y.
Fastidiösus Latînârum lîterârum, too dainty for Latin.
Omnium rërum inscius, a universal ignoramus.
' Cür non ut plënus vïtae con^va recëdis ? Lucr. (268.)
Sitque memor nostrî necne, referte mihi. Ov. (195, E. 7.)
C o n s G i a mens recti Fâmae mendâcia risit. Ov. (329, R. 1.)
Agricolam laudat juris lëgumque peritus. Hor. Thehus-
handmanl^s, lot) is praised hy the counsel learned in the law.
Vënâtor tenerae conjugis immemor. Hor. The hunter of his ten¬
der spouse unmindful.
Vis cönsili expers mole ruit sua. Hor. Force void of counsel
tumbles by its own mass.
Mentis inops gélida formidine 15ra remisit. Ov. Senseless from
chill fear, he let go the reins.
Remarks.—!. The following adjectives—refertttS, stuffed ; praeditus, endowed /
contentas, satisfied ; frëtus, supported—show their participial nature by being con-
etnied with the Ablative :
Vita referta bonis, a life filled to overflowing with blessings.
Mömbris hümänis esse praeditum, to be endowed with human limbs.
Frëtus opulentiâ, trusting in wealth.
Uxor contenta est quae bona est ünö viro. Plaut. A wife who is good is eon-
tented with one husband.
GENITIVE.
191
2. Pl8nus,/w?í, sometimes takes the Ablative :
Maxima quaeque domus servís est plena superhis. Juv. Every great house is
Mied with overbearing slaves.
H. Dig'nus, worthy, and indignus, unworthy, are construed with the Ablative :
Digne puer meliöre flammS- Hob. Boy worthy of a better Jlanw.
Vita tua dignior aetäs. Vekg. Your age is worthier of life.
The Genitive is rare.
4. Liber,/ree, and vacuus, empty, take the Ablative with or without ab (ä) (388) ;
Liberum (vacuum) esse metû (â metü), to be free from {void of) fear.
5. On aliënus, stränge, see 356, R. 5.
On aequälis, commünis, conscius, contrarius, par, similis, superstes, and the
like, see 356, R. 1.
6. Verbs of Filling sometimes follow the analogy of plënus, fuHl, and take the Geni¬
tive.
On egëre and indigëre with the Gen., see 389, R. 2.
The poets carry the analogy of Plenty and Want very far.
Ditissimus agri. Vebg. Rich of domain.
Solûtus operum. Hob. Loosed of {released from) work.
Thus the Genitive in poetry comes near the Ablative or Whence case :
Dësine mollium tandem querëlârum. Hob. Cease at last from womanish corn-
plamings.
GENITIVE WITH VERBALS.
374. Present Participles take the Genitive when they lose
their verbal nature ; and so do verbals in -ax in poetry and later
prose :
Epamînôndâs adeo vëritâtis erat dîligëns utnë joco quidem
mentirëtur. Nef. Epaminondas was so carefiü of the truth as not to tell lies
even in jest.
Omnium consensu capax imperii nisi imperasset. Tac. By general
consent capable of empire, had Tie not become emperor.
Remabks.—1. The participle is transient; the adjective permanent. The simple test
.is the substitution of the relative and the verb : amans (participle), loving {who is lov¬
ing) ; amans (adjective),/on«?, (substantive), lover; pations (part.), bearing {who is bear¬
ing) ; patiens (adjective), enduring, (substantive), a sufferer.
2. In later Latin and in the poets alinost all adjectives that denote an affection of the
mind take a Genitive of the Thing to which the affection refers : aeger timëris, sick of
fear; ambiguus cënsilii, douRtful of purpose ; vitae dubius, doubtful of life.
Here model prose requires the Ablative or a Preposition.
The analogy of these adjectives is followed by others, so that the Genitive becomes a
complement to the adjective just as it is to the corresponding substantive.
Integer vitae. Hob. Spotless of life ; like Integritas vitae. (Fämä et fortunis
integer. Sall. In fame and fortunes intact.)
3. The seat of the feeling is also put in the Genitive, chiefly with animi (which is
suspected of being a Locative). Aeger animi, sick at heart, heartsick ; audäx ingenil,
daring of disposition : Plural, animis.
192
genitive.
III.—GENITIVE WITH VERBS.
GENITIVE WITH VERBS OF MEMORY.
375. Verbs of Eeminding, Remembering, and Forgetting,
take the Genitive :
Të veteris amicitiae commonëfacio. [Cic.] 1 remind you of our old
friendship.
Est proprium stultitiae aliörum vitia cernere, oblïviscî suörum. CiC.
The fact is, it shoios a fool to have keen eyes for the faults of others, to forget
onds own.
Ipse jubet mortis të meminisse Deus. Mart. Qod himself bids
you remember death.
Remaeks.—1. Verbs of Reminding also take the Ablative with dë (so regularly
moneo), and the Ace. Neut. of a Pronoun or Numeral Adjective :
Oro ut Terentiam moneätis dë testamentó. Cío. I beg you to pul Terentia in
mind of the w'M.
Discipulös id ûnum moneo. Quint. (331, R. 2.)
2. Verbs of Remembering and Forgetting also take the Accusative, especially of
things :
Haec Slim meminisse juvabit. Vbrg. To remember these things one day will give
us pleasure.
Dulcës moriens reminiscitur Argos- Vero. Dying, he remembers sweet Argos.
Oblïviscî nihil solës nisi injurias- Cíe. You are wont to forget nothing except
injuries.
Recordor (literally = Tbring to heart, to mind) is commonly construed with the Acc.:
Et V 5 0 e m Anchisae magnî vultumque recordor- Verg. And I recoil (call to
mind) the voice and countenance of Anchises the Great. With persons, dë-
Meminî, I bear in mind, I (am old enough to) remember, takes the Accusative :
Antipatrum tü probë meministî- Cío. You remember Antipater very wdl.
3. Venit mihi in mentem, it comes into (up to) my mind, may he construed imper¬
sonally with the Genitive, or personally with a subject :
Venit mihi in mentem Flatonis- Cic. (or Plato.) Plato rises before my mind's eye.
Certiorem aliquem facere, to inform, follows the analogy of Verbs of Reminding.
GENITIVE WITH VERBS OF EMOTION.
376. Misereor and miseresco, I pity, take the Genitive, and
miseret, it moves to pity, paenitet, it repents, piget, it ii'lcs, pudet,
it makes ashamed, taedet and pertaesum est, it tires, take the Ac¬
cusative of the Person Who Feels, and the Genitive of the Ex¬
citing Canse :
Miserëre soröris. Verg. Pity thy sister !
Suae quemque fortûnae paenitet. CiC. Each man is discontented
with his lot.
GENITIVE.
193
Miseret të aliörum, tuîtê nec m i s e r e t nec p u d e t. Plaut.
You are sorry for others^ for yourself you are neither sorry nor ashamed.
Pudet is also used with the Genitive of the Person whose Presence
excites the shame :
Pudet deorum hominumque. Lrv. It is a shame in the sight of gods and
men.
Remark.—These Impersonals can also have a subject, chiefly a Demonstrative or
Relative Pronoun:
Non të haec pndent 1 Ter. Do not thesa things put you to the. blush ?
Other constructions follow from general rules. So the Inf. (423) and quod (542).
N5n më paenitet vixisse. Cic. (540.)
Quintum paenitet quod animum tuum offéndit. Cic. Qy.intus is sorry that he
has wounded your feelings.
GENITIVE WITH JUDICIAL VERBS.
377. Verbs of Accusing, Convicting, Condemning, and Ac¬
quitting take the Genitive of the Charge :
Miltiades accüsätus est proditionis. Nep. Miltiades was accused of
treason.
Cannensem exercitum quis pavoris insimulare potest ? Lrv. Who can
charge the army of Cannae with craven fea/r?
Parce tuum vatem sceleris damnäre, Cupido. Ov. Be slow to condemn
thy hard of crime, 0 Cupid !
Absolvere improbitâtis, to acquit of dishonesty.
So also kindred expressions : reum facere, (to make a party) to indict, to bring an
action against ; sacrilegil compertum esse, to be found (guilty) of sacrilege.
Remarks.—1. Verbs of Condemning and Acquitting take the Ablative as well as the
Genitive of the Charge and the Punishment, and always the Ablative of the Pine :
Accüsäre capitis, or capite, to bring a capital charge.
Damnäre capitis, or capite, to condemn to death.
Damnari decern mllibus, to be fined 10,000.
Multare, to mulct, is always construed with the Ablative :
Multare pecüniä, to mulct in (of) money.
Manlius virtutem filii morte multävit. Quint. Manlius punished the valor of
his son with death.
2. Most verbs belonging to this class take also instead of the Genitive the Ablative
with dë : accusäre dë vi, of violence (no Genitive) ; dë venëficië, of poisoning ; dô
rëbus repetundis, of extortion.
3. Destination and Enforced Labor are expressed by ad or in : damnari ad bestiäs,
to be condemned (to be thrown) to wild beasts ; ad (in) metalla, to the mines / ad (in) opuA
publicum, to hard labor. Voti damnari, to be hound to fulfil a vow.
GENITIVE WITH VERBS OF RATING AND BUYING.
378. Verbs of Rating and Buying are construed with the
194
genitive.
Genitive of the general value or cost, and the Ablative of the
particular value or cost. (404.)
Verbs of Rating are: aestimare, to mine ; putare, to reckon ; dûcere,
to take ; habere, to hold; pendere, to weigh; facere, to make, put ; esse,
to he (worth).
Verbs of Buying are: emere, to hug ; vendere, to sell ; venire, to he
for sale ; stare and constare, to cost, to come to ; pröstäre, licëre, to he ex¬
posed, left {for sale) ; condûcere, to hire ; locare, to let.
379. Verbs of Eating take:
Magni, much, plüris, more, plûrind, maximi, most.,
Parvi, little, minoris, less, minimi, least.
Tanti, so much, quanti, how much, nihili, naught.
Equivalents of nihili, nothing, are flocci, a lock of wool, nauci, a trifle,
assis, a copper, and the like, and so also hüjus, that (a snap of the finger),
with the negative, which is omitted only in the earlier times.
Tanti is often used in the sense of operae pretium est'= it is worth
while.
Dum ne ob malefacta peream parvi [id] aestimo. Plaut. So long
as I he not killed for my misdeeds little do I care.
Voluptätem virtus minimi facit. Cic. Virtue makes little account of the
pleasure cf the senses.
Jûdicës rempûblicam flocci non faciunt. CiC. The judges do not care
a fig for the State.
Non habeo nauci Marsum augurem. Ennius. 1 do not mlu£ a Marsian
augur a hauhee.
Est mihi tanti hüjus invidiae tempestatem subiré. CiC. It is worfh
while {the cost), in my eyes, to hear this storm of odium.
380. Verbs of Buying take tanti, quanti, plüris, and minoris.
The rest are put in the Ablative :
Vëndo meum firümentxun n5n plüris quam cëteri, fortasse
etiam minoris. CiC. I sell my corn not dearer than everybody else, per¬
haps even cheaper.
Magis ilia juvant quae plüris emuntur. Juv. Things give more
pleasure which are bought for more.
Emit Canius hortös tanti quanti Pythius voluit. CiC. Canius
bought the gardens at the price Pythius wanted.
Quanti cënâs ? What do you give for your dinner ?
Quanti habitas ? What is the rent of your lodgings?
But :
Parvö famës constat, m a g n 5 fastidium. Sen. Sanger costs little,
daintiness much.
GEISTITIVE.
195
Ebmaeks.—1. Aestimo is found with the Ablative as well as with the Genitive. So
aestimare magno and m a g n 1, to value highly.
2. Observe the phrases: honi (aequi bonique) facio, boni cönsulo,wiíA,
talce in good part.
3. Bene emere, to buy cheap; bene vSndere, to sell dear ; male emere, to buy dear;
male vendere, to seU cheap.
GENITIVE WITH INTEREST AND RËFERT.
381. Interest and Rëfert take a Genitive of the Person, seldom
of the Thing, concerned.
Olodii interest. Cic. It is Clodius^s interest.
Rëfert compositiönis quae quibus antepönäs. Quint, It is of im/por-
tance for the arrangement of words^ which you put before which.
Instead of the Genitive of the Possessive Pronouns the
Ablative Singular Feminine of the Possessives is employed :
Meâ interest, meä rëfert, I am concerned.
Remarks.—1. Rëfert is commonly used absolutely, occasionally with meä, etc., sel¬
dom with the Genitive.
2. Instead of Apposition use the Relative :
Vehementer intererat vestra, qui patrës estis, liberös vestrSs hie potissimum
discere. Plin. Ep. It were vastly to the interest of you parents, that your children, if
possible, were taught at home.
3. No satisfactory explanation has been given of this construction. Meä seems to be
an adverbial form like quä, häc, eä. (Madvig.)
382. 1. The Degree of Concern is expressed by an Adverb,
Adverbial Accusative, or a Genitive of Value :
Multum (nihil) interest. It makes much {no) difference.
Quid interest ? What difference does it make ?
Magni interest meä ünä nös esse CiC. It is of great importance to me
that we be together.
2. The Object of Concern is commonly put in the Infinitive,
Accusative and Infinitive, ut or ne, with the Subjunctive, or an
Interrogative Sentence.
Quid Milönis intererat interfici Clodium ? CiC. What interest had Milo
in Clodius^ being killed.
Caesar dicere solëbat non tam sua quam reîpûblicae interesse ut
salvus esset. Suet. Caesar used to say that it was not of so much impor¬
tance to 7im(self ) as to the State that his life should be spared.
Vestra interest n ë imperätörem pessimî faciant. Tac. It is to your
interest that the dregs of creation do not make the emperor.
196
ABL4TIVE.
Quid rëfert tales versus qua vöce legantur. Juv. What matters it
what voice such verses are recited with ?
Occasionally by the Nominative of a Neuter Pronoun :
Quid (Acc.) tuá id (Norn.) rëfert ? Ter. What business is that of yours?
3. The Thing Involved is put in the Acc. with ad :
Magni ad honorem nostrum interest quam prîmum nos ad urbem ve¬
nire. Cíe. It makes a great difference touching our honor that we should
come to the city as soon as possible.
Ablatitb.
383. The Ablative is the Adverbial, as the Genitive is the
Adjective case. It contains three elements :
A. Where ? B. Whence ? C. Wherewith ?
In a literal sense, the Ablative is commonly used with Pre-
pos^itions ; in a figurative sense, it is commonly used without
Prepositions.
A. The Ablative of the Place Where appears in a figurative
sense as the Ablative of the Time When.
B. The Ablative of the Place Whence appears as :
1. The Ablative of Origin.
2. The Ablative of Measure.
C. The Ablative of the Thing Wherewith appears in a figu¬
rative sense, as :
1. The Ablative of Manner.
2. The Ablative of Quality.
3. The Ablative of Means.
Bemabk.—It í8 impossible to draw the line of demarcation with absolute exactness.
So the Ablative of Cause may be derived from any of the three fundamental significations
of the case, which is evidently a composite one.
To these we add :
D. The Ablative of Cause :
E. The Ablative Absolute.
I. the litbeal meanings oe the ablative.
A ABLATIVE OF THE PLACE WHERE.
Ablâtlvus localis.
384. The Ablative answers the question Where f and takes as
a rule the preposition in : '
ABLATIVE.
197
In portü nävigo. Ter. I am sailing in harbor.
Pons in Hiberö prope eflfectus erat. Caes. The bridge over the Ebro
was nearly finished.
Histrio in scënâ est. Pla.ut. The actor is on the stage.
Haeret in equö senex. Cic. The old man sticks to his horse.
Remarks.—1. Verbs of Placing and kindred significations take the Ablative with in, to
designate the i-esult of the motion: ponere, to place ¡ collocäre, to put ; statnere, COn-
stituere, to set ; considere, to settle ; dëfigere, to plant ; dëmergere, to plunge ; im¬
primere, to press upon; inscribere, to write upon ; incidere, to carve upon.
Plato ratiônem in oapite posuit, iram in pectore loca vit- Cíe. Pialo has put
reason in the head., has placed anger in the breast.
Lûcrëtia cultrum in corde dëfîgit- Liv, Lucretia plants a knife in {thrusts a knife
down into) her heart.
Pbilosophi in iis ipsis libris qu5s scribunt dë contemnendä gloria sua no¬
mina inscrîbunt. Cíe. Philosophers write their own names on (the titles of) the very
books which they write about contempt of glory.
Tnflfiif inciditur in aënels tabulis. Suet. An index is engraved on tablets of bronze.
The same observation applies to sub:
Pone sub curru nimium propinqui sölis in terra domibus negätä. Hob. Pul
(me) under the chariot of the ail-too neighboring sun, in a land denied to dwellings. ~
So humi, which is a Where-case : humi prosternere, to throw fiat on the-gromifL^
2. The poets are free in omitting in, but regard must be had to 38Î.
3. On the Locative Ablative of Towns and Small Islands, see 412.
385. In Citations from Books and in Enumerations, the
Ablative of the Place Where is used without in :
Libro tertio, third book ; versü decimö, tenth verse ; alio loco, elsewhere.
Remark.—LocuSí used metaphorically, generally omits in: bSc loco, in this
portion, situation ; in hoc loco (or hoc loco), in this place, part of the country. Libro
is used when the whole book, in librS, when merely a passage in the book, is devoted to
the subject in hand.
386. In designations of place with tötus, whole, and the like,
the Ablative of the Place Where is generally used without in;
Menippus disertissimus tota Asia üiit. Menippus was the most eloquent
man in all Asia (Minor).
Battiades t5t5 semper cantabitur orbe. Ov. Battiades (Callimaclius)
will always be sung throughout the world.
387. In all such Designations of Place as may be regarded in
the light of Cause, Manner, or Instrument, the Ablative is used
without a preposition :
Ut terra Thermopylärum angustiae Graeciam ita marl fretum Buripi
claudit. Liv. A« the pass of Thermopylae bars Greece by land, so the frith of
Euripus by sea.
198
ablative.
Nemo ïre quenquam publica prohibet via. Plaut. No man f(yrUdd£Íh
{any one to) travel by the public road.
Mätris ciñeres Tiberi subvectî sunt. Suet. His mother's ashes were
brought up by the Tiber.
Imperator milites (in) castrîs tenêbat (intra castra). Caes. The general
kept the soldiers in camp.
Recipere aliquem tecto, oppidö, portü. To receive a man into one's
Tiouse, town, harbor.
B. ABLATIVE OF THE PLACE WHENCE.
Ablätvms Sëparâtlvus.
388. The Ablative answers the question Whencef with or
without the prepositions ex, out of, de,/row, ah, off:
jBum exturbâstî ex aedibus. Plaut. You hustled him mit of the house.
Aräneäs dêjiciam de pariete. Plaut. I will get the cobwebs down from
the wall.
Non ex eo loc5 sed ab eö locö më dëjëcit. Cic. It was not out oP that
place, but from that place that he dislodged me.
The prepositions are omitted chiefly with Verbs of Abstain¬
ing, Kemoving, Eelieving, and Excluding, but with Persons a
preposition (chiefly ah) must be used.
Aliënë manüs abstinent. Cato. Let him keep his hands from other peo¬
ple's property. But :
Alexander vix ä së manüs abstinuit. CiC. Alexander hardly kept {could
hardly keep) his hands from himself {from laying hands on himself).
Populus Athëniensis Phôciônem patria pepulit. Nep. The Athenian
people drove Phocion from his cmintry. But :
Ilium aemulum ab eä pellito. Ter. Drive that rival from her.
Multos fortuna libérât paenä, metû nëminem. Sen. Fortune rids
many of punishment, none of fear. But :
Të ab eö libero. Cic. I rid you of him.
Amicitia nullö loco exclüditur. CiC. Friendship is shut out from no
place. But :
Ab illa exclüdor, hüo conclüdor. Ter. I am shut out from her (and)
shut up here {to this, to live with her).
Alcibiadem Athëniensës ë civitäte expulërunt. Nep. The Athenians
banished Alcibiades from the State.
Hannibal ex Italia dëcëdere coactus est. CiC. Hannibal was forced
to withdraw from Italy.
ABLATIVE.
199
Crêde mihi, m5rês distant à carmine nöströ. Ov. Belüm me, far
■ my conduct differs from my song.
Cónsules së abdicant magistrâtû. Cic. The consuls abdicate their office.
So also kindred Adjectives :
Animus excelsus omni est liber cûrâ. CiC. A lofty mind is free from
all care.
Cato, omnibus hûmânis vitiis immünis, semper fortünam in sua po-
testäte habuit. Vell. Cato, exempt from all human failings, always had
fortune in his own power.
Remarks.—1. Compounds with di (dis) also take the Dative (in poetry) :
Faullum sepultas distat inertiae cëlâta virtus. Hob. Little doth hidden worth
differ from buried sloth.
2. The Place Whence gives the point of view from which. In English a different trans¬
lation is often given, though not always necessarily: â tergö, in the rear; ex parte
dextra, on the right side ; ab oriente, on the east ; ä tantS spatio, at such a distance ;
ex fuga, on the fight ; ä rë frümentäriä labSräre, to be embarrassed in the matter of
proviswns.
3. The poets are free in the use of the Ablative as a Whence-case without a preposi¬
tion. On the difference of conception between Dative and Ablative, see 344, R. 2. On the
Genitive, see 373, R. 6.
4. On the Ablative as a Whence-case in Names of Towns and Small Islands, see 411.
389. Verbs of Depriving and Filling, of Plenty and Want,
take the Ablative :
IDëmocritus dicitur coulis sê privasse. CiC. Democritus is said to
have deprived himself of his eyes.
Deus bonis omnibus explëvit mundum. Cic. God has filled the uni¬
verse with all blessings.
Abundant dulcibus vitiis. QuiNT. They abound in charming faults.
Non caret effectû quod voluere duo, Ov. What two have resolved
on never lacks execution.
Amor vacat metü. Ov. Love is void of fear.
Sapiens eget nulla rë. Sen. The sage stands in need of nothing.
Remarks.—1. Verbs of Filling are commonly referred to the Instrumental Ablative
rather than to the Ablative of the Source, and are put here for convenience of contrast.
But observe that in the classic tongues the construction of opposites is identical.
2. Egeo and (more frequently) indigeo also take the Genitive.
Non tarn artis indigent quam laböris. Cíe. They are not so much in need of skill
as of industry.
3. Adjectives of Plenty and Want take the Genitive, but some of them follow the
analogy of the verb (373, R. 1) :
Asellus onustus auro. Cic. A donkey laden with gold.
Follicitis dives quilibet esse potest- Ov. Anybody can be rich in promises.
Amor et melle et feile est fëcundissimus. Plaut. Loveis {very) fruitful both in
honey and in gall (of acrimony).
200
ABLATIVE.
390. Opus and TIsus take the Dative of the Person who Wants
and the Ablative of the Thing Wanted; but the Thing Wanted
may be the subject and opus the predicate :
Opus est mihi libro, librîs, T want a book, books.
Liber mihi opus est, a book is a want to me {is what I want).
Libri mihi opus sunt, books are a want to me {are what I want).
Quid opus est speculo tibi ? Plaut. What do you want to do with a
mirror ?
Emas non quod opus est sed quod neoesse est ; quod non opus est
asse cärum est. Cato. Buy not what you want, but what is absolutely need¬
ful ; what you do not want (have no use for) is dear at a penny.
So with the Perfect Participle Passive :
Quod parätö opus est para. Ter. What must be got ready, get ready.
Vicinö opus est conventó. Flaut. The neighbor must be called on.
Usus est pecunia or pecunia. Plaut. Money is wanted {is, would be
(246, R. 1) useful).
N5n factó est usus. Plaut. It were better let alone.
Remark.—This construction belongs to the Instrumental, and is put here for conve¬
nience of reference :
Opus est, there is work to be done with.
Usus est, there is making use of (like ûtor, 405).
The Genitive is of rare occurrence. Other constructions are the Infinitive and ut-
The Neuter Accusative is often adverbial (331, R. 3) :
Quid (Acc.) digitos opus est graphio lassare tenendôî Ov. What is the use of
tiring the fingers by holding the stilus ?
Opus est të animë valëre ut corpore possis. Cíe. You must be well in mind in
order to be well in body.
An cuiquam est usus homini së ut cruciet ? Ter, Of what good is it to any man
to torture himself*
C. ABLATIVE OF THE THING WHEREWITH.
Abldtlvus Soeiätlrus.
391. The Ablative of Attendance takes the preposition cum,
with :
Cum baculó përâque senex. Mart. An old man with stick and wallet.
Nec tecum possum vivera neo sine të. Mart. I can't live either with
you or without you.
Remarks.—1. In military phrases, the troops with which a march is made are put in
the Ablative, with or without cum ; generally without cum when an adjective is used
(Ablative of Manner), with cum when no adjective is used (Ablative of Attendance) :
Rëx Hellëspoutum cum exercitû transiit, The king crossed ths Hellespont with
an army.
ABLATIVE.
201
Dictator (cum) Ingen ti exercitü ab urbe profectus est. The dictator set out from
the city with a great army.
2. Not to be confounded with the above is the Instrumental Ablative :
M âvibus proficisci, to set out by ship.
So also with verbs which denote other military actions :
Höstes sagittäriis et funditöribus terrëbat, he was frightening the enemy with
archers and stingers.
Armatus ipse et armätls saeptus. Liv. Armed himself and hedged ahout with
armed men.
Nil actum est nisi Poeno milite portas frangimus. Juv. Naught is accomplished
unless we break the gates with the Punic soldiery (as if with a hattering-ram).
II.—THE FIGURATIVE MEANINGS OF THE ABLATIVE.
A. The Place Where is transferred to the Time When.
Ablative of Time.
392. Time When or Within Which is put in the Ablative.
Qua nocte natus est Alexander eädem Diänae Elphesiae templum
deflagra vit. Cíe. On the same night on which Alexander was born^ the
temple of Diana of Ephesus burnt to the ground.
Sâtumî Stella triginta ferë annis cursum suum conflcit. Cic. The
planet Saturn completes its period in about thirty years.
Many adverbial forms of time are really locative ablatives :
So hodië, to-day ; heri(e), yesterday ; mâne, in the morning.
Remarks.—1. Time within which may be expressed by per and the accusative :
Per eos ipsös diSs quibus Philippus in Achäiä fuit, Philoclës saltum Cithae-
ronis transcendit. Liv. During those very days, while Philip was in Achaia, Philocles
crossed the range of Cithaeron.
2. Time Within Which may embrace both extremities ; so with totus, all, whole:
Tota nocte pluit, redeunt spectacula mane. Verg. All night (Jupiter) rains ;
back come the shows in the morning.
So with definite numbers (chiefly later) :
Apud Pythagoram discipulls quinqué annis erat tacendum. Sem. In the school
of Pythagoras the disciples had to keep silence five years.
3. When the Notion is Negative the English Time For Which is the Latin Within
Which:
Quadriennio (or per quadriennium) non militSvit. Liv. For four years he did
not serve as a soldier {during, at any time within, four years').
4. Especially to be noted is the Ablative of Time with hic, this ; ille, that :
Ego ad të his duobus mensibus non scripseram (244). Cic. I have not written to
you these two months {at any time within the last two months).
Haue urbem hoc bienniö ëvertës. Cío. This city you vMl overturn in the next two
years.
Transferred to Oratio Obliqua, hïc becomes ille (663, 3) :
Diodörus respondit illud argentum së paucis illis diëbus misisse Lilybaeum,
Diodorus answered that he had sent that silver plate to Lilybaeum within a few days {a few
days before).
9*
202
ABLATIVE.
393. The Ablative with the preposition in is used of points
within a period of time, or of the character of the time :
Bis in die, twice a day ; in pueritiä, m boyhood; in adulescentia, zVi
youth.
Nullo modo mihi placuit bis in die saturum fieri. Cic. It did not mit
me in any way to eat my fill twice a day.
Sometimes, however, bis die, as dies = ünus dies.
Feci ego istaec itidem in adulescentia, Plaut. I did those things too in
my youth.
In may be omitted, chiefly with an adjective or in phrases :
Pñmá pueritiä, in early boyhood ; ill5 tempore, at that time ; in ill5
tempore, in those circumstances, at that crisis ; in tempore or tempore =
at the right time ; bello Pérsico, at the time of the Persian war ; in bello,
in war times ; in pace, in 'peace times.
Eemabk.—De is also used in designations of time :
Tit jugulent hominës surgunt de nocte latrônës. Hob. To kUlpeople, hightoay-
men rise by night, i. e., while it is yet night.
Inter, between: Quot prandia inter continuum perdidi triennium. Plaut.
How many luncheons I hare lost during three years together f
Intra, within ; Subëgit solus intra vîgintï diës. Plaut. He quelled them all
alone in less than twenty days.
On per, through, see 337, R.
Cum, with; cum prima luce, with daybreak.
394. B. The Place Whence is transferred :
1. To Origin ; 2. To Measure.
1. Ablative of Origin.
395. Participles which signify Birth take the Ablative of
Origin, with or without the Prepositions ex and dé :
Tanaquil summo loc5 näta. Liv. Tanaquil born {by birth) of high de¬
gree.
Numae Pompilii régis nepös, filia ortus, Ancus Marcius erat. Liv.
King Numa Pompiliue's grandson, a daughter's son, was Ancus Mafcius.
Maecenas atavis édite régibus. Hör. Maecenas, offshoot of great-grand-
sire kings.
Dis genite et genitüre deös. Verg. Begotten of gods and destined to
beget gods !
Sate sangfuine divum! Yerg. Seed of blood divine !
Bx mé atque höc nätus es. Ter. You are his son and mine.
Ôdénmt natos dé pellice. Juv. They hate the offspring of the concubine
ABLATIVE.
203
Ab is employed of remote progenitors :
Plërïque Belgae sunt orti ab Germänis. Caes. Belgians are mostly of
German descent.
396. The Ablative of Material commonly takes ex : constare,
to consist, sometimes omits the preposition :
Anim5 constamus et corpore, constämus ex animo et corpore. Cic.
We consist of mind and body.
Medicina tota constat experîmentïs. QmNT. All medicine is made up
of experiments {is empirical).
But : Statua ex auro, ex aere, facta, a status made of gold^ of bronze.
Often an adjective is used: aureus, golden, ligneus, wooden.
Remarks.—1. a remnant of the old usage is found with fío and facio :
Quid fëcistî scipiöne ? What have you done with the wand?
Quid me fíet ? What wiU become of me ?
Quid m6 futurum est ? What is to become of me?
Quid faciès hoc homine 1 How will you dispose of this man ?
Huic homini ? What will you do to this man ? Dë hoc homine, in this man's case.
Fiës dë rhëtore consul- Juv. From (having been) rhetorician you will become cm-
sul.
2. Otherwise the simple Ablative of Material is poetic or late :
Mayors caelatus ferro. Verg. Mars carvenjof-irtM. "
Meliore luto finxit- Juv. He fashioned hinv of better day.
2. Ablative of Measure.
397. The Ablative gives the Point from which a thing is
measured or treated : Ablative of Measure or Eeference.
Remark.—^But the Measure of Difference (400) is perhaps better regarded as the
Ablâtîvus Localis. Comp. Greek Dat Locative.
398. The Ablative is put in answer to the questions From
"What Point of View ? According to What ? By What ? In Ke-
spect of What ?
Magnos homines virtüte mëtimur, nön fortuna. Iíep. We measure
great men by worth, not by fortune.
Sonis hominës dignöscimus ut aera tinnitü. Quint. We distinguish
men by sound as coppers by ring.
Dëscriptus erat populus Rëmânus censû, ordinibus, aetätibus. Cic.
The people of Home was drawn off according to income, rank, (and) age.
Ennius ingenio maximus arte rudis. Ov. Ennius in genius great, in
art unskilled.
Animo ignävus, procäx ore. Tac. Coward at heart, saucy of tongue.
Crine ruber, red-haired ; captus oculis (literally, caught in the eyes),
204
ABLATIVE.
hlind ; captus mente, imane ; meâ sententiä, according to my opinion ;
jure, ly right ; lege, hy law ; and the Supines in -Û (437).
Remarks.—1. Prepositions are also used, which serve to show the conception :
Caesaris adventus ex colore vestítüs cognitus est. Caes. The arrival of Caesar
was knoion by the color of his clothing.
De gestü intelligo quid respondeas. Cic. I understand hy your gesture what
answer you are giving.
Ex lege, according to law ; ex pacto, according to agreement ; ex (dë) more, accord¬
ing to custom ; ex animi sententiä, according to (my) heart's desire; ex üsü, useful.
Ab animo aeger fui. Plaut. At heart I was sick.
Ötiösum esse ab animS. Ter. To be easy in mind.
2. Dignus (distinguished), worthy, and indignus, unworthy, are most conveniently
referred to this head. (Examples, see 3T3, E. 3.)
So also dignor, I deem worthy.
399. The Ablative of Measure is used with the Comparative
instead of quam, than, with the Nominative or Accusative:
Tunica propior palliö. Peov. The shirt is nearer than the cloak.
Phidiae simulâcrïs {= quam simulacra) cogitare possumus pulchriora.
Cic. We can imagine more beautiful things than the statues of Phidias.
So also after adverbs, but not so freely in prose :
Nemo est qui tibi sapientius suâdëre possit të ipso. CiC. There is no
one who can give you wiser advice than you yourself
Pulchrum omatum turpës môrës pëjus caenö collinunt. Plaut. Foul
behavior doth bedraggle fine apparel worse than mud.
Eemarks.—1. The comparative js also employed with the Ablative of certain abstract
substantives and adjectives used as substantives :
Consul sërius spë (= quam spës fuerat) Bômam vënit. Liv. The consul came to
Borne later than was hoped. So opinlöne.
Amnis solitë citätior. Lrv. The river running faster than usual.
2. Alius, other than, with the Ablative, is poetic.
400. Measure of Difference is put in the Ablative :
Turrës dënïs pedibus quam mûrus altiôrës sunt. CuKT. The towers
are (by) ten feet higher than the wall.
Tanto est accûsâre quam dëfendere quantô facere quam sanare vul¬
nera facilius. Quint. It is as much easier to accuse than to defend as it is
easier to inflict wounds than to heal them.
Perfer et obdürä : multö graviöra tulistî. Ov. Endure to the end and
be firm : you have borne much more grievous burdens.
Quoque minor spës est, hoc magis ille cupit. Ov. And the less his
hope, the greater his desire.
Eemarks.—1. This rule applies to verbs involving différence as well as to comparatives :
Aesculäpil templum quinqué millibus passuum ab urbe Epidaurô distat. lav.
The temple of Aesculapius is five miles from the dty of EjAdaurus.
2. The Accusative is sometimes employed. (See 335.)
ABLATIVE.
205
3. Especially to be noted is the use of the Ablative of Measure with ante, before, and
post, aft^r :
Faucis ante diebns, Faucis diebus ante, a few dmjs before.
Faucis post diebus, Faucis diebus post, a few days after, afterward.
Duobus annis postquam S,önia condita est, Two years after Borne was founded.
Faulo post Trojam captam, A little while after the taking of Troy.
The Accusative can also be employed : post paucös annös, after a few years ; ante
paucos annos, a few years before ; and the ordinal as well as the cardinal numbers : two
hundred years afteriward) may be :
Sucentis annis post or Ducentésimo anno post,
Fost ducentos anuos " Fost ducentësimum annum.
Ante bös sex mensés, six months ago (comp. 892, E. 2), more frequently abbine sex
menses : abbinc sex mensibus, means six months before (Madvig).
With a relative sentence the Ablative may be used alone :
Boscii mors quatriduS quo is occisus est, CbrysogonS nüntiätur. Cic. The
death of Boscius was announced to Chrysogonusfour days after he was killed (in the coun'i
of the four days within which he was killed). See 392,
Hence is ad : ad sex menses, six months hence.
a ABLATIVE OP THE THING WHEREWITH.
Abldtlvus soddflvus. Ablative of Attendance.
1. Ablative of Manner.
401. The Ablative of Manner answers the question How ?
and is used with the Preposition cum when it has no Adjective j
with or without cum when it has an Adjective :
Miltiadês summa aequitâte res constituit Chersonësï. Nef. MiUiade»
settled the affairs of the Chersonese with the greatest fairness.
Non facile est aequa commoda mente patï. O v. It is not easy to bear
good fortune with an even temper.
Cum cürä scrîbere, to write with care.
Magna cürä, \
Cum magna cürä, with great care.
Magna cvun cürä, )
Remark.—Several Ablatives are used adverbially without an Adjective or Preposi¬
tion ; ordine, in an orderly manner ; silentiö, silently ; cäsü, by chance, accidentally ;
vis et ratione, methodically ; dolo, fraude, fraudulently. It is sometimes hard to dis¬
tinguish between the Manner and the Instrument: vi, violently and by violence ; vi et
armis, by force of arms ; pedibus, afoot ; nävibus, by ship. Notice, also, the use of
per, through, with the Accusative : per vim, by violence ; per litteräs, by letter.
2. Ablative of Quality.
(Descriptive Ablative.)
402. The Ablative of Quality has no Preposition, and always
takes an Adjective or an equivalent :
206
ABLATIVE,
Âgësilâus statûrâ fuit humili. Nef. Agesiläus was (a man) of low
stature.
Cato singular! fuit prüdentiä et industria. Nef, Cato was (a man) of
unique foresight and energy.
Ista turpiculo puella nas5. Cat- That girl of yows with the ugly nose.
CIävi ferrai digitï pollicis crassitüdine. Caes. Iron nails of the thick¬
ness of your thumb.
Remarks.—1. External and transient qualities are put by preference in the Ablative ;
Measure, Number, Time, and Space, are put in the Genitive only ; parts of the body in
the Ablative only. Otherwise there is often no difference.
2. Of unnatural productions cum maybe used: agnus CumSUÍ1I5capita. Lrr. A
lamb with a swine's head.
3. Ablative of Means.
403. The Instrument is put in the Ablative without a Prep¬
osition.
The Agent or Doer is put in the Ablative with the Prepo¬
sition ab (â) :
The Person Through Whom is put in the Accusative with
per:
Pyrrhus lapide interfectus est, Pyrrhus was killed, by a stone.
Pyrrhus ä muliere interfectus est, Pyrrhus was killed by a woman.
Pyrrhus ä muliere lapide interfectus est, Pyrrhus was killed by a
woman with a stone. *
\ 1. nüntiö, by a message.
Xerxes oertior faotvB est, ( ^ j ^ „u¡SBmge:T.
Xerxes was informed. J by means of a messenger.
Nec bene promeritis capitur neque tangitur ira. LuCR. (218, E. 3.)
Ipse docet quid agam : fas est et ab hoste docërî. Ov. (210.)
Discite sânâïi per quem didicistis amäre. Ov. Learn to be healed by
means of (him by) whom yaa learned to love.
Remarks.—1. When the Instrument is personified and regarded as an Agent, or the
Agent is regarded as an Instrument, the constructions are reversed ; when an Adjective is
used, the construction may be doubtful, 352, R.
So jacent suis testibus. Cic. They are cast by their own witnesses ; or, they are
cast., their own men being witnesses.
2. Especially worthy of note under this head are assuesco and assuëfacio : assuëtus
labore, accustomed to toil, familiar with toü (the Dative is more rare) ; doctus GraeciS
litteris, learned in Greek ; and the various words for sacrifice ;
Quinquâgintâ capris sacrificâvërunt. Liv. They sacrificed fifty she-goats.
Afficere, to treat, with the Ablative, is a favorite turn ; see the Lexicons.
3. Nitor, I stay myself, is construed mth the Ablative, with or without in : Hastill
nixus, leaning on a spear (stayed by a spear).
ABLATIVE.
207
[Pompëi] in vita nitëbâtur salüs civitatis. Cíe. The weal of the Stale depended
on Pompey^s life.
"Motice also stare, with the Abl. : stare condiciönibus, to abide ly the terms.
4. Ablative of Price.
404. Definite Price is put in the Ablative :
Vigiuti talentis ünam örätiönem Isocratës vëndidit. Plin. Isocraies
sold one speech foi' twenty talents.
Émit morte immortâlitâtem. Quint. He purchased deathlessness with
death.
Nimium risüs pretium est si probitâtis impendió constat. Quint. The
'price of a laugh is too high, if it costs the outlay of a man's uprightness.
Argentum accëpï; dote Imperium vëndidî. Plaut. The cash 1
took ; (and) foi' a dowry sold my sway.
Remark.—Mütäre, to exchange, is sometimes Give, sometimes Get ; sometimes Sell,
sometimes Buy :
Pax misera vel bello bene mütätur. Tac. A wretched peace is well exchanged eren
for war.
Dürus qui potuit lucro mütäre puellam- Prop. Hard (is the soul of the) man
who could sell his sweetheart for lucre.
Cur valle permütem Sabina divitiäs operôsiôrës. Hör. Why should I exchange
my Sabine vale for riches sure to breed (me) greater trouble ?
5. Ablative with Sundry Verbs.
405. The Deponent Verbs Ütor, Abator, Fruor, Fmigor, Potior,
and Vescor, take the Ablative :
Victoria ûtî nëscïs. Lrv. How to m.ake use of victory you know not.
Quöusque tandem abûlëre patientiä nostra. Cic. How long, tell me,
will you abuse our patience ?
Lüx qua fruimur à Deö nëbïs datur. CiC. The light which we enjoy is
given to us by God.
Fungor vice cötis. Hor. I discharge the office of a whetstone.
Tütius esse arbitrabantur sine ullö vulnere victoria potîrï. Caes,
They thought it safer to make themselves masters of the victory without any
wound.
Numidae lacte vescëbantur. Sall. The Numidians made their food of
milk {fed on milk).
Remarks.—1. These Ablatives are commonly regarded as Ablatives of the Instru¬
ment; but fruor, Iget fruit, and vescor, I feed myself from (vë-ed-scor), and perhaps
fungor seem to take the Ablative as a Whence-case. In older Latin they are sometimes
combined with the Accusative. Hence they have a Gerundive :
Jüstitia dicet të esse injûstum quum graviter feras të quod ütendum accë-
208
ABLATIVE.
peris reddidisse- Cic. Justice will say that you are wuQust since y&a resent having restored
what you have nceived (but) to use.
2^ Uti is a favorite word, and has a most varied translation :
Uti aliquo amico, to avail oneself of {to enjoy) a man''s friendship (to have a friend in
him).
Uti consilio, to follow advice ; üti bonö pâtre, to have the advantage of having a
good father ; üti legibus, to obey the laws. See the Lexicons.
3. Vivo is construed like vescor: aligna misericordiä vivo, I live on the charity
of others.
Potior, I possess myself sometimes takes the Genitive ; always potlrl rgraxu, to
possess oneself of the supreme power.
D. ABLATIVE OF CAUSE.
406. The Ablative of Cause may be referred to so many
classes, that it is most convenient to regard it as a class by
itself.
407. The Ablative of Cause is used without a preposition,
chiefly with Verbs of Emotion :
Castor gaudet equis. Hob. Castor rejoices in horses.
Quidam vitiis suis glöriantur. Sen. Some make a hoast of their vices.
Pecûniâ fidens nön dubitäbat. Nep. Trusting in his money, he had no
doubts.
In culpa sunt qui officia dêserunt mollitiä aninü. CiC. They are to
blame who shirk their duties from effemincwy of temper.
Oderunt peccare boni virtûtis amöre. Hoß. The good hate to sin from
love of virtue.
So also jussü civium, at the bidding of the citizens ; me5 rogätü, at my
request, and other verbal Ablatives. On causa and gratia, for the sake of
see 372.
Ekmabks.—1. The moving canse is often expressed by a participle with the Ablative:
adductus, ardens, ; {¡ommotXiZ, stirred up ; inoitö.txxs, egged on ; incensus,
inflamed ; driven o«/ira, ôy anger; o^iö,byhate; met^^fromfear ; metu
perterritus, sore frightened ; propter metum, on account of (fly reason of) fear.
2. The preventing canse is expressed by prae,/or .*
Prae gaudio ubi sim nescio. Tee. I know not where I am for joy.
E. ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE.
408. The so-called Ablative Absolute is an Ablative com¬
bined with a participle, and serves to modify the verbal predicate
of a sentence. Instead of the participle, a predicative substan¬
tive or adjective can be employed.
Remark.—This Ablative, which may be called the Ablative of Circumstance, springs
from the Temporal Use of the Ablative—the Temporal from the Local.
NAMES OF TOWNS.
209
409. The Ablative Absolute may be translated by the Eng¬
lish Objective Absolute, which is a close equivalent : but for
purposes of style, it is often well to analyze the thought, to
change Passive into Active, to make use of an abstract noun.
Xerxe régnante Quum Xerxes regnâret), Xerxes reigning. When
Xerxes was reigning. In the reign of Xerxes.
Xerxe victo (= Quum Xerxes victus esset), Xerxes leing, having been,
defeated. When Xerxes had been defeated. After the defeat of Xerxes.
Xerxe rêge (= Quum Xerxes rex Xerxes [being] king. When
Xerxes was king.
Patre vivo, while/«¿Äer is, was alive {in father^s lifetime).
Maximas virtûtës jacëre omnës necesse est voluptäte domi¬
nante. Cío. All the great {est) virtues must necessarily lie 'prostrate, if (or
when) the pleasure (of the senses) is mistress.
Römäni veterës regnârî omnës volébant lîbertâtis dulcëdine
nôndum experta. Liv. The old Romans ail wished to have a king over
them (because they had) not yet tried the sweetness of liberty.
Urbe expugnätä imperâtor rediit :
Passive Form : The city [being] taken {after the city was taken), the gene¬
ral returned.
Active Form : Having taken the city {after he had taken the city), the
general returned.
Abstract Form : After the taking of the city. After taking the city.
Remarks.—1. As the Latin language has no Perf. Part. Active, except the Deponent,
which is thus used, the Passive construction is far more common than in English :
Tunc juvenës veste positä corpora oleo perunxërunt. Cíe. Then the youths,
{having) laid aside their clothing, anmnted their bodies with oU ; or, laid aside their cloth¬
ing, and anmnted their bodies with oU.
2. The Ablative Absolute, though often to be rendered by a co-ordinate sentence, for
convenience' sake, always presents a subordinate conception :
Lysander suadet Lacedaemoniis ut rëgiâ potestâte dissolûtâ ex omnibus dux
dëligâtur ad bellum gerendum. Ne p. Lysander advises the Lacedaemonians that-the
royal -¡power be done away with, and a leader be chosen from all, to conduct the war. Here
the one is necessary to the other.
3. As a rule, the Ablative Absolute can stand only when it is not identical with the
subject, object, or dependent case of the verbal predicate. Manlius slew the Gaul and
stripped him of his necklaxe, is to be rendered : Manlius caesum Galium torque spo-
liavit-
The rule is most frequently violated when the dependent case is in the Genitive :
Jugurtha frätre meo interfecto regnum ë j u s sceleris sui praedam fëcit- Sall.
Jugurtha killed my brother, and {— after killing my brother) made his throne the booty of
his crime.
4. On the Ablative of the simple participle, see 438, R. 2.
Names op Towns and Small Islands.
410. Names of Towns and Small Islands are put—
In the Accusative of the Place Whither.
210
NAMES OF TOWNS.
So also rüs, into the country, domum, domos, home.
Lëgâtï Athënâs misHî sunt. Liv. Envoya were sent to Athens.
Latona confügit Dëlum. Cic. Latona took refuge in Delos.
Laelius et Scipio rüs ëvolâbant. Cíe. Laeliua mid Scipio used to hurry
out into the country.
Inuumerâbilës philosophi nunquam domum revertëre. Cío. In¬
numerable philosophers never returned home.
So verbals : domum reditus, a return home.
Remarks.—1. Domum, house, with a possessive prononti, or Genitive, may or may
not have in before it : domum meam or in domum meam, to my house ; domum Pom-
pëji or in domum Pompëjl, to Pompey''s Jwuse; also domum ad Pompëjum. Other¬
wise ; in magnifioam domum venire, to come into a grand house.
2. When urbem, city, or oppidum, to^on, precedes the name of the city or town, the
preposition in or ad is prefixed ; if urbem or oppidum follows, in or ad may be omit¬
ted : in (ad) oppidum Cirtam, to, in {at) the town (of) Girta.
Jugurtba Tbalam pervënit in oppidum magnum et opulentum. Sall. Jugur-
tha arrived at Thala, a great and wealthy town.
3. Ad means to the neighborhood of, often before, of military operations. Ad Muti-
nam, to the neighborhood {siege of) Mutina (Modena).
4. Observe that there must be motion, not merely extent, which requires a preposition :
Ä Salônîs ad Öricum portûs. Caes. The harbors from Salonae to Oricus.
5. Motion To a Place embraces all the local designations :
Phalara in sinum Maliacum processerant. Liv. They had advanced to Phalara
on the Maliac Gulf.
Tarentum in Italiam inferiorem proficiscî, to set out for Tarentwn in Lower
Italy.
411. llames of Towns and Small Islands are put—
In the Ablative of the Place Whence :
Dëmarâtus fügit Tarquiniös Corinthö. LiV. Demaratus fled to Tar-
quiniifrom Corinth.
Doläbella Dëlô proficiscitur. Cic. Dolabella sets out from Delos.
So also domö, from home ; humo, from the ground ; rüre, from the
country.
Remarks.—1. The prepositions ab (ä) and ex (ë) are sometimes used for the sake oí
greater exactness. So regularly ab with the Place from which distance is measured :
Aesculâpiî templum quinqué mîlibus passuum ab urbe EpidaurS dlstat- Liv.
(400, R. 1.)
When the common nouns urbe, city, and oppido, town, are employed, the use of the
preposition is the rule :
Aulide, ex oppido Boeotiae, from Aulis, a town of Boeotia.
Ex Apollonia Fonti m:\ie, from Apollonia, a city of Pontus.
Ex oppido Gergovia^/wm the town of Gergovia.
2. The Place Whence embraces all the local designations :
Agrigento ex Aesculâpiî fânë, whereas we should say,/rom the temple of Aescula
xAus at Agrigentum.
Unde domo 1 Vero. From what home ?
3. Letters are dated from rather than at a place.
4. The poets arc free in using the Ablative as a Whence-case.
NAMES OP TOWNS.
211
412. îiaines of Towns and Small Islands are put
In the Locative of the Place Where.
The Locative coiucides in the Singular with the Genitive of the Second
Declension, with the Dative of the First and Third. In the Plural, Dative,
Locative, and Ablative coincide, and the Ablative is blended with the Lo¬
cative in Syntax and,in the Third Declension, often in form. (See 23, K. 1.)
Locative S. 1. Romae (Römäi) Pl. 1. Athënîs
2. Corinth: 2. Delphis
3. Sulm5nï(e) 3. Oüribus.
Ut Römae cónsules sic Karthägini (Carthägine) quotannis bini reges
creäbantur. Nep. As at Borne (two) consuls^ so in Carthage two kings, were
created yearly.
Artemisia nobile fecit Halicarnassi sepulcrum. Cic. Artemisia huilt
a famous sepulchre at Halicar nassus.
Tarquinius Superbus mortuus est Oümis. Lrv. Tarquín the Over¬
hearing died at Gumae.
Timotheus Lesbi vixit. Nep. Timotheus lived in Lesbos.
Kemarks.—1. other locative forms are, domi, at home, (Genitive, domûs) humî, on
the ground, and also belli and militiae, in combination with domi :
Parvi sunt foris arma nisi est consilium domi. Cic. Of little value are arms
abroad unless there is wisdom at home.
Humi j acere, to lie on the ground.
Humi prosternere, to throw flat on the ground.
Domi militiaeque, belli domique, in peace and in war, in war and in peace, at home
and in the fleld.
Küri, in the country, is also generally considered a locative form (but rüre meo, on my
farm).
On animi, see 374, K. 3.
2. Appositions are put in the Ablative commonly with in :
Milites Albae constitërunt in urbe opportünä, the soldiers halted at Alba, a cotí-
veniently situated town.
Archiäs Antiochiae natus est celebri quondam urbe, Archias was bom at Anti-
och, once a populous dty.
Neapoli in celeberrimS oppido, at Naples, a very populous towii—in the populous,
celebrated town of Naples.
When urbe, city, oppidö, town, or insula, island, precedes, the preposition is always
emploj'ed :
In urbe Eömä, in the city (of) Rome.
In oppido Neapoli, in the town of Naples.
In insula Samo, in th£. island (of) Samos.
3. Domi takes the Possessive Pronoun in the Genitive :
Marcus Drüsus occisus est domi suae, M. Drusus was Mlled at his own house.
Also domi aliënae, in a strange house.
Metuis ut domi meae cûrëtur diligenter. Tee. You fear that she will not be care¬
fully nursed at my house ; otherwise, in domo casta, in apure house.
In domo Periclis, in the house{h.o\á) of Pericles.
In domo, in the house (not, at home).
213
PREPOSITIONS.
Prepositions.
413. The Prepositions are local adverbs, which serve to define
more narrowly the local ideas of the cases. The only cases that
convey local ideas are the Accusative and Ablative. The Accu¬
sative, as the case of the Direct Object, represents the relation
whither ? the Ablative represents the relations whence ? and
where ?
Remarks.—1. In "Verbs of Motion, the result of the motion is often considered as
Rest in a place (where) :
Pönere in loco, to put in a place.
2. In Verbs of Rest, the Rest is sometimes conceived as the Result of motion
(whither) :
Habëre in potestatem, to have (got) in (to) one's power.
In car car em asservare, to Jceep in jail.
3. Prepositions derive their name from the fact that they are prefixed in composition.
Many of the Latin prepositions are not used in composition, and these may be called im¬
proper prepositions. The prefixes amb- (am- an-), dis (di), red- (re-) sëd- (së-) and vë-
are sometimes called inseparable prepositions.
414. Position of the Preposition. The Preposition generally
precedes the case.
Remarks.—1.Versus, -ward., and tenus, as far as, are postpositive, and so is cum,
with, in combination with the Personal Pronouns and Relative :
Mëcum, with me.
Nec tëcum possum vivere nec sine të. Mart. (391.)
Sëcum, with oneself.
Quocum (also quicum,) with whom (likewise, cum quo).
Quibuscum, with whom, wherewith (also, cum quibus).
2. Other prepositions are postponed chiefly after the relative : quem centra, against
whom ; quos inter, among whom • qu5 ñ.é,from whom.
3. Poets and affected writers are very free in putting the Preposition after its case.
415. The Preposition is often put between the Attribute and
the Case :
Magno cum metû, with great fear.
Whereas the Genitive and other forms of the Attribute and
connecting particles are often put between the Preposition and
its case :
Post vero Sullae victoriam, but after Sulla's victorg.
Remark.—Especially to be noted is the position of per, through (by), in adjurations ;
Lydia die per omnës Të déos or5, Hör. Lydia, ÛU, by all the gods, 1 pray thee.
rREPOSITIONS.
213
416. Rejjetition mid Omission of the Preposition.—"With
different words which stand in the same connection, the Prepo¬
sition is repeated, when the Preposition is emphatic, or the indi¬
vidual words are to be distinguished ; so always after et—et, neo
—nec: et ex urbe et ex agrîs, 'both from (the) city and from (the)
country. Otherwise it is omitted ; so always with que.
Olodius ä Milöne candidato consulätüs jugulätus est. Vbll. Glodius
was killed by Mílo, a candidate for the consulship.
Cimon in eandem invidiam incidit (in) quam pater suus. N"ep. (296).
Discite sânârï per quem ( = per eum per quem) didicistis amäre. Ov.
(403).
Remark.—Several Prepositions, snch as contra, on the other hand, extra, outside,
infra, below, supra, abeme, ultra, beyond, are used also as adverbs without a case :
îliacôs intra mürös pecoâtur et extra. Hob. inside the walls of Ilium sin is
wrought, and outside {too).
Otherwise two Prepositions cannot be used with one case : For and against Scipio,
Pro Scipione et adversus Scipionem. Before and after the battle, ante pugnam et
post earn.
I.—PREPOSITIONS
CONSTRUED
WITH THE
ACCUSATIVE.
417. Prepositions construed with the Accusative are :
ante.
apud.
ad.
adversus.
circum.
circa.
citra.
cis.
ergä.
contra,
inter.
extra.
infra.
intra.
juxta.
ob,
penes.
p5ne,
post and
praeter,
prope.
propter,
per.
secundum.
supra.
versus.
ultra,
trans.
Remarks.—1. To these we may add clam, unknown to, hidden from (c6l-o, OC-Cul-0)
which is commonly used as an adverb secretly and according to some MSS. is construed
with the Ablative as well as with the Accusative.
2. The detailed consideration of the Prepositions belongs to the Dictionary.
Ad, at, to (comp, ad-dc, I put to), up Oircum,
to—opposed to Ab.
Adversus, ) [turned
Adversum, )
íí>], towards,
over against, against.
Ante \over against, facing'], before
(most frequently of time).
Apud (chiefly of persons), at, near,
in the presence of (official), with
(French, chez), at the house of, in
the view of.
Circa \ around, about.
Oirciter, about (seldom of place,
sometimes of time, chiefly with
numerals).
Cis, ) this side, short of, correlative
Oitra, f of ultra.
Contra (=cum + tra), opposite to,
over against, opposed to, against.
Ergä, opposite, towards, seldom of
214
PEEPOSITIONS.
place ; generally of friendly rela¬
tions.
Sxtra, without^ outside of, beside, (op¬
posed to intra).
Infra, beneath, lower down, later.
Inter, between (reaching from one to
the other), among, during.
Intra, within.
Juxta ^adjoining'l, hard by, near, next
to.
Ob {over against, op-posite to), right
before, with a view to, for.
Penes, with = in the hands of.
Penes eum est potestas. The
power lies with him. \to, by.
Per {(¿long), through, by way of, owing
Pone, behind (rare).
Post, behind, after.
Praeter, on before, past, beyond, bo-
sides, contrary to.
Prope, near.
Propter, near, on account of.
Secundum \following\, next to, imme¬
diately behind, after, along, accord¬
ing to.
Supra, above, higher up {earlier).
Trans, on the other side, beyond,
across.
Ultra, on that side, beyond (opp. to
citra).
Versus, -ward (always postponed).
Römam versus, Romeward.
II.—PREPOSITIONS CONSTRUED WITH THE ABLATIVE.
418. Prepositions construed with the Ablative are :
Ä, ab, and abs, off, of, f^om, by (op-Ex, Ë, out of, from (opposed to in),
posed to ad). Before vowels and consonants, ex.
Before vowels and h, ab ; before before consonants ë.
consonants, ë. or ab ; abs, used |^"The use is often conventionally fixed,
chiefly before të, thee. Prae, in front of, side by side with, for
Absque {off), without (antiquated). (preventive cause).
Coram,/ace to face with, in the près- Pro, before, for.
ence of (accidental). Sine, without, opposed to cum.
Cum, with. Tenus {to the extent of), as far as
Dë, down from, from, of= about. (occasionally with the Genitive).
kemakk.—In poetry and later prose palam, operüy, takes the Ablative ; procul, afar,
follows the analogy of ab ; simul, at the same time, that of cum.
III.—PREPOSITIONS CONSTRUED WITH THE ACCUSATIVE
AND ABLATIVE.
419. Prepositions construed with the Accusative and Abla¬
tive are :
In, in.
Sub, under.
Super, over,
Subter, under.
accusative.
ablative.
into, for (purpose),
about (of time),
over, above,
over and above,
under, beneath.
in.
about (of time) [rarely],
about = dë,
over [in prose rarely],
under, beneath [rarely].
INFINITIVE.
215
The Infinitive as a Substantive.
420. The Infinitive is the substantive form of the verb.
Remark.—The Infinitive difi'ers from a verbal substantive, in that it retains the ad¬
verbial attribute, the designations of voice and time, and the regimen of the verb :
Amare, to Ime ; valdë amäre, to love hugely; amârï, to he loved ; amävisse, to have
loved ; amäre aliq^uem, to love a man ; nocëre alicui, to hurt a man.
But the great claim of the Infinitive to be considered a verb lies in the involution of
predicate and subject. Like the finite verb, the Infinitive involves predicate and subject ;
but the subject is indefinite and the predication is dependent.
421. The Infinitive, when it stands alone, involves an indefi¬
nite Accusative Subject, and the Predicate of that Subject is, of
course, in the Accusative Case.
Rëgem esse, To le king,
Bonum esse, To be good.
So in the paradigm of the verb :
Amâtûrum esse. To be about to love.
Remark.—On the Nominative with the Infinitive by Attraction, see 528.
In consequence of this double nature, the Infinitive may be used as a
substantive or as a verb.
422. The Infinitive, as a ISToun, is used regularly in two
cases only—Nominative and Accusative. In the other cases its
place is supplied by the Gerund and the Ablative Supine.
THE INFINITIVE AS A SUBJECT.
423. The Infinitive, as a Subject, is treated as a neuter sub¬
stantive :
Brräre hûmânum est. To err is human {that man should err is human),
Incipere multo est quam impetrare faoilius. Plaut. Begi'n-
ning is much easier (work) than winning.
Non tam turpe fuit vincï quam contendisse decorum est. Ov. (275.)
Bsse bonam facile est quum quod vetet esse remötum est.
Ov. Be a good woman—'tis easy when what would prevent it is distant.
THE INFINITIVE AS AN OBJECT.
424. The Infinitive is used as the Object of Verbs of Creation,
commonly known as Auxiliary Verbs.
These Verbs help the Infinitive into existence.
216
INFINITIVE.
Such verba denote Will, Power, Duty, Habit, Inclination, Resolve, Con¬
tinuance, End, and the like, with their opposites :
Emori cupio. Ter. I want to die.
Cato esse quam v i d ë r ï bonus m ä 1 ë b a t. Sall. Chia preferred
being (good) to seeming good.
Et precor ut p o s s i m tùtius esse miser. Ov. And I pray that 1
may he more safely wretched.
Vincere scis, Hannibalj victoria ûtï nëscïs. Lit. How to
win victory, you know, Hannibal ; how to make use of victory, you know not.
Qui morí didicit, servira dëdidicit. Sen. He who has learned to
die has unlsarned to be a slave.
Maledictis dëterrëre në scribat parat. Ter. He ü preparing
(trying) to frighten (him)/rom writing, by abuse.
So parätus, ready.
Qui mentiri solet, pëjerâre consuëvit. Cic. He who is wont to lie is
accustomed to stoear falsely.
Vulnera quae fëcit dëbuit ipse pati. Ov. The wounds he gave he
should himself have stiffened.
Vereor të laudare praesentem. Cic. I feel a delicacy about praising
you to your face.
Rëligiônum animum nodis exsolvere pergo. LucR. I go on to
loose the spirit from the bonds of superstitious creeds.
Atque ut vivamus vivere dësinimus. Mart. And that we may
live, we cease to live.
So habeo, 1 have (it in my power).
Tantum habeo pollioëri më tibi cumulâtë satisfactûrum. CiC. Sa
much l ean promise that I will give you abundant satisfaction.
Remarks.—1. Notice thatcoepi, I have begun, anddSsino, I cease, hare Passive Per
fects with Passive Infinitives :
Athëniensës undique premi bell5 sunt coeptf. Nep. The Athenians began to feel
the pressure of war oti (from) all sides.
Veterës ôrâtiëuës legi sunt dësitae. Cíe. The old speeches have ceased to be read
When the Passives are really Refiexi ves or Neuter, the active forms may be used.
2. Verbs of Will and Desire take ut as well as the Inf. So regularly opto, I choose.
3. Verbs which denote Hope and Promise take the Accusative and Future Infinitive
(occasionally as in English) : ^
Spëro më hoc adeptürum esse, I hope to {that I shall) obtain this.
Prômittëbat së ventürum esse, he kept promising that he would come {to come).
Doceo, I teach, jubeo, Ibid, veto, 1 forbid, sino, I let', take the Infinitive as a Second
Accusative :
Dionysius në Collum tonsörl committeret t o n d ë r e filias suäs d o c u i t- Cic.
Dionysius, to keep from trusting his neck to a barber, taught his daughters to shave (taught
them shaving).
Ipsejubet mortis të meminisse Deus- Mart. (375.)
Vitae summa brevis spem nos vetat incohare longam. Hor. Life's brief sum
fi/rbids us open (a) long (account with) hope.
GEEUND.
217
Neu Mëdôs sinäs equitäre inultSs- Hob. Nor let the Median ride and ride un-
punished.
4. Poetical Uses op the Infinitive : The poets use the Infinitive as an Object with
great freedom :
1.) After many verbs which are not auxiliary in Prose :
Ardet mere. Ov. He glows {he burns) to rush.
Quid sit futfirum eras fuge quaerere. Hob. What will be to-morrow, fly the gues'
tion.
Farce tuum vStem sceleris damnSre, CupIdS. Ov. (377.)
2.) For the Genitive of the Gerund and Gerundive, see 429, R. 4.
3.) For the Accusative of the Gerundive ;
Quern virum aut hërôa lyrâ vel Scri tibiS sûmës celebrare, Cli5? Hob.
What man or hero wilt thou undertake to celebrate on harp or shrilly flute, 0 Clio? (sûmëS
celebrandum.)
But dare is used with the Infln. even in prose, in familiar phrases : dare bibere, to
give to drink.
4.) For ut, of purpose ; ad with the Gerund, or Gerundive ; or Supine :
Tunc ego : nën ceñios sed ventrem pascere vënl. Mabt. Then I: I'm come to
feed my belly, no£ my eyes.
Semper in Oceanum mittit më quaerere gemmas. Pbof. She is always
sending me to the ocean to look for pearls.
5.) For the Supine in -ü, ad with Gerund, or the like :
Röma capí facilis. Lucan. Rome is easy to be taken, to take (facile capitur).
6.) In fine, the Infinitive is often used because the word or phrase is considered an
equivalent to a verb of creation. In all these points the Post-republican prose follows
poetry more or less closely.
INFINITIVE AS A PREDICATE.
425. The Infinitive, as a verbal Substantive, may be used as
a Predicate after the copula esse, to he, and the like :
Doctô hominï et eruditö vivera est cogitare. Cic. To a learned a/nd
cultivated man to Uve is to think.
Gebunb and Gebundive.
426. The other cases of the Infinitive are supplied by the
Gerund. With Prepositions, the Gerund, and not the Infinitive,
is employed.
Remark.—Of course the Infinitive may be quoted as an abstract notion :
Multum interest inter "dare " et "accipere." Sen. There isa vast difference
between ''Give" and " Receive.'"
Nom. Legere difficile est, reading {to read) is hard to do.
Gen. Ars legendi, the art of reading.
Puer Studiosus est legend, the hoy is zealous of reading.
Dat. Fuer operam dat legende, the hoy devotes himself to reading.
10
218
GEEUNDIVE.
Acc. Puer cupit legere, the hoy ü desirous to read.
Puer pröpensus est ad legendiim, the hoy has a herd towa/rd read*
ing.
Abl. Puer discit legendo, the hoy learns hy reading.
427- As a verbal form, the Gerund, like the Infinitive, takes
the same case as the verb.
Studium obtemperandî legibus. Zeal for ohedience to the laws.
Eemarks.—1. The Gerund is the Substantive of the Gerundive. (243, K. 1.) The sig¬
nification of necessity comes mainly from its use as a predicate. Verbal Nouns are Active
or Passive according to the point of view. (Compare 361.) Worthy of note is the fact
that the leading form of the Greek Active Infinitive is idtimatejj a Present Participle
Passive.
2. Gerundive and Perfect Participle Passive are often translated alike ; but in the one
case the action is progressive or prospective, in the other it is compfö^.
Casare interficiendö Brutus et Cassius patriae lihertâtëm restituera cSnätl
sunt- Èy tM murder of Caesar {by murdeñng Caesar), Brutus and Cassius endeavored to
restore their country''s freedom to her.
Caesare interfectö, Briltus et Cassius patriae Ilbertatem non restituërunt.
-By murdering Caesa/F, Brutus and Cassius did not restore their country''s freedom to her.
428. Gerundive for Gerund.—Instead of the Gerund, with
ail Accusative Object, the object is generally put in the case of
the Gerund, with the Gerundive as an Attribute.
Gen. Plâcandî Dei, of appeasing God.
Dat. Placando Deo, for appeasing God.
Abl. Placando Deo, hy appeasing God.
In the model period this construction is invariably employed with Pre¬
positions.
Ad pläcandös De5s, for appeasing the gods.
In plâcandïs Diis, in appeasing the gods.
Eemarks.—1. It is impossible to make a distinction between the Gerund and the
Gerundive Form. They are often used side by side, where there can be no différence.
Liv. xxi. 5; xxv. 40; xxviii. 87; xxxi. 26. The p^reference foi;^e^Ger^ndive is of a
piece with the use of the Perf. Pass. Participle in preference to an Abstract Nonn.
(357, E. 2.)
2. Neuter Adjectives and Pronouns are not attracted: studlum agendî allquld,
desire of doing something ; cupiditäs plûra habendi, greed for having more. But when
the Neuter Adjective has become a substantive (195, E. 2), the Gerundive form may be
used : modus investigandi vëri, the method of investigating tho truth.
3. The Gerundive can be formed only from Transitive Verbs, like other passives. (243,
E. 2.) Hence the impersonal form must be used for all verbs that do not take the
Accusative,but with such verbs prepositions are rarely found.
Ad parendum Deo,/or Obeying God.
Exceptions.—"flftendus, to be used; fruendus, to be enjoyed; potiendus, to bepoS'
sessed ; fungendus, to be discharged ; vescendus, to be eaten (405) ; which, however, are
GEEUND.
219
used only * in the oblique cases. Further, medendus, to he healed; paenitendus, to he
regretted.
Expetuntur divitiae ad perfruendas voluptâtës. Cío. Biches are sought for the
enjoyment of pleasures. But :
Ütendum est aetata, cito pede läbitur aetäs. Ov. Life's season is to he enjoyed.,
swift-footed glides that season.
The Impersonal Nominative with the Accus, is rare and antiquated :
Aeternas quoniam paenäs in morte timendum est- Luck. Since we must fear
eternal punishments in death.
GENITIVE OF THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.
429. The Grenitiye of the Gerund and Gerundive is used
chiefly after substantives and adjectives which require a com¬
plement :
Sapieutia ars vivendi putanda est. CiC. Philosophy is to be considered
the art of limng.
Et propter vitam vivendi perdere causas. Juv. And on account of
life, to lose the reasons for living.
Raucaque garrulitäs studiumque immäne loquendi. Ov. And hoarse
chattiness, and a monstrous love of talking.
Triste est ipsum nomen carendi. CiC. Dismal is the mere word
"carere" {go without).
Non est placandi spes mihi nulla Dei. Ov. I am not without hope of
appeasing God.
Ignorant cupidi maledicendi plus invidiam quam convicium posse.
Quint. Those who are eager to abuse know not that envy has more power
than billingsgate.
Titus equitandi peritissimus fuit. SuBT. Titus was exceedingly skillful
in riding.
Neuter sm prötegendi corporis memor erat. Lrv. Neither thought of
shielding his own body.
Qui hie mos obsidendi vias et virös aliënos appellandi ? Lrv. What
sort of way is this of blocking up the streets and calling upon other womerCs
husbands ?
Summa ëlûdendi oocäsio est mihi nunc senës. Ter. I have a tip-top
chance to fool the old chaps now.
Remarks.—1. As mei, tui, sui, nôstri, vestri, are, in their origin, neuter singulars,
from meum, my being ; tuum, thy being ; suum, on^s being, etc., the Gerundive is put
in the same form : conservandí sui, of preserving themselves ; vestri adhortandi, of
exhorting you, and no regard is had to number or gender.
Copia placandi sit modo parva tui. Ov. Let (me) only have a slight chance of try¬
ing to appease you (feminine).
Similar constructions are also found with other words : exemplorum ëligendî po-
testas, power of choosing examples.
* Or chiefly. In Cic. Fin. ], 1, 3, fruenda (Nom.) is used for the sake of paranda.
230
GERUND.
Agitur utrum AntoniS facultSs dëtur agrSram suis latrOnibus condönandl.
Cic. The question is whether Antony shall he empowered to give away lands to his pet
highwaymen.
2. Very common is causä (with the Gen. of Gerund and Gerundive),/or the sake of,
to express design : d 015 r u m effugiendSrum causa, for the sake of escaping suffer¬
ings ; but sometimes the Genitive alone is used :
Lepidus arma cSpit llbertätis subverteudae. Sall. Lepidus took up arms as a
matter of (for the purpose of) subverting freedom.
More commonly ad, rarely ob. See 433.
Esse with this Genitive may be translated by serve to.
Omnia discrimina tâlia concordiae minuendae sunt- Liv. All such distinctions
are matters of (belong to) the diminishing of concord (serve to diminish concord).
Comp. Caes. B. G. v. 8: Jiâvës quäs sul quisque commodî fëcerat. Ships which
each one had (had) made (as a matter) of personal convenience.
3. Tempus est, it is (high) time ; consilium est, it is my (yonr, \à^plan; and a few
others, may be used with the Infinitive : Tempus abire tibi est, It is time for you to go
away.
But when tempus is used in the sense of season ("a time to weep and a time to
laugh"), the Gerund, or Gerundive, is retained :
Lysander tempus rei gerendae n5u dimisit. Nbp, Lysander did not let the oppor¬
tunity of action slip.
4. The poets are very free in the use of the Infinitive for the Genitive of the Gerund,
inasmuch as they construe the Adjective or Substantive like the Cognate Verh.
(At) sëcûra quiës et nëscia fallero (=quae nësciat fallero) vita. Yebo.
Quiet without a care, and a life that knoweth not hoio to disappmnt (ignorant of disap¬
pointment).
DATIVE OF THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.
430. The Dative of the Gerund and Gerundive is used
chiefly after words which imply capacity and adaptation:
Aqua nitrosa ûtilis est bibendô. Plin. Alkaline water is good for
drinking {to drink).
Lignum äridum materia est idónea ëUciendîs ignibus. Sen. Dry
wood is a fit substance for striking fire (drawing out sparks).
Referundae ego habeo linguam nätam grätiae. Flaut. I have a
tongue thafs born for showing thankfulness.
Rarer is the Dative in combination with the Accusative.
Consul placandis dis dat operam. Lrv. The consul does his endeavor to
appease the gods.
Especially to be noticed is the Dative with esse, and in names
of Boards :
Solvendo cîvitâtës nón erant. CiC. The communities were not equal to
(ready for) payment (were not solvent) ^
Sapiens virës suas novit, soit së esse onerl ferendo. Sen. The wise
man is acquainted with his own strength ; he knows thai he is (equal) to bear¬
ing the burden.
GBEUND.
231
Decemvir! legibus scrîbundis, Decemvvrs for {charged witJi) drawing up
laws.
Eemark.—Later writers treat the Dative of the Gerund or Gerundive as if equivalent
to ad and the Accusative of Gerund or Gerundive.
ACCUSATIVE OF THE GERUNDIVE.
431. The Gerundive is used in the Accusative of the Object
to be Effected, after such Verbs as Giving and Taking, Sending
and Leaving. (Factitive Predicate.)
Divit! homini id aurum servandum dedit. Flaut. He gave that gold
to a rich man to keep.
Conon mûrSs reficiendös curat. Nep. Conon has the walls r^milt.
Patriam dîripiendam relinquimus. Cic. We leave our country to he
plundered.
Oarvilius aedem faciendam locavit. Lrv. Carvilius let the (contract of)
huilding the temple.
Of course the Passive form has the Nominative :
Filius Philipp! Demetrius ad patrem redücendus lëgâtls datus est.
Lrv. Th^ son of Philip, Demetrius, was given to the envoys to he taken haxk to
his father.
ABLATIVE OF THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.
482. The Ablative of the Gerund or Gerundive is used as
the Ablative of Means and Cause, seldom as the Ablative of
Manner or Circumstance.
Ünus homd n5b!s cimctandö restituit rem. Ennius. One man hy
lingering raised our cause again.
Cède repugnant!, cêdendè victor abibis. Ov. Yield to her when she
resists ; youHl come off victor hy yielding.
Quid digitos opus est graphiô lassäre tenendö 7 Ov. (390, R.)
Dxercendö quotîdië milite hostem opperiëbâtur. Liv. Drilling the
soldiers daily he waited for the enemy.
Occasionally with the Comparative.
PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.
433. The Accusative of the Gerund and Gerundive takes the
prepositions ad and inter, seldom ante, circa, in, ob.
Nulla rës tantum ad dicendum proficit quantum scriptio. Cic. Noth¬
ing is as profitable for speaking as writing.
SUPINE.
Atticus philosophörum praeceptîs ad vîtam agendam non ad osten¬
tation em ûtëbâtur. Nep. Atticus made use of the precepts of philosophers
for the conduct of life, not for display.
Inter spoliandum corpus hostis exspiravit. Liv. While in the act of
stripping the body of the enemy he gave up the ghost.
434. The Ablative of the Gerund and Gerundive takes the
prepositions ah, de, ex, often in, seldom cum and pro, and sine
never.
Prohibenda maxime est ira in puniendo. Cic. Especially to he for¬
bidden is anger in punishing.
Brutus in lîberandâ patria est interfectus. CiC. Brutus was slain in
the effort to free his country.
Philosoph! in iis ipsis libris quos scribunt d§ contemnendä gloria sua
nomina inscrîbunt. CiC. (384, R. 1.)
Bx discendö capimus voluptatem. Cic. We receive pleasure from lea/m-
ing.
Supine.
435. The Supine is a Verbal Noun, which appears only in
the Accusative and Ablative cases.
THE ACCUSATIVE SUPINE.
436. The Accusative Supine (Supine in -urn) is used chiefly
after Verbs of Motion :
Gallî gallïnâceî cum sole eunt cubitiun. Plin. Cocks go to roost at
sunset.
Spectatum veniunt, veniunt spectentur ut ipsae. Ov. They come to
see the show, they come to he themselves a show.
Stultitia est vënâtum dücere in'^^tâs canës. plaut. 'Tis foolishness to
take unwilling dogs a-hunting.
Hostis est uxor invita quae ad virum nup turn datur. Plaut.
(844, R. 1.)
Rexärks.—1. The Accusative Supine may take an object, but the construction is not
very common :
Hannibal patriam defensum (more usual : ad dëfendendam patriam) revocatus
est- Nep. Hannibal was recalled to defend his country.
2. Especially common is the usi of the Supine after the verb ire, to go :
Cür të is perditum 1 Ter. Why are you going to ruin yourself?
Turpissimi viri bonorum prasmia ëreptum eunt. Sall. The scoundrels are
going to take away by force the rewards of their betters.
The Future Infinitive Passive is actually made up of the Passive Infinitive of ire, to
go, iri, and the Supine :
PARTICIPLE.
223
Sîcaot reum äamnätum îri. They say that the defendant vnU be condemned^ {that
•people are going (ïrï from itur, 199, E. 1.), that there is a movement, to condemn the accused).
The consciousness of this is lost, as is shown by the Nominative (528).
Reus damnätum îri vidëbâtur, Quint. The accused seemed to be about to be con¬
demned.
THE ABLATIVE SUPINE.
437. The Ablative Supine (Supine in -ü) is used chiefly with
Adjectives, as the Ablative of the Point of View From Which :
Mîrâbile dictû, Wonderful {in the telling) to tell, vísü, to behold.
H5c dictû quam rë facilius est. Liv. This is easier in the saying than
in the fact {easier said than done).
Remakks.—1. The use of the Ablative Supine is confined to a few verbs, chiefly:,
dlctli, to tell ; factü, to do ; audîtû, to hear ; vîsû, to see ; cognitü, to know. Authors
vary much. The adjectives generally denote Ease or Difficulty, Pleasure or Displeasure,
Right or Wrong.
2. Ad, with the Gerundive, is often used instead :
Cibus facillimus ad concoqueiiduni,/ooíí (that is) very easy to digest.
The Infinitive, faciiis concoqui, is poetical. Common is ladle concoquitur.
3. The local use of the Ablative Supine is very rare :
Vilicus primus cubitü surgat, postrgmus cubitum eat. Cato. The steward
must be the first to^et out of bed, the last to go to bed.
4. The Supine in -ü never takes an object.
Participle.
438. The Participle may be used as a Substantive, but even
then generally retains something of its predicative nature.
Nihil est magnum somnianti. Cic. Nothing is great to a dreamer {to a
man, when he is dreaming).
Regia, crëde mihi, res est succurrere 1 a p s î s. Ov. It is a kingly
thing, believe me {to run to catch those who have slipped), to succor the fallen.
Remarks.—1. The Attribute of the Participle, employed as a Substantive, is gene¬
rally in the adverbial form : rectë facta, right actions ; facëtë dictum, a witty remark.
2. Especially to be noted is the Ablative of the Participle without a Substantive :
audits, it having been heard ; comparto, it having been found out.
So also an adjective used predicatively : the Substantive is commonly supplied by a
sentence. The construction is of limited use.
Alexander audito Dârëum mövisse ab Ecbatanis fugientem insequi pergit.
Curt. Alexander, (it) having tpeen) heard that Darius had decamped from Ecbatana, pro¬
ceeds to follow him up on his flight.
439. The Participle, as an Adjective, often modifies its ver¬
bal nature, so as to be characteristic :
Rpaminöndäs erat temporibus sapienter û t e n s, Epaminondab was a
man, who made, to make, wise use of opportunities (= is qui ûterëtur).
234
NEGATIVE ADVERBS.
Remark.—Especial attention is called to the parallelism of the Participle or Adjective
with the Relative and Subjunctive ;
RSs parva dictü, sed quae studiís in magnum certamen excesserit. Ltv. A
small thing to mention, but one which, by the excitement of the parties, termmated in a great
contest.
Adverb.
440. 1. The Predicate may be qualified by an Adverb.
2. Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs, and
sometimes substantives, when they express or imply verbal or
adjective relations :
Male vivit, Ad live» ill; bene est, is well; ferë omnês, almost all;
nimis saepe, too often ; admodum adulescens, a mere youth, quite a ytmth ;
late rex, Yero, wide-ruling ; bis consul, twice consul; duo simul bella,
two simultaneous wars.
Remark.—The form of the Adverb does not admit of any further inflection, and there¬
fore the Adverb requires no rules of Syntax except as to its position.
441. Position of the Advert.—Adverbs are commonly put
next to their verb, and before it when it ends the sentence, and
immediately before their adjective or adverb.
Injuste facit, he acts unjustly.
Admodum puloher, handsome to a degree, very handsome.
Valde diligenter, very carefully.
Exceptions occur chiefly in rhetorical passages, in which great stress is
laid on the Adverb, or in poetry :
îram bene Ennius initium dixit insaniae, Well did Ennius call anger
the beginning of madness.
Vixit dum vixit bene. Ter. He lived while he lived (and lived)
well.
One class of Adverbs demands special notice—the Negatives.
NEGATIVE ADVERBS.
442. There are two original negatives in Latin, Né and Hand
(haut, hau). From né is derived non (në-oinom (ünum), no-wJiit,
not). Né is used chiefly in compounds, or with the Imperative
and Optative Subjunctive. The old use appears in né—quidem.
Non is used with the Indicative and Potential Subjunctive;
hand, mainly with Adjectives and Adverbs.
NEGATIVES.
225
NEGATIVE OF THE INDICATIVE.
443. 1. The regular Negative of the Indicative and of the
Potential Subjunctive is non, the absolute not.
Quern amat, amat ; quern non amat, non amat, Whom tie likes^ he likes ;
whom he does not like, he does not like.
Non ausim, I should not venture.
Remark.—Non as the emphatic, specific negative may negative anything. (See 263,R.)
2. Haud in model prose is used chiefly with Adjectives and
Adverbs : haud magnus, not great ; haud male, not hadly.
Haud scio (Hauscio), in haud scio an, is the chief exception
(459, E.)
In antitheses non is used, and not haud :
Non est vivare sed valere vita. Martial. Not living, hut being well, is
life.
Remark.—Other negative expressions are: haudquSquam, nSquSqnam, neuti-
quam, by no means; nihil, nothing. (" Adam, with such counsel nothing swayed.") On
nullus, see 804, R. 2.
444. Subdivision of the Negative.—A general negative may
be subdivided by neque—neque, as well as by aut—aut, or
strengthened by nê—quidem, not even :
Nihil unquam neque insolens neque glöriösum ex ore Timo-
leontis pröcessit. Nef. Nothing insolent or boastful ever came out of the
mouth of Timoleon.
Consciorum nemo aut latuit aut fugit. Lrv. Of the accomplices no one
either hid or fled.
Nunquam Scîpiônem nê minima quidem rê offendi. CiO. I never
wounded Scipiots feelings, no, not even in the slightest matter.
(" I will give no thousand crowns wáíAar."—Shakes.)
Remark.—In the same way nego, I say no, is continued by neque—neque (nec—
nec) :
Negant nec virtûtës nec vitia crëscere. Cic. They deny that either virtues or vices
increase.
445. Negative Combinations.—In English, we say either no
one ever, or, never any one ; nothing ever, or, never anything ; in
Latin, the former turn is invariably used : nömo unquam, no one
ever :
Verres nihil unquam fecit sine aliquö .quaestû. CiC. Yerres
never did anything without some profit or other.
Remark.—iVo one yet is nondum quisquam.
10*
226
NEGATIVES.
446. Negó (/ say no, I deny) is commonly used instead of
dice non, I say—not.
Negant quemquam virum bonum esse nisi sapientem. Cic. Tliey say
that no one is a good man except the sage.
Remark.—The positive (ajo, I say) is sometimes to be supplied for a subsequent
clause. Caes. B. G. i. 19. The same thing happens with the other negatives.
447. The Negative naturally belongs to the Predicate, and
usually stands immediately before it, but may be placed before
any emphatic word or combination of words :
Potes non revertí. Sen. Possibly you may not return.
N5n potes revertí, You cannot possibly return.
Saepe viri fallunt ; tenerae non saepe puellae. Ov. Often do men
deceive ; soft-hearted maidens not often.
Non omnis aetäs, Lüde, lûdô convenit. Plaut. (346.)
Remarks.—1. As the Copula esse, to he., is, strictly speaking, a Predicate, the Nega¬
tive generally precedes it, contrary to the English idiom, except in contrasts. The differ¬
ence in position can often be brought out only by stress of voice : fglix non erat, Ai
wasn't happy ; non fëlix erat, he was not happy., he was par prom happy.
2. Në—quidem bestrides the emphatic word or emphatic group (444).
*
448. Two negatives in the same sentence destroy one
another, and make an aflSrmative :
Non nego, I do not deny (/ admit).
Remarks.—1. Non possum non, I cannot but., (J must).
Qui mortem in malls ponit non potest eam nën timëre- Cíe. He who classes
death among misfortunes cannot but {must) fear it.
2. The double Negative is often stronger than the opposite Positive :
Non indoctus, a highly-educated man : non sum nëscius, I am well aware.
Non indecoro pulvere sordidî. Hör. Swart (soiled) with (no dis)honorable dust.
Non ignara malí miserîs succurrere disco- Vero. Not unacquainted (= but too
well acquainted) xoith misfmlune, I learn to succor the wretched.
This figure, which has a very wide application, is called LîtotëS {AlTÓTrji)'» or
Tinder statement.
3. It follows from R. 2. that nec non is not simply equivalent to et, and: nee belongs
to the sentence, non to the particular word :
Nec li5c Zëno non vidit. Cic. Nor did Zeno fail to see this.
4. Of especial importance is the position of the Negative in the following combina-
POSITION OF THE NEGATIVE.
tious ;
Indefinite Affirmative.
nönnihil, somewhat ;
nënnëmo, some one, some i
General Affirmative.
nonnulli, some people ;
nönnunquam, sometimes ;
nonnusquam, somewhere;
nihil nSn, every thing ;
nëmo non, everybody ;
nulli non, all ;
nunquam non, always;
nusquam nSn, everywhere.
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
227
In ipsa curia nônnëmo hostis est- Cic. In the senate-house itself there are enemies
(nemo non hostis est, everybody is an enemy).
Non est pläcandl spës mihi nulla Dei- Ov. 1 have some hope of appeasing
God (nulla spës non est, I have every Jwpe).
Nëmo non didicisse mävult quam disoere. Quint. Everybody prefers having
learned to learning.
negative of the imperative.
449. Nê is the Negative of the Imperative and of the Opta¬
tive Subjunctive :
Ne cede mails. Verg. , Yield not thou to misfortunes.
Ne transiens Hiberum. Lrv. Do not cross the Ebro
Ne vïvam, May I cease to live.
Remabk.—The Negative n5n is sometimes used instead of në, when contrast is
emphasized ;
Aut nSn tentârîs aut perfice. Ov. Either attempt not., or achieve.
450. Nê is continued by neve or neu:
illam vendas neu më perdäs hominem amantem. Flaut. Don't
sell her, and don't ruin me, a fellow in love.
Incomplete Sentence.
Interrogative Sentences.
451. An interrogative sentence is necessarily incomplete.
The answer is the complement.
452. A question may relate :
1. To the existence or non-existence of the Predicate: Pre¬
dicate Question:
Vivitne pater ? Is my father alive 1
II. To some undetermined integrant of the sentence, such as
Subject, Object, Adjective, Adverbial modifier : Nominal Ques¬
tion :
Quis est ? Who is it ? Quid ais ? What do you say ? Qui hie mos ?
What sort of way is this ? Cur non discëdis ? Why do you not depart ?
For a list of Interrogative Pronouns see 104,
Remarks.—1. The second class requires no rules except as to mood (464).
2. The form of the question is often used to imply a negative opinion on the part of
the speaker.
228 INTEKROGATIVE SENTENCES.
Quid interest inter perjurum et mendäcem î Cíe. What is the difference between
a perjured man and a liar ?
All questions of this kind are caiied Rhetorical.
453. Interrogative sentences are divided into simple and
compound (disjunctive). Am I ? (simple) ; Am I, or am I not ?
(disjunctive).
Remark.—Strictly speaking, only the simple interrogative sentence belongs to this
section ; but for the sake of completeness, the whole subject will be treated here.
454. Interrogative sentences are further divided into direct
and indirect, or independent and dependent. Am 19 (direct) ;
He asks whether I am (indirect).
DIRECT SIMPLE QUESTIONS.
455. Direct simple questions sometimes have no interrogative
sign. Such questions are chiefly passionate in their character,
and serve to express Astonishment, Blame, Disgust.
Infëlïx est Fabricius quod rûs suum fodit ? Sen. Fabricius is unhappy
because he digs his own field? (Impossible !)
Heus, inquit, linguam vis meam praeclûdere? Phaedr. Ho! ho!
quoth he, you wish to shut my mouth, you do? (You shall not.)
Quod dicis të nön iecisse, ego fëci ? Quint. Because you say you did
not do it, I did? (Absurd !)
REMARK.—When several questions follow in immediate succession, only the first gene¬
rally takes the Interrogative Pronoun, or -ne. Repeated questioning is passionate.
456. Interrogative Particles.—-Ne (enclitic) is always ap¬
pended to the emphatic word, and generally serves to denote a
question, without indicating the expectation of the speaker ;
Omnisne pecunia soluta est ? Cic. Is KUu the money paid?
Fstne omnis pecunia soluta ? Is all the money paid?
Remarks.—1. -Ne is originally a negative. Questioning a negative leans to the
affirmative ; and -ne is not always strictly impartial.
2. -Ne sometimes cuts off a preceding -s, and shortens the long vowel of the same, and
often drops its own e. Viden 1 'SisesiTûnî Tou?
457. Nönne expects the answer Ye^ :
Nonne meministî ? CiC. Do you not remember?
Nönne is generôsissimus qui optimus ? Quint. Is he not the truest
gentleman who is the best man ?
So the other negatives with -ne : nSmSne, nihilne, and the like.
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
229
458. Nuin expects the answer No :
Num quis hïc alius praeter më atque të ? Nëmo est. Plaut. Is any
body here besides you and me ? JVb.
Ntun tibi quum faucës ûrit sitis, aurea quaeris pöcula ? Hob. WTien
thirst burns your throat for you, do you ask for golden cups ? [No.]
459. An (or) belongs to the second part of a disjunctive
question.
Sometimes, however, the first part of the disjunctive question is sup¬
pressed, or rather involved. The second alternative with an serves to
urge the acceptance of the positive or negative proposition involved in the
preceding statement. This abrupt form of question {or, then) is of frequent
use in Remonstrance, Expostulation, Surprise, and Irony.
Non manum abstinës ? An tibi jam mavis cerebrum dispergam hie ?
Ter. Are you not going to keep your hands off? Or would you rather hare
me scatter your brains oner the place now ?
(Vir custödit absens.) {My husband k^eps guard, thmigh absent.)
{Is it not so ?) An nësoïs longâs rëgibus esse manûs ? Ov. Or per¬
haps you do not know {you do not know, then) that kings haw long hands
(arms).
Remark.—Especially to be noted, In connection with an, are the phrases, nëscio an,
hand scio an, I do not know but; dubito an, I doubt, 1 doubt but —I am inclined to
think ; which give a modest affirmation. Negative particles, added to these expressions,
give a mild negation :
Hand scio an ita sit, Cic. I do not know but it is so.
Hand scio an nulla senectus beatior esse possit. Cic. I do not know but it
is impossible for any old age to be happier.
Dubito an Thrasybûlum prîmum omnium ponam. Nbp. 1 doubt but I shmdd
( =I am inclined to think I should) put Thrasybulus first of all.
So forsitan, perhaps, regularly with the Potential Subjunctive :
Forsitan et FriamI f u e r i n t quae fata requIrSs. Vers. Perhaps you may
ask what was the fate of Priam, too.
In later Latin an is used as a simple interrogative, and nSscio an = nSscio num.
DIRECT DISJUNCTIVE QUESTIONS.
460. Direct Disjunctive Questions have the following forms :
First Clause.
Second and Subsequent Clauses.
utrum, whether,
utnunne,
-ne,
an, (anne), or
an,
an,
an (anne),
ne (chiefly in indirect questions).
230
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
U t r u m nêscîs quam alte ascenderïs, a n id pro nihilo habes ? Cic.
Are you not aware how high you have mounted, or do you count that as
nothing ?
Vösne Lûcium Domitium an yos Lucius Lomitius dêseruit?
Caes. Have you deserted Lucius Domitius, or has Lucius Domitius deserted
youj
Lloquar an sileam ? Verg. Shall I speak, or hold my peace ?
Utrum h5c tü parum meministî, an ego non satis inteUe^, an
mütästi sententiam ? Cic. Do you not remember this, or did I misunder¬
stand you, or have you changed your view 1
Sunt haec tua verba necne ? Cic. Are these your words, or no ?
Remark.—Aut (or), in questions, is not to be confounded with an. Aut gives another
part of a simple question, or another form of it (or in other words).
Voiuptas melioremne efS.cit aut laudäbiliörem virum ? Cic. Does pleasure make
a better or more praiseworthy man f (Answer : nether 1) An exdudes, aut extends.
Tibi ego an tû mihi servus es ? Plaut. Am I slave to you or you to me—which ?
(The MS. reading aut would expect the answer: neither).
461. In direct questions, or not is annon, rarely necne; in
indirect, necne, rarely annon :
I s n e est quem quaero, annon? Is that the man I am looking for, or
not?
Sitque memor nSstti necne, referte mihi. Oy. (195, R. 7.)
Remark.—TTtrum is sometimes used with the suppression of the second clause fox
whether orno?
INDIRECT QUESTIONS.
462. Indirect questions have the same particles as the
direct, with the following modifications :
1. Num loses its negative force, and becomes simply whether :
Speculârï jussi sunt num sollicitäti animî sociörum essent. Liv.
They were ordered to spy out whether the allies had been tampered with.
2. Si, if, is used for whether, chiefly after verbs and sentences
implying trial :
Tentäta res est si prim5 impetû capi Ardea posset. Lrv. An attempt
was made (ia case, in hopes that, to see) if Ardea could be taken by a dash
(coup-de-main). Compare O si (254).
3. An is sometimes used for num and ne, but never in model
prose :
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
231
Consuluit deinde Alexander a n tötius orbis Imperium sibi destina-
ret pater. Curt. Alexander then asked the oracle whether his father deS'
tined for him the empire of the whole world.
4. The form ne is found chiefly in the indirect ques¬
tion :
Tarqulnius Prïscï Tarquinii regis filius nepösne fuerit parum liquet.
Lrv. Whether Tarquin was the son or grandson of king Tarquin the Elder,
does not appear.
Remabk.—The form ne—ne is poetical.
SUMMAKY OF DIRECT AND INDIRECT DISJUNCTIVE
QUESTIONS.
463. Direct;
Is the last syllaMe short or long ?
Postrema syllaba u t r u m brevis est a n longa ?
brevisne est an longa?
Indirect :
In a rerse it makes no difference whether the last syllable be short or lang :
ut rum postrema syllaba brevis sit an
longa.
In versu nihil rëfert -( postrema syllaba brevis ne sit an longa.
postrema syllaba brevis a n longa sit. Cic.
postrema syllaba brevis sit longa n e.
Moods in Interrogative Sentences.
I. IN DIRECT QUESTIONS.
464. The Mood of the question is the Mood of the expected
or anticipated answer.
465. Indicative questions expect an Indicative answer, when
the question is genuine.
A. Quis homo est ? B. Ego sum. Ter. Who is that? It is I
A. Vivitne [pater ?] B. Vivum liquimus. Plaut. Is father alive ? We
left him alive.
466. Indicative questions anticipate an Indicative answer
with the negative when the question is rhetorical.
232
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
Quis paupertätem n5n extimescit ? Cic. Who does not dread poverty f
Remark.—NSnne and num in the direct question are really rhetorical. With nönne
a negative answer is anticipated to a negative, hence the affirmative character. Compare
further, 452, R. 2.
467. Subjunctive questions expect Imperative or anticipate
Potential answers. Subjunctive questions expect Imperative
answers, chiefly in the First Person.
A. Abeam ? B. Abi. Plaut. Shall I go away ? Go.
Remark.—So in the representative of the First Person in dependent discourse. (258.)
468. The Subjunctive is used in rhetorical questions, which
imply a negative opinion on the part of the speaker:
Quis hoc credat? Who would believe this? [No one.] Quid faceret
aliud ? What else was he to do ? [Nothing.]
Quis tulerit Gracchos de seditiöne querentês ? Juv. (251.)
Remark.—On the Exclamatory Question see 534, 560.
II. IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS.
469. The Dependent Interrogative is always in the Subjunc¬
tive.
The Subjunctive may represent the Indicative :
Ccnsîderâbimus quid fëcerit (Ind. fecit), qtiid faciat (Ind. facit), quid
facturus sit (Ind. faciet or factûrus est). Cic. We will consider what he
has done, what Tie is doing., what he is going to do [will do).
Epaminondas quaesïvit salvusne esset clipeus. CiC. Epaminondas
asked whether his shield was safe. (Salvusne est ?)
The Subjunctive may be original :
Ipse dccet quid agam (210) ; fas est et ab hoste dccërî. Oy. (Quid
agam, what I am to do ; not, what I am doing). See 258.
Remarks.—1. When the leading verb is disconnected from the interrogative, the In¬
dicative form is employed :
So often with die, say, vidS, see, quaere, ask. Die, quid est Î Tell me, what is it?
(Die quid sit, Tell me what it is.)
Quin tii ünö verbo die : quid est quod mS velis ? Ter. Won't you tell me in one
word : What is it you want of me ?
Die mihi quid feci nisi non sapienter amavi. Ov. 2M me what have I done, save
that I have loved unwisely.
The early poets go even further than this.
2. Nëscio quis, nëscio quid, nëscio qui, nëscio quod, I know not who, what, which,
are used exactly as indefinite pronouns, and have no effect on the construction.
lîiTTEEEOGATIVE SENTENCES.
233
So also, nëscio quômodo, I know not hôtù = strangely ; and mirum quantum, it (is)
marrello^is how much = wondei;fu2ly, are used as adverbs :
Mirum quantum prSfuit ad concordiam. Lrv. It served wonderfully to promote
harmony.
Nëscio quid majus näscitur Iliade. Pkop. Something., I know not what., is rising
greater than the Iliad.
Nëscio quo pacto vol magis hominës juvat gloria lata quam magna. Plin. Ep.
Somehow or other, people are even more charmed to have a wide-spread reputation than a
grand one.
The position excludes a conscious ellipsis of the Subjunctive.
3. The Eelative has the same form as the Interrogative quis ? except in the Nom. Sing. ;
hence the importance of distinguishing between them in dependent sentences. The in¬
terrogative depends on the leading verb, the relative belongs to the antecedent. (612,
R.2.)
Interrogative ; die quid rogem. Tell me what it is I am asking.
Relative : die quod rogo. Ter. Tell me that which I am asking (the answer to
my question).
The relative is not unfrequently used where we should expect the interrogative, espe¬
cially when the facts of the case are to be emphasized :
Dicam quod sentio, I will tell you my real opinion.
Incorporated relatives are not to be confounded with interrogatives :
Quaerâmus ubi (= ibi ubi) maleficium in venir! potest. Cic. Let us look for the
misde.ed in the place when it can he found.
At this point let the beginner review and take up omitted sections.
PECULIARITIES OF INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
470. The subject of the dependent clause is often treated
as the object of the leading clause (Prolépsls) :
Nôstî Marcellum quam tardus sit. Cic. You know Marcellus^ what a
slow creature he is.
471. Contrary to our idiom, the interrogative is often used in
participial clauses. In English, the participle and verb change
places, and a causal sentence becomes final or consecutive.
Quam ütilitätem potentes scire cupimus illa quae occulta nobis sunt ?
Cic. What advantage do we seek when we desire to know those things which
a/re hidden from us ?
Solon PisistratS tyrannô quaerenti qua tandem spe fretus sibi
tam audaciter resisteret respondisse dicitur, senectûte. Sen. Solon,
to Pisistratus the usurper, asking him (= "when Pisistratus the usurper
asked him) on what earthly hope relying {= on what hope he relied that)
he resisted him so holdly, is said to have answered " old age."
472. Final sentences (sentences of Design) are used in ques¬
tions more freely than in English :
234
syntax op the compound sentence.
Sesstun it praetor. Quid ut jüdicetur.? Cic. The judge is going to take
his seat. What is to be adjudged f {To adjudge what?)
remauk. The Latin language goes further than the English'in combining interroga¬
tive words in the same clause "
YES AND NO.
473. Yes is represented :
1. By sane, (literally) soundly, sane quidem, yes indeed, etiam, eiien (so),
vërô, of a truth, ita, so, omninö, by all means, certe, surely, for cer¬
tain, admodum, to a degree.
2. By censeo, I think so.
3. By repeating the emphatic word either with or without confirmatory
particles :
Estisne ? Sumus. Are you ? We are.
Dasne ? Do sane. Do y&a grant? I do indeed.
No is represented :
1. By non, non vërô, non ita, minimë, by no mean», nihil, nothing^
minimë vërô, nihil sânë, nihil minus.
2. By repeating the emphatic word with the negative :
Non ïrâta es ? Non sum îrâta, Tou are not angry ? I am not.
Yea or Nay : Inuno conveys a correction and either removes a doubt
or heightens a previous statement—yes indeed, nay rather.
Dcquid placeant aedës më rogäs ? Inuno. Plaut. Do I like the house,
you ask me ? Yes, indeed.
Causa igitur non bona est? Immo optima. Gic. The cause, then, is a
bad one ? Nay, it is an excellent one.
remark.—Yes, for, and no, for, are often expressed simply by nam and enlm :
Turn Antonius : Herí e n i m, inquit, hoc mihi prSposueram. Cic. Then quoth
Antony : Yes, for I had proposed this to myself yesterday.
SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.
474. 1. A compound sentence is one in which the necessary
parts of the sentence occur more than once, one which consists
of two or more clauses.
2. Coordination is that arrangement of the sentence accord¬
ing to which the different clauses are merely placed side by
side.
3. Subordination is that arrangement of the sentence accord¬
ing to which one clause depends on the other.
SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.
235
He hecame poor and we became rich, is a coordinate sentence.
He became poor that ice might be rich, is a subordinate sen¬
tence.
4. The sentence which is modified is called the Principal
Clause, that which modifies is called the Subordinate Clause.
" He became poor " is the Principal Clause, " that we might be
rich " is the Subordinate Clause.
Remakk.—Logical dependence and grammatical dependence are not to be confounded.
In the conditional sentence, vivam SÎ vivet, foi rm live if she lives, my living depends
on her living ; yet " vivam " is the principal, " si vivet " the subordinate clause. It
is the dependence of the introductory particle that determines the grammatical relation.
Coordination.
475. Coordinate sentences are divided into various classes,
according to the particles by which the separate clauses are
bound together.
Remakk.—Co-ordinate sentences often dispense with conjunctions (^Asyndeton),
Then the connection must determine the character. Beginners may omit to 505.
CopuLATivB Sentences.
476. The following particles are called Copulative Conjunc¬
tions : et, -que, atque (ac), etiam, queque.
477. Et is simply and, the most common and general par¬
ticle of connection, and combines likes and unlikes :
Panem et aquam nâtûra dësîderat. Sen. Bread arid water (is what)
nature calls for.
Probitäs laudatur et alget. Juv. Honesty is bepraised and—freezes.
478. -Que (enclitic) unites things that belong closely to one
another. The second member serves to complete or extend the
first;
Senätus populus que Römänus, TTie Senate and people of Borne.
Ibi mortuus sepultusque Alexander. Lrv. There Alexander died and
was buried.
Combinations : et — et ;
-que—et;
et — que (only for two words) ;
-que — que, chiefly in poetry (also Lrv. and Sale.)
Et domino satis et nimium fûrîque lupöque. Tib. Enough for owner, and too
much far thief and wolf.
SYNTAX OP THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.
479. Atque (compounded of ad and -que) adds a more impor¬
tant to a less important member. But the second member often
owes its importance to the necessity of having the complement
(-que). Ac (a shorter form, which does not stand before a
vowel) is fainter than atque, and almost equivalent to et :
Intra moenia atqu® in sinü urbis sunt hostes. Sall. 'Within the walls,
ay, and in the heart of the city, are the enemies.
A. Ego servôs? (29.) B. Atque meus. Plaut. I—a slaw? And
mine to hoot.
Atque or ac is often used to connect the parts of a clause in
which et has been already employed :
Et potentes sequitur invidia et humilës abjectösque contemptus et
turpës ac nocentës odium. Quint. The powerful are followed hy envy ; the
low and grovelling, hy contempt; the hase and hurtful, hy hatred.
Remarks.—1. Adjectives and Adverbs of Likeness and Unlikeness may take atque or
ac. See 645.
2. On the Latin proneness to subordination by means of the participle, see 409, R. 2,
and 667, R. 1.
480. Etiam, even {now), yet, still, exaggerates (heightens) and
generally precedes the word to which it belongs :
Nobis rës familiäris etiam ad necessaria deest, We loch means even
for necessaries of life.
Ad Appii Claudii senectütem accëdëbat etiam ut caecus esset.
Cío. (558.)
Of time:
N5n satis pernôstî më etiam quâlis sim. Ter. Tou still do not know
well enough (= little know) whxit manner of person I am.
Remark.—Et is sometimes used tor etiam, but sparingly. So et ipse, -and kindred
expressions.
481. Queque, so also, complements (compare -que) and always
follows the words to which it belongs :
Quum patri Timothei populus statuam posuisset, filio q u o q u e
de'dit. Nep. The people, having erected a statue in honor of the father of
Timotheus, gave one to the son also {likewise).
Remark.—The difference between etiam and quoque is not to be insisted on too
rigidly :
Grande et conspicuum nSstrS queque tempore monstrum. Juv. A huge and
conspicuous prodigy, even in our day.
SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.
237
482. Copulation ly means of the Negative.—Instead of et
and the negative, neqne (nec) and the positive is the rule in
Latin:
Opïniône vulgî rapimur in errörem nec vera cernimus. Cic. By
the prejudice of the rabble we are hurried into error, and do not distinguish
the truth.
Caesar substitit neque hostem lacessivit. Caes. Caesar halted and did
not harass the enemy {without harassing the enemy).
Remarks.-'1. Et—non, and .... not, is used when the negation is confined to a
single word, or is otherwise emphatic :
Et milita VÏ non sine gloria. Hob. And I hare been a soldier not without glory.
On nec non, the opposite of et non, see 448, R. 3.
2. Combinations: Neque — neque ; nec — nec, neque — nec.
neque--que- (nec —neque.)
et — neque.
3. Paradigms : And no one, neque quisquam, nor any one.
And no— neque ullus, nor any.
And nnthing, neque quidquam, 'nor any thing.
And never, neque unquam, nor ever.
Neque amet quemquam nec amëtur ab u 115. J ot. May he love no one,
and be loved by none.
4. Nec is often nearly equivalent to nec tamen, and yet not ;
Extra invidiam nec extra glSriam erat. Tac. He was beyond the reach of envy,
and yet not beyond the reach of glory.
483. 1. Insertion and Omission of Copulatives.—When mul-
tus, much, many, is followed by another attribute, the two are
often combined by copulative particles : many renoivned deeds,
multa e t praeclara facinora ; many good qualities, multae bonae-
que artês.
2. Several subjects or objects, standing in the same relations,
either take et throughout or omit it throughout. The omission
of it is common in emphatic enumeration :
Phryges et Pisidae et Cilices ; or, Phryges, Pisidae, Cilices, Phry¬
gians, Pisidians, and Cüicians.
3. Et is further omitted in climaxes, in antitheses, in phrases,
and in formulae :
Viri nön est dëbilitârï dolore, frangí, succumbere. Cic. It is unmanly
to allow oneself to be disabled (unnerved) by grief, to be broken-spirited, to suty.
amb.
238
OTHER PARTICLES EMPLOYED.
Difficilis facilis, jücundus acerltus, es ídem. Mart. (296.)
Patres Oonscriptï, Fathers (and) Conscript (Senators).
Jupiter Optimus Maximus, Father Jove^ supremely good (and) great.
OTHER PARTICLES EMPLOYED.
484. Other particles are sometimes employed instead of the
copulative in the same general sense.
1. Temporal : Tum — tum, then — then ; nunc — nunc, modo — modo,
now — now ; simul — simul, at the same time. Tum Graeoê — tum
Latine, partly in Greek, partly in Latin.
Horatius Codes nunc singul5s prövooäbat, nunc inorepabat om-
nes. Lrv. Horatius Codes now challenged them singly, now taunted them
all.
Mode hue, modo illüo, now hither, now thither {hither and thither).
Simul spernebant, simul metuëbant, they despised and feared at the same
time {they at once despised and feared).
On Quum — tum, see 589.
2. Comparative : ut — ita, as — so :
Dolabellam ut Tarsenses ita Lâodioënî ultro aroessiërunt. As the
people of Tarsus so the people of Laodicea (= Both the people of Tarsus
and those of Laodicea) sent for Dolabella of their own accord.
Often, however, there is an adversative idea :
Haeo omnia ut invitis ita n5n adversantibus patrioiis transaota.
Liv. All this was done, the patricians, though unwilling, yet not opposing
(= against the wishes, but without any opposition on the part of the patri¬
cians).
3. Adversative : Non modo, non söliun, non tantum, not only : sed
etiam, vërum etiam, but even, hut also (sometimes simply sed) ;
Urbës maritimae non solum multïs perîoulîs oppositae sunt sed
etiam oaeoîs. Cic. Cities on the seaboard are liable not only to many
dangers, hut even {also) to hidden (ones).
Non dooërî tantum sed etiam dëleotârî volunt. Quint. Tîwy Wish
not merely to he taught hut to he tickled to hoot.
In the negative form, nön modo non, not only not; sed në . .. quidem,
hut not even ; sed vix, hut hardly.
Ego nön modo tibi non îrâsoor sed n ë reprehendo quidem
factum tuum. Cic. Inot only am not angry with you, hut I do not even fnd
fault with your action.
Remarks.—1. Instead of n5n mode (solum) nön—sed në—quidem, the latter nön
is generally omitted, when the two negative clauses have a verb in common, the negative
of the first clause being supplied by the second ;
ADVERSATIVE SENTENCES.
239
FIsöne consule senStui nSii solum juväre rempûblicam sed në lûgëre quidem
licëbat- Cic. When Piso was conssd, it was not only not left free for the senate (= the senate
was not only not free) to help the commonwealth^ but not even to mourn (for her).
2. Nêdum, not (to speak of) yet^ much less, is also used, either with or without a verb
in the subjunctive :
Satrapa nunquam sufferre ëjus sumptüs queat, nëdum tu possis. Ter. A
nabob could never stand that girVs expenditures, much less could you.
HTëdum from Livy on is used after affirmative clauses as well,
ADVERSATIVE SENTENCES.
485. The adversative particles are: autem, sed, vëmm, vërô,
at, atqul, tarnen, cëtemm. Of these only sed and tarnen are really
adversative.
486. Autem (postpositive) is the weakest form of hut, and in¬
dicates a difference from the foregoing, a contrast rather than a
contradiction. It serves as a particle of transition and explana-
tion (= moreover, furthermore, now), and of resumption {= to
come hach), and is often used in syllogisms :
Rümöribus mëcum pugnas, ego autem ä të ratiônës require. CiC.
Tou ßght me with rumors, whereas I ask of you reasons.
Quod est bonum, omne laudabile est ; quod autem laudabile est, omne
est honestum ; bonum igitur quod est, honestum est. CiC. Everything
that is good is 'praiseworthy ; but everything that is praiseworthy is virtuous ;
therefore, what is good is virtuous.
Remark.—Autem commonly follows the first word in the sentence or clause ; bnt
when an unemphatic est or sunt occupies the second place, it is put in the third. So
igitur and enim.
487. Sed (set) is used partly in a stronger sense, to denote
contradiction, partly in a weaker sense, to introduce a new
thought, or to revive an old one :
Non est vivere sed valëre vita. Mart. (443.)
Domitius nulla ille quidem arte sed Latinë tamen dicëbat. CiC. Domi-
tius spoke with no art it is true, but for all that, in good Latin.
488. Vërum, it is true, true, always takes the first place in a
sentence, and is practically equivalent to sed in its stronger sense :
Si certum est facere, facias ; vërum në post conféras culpam in
më. Ter. If you are determined to do it, you may do it; but you must not
afterward lay the blame on me.
240
adversative sentences.
489. Verö, of a truth, is generally put in the second place,
asserts with conviction, and is used to heighten the statement:
Platonem Dion adeö admîrâtus est ut se tötum eï träderet. Ñeque
verö minus Plato dêlectâtus est Diöne. Nep. Dion admired Plato to
such a degree that he gave himself wholly up to him ; and indeed Plato was no
less delighted with Dion.
490. At (another form of ad = in addition to) introduces
startling transitions, lively objections, remonstrances, questions,
wishes, often by way of quotation :
Si gravis dolor, brevis. At Philocteta jam decimum annum in spe-
lunca jacet. Cio. If pain is sharp, it is short. But Philoctetes has been ly¬
ing in his cave going on ten years.
"At multis malis affectus?" Quis negat? Cic. But he has suffered
much ?" Who denies it f •
Si scelestus est at ml infidelis nön est. Ter. If he is a scamp, yet
{at least) he is not unfaithful to me.
At videte hominis intoleräbilem audäciam! Cíe. Well, hut see thefd-
low's insufferable audacity !
A t vöbis male sit ! Cat. And ill luck to you !
Remark.—Ast = at + set (sed) is antiquated and poetic.
491. Atqul {But how f = But what of that 9) is still stronger
than at, and is used chiefly in argument :
Atqm perspicuum est hominem ë corpore animöque constare. Cic.
But it is clear that man consists of body and soul ; igitur, therefore.
492. Tarnen (literally, even thus), nevertheless, is often com¬
bined with at, verum, sed.
It is commonly prepositive, unless a particular word is to be
made emphatic :
Nâtûram expelías furcä, tamen usque recurret. Hor. You may drive
dut Dame Nature with a pitchfork, for all that she will ever be returning.
Domitius nulla quidem arte sed Latinê tamen dîcêbat (487).
493. Cêtemm, for the rest, is used by the historians as an
adversative particle.
RuiHTATtTT—In lively discourse, the adversative particles are often omitted.
DISJUNCTIVE SENTENCES.
494. The disjunctive particles are aut, vel, -ve, sive (sen).
disjunctive sentences.
241
495. Ant, or y denotes absolute exclusion or substitution :
Vinceris a u t vincis. Prop. You are conquered or conquering.
Ant is often = or at least (aut saltern) :
Cûnctî aut magna pars fidem mûtâvissent. Sall. All^ or at least a
great part, would have changed their allegiance.
Duo aut summum très juvenës. Lrv. Two, or at most three, youths.
Aut—aut, either—or:
Quaedam terrae partes aut fxígore rlgent aut ûruntur cal5re. gic.
/Some parts of the earth are either frozen with cold or burnt with heat.
Aut die aut accipe calcem. Juv. Either speak or take a kick.
496. Vel (literally, you may choose) gives a choice, often with
etiam, even, potius, rather :
Ego vel Oluviënus. Juv. I, or, if you choose, Cluvienus.
Per më vel stertas licet, non modo quiëscâs. Cío. For all I care, you
may {even) snore, if you choose, not merely sleep.
Satis vel etiam nimium multa, Cic. Enough, or even too much.
Epicurus homo minimë malus vel potius vir opitimMS, Epicurus
(was) a person by no means bad, or, rather, a man of excellent character.
Vel—^vel, either—or (whether—or) :
Miltiadës ^xit ponte rescissö rëgem vel hostium ferro vel inopia
paucîs diëbus interitürum. Nef. Miltiades said that if the bridge were cut
the king would perish in a few days, whether by the sword of the enemy, or for
want of provisions.
497- -Ve (enclitic) is a weaker form of vel (with numerals,
at most) :
Cur timeam dubitem V e locum dëfendere ? Juv. Why should I fea/r
or hesitate to maintain my position f
Bis terve, twice or at most thrice (bis terque, twice and indeed as much as
thrice, if not more).
498. Slve, (seu), if you choos^, gives a choice between two
designations of the same object :
Urbem mätii seu novercae reliquit. Liv. He left the city to his mother,
or {if it seems more likely) to his step-mother.
499. Sive—slve (seu—seu) whether—or (indilpference) :
11
242
CAUSAL AND ILLATIVE SENTENCES.
S Ï V e tü medicum adhibuerïs sïve nön adhibuerïs non convalesces.
Cíe. Whether you employ a physician, oi^ do not employ (one), you will not get
well.
Sen visa est catulis cerva fídelibus sen rüpit teretes Marsus aper
plagas. Hör. Whether a doe hath appeared to the faithful hounds, or a Mar-
sian hoar hath hurst the tightly-twisted tails.
CAUSAL AND ILLATIVE SENTENCES.
500. A. The causal particles are nam, enim, namque, and
etenim, for.
Sensûs mirifíce collocäti sunt. Nam oculi tanquam speculätöres al-
tissimum locum obtinent. Cic. The senses are admirably situated. For
the eyes, like watchmen, occupy the highest post.
Themistocles mürös Athêniensium restituit suö periculö. Namque
liacedaemonii prohibëre cônâtî sunt. Nef. Themistocles restx/red the walls
of Athens with risk to himself. For the Lacedaemonians endeavored to pre¬
vent it.
Pisces 5va relinquunt, facile enim ilia aqua sustinentur. CiC. Fish leave
their eggs, for they are easily kept alive hy the water.
Remarks.—1. Nam is always put at the beginning of a sentence ; enim is always
postpositive (486, R.) : namque and etenim are commonly put in the first place :
For what can you do? Nam quid agas î Quid enim agas 1 Namque quid
agas Î Etenim quid agas ?
2. These particles are originally asseverative, and are often used not only to furnish a
reason, but also to give an explanation or illustration (as for instance). Quid enim agas ?
What, far instance, can you do? This is especially true of enim, but a broad difierence
between nam and enim (which is derived from nam) cannot be proved. Etenim is
often used to carry on the argument, and gives an additional ground. Nempe (from nam)
namely, to wit, that is, of course, is often used ironically.
Sed quälis rediit ? Nempe ünä nave- Jut. But in what style did he return? With
one ship, forsooth.
3. In atenim, sed enim, vërumenim, enimvërô, vërumenimvërô, as in etenim,
enim gives a ground or an illustration of the leading particle, buttranslationby an ellipsis
would be too heavy, and enim is best left untranslated :
A. Audi quid dicam. B. At enim taedet jam audire eadem milliës. Tee. A.
Hear what I say. B. But (I %corCt,for) I am tired of hearing the same things a thousand
times already.
501. B. Illative particles are itaque, igitur, ergo, ideo, idcircö,
proinde.
502. Itaque (literally, and so), therefore, is put at the begin¬
ning of the sentence by the best writers, and is used of facts
that follow from the preceding statement :
Nemo ausus est liber Phöciönem sepelîre. Itaque ä servis sepultus
SUBORDINATION.
243
est. Nep. N'a free man dared to bury PTiocwn, and so Tie was buried by
slaves.
503. Igitur, therefore., is generally postpositive, and is used of
opinions which have their natural ground in the preceding
statement :
Mihi non satisfacit. Sed quoi homines tot sententiae ; fallí igitur
possumus. Cic. Me it does not satisfy. But many men many minds, 1
may therefore be mistaken.
Remark.—In hiptorical writers, igitur is used both in position and signification as
itaque. When emphatic, igitur is found even in the best authors at the head of the
sentence.
504. Ergo denotes necessary consequence, and is used espe¬
cially in arguments, with somewhat more emphasis than igitur.
Ideo, idcircö, means on that account ; proinde, accordingly, is
employed in exhortations, appeals, and the like :
Negat haec fîliam më suam esse ; non ergö haec mäter mea est.
Plaut. She says that I am not Tier daughter, tTierefore she is not my mother.
Quod praeceptum (nosce të ipsum) quia m^'us erat quam ut ah ho-
mine vidërëtur idcircö adsignätum est deö. CiC. This precept {know thy¬
self \ because it was too great to seem to be of man, was, on that account, attri¬
buted to a god.
Proinde aut exeant aut quiëscant. Cic. Let tTiem then either depart
or be quiet.
SUBOEDINATIOîq*.
505. Subordinate sentences are only extended forms of the
simple sentence, and are divided into Adjective and Substantive
sentences, according as they represent adjective and substantive
relations.
506. Adjective sentences express an attribute of the subject
in an expanded form :
Uxor quae bona est (626) = uxor bona.
507. Substantive sentences are introduced by particles,
which correspond in their origin and use to the Oblique Cases,
Accusative and Ablative.
These two cases furnish the mass of adverbial relations, and hence we
make a subdivision for this class, and the organization of the subordinate
sentence appears as follows :
244 moods in subordinate sentences.
508. A. Substantive sentences.
I; Object sentences.
II. Adverbial sentences :
1. Of Cause. (Causal.)
2. Of Design and Tendency. (Final and con¬
secutive. )
3. Of Time. (Temporal.)
4. Of Condition and Concession. (Condi¬
tional and concessive.)
B. Adjective sentences (Relative).
Moods in Subordinate Sentences.
509. 1. Final and Consecutive Clauses always take the Sub¬
junctive. Others vary according to their conception. Especially
important are the changes produced by Ôrâtio Obliqua.
2. Örätio Obliqua, or Indirect Discourse, is opposed to Örätio
Recta, or Direct Discourse, and gives the main drift of a speech
and not the exact words. Oratio Obliqua, proper, depends on
some Verb of Saying or Thinking expressed or implied, the
Principal Clauses being put in the Infinitive, the Dependent in
the Subjunctive.
Socrates dïcere solëbat :
O. R. Omnës in eö quod s c i u n t satis sunt ëloquentës.
O, R. Socrates used to say ; " All men are eloquent enough in what they
understand."
O. O. Omnës in eö quod s c î r e n t satis esse ëloquentës.
O. O. Socrates used to say that all men were eloquent enough in what they
understood.
3. The oblique relation may be confined to a dependent
clause and not extend to the whole sentence. This may be
called Partial Obliquity :
Ö. R. Nova nupta dicit : Fleo quod ire necesse est. The bride says : I
weep because I must needs go.
O. O. Nova nupta dicit së flëre quod ire necesse sit. The bride says
that she weeps because she must needs go.
Ö. R. Nova nupta flet quod ire necesse est. Cat.
The bride weeps because she must go.
P. O. Nova nupta flet quod ire necesse sit.
The bride is weeping because " she must go " (quotli she).
SEQUENCE OP TENSES.
245
4. Akin to Ö. 0. is the so-called Attraction of Mood by which
clauses originally Indicative are put in the Subjunctive because
they depend on Infinitives or Subjunctives. (666.)
Non dubito qmn nova nupta fleat quod ïre necesse sit. I do not doubt
that the bride is weeping because she must go.
Remark.—The full discussion of O. O. must, of course, be reserved for a later period,
See 651.
Sequence op Tenses.
510. In those dependent sentences which require the subjunc¬
tive, the choice of the tenses of the dependent clause is deter¬
mined by the form of the principal clause. Principal Tenses
are followed by Principal ; Historical, by Historical.
All forms that relate to
the Present and Future
(Principal Tenses)
All forms that relate to the
Past (Historical Tenses)
are followed by
the Present Subjunctive
(for continued action) ;
the Perfect Subjunctive
(for completed action).
the Imperfect Subjunctive
(for continued action) ;
the Pluperfect Subjunc¬
tive (for completed ac¬
tion).
Remark.—The action which is completed with regard to the leading verb may be in
itself a continued action. So in English : I have been doing, I had been doing. Hence,
the Imperfect Indicative (/ was doing) is represented in this dependent form by the Per¬
fect and Pluperfect, when the action is completed as to the leading verb.
are followed by -
511. Pres.
Pure Pp.,
cognosco,
cognovi,
Future, ccgnSscain,
Put. Perp., cognovero,
I am finding out,
I have found out
(I know),
I shall (try to)
find out,
I shall have found
out {shall know).
Imperp., cognôscêbam, 1 was finding out,
Pluperp., cognoveram,
I had found
{I knew).
out
quid facias,
what you are doing ;
quid ficeris,
what you have done,
what you have been
doing {what you did),
what you were doing
{befoje).
quid facerës,
what you were doing ;
quid fëcissës,
what you had done, what
you had been doing^
what you were doing
{before).
246
SEQUENCE OF TENSES.
' quid facerent hostes,
what the enemy was
Hist. Pebf., Oaesar cognovit, Caesar found out,\ àomg ;
quid fêcissent hostes,
what the enemy had
done.
Principal Tenses.
Nihil rë fert postrema syllaba brevis an longa sit. Cic. (463.)
Nemo adeö ferus e s t ut non mîtescere p o s s it Hob. (556.)
Rûsticus exspectat dum dëfluat amnis. Hob. (574.)
Post mortem in morte nihil est quod me tu am malT, Plaut.
(684.)
A r d e a t ipsa licet, tormentis gaudet amantis. Juv. (609.)
Utrum n esc i s quam alte ascender ¡'s an id pro nihilö habës?
Cic. (460.)
Ij a u d a t Panaetius Äfricänum quod f u e r i t abstinens. CiC. (542.)
Non is e s ut të pudor unquam ä turpitûdine revocärit. Cío. (556.)
Quem mea Calliopë laeserit ünus ego (sum). Ov. (688.)
Sim licet extrëmum sïcutsum missus in orbem. Ov. (609.)
Multi fuërunt qiñ tranquillitâtem expetentës à negötiis püblicís
së remöverint. Cío. (684.)
Nec mea qui digitis lümina c o n dat erit. Ov. (684.)
Historical Tenses.
Epaminöndäs quaesivit salvusne esset clipeus. Cic. (469.)
Noctû ambuläbat in foro Themistoclës quodsomnum capere nön
posset. Cío. (541.)
AdAppüClaudü senectütem accëdëbat etiamut caecus esset.
(558.)
Tanta opibus Rtrüria erat ut jam non terras sölum sed mare etiam
fämä nöminis sui i m p 1 ë s s e t. Liv. 8o great in means (= so powerful)
was Etruria that she had already filled not only the land hut even the sea with
the reputation of her name.
Quum primi ordinës hostium concidissent, tamen âcerrimë re-
liqui resistëbant. Caes. (588.)
Acciditut ünä nocte omnës Hermae dëjicerentur. Nep.
(513, R 2.)
Âgësilâus quum ex Aegypto reverterëturdëcessit. Nep. (586.)
Dëlëta est Ausonum gëns perinde acsi internecivö bello o ertäs-
s e t. Liv. (603.)
Hannibal omnia priusquam excëderet pugna erat expertus.
Liv. (579.)
Remakks.—1. The Historical Present is treated according to its Tense, or according to
its Sense.
SEQUENCE OP TENSES.
247
Caesar cognoscit quid hostës
Caesar finds out (found out) what the enemy
' 1. faciant, fëcerint, is doing, has done,
etc.
2. facerent, fecissent, was doing, had
done, etc.
Tense : TJbix Caesarem orant ut sibi parcant- Caes. The TJbii beg Caesar to spare
them.
Sense: Athëniënsës créant decern praetôrës qui exercitui praeessent. Nep.
The Athenians make ten generals to command their army.
Sense and Tense : Agunt grâtlâs quod sibi pepercissent ; quod arma cum ho-
minibus consanguineis contulerint queruntur. Caes. They return thanks to them,
for having spared them, and complain that they had crossed swwds with kinsmen.
So of authors :
Cbrysippus disputât aetbera esse eum quern bominës Jovem appellarent- Cic.
Chrysippus maintains that to be aether which men call Jone.
2. The Pure Perfect is often treated as an Historical Perfect in the matter of sequence :
Hodië expertus sum quam caduca fëlicitâs esset- Cükt. This day have I found
out how perishaMe happiness is.
512. Sequence of Tenses in Sentences of Design.—Sentences
of Design have, as a rule, only the Present and Imperfect Sub¬
junctive. The Eoman keeps the purpose and the process, rather
than the attainment, in view.
Present, edunt, they are eating,
Pure Pbrp., ëdërunt, they have eaten,
PuTURE, edent, they will eat.
Put. Perp., ëderint, they will have eaten,
Imperfect, edëbant, they were eating.
Pluperfect, ©darant, they had. eaten.
Hist. Per., ëdërunt, they ate.
ut vivant,
that they may live (to live).
ut vîverent,
that they might live (to live).
Principal Tenses.
Atque ut vîvâmus vivere dêsinimus. Mart. (424.)
Et precor ut possim tûtius esse miser. Ov. (424.)
Gallina© pennis f o vent pullos në frigore laedantur. CiC. (545.)
Lëgem brevem esse oportet, qu5 facilius ab imperitis teneä-
tur. Sen. (545.)
Më praemisit domum haec ut nûntiem ux5ri suae, Plaut.
He has sent me home ahead of him, to take the news to his wife.
Oculös effodiam tibi në observare possis. Plaut. I wiU
gouge out your eyes for you, to make it impossible for you to watch me.
Historical Tenses.
Laelius veniëbat ad oënam ut satiaret dësideria naturae. CiC.
Laelius used to go to table, to satisfy the cravings of nature.
Phaëthôn ut in currum patris tollerëtur optävit. CiC, (546.)
248
SEQUENCE OP TENSES.
Reuâbk.—The Perf. and Pluperf. Subj. are sometimes found in sentences of Design,
chiefly in earlier and later Latin, when stress is laid on completion, or when an element
of Hope or Fear comes in : Ut Sic dixerim, if I may be allowed to use the expressim.
Id agendum est ut satis vixerimus. Sen. We must aim at having lived enough.
Áñirmáre audeo më omni ope adnisürum në frustra v5s haue spem dë më con-
Cëperïtis. Liv. I dare assure you that I will strain every nerve to keep you from having
conceived this hope of me in vain. (After a past tense, në concëpissëtis.)
513. Exceptional Sequence of Tenses:—Sentences of Result
{Consecutive Sentences). In Sentences of Eesnlt, the Present
Subjunctive is used after Past Tenses to denote the coi tinuance
into the Present, the Perfect Subjunctive to imply final result.
This Perfect Subjunctive may represent either the Pure Perfect
or the Aorist, the latter especially with the negative : the action
happened once for all or not at all.
Present Tense ;
Siciliam Verres per triennium ita vexavit ut ea restituí in antiquum
statum nullö modo p o s s i t. Cío. Verres so harried Sidly for three years
as to make it utterly impossible for it to be restored to its original condition.
Perfect Tense (Pure) :
Murena Asiam sic obiit ut in eä ñeque aväritiae ñeque luxuriae ves¬
tigium relîquerit. Cíe. Murena so administered Asia as not to have
{that he has not) left in it a trace either of greed or debauchery. (There is no
trace there).
Perfect Tense (Aorist) :
Squitëshostiumäoriter cum equitâtûnöströ conflixërunt tamen
ut nôstrî eos in silvas collësque compulerint. Caes. The cavalry of
the enemy engaged the cavalry on our side briskly, and yet (the upshot was
that) our men forced them into the woods and hills.
Neque vërô tam remisso ac languidö animö quisquam cmnimn fuit
qui eä nocte conquiëVorit. Caes. And indeed there was no one at all
of so slack and indifferent a temper as to take {a wink of) sleep that night.
Remakks.—1. Authors vary much in the use of this Perfect. Cicero uses it very rarely ;
some abuse it.
2. After accidit, COntiglt, and other Verbs of Happening, the Imperfect is always
used, the result being already emphasized in the Indicative form.
Âccidit ut una nocte omnës Hermae dëjicerentur. Nep. It happened that in am
night all the Hermae were thrown down.
Representation op the Subjunctive in the Future and Future Perpect
Tenses.
514. The Subjunctive has no Future or Future Perfect, which
SUBJUNCTIVE IN FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT. 249
are represented either by the other Subjunctives, or in the
Active by the Subjunctive .of the Periphrastic Conjugation.
Eule I.—After a Future or Future Perfect Tense, the Future
relation is represented by the Present Subjunctive, the Future
Perfect by the Perfect Subjunctive, according to the rule.
quid facias, what you are doing (will
be doing),
quid feceris, what you have done
Oognoscam,
I shall (try to) find out,
Cognövero,
I shall have found out (shall know),
(will have done).
But whenever the dependent future is subsequent to the leáding future,
the Periphrastic Tense must be employed.
Cognoscam,
I shall (try to) find out,
Cognövero,
1 shall have found out (shall know).
quid facturus sis,
what you are going to do (what you
will do).
[Oonsïderâbimus], \we shall consider^
A. Quid fecerit aut quid ipsi acciderit aut quid dix er it,
What he has done, or what has happened to him, or what he has said.
B. Aut quid f a c i a t, quid ipsi a c c i d a t, quid d i c a t. Or, what he is
doing, what is happening to him, what he is saying.
C. Aut quid facturus sit, quid ipsi câsûrum sit, qua sit
Û sûr us örätiöne. Cic. Or what he is going to do (will do), what is going
to (will) happen to him, what plea he is going to employ (will employ).
TÛ quid sis actûrus si ad me scrips er is pergrätum erit.
Cic. It will be a great favor if you will write to me what you are going to do.
Remark.—In some of these forms, ambiguity is unavoidable. So A may represent a
real perfect, B a real present.
515. Kule II.—After the other tenses, the future relation
is oxpressed by the Active Periphrastic Subjunctive, Present or
Imperfect.
Cognosce,
I am finding out,
Cognövi,
I have found out (know), [
Cognöscebam,
I was trying to find out,
Cognoveram,
I had found out,
Incertum est quam longa cujusque nostrum vita futura sit. CiC.
It is uncertain how long the life of each one of us is going to be (will be).
11*
quid facturus sis, {^hat you are going to do),
what you will do.
quid facturus esses, {what you were going to do),
what you would do.
250
SEQUENCE OF TENSES.
Anteâ dubitäbam ventüraene essent legiönes. Cic. Be*
fore^ I was doubtful whether the legions would come (or no).
Nunc mihi non est dubium qmn ventûrae non s i n t. Cíe.
Now I haw no doubt that they will not come.
Remarks.—1. The Perfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive of the Periphrastic are used
only to represent the Apodosis of an Unreal Conditional Sentence.
Cognosco, Cognovi, quid facturus fuerïs, {what ym have been
I am finding out, I have found out (know), what you would have done. going to do),
Cogn3scebam, Cognoveram, [quid facturus fuissës, [what you had been
I was trying to find out, I had found out, what you would have done, going to do),
rare].
2. There is no Periphrastic for the Future Perfect Active, no Periphrastic for Passive
and Supiiieless Verbs. The Grammars make up a periphrastic for all these from futurum
sit, esset ut, as :
Í ut redierit, Ido not doubt that he wUlhave relumed.
Non dubito quin futurum sit ut maereat, that he will grieve.
' ut necëtur. that he wUl be killed.
For the dependent Fut. Perf. Pass. Cicero says (Fam. vi. 12, 3.) :
N5n dubito quin confecta rës futura sit, I do not doubt but the matter will
have been settled.
In the absence of the Periphrastic forms, use the proper tenses of posso. (^, R 3.)
3. When the preceding verb has a future character (Fear, Hope, Powei-, Will, and the
like), the simple subjunctive is sufficient :
Gain nisi perfrëgerint mûnîtiônës dë omni salute dëspërant ; Roman! si
rem obtinuerint fînem omnium labôrum exspectant. Caes. The Gauls despair of
all safety unless they break through [shall have broken through) the fortifications / the Bo-
mans look forward to an end of all their toils, if they hold their own [shdU have held).
Vênërunt querentës spam nullam esse resistendi nisi praesidium Römänus
mîsisset- biv. They came with the complaint that there was no hope of resistance unless
the Roman sent a force to protect them.
Of course the Deliberative Subjunctive is future : Examples, 258.
516. Sequence of Tenses in Oratio Obliqua: In Oratio
Obliqua and kindred constructions, the attraction of tenses applies
also to the representatives of the Future and Future Perfect
Subjunctive.
In [scyialä] erat scriptum nisi domum reverteré tur sé capitis
eum damnâtûrôs, It was written in the scytale that if he did not return home,
they would condemn him to death. Nep. (Oratio Recta : Nisi domum re-
vertéris té capitis damnäbimus, unless you (shall) return home, we will con¬
demn you to death.)
Pythia praecépit ut Miltiadem sibi imperätörem sûmerent ; id sï íé-
cissent incepta próspera futura. Nep. The Pythia instructed them to take
Miltiades for their general ; that if they did that, their undertakings would be
successful. (Oratio Recta : sí id féceritis, incepta prospera erunt.
Xiacedaemonii, Philippó minitante per litteräs sé omnia quae cönä«
SEQUENCE OF TENSES.
251
rentur (Ö. R., cônâbiminî) prohibitûrum, quaesïvêrunt num s ë esset
etiam morí prohibitürus. (Ö. R., prohibëbis). Cic. The Lacedaemo¬
nians^ when Philip threatened them by letter, that he would prevent everything
they undertook (should undertake), asked whether Tie was going to (would) pre¬
vent them from dying too.
517. Sequence of Tenses after the other Moods.—The Imper¬
ative and the Present and Perfect Subjunctive have the Se¬
quences of the Principal Tenses ; the Imperfect and Pluperfect
have the Sequences of the Historical Tenses.
[Ne] compone comas quia sis ventürus ad illam. Ov. Do not
arrange (your) locks because (forsooth) you are going to see Tier.
Rxcellentibus ingeniis citius difuerit ars qua civem regant quam
qua hostem superent, Liv. Oreat geniuses would be more likely to lack thß
skill to control the citizen than tTie skill to overcome tTie enemy.
Quid më prohibëret Rpicûrëum esse, sí probârem quae ille dîceret ?
Cic. What would prevent me from being an Epicurean if I approved wTiat
he said (says) ?
Tum ego të prïmus hortärer diu pensitârës quem potissimum ëligerës.
Plin. Ep. In tTiat case I shauld be the first to exTwrt you to weigh long wTwm
you should choose above all others.
Quae vita Priamö fuisset, si ab adulescentiä s c i s s e t quôs ëventûs
senectûtis esset habitûrus? Cic. What sort of Ufe would Priam
have led if Tie had known, from early manhood, what were to be the closing
scenes of his old age ?
Eemakks,—1. Of course when the Perf. Subj. represents the Historical Perf. it takes
the historical Sequence :
Magna culpa Felopis qui non docuerit filium quatenus esset quidque cüran-
dum. Cic. Greatly to blame is Pelops for not having taught his son how far each thing
was to be cared fw.
So also in the conditional proposition, when the action is past. For varying conception,
see Cic. Off. iii. 24.
2. The Imperfect Subjunctive, being used in opposition to the Present, might be
ti'eated as a Principal Tense, but the construction is less usual ;
Verërer në immodicam örätionem putârës nisi esset generis ëjus ut saepe in-
cipere saepe dësinere videâtur. Plin. Ep. I should be afraid of your thinking the
speech of immoderate length, if it were not of such kind as to produce the effect of often be¬
ginning often ending.
518. Sequence of Tenses after an Infinitive or Participle.—
When a subordinate clause depends on an Infinitive or Partici¬
ple, Gerund or Supine, the tense of that clause follows the
tenses of the Finite verb.
252
SEQUENCE OP TENSES.
Cupio scire,
J am desirous of knowing,
Cupiebam scire,
I was desirous of knowing,
Mihi interroganti,
when I ask Mm,
(literally : to me asking),
quid
quid
quid
' quid
quid
quid
quid
quid
< quid
agas,
egeris,
actürus
agerês,
êgissês,
actürus
agat,
ëgerit,
actürus
what you are doing,
what you have done.
sis, what you are going to do
(will do).
what you were doing,
what you had done.
esses, what you were going to do
(would do).
what he is doing,
what he has done,
sit, what he is going
to do (will do),
non re-
spondet,
he gives
no an¬
swer.
quid ageret.
non re-
spondit,
he gave
no an¬
swer.
what he was do- "
Mihi interroganti, ing,
when I asked him, quid egisset, what he had done,
(literally : to me asking), quid actürus esset,toÄai he was go-
( ing to do.
Apelles pictôrës eös peccäre dicëbat qui non sentirent
quid esset satis. Cíe. Apelles used to say that those painters blundered
who did, not perceive what was (is) enough.
Athëniënsës Cyrsilum quendam suadentem ut in urbe manërent
lapidibus cooperuërunt. Cic. (546.)
Cupido incessit ánimos juvenum sciscitandi ad quern eörum
regniun Römänum esset ventürum. Liv. The minds of the young men
were seized by the desire of inquiring to which of them the kingdom of Rome
would come.
Misërunt Delphôs consultiun quid facerent. Nep. They sent to Delphi
to ask the oracle what they should do. See 258.
Exception.—A Perfect Infinitive or Participle, dependent on a present
Tense, commonly takes the sequence of the Past Tenses, because these
usually represent Perfect Indicatives. See 277, 511, R. 2.
Satis mihi multa verba fëcisse videor quârë esset hoc bel¬
lum necessärium. CiC. I think I have said enough (to show) why this war
is necessary.
519. The Potential of the Past.—The Potential of the Past
may depend on a Present Tense :
Video causas esse permultäs quae Titum Roscium impel-
1 e r e n t. Cic. I see that there are very many causes which might have im¬
pelled Titus Roscius.
Quaere à të cur Gäjum Oomëlium non dëfenderem. CTc, 1
ask you why I was net to defend Oajus Cornelius. But see 469, R. 1.
Eemark.—The Sequence of Tenses is not unfreqnently deranged by the attraction of
parenthetic clauses, or by the shifting of the conception.
USE OP THE REFLEXIVE.
253
USE OP THE REFLEXIVE IH SUBOEDIHATE SEHTEHCES.
520. In subordinate clauses, the Keflexive is used with refer¬
ence either to the subject of the principal, or to the subject of
the subordinate, clause ; and sometimes first to the one and then
to the other.
521. The Keflexive is used of the principal subject when ref¬
erence is made to the thought or will of that subject ; hence,
in Infinitive Sentences, in Indirect Questions, in Sentences of
Design, and Sentences which partake of the Oblique Relation :
Animus sentit se vi sua, non aliena movëri. Cic. The mind feeh
that it moves by its own force, (and) not by that of another.
Quaesîvërunt num s ë esset etiam morí p r o hibitû rus. Cic. (516.)
. Pompëjus ä më petivit ut s ë cu m et apud s ë essem quotîdië. Cic.
Pompey asked me to be with him, and at his house, daily.
Paetus omnës libros quös fräter s u u s relîquisset mihi dönävit. CiC.
Paetus presented to me all the books (as he said) that his brother had left (qu5s
ûrâter ë j u s reliquerat, would be the statement of the narrator).
Remarks.—1. Sentences of Tendency and Result have is :
Tarquinius sic Servium diligëbat ut is ejus vulgS habërëtur Alius- Cic. Tar¬
quín loved Servius so that he was commotUy considered his son.
2. The Reflexive may refer to the real agent, and not to the grammatical subject of the
principal clause :
A Caesare inviter sibi ut sim lëgâtus. Cío. lam invited by Caesar (= Caesar in¬
vites me) to be lieutenant to him.
Especially to be noted is the freer use of suus (295, R. 1). The other forms are em¬
ployed chiefly in reflexive formulae :
Sui colligendi hostibus facultatem non relinquunt. Caes. They do not leave
the enemy a chance to rally.
So së recipere, to withdraw.
3. The Reflexive is used in general sentences, as one, oneself, etc. :
Dëforme est dë së praedicâre- Cío. It is unseemly to be bragging about oneself.
With the Inflnitive this follows naturally from 420.
4. In Indicative Relative Sentences, which are mere circumlocutions (506), is is the
rule :
SScratës inhonestam sibi crëdidit örätiünem quam ei Lysiâs reo composuerat.
Quint. Socrates believed the speech which Lysias had composed for him when he was ar¬
raigned, dishonoring to him.
Sometimes, however, the Reflexive is put contrary to the rule :
Metellus in iis urbibus quae ad s ë dëfëcerant praesidia impSnît. Sale. Me-
tdlus put garrisons in those towns which had gone over to him ; regularly, ad eum.
Hie habet quod sibi dëbëbâtur, He has his due ; regularly, ei.
5. Sometimes the Demonstrative is used instead of the Reflexive, because the narrator
presents his point of view:
Solën, qu5 tiitior vita ëjus esset, furere së simula vit. Cío. Solan feigned madnes«»
that his life might be the safer. (The notion of Result Intrudes.)
254
OBJECT SENTENCES.
6. Examples of Reflexives pointing both ways :
Roman! iSgätös misërunt qui ä Prüsiä peterent në inîmicissimum s u u m
(= Rômânôrum) apud s ë [Prûsiam] habëret- Nef. The Bomans sent ambassadors to
ask Prusias not to keej) their bitterest enemy at his court.
Agrippa Atticum flens öräbat atque obsecrabat ut së sibi suisque re-
servaret. Nep. Agrippa begged and conjured Atticm with tears to save himsdf [Atticus]
for him [Agrippa] and fo)' his own family [Atticus].
Ilopeless ambiguity ;
Hërës meus damnas esto dare ill! omnia sua. Quint. My heir is to give him all
that is his.
7. For the sake of clearness, the subject of the leading sentence is not unfrequently re¬
ferred to in the form of the Demonstrative instead of the Reflexive :
Helvëtii Allobrogibus sësë persuäsürös exïstimâbant vel vï coaetürös ut per
suös fiuës eos ïre paterentur. Caes. The Helvetians thought that they would persuade
or force the AUobroges to let them [the Helvetians] go through their territory.
8. Ipse is always used in its proper distinctive sense: so when it represents the
speaker in Ö. 0.
and Sul.
ÔS2. Alexander moriens änulum s u u m dederat Perdiccae, Alex¬
ander., [when] dying, had given his ring to Perdiccas.
Perdiccas acceperat ejus ânulum, Perdiccas had received his ring.
Quârë Alexander dëclârâverat s ë regnum e î commendässe, There¬
by, Alexander had declared that he had committed the kingdom to him.
Ex quo Perdiccas conjëcerat e u m regnum sibi commendässe,
From this, Perdiccas had gathered that he had committed the kingdom to him.
Ex quo omnës conjëcerant eum regnum eî commendässe, F'om
this, all had gathered that he had committed the kingdom to him.
Perdiccäs postulävit ut s ë rëgem habërent quum Alexander änu¬
lum sibi dedisset, Perdiccas demanded that they should have him to king, as
Alexander had given the ring to him.
Amici postulâvërunt ut omnës eum rëgem habërent quiun Alexan¬
der änulum e ï dedisset, friends demanded that all should Jiave him to
king, as Alexander had given the ring to him. (Lattmanii and Müller.)
Ita së gesserat Perdiccäs ut e ¡ regnum ab Alexandre commendârë-
tur, Perdiccas had so behaved himself that the kingdom was intrusted to him
by Alexander.
Object Sentences.
523. Verbs of Doing, Perceiving, Conceiving, of Thinking
and Saying, often take their object in the form of a sentence.
Remark.—These sentences are regarded, grammatically, as neuter substantives. The
accusative of neuter substantives is employed as a Nominative. Hence, a Passive or
Intransitive Verb may take an object sentence as a subject.
OBJECT SENTENCES.
255
I. OBJECT SENTENCES INTRODUCED BY QUOD.
524. Clauses which serve merely as periphrases (circumlocu¬
tions) of elements in the leading sentence are introduced by
quod, that.
Remabks.—1. The leading sentence often contains a demonstrative, such as hoc, this ;
illud, id, that ; and then the whole structure may he considered as a relative.
As these sentences present difficulties to the heginner, it may be well to postpone
the consideration to the Relative.
2. In some of the combinations, quod may be considered an adverbial accusative of
extent. (Inner Object.) Quod, in that (= because).
525. Quod is used to introduce explanatory clauses chiefly
after a Demonstrative, after verbs of Doing and Happening with
an adverb, and after verbs of Adding and Dropping :
Here quod means the fact that," ^Hhe circumstance that."
H 5 c sölö propior quod amicôs conjugis odit. Juv. In this alone
(is the wife) nearer (than a mere neighbor), that she hates the friends of her
husband.
Nil habet infëlîx paupertäs dürius in se quam quod (= id quod)
rîdiculôs homines facit. Juv. Unhappy poverty hath in itself nothing harder
(to bear) than that it makes people ridiculous.
Magnum beneficium est naturae quod necesse est moil. Sen. (195.)
Quod spiro et placeó, sí placeo, tuum est. Hob. That I do breathe and
please, if that I please, is thine.
Bene facis quod me adjuvas. Cic. Tou do well (in) that you help
me.
Bene mihi êvenit quod mittor ad mortem. Cic. It is fortunate for me
that I am sent to death (execution).
Adde quod ingenuas didicisse fidëliter artës ëmollit môrës neo
sinit esse ferös. Ov. Add (the fact) that to have acquired faithfully the ac¬
complishments (education) of a gentleman, softens the character, and does not
let it be savage.
On nisi quod, see 592, R. 3.
The reigning mood is the Indicative. The Subjunctive is
only used as in Oratio Obliqua.
Quiim Castam accûsârem nihil magis pressi quam quod accüsätor
ejus praeväricätiönis crimine corruisset. Plin. Ep. When I accused Casta,
there was no point that I laid more stress on than the fact (that I stated) " that
her accuser had been crushed under a charge of collusion."
256
ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE.
Remarks.—1. To this group belongs the exclamatory interrogation Quid? quod or
quid quod ? What of this, that ?
Quid quod simulac mihi collihitum est praestô est imago ? Cic, What is to U
said of the fact that the image presents itself as soon as I see ft? (Nay, does not the image
present itself?)
2. A sentence with quod often precedes as an adverbial accusative :
Quod m6 Agamemnonem aemulari putas falleris. Nbp. In that (if) ym think
that 1 am emvlating Agamemnon, you are mistaken.
3. With several of the above-mentioned verbs, ut can be employed, as well as quod
(ut, of the tendency—quod, of the fact) :
Ad Appii Claudil senectütem accëdëbat ut etiam caecus esset, Cic. (558), or,
quod caecus erat-
Accëdit quod patrem plus etiam quam ipse seit amo- Cíe, Besides, I lerne the
father even more than he himself knows.
But when the action is prospective or conditional, ut must be used :
Hûc accëdat ut perfecta virtus sit- Sek. To this be added the perfect nature of
virtue.
4. Verbs of Emotion, such as Rejoicing, Sorrowing, etc., take quod with the Indicative
•r Subjunctive. See Causal Sentences, 540.
II. OBJECT SENTENCES, WITH ACCUSATIVE AND
INFINITIVE.
526. Preliminary Observation.—On the simple infinitive as
an object, see 424.
The Infinitive as a verbal predicate, has its subject in the Accusative.
(421.)
Remark.—The Accusative is the most general form of the noun; the Infinitive (or
rather the Indefinitive), the most general form of the verb. The two together give the
outline, and not the details, of the thought—present an idea, and not a fact, as such.
Compare 340.
527. Active verbs of Saying, Showing, Believing and Per¬
ceiving (Verba sentiendl et déclârandi*), and similar expressions,
take the Accusative and Infinitive :
Thaïes Mîlësius a quam dixit e s s e initium rërtun, ThaXesof Miletu»
said that water was the first pi'inciple of things.
Solon furere së simulävit. Cic- Solon pretended to he mad.
* Verba sentiendl are : video, audio, sentio, animadverto, scio, nëscio, intellego, per-
spicio, comperio, disco, memini, crëdo, arbitror, puto, suspicor, jüdico, cënseo, dflco,
conclüdo, spëro, dëspëro. Similar expressions are : spës est, opinio est.
Verba decldrandñ arc : ëdico, afllrmo, negó, fateor, narro,trädo, scrlbo, nfintio, ostendo,
dëmonstro, persuädeo (546, R. 2.) significo, polliceor, prömitto, minor, simulo, dissimulo,
-etc. Similar expressions are : f3ma est, auctor sum, testis sum, certiörem aliquem fació,
etc.
ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE.
257
Medici causa morbi inventa cûrâtiônem esse inventa m
putant. Cíe. Physicians think that, (when) the cause of disease (is) dis¬
covered, the method of treatment is discovered.
Volucres vidimus fingere et construere nidos. Cic. We see that birds
fashion and build nests.
Audiet pivës acuisse ferrum. Hor. [The youth] shall hear that citizens
gave edge to steel.
Timagenes auctor est omnium in litteiis studiorum antiquissimam
müsicen exstitisse. Quint. Timagenes is the authority (for the state¬
ment) that of all intellectual pursuits music was the most ancient.
The sentence very often passes over in to the Ace. and Inf. (Ö. O.) with¬
out any formal notice.
Eemakks.— 1. Verbs of Perception and Representation take the Participle to express
the actual condition of the object of Perception or Representation (536). As there is no
Present Participle Passive the Infinitive must he used, and thus the difference between
intellectual and actual perception is effaced, sometimes even in the Active.
Audio cîvës acuentës ferrum, I hear citizens sharpen{ing) the steel.
Audio ä cívibus acui ferrum, 1 hear that the steel is sharpened by citizens / or, the
steel as it is sharpened by citizens.
Octavium dolore confie! vid!. Cíe. 1 have seen Octavias (when he was) wearing
out with anguish.
Vidi bistriënës fientës ëgredî. Quint. I have seen actors leave the stage weeping.
Notice facio, I make out, represent, suppose :
Plato ä Deo aedificärl mundum facit. Cic. Plato makes out that the uni¬
verse is buUt by God.
Isocratem Plato laudar! fëcitâ Söcrate. Cíe. Plato has represented Isocrates
as praised by Socrates.
F a 0, quaeso, qu! ego sum esse të. Cíe. Suppose, 1 pray, yourself to be me.
2. When the subject of the Infinitive is a personal or refiexive pronoun, that subject
is sometimes omitted—chiefiy with Future Infinitive—and then esse also is dropped :
Befractûrës carcerem minaban tur. Liv. They threatened to break open the jail.
3. The simple Infinitive is often used in English, where the Latin takes Acc. and Inf.
See 424, R. 3.
The (Greek) attraction of the predicate of the Inf. into the Nominative after the Verb
of Saying or Thinking, is poetical :
Pbasëlus ille, quem vidëtis, bospitës, ait fuisse nâvium celerrimus. Cat.
That pinnace yonder, which you see, my stranger guests, declares she used to be the fastest
craft afloat.
4. When the Accusative with the Infinitive is followed by a dependent accusative,
ambiguity may arise :
Ajo të, Aeacidä, Romanos vincere posse, in which të may be subject or object.
Real ambiguity is to be avoided by giving the sentence a passive turn :
Ajo ä të, Aeacidâ, Rômânës vino! posse, Iafflrmthat the Romans canbe conquered
by tl^, son of Aeacus.
Ajo të, Aeacidä, ä Römänis vine! posse, I affirm that thou, son of Aeacus, canst be
conquered by the Romans.
When the context shows which is the real subject, formal ambiguity is of no import¬
ance. But see Quint, vii. 9.10.
258
NOMINATIVE WITH INFINITIVE.
NOMINATIVE WITH INFINITIVE.
528. Passive verbs of Saying, Showing, Believing, and Per¬
ceiving, prefer the personal construction, in which the Accusa¬
tive Subject of the Inßnitive appears as the Nominative Subject
of the leading verb.
Active :
Trädunt Homërum caecum fuisse, they say that Homer was hUn(L
Passive :
Träditur Homërus caecus fuisse, Homer is said to have heen blind.
[Traditur Homërum caecum fuisse], it is said that Homer was blind.
But when the leading verb is a form compounded with esse,
to he, the impersonal construction is preferred :
Trâditum est Homënuu caecum fuisse. Cic. There is a tradition that
Homer was blind.
Aristaeus inventor olei fuisse dicitur. CiC. Aristaeus is said to
have been the inventor of oil.
Terentî (29, ,R. 1.) fäbulae propter ëlegantiam sermonis putabantur
â Laeliö scrïbi. Cío. Terence's plays, on account of the elegance of the
language, were thought to be written by Laelius.
Si Vëjôs migräbimus ämisisse patriam vidëbimur. Liv. If
we remove to Veji, we shall seem to have lost our country.
Reus damnätum íñ vidëbâtur. Quint. (436, R. 2.)
But :
Venerem Adonicé nûpsisse pröditum est. CiC. It is recorded
that Venus married Adonis.
Crëditur Pythagorae auditörem fuisse Numam. CiC. It is
believed that Numa was a hearer of Pythagoras.
Rekabk.—In Verbs of Saying, except dico, the personal construction is confined to
the third person. The poets are free in treating verbs under this head.
TENSES OF THE INFINITIVE AFTER VERBA SENTIENDI
ET EECliARANDI.
529. The Infinitive denotes only the stage of the action, and
determines only the relation to the time of the leading verb
(274).
ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE.
259
530. After verbs of Saying, Showing, Believing, and Perceiv¬
ing, and the like.
The Present Infinitive expresses contemporaneous action;
The Perfect Infinitive expresses prior action ;
The Future Infinitive expresses future action.
Be MARK.—The action which is completed with regard to the leading verb may be in
itself a continued action. So in English : I have been studying, I had been studying.
Hence, the Imperfect Indicative (/ was studying) is represented in this dependent form by
the Perfect Infinitive, because it is prior to the leading verb.
In this table the Present is taken as the type of the Principal, the Imperfect as
the type of the Historical, Tenses.
531. Active. Contemporaneous Action. Passive
P. T. Dicit ; të errare, të dëcipî,
He says, that you are going wrong, that you are decdved (217, R.).
H. T. Dïcëbat : të errare, të dëcipî,
He was saying, that you were going that you were decdved,
wrong.
Prior Action.
P. T, Dicit ; të errasse, të dëceptum esse.
He says, that you ham gone wrong, that you ham been {are) deceived,
that you went wrong, that you were deceived (Aor.),
that you have been going {that people have been deceiving you),
wrong,
H. T. Dïcëbat : të errasse, të dëceptum esse.
He was saying, that you had gone that you had been deceived.
^ wrong,
that you went wrong, that you were deceived (Aor.),
that you had been {that pecóle had been deceiving you),
going wrong,
Subsequent Action.
P. T. Dicit : të errätürum esse, të dëceptum iri.
He says, that you {are about to go that you {are going to) will be de-
wrong) , will {be) go{ing) wrong, ceived.
H. T. Dïcëbat : të errätürum esse, të dëceptum iri,
He was saying, that you were about that you were going to {wouM) be
to {would) go wrong, deceived.
Periphrastic Future.
The following form (the Periphrastic Future) is necessary when the Verb has no Su¬
pine or Future Participle. It is often used from other verbs to intimate an interval,
which cannot be expressed by other forms, and is more common in the Passive than the
Future Passive Inf. of the paradigms.
260
ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE.
Active.
Periphrastic Puture.
Passive.
P. T. Dicit : fore (futûrum esse) ut
erres (metuâs),
fore (ftitúrum esse) ut erra-
veris* (rare),
fore ut dëceptus sis (rare), usually.
fore ut dëcipiâris (metuâris),
dëceptum fore (not futurum
esse).
H. T. Dîcëbat : fore ut errârës
(metuerës),
errâssës (rare),
dëceptum fore (rarely: fore ut
fore ut dëoiperëris (metuerë-
ris),
dëceptus essës).
Eeuabks.—1. For examples of the Periphrastic, see 240.
CarthSgiuiensës dëhellStum moxfore rëbantur. Liv. The Carthaginians thought
that the war would soon he brought to an end. From dëbellâtum eriti it will he {have
been) brought to an end. So in the deponent adeptum fore.
2. Fosse, velle, etc., do not require the Periphrastic, and seldom take it. (240, E. 3.)
ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE WITH VERBS OF WILL AND
532. Verbs of Will and Desire take a dependent Accusative
and Infinitive :
The relation is that of an Object to be Effected.
Si vis më flëre, dolendum est primum ipsi tibi. Hon. If you wish me
to weep., you must first feel the pang yourself
Utrum Milönis corporis an Pythagorae tibi mälis virës ingenii dari ?
Cic. Which {whether) would you rather have given to you, MiWs strength of
body or Pythagoras' strength of mind f
Ipse jubet mortis nos meminisse Deus. Mabt. (875.)
Vitae summa brevis spem nos vetat incohare longam. Hob. (424,
R. 3.)
Nëmo ire quenquam püblicä prohibât via. Plaut. (887.)
Germäni vinum ad së omnîno importâri non sinunt. Caes.
The Germans do not permit wine to be imported into their country at all.
Eemarks.—1. On the construction of this class of verbs with ut (uë, quSmiuus),
see 546. Impero, I command, in ordinary prose takes only the Passive Infinitive :
Hannibalimperavit quam plürimäs venënâtâs serpentës vivas colligi. Nbp.
Hannibal ordered as many poisonous serpents as possible to be caught alive.
Permitto seldom takes the Infinitive. Jubeo, I bid ; sino, I let ; veto, I forbid ; pro-
hibeo, I prohibit, always have the Infinitive of Passive Verbs. These verbs may them¬
selves be turned into the Passive : jubeor, sluor, vetor, prohibeor.
* Heavy periphrastics are of rare occurrence. So FëtiâlëS dëcrëvërunt utrum
eörum fëcisset rectë factürum (Liv. xxxi. 8) ; not fore ut fëcisset, although the Ö, E.
requires utrum fëceris, rectë fëceris. (236, E. 4.) See Weissenborn's note.
DESIRE.
accusative and infinitive.
361
2. After jubeo, / bid, and veto, I forbid, the Infinitive Active can be need without an
imaginary or indefinite subject :
Jubet reddere, he bids return {orders the returning).
Vetat adhibSre medicinam, he forbids the administration of medicine.
Infandum, regina, jubës renovare dolorem, Verg. Not meet for speech, O queen,
the anguish which you bid (me, us) revive.
3. When the subject of the Infinitive is the same as the subject of the leading verb,
the subject of the Infinitive is not necessarily expressed :
Ni pärSre velis, pereundum erit ante lucernas. Juv. Urdess you resolve to
obey, you will have to perish before candle-light.
Et jam mallet equos nunquam tetigisse paternos. Ov. And now he
coidd have wished rather never to have touched his father''s horses.
But the subject may be expressed, and commonly is expressed, when the action of the
Infinitive is not within the power of the subject :
Timoleôn mäluit s ë diligi quam metui. Nep. Timoleon preferred that he should
be loved rather than that he should be feared.
Et fugit ad salicës et s ë cupit ante vidëri. Verg. And flees to the widows, and
desires that she should first be seen.
4. The poets go much further in using verbs and phrases as expressions of Will and
Desire. See 424, R. 4.
ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE WITH VEKBS OF EMOTION.
/
533. Verbs of Emotion take a dependent Accusative and In¬
finitive, inasmuch as these verbs may be considered as verbs of
Saying and Thinking :
Salvum t ë advënïsse gaudeo, I rejoice that you should have arrived safe
{to think that you have arrived safe, at your arriving safe).
Quod salvus advënistî, that you have arrived safe.
Quod salvus adveneris, that (as you say) you have a/rrived safe.
Glôriâtur Epicurus se non tötö asse pascî. Sen. Epicurus brags of
dining for not quite one copper. See 542.
ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE IN EXCLAMATIONS.
534. The Accusative with the Infinitive is used in Exclama¬
tions and Exclamatory Questions as the object of an unexpressed
thought or feeling :
Hem, mea lux, të nunc, mea Terentia, sîo vexârî. Cic. (341.)
Hominemne Römäntun tam Graecë loquï ? Plin. Ep. A Roman speak
such good Greek ? ( To think that a Roman should speak such good Greek).
Mëne inceptö dësistere—? Verg. I—desist from my undertaking?
Hinc abire mätrem ? Ter. Mother go away from here ?
Remarks.—1. Different is quod, which gives the ground :
Hei mihi quod nullis amor est medicabilis herbis. Ov. Woe's me that {in that,
because) love is not to be cured by any herbs.
2. On ut, with the subjunctive, in a similar sense, see 560. Both forms object.
262
ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE.
THE ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE AS A SUBJECT.
535. The Accusative with the Infinitive may be the Subject
of a sentence. The Predicate is a substantive or neuter adjec¬
tive, an impersonal verb or abstract phrase.
Inûsitâtum est rëgem capitis reum esse. Cic. It ü an extrawdinary
thing that a king should {foi' a king to) be tried for his life.
Faciuus est vincïrî civem Römänum. CiO. It is an outrage that a
Roman citizen should be put in chains.
Necesse est facere sümptum qui quaerit (= eiun qui quaexit)
lucrum, Plaut. Need is that he make outlay who an income seeks.
Legem brevem esse oportet, quo facilius ab imperitis teueätxir.
Sen. It is proper that a law should be brief {a law ought to be brief), that it
may the more easily be grasped by the uneducated.
Quid Milonis intererat interfícl Clödium. CiC. (382.)
Opus est të animo valëre. Cío. (390, R.)
Remarks.—1. Oportet, U hehoores, and necesse est, must needs, are often used with
the Subjunctive. So also many other phrases with ut. (See 559.)
Necesse also takes the Dative of the Person :
Homini necesse est morí, Man must needs die.
Ut culpent alii, tibi më laudare necesse- Ov. Let others blame, but you must give
me praise.
2. When the indirect object of the leading verb is the same as the subject of the In¬
finitive, the predicate of the subject is put in the case of the object : in standard prose
chiefly with licet, it is left {free) : in poetry and later prose with necesse, with satius
est, it is better, contingit, it happens, vacat, there is room :
Mihi neglegenti esse non licet, 1 am not free to be negligent.
The Accusative may also be used :
Mihi neglegentem esse non licet-
The Accusative is regularly used when the Dative is not expressed :
Neglegentem esse non licet, One is not free to be negligent.
In poetry, the Dative is allowable even then :
Neglegenti esselicet-
Solus ero quoniam nën licet esse t u 5- Prop. I shall be alone, since 1 may not
be thine. On licet with the subjunctive, see 608.
OBJECT SENTENCES REPRESENTED BY THE PARTICIPLE.
536. The Participle is used after verbs of Perception and
Representation, to express the actual condition of the object of
perception or representation :
Catönem vidi in bibliothëcâ sedentem multis Stöicörum circumfustun
libris. Cic. I saw Gato sitting in the library with an ocean of Stoic books
about him.
CAUSAL SENTENCES.
263
Pródiga nön sentit pereuntem fëmina cënsum. Juv. The lavish woman
does not perceive (how) the income (is) dwindling.
Saepe illam audîvî fûrtîvâ voce loquentem. Cat. I have often heard
her talking in a stealthy tone.
Gaudë quod spectant oculi të mille loquentem. HoR. (542.)
Polyphëmum Homërus cum ariete colloquentem facit. CiC.
Romer represents Polyphemus (as) talking with the ram.
Remark.—On the Infinitive, see 527. R. 1. The Greek participle agreeing with the
leading Nominative after verbs of Perception and Emotion, is rare and poetical :
Sensit mediös dëlapsus in hostës. Ykrg. He perceived (it) having fallen, {fhat he had
fallen) ''midst the enemy.
Gaudent perfüsl sanguine fratrum. Vbrg. Rejoice., bedrenched with brothers' blood.
537. The Perfect Participle Passive is used after verbs of
Causation and Desire, to denote impatience of anything except
entire fulfillment :
Caligula Lolliam missam fëcit. Suet. Caligula turned Lollia off
(for good and all).
Prûdentî mandës sï quid rectë cürätum veils. Ter. Tou must intrust
to a sensible man whatever you want properly attended to.
Remark.—^After verbs of "Will and Desire, the Infinitive esse is occasionally found
with these Participles, and hence they may be considered as Perfect Infinitives (375).
Compare, however, Perfect Participle Passive with opus est, usus est. (390.)
Causal Sentences.
538. Causal sentences are introduced :
1- By Quia, because, quod, {fn that) because.
3. By Quoniam (quom iam), now that, quando, quand^-
quidem, since (rarely in this sense).
3. By Quum, as. (Inference.)
4. By the Relative Pronoun, partly alone, partly with ut, utpote, quippe,
etc. (See 626, 634.)
Remarks.—Quia and quod differ chiefly in that quod is used, and not quia, when the
causal sentence is at the same time an object sentence. Quod — the Acc. Neut. Sing.,
quia the Acc. Neut PI. of qui, — often have a correlative demonstrative, such as, eS,
ideö, idcircS, therefore, propterea. on that account.
Quoniam and quando (quandSquidem) are used of evident, present reasons ; but
quando (quandöquidem) is rare in any other than a temporal sense. Temporal con¬
junctions are often used causally.
CAUSAL SENTENCES WITH QUIA, QUOD, AND QUONIAM.
539. Causal sentences with quia, quod, and quoniam are put
in the Indicative, except in oblique relation (Partial or Total).
(Cause
Proper.)
264
CAUSAL SENTENCES.
Remark.—The other pei'son of the oblique clause may be imaginary, and the writer or
speaker may quote from himself indirectly :
Laetatus sum quod mihi licëret recta dëfendere. Cíe. I was glad that I was free
to champimi the right.
540. Causal sentences with quia, quod, and quoniam take the
Indicative in Direct Discourse :
Amantes de forma jûdicâre non possunt, quia sensum oculSrum prae-
cipit animus. Quint. Lovers cannot judge of beauty, became the heart fore¬
stalls the eye.
Quia natura mûtârï nön potest idoircö vërae amïcitiae sempitei-
nae sunt. Cic. Because nature cannot change, therefore true friendships are
everlasting.
Torquätus filium suum quod is contra imperium in hostem pug.
n ä V e r a t necârî jussit. Sall. Torquatus bade his son he put to death
because he had fought against the enemy contrary to order{f) [quod pugnasset
= because, as Torquatus said or thought].
Neque me vixisse paenitet quoniam ita vixi ut nön frústrame
nätum exîstimem. Cío. And I am not sorry for having lived, since I have
so lived that I think I was born not in vain.
Sölus ero quoniam non licet esse tuö. Prop. (535, R. 2.)
Erant quibus appetentior fämae Helvidius vidërêtur quando etiam
sapientibus cupido glöriae novissima exuitur. Tag. There were some to
whom Helvidius seemed too eager for fame, since, even from the wise, ambition
is the last (infirmity) that is put off.
541. Causal sentences with quia, quod, and quoniam take the
Subjunctive in Oblique Discourse (Partial or Total).
Noctû ambuläbat in foro Themistoclës quod somnum capere non
posset. Cic. Themistocles used to walk about in-the market-place at night be¬
cause (as he said) he could not get to sleep.
Quae quia non 1 i c e a t non facit, ilia facit. Ov. She who does it not
because (she thinks, forsooth) she may not (do it), does it.
Elsewhere : quae quia nön licuit non facit, ilia facit-
[Ne] compone comas quia sis ventürus ad illam. Ov. (517.)
Quoniam ipse pro së dicere non posset, verba fecit frater ëjus Stësa-
goräs. Nef. As [Miltiades] could not speak for himself,his brother, Stesa-
goras, made a speech. (Indirect quotation from the speech of Stesagoras.)
Remarks.—1. N5n quod, nön quia, are used with the Indicative or Subjunctive, ac¬
cording to the general rule. The Indicative denies absolutely,* the Subjunctive rejects
* That the Indicative is used only of excluded/aci« is not borne out by the usage of
the language from Lucr. ii. 3, to Tac. Ann. xiii. 1.
CAUSAL SENTENCES.
265
an imaginary suggestion (as if from an ideal second person). The real ground often fol¬
lows with sed quia, sed quod.
The Subjunctive is more common than the Indicative with nSu quod, u5n quia.
N5u quo = non quod, and non quin = non qu5 non, are found with the Subjunctive
only.
Subjunctive :
Fugilës in jactandis caestibus ingemiscunt, nSn quod doleant, sed quia pro-
fundenda voce omne corpus intenditur venitque plaga vehementior. Cic. Boxers
in plying the caestus heave groans, not that (as you might suppose) they are in pain, but he-
cause in giving full vent to the voice all the body is put to the stretch, and the blow comes
with a greater rush.
Majorés nôstrî in dominum dë servo quaerl nSluërunt ; non quin posset vë-
rum inveniri, sed quia vidëbâtur indignum esse. Cic. Our ancestors would not
allow a slave to be questioned by torture against his master, not because (not as though they
thought,) the truth could not be got at, butfbecause such a course seemed degrading.
 Lacedaemoniorum exulibus praetor vim arcuerat, non quia salvSs vellet
sed quia perire causa indicts nôlël at. Liv. The praetor had warded off violence from
the Lacedaemonian mto,uoi(a8 you might have supposed) because he wished them to escape,
but because he did not wish them to perish with their case not pleaded (unheard).
The same principle applies to magis quod (qu5), quia . • quam quod, quia, with
the moods in inverse order.
LibertStis originem inde, magis quia annuum imperium consulSre factum
est quam quod dëminiitum quidquam sit ex rëgiS potestSte, ënumerês. Liv.
Tou may begin to count the origin of liberty from that point, rather because the comular
government was limited to a year, than because aught was taken away from the royal
power.
Indicative :
Sum nën dicam miser, sed certë exercitus, nën quia multis dëbeo sed quia
saepe concurrunt. Cic. lam, I will not say, wretched, but certainly worried, not because
I am in debt to many, but because they (their claims) often conflict.
2. Verbs of Saying and Thinking are put in the subjunctive with quod by a kind of
attraction :
Impetrare nën potuî, quod religiëne së impedir! dicerent. Cíe. I could not ob¬
tain permission, because they said they were embarrassed (prevented) by a religious scruple
(= quod impedlrentur, because (as they said) they were prevented).
3. Causal sentences may be represented by a Participle. (669.)
QUOD WITH VERBS OF EMOTION.
542. Q,uod is used to give the ground of Emotions and Ex¬
pressions of Emotion, such as Verbs of Joy and Sorrow, Satis¬
faction and Anger, Praise and Blame, Thanks and Complaint»
The rule for the Mood has been given already.
Indicative :
Claude quod spectant oculi tê mille loquentem. Hon. Re-
joke that a thousand eyes are gazing at you (while yon are) speaking.
Dolet mihi quod tû nunc stomacharis. Cic. It pains me that you
are angry now,
12
266
PINAL SENTENCES.
Quintum paenitet quod animum tuum offendit. Cic. (376. R.)
Juvat me quod vigent studia. Plin. Ep. I am charmed, that studies
are flourishing.
Tristis es? indignor quod sum tibi causa doloris. Ov. Are you
sad f I am provoked (with myself) that I am a cause of pain to you.
Tibi grätiäs ago, quod me omni molestia liberas. CiC. I
thank you., that you free me from all annoyance.
Subjunctive :
G a u d e t nules quod vicerit hostem. Ov. The soldier rejoice» at
having conquered the enemy.
Nunquam mihi in mentem veniet paenitere quod à mê ipse nön dë-
sciverim. Cío. It will never occur to me to he sorry for not having been
untrue to myself.
Laudat Panaetius Äfncänum quod fuerit abstinens. Cic. Panaetius
praises (Scipio) Africanus for having been obstinent.
Nemo örätorem admîrâtus est quod Latine loquerëtur. CiC. No one
(ever) admired an orator for speaking (good) Latin.
Sôcratës accüsätus est quod corrumperet juventûtem. Quint. So¬
crates was accused of corrupting youth.
Memini glôriâiï solitum esse Quintum Hortensium quod nunquam
bello cïvïlï interfuisset. Cic. I remember that Quintus Hortensius used to
boast of never having engaged in civil war.
Agunt grätiäs quod sibi pepercissent. Caes. (511, R. 1.)
Eemakk.—All these verbs may be construed with the Accusative and Infinitive : Sal-
VTim të advënisse gaudeo- (533.) But in Expressions of Praise and Blame, Thanks
and Complaint, quod is more common.
Amo të et nön neglexisse babeo grätiam. Ter. 1 love you (= much obliged), and
I am thankful to you for not having rtsglected (it).
Gratulor ingenium non latuisse tuum. Or. I congratulate (you) that your genius
has not lain perdu.
ïsocratës queritur plus bonöris corporum quam animörum virtütibus darl.
Quint. Isocrates complains that more honor is paid to the virtues of the body than to those
of the mind.
On cum, see 566.
Sentences op Design and Tbndenct.
543. 1. Sentences of Design are commonly called Final
Sentences. Sentences of Tendency are commonly called Con¬
secutive Sentences. Both contemplate the end—the one, as an
aim ; the other, as a consequence.
2. They are alike in having the Subjunctive and the particle
ut {how, that), a relative conjunction.
3. They differ in the Tenses employed. The Final Sentence,
FINAL SENTENCES.
267
as a rule, takes only the Present and Imperfect Subjunctive.
Consecutive Sentences may take also Perfect and Pluperfect.
4. They differ in the kind of Subjunctive employed. The
Final Sentence takes the Optative. The Consecutive Sentence
takes the Potential. Hence the difference in the ISTegative :
Final : ne (ut ne), Consecutive : ut non, that not.
ne aut—aut, (ut ne ve—ne ve,) ut ñeque—ñeque, that neither
—Twr.
Remarks.—1. Verbs of Effecting have the Final Sequence.
2. Verbs of Hindering have the sequences of the Final Sentence, but often the signifi¬
cation of the Consecutive.
3. Verbs of Fearing belong to the Final Sentence only so far as they have the Opta¬
tive.
544. Final Sentences are divided into two classes :
I. Final Sentences in which the Design is expressed by the
particle : Sentences of Design.
Ësse oportet ut vivas, non vivare ut edäs. [Cic.] You must eat in order
to live, not live in order to eat.
This form may be translated by, (in order) to ; sometimes by, that may, might, that
with the subj., and the like.
XL Final Sentences in which the Design lies in the leading
Verb (Verba studii et voluntatis, Verbs of Will and Desire) : Com¬
plementary Final Sentences.
Volo uti mihi respondeäs. Cío. 1 wish you to answer me.
This form is often rendered by to, never by in order to, sometimes by that and the sub¬
junctive, or some equivalent.
Partly Final and partly Consecutive are :
HI. Verbs of Hindering.
Peculiar in their sequence are :
IV. Verbs of Fearing.
Remarks.—1. Temporal Particles are often used in a final sense. So dum, dSuec«
quoad (574), antequam, priusquam (579).
ne quis,
nê ullus,
ne unquam, (nê quando,)
nê usquam, (nêcubi,)
ut nêmo, that no one.
ut nullus, that no.
ut nunquam, that never.
ut nusquam, that nowhere.
FINAL SENTENCES.
268
FINAL SENTENCES.
2. The general sense of a Final Sentence may be expressed :
1.) By the Genitive of Gerund or Gerundive, with (seldom without) causS or grätiä.
(429, R. 2.)
2.) By ad with Gerund and Gerundive. (433.)
3.) By the Accusative Supine after Verbs of Motion. (436.)
4.) By the Future Participle Active (later Latin) :
Maroboduus mlsit lëgâtôs ad Tiberium Srâtûrôs auziUa, Marbod sent commis¬
sioners to Tiberius^ to beg for reinforcements.
I. Sentences of Design.
545. Sentences of Design are introduced by :
1. Ut (uti) {how) that, and other Kelative Pronouns and Ad¬
verbs (632).
Ut is often preceded by a demonstrative expression, such as : idcirco,
therefore ; eo, on that account ; eö consiliö, with the design.
2. Quo = ut eö, that thereby ; with comparatives, that
the . .. — . . .;
3. Ne, that not, lest, continued by neve, neu. (450.)
Remakk.—other particles are of limited use. So nt në cannot follow verbs of nega¬
tive signification ; quomlnus is used with Verbs of Hindering ; quin requires a preceding
negative besides.
Êsse oportet ut vivas, non vivera ut edäs. [Cic.] You must eat to live,
not live to eat.
Inventa sunt specula, ut homo së ipse nösceret. Sen. Mirrors were
invented, to make man acquainted with himself.
Ut ameris, amabilis esto. Ov. That you may he loved {to make yourself
loved, in order to be loved), be lovable.
Legem brevem esse oportet, quo faoilius ab imperitis teneatur, Sen.
A law ought to be brief, that it may the more easily be grasped by the unedu¬
cated.
Senez serit arbores, quae alteri sœculô prösint. CiC. The old man sets
out trees, to do good to the next generation.
Semper habe Fyladën, qui oonsôlëtur Orestën. Ov. Always have a
Pylades, to console Orestes.
Artaxerxës Themistocli IVIagnësiam urbem dönäverat, quae ei pänem
praebëret. Nef. Artaxerxes had given Themistocles the city of Magnesia,
to furnish him with bread.
Qallinae pennis fovent pullös, në firigore laedantur. CiC. Mens keep
(their) chickens warm with (their) wings, that they may not be {to keep them
from being) hurt by the cold.
Uionysiiis në coUum tonsöri oommitteret tondëre filias suas docuih
Cíe. (424, R. 3.)
FINAL SENTENCES.
269
Remark.—Tit n5n is used when a particular word is negatived :
Confer tS ad Mallium, ut nSn ëjectus ad aliënôs sed invltätus ad tuës esse
yideäris- Oic. Betake yourself to Mallius, that you may seem not thrust out to strangers,
but invited to your own (friends).
IL Complementary Final Sentences.
546. Complementary Final Sentences follow Verbs of "Will¬
ing and Wishing, of Warning and Beseeching, of Urging and
Demanding, of Resolving and Endeavoring, of Forcing and
Permitting (Verba studil et voluntatis).*
Positive: Ut.
Volo uti mihi respondeäs. Cic. I wish you to answer me.
Phaëthôn ut in currum patxls tolleretur optävit. CiC. Phaethon de¬
sired to be lifted up into Ms father^ chariot.
Admoneo ut quotîdië meditëre resistendum esse îrâcundiae. CiC. 1
admonish you to reflect daily that resistance must be made to hot-headedness.
Et precor ut possim tûtius esse miser. Ov. (424.)
Exigis ut Priamus nätörum fünere lûdat. Ov. Tau exact that Priam
sport at (his) sons^ funeral.
Athëniensës quum statuèrent ut nâvës conscenderent, C3rrsilum
quendam suadentem ut in urbe manërent lapidibus cooperuërunt. CiC.
The Athenians, resolving to embark on boa/rd their ships, covered with stones
( = stoned) one Gyrsilus, who tñed to persuade them to remain in the city.
Pûblium Lentulum ut së abdicäret praetürä coëgistis. gic. You
forced Publius Lentulus to resign the praetor ship.
niud natura nön patitur, ut aliorum spoliis nostras copias augeämus.
Cíe. Nature does not allow us to increase our wealth by the spoils of others.
So also any verb or phrase used as a verb of Willing or De¬
manding :
P^hia respondit ut moenibus ligneis së munirent. Nbp. The Pythia
answered that they must defend themselves with walls of wood.
So eä lege, eä condieiöne ut (né), on condition that {that not).
Negative : Ne, ut ne. Negatives are added by nëve (neu), and
not.
* Such verbs and phrases are : Ore, rogo, peto, precor, obsecro, flägito, postulo, -
cüro, video, prövideo, pröspicio, — suädeo, persuädeo, cSnseo, hortor, adhortor, moneo
admoneo, permoveo, addOco, incito, impello, cögo, — impero, mando, praecipio, ëdico
dico, scribo, mitto. — concëdo, permitto (sino), — statuo, constituo and dScerno, —volo
nOlo, mälo, opto, studeo, nitor, contendo, ëlabôro, pugno, — id ago, operam do, lëgeiu
faro, lëx est, auctor sum, consilium dö.
270
FINAL SENTENCES.
Caesar suïs imperävit ne quod omninö tëlum in hostës r^'icerent.
Caes. Caesar gave orders to Ms (men) not to throw hack any misdle at all at
the enemy.
Themistoclës collëgîs suis praedïxit ut në prius Lacedaemoniörum
lëgâtôs dîmitterent quam ipse esset remissus. Nef. ThemistocUs told his
colleagues beforehand not to dismiss the Lacedaemonian envoys before he were
sent back.
Tit nS is not used after verbs of negative signiflcatlon, sucb as impedio. I hinder,
recuso, I refuse. (548.)
Pompëjus suis praedîxerat ut Caesaris impetum exciperent nëve së
loco movërent. Caes. Pomjpey had told- his men beforehand to receive Caesar^s
charge and not to move from their position.
Neqne is sometimes used after ut :
Monitor tuus suâdëbit tibi ut hinc discëdâs ñeque mihi ulïnm ver-
bum respondeäs. Cío. Tour adviser will counsel you to depart hence and
answer me never a word.
Remarks.—1. Instead of ut with the Subjunctive, the Infinitive is frequently used
with this class of verbs. So, generally, with jubeo, I order, 532. Authors vary. The
mse of the Infinitive is wider in poetry and silver prose.
2. When verbs of Willing and Wishing are used as verbs of Saying and Thinking,
Knowing and Showing, the Infinitive must be used. The English translation is that, and
the Indicative : volo, I will have it (maintain), moneo, 1 remark, persuadeo, I convince,
dScerno, Ideñde, cögo, I conclude.
Moneo artem sine assiduitate dicendl non multum juvSre. Cio. I remark that
art without constant practice in speaking is of little avail.
Vix culquam persuâdëbâtur GraeciS omni cessûrôs BSmänQs. Lrv. Scarce any
one could be persuaded thát the Romans would retire from all Greece.
Non sunt istl audiendi qui virtûtem düram et quasi ferream quandam esse
volunt. Cic. (800.)
Est IUÖS hominum ut nSlint eundem plûribus rëbus excellere- Cic. It is the
way of the world not to allow that the same man excels in more things (than one).
3. When the idea of Wishing is emphatic, the simple Subjunctive, without ut, is em¬
ployed, and the restriction of sequence to Present and Imperfect is removed :
ExIstimSs velim nëminem culquam cäriörem unquam fuisse quam të mihi.
Cic. I wish you to think that no one was ever dearer to anyone than you to me.
Malo të sapiens hostis metuat quam stultl civës laudent. Liv. I had rather a
wise enemy should fear you than foolish citizens should praise you.
Excüsätum habeas më rogo, cëno doml. Mart. (280.)
Hue ades, insani feriant sine llttora fluctiis. Verg. Come hither (and) let the
mad waves lash the shores. /
Tam fëllx essës quam formösissima vellem. Ov. (316.)
Nöllem dixissem. Cic. (254, R. 2.)
Occidit occideritque sinäs cum nomine Trëjam. Verq. 'Tis fallen, and let Troy
be fallen name and all.
So jubeo in poetry and later prose. Compare also potius quam, SIO, R.
VERBS OF HINDERING.
271
III. Verbs of Hindering.
547. The dependencies of Verbs of Hindering may be re¬
garded as partly Final, partly Consecutive. Ne and quominus
are originally final, but the final sense is often effaced, especially
in quominus. Quin is a consecutive particle. The sequence of
Verbs of Hindering is that of the Final Sentence.
The negative often disappears in the English translation.
548. Verbs signifying to Prevent, to Forbid, to Refuse, and
to Beware, take nö with the Subjunctive :
Impedior ne plñra dïcam. Cío. I am hindered from saying more (/
am hindered that I shovM say no more).
Oompare: "Who did hinder you that ye should not obey the truth ? " Gal. v. 1,
Servitüs mea mihi interdizit ne quid mirer meum malum. Flaut.
My slavery has forbidden me to marvel aught at (329, R. 1.) ill of mine.
Histiaeus obstitit në res conficerêtur. Nef. Histiaeus opposed the
thing being dort^.
Regulus në sententiam diceret recûsâvit. Cic. Begvius refused to
pronounce an opinion.
Maledictis dëterrëre në scrïbat parat. Ter. (424.)
Tantum quum fingës në sis manifesta cavëtë. Ov. (264.)
Tantum në noceâs dum vis prôdesse vidëtë. Ov. Only see (to it) that
you do not do harm while you wish to do good.
Remarks.—1. Verbs of Preventing also take quominus (549), and some of them the
Infinitive (532, R. 1). So regularly prohibëre :
Nëmo ire quenquam publica prohibât via. Plaut. (387.)
Impediré, to hinder^ dëterrëre, to frighten off. recusare, to refuse, sometimes have
the Infinitive.
2. Verbs signifying to Beware belong to Verbs of Hindering only so far as action is
contemplated.
After caveo, I beware, në is often omitted :
Cavë crëdâs. Beware of believing.
(Cavë ut crëdâs. Be sure to believe.)
Quos viceris tibi amïcës esse cavë crëdâs. Curt. Bo not believe that those whom
you have conquered are friends to you.
549. Quominus (— ut eo minus), that thereby the less^ is used
with verbs of Preventing :
Such as : impediré, to hinder ; prohibëre, to keep from ; tenëre, to hold ;
dëterrëre, to frighten off ; obstare, to be in the way ; recusare, to refuse;
and the like ;
272
VEEBS OF HINDBEING.
Aetäs non impedit quSminus agrî colendî studia teneämus. Cic. Age
does not hinder our retaining interest in agriculture.
Non dëterret sapientem mors quominus rei püblicae (347) consulat.
Cíe. Death does not deter the sage from consulting the interest of the State.
Quid obstat quominus Deus sit beatus ? Oic. What is in the uay of
GodCs being happy ?
Caesar cognovit per Äfränium stare quominus proeliö dîmicârëtur.
Caes. Caesar found that it was Afraniu^ s fault that there was no decime
fight (stat, there is a stand still).
550. Quin is used like quominus^ with Verbs of Preventing,
but only when they are negatived or questioned.
bemarks.—1. Quin is compounded of qui + nS, how (in which way), + not, and
answers to ut eo non or qu5 non. For nSn quin (= nSn qu5 n5n), see 541, R. 1.
2. Quin is used only after Negative Sentences, or Questions which expect a negative
answer.
3. When quin is used as a Consecutive or Relative particle, ut n5n or qui n5n, it has
all the sequences of the Consecutive or Relative. See 556.
4. When quin is used after Negative expressions of Doubt it has the sequences of the
Interrogative.
5. When quin is used with Verbs of Preventing it has the sequences of the Final Sen¬
tence.
551. Quin is used when Verbs and Phrases of Preventing,
Omitting, Kefraining, Refusing, and Delaying, Doubt and Un¬
certainty, are negatived or questioned :
1. Verbs of Preventing and the like (Sequence of the Final
Sentence) :
Vix ntmc obsistitur illis (208) quin lament mundum^ Ov. They are
now hardly to be kept {that they should not rend) from rending the universe.
Antiochus non së tenuit quin contra suum doctörem librum ëderet.
CiC. Antiochus did not refrain from publishing a book against his teacher.
Nullum adhüc intermisi diem quin aliquid ad të litterärum darem.
Cíe. I have thus far not allowed a day to pass but I dropped you {without
dropping you) something of a letter (a line or two).
Facere nöh possum quin quolâdië ad të mittam litteräs. CiC. Ican¬
not do without (/ cannot help) sending a letter to you daily.
(Nullö modo facere possxim ut non sim populâris. CiC. I cannot help-
being a man of the people)
N5n posstim quin exclämem. Plaut. I cannot but (I must) cry out.
Nihil abest quin sim miserrimus. Cic. There is nothing wanting that 1
should be {= to make me) perfectly miserable.
Fieri null5 modS poterat quin Oleomeni (208) parcerëtur. CiC. It
VERBS OF DOUBT.
273
could in no wise happen but that Cleomenes should be spared (= Oleome aes
had to be spared).
Pavilum äfuit quin Fabius Varum interfíceret. Cabs. There was little
lacking but Fabius (had) killed Varus {= Fabius came near killing Varus).
2. Verbs of Doubt and Uncertainty (Sequence of the Inter¬
rogative sentence) :
Non dubiiun est quin uxorem noUt filius. Ter. There is no doubt that
(my) son does not want a wife.
Quis dubitet (= nemo dubitet) quin in virtûte divitiae sint? CiC.
(251.)
Non dubitäri debet quin fuerint ante Homerum poetae. CiC. It is not
to be doubted that there were poets before Homer.
Nunc mibi nön est dubium quin ventûrae non sint legiones. CiC.
(515.)
Occasionally Verbs of Saying and Thinking are found with the same
construction, because they are near equivalents.
Negäri nön potest quin rectius sit etiam ad pacatos barbaros exerci-
tum mitti. Lrv. It cannot be denied (doubted) that it is better foi' an army to
be sent to the barbarians even though they be quiet.
Nön abest suspicio (Litotes for dubitäri nön potest) quin Orgetorix
ipse sibi mortem consciverit. Cabs. There is no lack of ground to suspect
(= there is no doubt that., 448, R. 2) Orgetorix killed himself.
Remakks.—1. In Future relations nön dubito quin (according to 515, R. 3) may have
the Simple Subjunctive instead of the Periphrastic :
Non dubitâre quin dë onmibns obsidibns supplicium sûmat Ariovistus- Caes.
'■'He did not doubt that Ariovistus would put all the hostages to death." Comp. Cat. cviii.
So when there is an original Subjunctive notion :
Non dubito quin ad të statim veniam. Cic. I do not dmibt that I ought to come
to you forthwith. (Veniam 1 Shall I come?)
2. Of course dubito and non dubito may have the ordinary interrogative construc¬
tions. On dubito an, see 459, R.
3. Nön dubito, with the Infinitive, usually means I do not hesitafxto:
Nön dubitem dicere omnës sapientës semper beätös esse. Cic. I should not hesi¬
tate to say that all wise nun are always happy.
Et dubitämus adhüc virtüte extendere virës î Vbbq. And do we still hesitóle to
extend (our) power by (our) prowess ? Compare timeo, vereor, /fear., Tusitate to.
So occasionally nön dubito quin. See R. 1.
Römäni arbitrâbantur nön dubitätürum fortem virum quin cëderet aequö
animö lëgibus. Cic. The Romans thought that a brave man would not hesitate to yield
with equanimity to the laws.
4. Nön dubito with the Inf. for nön dubito quin occurs chiefly in Nepos, Ltvt and
later writers.
Sunt multi qui quae turpia esse dubitâre nön possunt ütilitätis specië ducti
probent- Quint. There are many who, led on by the appearance of profit, approve what
they cannot doubt to be base.
12*
274
VEEBS OP FEARIEG.
IV. Verbs of Fearing.
552. Verbs of Fearing are followed by tbe Present and Per¬
fect, Imperfect and Plupérfect Subjunctive.
The Present Subjunctive represents the Present and Future
Indicative.
The Perfect Subjunctive regularly represents the Perfect In¬
dicative.
Present and Perfect Subjunctive become Imperfect and Plu¬
perfect after a Past Tense.
Witji Verbs of Fearing, ne, lest, shows that the negative is
wished and the positive feared ; ut (nô non) shows that the posi¬
tive is wished and the negative feared : ne non is used regularly
after the negative.
Timeo në hostis veniat, I fear lest the enemy come, that he is coming,
that he will come.
{I wish he may not come.)
Timeo në hostis vënerit, I fear lest the enemy hare come,
that (it will turn out that) he has come.
Timeo ut amicus veniat, I fear lest my friend come not, that he is not
coming, will not come.
(/wish he may come.)
Timeo ut amicus vënerit, I fear lest my friend hare not come,
that he has not come.
Non timeo në amicus non veniat, I do not fear that my friend is not
coming, will not como.
Non timeo në amicus vënerit, I do not fear that my friend has not come.
Vereor në dum minuere velim laborem augeam. Cic. 1 fear lest, while
I wish to lessen the toil, I increase it {that I am increasing it).
Verëmur në par um hic liber mellis et absinthii multum habëre vide-
ätur. Quint. I am afraid that this book will seem to have too little honey and
(too) much wormwood.
Timeo ut sustineas labôrës. Cic. I fear that you will not hold out under
your toils.
N5n vereor në tua virtus opiniSni hominum non respondeat. CiC.
1 do not fear that your virtue will not answer to (come up to) public expecta¬
tion.
Metuo në id consilii cëperim quod non facile explicare possim. CiC.
I fear that I hare formed a plan that I cannot readily explain.
CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.
275
Ünum illud extimêscêbam në quid turpíus facerem vel dîcam jam
efiecissem, The only thing I feared was, lest I should act disgracefully, or, 1
should (rather) say, (lest) I had already acted disgracefully.
Remarks.—1. With the Infinitive, Verbs of Fear are Verbs of Will. So especially
vereor, I fear to.
Vereor të laudare praesentem. Cic. (424) (Vereor = prae timore nSlo.)
2. Vidë në, see to it lest, is often used as a polite formula for dubito an (459, R.),
lam irhdined to think.
Vidë në plûs pröfutüra sit ratio ordinaria. Sen. {See to it lest) I am inclined to
think that the ordinary method is likely to be the more profitable. (239, 1.)
CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.
Sentences of Tendency and Besult.
553. Consecutive Sentences are those sentences which show
the Consequence or Tendency of Actions. In Latin, Kesult is
a mere inference from Tendency, though often an irresistible
inference. In other words, the Latin language uses so as
throughout, and not so that, although so that is often a conve¬
nient translation. The result is only implied, not stated.
554. Consecutive Sentences, or Sentences of Tendency and
Eesult, have the Subjunctive mood.
Consecutive Subjunctives are put in the Present or Perfect,
Imperfect or Pluperfect Tense according to the rules for
sequence.
The introductory particle is ut.
In the leading clause, demonstratives are often employed in
correlation with ut, which is a relative.
The Eelative is sometimes used, parallel with ut (632).
The Negative is ut non, sometimes after negatives quin.
When the notion of Design or Condition enters, ng is also found.
555. Consecutive Sentences are used after
I. Demonstratives,
all implying the creation or exis¬
tence of conditions that tend to
a result.
2. Transitive and
3. Intransitive Verbs, and
4. Phrases,
556. 1. Consecutive Sentences are largely used after De¬
monstratives expressed or implied.
Tanta vis probitätis est, ut eam in hoste etiam diligamus. CiC. Sq
great is the virtue of uprightness, that we love it even in an enemy.
276
CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.
Nemo tarn timidus est ut mälit semper pendëre quam semel cadere.
Sen. lío one is so timid as to prefer hanging always to falling once
{for all).
Neque me vixisse paenitet quoniam ita vixi ut nou frustra më nätum
existimem. Cíe. (540.)
Non is es ut të pudor unquam ä turpitûdine revocârit. Cic. Tou are
not the man for shame ever to have recalled you (= ever to have been re¬
called by shame)/wm baseness.
Nëmo adeö férus est ut non mïtescere possit. Hob. No one is so sav¬
age that he cannot (be made to) soften.
Ail;er a negative quin = ut non :
Nil tam difficile est quin quaerendö investigäri possiet (possit). Ter.
Naught is so hard but it can ( = that it cannot) be tracked out by search.
Nunquam tam male est Siculis quin aliquid facëtë et commodë dicant.
Cic. Thß Sicilians are never so badly off as not to (have) something or other
clever and pat (to) say.
Remarks.—1. Notice especially tantum abest (Impers.) . . . ut . . . ut. The ori¬
gin of the phrase is shown by
Tantum abest ab eö ut malum mors sit ut verear në homin! sit nihil bonum
aliud. Cic. So far is it from death (= so far is death from) deing an evil that I fear man
has no other blessing.
Tantum abest ut nostra mîrëmur ut usque e5 difdcilës simus ut nSbis n5n
satisfaciat ipse Dëmosthenës. Cío. So far are we from admiring our own (composi¬
tions) that we are so hard to please that Demosthenes himself fails to satisfy us.
The personal construction can be used when an abstract follows.
2. Dignus, worthy., indignus, unworthy, aptus, idÖneus,./ii, take a consecutive sen¬
tence, but usually with qui, seldom with ut :
Digna fuit illa natura quae meliöra vellet. Quint. That nature was worthy of
willing better things (= of better aims).
3. A consecutive sentence follows quam ut (Cic.) or quam qui :
Major sum quam ut mancipium sim mei corporis. Sen. (313.)
Major sum quam oui possit Fortuna nocëre. Ov. (313.)
On the omission of ut with potius quam (priusquam), see 579, R.
4. N ë, lest, is sometimes irregularly used instead of ut nSn, especially when the idea
of design or wish intrudes ;
Ita më gessl në tibi pudëri essem. Liv. I behaved myself so as not tobe a dis¬
grace to you.
5. Ita — ut (sometimes ut alone), so that, often serves to restrict and condition. The
negative is often në (comp. 554).
Ita probanda est mansuëtûdo at adhibeatur relpüblicae causa sevëritâs. Cic.
Mildness is tobe approved, so that (provided that) stiictness be used for ths salce of ths com¬
monwealth.
Ita frul volunt voluptatibus ut null! propter eas dolërës consequantur. Cic.
They wish to enjoy pleasures without having any pain to ensue on account of them.
Pythagoras et Plato mortem ita laudant ut fugere vitam vetent. Cic. ly-
thagoras and Plato so praise death that they, while they praise death, forbid fleeing fron^
life.
Ita tu istaec tua miscëto në më admisceäs. Ter. Mix up your mixings so you
mix me not withal.
CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.
277
6. Tit n5n is often — without and the English verbal in -ing ;
Octäviänus nunquam ñlios suös populS commendävit ut non adjîceret : SI
merëbuntur. Suet. Octavianus (Augustus) never recommended his sons to the people
in such a way as not to add (= without adding) : If they are worthy.
Qui nSn vërë virtûtî studet certë malet exîstimârî bonus vir ut non sit
quam esse ut non putëtur. Cic. Ke who is not a true lover of virtue will certainly pre¬
fer being thought a good man without being such., to being (a good man) without being
believed (to be such).
After negatives quin = ut non. (550, E. 3.)
557. 2. Verbs of Effectiug belong partly to the Consecutive,
partly^to the Final Sentence. The negative is non or né ; the
sequence, final.
Such verbs are facio, eificio, perficio, I make., effect, achieve ; assequor,
consequor, I attain, accrnnfflü^ and other verbs of Causation. Facere ut
is often little more than a periphrasis.
Fortüna vestra facit ut irae meae temperem. Liv. Tour fortune
causes that 1 {makes me) restrain my anger (put metes to my anger).
Invitus (324, R. 6) facio ut recorder rmnas reîpûblicae. CiC. (It is)
against my will that I {am doing so as to) recall the ruined condition of the
commonwealth.
Negatives :
Rerum obscüxitäs non verborum facit ut nön intellegâtur oratio. CiC.
It is the obscurity of the subject, not of the words, that causes the language not
to be understood.
Potestis efficere ut male moriar, ne moriar nön potestis. Plin. Ep.
You may make me die a hard d^ath, keep me from dying you cannot.
558. 3. Consecutive Sentences follow many Impersonal Verbs
of Happening and Following, of Accident and Consequent:
Such verbs are fit, accidit, contingit, it happens, üsü venit, it occurs,
accedit, there is added, seqtdtur, it follows. So also est, it is the case.
Fien potest ut fallar. Cic. (A) may be {that) I am mistaken.
Potest fieri ut is unde të audisse dicis iratus dixerit. CiC. IJt) may be
{that) Tie from whom you say you heard (it) said it in anger.
Persaepe evenit ut ûtilitâs cum honéstate certet. CiC. It very often
(so) happens that profit is at va/riance with honor.
Ad Appii Claudii senectütem accë débat etiam ut caecus esset. CiC.
To the old age of Appius Claudius was further added his being blind.
Eemakk.—Very common is the periphrasis fore (futurum) ut, which gives the com¬
mon form of the Put. Inf. See 240.
559. 4. Many abstract phrases are followed by consecutive
sentences.
278
TEMPORAL SENTENCES.
Such are : mos, consuetüdo est, it is the way, the wont, opus, usus est,
there is need, More rarely after adjectives such as aequum,
juatiaxij fair, just, and the like. So with the Genitive after esse.
The leading sentence is often g, negative one to show the imaginaiy
character of the result.
In all these relations the Accusative with the Inf. is more common.
Est m5s hominum ut nöliut eundem plüribus rebus excellere. Cic.
(546, R. 2.)
An cuiquam est usus hominï se ut cruciet ? Ter. (390, R.)
Dionysiô në integrum quidem erat ut ad jûstitiam remigrâret. Gic.
Dionysius was not free eren (if he had wished it) to return to justice.
Est miserörum ut malevolentes sint atque invideant bonis. Plaut.
The wretched have a way of being ilUnatured and envying the well-to-do.
Rârum (= rârô accidit) ut sit idöneus suae rei quisque defensor.
Quint. It is rare for a man tobe a good defender of his own case.
Remark.—Necesse est, it is necessary, generally, and oportet, behooves, always,
omit ut :
Leuctrica pugna immortälis sit necesse est- Nep. The batik of Leucira must
needs be immortal.
Sed non efEugigs ; mScum moriäris oportet- Prop. But you shall not escape ; you
must die with me.
Exclamatory Questions.
560. Tit with the Subjunctive is used in Exclamatory Ques¬
tions.
Egone ut të interpellem ? Cic. I interrupt you ?
TÙ ut unquam të corrigäs ? Cío. Tou—ever reform yourself?
Remark.—The expression is closely parallel with the Accusative and Infinitive. The
one objects to the idea ; the other, to any state of things that could produce the result. In
neither case is there any definite or conscious ellipsis.
Temporal Sentences.
561. The action of the Temporal or Dependent clause may
stand to the action of the Principal clause in one of three
relations :
I. It may be antecedent :
Conjunctions : Postquam (Postea quam), after that, after, ut, as, ubi,
when (literally, where) ; simulac, as soon as ; ut prlmum, cum primum, the
first moment that.
II. It may be contemporaneous :
ANTECEDENT ACTION. 279
Conjunctions : Dum, donee, wMLe, untü; quoad, up to (the time) that;
quamdiü, as long as; cum, when,
III. It may be subsequent :
Conjunctions : Antequam, priusquam, "before that, before.
A special chapter is required by
IV. Cum, when.
Moods in Temporal Sentences.
562. 1. The mood of Temporal clauses is regularly tbe
Indicative.
2. The Subjunctive is used only—
1.) In Oratio Obliqua (509), Total or Partial. So also in the
Ideal Second Person.
2.) When the idea of Design or Condition is introduced.
I. ANTECEDENT ACTION.
563. In historical narrative, Temporal Clauses with postquam,
ubi, ut, simulac, ut prîmum, and cum prlmum commonly take the
Historical Perfect or the Historical Present Indicative :
The English translation is not unfrequently the Pluperfect.
Postquam Caesar pervenit, obsidës poposoit. Caes. After Caesar ar¬
rived, he demanded hostages.
Quae ubi nûntiantur Römam, senâtus extemplö dictätörem dîcï jussÜ.
Liv. When these tidings were carried to Borne, the senate forthwith ordered a
dictator to be appointed.
Pompejus ut equitatum suum pulsum vidit, acië excessit. Caes. As
Pompey saw his cavalry beaten, he left the line of battle.
Pelopidas non dubitävit, simulac conspexit bestem, conflîgere (551,
R. 3.). Nep. As soon as he (had) caught sight of the enemy, Pelopidas did not
hesitate to engage (him).
Subjunctive in Dratio Obliqua :
Ariovistum, ut semel Gallörum copias vïcerit (Ö. R. vîcit), superbe
imperare. Caes. " That Ariovütus, as soon as he had once beaten the forces
of the Gauls, exercised his rule arrogantly.^'
Eemark.—Postquam is rarely found with the Subjunctive outside of 0, 0.
564. The Imperfect is used to express an action continued
into the time of the principal clause (overlapping).
280
ANTECEDENT ACTION.
The translation oflen indicates the spectator (224, B, 1).
Postquam nemo prôcëdere audêbat, intrat. CiniT. After (he found
that) no one had the courage to come forth, he entered.
Ubi nemo obvins ïbat, ad castra hostium tendunt. Liv. When (thej
saw tliat) no one was coming to meet them, they proceeded to the camp of the
enemy.
Subjimctive in Oratio Obllqna:
Scrîpsistî eum, postquam non änderet (ö. R. non audëbat) reprehen¬
deré, laudare coepisse. Cío. You wrote that, after he could not get up the
courage to hlarne, he began to praise.
565. 1. The Pluperfect is used to express au actiou com¬
pleted before the time of the principal clause ; often of the Ee-.
suiting Condition.
Albinus postquam dëcrëverat nön ëgredî prövinciä, mûitës statïvïs
castris habëbat. Sall. After Albinus had fuUy determined not to depart
from the province, he kept his soldiers in cantonments.
Posteäquam mulûtûdinem collëgerat emblëmatum, ínstituit officïnam.
Cíe. After he had got together a great number of figures, he set up shop.
566. 2. The Pluperfect is used with postquam when a definite
interval is mentioned.
Post and quam are often separated. "With an Ablative of Measure,
post may be omitted.
Aristîdës dëcessit ferë post annum quartum quam Themistoclës Athë-
nîs erat expulsus. Nep. Aristîdës died about four years after Themietocles
had been (was) banished from Athens.
Hamilcar nönö anno postquam in Eüspäniam vënerat occîsus est.
Nef. Hamilcar was killed nine years after he came to Spain.
Aristîdës sexto ferë anno quam erat expulsus in patriam restitutus
est. Xep. Aristides was restored to his country about six years after he was
exiled.
Subjunctive in Oratio Obliqua:
Scriptum ä Posidöniö est trigintä annîs vixisse Panaetium posteä¬
quam libros dë officiîs ëdidisset. Cíe. It is recorded by Posidonxus thai
Panaetius lived thirty years after he put forth his books on Duties.
The attraction is sometimes neglected.
Eemarx.—The Historical Perfect is also in frequent nse :
Nero nätus est Antii post novem mensës quam Tiberius excessit- Suet. Nero
was bom at Äräium nine months after Tiberius decried (this life).
On the Iterative Pluperfect, see below, 569,
ITERATIVE ACTION.
281
567. Postquam and the like, with the Present and Perfect
Indicative, assume a causative signification (compare quoniam,
now that = since) :
Curia minor mihi vidëtur posteäquam est major. Cic. Th« senate-house seems
to me smaller now that it is (really) greater.
Tremo horreöque post quamaspezi hanc. Ter. I quiver and shiver since I have
seen her.
So cum sometimes :
Gratulor tibi cum tantum valSs. Cic. I wish you joy now that you have so much
influence.
Iterative Action.
568. Eule I.—When two actions are repeated contempora¬
neously, both are put in tenses of continuance :
Humilës labörant ubi potentes dissident. Phaedr. The lowly suffer
when the powerful disagree.
Populus mê sîbilat ; at mihi piando ipse domî simulac nummös con¬
templer in arca. Hör. The people hiss me ; but I clap myself at home as soon
as I gloat o'er my cash in the strong box.
Ut quisque maxime laböräbat locus aut ipse occurrêbat aut aliquös
mittëbat. Liv. As each point was hard pressed, he would either hasten to help
himself or send some persons.
The Subjunctive with the Ideal Second Person :
Bonus segnior fit ubi negligäs. Sall. A good man becomes more slug¬
gish when you neglect him.
569. Eule II.—When one action is repeated before another,
the antecedent action is put in the Perfect, Pluperfect, or Fu¬
ture Perfect; the subsequent action, in the Present,Imperfect, or
Future, according to the relation.
As this use runs through all sentences involving antecedent action, all the
classes are represented in the following examples :
Remark.—Observe the greater exactness of the Latin expression. Comp. 236, R. 2.
Quotiës cecidit, surgit, As often as he falls, he rises.
Quotiës ceciderat, surgëbat, As often as he fell, he rose.
Quotiës ceciderit, surget, As often as he falls, he will rise.
Simul inflavit tïbicen ä perito carmen agnöscitur. CiC. As soon as the
fluter blows, the song is recognized by the connoisseur.
Alcibiadës simulac së remiserat, luxuriösus reperiëbâtur. Hep. As
soon as Alcibiadës relaxed, he was found a dd>auchee.
282
ITERATIVE ACTION.
Dociliöra sunt ingenia prius quam obdûruërunt. Quint. Minds are
more teachable before they (have) become hardened.
Ager quum multös ànnôs requiëvit, ûberiôrës eflferre frûgës solet. Cic.
When a field has rested (rests) many years, it usually produces a mare abun¬
dant crop.
Quum palam ëjus änuli ad palmam converterat G^gës,â nullö vidë-
bätur. Cíe. Wfienlevex) Gyges turned the bezel of the ring toward the palm
(of his hand), he was to be seen by no one.
Si pës condoluit, si dens, ferre non possumus. Cic. If afoot, if a tooth
cwheifi), we cannot endure it.
Stomachâbâtur senex, si quid asperius dixeram. Cic. old man
used to be fretted, if I said anything (that was) rather harsh.
Quod nön dedit fortuna non ëripit. Sen. What fortune has not given
(does not give), she does not take away.
Haerëbant in memoria quaecumque audierat et viderat [Themisto-
clësj. Nep. Whatever Themistocles had heard and seen {= heard and saw)
remained fixed in his memory.
Qui timëre dësierint, ödisse incipient. Tac. Those who cease to fear
will begin to hate.
The Subjunctive with the Ideal Second Person :
Ubi consulueris, mâtûrë facto opus est. Sall. When you have delibe¬
rated, you want speedy action.
The Subjunctive in Örätio Obliqua :
Cato miräri së ^ëbat quod non ridëret haruspex haruspicem cum
vidisset. Cic. Gato said that he wondered thai an haruspex did not laugh when
he saw (another) haruspex. (Nön ridet cum vidit.)
The Subjunctive by Attraction :
Rëte texunt araneolae ut si quid inhaeserit conficiant. Cic. (SI quid
inhaesit, conficiimt.)
Quârë fîëbat, ut omnium cculös, quotiëscunque in publicum prödisset,
ad sä converteret. Nep. (Quotiëscunque prödierat, ccnvertëbat.)
(666.)
Remark.—The Subjunctive (Imperf. and Pluperf.) is sometimes found in Iterative
Sentences—chiefly after the Imperf. Ind. or some combination which shows Wül, Habit,
Expectation. The construction is best explained by Partial Obliquity (509, 3). It. is found
chiefly in later historians and in Nepos. The passages in Cajssab are not numerous, and
some are uncertain.
Incurrere ea gens in Macedonian! sólita erat ubi r^eni occupätnm ezternS
bello sensisset. Liv. That tribe was wont to make a raid, on Macedonia whenever they
perceived the king engrossed in foreign war.
CONTEMPORANEOUS ACTION.
283
Qui únum ëjus ordinis offendlsset omnës adversSs habSbat. Liv. Whoso had
(fffended one of that order was sure to have aU against him.
Modum adbibendo ubi res posceret pribrSs eraut. Liv. By the use of moderation^
when the case demanded it, they were his superiors.
So sometimes the Perf. Subj. with the Pres. Indicative. Compare 666, R. 1.
IL CONTEMPORANEOUS ACTION.
570. Conjunctions used of Contemporaneous Action are,:
Dum, donee, while, so long as, until ; quoad, up to (the time)
that ; quamdiû, as long as ; cum, when.
An action may be contemporaneous in Extent—so long as,
while.
An action may be contemporaneous in Limit—until.
Remark.—Dum {whUé) yet, denotes duration, which may be coëxtensive, so long as,
or not. It is often causal. Donec (old form douicum, of uncertain composition), paral¬
lel with dum in the sense, so long as, until. Cicero uses it only as untU. Quum (cum)
demands a separate treatment.
1. Contemparaneous in Extent.
{So long as, while.)
571. Bum, donee, quoad, quamdiû, so long as, while, take the
Indicative of all the tenses.
Vita dum superest, bene est, Maecenas. While {so long as) life re¬
mains, His well.
Sibi verb banc laudem relinquunt, " Vixit, dum vixit, bene." Ter.
They leave indeed this praise for themselves, " He lived well while he lived "
(all the time).
Tiberius Gracchus tamdiü laudäbitur dum memoria rërum Römä-
nârum manëbit. Cic. Tiberius Graeehus shall he praised so long as the
memory of Boman history remains (shall remain).
Fuit haec gens fortis dum Lycùrgi lëgës vigëbant. CiC. This nation
was brave so long as the laws of Lycurgus were in force.
Dönec grätus eram tibi, Persärum viguî rëge beätior. Hör. While 1
was acceptable in your sight, I throve more blessed than Persia's king.
Quoad potuitj -restitit. Cic. As long as he could, he withstood.
Subjunctive in Oratio Obliqua :
[Rëgulus dixit] quamdiû jürejürandö hostium tenërëtur non esse së
senâtôrem. Cic. [Regulas said] that as long as he was bound by his oath to
the enemy he was not a Senalor. (Quamdiû teneor nön sum senator.)
284
CONTEMPORANEOUS ACTION.
Subjunctive by Attraction :
Paciam ut mei memineiis dum vîtam vivas. Plaut. (331.)
Remark.—When the actions are coextensive, the tenses are generally the same in
both members, but not always. Dum with the Pluperf. Ind. is used of the resulting con¬
dition : Liv. xxxii., 24.
572. Dum, while, while yet, commonly takes the Present In¬
dicative after all Tenses : so especially in narrative.
Here the Present Indicative is simply a tense of continuance rather
than an Historical Present, as it is commonly considered. 220 E.
Oape hunc equum, dum tibi vïrium aliquid superest. Lrv. Take this
horse, while you have yet some strength left.
Dum haec Römae aguntur, cónsules ambo in Liguribus gerëbant bel¬
lum. Liv. While these things were going on at Borne, both consuls were
carrying on war in fÂguria.
Praetermissa ejus reí occäsio est, dum in castellis recipiendis tempus
teritur. Lrv. The opportunity was allowed to slip hy, while time was wasted
in recovering miserahle forts.
Dum in this sense often resists the change into Snbj. in 5. 0. (658, R. 3.)
Remark.—The relation is often causal, and the construction is parallel with the Pre¬
sent Participle, the lack of which in the Passive it supplies.
Ardua dum metuunt (=metuentës) ämittuut vëra vial. Luob. (371. B. 7.)
IT. Contemporaneous in Limit.
( Until.)
573. Dum, dönec, quoad, up to (the time) that, until, have the
Present and Perfect and Future Perfect Indicative :
The Present is eithçr an Historical Present, or looks forward to the
Future. Dum, until, with the Future (of a state) is rare.
Txtyre, dum redeo, brevis est via, pasee capelläs. Vero. Tityrus,
while I am returning (= till I return)—the way is short—feed my kids.
Dpaminöndäs ferrum in corpore usque eo retinuit, quoad renûntiâ-
tum est vicisse Boeötiös. Nep. Epaminondas retained the iron in his
body, until word was brought back that the Boeotians had conquered.
Donee rediit Marcellus, silentium fiiit. Liv. Until Marcellus returned,
there was silence.
Haud dësinam donee perfëcerô. Ter, I will not cease until I have
(shall have) accomplished (it).
Dxspectâbo dum venit. Ter. I will wait until he comes.
Subjunctive in Oratio Obliqua :
Scipiöni Sîlânëque dönec revocâtî ab senätü forent prorogatum im-
perium est. Liv. Sci'pio and Silanus had their command extended untü
" they should have been recalled by the senateP
DUM WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE.
285
574. Dum, dönec, and quoad, until, take the Subjunctive when
Suspense and Design are involved :
Verginius dum collëgam consxüeret morätus est. Lrv. Verginius
delayed until he could (long enough to) consult Ms colleague.
At tibi sit tanti non indulgëre theâtrïs, dum bene dë vacuo pectore
cëdat amor. Ov. But let it he worth the cost to you (= deem it worth the
cost) not to indulge in play-going, until love he fairly gone from (your) unten¬
anted hosom.
Often with exspecto, I wait :
Rüstious exspeotat dum dëfluat amnis. Hob. The clown waits for the
river to run off (dry).
Also : exspectäre ut, si (never Infinitive), 462, 2.
Eemaek.—The Subjunctive is sometimes used in narrative with dum, while, and
donee, while, until, to express subordination (lU^e Cum, 585). The principle is that of
Partial Obliquity. There is often a Causal or Iterative sense.
Dum intentus in eum si rex totus averteret, alter ëlâtam secürim in caput
dëjëcit. Biv. While the king fixed upon him was quite turned away, the other raised his
axe and planted it in his skull. (Averteret from the point of view of alter = dum videt
avertentem.)
575. Dum, with the Subjunctive, is used in Conditional
Wishes : Negative, dum nê = nö interim.
Ödeiint dum metuant. Attius. Let them hate so long as they fear (pro¬
vided that, if they will only fear).
Dumnë ob malefaota peream parvî [id] aestimo. Plaut. (379.)
So also dummodo, modo, provided only, only :
Dummodo möräta rectë veniat, dötäta est satis. Plaut. Provided,
only she come with a good character, she is endoweddowry is) enough.
Multa [in eo] admiranda sunt : ëligere modo oûrae sit. Quint. Many
things in him are to he admired ; only you must he careful to choose.
Copia plâcandi sit modo parva tul. O v. (429, H. 1.)
III. SUBSEQUENT ACTION.
Antequam and Priusquam with the Indicative.
576. Antequam and priusquam, before, take the Present, Per¬
fect, and Future Perfect Indicative, when the limit is stated as
a fact. The Present is used in anticipation of the Future.
The elements ante, anted, prius-quam, are often separated.
Kmmakk.—As prius (ante) -quam is negative in its signification (= necdum), the
Ind. is sometimes found where we should expect the Subjunctive.
286
ANTBQUAM AND PRIUSQUAM.
577. The Present Indicative is used after Positive Sentences
Antequam ad sententiam redeo, de me pauca dicam. CiC. Before 1
return to the subject, 1 will say a few things of myself
Omnia expeiiri certum est priusquam pereo. Ter. I am determined to
try everything before I perish. (Priusquam peream = sooner them perish,
to keep from perishing.)
Remark.—The Pure Perfect Indicative is used of Iterative Action. (569.)
Dociliora sunt ingenia priusquam obduruSrunt. Quint.
The Present Subjunctive is more common in general statements.
578. The Perfect (Aorist) and Future Perfect Indicative are
used, especially after Negative Sentences. After Positive Sen¬
tences there is no necessary connection.
liëgâtî non ante profectî quam impositös in naves miHtês vîdërunt.
Liv. The envoys did not set out until they saw the soldiers on board.
Neque dëfatîgâbor antequam illörmn viäs ratiônësque percëpero et
pro omnibus et contra omnia dîsputandï. CiC. 1 will not Ut myself grow
weary before (until) 1 learn (shall have learned) their methods of disputing for
and against everything.
Subjunctive in Örätio Obliqua :
Themistoclës collëgïs suis praedïxit, ut në prius Lacedaemoniërum
lëgâtôs dîmitterent quam ipse esset remissus. Nef. (546.) (Nôlîte di-
mittere priusquam ego ero remissus.)
Antequam and Priusquam with the Subjunctive.
579. Antequam and priusquam are used with the Subjunctive
when an ideal limit is given ; when the action is expected, con¬
tingent, designed, or subordinate.
An ideal limit involves necessary antecedence, but not necessary con¬
sequence. After Positive sentences, the Subjunctive is the rule, especially
in Generic sentences and in narrative. (Compare cum, 586.) After
Historical Tenses the Subjunctive is almost invariable when the action
does not, or is not to, take place.
The translation is often before, and the verbal in -ing.
Ante vidëmus fulgurätiönem quam sonum audiämus. Sen. We see
the flash of lightning before hearing the sound (we may never hear it).
In omnibus negotiis priusquam aggrediäre adhibenda est praeparatio
diligens. Cic. In all affairs, before addressing yourself (to them), you must
make use of careful preparation. (Ideal Second Person.)
CONSTEUCTIOltS OF CUM.
287
Collem celeriter priusquam ab adversäriis sentiätur commünit. Caes.
He speedily fortified the hill before he was perceived by the enemy (too soon to
be perceived by the enemy). (Prius quam = prius quam ut.)
Hannibal omnia priusquam excederet pugna erat expertus. Lrv.
Hannibal had tried everything before withdrawing from the fight ( = to avoid
withdrawing from the fight).
Saepe magna indoles virtûtis prius quam reí pûblioae prödesse potu-
isset exstinota fuit. Cic. Often hath great native worth been extinguished
before it could be of service to the State.
Duoentis annis antequam urbem Römam caperent in Italiam Galli
dëscendërunt. Liv. (It was) two hundred years before their taking Rome
(that) the Gauls came down into Italy.
Here the Subjunctive gives the natural point of reference.
After the Negative :
Inde non prius ëgressus est quam (= ibi manëbat dum) rëx eum
in fidem reciperet. Nep. He did not came out until the king should take
him under his protection. (He stayed to make the king take him under
his protection.)
Remabk.—When the will is involved, potius quam, iß used in the same way as prius
quam.
SëpuguS potius quam servias. Cíe. Fight it out rather than be a slave.
IV. CONSTRUCTIONS OF OUM (QUUM).
680. Cum is a relative conjunction, and stands nearer to the
Ablative than to the Accusative in signification, perhaps also in
form (quo(fi)m). Cum is the classic spelling, as well as the
classic pronunciation.
581. There are three great uses of cum :
I. Temporal cum {when—then) takes the Indicative ;
II. Historical cum, as, the Imperfect and Pluperfect Sub¬
junctive ;
III. 1. Causal cum, as, since ; and
2. Concessive cum, whereas, although, takes the Subjunc¬
tive.
I. Cum vër appétit, militës ex hîbemîs movent. When spring ap¬
proaches, soldiers move out of winter-quarters.
II. Cum vër appeteret, Hannibal ex hîbemîs mSvit, As spring was
approaching (spring approaching), Hannibal moved out of winter-quarters.
III. 1. Cum vër appetat, ex hîbemîs movendum est, As (since) spring
is approaching, we must move out of winter-quarters.
288
TEMPORAL CUM.
III. 2. Cum ver appeteret, tarnen hostês ex hîbemis non mSvërunt,
Whereas (although) spring was approaching, nevertheless the enemy did not
move out of winter-quarters.
Rkmark.—So called cum inversum (cum in the apodosis) is as natural in English as
in Latin. The mood is the Indicative.
J am ver appetSbat, cum Hannibal ex hibernls mbvit. Lit. Spring was (already)
approaching, when Hannibal moved out of winter-quarters.
An illustrative fact is sometimes added by cum, interim, quidem, etc., with the
Indicative.
I. Temporal Cum.
582. Cum, luhen, is used with all the tenses of the Indicatiye,
to designate merely temporal relations.
In the Principal clause, a temporal adverb or temporal expression is fre¬
quently employed, such as tum, tunc, then; nunc, now; dies, day ; tempus,
time ; jam, already ; vix, scarcely ; and the like.
Animus, neo cum adest neo cum disoëdit, appäret. Cic. TKe soul is not
visible, either when it is present, oi' when it departs.
Sex libros tuno dë Rëpûblioâ sorîpsimus cum gubemäoula reïpûblioae
tenëbâmus. Cic. I wrote the six books about the State at the time when I held
the helm of the State.
Recordare tempus illud cum pater Cûrio ma,erens jaoëbat in leotö.
Cic. Remember the time when Curio the father lay abed from grief.
Longum illud tempus cum non ero magis më movet quam hoc exi-
guum. Cic. That long time (to come), when I shall not exist, hm m<yre effect
on me than this scant (present time).
Jam dllûoesoëbat cum signum consul dedit. Liv. By this time day
was beginning to dawn, when the consul gave the signal. (See 581, R)
Ideal Second Person with the Subjunctive :
Pater, homintun immortalis est infamia. Etiam tum vlvit cum esse
crëdâs mortuam. Plaut. Father, immortal is the iUrfame of the world. It
lives on even when you think that it is dead.
Remarks.—1. Fuit cum commonly follows the analogy of other characteristic rela¬
tives (6.34), and takes the Subjunctive :
Fuit tempus cum (=fuit cum) rüra colerent homines. Varro. There was a time
when alt mankind tilled fields — were countrymen.
The Indicative is rare.
2. Meminl cum, I remember the time when, takes the Indicative ; but audire CUm
takes the Subjunctive parallel with the Participle :
Audivi Mëtrodôrum cum dë his ipsis disputaret. Cic. I have heard Metrodoms
£í¿scMí«(ing) these very matters.
3. Peculiar is the use of cum with Lapses of Time. Lapses of Time are treated as
Designations of Time in Accusative or Ablative :
Hultl anni sunt cum (= multSs aunSs) in aere me5 est. IJt is) many years (that)
he has been (221) in my debt.
HISTORICAL CUM.
289
Multl annî sunt cum (= multis annis) in aere meö n5n fuit. It is many years
that he has not been (since he was) in my debt.
Nondum centum et decem anni sunt cum (= ez qu5 = abhinc annos) dS pe-
cûniîs repetundis lata lex est. Cic, It is not yet 110 years since the law concerning ex¬
tortion was proposed.
583. Coincident Action.—When the actions of the two
clauses are coincident, citm is almost equivalent to its kindred
relative quod, in that :
Cuia tacent, clamant. Cic. When (= in that) they are dlent^ they cry
ahud.
DÎXÎ omnia cum hominem nôminâvî. Flir. Ef. I hare said everything^
in naming the man.
584. Conditional use of Cum.—Cum with the Future, Future
Perfect, or Universal Present, is often almost equivalent to si,
if with which it is sometimes interchanged :
Cum poscis, posee Latine. Juv. When (If) you ask (for anything),
ask in Latin.
Cum veniet contra, digito compesce labellum. Juv. When (If) he
meets you^ padlock your lip with your finger.
585. Iterative use of Cum.—Cum in the sense of quelles, as
often as, takes the Tenses of Iterative Action :
Solet cum se purgat in me conferre omnem culpam. GiC. He is accus¬
tomed^ when he clears himself, to put off all the blame on me.
Ager cum multos annos requievit überiöres efiferre frûgës solet. CiC.
Cum palam ejus anuli ad palm am converterat Gyges ä nullö vidëbâ-
tur. Cío. (569.)
Rbmabk.—The Subjunctive is also found (569, R.) :
Cum in jtis dUcI d6bit5rem vidissent, undique convolSbant. Liv. Whemwr
they saw a dfbtor taken to court, they made it a rule to hurry together from cdl quarters.
II. HistoricaX Cum.
586. Cum, token {as), is used in narrative with the Imperfect
Subjunctive of contemporaneous action, with the Pluperfect
Subjunctive of antecedent action.
Remark.—The subordinate clause generally precedes, and often indicates Causal as
well as Temporal relation. The Subjunctive in some cases seems to be due to the Latin
tendency to express inner connection (evolution) by the Subjunctive. In the absence
fd participles, cum with the Subjunctive is a parallel construction.
13
390
CAUSAL AND CONCESSIVE CUM.
Agêsilâus cum ex Aegyptö reverterêtur dëcessit. Nep. AgesUaus
died as he was returning from Egypt.
Zênônem cum Athênîs essem audiëbam firequenter. Cío. When I was
(Being) at Athens.^ I heard Zeno frequently.
Athëniensës cum statuèrent ut naves conscenderent, 03rrsilum quen-
dam suädentem ut in urbe menèrent, lapidibus coôperuêrunt. Cíe.
(546.)
Cum Caesar Ancônam occupässet, urbem relîquimus. Cío. When
(As) Caesar had occupied Ancona (Caesar having occupied Ancona), lieft the
city.
Attalus moritur altero et septuägesimö anno, cum quattuor et qua-
drägintä annös regnässet. Lrv. Attalus died in Ms seventy-second year^
having reigned forty-four years.
III. Causal and Concessive Cum.
1. Causal Cum.
587. Cum, ivlien^ loJiereas, since, seeing that, with the Sub-
junctive, is used to denote the reason, and occasionally the
motive, of an action :
Quae cum ita sint, affectum est nihil esse malum quod turpe non sit.
Cic. Since these things are so, it is made out (proved) that nothing is bad that
is not dishonorable.
Cum Athënâs tanquam ad mercätüram bonärum artium sis profectus,
inänem redire turpissimum est. CiC. As (Since) you set out for Athens as
if to market for good qualities, it would be utterly disgraceful to return empty
(handed).
Dolo erat pugnandum, cum par nSn esset armis. Nep. He had to fight
by stratagem, as he (seeing that he) was not a match in arms.
Kbmaek.—The Subjunctive is used because the relation is a mere conception (charac¬
teristic) ; that it is a mere conception is emphasized by quippe and utpote, as in the
relative sentence.
On the occasional use of cum with the Ind. in a causal sense, see 567. Oftener in
earlier Latin.
3. Concessive Cum.
588. Causal cum, whereas, becomes Concessive cum, whereas,
although, when the cause is not sufiScient : the relation is often
adversative.
Nihil me adjûvit cum posset. Cio. He gave me no assistance, although
(at a time when) he had it in his power.
Cum prîmï ordinës hostium concidissent, tamen âcerrimë reliqui re-
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
291
sistëbant. Caes. Although the first ranks of the enemy had fallen (been cut
to pieces), nevertheless the rest resisted most vigorously.
Perîre artem putamus nisi appäret, cum desinat ars esse, si apparet.
Quint. We think that (our) art is lost unless it shows, whereas it ceases to he
art if it shows.
589. Cmn—^tum.—When cum, wheuj turn, tJien {hoth—and
especially), have the same verb, the verb is put in the Indica¬
tive :
Fausauias consilia cum patriae tum sibi inimica capiebat. l^EF.
Pausanias conceived plans that were hurtful both to his country and especially
to himself.
When they have different verbs, the verb with cum may be
in the Subjunctive, which often has a concessive force :
Sisennae historia cum facile omnes superiores vincat, tum indicat
tamen quantum absit ä summö. Cíe. Although the history of Sisenna easily
surpasses all former histories, yet it shows how far it is from the highest
(mark).
Conditional Sentences.
590. In Conditional sentences the clause which contains
the condition (supposed cause) is called the Protasis, that which
contains the consequence is called the Apodosis.
Logically, Protasis is Premiss ; and Apodosis, Conclusion.
Grammatically, the Apodosis is the Principal, the Protasis the
Dependent, clause.
591. Sign of the Conditional.—The common conditional
particle is si, if.
Remarks.—1. SI is a locative case, literally so, in those circumstances (comp. sI-C, so).
50 in English : " I would by combat make her good, so were I a man."—Shakesf.
Hence, Conditional clauses with si may be regarded as adverbs in the Ablative case,
and are often actually i-epresented by the Ablative Absolute. ^
2. The connection with the Causal Sentence is shown by sî quidem, which in later
Latin is almost = qaoniaill.
3. The temporal particles cum and quando, when, and the locative ubi, are also used
to indicate conditional relations in which the idea of Time or Space is involved.
592. Negative of si.—The negative of si is either si non or nisi.
51 non negatives a particular word, if not ; nisi, unless, nega¬
tives the whole idea—restricts, excepts.
Si non is the rule—
292
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
1. When the positive of the same verb precedes :
Si fëcerïs, magnam habëbo grätiam 5 si non fëcens, ignSsoam. Cic.
If you do it, I will be very grateful to you; if you do not, I will forgive (you).
2. When the Condition is concessive :
Si mihi bona rëpûblicâ frui non licuerit, at carëbo mala. CiC. If I
shall Twt be allowed to enjoy good government, I shall at least be rid of bad.
Nisi is in favorite use after negatives :
Parvi (= nihili) sunt foris arma nisi est consilium domi. CiC. Qf
little (value) are arms abroad unless there is wisdom at home.
Non possem vîvere nisi in litteris viverem. Cic. I could not live un¬
less I lived in study.
Memoria minuituur nisi eam exerceas. Cic. Memory wanes unless (ex¬
cept) you exercise it. (Si non exerceäs, in case you fail to exercise it)
So nisi si, except in case :
Miseros illûdi nölunt hominës nisi si së forte jactant. CiC. Men do not
like to have the unfortunate mocked unless (except in case) they happen to
swagger.
Remarks.—1. Sometimes the difiTerence is nnessentiai :
Nisi Curio fuisset, hodië të muscae comëdissent. Quint. If it had mt been Jar
Curio, the flies would have eaten you up this day. Si nën fuisset would be equally correct.
2. Nisi and nisi si are often used after negative sentences or equivalents in the signi¬
fication of but, except, besides, only ;
Inspice quid portem ; nihil hie nisi triste vidëhis, Ov. Examine what lam
bringing ; you will see nothing here except (what is) sad.
Falsus honor juvat et mendaz infamia terret, quem nisi mendäcem et men-
dösum ? Hör. " False honor charms and lying slander scares, whom but the false and
faulty f—Brougham.
3. Nisi quod introduces an actual limitatiou—with the exception, that:
Nihil acciderat [Folycrati] quod nöllet nisi quod anulum quS dëlectâbâtur
in mari abjëcerat. Cíe. Nothing had happened to Polycrates that he could not have
wished, except that he had thrown into the sea a ring in which he took delight (= a favorite
ring). So praeterquam quod.
Nihil peccat nisi quod nihil peccat. Plin. Ep. He makes no blunder except—that
he makes no blunder (" faultily faultless ").
4. Nisi forte, unless perhaps, nisi vërô, unless indeed, with the Indicative, either
limits a previous statement, or makes an ironical concession :
Nëmo ferë saltat söbrius nisi forte insanit. Cic. There is scarce any one that
dances (when) sober, unless perhaps he is cracked.
Licet honesta morte dëfungi, nisi forte satius est victSris exspectäre arbi-
trium. Curt. We are free to die an honorable death, unless perhaps it is better to awai*
the pleasure of the conqueror.
5. Ni is antiquated or poetical, and is equivalent to si nën :
Ni pârëre velis, pereundum erit ante lucernas. Juv. (532, R. 3.)
So in oaths, promises, and the like (probably also in quid ni and nimirum) :
Feream ni piscem putävi esse. Varro. May I die if Ididnotthinkitwasajish.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
293
593. Two Conditions excluding each the other.—When two
conditions exclude each the other, si is used for the first; sin, if
not (but if), for the second.
Sin is further strengthened by autem, hut ; minus, less {not) j
secus, otherwise j aliter, else :
Mercâtûra, sí tenuis est, sórdida putanda est ; sin magna et copiosa,
non est admodum vituperanda. Cic. Mercantile business, if it is petty, is
to be considered dirty (work) ; if (it is) not (petty, but) great and abundant
(= conducted on a large scale), it is not to be found fault with much.
BEMARK.^If the Verb or Predicate is to be supplied from the context, si minus, if
less (not), sin minus, sin aliter, if otherwise, are commonly used, rarely si non :
!Êdûc tëcum omnës tuös ; si minus, quam plürimös. Cío. Take out with you aU
your (followers) ; if not, as many as possible.
Odero si poterö ; si non, invitus amabo. Ov. (234, B. 2.)
594. Other Forms of the Protasis.—1. The Protasis may be
expressed by a Kelative :
Qui vidiret urbem captam dicer et. Cic. Whoso had seen it, had said
that the city was taken.
Mirârëtur qui turn cerneret. Lrv. (252.)
2. The Protasis may be contained in a Participle :
Sr latet ars, prSdest \ affert deprensa pudörem. Ov. If art is concealed,
it does good ; (if) detected, it brings shame.
Maximas virtûtës jacëre omnës necesse est voluptâte dominante.
Cío. All the greatest virtues must necessa/rily lie prostrate^ if the pleasure (of
the senses) is mistress.
Nihil potest ëvenire nisi causa antecëdente. CiC. Nothing can happen^
unless a cause precede.
3. The Protasis may be involved in a modifier :
Fëcërunt servi Milônis quod su5s quisque servos in tali rë facere
voluisset. Cic. TTi£ servants of Milo did what each man would have wished
his servants to do in such case (si quid tale accidisset).
At bene non poterat sine pürö pectore vivi, LuCR. But there could be
no good living without a clean heart (nisi purum pectus esset).
4. The Protasis may be expressed by an Interrogative, or,
what is more common, by an Imperative :
Tristis es ? indignor quod sum tibi causa doloris. Ov. (542.)
294
LOGICAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
Cedit amor rebus : res age, tütus eris. Ov. I/)ve yields to huslness ; do
business (if you plunge into business), you will be safe.
Immütä verbörum coUocätionem, perierit tota res. Cic. (236, R. 4.)
595. Correlatives of Si.—The correlatives of Si are : Sic, so ;
ita, thus ; but they are commonly not expressed. Occasionally
tum, then j and eâ con^ciöne, on those terins, are employed.
De frümentö responsum est ita ûsûrum eo populum Römäniun, si pre-
tium acciperent. Lrv. In the matter of the com, answer was made that the
Boman people would avail themselves of it, m condition that they accepted the
value.
CLASSIFICATION OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
596. Conditional sentences may be divided into three classes,
according to the character of the Protasis : *
I. Logical Conditional Sentences : Si, with the Indicative.
II. Ideal Conditional Sentences : Si, with Present and Per¬
fect Subjunctive.
III. Unreal Conditional Sentences: Si, with Imperfect and
Pluperfect Subjunctive.
I. LOGICAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
597. The Logical Conditional Sentence simply states the
elements in question, according to the formula :
If this is so, then that is so ; if this is not so, then that is not
so.
It may be compared with the Indicative Question.
The Protasis is in the Indicative ; the Apodosis is generally in
the Indicative ; but in future relations any equivalent of the
Future (Subjunctive, Imperative) may be used.
♦ In some grammars of Greek and Latin, conditional sentences, and sentences involv¬
ing conditional relations, have been divided into •particular and general. Whether a con¬
dition he particular or general depends simply on the character of the Apodosis. Any
form of the Conditional Sentence may be general, if it implies a rule of action. The
forms for Iterative action have been given. (568, 569.)
LOGICAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
295
Protasis.
Apodosis.
erras,
Si id ere dis,
If you believe that.
you are going wrong.
errabas.
Si id ore debas.
If you believed that.
you were going wrong.
errasti,
Si id credidisti,
If you (have) believed that.
you have gone (yoa went) wrong.
errabis,
Si id ore dès.
If you (shall) believe thai.
you will (he) g'íKing) wrong ; (234,
erräveris.
Si id credideris.
If you (shall have) believeiS) that.
you will have gone (will go) wrong.
erras,
Si quid credidisti.
If you have believed anything
(= when you believe anything).
you go wrong. Comp. 569.
errabas,
Si quid crëdiderâs,
If you had believed anything
(= when you believed anything).
you went wrong.
Si spiritum dûcit, vivit. Cic. If he is drawing (his) hreath (breathing)
he is living.
Parvi sunt foris arma nisi est consilium demi. CiC. (412, R. 1.)
Si occidi, recte feci ; sed non occidi. Quint. If I killed him, I did
right ; hut I did not kill him.
Nätüram si sequemur ducem, nunquam aberrabimus. CiC. If we
(shall) follow nature (as our) guide, we shall never go astray.
Improbos si meus consulätus sustulerit, multa saecula propägärit rei
pûblicae. Cío. If my consulship shall have done away with the destructives,
it will have added many ages to the life of the State.
Si*pes condoluit, si dens, ferre non possumus. CiO. (569.)
Stomachäbätur senex, si quid asperius dîxeram. CiC. (569.)
Vivam, si vivet ; si cadet ilia, cadam. Prop. Let me live, if she lives ;
if she falls, let me fall.
Nunc si forte potes, sed nön potes, optima coiqux, fînitis gaudë tot
mihi morte malis. Ov. Now, if haply you can, but you cannot, noble wife,
rejoice that so many evils have been finished for me by death.
Flectere si nequeö superös, Acheronta movëbô. Vero. If I carCt
bend the gods above, III rouse (all) hdl below.
Si tot exempla virtütis nön movent, nihil unquam movëbit ; si tanta
clâdës vilem vitam nön fëcit, nulla faciet. Lrv. If so many examples of
valor stir you not, nothing will ever do it ; if so great a disaster has not made
life cheap, none ever will.
Dësinës timëre si spërâre dësieris. Sen. You wiU cease to fear, if you
(shall ham) cease(d) to hope.
Remarks.—1. After a Verb of Saying or Thinking (Oratio Obliqua), the Protasis
must be put in the Subjunctive, according to the rule.
296
IDEAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
(SI id crëdis, erras.) Dice, t6, si id crSdSs. errSre.
dixl, tS. si id crëderës, errare.
(Si id orëdës, errSbis.) Dice, të, si id crëdâs, errätürum esse.
dîxl, të, si id crëderës, errätürum esse.
(SI id crëdidisti, errâstl.) Dîco, të, si id crëdiderïs, errasse.
dixl, të, si id crëdidissës, errasse.
For examples, see Örätio Obliqua, 66Q.
2. The Subjunctive is used by Attraction :
Bëte texunt aräneolae ut si quid inbaeserit conficiaut. Cic. (SI quid inhaesit,
conficiunt.) (667.)
3. The Ideal Second Person takes the Subjunctive in connection with the Universal
Present :
Senectûs plëna est voluptätis si illa scias ütl. Sen. Old age is f vil of pleasure^
if you know (if one knows) îiow to enjoy it.
Memoria minuitur nisi eam exerceas. Cic. (592.)
4. SIve—Sive (seu—seu) almost invariably takes the Logical form. (499.)
Seu vlcit,fer5citerinstat victis ; seu victus est, instaurât cum victSribus cer¬
tamen. Lrv. If he vanquishes (569), he presses the vanquished furiously ; if he is V(m-
quished, he renews the struggle with the vanquishers.
II. IDEAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
598. The Ideal Conditional Sentence represents the matter
as still in suspense. The supposition is more or less fanciful,
and DO real test is to be applied. There is often a wish for or
against.
The Protasis is put in the Present Subjunctive for continued
action, and in the Perfect Subjunctive for completion or attain¬
ment.
The Apodosis is in the Present or Perfect Subjunctive.
The Imperative and Future Indicative or equivalents are often
found. The Universal Present is frequently used, especially in
combination with the Ideal Second Person (597, E. 3, 666, E. 1).
On the difference between Subjunctive and Future, see 250.
Protasis. Apodosis.
Si id crëdâs, erres,
If you should (were to) believe that, you would be going wrong.
Si id crëdâs, errâveris.
If you should (were to) believe that, you would go wrong.
Si id crëdiderïs, errës,
1. If you should (prove to) have believed
that (Perfect ; Action Past or Future), you would be going wrong.
2. If you should (come to) believe that
(Aor. ; Action Future), you would be going wrong.
Si id crëdiderïs (rare), errâveris.
If you (should have) bdieveiS) that, you would (have) S'o(ne) wrong.
UNEEAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
297
Si vicinus tuus equum meliorem habeat quam tuus est, tuumne equum
Txiâlîa an illius ? Cic. If your neighbor (were to) have a better horse than
yours IS, would you prefer your horse or his ?
Si gladium quis apud të sänä mente dëposuerit, repetat insäniens,
reddere peccätum sit, officium non reddere. CiC. If a man in sound
mind were to deposit (to have deposited) a sword with you (and), reclaim it
(when) mad, it would be wrong to return it, right not to return it.
Si nunc më suspendam meam operam lüserim, et meis inimicis volup-
tätem creâverim. Plaut. Should I hang myself now, I should (thereby)
(have) fool{ed) my work away, and givelyx) to my enemies a charming treat.
Ut redeant veterës : Ciceroni nëmo ducentôs nunc dederit nummës
nisi fulserit änulus ingens. Juv. Let the ancients return : no one would
give Cicero now-a-days two hundred two-pences unless a huge ring glittered (on
his hand).
Si is dëstituat, nihil satis tûtum habëbis. Lrv. Should he have us in the
lurch, you will find no safety.
Si valeant hominës, ars tua, Phoebe, jacet. Ov. Should men keep well^
your art, Phoebus, is naught.
Öüa si tollas, periëre Cupidinis arcüs. Ov. (195, R. 6.)
Senectûs est plëna voluptâtis, si illa scias ûti. Sen. (597, R. 3.)
Memoria minuitur nisi earn exerceäs. CiC. (592.)
Nulla est excüsätio peccäti, si amici causa peccäveris. CiG. It is no
excuse for a sin to have sinned for the sake of a friend.
Eehârks.—1. The Potential of the Past coincides in form with the Unreal of the
Present. (Comp. 252, E. 2.) Clear examples of definite persons are rare. Hob. Sat. 1.3,5.
Of indefinite persons: MlrSrStur qui turn cerneret. Liv. (252.)
So, Erat Quinctius, si cëderës, pläcäbilis. Lit. Quinctius was, if ym yielded to
Äiffi,(sure to be) placable. (Est si cëdSs.)
Si luxuriae temperaret, avaritiam n5n timërës. Tac. If he were to control his
love of pleasure, you should not have feared avarice. (Si temperet, nSn timeas.)
2. The lively fancy of the Roman often employs the Ideal where we should expect the
Unreal. (Comp. 248, R. 2.)
Tú si hie sis, aliter sentiäs. Teb. If you were I (Put yourself in my place), you
would think differently.
Haec si tëcum patria loquätur, nonne impetrare dëbeat 1 Cíe. If your country
should (were to) speak thus with you, ought she not to get (what she wants) ?
In comparing Ideal and Unreal Conditionals, exclude future verbs such as posse, and
velle. &c. The future sense of such unreal conditionals comes from the auxiliary.
Sometimes the conception shifts in the course of a long sentence :
Si reviviscant et tëcum loquantur—quid talibus viris respondërës 1 Cic. If
they should come to life again, and speak with you—what answer would you make to such
men?
3. In Oratio Obliqua the difl'erence between Ideal and Logical Future is necessarily
effaced, so far as the mood is concerned. (659.)
III. UNREAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
599. The Unreal Conditional sentence is used of that which
is Unfulfilled or Impossible, and is expressed by the Imperfect
13*
298
UNREAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
Subjunctive for continued action—generally, in opposition to
the Present ; and by the Pluperfect Subjunctive—uniformly in
opposition to the Past.
The notion of Impossibility comes from the irreversible character of the
Past Tense. Compare the Periphrastic Conjug. Perfect and Imperfect.
Any action that is decided is considered Past. (Comp. 266, R. 3.)
Protasis. Apodosis.
Si id crëderës, errârës,
If you Mieved (were believing) that, [you do not,] you would be going wrong.
Si id crëdidissës, errâvissës,
If you had believed that, [you did not,] you would have gone wrong.
Sapientia non expeterëtur, sí nihil efficeret. Cic. Wisdom would not
be sought after, if it did no practical good.
Caederem të, nisi Irascerer. Sen. I should flog you, if I were not getting
angiy.
Si ibi të esse scissem, ad të ipse vënissem. CiC. If I had hnown you
were there, I should have come to you myself.
Hectora qnis nôsset, si fëlix Troja fuisset. Ov. Who would know (of)
Hector, if Troy had been happy ?
Nisi ante Roma profectus essës, nunc earn certë relinquerës. CiC. If
you had not departed from Rome before, you would certainly leave it now.
Ego nisi peperissem, Roma non oppugnârëtur ; nisi filiiun habërem,
libera in libera patria mortua essem. Liv. Had I not become a mother,
Rome would not be besieged ; had I not a son, I should have died a free woman
in a free land.
Remarks.—1. The Imperfect Subjunctive is sometimes used in opposition to con¬
tinuance in the Past. This is necessarily the case when the Protasis is in the Imperfect,
and the Apodosis in the Pluperfect, except when the Imperfect denotes opposition to a
general statement, which holds good both for Past and for Present :
Nön tarn facile opës Carthäginis tantae concidissent, nisi Sicilia clSssibus
nôstrîs patëret. Cíe. The great resources of Carthage (Carthage with her great re¬
sources) would not have fallen so readily, if Sicily had not been open to our fleets.
Si pudorem habërës, ultimam mihi pensiönem mihi remlsissës. Sek. If you
had (— you had not, as you have not) any delicacy, you would have let me off from the last
payment.
Memoriam ipsam cum v5ce perdidissëmus, si tam in nostra potestate esset
ohllvisci quam tacëre. Tac. We should have lost memory itself, together with utterance,
if it were as much in our powes' to forget as to keep silent.
The Imperfect in both members is rare :
SI Frôtogenës lalysum ilium suum caend oblitum vidëret, magnum, crëdo, ac-
ciperet dolörem. Cic. If Brotogenes had seen thai famous lalyms of his besmeared loith
mud, he would have felt a mighty pang.
Perhaps this may be regarded as a form of Repraesentätio. (659, R.)
2. In Unreal Conditions, the Apodosis is sometimes expressed by the Imperfect In¬
dicative, when the action is represented as interrupted (224) ; by the Pluperfect and His¬
torical Perfect, when the conclusion is confidently anticipated. (246, R. 3.)
UNREAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
299
LabSbar longius, nisi mg retinuissem- Cic. (346, R. 3.)
Omnino erat supervacua doctrina, si natura sufficeret. Quint.
Peractum erat bellum, si Pompëjum opprimere Brundusii potuisset. Flob.
The war was (had been) finished, if he had been able to crush Pompey at Brundusium.
The Imperfect Indicative is sometimes found in the Protasis :
Ipsam tibi epistolam misissem, nisi tam subito frätris puer proficiscëbâtur.
Cíe. 1 should have sent you the letter itself, if my brothers servant was not starting so
suddenly.
3. The Indicative is the regular construction with verbs which signify Possibility or
Power, Obligation or Necessity—so with the Active and Passive Periphrastic—vix,
paene, scarcely, hardly, and the like.
Consul esse qui potui, nisi eum vitae cursum tenuissem ? Cic. Bow could I have
been consul, if I had not kept that course of life f
Anton! potuit gladiös contemnere, si sic omnia dixisset. Jur. He might have
despised Antony''s swords, if he had thus said all (that he did say).
Ëmendâtûrus, si licuisset, eram. Ov. I should have removed the faults, if I had been
free (to do it).
In bona ventûrus, si paterëre (R. 1,) fuit. Ov. Be would have come into (my) pro¬
perty, if you had permitted it.
Pons iter paene bostibus dedit (paene dedit = dabat = datürus erat,) ni ûnus
vir fuisset. Liv. The bridge well nigh gave a passage to the enemy, had it not been fw one.
man.
4. In OrStio Obliqua the Protasis is unchanged ; the Apodosis is formed by the
Periphrastic Present and Perfect Infinitive (149), for the Active, futurum (fore) ut, fu¬
turum fuisse ut for Passive and Supineless Verbs.
A. Dico (dixi), të, si id crëderës, errâtûrum esse.
B. Dico (dixi),të, si id crëdidissës, errâtûrum fuisse.
A. Dico (dixi), si id crëderës, fore ut dëciperëris.
B. Dico (dixi), si id crëdidissës, futurum fuisse ut dëciperëris.
A is very rare ; A, theoretical. For the long form, B, the simple Perfect Infinitive is
found. Examples, see 663, R.
5. When the Apodosis of an Unreal Conditional is made to depend on a sentence
which requires the Subjunctive, the Pluperfect is turned into the Periphrastic Perfect
Subjunctive; the Imperfect form is unchanged.
Non dubito, ' quin, si id crëderës, errârës,
1 do not doubt, that, if you believed that, you would be going wrong.
Non dubitäbam, quin, si id crëdidissës, errätürus fueris,
I did not doubt, J that, if you had believed that,you would have gone wremg.
Honestum tale est ut, vel si ignërârent id hominës, esset laudâbile. Cío.
Virtue is a thing to deserve praise, even if men did not know it.
Nec dubium erat quin, si tam pauci simul obire omnia possent, terga datürl
hostës fuerint- Liv. There was no doubt that, if it had been possible for so small a num¬
ber to have managed every thing at the same time, the enemy would have turned their
backs.
Die quidnam factürus fuerïs, si eö tempore censor fuissës ? Lrv. Tell (me) what
you would have done, if you had beeñ censor at that time ?
Ade5 inopiâ coactus est Hannibal, ut, nisi turn fugae speciem abeundS
timuisset, Galliam repetitûrus fuerit, Liv. Hannibal was so hard pressed by want
of provisions, that, had he not at the time feared (presenting) the appearance of flight by re¬
treating, he would have gone back to Gaul.
The Periphrastic Pluperfect Subjunctive occurs rarely, and then only in the Depend-
ent Interrogative.
Fotui (246, R.l)commonly becomes potuerim, and the Periphrastic Passive with ful
becomes fuerim :
300
INCOMPLETE CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
Hand dnbiumfuit quin, nisi ea mora intervënisset, castra eö dië Púnica capí
potuerint- Liv. There was no doubt that^ hod not that delay interfered, the Funic camp
could have been taken on that day.
The Passive Conditional is unchanged :
Id ille si repudiasset, dubitatis quin el vis esset alista? Cíe. If he hod re-
iected that, do yem doubt that force would have been brought (to hear) on him f
The active form is rarely unchanged. (Liv. II. 33.) In the absence of the periphrastic
tense use potuerim.
INCOMPLETE CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
600. Omission of the Conditional Occasionally the
members of a Conditional sentence are put side by side without
a Conditional sign :
An ille mihi (351) liber, cui mulier imperat? poscit, dandum est;
vocat, veniendum; ejicit, abeundum; minatur, extimescendum. Cic.
Or is he free (tell) me, to whom a woman gives orders ? she asks, he must
give; she calls, he must come ; she turns out (of door), he must go; she
threatens, he must he frightened.
Ünum cognöris, omnës nôrïs. Ter. Tou know one, you know all.
Dedisses huic animo par corpus, fecisset quod optâbat. Plin. Er.
Had you given him a body that was a match for his spirit, he would have ac¬
complished what he desired.
601. Omission of the Verl of the Protasis.—When the Verb
of the Protasis is omitted, either the precise form or the general
idea of the verb is to be supplied from the Apodosiß :
Si quisquam, Cato sapiens fuit = Si quisquam fuit. CiC. If any one
was wise. Gato was.
602. Total Omission of the Protasis.—The Protasis is often
contained in a Participle or involved in the context (594, 2).
The Potential Subjunctive is sometimes mechanically ex¬
plained by the omission of an indefinite Protasis. See 252, K. 1.
Nimio plus quam velim Volscorum ingenia sunt mobilia. Liv. The
dispositions of the Volscians are (too) much more unstable than I should like
(if I had my way, if I could manage it, or what not).
Velim sic existimes. CiC. I should like you to think so. (Utinam existi¬
mes !)
Tam felix esses quam formôsissima vellem. Ov. (316). (Utinam esses !)
The impossibility of definite ellipsis constitutes the Modality.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES OF COMPARISON.
301
603. Omission and Involution of the Apodosis.—The Apodo-
sis is omitted in Wishes (254), and implied after verbs and
phrases denoting Trial (462, 2). It is often involved in Oratio
Obliqua, and sometimes consists in the general notion of Result,
Ascertainment, or the like.
Si verum excutiâs, faciès non uxor amätur. Juv. If you were to get
out the truth (you would find that) it is the face, not the wife, that is loved.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES OF COMPAKISON.
604. The Apodosis is omitted in comparisons with nt si,
velut si, ac si, quam si, tanquam si, quasi, or simply velut and
tanquam, as if.
The verb is to be supplied from the Protasis, as is common in
correlative sentences. The Mood is the Subjunctive.
The tenses follow the rule of sequence, rather than the ordi¬
nary use of the conditional. In English, the translation implies
the unreality of the comparison.
N51Î timëre quasi [=quam timeas si] assem elephantö dès. Quint.
Don't be afraid, as if you were giving a penny to an elephant.
Parvi primo ortû sic jacent tanquam [= jaceant si] omninö sine
animo sint. Cic. Babies, when first born, lie (there), as if they had no mind
at all.
I£c est obstandum, milites, velut si ante Romana moenia pugnemus.
Lrv. Here (is where) we must oppose them, soldiers, as if we were fighting
before Hie walls of Borne (velut obstêmus, si pugnemus, as we would oppose
them, if we were to fight).
Me juvat, velut ipse in parte laböris ac periculi fuerim, ad finem belli
Pünici pervënisse. Liv. I am delighted to have reached the end of the
Punic war, as if I had shared in the toil and danger (of it).
Suspectus tanquam ipse suas incenderit aedës. Juv. Suspected as if
he had (of having) set his own house on fire.
Tantus patres metus cëpit velut si jam ad portas hostis esset. Liv.
A great fear took hold of the senators, a^ if the enemy were already at their
gates.
Dëlëta est Ausonum gens perinde ac si internecivö bello certässet.
Lrv. The Ausowian race was blotted out, just as if it had engaged in an in¬
ternecine war (war to the knife).
Remarks.—1. Occasionally the sequence is violated ont of regard to the Conditional :
Massiliensës in eo honSre audimus apud RömänSs esse ac si medium umbili-
cum Graeciae incolerent- Liv. We hear that the people of Marseilles are in as high
honor with the Bomans as if they inhabited the mid-navel (= the heart) of Greece.
302
CONCESSIVE SENTENCES.
2. As in the ordinary conditional sentence, so In the comparative sentence, the
Protasis may be expressed by a Participle :
Galli laetï ut explörätä victoria ad castra Kômânôrum pergunt. Cabs. Tñe
Gauls in their joy ^ as if (their) victory had been fully ascertained, "proceeded to the camp of
the Romans.
Antiochus sëcûrus erat dS hello ESmänö tamquam n5n transitûris in Asiam
Edmanis. Lit. Antiochus was as unconcerned about the war with Rome as if the Romans
did not intend to cross over into Asia Minor.
Concessive Sentences.
605. Concessive Sentences are introduced—
1. By the conditional Particles, etsi, etiamsl, tamets!.
2. By the Generic Eelative, qnanquam.
3. By the compounds, quamvis, quantomvls.
4. By the Verb licet.
5. By the Final Particles, ut (ne).
6. By quum (cum) ; all answering generally to the notion
although.
Eemarks.—Etsi (et + si), even if; etiamsl, ^en now if ; tametsi, yet even if;
qnanquam, (quam + quam), to what extent soever ; quamvis, to what extent you
choose ; quantumvis, to what amount you choose ; licet, it is left free (perhaps intrans.
of linquo, I leave).
606. Etsi, etiamsl, and tametsi, take the Indicative or Sub¬
junctive, according to the general principles which regulate the
use of si, if. The Indicative is more common, especially with
etsi and etiamsl :
De futûrîs rebus etsi semper difficile est dicere, tarnen interdum con-
jectûrâ possis accedere. Cic. Although it is always difficult to tell about
the future, nevertheless you can sometimes come near it by guessing.
Hamilcar etsi flagräbat bellandi cupiditate, tarnen päci serviendum
putävit. Nep. Although Hamilcar was on ßre with the desire of war, never¬
theless he tlwught that he ought to subserve (to work for) peaix.
Inops ille etiamsi referre grätiam non potest, habere certe potest.
Cic. The needy man (spoken of), if he cannot return a favor, can at least
feel it.
Më vera pro gratis loqui, etsi meum ingenium non monëret, nécessi¬
tas cögit. Lrv. Even if my disposition did not bid me, necessity compels me
to speak the truth instead of the smooth.
Eemark—Si itself is often concessive, 592.
607. Quanquam, to what extent soever, falls under the head of
generic relatives (246, K. 4), and, in the best authors, is con¬
strued with the Indicative :
CONCESSIVE SENTENCES.
303
Medici quanquam intellegunt saepe, tarnen nunquamaegris dicunt,
ill5 morbo eos esse moritûrôs. Cic. Although 'physicians often know,
nevertheless they never tell their patients that they will die of that disease.
Remarks.—1. The Potential Subjunctive is sometimes found with quanquam :
Quanquam exercitum qui in Volscis erat mallet, nihil recusa vit. Liv. Althmgh
he might well have preferred the army which was in the Volscian country., nevertheless he
made no objection.
2. Quanquam is often used at the beginning of sentences, in the same way as the
English, And yet., Although, However, in order to limit the whole preceding sentence ; less
frequently etsi, tametsi.
3. The Indicative, with etsi and quanquam, is, of course, liable to attraction into
the Subjunctive in Oratio Obliqua. (509.)
608. Quamvls follows the analogy of vole, I will, with which,
it is compounded, and takes the Subjunctive. Quantumvls and
qnamlibet (as conjunctions) belong to poetry and silver prose.
Quamvis sint sub aqua, sub aqua maledicere tentant. Ov. Although
they he under the water, under the water they try to revile.
Quamvis ille niger, quamvis tü Candidus esses. Vero. Although he
was black, although you were fair.
Vitia mentis, quantumtñs exigua sint, in majus excëdunt. Sen.
Mental ailments ( = passions), no matter how slight they be, go on increasing.
Remarks.—1. In later Latin, quamvis and quanquam change parts :
Quamvis ingenió nSn valet, arte valet. Or. Although he does not tell by genius, he
does tell by art.
In Tacitus, for instance, quanquam regularly has the Subjunctive.
2. The Verb of quamvis is sometimes inflected :
Quam velit sit potens, nunquam impetravisset- Cic. No matter how powerful
she may be, she would never have obtained it.
609. Licet retains its verbal nature, and, according to the
Sequence of Tenses, takes only the Present and Perfect Sub¬
junctive :
Iiicet irrideat si qui vult. CiC. Let any one laugh who will.
Ardeat ipsa licet, tormentis gaud et amantis. Juv. Though she herself
is aglow, she rejoices in the tortures of her lover.
Sim licet extremum, sicut sum, missus in orbem. Ov. Although 1 he
sent, as I have been, to the end of the world.
Remarks.—1. Exceptions are extremely rare : Juv. xiii. 56.
2. Quamvis is sometimes combined with licet-
610. Ut and në are also used concessively :
Ut dësint virës, tarnen est laudanda voluntas. Ov. Granted that
strength be lacking, nevertheless you must praise (my) good will.
304
RELATIVE SEïTTEîTCES.
Ne sit summum malum dolor, malum certë est. Cic. Granted that
pain he not the chief evil^ an evil it certainly is.
Remark.—TJt non can be used on the principle of the Specific Negative :
Hic dies ultimus est ; ut nSn sit, prope ab ultimo. Sen. This is your last day ;
granted that it he not., it is near the last.
On ita—ut, see 255 ; on ut—ita, see 484, 2.
611. Concessive sentence represented by a Participle or Pre¬
dicative Attribute.—I'he ConcessiYe sentence may be represented
by a Participle or Predicative Attribute.
Risus interdum ita repente ërumpit, ut eum cupientës tenëre nequeä-
mus. Cío. Laughter between whiles (occasionally) breaks out so suddenly that
we cannot keep it down, although we desire to do so.
Multorum të oouli et aurës non sentientem custödient. Cío. (Of)
many (the) eyes and ears will keep guard over you^ though you perceive it not
(without your perceiving it).
Quis Azistídem nön mortuum (üligit. Cío. Who does not love Aristides,
(though) dead f
Remark.—Later writers combine etsi, quanquam, or^uamvls, with the Participle:
Gaesarem militës quamvis recusantem ultrö in Afrioam sunt seoûtl. Suet.
The soldiers followed Caesar into Africa of their own motion, although he declined it.
With Adjectives quamvIS is used even in the best writers ;
Saepe bibi sûcSs quamvis invltus amarSs. Ov. 1 have often drunk bitter poticms,
although against my will.
Relative Sentences.
612. The Latin language uses the relative construction far
more than the English : so in the beginning of sentences, and
in combination with Conjunctions and other Relatives.
Remarks.—1. The awkwardness, or impossibility, of a literal translation, may gene
rally be relieved by the substitution of a demonstrative with an appropriate conjunction,
or the employment of an abstract noun :
Quae quum ita sint. Now since these things are so (Ciceronian formula).
Futfira modo ezspectaut j quae quia certa esse nSn possuut, conficiuntur et
augöre et metû. Cíe. They only look forward to the future^ and because that cannot he
certain, they wear themselves out with distress and fear.
Epicûrus non satis polltus ils artibus quSs qui tenent, ërudîtl appellantur.
Cic. Epicurus is not sufficiently polished hy those accomplishments, from the possession of
which, people are called cultivated.
Notice especially quod in combination with si, ubi, in which quod means and as for
fAaf, and is sometimes translated by and, hut, therefore, sometimes not at all.
2. The Relative is the fertile source of many of the introductory particles of the com¬
pound sentence, and is therefore put last on account of the multiplicity of its uses.
613. Relative sentences are introduced by the Relative Pro-
RELATIVE SENTENCES.
305
nouns in all their forms : Adjective, Substantive, and Adverbial.
(See Tables 106 foil.)
Remakks.—1. The relative adverbs of Place, and their correlatives, may be used
Instead of a preposition with a relative. Unde, whence, is frequently used of persons,
the others less frequently: ibi = in eo, &c. ; ubi = in quo, &c. ; inde = ex eö, &c. ;
unde = ex quo, &c. ; eo = in eum, &c. ; quo = in quern, &c. :
Potest fieri ut is, unde të audisse dicis, iratus dixerit. Cic. It may be that he,
from whom you say you heard (it), said it in anger.
2. The relative is not to be confounded with the dependent interrogative sentence.
(469, R. 3.)
Quae probat populus ego nëscio- Sen. The things that the people approves, I do
not know (quid probet, what it is the people approves).
Et quid ego të velim, et tu quod quaeris, sciës. Tkb. Tou shall know both what
(it is) I want of you, and what (the thing which) you are asking ( = the answer to your
question).
614. Position of Relatives.—The Eelative and Eelative forms
are put at the beginning of sentences and clauses. The Prepo¬
sition, however, generally, though not invariably, precedes its
relative. (414.)
615. Antecedent.—The word to which the Eelative refers is
called the Antecedent, because it precedes in thought even
when it does not in expression.
Remakk.—The close connection between Relative and Antecedent is shown by the
frequent use of one preposition in common. (416.)
CONCOED.
616. The Eelative agrees with its Antecedent in Gender,
Number, and Person :
Is minünö eget mortalis, qui minimum cupit. Strus. (293.)
Uxor contenta est quae bona est ünö viro. Plaut. (873, R. 1.)
Malum est consilium quod mûtârï non potest. Sybüs. Bad is the
plan that cannot (let itself) he changed.
Hoc illis narro qui me nön intelligunt. Phaedrus. I tell this tale for
those who understand me not.
Ego qui të cönfirmo, ipse më nön possum. Cíe. I, who reassure you,
cannot reassure myself.
Remakks.—1. The Relative agrees vpith the Person of the true Antecedent, even
when a predicate intervenes :
Tü es is, qui më ad caelum extulisti. Cic. Tou are he that has extolled me to the
skies.
So occasionally in English: Acts xxi. 38.
306
RELATIVE SENTENCES.
2. When the Relative refers to a sentence, id quodi that which, is commonly used
(parenthetically) :
SI ä Vöhls dëserar, (id quod nön spëro,) tarnen animo nön dëficiam- Cíe, If 1
s/iould be deserted by you, {which I do not expect,) nevertheless I should not become faint¬
hearted.
3. The gender and number of the Relative may be determined :
I. By the sense, and not by the form.
II. By the predicate or the apposition, and not by the antecedent :
Examples : I. Sex milia qui Fydnam perfûgerant. Lrv. Snx thousand,
who had fled to Pydna.
Equitatum omnem praemittit, qui videant. Lrv. He sent all the cavalry
ahead, who should see {that they might see, to see).
II. Thëbae, quod caput Boeotiae est. Lrv. Thebes, which is the capital
of Boeotia.
Flûmen Scaldis, quod influit iu Mosam. Caes. The river Scheldt, which
empties into the Maas.
Justa glöria, qttí est fructus virtûtis. Cic. Bßal glory, which is the fruit
of virtue.
4. The apposition may be incorporated into the relative:
Testärum suiFrâgiis quod illi ostracismum vocant- Nep. By potsherd votes —
(a thing) which they call " ostracism^'''
5. When the Relative refers to the combined antecedents of different gender, the
strongest gender is preferred, according to 282 :
Ctrandës natu mâtrës et parvull llberî, quorum utrOrumque aetâs misericor-
diam nôstram requirit. Crc. Aged matrons and infant children, whose age on either
hand demands our compassion.
ötium atque divitiae, quae prima mortâlës putant. Sall. Leisure and money,
which mortals reckon as the prime things.
Or, the nearest gender may be preferred :
Eae frûgës atque fructûs quos terra gignit. Cio. Thx>se fruits of field and tree
which earth bears.
6. Combined Persons follow the rule, 283.
617. Repetition of the Antecedent.—The Antecedent of the
Relative is not seldom repeated in the Relative clause, with the
Relative as its attributive:
Caesar intellexit diem instare, quo die frümentum militibus mëtiri
oportëret. Caes. Caesar saw that the day was at hand, on which {day it
behooved to measure) corn (was to be measured out) to the soldiers.
618. Incorporation of the Antecedent.—The Antecedent and
the Adjective, or the apposition of the Antecedent, are often in¬
corporated into the Relative clause :
In quern primum ëgressî sunt locum Troja vocätur. Liv. The first
place they landed at was called Troy.
eelative sentences.
307
Amänua Syriam ä Ciliciä dïvidit, qiiî mons erat hostium plënus.
Cic. Syria is divided from Gilicia by Amanus, a mountain which was full
of enemies.
Themistocles, de servís suis quem habuit fídelissimum, ad Xerxem
inîsit. nep. Themistocles sent the most faithful slave he had to Xerxes.
Quam quisque nörit artem, in häc se exerceat. cic. What trade each
man unclerstands, in that let him practise himself ( = eveiy man to his
trade).
Remark.—Especially to be noted are the phrases : quae tua prüdentia est, which
(such) is your prudence ; qua prûdeutiâ es ( = tü. es eä prüdentia), of which (such)
prudence are you ( = pr5 tua prüdentia, in accordance with your prudence). See 622.
619. Attraction of the Relative.—The Accusative of the Rel¬
ative is occasionally attracted into the Ablative of the Antece¬
dent, rarely into any other case :
Hoc confirmamus ill5 auguriö quo diximus. CiC. We confirm this by
the augury which we mentioned.
Remarks.—1. This attraction takes place chiefly when the verb of the relative clause
must be supplied from the principal sentence :
Quibus saueiïs poterat s6cum ductïs ad urbem pergit- Liv. Having taken with
him all the wounded he could, he 'proceeded to the city.
2. Inverted Attraction.—So-called Inverted Attraction is found only in poetry, and then
in the Accusative c.ase, which may he considered as an object of thought or feeling:
TJrbexn quam statue, vestra est- Vbrg. (As for) the city which I am rearing, (it) is
yours.
Istum quern quaeris, ego sum- Ter. (As for) that man whom you are looking for, 1
am he. (" He that hath ears to hear, let him hear.")
620. Correlative Use of the Relative.—The usual Correlative
of qui is is, more rarely hie, ille :
Is minimö eget mortälis, qtü minimum cupit. Sykus. (298.)
Hie sapiens, de quo loquor. Cic. (290, 8.)
Ilia dies veniet, mea qua lûgubria pönam. Ov. (292, 4.)
621. Omission of the Correlative.—The Correlative, is, is
often omitted, especially when it would stand in the same case
as the Relative :
Postume, non bene olet, qui bene semper olet. Mart. Postumus, (he)
smells not sweet, who always smells sweet.
Quem arma non frëgerant vitia vïcërunt. CuRT. (Him) whom arms had
not crushed did vices overcome.
Quem di diligunt adulescens moritur. Plaut. (He) whom the gods love
dies young.
308
RELATIVE SENTENCES.
Xerxes praemium. proposuit qiü ([ = ei qui 3 iuvënisset novam vol-
uptatem. Cic. Xerxes offered a reward to Mm who should invent a new
pleasure.
Miseranda vita qui [ = eörum qui ] se metuî quam amäri mâlunt.
Nep. Pitiable is the life of those who would prefer being feared to being loved.
Discite sänäri per quem [ = per eum, per quem ] didicistis amare.
Ov. (403.)
622. Position of the Correlative clause.—The Eelative clause
often precedes the Correlative ; incorporation is common :
Male res së habet quum quod virtûte effici dëbet id tentatur pecûniâ.
Cic. It is a bad state of affairs when what ought to be accomplished by worthy
is attempted by money.
Quod vidës accidere pueris hoc nöbis queque m^usculis pueris ëveuit.
Sen. What you see befall children {this) happens to us also, children of
a larger growth.
Quae quia non liceat non facit, ilia facit. Ov. (541.)
Quam quisque nôrit artem, in häc së exerceat (618.)
The Correlative omitted;
Quod non dedit fortûna, nön ëripit. Sen. What fortune has not given
(does not give), she does nx)t take away.
Per quâs nös petitis saepe fugatis opës. O v. The means you take to
win us, often scare us off.
623. Indefinite Antecedent.—The Indefinite Antecedent is
generally omitted :
Èlige oui dicäs : tû mihi sola placës. Ov. Choose some one to whom
you may say : You alone please me.
Ebmakk.—Such sentences are sometimes hardly to be distingnished from the
Interrogative :
Conön n5n quaeslvit ubi ipse tütS viveret. Nbp., (297), might be either.
TENSES IN EELATIVE SENTENCES.
624. Future and Future Perfect.—The Future and Future
Perfect are used with greater exactness than in current English
(234, 236) :
Sit liber, dominus qui volet esse meus. Mart. He must be free who
wishes (shall wish) to be my master.
Qui prior strinxerit ferrum, ëjus victöria erit. Liv. (236, R. 2.)
relative sentences.
309
625. Iterative Action,—Eelative sentences follow the laws
laid down for Iterative action (568, 569 :)
I. Contemporaneous action :
Ore trahit quodcumque potest, atque addit acervó. Hor. Drags
with its mouth whatever it can, and adds to the treasure (heap).
Quacumque incëdëbat aginen, lëgâtî occurrëbant. Lrv. In whatever
direction the column advanced, ambassadors came to meet thern.^
II. Prior action :
Terra nunquam sine üsürä reddit, quod accëpit. Cic. The earth never
returns without interest what it has received (receives).
Quod non dedit fortûna, non ëripit. Sen. (622.)
Non oënat quotiës nëmo vocâvit eum. Mart. He does not dine as
often as (when) no one has invited (invites) him.
Haerëbant in memoria quaecumque audierat et viderat [Themistocles].
NEP. (569.)
Sequentur të quocumque pervëneris vitia. Sen. Vices will follow you
whithersoever you go.
Qui timëre dësierint, ödisse incipient. Tac. (569.)
REMAitK.—According to 569, the Subjunctive is used
1.) In Oratio Obliqua (Total or Partial) ;
Marti Gain quae bellQ cëperint (Perf. Subj.) dëvovent (— sS datürSs vo^nt.
Caes. The Gauls devote (promise to give) to Mars whatever they (shall) take in war (Ô. R.
Quae cSperixnus, dabimus).
2.) By Attraction of Mood (Complementary Clauses) :
Quis eum diligat quem metuat 1 Cic. Who could love him whom he fears f
3.) In the Ideal Second Person ;
Bonus segnior fit ubi neglegäs. Sall. (568.)
4.) On the general principle of oblique sense, chiefly in later historians :
Qui llnum ejus ordinis offendisset omnes adversos habëbat. Liv. (569.)
MOODS IN EELATIVE SENTENCES.
626. The Eelative clause, as such—that is, as the representa¬
tive of an adjective—takes the Indicative mood:
Uxor quae bona est, A wife who is good {a good wife).
Remark.—The Relative in this use often serves as a circumlocution for a Substantive,
with this diflference : that the Substantive expresses a permanent relation ; the Relative
clause, a transient relation : ii qui docent = those who teach = the teachers (inasmuch as
they are exercising the functions).
627. The Explanatory Eelative qui, with the Indicative,
( = is enim, for he,) often approaches quod, in that.
310
RELATIVE SENTENCES.
Habeo senectûtï mag^am grätiam, quae mihi sermonis aviditâtem
auxit. Cic. I am very thankful to old age, which (for it, in that it) hm in¬
creased me (= in me) the appetite for talk.
Remark.—Qui with the Subjunctive gives a ground = cum ÎS (587); qui with the
Indicative, a fact ; and in many passages the causal sense seems to be inevitable :
Erräverim fortasse qui m5 esse aliquem puta vi. Plin. Ep. I may have erred in
thinking myself to he somebody.
Improba [i. e.. Ardea] quae nSströs cögis abesse virös. Ov. Naughty Ardea, that
forcest (for forcing) our husbands to be away.
In some authors this causal sense is heightened by ut, utpote, as/ quippe, namsiy /
but with these particles the Subjunctive is far more common.
628. dul = Si quis, if any, has the Indicative when the Condi¬
tional is logical. So in Generic Sentences. (246, K. 4.)
Terra nunquam sine üsürä reddit, quod accepit. CiC. (Si quid acce-
pit.) (625.)
Qui morí didicit, servire dedidicit. Sen. (424.)
Remark.—On the Relative with the Subjunctive in Conditional Sentences, see 594.
629. The Subjunctive is employed in Eelative clauses when
it would be used in a simple sentence.
Potential : Haheo quae velim. Cic. I have what I should like.
Optative : Quod faustum sit, rëgem create. Liv. Blessing he on your
choice, make ye a king.
Remark.—Especially to be noted is the Subjunctive in Restrictive phrases. This Rela¬
tive often takes quidem, sometimes modo. Such phrases are quod sciam = quantum
SCio,/or all I know ; quod meminerim, so far as memory serves me.
Omnium örätörum qu5s quidem cognöverim acütissimum jûdico Sertdrium.
Cíe. Of all orators, so far as J know them, I consider Sertorius the most acute.
Nullum ornStum qui modo ndn obsciiret subtrabendum puto. Quint. I think
no ornament is to be withdrawn, provided that it do not cause obscurity.
Sometimes qui quidem is found with the Indicative.
630. The Subjunctive is used in Eelative clauses which form
a part of the utterance or the view of another than the nar¬
rator, or of the narrator himself when indirectly quoted. (539,
E.) So especially in Örätio Obliqua and Final Sentences :
Recte Graeci praecipiunt, non temptanda quae efiici non possint.
Quint. Bight are the Greeks in teaching, that those things are not to be at'
tempted, which cannot he accomplished.
Apud Hypanim ñuvium Aristotelës ait, bestioläs quäsdam näsci quae
ünum diem vivant. Cic. (653.)
Paetus omnes libros quös hräter suus reliquisset mihi dönävit. CiC.
(This is Paetus' statement ; otherwise : quôs fräter ejus (521) reliquerat.)
RELATIVE SEÍITENCES.
311
Xerzës praemixun proposait qui [= ei qui] invënisset novam volup-
tâtem. Cic. (621.)
Multi suam vitam neglexërunt ut eôs qui his câriôrës quam ipsi sibi
essent liberârent. Cic. Many have neglected their own lives, thut they might
free those who were dearer to them, than they were to themselves.
Remabks.—Even in Oratio Obliqua the Indicative is retained :
1. In explanations of the narrator :
Nuntiatur Äfräniö magnös commeâtûs qui iter habëbant ad Caesarem ad
flûmen constitisse. Caes. It is (was) announced tx) Afranius that large supplies of pro¬
visions (which were on their way to Caesar) had halted at the river.
In the historians this sometimes occurs where the Relative clause is an integral part
of the sentence, especially in the Imperfect and Pluperfect ; partly for clearness, partly
for liveliness. For shifting Indicative and Subjunctive, see Liv. xxvi. 1.
2. In mere circumlocutions :
Quis neget haeo omnia quae vidëmus deërum potestäte administrar! ? Cíe.
Whx) would deny that this whole visible world is managed by the power of the gods Î
FrSvidendum est në ea quae dicuntur ab eo qui dicit dissentiant. Quint. Wit
must see to it that the speech be not out of keeping with the speaker,.
631. Kelative sentences which depend on Infinitives and
Subjunctives, and form an integral part of the thought, are put
in the Subjunctive (Attraction of Mood) :
Pigrî est ingenil contentum esse iîs quae sint ab aliîs inventa. Quint.
It is the marie of a slow genius to he content with what has been found out by
Others.
Quis eum dîligat quem metuat aut eum ä qu5 së metuî putet ? Cic.
"Who could love a man whom he fears, or by whom he deems himself fea/red ?
Nam quod emas possis jure vocäre tuum. Mart. For what you buy,
you may rightly call your own.
Ab alió exspectës alter! quod fëcerïs. Syrus. (306.)
In virtûte sunt mult! ascensüs, ut is gloria maximë excellât, qui vir-
tüte plürimum praestet. Cic. In virtue there are many degrees, so that he
excels most in glory, who has the greatest eminence in virtue.
S! sölös eos dicerës miseros quibus moriendum esset, nëminem eórum
qití viverent exciperës; moriendum enim est omnibus. Cic. If you
called only those wretched who had (have) to die, you would except none who
lived (live) ; for all have to die.
Remarks.—The Indicative is used ".
1. In mere circumlocutions; so, often in Consecutive Sentences:
Necesse est facere sûmptum qui quaerit lucrum. Plaut. (535.)
EflB.citur ab ërâtore, ut i! qui audiunt ita afficiantur ut örStor velit- Cíe. It is
brought about by the orator that those who hear him (= his auditors) are affected as he
wishes (them to be).
2. Of individual facts :
Et quod vidës perisse perditum dücäs. Cat. And what you see (definite thing,
definite person) is lost for aye, for aye deem lost. (Quod videas, any body, any thing.)
312
RELATIVE SENTENCES.
632. Relative Sentences of Design.—Optative Relative sen¬
tences are put in the Subjunctive of Design, when qui — ut is :
Sunt multi qui aliis eripiunt quod aliis largiantur. Cic. Many are
they who snatch from some to lavish on others.
Senex serit arborés, quae alteil sêoulô prösint. CiC. (545.)
Semper habe Pyladën, qiü consôlëtur Orestën. Ov. (545.)
Artaxerxës Themistoclî Magnësiam urbem dônâverat, quae ei pänem
praebëret. Nep. (545.)
Remark.—In many combinations this Relative leans to the Characteristic, and the
conception seems Potential rather than Optative.
633. Relative Sentences of Tendency.—Potential Relative sen¬
tences are put in the Subjunctive of Tendency, when qui = ut is.
The notion is generally that of Character and Adaptation :
Damna nulla tanta sunt quae non viri fortës ferenda arbitrentur. CiC.
There are no losses so great, thai brave men should not think them endurable
(great enough to keep brave men from thinking them endurable).
Ille ego sum cujus lauiet furiosa capillos. Ov. I am the man whose
hair she tears in her seasons of frenzy.
Nil prödest quod non laedere possit idem, Ov. (296.)
Quem mea Calliopë laeserit ûnus ego. Ov. I am the only one that my
Calliope ( = my Muse) has hurt.
M^'or sum quam oui possit Fortuna nocëre. Ov, (313.)
Digna fuit illa natura quae meliöra vellet. Quint. (556, R. 2.)
634. This construction of the Characteristic Relative is
especially common after such general expressions as
Est qui, sunt qui, there is, there are some who ; nëmo est qui, there is
none to ; nihil est quod, there is nothing ; habeo quod, I have to ; reperi-
vmtur qui, persons are found who (to) , . . ; qms est qui ? who is there
who (to) , . , . ? est cur, there is reason for, &c. So, also, fuit
cum, there was a time when.
Sunt qui discessum animi ä corpore putent esse mortem. CiC. There
are some who (to) think that death is the departure of the soul from the body.
Fuit qui suâdëret appellätiönem mënsis Augusti in Septembrem
transferendam. Suet. There was a man who urged ( = to urge) that the
name of the month (of) August should be transferred to September.
Multi fuërunt qui tranquillitätem expetentës ä negötiis püblicis së
remöverint. Cic. There have been many who, in the search for quiet, have
withdrawn themselves from public engagements.
Post mortem in morte nihil est quod metuam mali. Plaut. After
death there is no ill in death for me to dread.
RELATIVE SENTENCES,
313
Nec mea qui digitîs lûmina condat erit. Ov. Arid there will he no
one to dose mine eyes with his fingers.
Miserrimus est qui cum esse cupit quod edat non habet. Plaut.
He is a poor wretch who, when he wants to eat, has not any thing to eat.
Non habet quid edat would mean : does not know what to eat.
Non est quod paupertas nos äphilosophiä revocet nê egestäs quidem.
Sen. There is nothing to make narrow circumstances recall us from phil¬
osophy—not even ( = or even) want.
Rkmarks.—1. The Indicative may be used in the statements of definite facts, and not
of general characteristics :
Of course this happens only after affirmative sentences. The poets use the Indicative
more freely than prose writers :
Sunt-quI ( = quidam) quod sentiunt non audent dicere. Cic. Some dare not say
what they think.
Sunt-quibus ingrats timida indulgentia servit. Ov. To some trembling in¬
dulgence plays the slave all thanklessly.
£st-ubi profecto damnum praestat facere quam lucrum- Plaut. Sometimes, in
point of fact, His better to lose than gain.
2. When a definite predicate is negatived, the Indicative may stand on account of the
definite statement, the Subjunctive on account of the negative :
a. Nihil bonum est quod non eum qui id possidet meliSrem facit ; or,
b. Nihil bonum est quod non eum qui id possideat melidrem faciat.
A. Nothing that does not make its owner better is good.
b. There is nothing good that does not make its owner better.
635. Negative of ftxil in Sentences of Character.—Qui non,
sometimes quae non, quod non, &c., are represented after nega¬
tive clauses by quin :
Sunt certa vitia quae nemo est quin effugere cupiat. CiC. There are
certain faults which there is no one hut ( = everybody) desires to escape.
Nil tam difficile est quin quaerendö investîgârî possiet ( = possit).
Ter. (556.)
But as quin = ut nôn, the demonstrative may be expressed :
Non cum quoquam arma contuli quin is mihi succubuerit. Nep. 1 have
PAver measured swords with any one that he has not (but he has) succumbed
to me.
For other uses of quin, see 551.
636. Relative in a Causal Sense.—When qui = cum is, as he,
the Subjunctive is employed.
Multi sunt qui ëripiant,
There are many to snatch away.
Multi sunt qui ëripiunt.
Many are they who snatch away.
314
relative sentences.
The particles ut, utpote, qulppe, as, are often used in conjunction with
the Relative :
[Oanînius] fuit mirificä vigilanüä qui su5 töt5 consulätü somnum non
vïderit, Cic. Caninius lias shown marvellous watchfulness, not to have seen
(= taken a wink of) sleep in his whole consulship.
O fortúnate adulesoens, qui tuae virtütis Homêrum praecönem invê-
neris! CiC. Lucky youth! to have found a crier (= trumpeter) of your
valoi' (in) Homer !
Major gloria Scipiönis, Quincti recentior utqui eo anno trlumphasset.
Lrv. Scipio's glory was greater, Quinctius^ was fresher, as (was to be ex¬
pected in) a man who (inasmuch as he) had triumphed in that year.
Plato ä Dionysiö tyrannö crûdëliter violätus est qmppe quem vë-
numdarî jussisset. nep. Plato was cruelly maltreated hy the tyrant
Dionysius, seeing, namely, that he had ordered him to he sold.
637. Relative in a Concessive or Adversative Sense.—ftni is
sometimes used as equivalent to cum is in a Concessive or
Adversative Sense:
Ego qui leviter Graecas litteras attigissem, tamen cum vënissem
Athënâs complûrës diës ibi commorätus sum. cíe. Although I had
dabbled hut slightly in Greek, nevertheless, having come to Athens, I stayed
there several days.
688. Accusative Relative and Inßnitive.—The Accusative
Relative, with the Infinitive, may be used in Oratio Obliqua when
the Relative is to be resolved into a Coordinating Conjunction
and the Demonstrative :
Philosophi cënsent ûnumquemque nostrum mundi esse partem, ex
qu5 illud nätürä consequi ut commûnem ûtilitâtem nöstrae antepönä-
mus. cic. Philosophers think that every one of us is a part of the universe,
and that the natural consequence of this is for us to prefer the common wel¬
fare to our own.
behark.—So also sometimes sentences with the relative particles quia, cum, ut,
quanquam, etc. : quia trucidäre = quia trucidärent, because they butchered (only in
the later historians).
639. Combination of Relative Sentences.—Relative Sentences
are combined by means of Copulative Conjunctions only when
they are actually coordinate.
When the second Relative would stand in the same case as
the first, it is commonly omitted.
COMPARATIVE SEISTTENCES.
315
When it would stand in a different case, the Demonstrative is
often substituted; or, if the case be the Nominative or Accusa¬
tive, the Eelative may be omitted altogether :
Dumnorix qui principatum obtinebat cuique plêbs favëbat,
Dummrix, wJio hdd the chieftaincy^ and whom the commons favored ;
Dumnorix qui principatum obtinebat ac plëbï acceptus erat, (Caes.),
Dumnorix, who hdd the chieftaincy, and (who) was acceptable to the commons ;
Dumnorix qui principatum obtinëbat eique plëbs favëbat,
Dummrix, who held the chieftaincy, and whom the commons favored ;
IDumnorix qui principatum obtinëbat et plëbs diligëbat,
Dummorix, who hdd the chieftaincy, and (whom) the commons loved;
Dumnorix quem plëbs diligëbat et principatum obtinëbat,
Dumnorix, whom the commons'looed, and (who) hdd the chieftaincy.
Remaek.—The Relative is not combined with adversative or illative conjunctions (Jnii
who, who therefore), except at the beginning of a sentence, when it represents or antici¬
pates a demonstrative. (622.)
Qui fortis est fîdens est, qui autem ñdens est is n5n extimescit- Cic. He who
is brave is confident, but he who is confident is not afraid.
Sed qui, qui tarnen, can be used in antithesis to adjectives.
Sôphrôn mimörum quidem scriptor sed quem Plato probSvit. Quint. Sophron,
a writer of mimes, "'tis true, but (one) that Plato approved.
640. Relative Sentence represented hy a Participle.—The
Eelative sentence is sometimes represented by a Participle, but
generally the Participle expresses a closer connection than the
mere explanatory Eelative :
Omnës aliud agentës, aliud simulantës perfidï sunt. CiC. All who a/re
driving at one thing and pretending another are treacherous.
Fisistratus Homëri libros confusos anteä sic disposuisse dïcitur ut
nunc habëmus. Cíe. Fisistratus is said to have arranged the hooks of Horner^
which were (whereas they were) in confusion before, as we have them now.
Comparative Sentences.
641. A peculiar phase of the Eelative sentence is the Com¬
parative, which is introduced in English by as or than, in Latin
by a great variety of relative forms :
I. By correlatives ;
II. By atque or ac ;
III. By quam.
643. Moods in Comparative Sentences.—The mood of the
Dependent clause is the Indicative, unless the Subjunctive is
316
COMPARATIVE SENTENCES.
required by the laws of oblique relation, or by the conditional
idea (604).
Remark.—On potius quam with the Subjunctive, see below, 647, R. 4.
643. The dependent clause often borrows its verb from the
leading clause :
Ignoratio futürönun malönim ütilior est quam scientía. Cic. (311.)
Serví möribus iîsdem erant quibus dominus. Cic. (296, K. 1.)
644. When the dependent clause (or standard of comparison)
borrows its verb from the leading clause, the dependent clause
is treated as a part of the leading clause ; and if the first or
leading clause stands in the Accusative with the Infinitive, the
second or dependent clause must have the Accusative likewise :
Ita sentio Latinam linguam locuplëtiôrem esse quam Graecam. CiO.
It is my opinion thai the Latin language is richer than the Oreek.
Ego Gajum Caesarem n5n eadem de república sentîre quae mê scio.
Cíe. / know that Gains Caesar has not the same views with regard to the state
as I (have).
I. CORRELATIVE COMPARATIVE SENTENCES.
645. Correlative Sentences of Comparison are introduced by
Adjective and Adverbial Correlatives :
1. Adjective correlatives :
tot, totidem
tantus
talis
idem
quot,
quantus,
qualis,
qui,
(so) ÚW many
(so) ae great
such
the same
yas.
2. Adverbial correlatives :
tarn
tantopere
toties
tamdiú
ita, sic
item, itidem
(so) as much'\
(so) oá much I
asoften j^'
as long \
quam,
quantopere
quoties,
quamdiû,
!ut, uti, sicut, \
quemadmodum, >■ (^) =
quomodo, )
Quot hominês, tot sententiae, (as) many men, (so) many minds. Prov.
Frúmentum tanti fuit quanti iste aestimävit. Cío. Corn was worth as
much as he valued it.
COMPAEATIVE SENTENCES.
317
Quälern invênl tälem relïqtû. Front. Such as I found (him), I left
(him).
Cimön incidit in eandem invidiam quam pater suus. Nep. (296.)
Nihil tam populäre quam bonitäs. Cic. Nothing is so winning as
kindness.
Sic de ambitiöne quömodo dë amicä queruntur. Sen. They complain
of ambition as they do of a sweetheart.
Tamdiü requiësco quamdiü ad të scrîbo. Cío. I rest as long as I am
writing to you.
Rekakks.—1. On other forms with idem see 296.
2. TJt quisque with the Superlative is more common than quo quisque with the
Comparative, and is translated in the same way :
TJt quisque sibi plûrimum contidit, ita maximë excellit. Cic. The more a man
trusts himself, the more he excels.
Obscûrior quo quisque dëterior. Quint. The obscurer a man (a speaker) is, the
•worse he is.
One member often coalesces with the other:
Optimum quidque rärissimum est = TJt quidque optimum est, ita rarissi-
mum. See 305.
8. TJt—ita is often used concessively (484). On ita—ut, in asseverations, see 255 :
4. TJt and pro eo ut are frequently used in a limiting orcausal sense, so far as, inas¬
much as : Pro eo ut temporum difidcultas tulit, so far as the hard times •permitted ;
ut turn res erant, as things were then; ut temporibus iliis,/o/' those times; ut erat
furiosus, starlc mad as he woe; ut Siculus, as (is, was, to be expected of) a Sicilian,
Vir ut inter Aetölös fäcundus. Liv. A man of eloquence for an Aetolian.
TJt sunt bümäna, nihil est perpetuum datum. Plaut. As the world wags, •noth¬
ing is given for good and all.
5. On quam, quantus, and the Superlative, see 311.
Notice in this connection quam qui with the Superlative :
Tam sum amicus reipiiblicae quam qui maximë (= est). Cic. lamas devoted a
friend to the State as he who is most (= as any man).
II. COMPARATIVE SENTENCES WITH atque (ac).
646. Adjectives and Adverbs of Likeness and Unlikeness
may take atque or ac :
Virtüs eadem in homine ac dec. CiC. Virtm is the same in man as in
god.
Date operam në simili fortünä ütämur atque anteä üsi sumus. Ter.
Do your endeavor that we have not {i\\)-luck like that we had before.
Dissimulätio est quum alia dicuntur ac sentiäs. CiC. Dissimulation is
when other things are said than what you mean (something is said other than
what you mean).
Similiter facis ac si më rcgës cur të duöbus ccntuear oculis, et non
alteró. Cío. Tou are acting (like) as if you were to ask me why I am looking
at you with two eyes, and. not with one.
318
COMPARATIVE SENTENCES.
Nôn dixî secus (aliter) ac sentiëbam. Cío. I did riot speak otJierwise
than I thought.
Remarks.—1. The expression is coramonly explained by an ellipsis ;
Aliter dixï atque [aliter] sentiëbam, I spoke one way and yet I was thinking
another way.
So we find :
Timeo në aliud crëdâs atque aliud nûntiës. Ter. I fear that you believe one thing
and tell another.
Et and -que are occasionally used in the same way.*
8. Alius, aliter, secus, seldom have quam: n5n alius and other negative combina¬
tions seldom have atque, commonly quam or nisi. (592, R. 2.)
Philosophia quid est aliud ( = nihil est aliud) nisi dSnum deörum ? Cío.
Philosophy—what else is it but the gift of the gods f
Non aliter has either quam or atque.
III. COMPARATIVE SENTENCES WITH quam.
647. Comparative Sentences with qnam follow the compara¬
tive degree or comparative expressions.
The Verb of the dependent clause is commonly to be supplied
from the leading clause, according to 643.
In Comparative Sentences quam takes the same case after it
as before it :
Melior tütiorque est certa pax quam spërâta victoria. Liv. (292, R. 1.)
Pctius aimcum quam dictum perdidi. Quint. I preferred to lose my
friend rather than my joke.
Existimes velim neminem cuîquam cäiiörem unquam fuisse quam të
mihi. Cíe. (546, R. 3.)
Remarks.—1. When the second member is a subject, and the first member an oblique
case, the second member must be put in the Nominative, with the proper form of the
verb esse, unless the oblique case be an Accusative :
Vicinus tuus equum meliërem habet quam tuus est- Cic. (598.)
Haec verba sunt Varrönis, hominis doctiöris quam fuit Claudius, Gell.
These words are (the words) of Yarro, a person of greater learning than Claudius (was).
Ego hominem callidiorem vidi nëminem quam Fhormiönem. Ter. I have
seen no shrewder man than Phormio ( = quam Fhormio est).
2. On quam pro, and quam qui, 313. On the double comparative, 314.
3. Atque for quam after a comparative is poetical.
4. When two clauses are compared by potius, rather^ prius, before., citius, quicker,
sooner, the second clause is put in the Present or Imperfect Subjunctive (512), with or
without ut.
Dëpugnâ potius quam servias. Cíe. (579 R.)
Vir bonus statuit intolerâbilî dolore lacerar! potius quam ut officium prödat.
Cíe. A good 7nan resolves to let himself be torn by unsufferable anguish, rather than be un¬
true to his duty.
* Still, -que in atque connects these clauses with the Relative, and the explanation of
atque as ad + que, in comparison with + how (Ribbeck) is worthy of note.
HISTORICAL INFINITIVE.
319
Moritürös s6 affirmäbant cîtius quam in aliSnös mörSs verterentur. Liv.
They declared that they had rather die, than let themselves he changed to foreign ways.
If the leading clause is in the Infinitive, the dependent clause may be in the Infinitive
likewise, and this is the more common construction when the Infinitive follows a verb of
Will and Desire :
Haec patienda cënseo, potius quam trucidärl corpora vestra. Liv. 1 think
these things are to be endured, rather than that your bodies { = you) should be butchered.
5. Instead of tam—quam, oís—so, the Roman prefers the combinations non minus
quam—non magis quam (byLïtotës).
1.) Non minus quam means m less than = quite as much :
Patria hominibus non minus cara esse dSbet quam llberl. Cic. Country ought
to be no less dear to men than children ( = quite as dear as),
2.) Non magis quam means quite as little, or quite as much :
Animus nön magis est sanus quam corpus- Cic. The mind is no more sound than
the body = as little sound as the body.
Or it might mean :
The mind is no more sound than the body — the body is quite as sound as the mind.
Fabius nön in armis praestantior fuit quam in toga- Cic. FaMus was not more
distinguished in war than in peace (no less distinguished in peace than in war, quite as dis¬
tinguished in peace as in war).
The Abridged Sentence.
648. The compound sentence may be reduced to a simple
sentence, by substituting an Infinitive or a Participle for the
dependent clause.
Thb Infinitive and Infinitive Forms.
649. The practical uses of the Infinitive and its kindred
forms, as equivalents of dependent clauses, have already been
considered :
Infinitive after Verbs of Creation: 424 and after.
Gerund and Gerundive : 426 and after.
Supine: 435 and after.
Infinitive in Object Sentences : 526 and after.
Infinitive in Complementary Final Sentences : 532.
Infinitive in Kelative Sentences : 638.
Remark.—Under the head of the Abridged Sentence, will be treated the Historical
Infinitive and Oratio Obliqua : the Historical Infinitive, because it is a compendious
Imperfect ; Ürätio Obliqua, because it foreshortens, if it does not actually abridge, and
efiiaces the finer distinctions of Oratio Recta-
HISTORICAL INFINITIVE.
650. The Infinitive of the Present is sometimes used by
the historians to give a rapid outline of events, with the
320
ÖBÄTIO OBLIQUA.
subject in the hTommative; generally, several infinitives m
succession :
[Verres] minitârï Diodörö, vöciferäri palam, lacrimas interdiun vîx
tenëre. Cic. Verres threatened Diodorus^ hawled ont before everybody,
sometimes could hardly restrain his tears.
Remarks.—1. The ancient assumption of an ellipsis of coepit, began (Quint, ix. 3,58),
serves to show the conception, although it does not explain the construction. There is
no ellipsis. The Infinitive is to be explained as in DrStio Obliqua. It takes the place
of the Imperfect, is used chiefly in rapid passages, and gives the outline of the thought,
and not the details.
2. The Historical Infinitive is sometimes found after cum, ubi, etc. :
N5n multum erat progressa uävis cum datS signó ruere tectum. Tac. Not
far (but a little way) had the ship advanced, when, at a signal given, the roof came down
with a rush (began to tumble).
ORATIO OBLIQUA.
651. The thoughts of the narrator, or the exact words of
a person, as reported by the narrator, are called Örätio Eecta, or
Direct Discourse.
Indirect Discourse, or Örätio Obliqua, reports not the exact
words spoken, but the general impression produced.
Remarks.—1. Under the general head of Drätlo Obliqua are embraced also those
clauses which imply Indirect Quotation (Partial Obliquity). See 509.
2. In quam, quoth I, is used in citing the Oratio Recta ; ajo, / say, generally in
Oratio Obliqua. Inquam is always parenthetic ; äjo may or may not be parenthetic.
Oratio Recta may also be cited by a parenthetic "ut ait," " ut äjunt," as he says, as
they say. When the subject of inquit is mentioned it is commonly postponed.
652. "Örätio Obliqua differs from Örätio Recta, partly in the
use of the Moods and Tenses, partly in the use of the Pro¬
nouns.
Remarks.—1. It must be remembered that 0. 0. is necessarily less accurate in its
conception than 0. R-, and hence it is not always possible to restore the 0- R- from the
5. 0. with perfect certainty. What is ideal to the speaker, may become unreal to the
narrator from his knowledge of the result, and hence, when accuracy is aimed at, the nar¬
rator takes the point of view of the speaker, and in the last resort passes over to 0.
Rect^
2. 0. Obliqua often comes in without any formal notice.
Moods in Örätio Obliqua.
653. In Örätio Obliqua the principal clauses are put in the
Infinitive, the subordinate clauses in the Subjunctive.
öeItio obliqua.
321
ürStio Eecta : Apud Hypanim fluvium, inquit Aristoteles,
Oratio Obliqua : Apud Hypanim fluvium Aristoteles ait,
D. B. : bestiolae quaedam näscuntur,
Ö. O. : bestioläs quäsdam näsci,
Ü- B- : quae ünum diem vivunt,
Ö. O, : quae ünum diem vivant.
Ö.'B..—On. the river Bog, says Aristotle. ) ^ t ^
A ,-14. 4-L • 75 > little creatures are born, that
O. O.—Aristotle says that on the river Bog, \ o , «*«
live (but) one day.
Socrates dicere solëbat ;
0. B. Omnes in eo quod sciunt satis sunt eloquentes.
O. O. Omnës in eö quod soirent satis esse ëloquentës.
Ü. B. Socrates used to say : '•'•All men ase eloquent enough in what they understand."
Ö. O. Socrates used to say that all men were eloquent enough in what
they understood.
Remark.—When the Principal Clause, or Apodoeis, is in the Indicative, the Infini¬
tive is used according to the rule for Verbs of Saying and Thinking. When the Prin¬
cipal Clause, or Apodosis, is in the Subjunctive, as in the Ideal and Unreal conditions,
special rules are necessary. (659.)
Otherwise, Subjunctive in Ö. B. continues to be Subjunctive in Ö. 0.
654. Interrogative sentences are put in the Subjunctive ac¬
cording to 469 :
Ariovistus respondit së prius in Galliam vënîsse quam populum
Römänum : quid sibi vellet cur in suas possessiënës venïret. Caes.
Ariovistus replied that he had come to Gaul before the Roman people : what did
he (Caesar) mean by coming into his possessions ? (Quid tibi vis ?)
Thrasybûlus magna v5ce exclämat j cur së fugiant ? Thrasybulus
cried out with a loud voice (asking), why they ran from him. (Ö. R., cur
më fugitis ?)
Remarks.—1. Indicative Rhetorical Questions (466) are transferred from the Indica¬
tive of the Oratio Becta to the Accusative and Infinitive of Ö. 0. ; but seldom in the
Second Person, which is commonly in the Subjunctive.
Ö. B. Bum possum? Can I? [No.] 0. Q. Num posse ? CauMhef
Quid est turpius ? What is baser? [Nothing.] Quid esse turpius ? What was
baser ?
Quo së repulses ab Bömäuis itürös ? Liv. Whither should they go, if repelled by
the Romans ? (Qu5 ibimus ?)
Cui non appârëre ab eë qui prior arma intulisset injûriam ortam esse ? Liy.
To whom is it not evident that the wrong began with him, who had been the first to wage
war ? (Cui non appäret ?)
Si bonum dücerent, quid pro noxiö damnassent ? Liv. If they thought him a
good man, why had they condemned him as guilty ? (Si bonum dücitis, quid pro noxiö
damnästis ?)
2. In Subjunctive Rhetorical Questions the Subjunctive is either retained, or trans¬
ferred to the Infinitive. (The Deliberative Subjunctive is always retained.)
14*
322
ORATIO OBLIQUA.
Quîs sibi persnâdëret sine certS rS Ambiorigem ad ëjusmodl consilium dë-
scendisseî Caes. Wko could persuade himself thai Ambiorix had proceeded to un
extreme measure like that, without (having made) a sure thing (of it) ? (Quis sibi per¬
suadent ?)
The Infinitive form would be the Future : quem sibi persuâsûrum 1 (659) and is
not to be distinguished from the Future Indicative.
655. Imperative sentences are put in the Subjunctive: the
Negative is, of course, né :
Redditur responsiun : Nondum tempus pugnae esse ; castris se tenê-
rent. Liv. There was returned for answer, that it was not yet time to fight,
that they must keep within the camp. (O. R. castris vos tenëte.)
Vercingetorix cohortätus est: në perturbärentur incommodö. Caes.
Vercingetorix comforted them (by saying) that they must not aUaw tJiemselves
to he disconcerted hy the disaster. (Ö. R. nölite perturbait.)
Remabk.—Ut can be used in the first sentence, according to 546 ; but only in the
first.
F^hia respondit ut moenibus Ugneîs së mûnirentt Nep. The Pythia answered
thai, they must defend themselves with wails of wood.
TENSES IN ORATIO OBLIQUA.
656. The Tenses of the Infinitive follow the laws already
laid down (530) :
The Present Infinitive expresses contemporaneous action ;
The Perfect Infinitive expresses prior action ;
The Future Infinitive expresses future action.
657. The Tenses of the Subjunctive follow the laws of se¬
quence (510). The choice is regulated by the point of view of
the Reporter, or the point of view of the Speaker.
Remark.—By assuming the point of view of the speaker, greater liveliness as well as
greater accuracy is imparted to the discourse. This form is technically called Beprae-
sentatio- In Conditional Sentences Bepraesentätio often serves to prevent ambiguity.
The point of view not unfrequently shifts from reporter to speaker, sometimes in the
same sentence.
Point of View of the Reporter :
Lëgâtiônî Ariovistus respondit : sibi mirum vidërî quid in sua Gallia
quam bello vîoisset, Oaesarï negötii esset. Caes. To the embassy Ario¬
vistus replied, that it seemed strange to him (he wondered) what business Cae¬
sar had in his Gaul, which he had conquered in war.
Point of View of the Speaker :
Lëgâtis Helvëtiôrum Caesar respondit : consuësse deöa immortâlës,
ORATIO OBLIQUA.
323
qu5 gravius homines ex commütäti5ne rêrum doleant, quös pr5 scelere
eörum uloisci velint, his secundi5rês interdum res concedere. Caes. To
the envoys of the Helvetians Caesar replied, that the gods were (are) wont, that
men might (may) suffer the more severely from change in their fortunes, to
grant occasional increase of prosperity to those whom they wished (wish) to
punish for their crime. (A long passage may be found in Liv. xxviii. 32.)
Point of View shifted :
Ad haec Marius respondit : Si quid ab senâtû petere vellent, ab armis
discedant. Sall. Thereto Marius replied : If they wished to ask anything of
the senate, they must lay down tJieir arms.
658. Object, Causal, Temporal, and Kelative Clauses follow
the general laws of Oratio Obliqua.
Examples of Ö. O. in Object Clauses, 525.
Causal, 541.
Temporal, 562,568, 564, 566,571, 578, 578.
Relative, 680.
Remarks.—1. Coordinate Relative Clauses are put in the Accusative and Infinitive
(638).
2. Relative Clauses are put in the Indicative : 1. In mere circumlocutions. 2. In ex¬
planations of the narrator. (630, R. 1.)
3. Dum, with the Indicative, is often retained as a mere circumlocution (so also some¬
times cum) :
Die, hospes, Spartae nSs të hie vidisse jacentës, dum Sanctis patriae lëgibus
obsequimur. Cic. Tell Sparta, stranger, that thou hast seen us lying here obeying (in
obedience to) our country"'s "hallowed laws.
659. Conditional Sentences in Oratio Obliqua {Total and Pa/rtial).
1. The Protasis follows the rule.
2. The Indicative Apodosis follows the rule, but Present, Im¬
perfect, and Perfect Subjunctive are turned into the Future In¬
finitive or its periphrases.
The Pluperfect Subjunctive is transferred to the Perfect In¬
finitive of the Active Periphrastic Conjugation.
Passive and Supineless Verbs take the circumlocution with
futürum fuisse ut ... . 240, R. 2.
Remark 1.—Posse needs no Future (240, R. 3), and potuisse no Periphrastic Perfect
Infinitive, so that these forms are often used to lighten the construction.
3. Identical Forms.—In the transfer of conditions to 0. 0.,
the difference between many forms disappears. For instance ;
324 ORATIO OBLIQUA.
I. Sí id crëdis, erräbis. ^
Si id crëdës, erräbis. Dïco të, si id crëdâs, errätürum esse.
Si id crëdâs, errës. |
II. Si id crëdis, erräbis.
Si id crëdës, erräbis.
Si id crëdâs, errës.
Si id crëderës, errârës
III. Si id crëdiderïs, erräbis.
Si id crëdiderïs, errës.
Si id crëdiderïs, erräveris.
Si id crëdidissës, errârës.
Dixi të, si id crëderës, errätürum esse.
Dixi të, si id crëdidissës, errätürum
esse.
Bekahk 2.—In No. I. the difference is not vital, though exactness is lost.
In No. n. the ambiguity is avoided by Bepraesentâtio for the logical condition, and
the use of the Periphrastic Perfect for the Unreal, wherever it is possible. The difference
between an Unfulfilled Present and an Unfulfilled Past would naturally vanish to the nar¬
rator, to whom both are Past.*
Ariovistus respondit : SI quid ipsi ä Caesare opus esset, sësS ad ilium ventü-
rum fuisse : si quid lile s6 velit, illum ad së venire oportëre. Caes. Arïmistm
answered, that if he had wanted anything of Caesar he would have come to him ; if he
(Caesar) wanted anything of him, he ought to come to him (Ariovistus).
Ü. B. Si quid mihi ä Caesare opus esset, ego ad ilium vënissem ; si quid ille
më vult, ilium ad më venire oportet.
No. III., like No. II., is used chiefly of the Future.
660. Logical Couditions in Örätio Obliqua :
1. Ad haec Ariovistus respondit : si ipse populo Römänö nön prae-
sorlberet quem ad modixm suö jüre ûterëtur, nön oportëre sësë ä populö
Römänö in suö jüre impediri, Caes. To this Ariovütus made answer : If
he did not prescribe to the Boman people how to exercise their right, he ought
not to be hindered by the Boman people in the exercise of his right. (O. R. Si
ego nön praescribo, nön oportet më impediri.)
2. Si bonum dücerent, quid prö noxiö damnässent ? Sin (.593) noxium
comperissent, quid alterum consulätum erëderent? LiV. If they thought
him a good man, why had they condemned him as guilty ; if on the other
hand they had found him guilty, why did they intrust him with a second con¬
sulship? (Ö. R. Si—dücitis, quid damnästis ? sin—comperistis, quid crë-
ditis ?)
8. Titurius clämitäbat, suam sententiam in utramque partem esse
tütam ; si nihil esset (O. R., si nihil erit) dürius, nullö periculö ad proxi-
mam legiönem perventürös (O. R., perveniëtis) ; si Gallia omnis cum
Germänis cönsentiret (O. R., sicönsentit) ünam esse (Ö. R., est) in cele-
ritäte positam salütem. Caes. Titurius kept crying out that his resolution
was safe in either case : if there were (should be) no especial pressure, they
* Cic. Fin. i. 2, 39 ; v. 31, 93. Weissenborn on Liv. xxxiv. 4.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES IN 5. O.
325
would get to the next legion without danger ; if all Gaul was in league with
the Germans, their only safety lay in speed.
4. Eum omnium labörum fînem fore exîstimabant sï hostem ab Hibërô
interclûdere potuissent. Caes. Thxy thought that would be the end of all
(their) toils, if they could cut off the enemy from the Ebro. (Ö. R., is labö¬
rum finis erit (or fuerit) si hostem interclûdere potuerimus.)
5. [Hi] Jugurthae non mediocrem animum pollicitandö accendëbant
sí Micipsa rëK occidisset, fore uti solus imperio Numidiae potirëtur.
Sall. These persons kindled no little courage in Jugurthal^B heart) by prom¬
ising over and over that if King Micipsa fell, he alone should possess the rule
over Numidia. (O, R., si Micipsa occiderit, tú solus imperio potiëris.)
6. Fidës data est, si Jugurtham vivum aut necatum sibi tradidisset
fore ut illi senatus impûnitâtem et sua omnia concëderet. Sall. His
word was pledged that if he delivered to him Jugurtha, alive or dead, the senate
would grant him impunity, and all that wa^ his. (Ö. R., si mihi trädideris,
tibi senatus tua omnia concëdet.)
7. Non multo ante urbem captam exaudita vox est . . futûrum esse,
nisi provisum esset, ut Roma caperëtur. Cic. Hot long before the taking
of the city, a voice was heard (saying), that unless precautions were adopted,
Uome would be taken. (O. R., nisi provisum erit, Roma capiëtur.)
8. Ariovistus respondit si quid ille së velit ilium ad së venire opor-
tëre. Caes. (659, R.)
9. [Ariovistus respondit] nisi dëcëdat [Caesar] sësë ilium pro hoste
habitûrum ; quodsi eum iuterfëcerit, multis sësë nobilibus principibus-
que populi Rômâni grätum factûrum. Caes. Ariovistus replied, that un-
less Caesar withdrew, he should regard him as an enemy, and in case he killed
him, he would do a favor to many men of the highest position among the
Roman people. (O. R., Nisi dëcëdës të pro hoste habëbo . . . si të inter-
fëcero grâtum fëoero (236, R. 4).
10. Fertur Jugurtha dixisse urbem vënâlem et mâtûrë peritûram si
emptörem invënerit. Sall. (Perf. Subj.) Jugurtha is reported to have said
that the city was for sale, and would soon perish if it found a buyer. (Ö. R.,
urbs peribit si emptörem invënerit : Fut. Perf. Ind.)
Eemark.—Posse is used as has been stated. (659.)
Negärunt bellum dirimí posse nisi Messëniîs Achaeî Fylum redderent- Liy.
They said that the war could not be stopped unless the Achaeans restored Pylos to the Messe-
nians. (Ö. R. Bellum dirimí non potest (poterit) nisi Pylum reddent.)
Decent, si turris concidisset. non posse milites continëri quin spë praedae in
urbem irrumpant. Caes. They show that if the tower fell, the soldiers could not be kept
from bursting into the city in the hope of booty. (Ö. R. si concidefit, non possunt
(poterunt) continëri.)
661. Ideal Conditions in Oratio Obliqua:
1. Ait së si ûrâtur " Quam hoc suave " dictûrmn. CiC. He declares
326
PRONOUNS IN ORATIO OBLIQUA.
iJiat if Tie were to be burnt he would &ay, " How sweet this is" (Ö. R. Si ürar,
dicam, same form as Logical.)
2. Voluptatem si ipsa pro se loquätvir concessüram arbitrer Dignitâti.
Cic. I think that if Pleasure were to speak for herself, she would yield (the
palm) to Virtue. (The context shows (Fin. III. 1) that the condition is
Ideal, not Logical. Si loquatur, concédât. Comp. 598, R. 2.)
662. Unreal Oonditions in Oratio Obliqua:
1. Titurius clämitäbat Eburônës, si Caesar adesset, ad castra [Rômâ-
norum] venturos [non] esse. Caes. Titurius kept crying out that if Caesar
were there, the Eburones would not be coming to the camp of the Romans.
(Ö. R., si Caesar adesset, Eburônës non venirent.) On the rareness of
this form see 659, R. 2.
2. Appârëbat si diûtius vixisset Hamilcare duce Poenos arma Italiae
illätürös fuisse. Liv. It was evident that if he had lived longer, the Punies
would have carried their arms into Italy under Hamilcafs conduct.
3. Nisi e5 ipso tempore nüntii dë Caesaris victoria essent alläti ex-
istimäbant plëiique futurum fuisse ut oppidum âmitterëtur. Caes. Had
not news of Caesar''s victory been brought at that very time, most persons
thought the city would have been lost. (O. R., nisi nüntii alläti essent, oppi¬
dum ämissum esset.)
Remark.—As the Pluperfect Indicative is sometimes used (rhetorically) for the Sub¬
junctive (246, R. 3), so the ordinary Perfect Infinitive is sometimes employed instead of
the Periphrastic :
Nëmo mihi persuâdëbit multös praestantës virös tanta esse cönStös (= c5n3-
tûros fuisse) nisi animo cernerent (599, R. l) posteritätem ad sS pertinëre. Cíe.
No one wiUpersuade me that (so) many eminent men had made mchmlghty endeavors, had,
they not seen with their minds'' (eye) that posteHty belonged to them.
Fompëjum plërîque existimant si acrius insequi voluisset bellum e5 dië pot-
uisse finiré. Caes. Most people think that if Pompey had (but) determined to follow up
more energetically, he could have finished the war on that day. 0. R., si voluisset, po-
tuit, 599, R. 2.)
Namque ilia multitûdine si sana mens esset (599, R. l) Graeciae, supplicium
Persas dare potuisse. Nep. For with that number if Greece had had (= been in her)
sound mind, the Persians might have paid the penalty (due). (Ü. II- Si sana mens esset
Graeciae, supplicium Fersae dare potuërunt )
Pronouns in Oratio Obliqua.
663. 1. The Reflexive is used according to the principles laid
down 520, and after.
2. The person addressed is ille or is :
[Ariovistus respondit] nisi dëcëdat [Caesar] sësë ilium pr5 hoste hä-
bitürum : quodsî eum interfëcerit, multis sësë nôbilibus principibusque
populi Rômânî grâtum factûrum. Caes. (667, R. 9.)
Of course this does not exclude the ordinary demonsti-ative use.
ORATIO OBLIQUA.
327
3. Hic and iste are commonly changed into ille or is, as mmc
into tum and tunc.
Diod5rus respondit sê paucîs illïs diêbus argentum misisse Lily-
baeum. Cic. (393, R. 4.)
4. Nos is used when the narrator's party is referred to. Caes.
B. G. I. 44.
664. Specimens of the conversion of Ürätio Obliqua into
Örätio Eecta.
Oratio Obliqua.
1. Ariovistus respondit :
Transisse RhBnum s5s5 nön
suä sponte sed rogâtum et arcessl-
tum â Gallls ; non sine inagnä sp5
magnisque praemils domum propin-
quösque rellquisse; s5d5s habere
in Galliä ab ipsis concessäs, obsides
ipsörum voluntEte datos; Stipen¬
dium capere jure belli, quod victôres
victis impönere consnerint. Non
sese Gallis sed Gallos sibi bellum in-
tulisse ; omnes Galliae civitEtes ad
sB oppugnandum venisse et contrE
sB castra habuisse ; eEs omnBs
cöpiEs E sB ûnô proellö pulsas ac
superEtEs esse. Si iterum experiri
velint, sB iterum parEtum esse dB-
certEre ; si pEce ütl velint, iniquum
esse dB stipendié recüsEre, quod suS
voluntEte ad id tempus pependerint.
Amicitiam popull RömEni sibi or-
nEmento et praesidiö, non detri¬
mento esse oportBre idque sB eE spB
petisse. Si per populum RömEnum
Stipendium remittEtur et dBditicii
subtrabantur, non minus libenter
sBsB recusEtürum populi RömEni
amicitiam quam appetierit. Quod
multitüdinem GermSnorum in Gal-
liam trEducat, id sB sui mùniendi,
non Galliae impugnandae causa
facere ; ejus rei testimöniö esse
quod nisi rogEtus nön vBnerit et
quod bellum nön intulerit sed dB-
fenderit.
CAES. B. G. I., 44.
Oratio Recta.
Transit RhBnum nön meE sponte
sed rogEtus et arcessitus E Gallis ;
nön sine magnE spB magnisque
praemiis domum propinquösque re-
liqul ; sBdBs babeo in GalliE ab ipsis
concessEs, obsidBs ipsörum volun¬
tEte datös ; Stipendium capio jure
belli, quod victörBs victis impönere
consuBrunt. Nön ego Gallis sed
Galll mihi bellum intulBrunt ; o-
mnBs Galliae civitEtBs ad mB oppu¬
gnandum vBuBrunt et contrE mB
castra habuBrunt ; eae omnBs cöpiae
E mB ünö proeliö pulsae ac superS-
tae sunt. Si iterum experiri volunt,
iterum parStus sum dBcertEre, si
pSce ûti volunt, iniquum est dB sti¬
pendié recüsEre, quod suE voluntEte
ad höc tempus pependBrunt. Amici¬
tiam populi RömEni mihi ornE-
mento et praesidiö, nön detrimento
esse oportet idque eE spB petil. Sl
per populum RömEnum Stipendium
remittetur et dBditicii subtrahentur,
nön minus libenter recüsEbo populi
RömEni amicitiam quam appetil.
Quod multitüdinem GermEnörum
in Galliam trEdücam,* id mel müni-
endi nön Galliae impugnandae
causE facio ; Bjus rei testimöniö est
quod nisi rogEtus nön vBni et quod
bellum nön intuli sed dBfendi.
♦Allusion to the preceding speech,
otherwise trädfico.
328
ORATIO OBLIQUA.
Oratio Obliqua.
2. His Cmar ita respondit :
E5 sibi minus dubitätlönis darl
quod eä,s r5s quas l5gatl Helvetiî
commémorassent memoria ten5ret
atque eö gravius ferre quo minus
mérito popull Römanl accidissenl ;
qui si alicûjus injüriae sibi conscius
fuisset nou fuisse difficile cav5re;
sed eö dSceptum quod neque com-
missum a s5 intellegeret quarS
timSret neque sine causE timendum
putaret. Quod si veteris contumB-
liae obllvisci vellet num etiam recen-
tium injûriarum, quod eo invito iter
per prövinciam per vim temptas-
sent, quod Aeduos, quod Ambar-
ros, quod Allobrogas vexassent me-
moriam dBponere posse ? Quod
sua victoria tarn insolenter glöria-
rentur quodque tam diu s5 impune
tulisse injurias admlrarentur eodem
pertinBre. Consuesse enim deos im-
mortalBs quo gravius hominBs ex
commütatiöne rBrum doleant, quos
pro scelere eorum ulcisci velint, his
secundiorBs interdum rBs et diütur-
niöreni impûnitatem concBdere.
Cum ea ita sint, tarnen sl obsidBs, ab
ils sibi den tur utl ea quae pollicean-
tur factürös intellegat, et sl Aeduls
dB injürils quas ipsls socilsque
eörum intulerint, item sl Allobrogi-
bus satisfaciant sBsB cum ils pacem
esse factürum.
Caes. B. G. I., 14.
Oratio Recta.
Hoc mihi minus dubitationis da-
tur quod eas rBs quas vos, iBgätl
Helvetil, commemorastis, memoria
teneo atque hoc gravius fero quo
minus mérito popull Römanl acci-
dBrunt ; qui si alicûjus injüriae sibi
conscius fuisset, non fuit difficile ca-
vBre; sed eö deceptus quod neque
commissuin ä sB intellegBbat quarB
timBret neque sine causa timenduin
putabat. Quod sl veteris contumB-
liae oblivisci volo, num etigm recBn-
tium injûriarum, quod mB invitö
iter per prövinciam per vim temp-
tastis quod Aeduös, quod Ambarrös,
quod Allobrogas vexastis,memoriam
dBpönere possum ? Quod vestra vi-
ctöria tam insolenter glöriaminl.
quodque tam diû mB impûne tu¬
lisse injûrias admirámini eödem
pertinet. CousuBvBrunt enim dl
immortalBs quö gravius hominBs
ex commütaiiöne rBrum doleant,
quös prö scelere eörum ulcisci vo-
lunt, his secundiörBs interdum rBs
et diüturniörem impûnitatem con¬
cBdere. Cum haec ita sint, tamen
sl obsidBs a vöbls mihi dabuntur, utl
ea, quae pollicBminI, factürös iutel-
legam et sl Aeduls dB injürils quäs
ipsls socilsque eörum intulistis, item
sl Allobrogibus satisfaciBtis, ego vö-
blscum päcem faciam.
3. ßuUa règl patefècit :
Quod polliceätur, senatum et po-
pulum Römanum, quoniam amplius
armls valuissent, nön in gratiam
habitürös ; faciundum aliquid, quod
illörum magis quam sua rBtulisse
vidBrBtur ; id ideö in prömptü esse,
quoniam Jugurthae cöpiam habBret,
quem sl Römanls tradidisset, fore
ut ill! plûrimum dBbBrBtur ; amîci-
tiam, foedus, Numidiae partem,
quam nunc peteret, tunc ultrö ad¬
ven tûram.
SALL. B. J. 111.
Quod pollicBris, senatus et popii-
lus Römanus quoniam amplius
armls valuBrunt, nön in gratiam ha-
bBbunt; faciundum aliquid, quod
illörum magis quam tua rBtulisse
videatur ; id ideö in prömptü est,
quoniam Jugurthae cöpiam habBs,
quem sl Römanls trâdideris tibi
plûrimum dBbBbitur; amicitia, foe¬
dus, Numidiae pars, quam nunc
petis, tunc ultrö adveniet.
ATTRACTION OF MOOD.
329
Oratio Obliqua.
4. Athëniensès dëplôrâvêrunt vas-
tâtiônem populâtiônemque misera-
bilem agrôrum. Neque se id querl
quod hostilia ab hoste passi forent ;
esse enim quaedam belli jüra quae
ut facete ita pati sit las. Sataexûri,
dïrui tecta, praedâs hominum peco-
rumque agi misera magis quam in¬
digna patienti esse ; vërum enim
v5rö id se querl, quod is, qui Römä-
nös alienigenäs et barbaros vocet,
adeö omnia simul divina hümäna-
que jüra polluerif ut priöre populä-
tiöne cum infernls dils, secunda
cum superls bellum neiarium gesse-
rit. Omnia sepulcra monumentaque
diruta essein ftnibus suis, omnium
nüdätös mânes, nullius ossa terra
tegl. Qualem terram Atticam ifece-
rit, exornatam quondam opulentam-
que, talem eum sl liceat A.etöliam
Graeciamque omnem factürum.
XJrbis quoque suae similem defor-
mitätem futäram fuisse nisi Römanl
subvenissent.
Lrv. xxxi. 30.
Oratio Recta.
Non id querimur quod hostilia ab
hoste passl sumus. Sunt enim
quaedam belli jüra quae ut facere
ita patl est fös. Sata exürl, dirul
tecta, praedas hominum pecorum-
que agi misera magis quam indigna
patienti sunt ; verum enim verö id
querimur quod is, qui Romanos
alienigen äs et barbaros vocat, adeö
omnia simul divina hümSnaque
jüra polluit ut priöre populätiöne
cum infernls dils, secunda cum su¬
perls bellum neförium gesserit.
Omnia sepulcra monumentaque di¬
ruta sunt in ftnibus nöstris, omnium
nüdati manes, nullius ossa terra
teguntur. Quälem terram Atticam
fecit, exornatam quondam opulen-
tamque, tälem is, si licebit Aetöliam
Graeciamque omnem faciet. TJrbis
quoque nöstrae similis deformitâs
íuisset, nisi Römanl subvenissent.
INVOLVED ORATIO OBLÏQUA. ATTRACTION OF MOOD.
665. Oratio Obliqua proper depends on some verb of Thinking or
Saying, expressed or understood. In a more general sense, the term O.
Obliqua is used of all complementary clauses, that belong to ideal rela¬
tions. The principle is the same in both sets of sentences, for in the one
as in the other, the Infinitive takes its dependencies in the Subjunctive, on
account of the close relation between the Ideal mood and the Substantive
Idea of the verb. Hence the favorite combination of the Infinitive and
the Ideal second person :
Proprium hümäni ingenii est ödisse quem laeserîs. Tac. Iiis {peculiar
to)human nature to hate whom you hare injured. (But Odisti quem laesisti.)
The so-called attraction of mood by which clauses originally Indicative
become Subjunctive in dependence on Subjunctives, is another phase of
the same general principle.
666. All clauses which depend on Infinitives and Subjunc¬
tives, and form an integral part of the thought, are put in the
Subjunctive :
330
PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES.
Recordätione nöstrae amïcitiae sic fhior ut beâtë vixisse videar quia
cum Scïpiône vixerim. Cic. I enjoy fke remembrance of our friendship so
much that I seem to have lived happily because I lived with Scipio.
Vereor ne dum minuere velim labörem augeam. Cic. I fear lest while
I am wishing to lessen the toil I may increase it (dum minuere vole, augeo).
Corporis viribus ütäre dum adsint, cum absint ne requiräs. CiC.
(264.)
Quäre fîëbat ut omnium oculös quotiëscumque in publicum prödisset
ad së converteret. Nep. Whereby it happened that he attracted the eyes of
all^ every time he went out in public (quotiëscumque prödierat convertëbat).
Nëscîre quid antequam nätus sis acciderit, id est semper esse pue-
rum. Cic. Not to know what happened before you were bom, (that) is tobe
always a boy.
Fraus fidem in parvis sibi praestruit ut cum operae pretium sit,
cum magna mercëde fallat. CiC. Fraud lays itself a foundation of credit
in small things in order thai when it is worth while it may make a great profit
by cheating.
Rëte texunt [araneolae] ut si quid inhaeserit confidant. Cic. Spiders
weave a web to kill anything that gets caught in it (si quid inhaesit confici-
unt, 569).
Abeunti si quid poposcerit concëdere möris. Tac. To the departing
(guest) it is customary to grant anything that he asks (Si quid poposcit
concëdunt).
Remarks.—1. From this it is easy to see how the Subjunctive came to be used in a
Generic or Iterative sense after Tenses of Continuance. Present, Imperfect, and Future
Indicative may all involve the Notion of Habit, Will, Inclination, Endeavor, and the
complementary clauses would follow the sense rather than the form (Partial Obliquity).
Examples, see 569, R.
2. Dum not unfrequently resists the Attraction both in prose and poetry :
Tantum në noceäs dum vis prödesse vidëtë. Ov. (548.)
PARTicrpiAL Sentences.
667. Participles are used in Latin even more extensively
than in English, to express a great variety of subordinate rela¬
tions, such as Time and Circumstance^ Cause and Occasion,
Condition and Concession. The classification cannot always be
exact, as one kind blends with another.
Remarks.—1. It is sometimes convenient to translate a Participial Sentence by a co¬
ordinate clause, but the Participle itself is never coordinate, and such clauses are never
equivalents. (409, R. 2.) :
Manlius Galium caesum torque spoliävit. Liv. Manlim slew the Gavl and strip-
•ped him of his neckchain (after slaying the Gaul stripped bim of bis neckcbain, having
slain, etc.).
PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES.
331
Miltiadës capitis absolñtus, pecûniâ multätus est. Nef. Miltiades (thongh) ac¬
quitted of a capital charge, was mulcted in (a sum of ) money (was acquitted, but mulcted).
2. A common translation of the Participle is an Abstract Noun : See 324, R 3 :
Terra mûtâta ii5n mütat mores. Lrv. The change of land changeth not the char¬
acter.
Téucer TJlixën reum facit Ajacis occisi. Quint. Teucer indicts Ulysses for the
murder of Ajax.
On the Participle after Verbs of Perception and Representation, see 524, R. 1 and 536.
668. Participles may represent Time when :
Alexander moriens anulum suum dederat Perdiccae. Nef. Alexan¬
der (when he was) dying^ had given hü ring to Perdiccas.
Dionysius tyrannus Syrâcûsîs expulsas Corinthî puerös dooêbat.
Cíe. Dionysius the tyrant^ (after he had been) exiled from Syracuse (after
his exile from Syracuse), taught (a) hoy^ (school) at Corinth.
Ablative Absolute :
Solon et Pisistratus Servio Tullio régnante viguërunt. Cío. Solon and
Pisistratus ßourished when Servius Tullius was (in the reign of Servius
Tullius).
Sole orto Volsoï se ciroumvallätös vîdërunt. Liv. When the sun was
risen (after sunrise), the VoUcians saw that they were surrounded by lines of
intrenchment.
Rehabk.—On the Ablative Absolute of the Simple Participle, see 438, R. 1.
669. Participles may represent Cause Why :
Arëopagïtae damnâvërunt puerum ooturnïcum ooulôs ëruentem.
Quint. The court of Mar¿ Hill condemned a boy because he plucked out
(for plucking out) the eyes of quails.
Athëniensës Aloibiadem oorruptum ä rëge Persärum oapere nöluisse
Oymën arguëbant. Nep, The Athenians charged Alcibiades with having
been unwilling to take Cyme (because he had been) bribed by the King of
Persia.
Ablative Absolute :
Römäm veterës regnârï omnës volëbant lîbertâtis duloëdine nôndum
experta. Liv. The old Romans ail wished to have a king over them (because
they had) not yet tried the sweetness of liberty.
Remaek.—An apparent cause is given by ut as velut, as, for instance, tanquam (so)
as, quasi, as if, see 604, R. 2.
670. Participles may represent Condition and Concession :
Si latet ars prSdest, affert dëprensa pudörem. Ov. (594, 3.)
333
PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES.
Rïsiis interdum ita repente ërumpit nt enm cupientês tenêre nequeâ.
mus. Cic. (611.)
IVEiltiadês capitis absolûtus pecüniä multâtus est. Nep. (667, K.)
Ablative Absolute :
Maximâs virtùtes jacëre omnës necesse est voluptâte dominante.
Cic. (594,2.)
Remark.—Later writers combine with the Participle etsi, qaanquam, quamvis,
see 611, R.
671. Participles may represent Kelative Clauses (640) :
Omnës aliud agentës, aliud simulantës, perfidî sunt. Cío.
Pisistratus Homërî libros coniusôs anteä sic disposuisse dicitur ut
nunc habëmus. CiC.
Remark.—So called, qui dicitur, vocättir, quem vocant ; aöove-mentioned, quem
antea, supra dîzimus.
672. Future Participle {Actim),—The Future Participle is a verbal
adjective, denoting capability and tendency, chiefly employed in the older
language with sum, I am, as a periphrastic tense. In later Latin, it is used
freely, just as the Present and Perfect Participles, to express subordinate
relations.
Peculiar is the free use of it in Sentences of Design, and especially no¬
ticeable the compactness gained by the employment of it in Conditional
Eelations.
673. In later Latin, the Future Participle (Active) is used to
represent subordinate relations ;
1. Time When :
Tiberius tr^ectûrus (cum tr^'ectûrus esset) Rhënum commeätum non
transmisit. Suet. When Tiberius wols about to cross the Ehine, he did not
send oner the provisions.
2. Cause Why :
Dërïdiculô fuit senex foedissimae adülätiönis talitrun infamia üsürus.
Tac. a butt of ridicule was the old man, as infamy was the only gain he
woxild make by his foul fawning.
Antiochus sëcûrus erat dë bello Romano tanquam nön transitûrïs in
Asiam Rômànîs. (604, E. 2.)
3. Purpose :
IVEaroboduus mîsit lëgâtôs ad Tiberium ôrâtûrôs auxilia. Tac. (543,
R. 2.)
ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS.
333
Remakk.—The Present Participle is sometimes used in a similar sense, but the Pur¬
pose is only an inference :
Lëgâtî vënërunt nûntiantës Asiae quoque civitâtës sollicitäri. Lrv. Envoys
came with the announcement that the states of Asia (Minor) also were tampered with.
4. Condition and Concession :
1.) Protasis.
Dëditûxïs se Hannibalî fuisse accersendum Römänörum praesidium ?
Lrv. If they had been ready to surrender to Hannibal, would they have had
to send for a Roman garrison ? (= Si dëditûrï fuissent, Ö. R. si dëditûrî
fuërunt.)
2.) Apodosis.
Quatiunt arma, ruptûrî imperium ni diicantur. Tac. They dash their
arms, ready to break orders, if they be not Ud forward.
liibrum misi exigent! tibi, missûrus etsï non exëgissës. Plin. Ef. 1
have sent you the book, as you exacted it, although I should have sent it even
if you had not exacted it.
ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS.
674. The Latin language allows greater freedom in the ar¬
rangement of words than the English. This freedom is, of
course, due to its greater wealth of inflections.
675. Grammatical arrangement has for its object clearness.
Rhetorical arrangement has for its objects Emphasis and
Rhythm.
1. Emphasis is produced 1. By reversing the ordinary position.
2. By approximation of similars or opposites.
3. By separation.
In all sentences beginning and end are emphatic points. In long sen¬
tences the means as well as the extremes are the points of emphasis.
2. Rhythm.—Much depends on the rhythmical order of words, for
which the treatises of the ancients are to be consulted. Especially avoided
are poetic rhythms. So, for example, the dactyl and spondee, or close of
an hexameter at the end of a period.
676. Rule I.—The most simple arrangement of a sentence
is as follows :
1. The Subject and its Modifiers.
2. The Modifiers of the Predicate.
3. The Predicate Proper or Verb.
334
ARRANGEMENT OP WORDS.
1. Dionysius t3n'annus, 2. Syrâcûsis expulsas CorinthX puerSs,
3. docëbat. Cic. (668.)
Rhetorical positions :
Potentes sequitur invidia. Quint. (479.)
Nôbïs non satisfacit ipse Demosthenes. CiC. (556. R. 1.)
Dëscriptus eratpopulus Rômânus censû, ordinibus, aetâtibus. CiC.
Intra moenia sunt hostës. Sall.
Remark.—The modifiers of the predicate stand in the order of their importance. The
following arrangement is common :
1. Place, Time, Cause, or Means.
2. Indirect Object.
3. Direct Object.
4. Adverb.
5. Verb.
677. Rule II.—Interrogative Sentences begin with the in¬
terrogative, subordinate clauses with the leading particle or
relative :
Quis eum diligat quem metuat ? CiG. (631.)
Postquam Caesar pervënit obsidës poposcit. Caes. (563.)
Sí spîritum dûcit vïvit, cic. (597.)
Qui timëre dësierint ôdisse incipient. Tac. (569.)
Rhetorical position :
Nâtûram si sequëmur ducem, nunquam aberrâbimus. CiC. (597.)
Dë futûrîs rëbus etsî semper difficile est dicere, tamen interdum con¬
jectura pcssïs accëdere. CiO. (606.)
Cato mîrâri së âjëbat quod non rîdëret haruspex, haruspicem cmn
vidisset. Cic. (569.)
678. Rule III.—An Adjective or dependent Genitive fol¬
lows tbe word to which it belongs:
Torquätus fîlium suum necâiî jussit. Sall. (540.)
Sensiun oculôrum praecipit animus. Quint. (540.)
Rhetorical positions :
Hannibalem suï cîvës ë clvitâte ëjëcërunt. CiC. (295, R. 1.)
ïsocratës queritur plus honoris corporum quam animörum virtûtibus
darï. Quint. (542, R.)
Ager, cum multös annôs requiëvit, ûberiôris eflferre firûgës seiet. CiC.
(569.)
Vereor në parum hïc liber mellis et absinthil multrun habëre videâ-
tur. Quint. (552.)
Remarks.—1. Many expressions have become fixed formulae : So titles, proper
names, and the like : see 284 :
Facinus est vincirï clvem Eömännm. Cic. (535.)
AEBANGEMENT OP WOEDS.
335
2. The demonstrative pronouns regularly precede :
Vereor uS hie liber absinthii multum habSre videatur. Quint. (552.)
Ehetorical po sition :
Recordare tempus illud, cum pater Cûrio maerens jacëbat in lectö. Cío. (582.)
3. New modifiers of either element may be inserted, prefixed, or added :
Catonem vidi in bibliothëcâ sedentem multis circumftisum Stöicörum librls.
Cic. (536.)
Saepe magna indolës virtütis priusquam reipüblicae prödesse potuisset ez-
stincta fuit. Cío. (579.)
At vidëte hominis intoleräbilem audäciam. Cic. (490.)
Aristidës interfuit pugnae näväli apud Salaminem. Nsp. (346.)
679. Eule IV.—Adyerbs are commonlj put next to their
verb, and before it when it ends a sentence, and immediately
before their adjective or adverb :
Zênônem cum Athënîs essem audiebam frequenter . . . CiC. (586.)
Nemo örätörem admîràtus est quod Latine loquerëtur. CiC. (542.)
Vix cuiquam persuâdëbatur Graeciä omni cessürös Romanos. Lrv.
(546, R 2.)
Risus interdum ita repente ërumpit ut eum cupientës tenëre neque-
âmus. Cic. (611.)
Rhetorical positions :
fram bene Rnnius initium dixit insâniae. CiC. (441.)
Saepe magna indolës virtütis priusquam reipüblicae prödesse potu¬
isset exstincta fuit. Cio. (579.)
Ebhabks.—1. Ferë, paene, prope, usually follow :
Nëmo ferë saltat sôbrius nisi forte insânit. Cic. (592, E. 4.)
2. Negatives always precede, see 447.
680. Rule Y.—Prepositions regularly precede their case.
(414.)
A recta conscientia transversum unguem non oportet discëdere. CiC.
(332.)
Eemarks.—1. On versus, tenus and the regular postposition of cum in combination
with the Personal Pronouns and the Eelative, see 414, E. 1.
2. Monosyllabic prepositions are not unfrequently put between the Adjective and
Substantive :
Magna cum cürS (401).
Less frequently between the Genitive and Substantive ; except when the relative is
employed.
3. Dissyllabic prepositions are sometimes put after their case (Anastrophé), especial¬
ly after a relative or demonstrative : most frequently contra, inter, propter. So also
adverbs.
4. The preposition may be separated from its case by a Genitive or an Adverb.
Ad Appil Claudll senectiltem accëdëbat etiam ut caecus esset. Cío. (558.)
5. Monosyllabic prepositions such as cum, ex, dë, post, sometimes append the en-
336
AllRANGEMENÏ OF WORDS.
clitics -que, -ve, -ne, as ex que iis, and from them. Usually, however, the enclitics join
the dependent substantive : in patriamque rediit, and returned to his country.
On the position of per, see 415, R.
681. Eule VI.—Particles vary :
Snim commouly takes the second, seldom the third place; nam and
namque are regularly prepositive.
Ergö in the syllogism precedes, elsewhere follows ; igitur is commonly
second or third ; itaque regularly first.
Tarnen is first, but may follow an emphatic word.
Etiam usually precedes, queque always follows.
Quidem and dêmum {at UngtlC) follow the word to which they belong.
682. Eule VII.—A word that belongs to more than one
word regularly stands before them all, or after them all, some¬
times after the first (287) :
Ariovistus respondit multis sêsê nôbilibus principibusque populi
Römäni grätum factûrum. Caes. (670, 9.)
ïsocratês quexitur plus honoris corporum quam animörum virtütibus
darî. Quint. (542, R.)
Longum est mülörum persequi ûtilitàtës et asinörum. Cic. (246, E.)
683. Eule VIII.—Words of kindred or opposite meaning
are often put side by side for the sake of complement or con¬
trast :
Manus manum lavat, One hand washes the other.
Oato mîrârï se âjëbat quod non rïdëret haruspex, haruspioem cum
vïdisset. CiC. (569.)
Emit morte immortâlitâtem. Quint. (404.)
684. Eule IX.—Contrasted Pairs.—'Wh&a. pairs are con¬
trasted, the second is put in the same order as the first, but
often in inverse order. This inverse order is called Chiasmus,*
or crosswise position, and gives alternate stress. The principle
is of wide application.
Same order :
Fortuna vestra facit ut irae meae temperem. Lrv. (557.)
Malo të sapiens hostis metuat qusun stulti cïvës laudent. Lrv. (546,
R. 2.)
* From the Greek letter X*
1. Foris jpr 2. arma.
2. consilium -A 1. doml.
AREANGEMENT OF CLAUSES.
337
Inverse order (Chiasmus) :
Ante videmus (1) fulgurätiönem (2) quam sonum (2) audiämus (1).
Sen. (579.)
Parvl sunt forïs (1) arma (2) nisi est consilium (2) domi (1). CiC. (412,
R. 1.)
ARRANGEMENT OF CLAUSES.
685. A period is a compound sentence with one or more
subordinate clauses, in which sentence the meaning is kept sus¬
pended to the close.
686. Latin periods may be divided into two classes :
1. Responsive or Apodotic, in which a Protasis has an
Apodosis.
2. Intercalary or Enthetic, in which the various items are
inserted in their proper place between Subject and Predicate.
687. Care must be taken—
1. To vary the clauses, so as to prevent too great uniformity
of rhythm.
2. To observe a certain proportion in the length of the
clauses.
The following passages may be cited as specimens of long
periods :
Ut saepe homines aegri morbo gravi, cum aestû febrlque jactantur, si
aquam gelidam biberunt, primö relevärl videntur, deinde multS gravius
vehementiusque afflictantur : sic hic morbus, qui est in república, rele-
vätus istius paenä, vehementius, vivis reliquis, ingravescet. Cio. (Apodotic.)
Catuvolcus, rex dimidiae partis Eburônum, qui ûnâ cum Ambiorige
consilium inierat, aetäte jam confectus, cum labörem aut belli aut fugae
ferre non posset, omnibus precibus detestätus Ambiorigem, qui ejus con-
silil auctor fuisset, taxö, cujus magna in Galliä Germäniäque cöpia est, se
exanimSvit. Cabs. (Enthetic.)
FIGURES OF SYNTAX AND RHETORIC.
688. Ellipsis is the omission of some integral part of the
thought, such as the substantive of the adjective (195, R. 1),
the copula of the predicate (200), the verb of the adverb.
Unde domo ? 411, R. 2.
15
338 FIGURES OF SYNTAX AND RHETORIC.
Remark.—When the ellipsis is indefinite, do not attempt to supply it. The figure is
much abused by commentators in the explanation of grammatical phenomena.
689. Brachylogy (breviloquentia) is a failure to repeat an
element which is often to be supplied in a more or less modified
form.
Tam fëlîx esses quam formSsissima (= es) vellem. Oy. (316.)
690. Zeugma or Syllepsis is a junction of two words under
the same regimen, or with the same modifier, although the
common factor strictly applies but to one.
Manüs ac supplices vöces ad Tiberium tendens. Tac. Stretching out
hands and (uttering) suppliant cries to Tiberius.
691. Aposiôpësis is a rhetorical breaking off before the close
of the sentence, as in the famous Vergilian duos ego
692. Pleonasm is the use of superfiuous words.
693. Hyperbaton, or Trajection, is a yiolent displacement of
words.
Lydia die per omnes të deös 5r5. HoR. (415, R.)
694. Anacolûthon, or loant of sequence, occurs when the
scheme of a sentence is changed in its course.
695. Hendiadys (¿V ôià âvozv) consists in giTing an analy¬
sis instead of a complex, in putting two substantives connected
by a copulative conjunction, instead of one substantive and
an adjective or attributive genitive :
Vulgfus et multitñdo, the common Tierd.
Via et ratio, scientific metTiod.
Vx et arnüs, by force of arms.
Remark.—This figure is much abused by commentators.
696. Constructio Praegnans. So-called constmctio praegnans
is nothing but an extended application of the accusative of the
Inner Object (Object Effected). The result is involved, not
distinctly stated.
Exitium inStat. Tac. He provokes djestruetion. (Ad exitium initat.)
697. On Litotes, see 448, R. 2.
PROSODT.
698. Peosodt treats of Quantity and Versification.
Remark.—Prosody originally meant Accent. Latin Accent is regu¬
lated by Quantity, and as classic Latin versification is also quantitative,
Prosody is loosely used of both quantity and versification.
Quantity.
699. Eule I.—A syllable is said to be long hy nature when
it contains a long vowel or diphthong : o, vae, lëgês, saevae.
Remark.—Every vowel sound followed by j is long. This is due
sometimes to the broad sound of the j itself, sometimes to natural length
of the vowel, sometimes to compensation (Q^us from Qâvius, pêjero for
peijero). J does not make position in the compounds of jugum, yoke;
bijugus, two-horse.
700. Rule IL—A syllable is said to be long iy position when
a short vowel is followed by two or more consonants, or a
double consonant : a rs, c o lluin, d i seo, c a stra.
Remarks.—1. The consonants may be divided between two words:
per m are, in t errîs ; but when all the consonants are in the second word,
the preceding short syllable commonly remains short : praemia scribae.
2. The natural length of a vowel before two consonants is often hard,
often impossible, to determine. Every vowel before nf and na seems to
have had a long sound. Other points are too much disputed to be intro¬
duced into an elementary treatise. With the clear and full pronunciation
of the vowels, the difference between length by natm*e and length by posi¬
tion was probably not so great as might be supposed.
701. Rule III.—K syllable ending in a short vowel before a
mute, followed by 1 or r, is common : tenë-brae.
340
quantity of final syllables.
Remarks.—1. The syllable must end in a short vowel: náví-ñragus,
melH-fluus ; but ä b-rumpo, 5 b-liviscor.
2. In Greek words, m and n are included under this rule : T§-cmessa,
Cy-cnus.
702. Rule IV.—Every diphthong, and every vowel derived
from a diphthong, or contracted from other vowels, is long :
saevus, conclûdo (from claudo), inlquus (from aeqtms), cögo
(from coigo = con + ago).
Exception.—Prae in composition is shortened before a vowel ; prae-
ustus.
703. Rule V.—One simple vowel before another vowel-
sound, or h, makes a short syllable; déns, God; pùer, toy ;
nihil, nothing.
Exceptions.—1. a in the old Genitive of the First Declension : aur^.
2. e in -eï of the Fifth Declension, when a vowel pre¬
cedes : diêî, but fideî.
3. a and e before i in proper names in -jus : Gâî,
Pompëï.
4. i in the Genitive form -îus. Alterîus is often short¬
ened, perhaps even in prose : ünius, ullïus, nullius,
tStíus, are found in poetry. In alius the i is never
shortened (alius for aliius).
5. i in fio (for fulo) is long, except before r : fio, but
fieret.
6. Iheu, Diana, ôhë, dius (= divus).
7. Many Greek words : ä ër, Menel ä us, mus ë um,
Mëd C a.
Quantity of Final Syllables.
A. Polysyllables.
704. Rule VI.—In words of more than one syllable, final
a, e, and y are short ; i, o, and u are long.
1. a is short: terrä, earth; dönä, gifts; oapitä, heads.
Exceptions.—1. Ablative of the First Declension : terra.
2. Vocative of words in as (Aenëâ), and Greek Nomin¬
ative in a long (Êlectrâ).
3. Imperative of First Conjugation : amâ.
4. Most uninflected words : trigintä, juxtäj but itä,
quiä, ëja, putä {for instance).
quantity of final syllables. 341
2. e is short.
Exceptions.—1. Ablative of the Fifth Declension: die.
2. Imperative of Second Conjugation : mone (but cavS
and occasionally other Iambic Imperatives).
3. Most adverbs of Second Declension : recti (but beni,
male, inferné, superné, saepe).
4. Greek words in e long (if) : Tempi, meli.
8. y is always short, except in contracted forms : misy (Dative misy =
misyi).
4. i is long : domini, viginti, audi.
Exceptions.—!. Greek Dative sï : Troasï.
2. Greek Nominatives, sinâpi Vocatives, Parf; Da¬
tives Sing, (rarely) Minöidi.
8. quasi, nisi, oui (when a dissyllable).
4. i is common in mihi, tibi, sibi, ibi, ubi.
Observe the compounds : ibidem, ibique, ubique, ubinam, ubivis, ubi-
cunque, nicubi ; (uti, but) utinam, utique, sicutL
5. o is long : bono, tûtô.
Exceptions,—1. Common in Nominatives of proper names, and occa¬
sionally in common nouns : ScipiS, virgS.
2. Common in verbal forms, but more rarely outside of
the Present Tense or in verbs with long penults :
sciS, putB, vol5 ; esto, credo. The short pronun¬
ciation extended sometimes even to the Gerund :
amando.
8. o is short in modö, citö, duo, octö, egS, illicS, immö,
and in many other words (in later poetry).
6. u is always long : cornu, fructü, auditû.
705. Eule VIL—All final syllables that end in a simple
consonant other than s are short.
Exceptions.—1. alec, lien, and many Greek nouns.
2. The adverbs and oblique cases of illic, illûc, istic,
istûc, can hardly be considered exceptions, as -o is
for -ce, and is merely enclitic.
8. Compounds of par ; dispar, impär.
4. iït, petiît, and their compounds.
706. Eule VIII.—Of final syllables in s : as, es, os, are long ;
is, us, ys, short.
842 quantity op final syllables.
1. as is long : Aeneas, servas, amas.
Exceptions.—1. Greek nouns in äs, adis ; Areas, Arcadis.
2. Greek Accusative Plural, Third Declension : heröäs.
Arcadas.
8. anas, anätis.
2. es is long : rêgës, dies, menés.
Exceptions.—1. Nominative Singular Third Declension, when the
Genitive has étis, ïtis, ídis : segäs, mîlés, obsës ;
but abiës, ariës, paziës.
2. Compounds of ës, he : adës, potës.
3. penës (Preposition).
4. Greek words in ës (f?) : Nominative Plural, Arcadës ;
Vocative, Dëmosthenës ; Neuter, cacoëthës.
8. os is long : deës, nep5s.
Exceptions.—1. Compös, impös, exös.
2. Greek words in ös (oí) : melSs.
4. is is short : canis, legis.
Exceptions.—1. Dative and Ablative Plural. tends, bonis.
2. Accusative Plural of the Third Declension ; omnis =
omnës.
8. In the Nominative of sundry words, increasing long
in the Genitive : Quiris, Quiritis.
4. Second Person Singular Present Indicative Active,
Fourth Conjugation: audis.
5. In the verbal forms from vis, sis, fis, and velis :
no-Iis, mä-Iis, ad-sis, cale-fis.
6. In the Second Person Singular Future Perfect In¬
dicative and Perfect Subjunctive, is is common;
videris.
5. ns is short : servas, curras.
Exceptions.—1. Gen. Sin., Nom. and Acc. Plural, Fourth Declension ;
carras.
2. Nominative Third Declension, when the Genitive has
a long a : virtus, virtùtis ; incus, incûdis : tellûs,
tellüris.
8. In Greek words with u long (oui) : tripas, Sapphüs ;
but Oedipus and polypus.
6. ys is short : chlamys.
quantity op monosyllables.
343
B, Monosyllables.
707. Kule IX.—All monosyllables that end in a vowel are
long : ä, dä, mê, dê, hl, si, ö, do, tu.
Except the enclitics : -que, -ve, -ue, -cë, -te, -psë, -ptë.
708. Rule X.—Declined or conjugated monosyllables that
end in a consonant follow the rules given : das, flës, sels, dát,
flét, is, id, quis, his, quis, quös.
hic, this one, is sometimes short ; die and due have the quantity of their
verbs ; es, be, is short
709. Rule XI.—Monosyllabic Xominatives of Substantives
and Adjectives are long when they end in a consonant, even if
the stem-syllable be short: ös, mos, ver, sol, für, plus; lär (láris),
pës (pedis), bös (bovis), par (paris).
Exceptions.—vir and lac, os (ossis), mel ;
Also cor, vas (vadis), fei.
710. Rule XII.—Monosyllabic particles that end in a con¬
sonant are short : àn, eis, in, née, pér, tér.
Excepting en and n5n and quin ;
And also oras and cur and sin ;
Also the Adverbs in c : hie, hue, hac, sic.
Quantity of Stem-Syllables.
711. Rule XIII.—The quantity of stem-syllables, when not
determined by the general rules, is fixed by the usage of the
poets (long or short by mUhority),
Remarks.—1. The changes of quantity in the formation of tense-stems
have been set forth in the conjugation of the verb, (153, 3.)
2. The occasional diflFerences in the quantity of the stem-syllables,
which spring from the same radical, can only be explained by reference
to the history of each word, and cannot be given here.
344
quantity in
compounds.
päciscor,
mäcer,
pâx, päcis. sëdeo, sëdês.
macero. fídes, fido (feido).
lex, legis. dux, duels, düco (douce).
rëx, régis. vöco, vox.
tëgula. lucerna, lûceo (louceo).
äcerbus. suspïcor, suspîcio.
mölestus. möveo, möbilis (= movbilis).
lego,
rëgo,
tëgo,
âcer,
môlës,
Quantity in Compounds.
712. Eule XIV,—Compounds generally keep the quantity
of their constituent parts: (cêdo), ante-côdo, dô-cêdo, prô-cëdo,
(caedo), occldo (câdo), occido.
Eemarks.—1. Of the inseparable prefixes, dî, së, and vë, are long,rë,
short : dîdûco, sëdûco, vëcors, rëdûco. Exceptions : di in disertus is
short ; in dirimo dir stands for dis.
2. Ne is short, except in nëdum, nëmo (ne-hemo), nëquam, nëqui-
quam, nëquâquam, nëquitia, nëve, nëcubi, nëcunde.
3. Rë is sometimes lengthened ; the following letter is then doubled in
many texts : rel(l)igio, rel(l)iquiae, rep(p)erit, re(t)tulit ; compare reddo.
Re is for red, but, except in perfect stems and in dactylic poetry, there is
no compensation.
4. Pro is shortened in many words, especially before f : pröfugio, pröiii-
gus, pröfundus, pröfiteor, pröfäri, pröfänus, pröficiscor, pröcella, pröcul,
prönepös. The older language shortens less frequently than the later.
In Greek words pro {Ttpo) is generally short : prôphëta.
5. The second part of the compound is sometim es shortened : dëjëro,
(from juro), cognïtus, agnïtus (from nôtus). Notice the quantity in the
compounds of -dicus : fätidi cus, vërid ïcus (dîco), and innûba, prónuba
(nûbo).
6. Mechanical rules, more minute than those given above, might be
multiplied indefinitely, but they are all open to so many exceptions as to
be of little practical value. A correct pronunciation of Latin cannot be
acquired except by constant practice, under the direction of a competent
teacher, or by a diligent study of the Latin poets, and consequently of
Latin versification.
713. Poetry often preserves the older forms of language, and
perpetuates peculiarities of pronunciation, both of which are too
frequently set down to poetic licence.
piguees of Peosody.
FIGURES OF PROSODY.
345
714. Hiatus and Elision.—Hiatus is tlie meeting of two
vowels in separate syllables, which meeting produces an almost
continuous opening (yawning) of the vocal tube. In the body
of a word this hiatus, or yawning, is avoided sometimes by con¬
traction, often by shortening the first vowel (13).
In poetry, when one word ends with a vowel and another
begins with a vowel, or h, the first vowel is elided. Elision is
not a total omission, but rather a hurried half-pronunciation.
a e
O felùc un(a) ant(e) alias Priameïa virgo.—Yero.
In like manner m final (a faint nasal sound) is elided with its short
vowel before a vowel or h {Ecthlipm).
u u e
Monstr(um), horrend(um), infonn(e) ingens cui lumen ademptum.—
Yekg.
Exceptions.—After a vowel or m final, the word est, is, drops its e
and joins the preceding syllable.
Si rixas t ubi tu pulsas ego vapulo tantum.—^Juv.
Aeternas quoniam paenas in morte timendum s t.—LüCB.
Remarks.—1. The Hiatus is sometimes allowed : a, in the Arsis, chiefly when the first
vowel is long; 6, in the Thesis, when a long vowel is shortened ; c, before a period.
a. Stant et juniper! (a) et castaneae Qi) hirsutae. ybbg.
&. Crëdimus ? an qui (A) amant ipsi sibi somnia fingunt ? Yero.
c. Promlssam eripui genero, (h) Arma impia sumpsi. Ybbg.
2. Monosyllabic interjections are not elided.
3. On the elision of e in -ne 1 see 456, R. 2.
715. Diastole.—Many final syllables, which were originally
long, are restored to their rights by the weight of the Arsis,
This is called Diastolê.
Hostis est ux5r invita quae ad virum nuptum datur.—Plaut.
Dummodö morata recte veniat dotatast satis.—Plaut.
Fectoribûs inhians spirantia consulit exta.—Yerg.
Perrupit Acheronta Herculeus labor.—^Hor.
Sometimes, however, Diastolé arises from the necessities of the verse
(as in proper names), or is owing to a pause (Punctuation).
Nee quas Piiamides in aquOsis vallibus Idae.—Ov.
Desine plura puer—et quod nunc instat agamus.—^Yerg.
Remarks.—1. Scholars are not agreed on all these points.
2. Notice especially -quS :
Sideraquë ventique nocent avidaeque volucres. Ov.
15*
346 FIGURES OP PROSODY.
716. Systole.—Long syllables which had hegun to shorten in
prose, are shortened (Systole).
Obstupui steteruntque comae vox faucibus haesit.—Verg.
E terra magn(um) alterïus spectsire laborem-—LuCR.
Unius ad certam formam primordia rerum.—Lucr.
Nullius addictus jurare in verba magistri.—Hor.
Remarks.—1. Many regard the short penult of the Perf. in stetërunt, dedërunt, as
original (dedro in inscriptions).
2. In earlier poetry (e. g. Plautus), many syllables otherwise long by position are
shortened : So ille, and its forms iste, more rarely ipse. Also inde, unde, and others.
717. Hardening.—The vowels i and u assert their half-con¬
sonant nature (Hardening) : abjëtë, (àbïëtë), gënvâ (gënùâ),
tënviâ (tënûïâ).
Plûvjorum rex Eridanus camposque per omnes.—^Verg.
Nam quae t ë n v i a sunt hiscendist nulla potestas.—Lucr.
718. Dialysis.—The consonants j and v assert their half-
vowel nature (Diálysis) : dissôlùo (dissolvo), Gâiûs (Gâjus, from
Gävius).
Adulteretur et columba m i 1 u o.—Hor.
719. Syncopé.—Short vowels are dropped between conson¬
ants, as often in prose (Syncope) : calfacio for calefacio.
Templorum positor templorum sánete reposto r.—Ov.
Quiddam magnum add ens unum me surpite(= surripite) morti.—
Hor.
720. Tmesis.—Compound words are separated into their
parts (Tmesis).
Quo me cunque rapit tempestas deferor hospes.—Hor.
Remark.—The earlier poets carry Tmesis much further in unwise emulation of the
Greek. Celebrated is :—
Saxo cere comminuit brum. Ennius.
721. Synizesis.—Vowels are connected by a slur (Synizesis),
as often in the living language : demde, deinceps.
Quid faciam roger anne rogem ? quid deinde rogabo ?—Ov
So even when h intervenes, as dehinc :
Eurum ad së Zephyrumque vocat, dehinc talia fatur. Verg.
VERSIFICATION". 347
Remark.—SynizSsîs {settling together) is also called Synaerësis {taking together)^ as
opposed to Diaeresis (5) ; but Syuaeresis properly means contraction, as in cögO (for
COigO), and nëmo (for nelieino). Synaloepha is a general term embracing all methods
of avoiding Hiatus.
722. Peculiarities of S.—In the older poetry, final s, preceded
by a short vowel, is dropped before a consonant.
in somnis vidit priu(s) quam sam (= earn) discere cóepit.—Ennius.
Often in Lucretius.
Remark.—In comic poetry, a short final syllable in s blends with est, and sometimes
with es : opust (= opus est) ; simili's (= similis es).
VERSIFICATION.
723. Rhythm.—Rhythm means harmonious movement. In
language, Rhythm is marked by the stress of voice {Accent).
The accented part is called the Arsis; the unaccented, the
Thesis. The Rhythmical Accent is called the Ictus {flow, heat).
Remark.—Besides the dominant Ictus, there is a subordinate or second¬
ary Ictus, just as there is a dominant and a secondary Accent in words.
724. Metre.—Rhythm, when represented in language, is em¬
bodied in Metre {Measure). A Metre is a system of syllables
standing in a determined order.
725. Unit of Measure.—The Unit of Measure is the short
syllable: Mora, Tempus {Time),
The value in music is = i.
The long - is the double of the short.
The value in music is J = i.
Remark.—Any quantity that cannot be measured by the standard unit is called
irrational.
726. Resolution and Contraction.—In some verses, two short
syllables may be used instead of a long (Resolution), or a long
instead of two short (Contraction).
Resolution, J #. Contraction, wv-» J J.
U I
727. Feet.—^As elements of musical strains, Metres are calle4
Bars.
348
versification.
As elements of verses, Metres are called Feet.
As musical strains are composed of equal bars, so verses are
composed of equal feet, marked as in music, thus | .
Remark.—Theoretically, the number of metres is unrestricted ; prac¬
tically, only those metres are important tfiat serve to embody the prin¬
cipal rhythms.
728. Names of the Feet.—The feet in use are the following :
Trochee,
Iambus,
Tribrach,
Dactyl,
Anapaest,
Spondee,
Cretic,
First PaeSn,
Fourth Paeön,
Bacchïus,
Antibacchîus,
lönicus à majori,
lönicus ä minöri,
Choriambus,
Ditrochee,
Diiambus,
— v-»
—
Feet op Three Times.
— lêg^t.
V.» — lëgûnt.
^ lëgitë.
Feet of Four Times.
lëgïmus.
lëgërënt.
lëgî.
Feet op FrvE Times.
lëgërïnt.
lëgërîtïs.
lëgïndnL
lëgëbânt.
Ië£^[sÛs.
Feet op Six Times.
côllëgïmus.
rëlëgëbânt.
cSllïgërënt.
cölli^^tur.
lëgâmini.
_ —
— \j \j \j
SJ \J —
\j — —
\j
— —
\j
— — \j
J J"
/j
J
r. J
J
n
hj J
JJ"
JJ2
njj
J2J
I h I
VERSIFICATION.
349
Rkmaiîk.—Other feet are put down in Latin Grammars, but they do not occur in
Latin verse, if in any, such as :
Pyrrhic, lëgït-
First Epi trite, w rëlëgërûnt-
Second Epitrite, — o- ëlîgëbSnt.
Third Epitrite, — sëlëgërînt.
Fourth Epitrite, v-» côllëgistïs.
Antispast, lëgëbâris.
Dispondee, sëlëgërûnt.
Second PaeSn, lëgëntïbûs.
Third Paeon, lëgïtôtë.
Molossus, lëgëriint.
729. Ascending and Descending Rhythms.— Khythms are
divided into ascending and descending. If the Arsis follows,
the Ehythm is called ascending ; if it precedes, descending. So
the Trochee has a descending, the Iambus an ascending, rhyihm.
Ascending rhythms may become descending by Anacrüsis.
When the Thesis precedes the Arsis, it is cut off and called
an Anacrüsis {upward stroke, signal-beat). So the Iambus is re¬
garded as an Anacrustic Trochee, the Anapaest as an Anacrus-
tic Dactyl, the lönicus a minor! as an Anacrustic lônicus â
mâjôrî, The sign of the Anacrüsis is:.
730. Names of Rhythms.—Ehythms are commonly called
after their principal metrical representative. So the Trochaic
Ehythm, the Anapaestic Ehythm, the Iambic Ehythm, the
Dactylic Ehythm, the Ionic Ehythm.
731. Glasses of Rhythms.—In Latin, the musical element of
versification is subordinate, and the principles of Greek rhythm
have hilt a limited application,
The Grreek classes are based on the relation of Ai'sis to Thesis.
I. Equal Class, in which the Arsis is equal to the Thesis {yévoi i'dor).
This may be called the Dactylico-Anapaestic class.
II. Unequal Class, in which the Arsis is double of the Thesis {yévoí
diTcXádtov).
This may be called the Trochaico-Iambic class.
III. Quinquepartite or Paeonian Class {Five-eighths class), of which the
Cretic and Bacchïus are the chief representatives {yévoi igfiióXiov).
732. Rhythmical Series.—A Ehythmical Series is an unin¬
terrupted succession of rhythmical feet, and takes its name from
the number of feet that compose it.
Monopody = one foot. Tetrapody = four feet.
Dipody = two feet. Pentapody = five feet.
Tripody = three feet. Hexapody = six feet.
350
VERSIFICATION.
Rkmarks.—1. The Dipody is the ordinary unit of measure (-meter) in Trochaic, Iam¬
bic, and Anapaestic verse. In these rhythms a monometer contains two feet, a dimeter
four, a trimeter six, a tetrameter eight.
2. There are limits to the extension of series.
In Latin, four feet is the limit of the Dactylic, six of the Trochaic and Iambic series.
All beyond these are compounds.
733. Equality of the Feet.—Every rhythmical series is com¬
posed of equal parts. To restore this equality, when it is vio¬
lated by language, there are four methods :
1. Syllaba Anceps.
2. Catalexis.
3. Protraction.
4. Correption.
734. Syllaba Anceps.—The final syllable of a series or verse
may be short or long indifferently. It may be short when the
metre demands a long ; long when the metre demands a short.
Such a syllable is called a Syllaba Anceps.
735. Catalexis and Pause.—A complete series is called Aca-
talectic ; an incomplete series is called Catalectic. A series or
verse is said to be Catalectic in syllabam, in dissyllabum, in
trisyllabum, according to the number of syllables in the cata¬
lectic foot.
I ^ I J. Trimeter dactylicus eataUciicus in syUabam.
^ I I Trimeter dactylicus cataUcticus in dissyllabum.
The time is made up by Pause.
The omission of one mora is marked
A
" " two morae "
A
736. Protraction and Syncopé.—Protraction {rovrf) consists
in drawing out a long syllable beyond its normal quantity. It
occurs in the body of a verse, and serves to make up for the
omission of one or more theses, which omission is called Syn¬
copé.
^ = 8 = J ^ = 4 = J
♦
737- Correption.—Correption is the shortening of a syllable
to suit the measure.
VERSIFICATION. 351
So ßj = two short syllables with the value of one.
So the ordinary (heavy) dactyl is — ^ J
The light (irrational) dactyl is = 3 (l|;+z + l) J
Remabk.—Under this head, notice the frequent use of the irrational long in Trochaift
and Iambic verses, and in Anacrusis. The irrational long is marked >,
The following line illustrates all the points mentioned :
a be bob cL e
-> I |L-1I I"— 11"^^
Nullam I Vare sa- | era || vite pri- | us || severis | arbo | -rem. Hob.
a. Irrational trochee, b. Light dactyl, c. Syncopé and Protraction, á. Syllaba
anceps. e. CatalSxis.
738. Verse.—A Simple Khythm is one that consists of a
simple series.
A Compound Khythm is one that consists of two or more
series.
A Yerse is a simple or compound rhythmical series, which
forms a distinct and separate unit. The end of a verse is
marked—
1. By closing with a full word. Two verses cannot divide a word be¬
tween them.
2. By the Syllaba Anceps, which can stand unconditionally.
3. By the Hiatus, i. e., the verse may end with a vowel, though the next
verse begin with one.
Rehauk.—Occasionally, one verse is run into another by Elision. This is called
83maphea (óvvácpeta). It i» a violation of the fundamental law, and is not to be Imi¬
tated. Vebg. Aen. i., 332-3, 448-9 ; ii., 745-6.
739. Methods of Combining Verses.—The same verse may be
repeated throughout without recurring groups. So the Heroic
Hexameter, the Iambic Trimeter (Linear Composition). Or the
same verse or différent verses may be grouped in pairs (distichs),
triplets (tristichs), fours (tetrastichs). Beyond these simple
stanzas Latin versification seldom ventured.
Larger groups of series are called Systems.
Larger groups of verses are called Strophes, a name some¬
times attached to the Horatian stanzas.
740. Union of Language with Rhythm.—When embodied in
language, rhythm has to deal with rhythmical groups already
352
VEESIFICATIOlSr.
in existence. Every full word is a rhythmical group with its
accent, is a metrical group with its long or short syllables, is a
word-foot. Ictus sometimes conflicts with accent ; the unity
of the verse-foot breaks up the unity of the word-foot.
741. Conflict of Ictus a7id Accent.—In earlier Latin poetry,
the coincidence and conflict of Ictus and Accent are regulated
by subtle laws, the exposition of which would require too much
space. In ordinary Latin verse. Ictus overrides Accent, at least
according to modern pronunciation.
742. Conflict of Word-foot and Verse-foot.—The conflict of
word-foot and verse-foot gives rise to Caesura. Caesura means
an incision produced by the end of a word in the middle of a
verse-foot, and is marked f.
This incision serves as a pause, partly to rest the voice for a more
vigorous effort, partly to prevent monotony by distributing the masses of
the verse.
Remarks.—1. So in the Heroic Hexameter the grpat caesura falls beforeiYie middle of
the verse, to give the voice strength for the first arsis of the second half.
— I jc. — I -¿.f — I —— I ^ ^ I JC. —
Una salus victis t nullam sperare salutem. Yero.
It does not occnr at the middle, as in that case the verse would become monotonous.
2. In many treatises any incision in a verse is called a Caesura.
743. Masculine and Feminine Caesurae.—In trisyllabic me¬
tres, when the end of the word within the verse-foot falls on an
arsis, it is called a Masculine Caesura; when on a thesis, a
Feminine Caesura.
abc d
Una sa ] lus t vi | ctis f nul | lam f spe | rare f sa | lutem.
o, Ô, c, are Masculine Caesurae ; d, a Feminine Caesura.
744. Diaeresis.—When verse-foot and word-foot coincide,
Diaeresis arises, marked thus : j].
Ite domum saturae f venit H Hesperus || ite capellae.—^Verg.
Remark.—Diaeresis, like Caesura, serves to distribute the masses of the verse and
prevent monotony. What is Caesura in an ascending rhythm becomes Diaeresis as soon
as the rhythm is treated anacrustically.
Suis ! et i I psat Ro I ma vi 1 ribus II ruit. Iambic Trimeter.
Su : is et 11 ipsa II Soma II viri | bus tru I it. Troch. Trimeter, Catal., with Anacru¬
sis.
VERSIFICATION.
353
745. Recitation.—When the word-foot runs over into the
next verse-foot, a more energetic recitation is required, in order
to preserve the sense, and hence the multiplication of Oaesurae
lends vigor to the verse.
Remark.—The ordinary mode of scanning, or singing out the elements of a verse,
without reference to signification, cannot be too strongly condemned, as,
TJnasa, lusvic, tisnul, lamspe, raresa, lutem !
Trochaic Ehythms.
746. The Trochaic Rhythm is a descending rhythm, in which
the arsis is double of the thesis. It is represented—
By the Trochee : w;
By the Tribrach : and, at the end of a series,
By the Spondee : -e. —, or rather the irrational Trochee, — >.
Remarks.—1. Anapaests are rare. Dactyls are used only in proper names. Both are
of course irrational. In the earlier poets, however, the treatment of the Trochaic verse
is very free.
2. Trochaic-meters, being compounded of dipodies (ditroohael), have instead of ^
time (728). The second trochee of each dipody (-meter) may be irrational on the principle
of syllaba anceps. Hence the rule :
747. Trochaic-meters admit the substitution of a long for
the short of the even places.
1. Trochaic Tripody (Jthyphallic).
— \j
Bâssareu bicomis.—Atil. Fort. .c. | — v-» |
2. Trochaic Tetrapody {Catalectic).
Aula divitem manet.—Hor. ^ ».y | — \-> | — w | —
3. Trochaic Dimeter, a. Acatalectic ; h. Catalectic.
a. Vive laetus quisque vivís. .a. i./ | — > | .a | —
h. Vita parvom múnus est.—Anthol. Lat. .a. <-» | — >
4. Trochaic Dimeter with Anacrusis {Alcaic).
\ —
Si fráctus illabâtur Orbis.—HoR. | —> | jlkj | —U
748. 5. Trochaic Tetrameter Acatalectic (Octönärius).
I —> I jr. I —>l|.A.<.y I —> I I —G.
Parce jam camoena vati parce jam sacro furori.—Servius.
Remark.—This verse and the following are compounds. The OctSnarius is com¬
pounded of two Dimeters acatalectic ; hence regular Diaeresis after the Dimeter ; freely
handled in comedy ; Hiatus in the Diaeresis ; Monotonous, on account of the division
Into two equal parts. It occurs occasionally in Plautus and Terence.
354
VERSIFICATION.
Verba dum eint, verum si ad rem II coufereutur, vapulabit- Ter.
Sine modo et modestia sum II sine bono jure atque bonore. Flaut.
Petulans protervo iracundo II animo indómito incogitato. Plaut.
749. 6. Trochaic Tetrameter Catalectic (Septénarius).
Cras amet qui nunquam amavit || quique amavit eras amet. Pebyig.
Ven.
Tu me amoris magi' quam honoris || servavisti gratia. Ennius.
Vapulare ego te vehementer f jubeo : ne me territes. Plaut.
Remark.—The Trochaic Tetrameter (so called by eminence) is of frequent occurrence
in comic poetry. It is compounded of Dimeter + Dimeter Catalectic. Hiatus is often
found at the break.
Manibu' pur is capite operto II ibi continuo contonat. Flaut.
Iambic Khythms.
750. The Iambic Khythm is an ascending rhythm, in which
the arsis is double of the thesis. It is represented
By the Iambus : ^
By the Tribrach :
By the Spondee : _ (in -meters) ;
By the Dactyl (sometimes) ; and
By the Anapaest:
Remark.—Of course, Spondee, Dactyl, and Anapaest, are all irrational. The Spondee
— _ ^ the Anapaest, = v-» >, and the Dactyl, = -v .
751. Iambic -meters admit substitution of a long for the
short of the odd feet.
Remark.—Regarding the Iambus as an Anacrustic Trochee, the same rule and reason
hold for the substitution in the one, as in the other (746, R. 2).
752. 7. Iambic Dimeter.
Usual Scheme. Anacrustic Scheme.
Inarsit aestuosius s.\j — -.j ^ ^
Imbres nivesque com¬
parât — — ^
Videre properantes
domum — -¡-'.y— > :
Ast ego vicissim ri-
sero. Hob. — ^
Remark.—According to the Anacrustic Scheme, the Iambic Dimeter Acatalectus is a
Trochaic Dimeter Catalectic with Anacrusis.
VERSIFICATION.
355
753. 8. Iambic Trimeter Catalectic,
Mea reuidet in domo lacunar
Regumque pueiis nec satelles Orel. Hob. —— —
Anacrustic Scheme : (with Syn¬
copé).
754. 9. Iambic Trimeter Acatalectic (Sénâriiis).
Suis et ipsa f Roma viribus ruit — —
Heu me per urbem t nam pudet tanti
mali ¿1 w J. \j j-\j
Deripere lunamf vocibus possim meis — so ^ ^ -tw —
Infamis Helenae f Castor ofiensus
vie em —— -e-\j
Optat quietem f Pelopis infidi pater
Alitibus atque f canibus homicidam
Hectorem —— —
Vectabor hiuneris f tunc ego inimicis
e ques ——
Favidumque leporem et f advenam
laqueo gruem. Hob. — —
Anacrustic Scheme :
Kkmarks.—1. The Iambic Trimeter when kept pure has a rapid aggressive movement.
Hence, it is thus used in lampoons and invectives. It admits the Spondee in the odd
places (first, third, fifth foot) ; the Tribrach in any but the last ; the Dactyl in the first
and third. The Anapaest is rare. When carefully handled, the closing part of the verse
is kept light, so as to preserve the character. Special study is necessary to understand
the treatment of the comic Trimeter.
2. Gaesurae.—The principal caesura is the Penthemimeral, which falls on the middle
of the third foot {jtSv^riuiiXEpTÍi = 2^) is rarely wanting. Less important is the
Hepthemimeral {kqi^Tji.tip.epií'í = which falls on the middle of the fourth foot.
\j — I V/_ j wj-— I I vy _ I \j—
Levis crepante t lympha t de silit pede. Hor.
Of course in the Anacrustic Scheme the Caesura of the ordinary scheme becomes
Diaeresis.
Le : vis ore I pante I lympha H desi I lit pe | dé¬
fi. A break (Diaeresis) at the middle of the verse is avoided. Short particles, which
adhere closely to the following word, do not constitute exceptions.
Laboriosa ne^ohors TJlixei. Hor.
Adulteretur e^olumba miluo. Hor.
In like manner explain—
Befertque tanta gre:^micus ubera. Hob.
35G
VERSIFICATION.
755. 10. Trimeter lamhicus Claudus (Chöliambus) ; Scazon
(= HohUer) Hippönacteus.
Miser Catulle desinas ineptire. Cat.
Fulsere quondam candidi tibi soles. Cat. j. kj — kj ^ -t-
Dominis parantur ista ; serviunt vobis.
Mart.
Remarks.—1. In the Choliambas the rhythm is reversed at the close, by putting a
trochee or spondee in the sixth foot. The lighter the first part of the verse, the
greater the surprise. It is intended to express comic anger, resentment, disappoint¬
ment.
2. The Anacrustic measurement is as follows :
^ Trochaic Trimeter with Anacrusis
Syncopé and Protraction.
756. 11. lamhic Tetrameter Acatalectic (Octönärins).
VJ -i- \J KJ — I Ji. \J — \J -i- KJ —
Hie finis est iambe salve f vindicis doctor mali. Servtus.
Te cum seciiri caudicali f praeficio provinciae. Plaut.
Remark.—This verse occurs frequently in the comic poets, and is to be regarded as a
compound. It either divides itself into equal parts at the end of the first Dimeter (with
Hiatus and Syllaba Anceps) or has a Caesura in the first Thesis of the third Dimeter.
1. 0 Troja, 0 patria, O Pergamum, II O Priame, periisti senex. Plaut.
Is porro me autem verberät II incursat pugnis oalcibus. Plaut.
2. Facile omnes quum valemus recta I consilia aegrotis damus. Ter.
757. 12. Iambic Tetrameter Catalectic (Septénarius.)
X. KJ \J ■£- — KJ -i-
Remitte pallium mihi | meum quod involasti. Cat.
Remarks.—1. This verse is to be regarded as a compound of Dimeter + Dimeter Ca¬
talectic ; hence, regular Diaeresis after the first Dimeter :
With Syllaba Anceps :
Si abduxeris celabitur II itidem ut celata adhuc est. Plaut.
With Hiatus :
Sed si tibi viginti minae II argenti proferuntur. Plaut.
2. It may be measured anacrustically :
" : - " I I I - I - " I I--! - A
Dactylic Ehtthms.
758. The Dactylic Khythm is a descending rhythm, in which
the Arsis is equal to the Thesis (2 = 2).
The Dactylic Ehythm is represented by the Dactyl : v-»
Often, also, by the Spondee : —
VERSIFICATION.
357
A Dactylic verse of one Dactyl is called a Monometer ; of two,
a Dimeter ; of three, a Trimeter; of four, a Tetrameter ; of five,
a Pentameter ; of six, an Hexameter.
759. 13. Dactylic Dimeter {Adonic),
Terruit urbem. Hor. ^ —
Remabk.—Though generally measured thus, this verse is properly logaoedic, and will
recur under that head.
760. 14. Dactylic Trimeter Catalectic in Syllalam.
Pulvis et umbra sumus. Hor. j. kj \j ^ j.
15. Dactylic Tetrameter Catalectic in Dissyllabum.
Aut Spheson bimarisve Corinthi ^ j:.\j ^
O fortes pejoraque passi ^ — j.'C,
Mensorem cohibent Archyta. Hor. j. — ^ ^ ^
16. Dactylic Tetrameter Acatalectic {Alcmamus).
Nunc decet aut viridi nitidum caput
Pallida mors aequo pulsat pede jl \j jl — ^ e.\j
Vitae summa brevis spem nos vetat
Occurs only in combination.
Heroic Hexameter.
761. 17.
1. Ut fugiunt aquilas t timidissima H turba columbae. Or.
2. At tuba terribili t souitu t procul II aere canoro. Vebo.
3. Quadrupedante putrem t sonitu I quatit II ungula cantpum.
Vekg.
4. Cum medio celeres + revolant I ex_aequore mergi. Vekg.
6. Vastius insurgens t decimae I ruit II impetus undae. Or.
6. Et reboat raucum t regio t cita II barbara j bombum- Lucb.
7. Muta metu terram t genibus t summissa petebat- Lttcb.
8. Inter cunctantes t cecidit t moribunda ministros. Vebg.
9. Ne turbata volent t rapidis t ludibria ventis. Vebg.
10. Versaque in obnixos + urgentur II cornua vasto. Vebg.
11. Frocessit longe t flammantia i moenia mundi- Litcb.
12. Portam vi multa + converso II cardine torquet. Vebg.
13. Tectum augustumingenst centum sublime columnis. Vebg.
14. Olli respondit t Rex_Alba]t Longaï. Ennius.
■Five Dactyls.
I" Four Dactyls.
j-Three Dactyls.
j- Two Dactyls.
j- One Dactyl.
}-No Dactyl.
358
VERSIFICATION.
15. Aut leves ocreas t lento t dncunt argento. Vero.
16. Sunt apud infernos t totjmllia formosarum. Prop.
11. Aëriaeque Alpes t e^ubifer II Appenninus. Ov.
18. Procubuit viridi-1 que inJ.itore 1 conspicitur—sus. Vers.
19. Parturiunt montes t nascetur I ridiculus—mus. Hor.
10 + 6 = 16 8
20. Ecce supercilio t clivosi I tramitis undam. Yero.
21. Insignem pietate t virum t tot adire labores. Yerg.
22. Et nigrae violae t sunt 11 et vaccinia | nigra. Yerg,
23. Sparsis 11 bastis 11 longis 11 campus i splendet et borret- En.
24. Quamvis sint sub aqua sub aqua maledicere tentant. Ov.
25. Me me adsum qui feci in me convertite ferrum. Yerg.
Discissos nudos laniabant dentibus artus. Yerg.
Remarks.—1. The Heroic Hexameter is composed of two dactylic tripodies, the
second of which ends in a spondee. Spondees may be substituted for the dactyl in the
first four feet ; in the fiftji foot, only when a special eflTect is to be produced. Such verses
are called Spondaic. The longest hexameter contains five dactyls and one spondee (or
trochee)—in all, seventeen syllables ; the shoi-test in use, five spondees and one dactyl—
in all, thirteen syllables. This variety in the length of the yers^ combined with the
great number of caesural pauses, gives the'fiexameter peculiar advantages for continuous
composition.
2. The two reigning ictuses are the first and fourth, and the pauses are so arranged as
to give special prominence to them—the first by the pause at the end of the preceding
verse, the fourth by pauses within the verse, both before and after the arsis.
3. The principal Caesura in Latin poetry is the Pentîiemimeral (2X), i- in the arsis
of the third foot, or masculine caesura of the third foot. The next is the feminine cae¬
sura of the third foot, the so-called Third Trochee^ which is less used among the Romans
than among the Greeks ; then the Hephthemirmral (3}¿) in the arsis of the fourth foot.
As Latin poetry is largely rhetorical, and the caesura is of more importance for recitation
than for singing, the Roman poets are very exact in the observance of these pauses.
4. The Diaeresis which is most carefully avoided is the one after the third foot,
especially if that foot ends in a spondee (22), and the verse is thereby split in half.
Examples are found occasionally, and if the regular caesura precedes, the verse is not
positively faulty.
His lacrlmis vitam t damns II — et miserescimus nitro. Yerg.
It is abominable when no other caesura proper is combined with it.
Poeni 11 pervortentes 11 omnia I circnmcnrsant- Ennihs.
• On the other hand, the Bucolic tetrapody, or pause at the end of the fourth foot di¬
vides the verse into proportionate parts (16 and 8 morae or 2 to 1), and gives a graceful
trochaic movement to the hexameter. It is often sought after.
Ite domnm satnrae 1 venit Hesperns 11 ite capellae. Yerg.
5. Much of the beauty of the Hexameter depends on the selection and arrangement
of the words considered as metrical elements. The examples given above have been
chosen with especial reference to the picturesque effect of the verse. Monosyllables at
the end of the Hexameter denote surprise ; anapaestic words, rapid movement, and the
like.
Again, the Hexameter maybe lowered to a conversational tone by large masses of
spondees, and free handling of the caesura. Compare the Hexameters of Horace in the
Odes with those in the Satires.
I Spondaic Yerses.
1 Monosyllabic
J ending.
) Penthem. and
) Bucolic.
) Third Trochee
) and Hepthemim.
-{ Split in half.
Shivered,
■{a - sound.
■{ e - sound.
•{ s - sound.
VERSIFICATION.
\J \J JL M
762. 18. Elegiac Pentameter {Gatalectic Trimeter repeated).
At dolor in lacrimas || vérterat ômne
merûm. Tib. ^ kj ^
Me legat ét lecto | carmine dóctus
amét. Ov. J. \j M — ^
At nunc barbaries |I grandis habére
nihil. Ov. ji. — X. \j \j Jr.
Concessum nulla | lege redibit iter.
Prop. j. j. jl — x.
The Elegiac Pentameter occurs only as a clausula to the Heroic Hex¬
ameter, with which it forms the Elegiac Distich.
Saepe ego tentavi curas depellere vino
At dolor in lacrimas || verterat omne merum. Tib.
Ingenium quondam fuerat pretiosius auro
At nunc barbaries || grandis habere nihil. Ov.
Par erat inferior versus : risisse Cupido
Dioitur atque unum | surripuisse pedem. Ov.
Saepe ego cum dominae dulces a limine duro
Agnosco voces || haec negat esse demi. Tib.
Remabks.—1. The Elegiac Pentameter consists of two Catalectic Trimeters or Pen-
themimers, the first of which admits spondees, the second does not. There is a fixed
Diaeresis in the middle of the verse, as marked above. The Pentameter derives its name
from the old measurement : _ ^ ^ ^ and the name is a
convenient one, because the verse consists of + 2}^ Dactyls. The Elegiac Distich is
used in sentimental, amatory, epigrammatic poetry.
Ä. The musical measurement of the Pentameter is as follows :
— WW I — w I I—' II —wwj —w*-* I
a
This shows why neither Syllaba Anceps nor Hiatus is allowed at the Diaeresis, and
explains the preference for length by nature at that point.
3. As the Latin language is heavier than the Greek, the Roman lightens the close of
the Pentameter as much as possible. The Ovidian Distich of the best period shows
great mechanical exactness. Almost every pentameter ends in a dissyllable, and elision
is avoided.
Anapaestic Ehythms.
763. The Anapaestic Khythm is an ascending rhythm, in
which the arsis is to the thesis as 2 to 2. It is represented—
By the Anapaest : w w ; or
By the Spondee : - ; or
By the Dactyl : -yoy.
The Anapaestic -meter consists of two feet. The measure is
little used among the Komans.
360
VERSIFICATION.
19. Dimeter GataUcticus {Paroemictcus).
Volucer pede corpore pûlcher
Lingua catus ore canorus — j. \j \j
Verum memorare magís quam ^ j.\j ^ j.\j
Punctum laudare decébit. AusON. — yjyj
20. Dimeter Acatalèctus.
Veniént annís || saecúla seris ^ vi"-'
Quibus Óceanus || vincula rerum
Laxet et ingens 1| pateát tellus ^
Tethysque noves | detégat orbes —
Neo sít terris || ultima Thüle. Sen. Trag. — -e-
Syllaba Anceps is rare.
Reuabks. —Latin anapaests, as found in later writers, are mere metrical imitations of
the Greek anapaests, and do not correspond to their original in contents. The Greek
anapaest was an anacrustic dactylic measure or march (in A time). Hence the use of
Pause to bring out the four bars.
Faroe miacus : Anacrustic Scheme.
Volucer pede corpore pulcher kj ^ \j \ —\j\j | | —
A
Dimeter Acatalectus : Anacrustic Scheme.
Quibus Oceanus vincula rerum | | ^ kj — | —
The Theses of the last feet are supplied by the Anacrusis of the following verse.
Logaoedic Khythms.
764. The Logaoedic Ehythm is a pec aliar form of the tro¬
chaic rhythm in which the thesis has a stronger secondary ictus
than the ordinary trochee.
Instead of the trochee, the light dactyl may be employed.
This light or cyclical dactyl is represented in morae by 1^, 1 ;
in music, by = A? i-
"When dactyls are employed, the trochee preceding is called a
Basis, or tread. This trochee may be irrational - > (so-called
spondee). If the basis is double, the second is almost always
irrational in Latin poetry. The basis is commonly marked X.
Instead of the trochee, an iambus is sometimes prefixed. Ana¬
crusis and Syncope are also found.
Remarks.—1. Logaoedic comes from ^óy o?, prose, and dotôj/, song, because the
rhythms seem to vary as in prose.
2. Dactyls are not necessarily employed. No. 4 (Alcaic enneasyllabic) is logaoedic.
VERSIFICATION. 361
One Dactyl.
21. Adonic. (See No. 13.) — \j
Terruit urbem. Hor. -vvy | _ ^-/ |
22. ArisiopJianic {Ghoriamhid). .i. — ^ — kj
Lydia die per omnes. Hob. | — »_» I >— 1 — ^
765. One Dactyl, with Basis.
28. Pherecratlan. — \j
Nigris aéquora véntis. Hob. — > | -v v-» | i— J — ^
24. Olyconic. —.e. —'<j —
Emirabiturínsoléns. Hob. _> ¡-vo j —w | —^
25. PhaUiecèan (Kendecmyllohic). \
Passer mortuus est meae puellae —
Arida modo pumice expolitum —)
Tuae Lesbia sint satis superque. Cat. _>l-^/v-»|_vy|_vi/|_v^
Remark.—The so-called sparious Phalaecean admits the Spondee _ > in the place
of the dactyl.
Qûas vidi vultú tarnen sereno. Cat.
766. One Dactyl, with Double Basis.
26. Sapphic {Hendecasyllabic). — ^
Aúdiét cives f acuisse ferrum. Hob. —_>|—fco|_«-»|_v.»
Remark.—The Greek measure (Catullus) is _v^|_>|-vvy|_v.i|_/
767. One Dactyl with Double Basis and Anacrusis.
27. Alcaic {Greater) HendecasyUdbic. 'Zu —^ | .a. v./ _ _
Vidés ut alta || stet ni ve cândidum
Sorácte née jam || sûstineant onus. Hob.
Remark.—The second basis always a spondee in Horace.
768. Two Dactyls.
28. Alcaic (Lesser) or Decasyllabic. — Z
Vertere fiineribus trimnphos. Hob.
16
362 TEKSIFICATION.
In all these, the Dactyl has a diminished value. More questionable is
the logaoedic character of the Greater Archilochian.
769. 29. ArcTiilocliian {Greater) = Dactyl. Tetr. and TrocJi.
Tripody.
11
Solvitur acris hiems grata vice I veris et Favoni. Hor.
Bemabk.—If measured logaoedically, the two shorts of the dactyl must be reduced in
value to one (o¡j = and the logaoedic scheme is
Logaoedic tetrapody + Logaoedic tetrapody with Syncopé.
770. ChoriamMc Rhythms.—When a logaoedic series is syn¬
copated, apparent choriambi arise. What is I v-' I •— | seems
to be - ^ ^ . Genuine choriambi do not exist in Latin.
30. Asclëpiadèan {Lesser). -A— — — —
Maecenas atavis I edite
regibus. Hob. -> I— l-ll-- 1 I
31. AscUpiadeoM {Greater). — —
Nullam Vare sacra |1 vite
prius 11 severis arbo-
rem. Hon. _> | -^^ | ^ || 1 l_ I | | ^
'32. Sapphic (Greater). m ^ kj — j. kj — \.t ^Z>
Te decs oro Sybarin I cur
properas amando.
Hor. I —> I I"— 11"^'-' 1 —I'— 1 —
33. Priàpëan {Glyconic +
Pherecratëan). — <.j — 1| — \j ^\j
Huno lucum tibi dedico |1
consecroque Priape.
Cat. _> |-uvy 1 1^— II —> j-w ji—I - ^
Oretic and Bacchic Ehythms.
771. These passionate rhythms are found occasionally in the
comic poets. They both belong to the Quinquepartite or Five-
Eighths class.
1. The distribution of the Creticus is 3 + 2 morae.
The metrical value of the Creticus is — _ (Amphimacer).
versification.
363
Second long resolved — Paeon Primus.
First long resolved ^ — Paeon Quartus.
34. Tetrameter GataUcticus.
Da mi(hi) hoc mel meum si me amas saudes. Plaut.
35. Tetrameter Acatalectus.
Ex bonis pessumi et fraudulentissumi. Plaut.
2. The Bacchîus has the following measure : — 1 + 2 + 2 morae
( ^^J J or if the descending form v-» be regarded as the normal one
2 + 2 + 1 morae (J J
36. Bacchic Tetrameter,
Quibus nec locust ullu' neo spes parata
r —
IVEisericordior nulla mest feminarum Slj j.\j
Ionic Ehtthm.
772. The Ionic Rhythm is represented by lonicus â majori
— For the lonicus ä majori maybe substituted
the Ditrochaeus This is called Anáclasis {Ireaking-
up).
The verse is commonly anacrustic, so that it begins with the
thesis ^ ^ : —- Such verses are called lônicï â minörL
The second long has a strong secondary ictus.
773. 37. An Ionic System is found in Horace, Od. iii. 12.
It consists of two periods, the first being made up of two di-
podies, the second of two tripodies.
lonicus â minôrî scheme :
Miserarum est neque amori
dare ludum neque dulci
mala vino lavere aut exanimari
metuentes patruae verbera linguae
lonicus ä majori scheme :
yj yj : yj yj | |
A
yj yj JL yj yj ^ ||
yj yj Ji. yj yj JL.
yj y^ ^ — yj yj j:. ^ yj yj X.
I. 2
2
364
VEESIFICATION.
Eemarkb.—The Eoman numérala refer to periods, the Arabic to the number of
feet or bars, the dots indicate the end of a line.
The lönicua is an excited measure, and serves to express the frenzy of distress as
well as the madness of triumph.
774. 38. Tetrameter Catalectic.
The Galliambic verse (Tetrameter Catalectic) is found in a famous
poem by Catullus (Ixiii).
Ordinary Scheme :
Without Anaclasis : — — — \j\jjc.
With Anaclasis : —
Anacrustic Scheme :
Without Anaclasis : w«-»: ^ | | I !
a
With Anaclasis: o ^ _ w | | _ w _ ^ ) i—i —J
a
The Anaclastic form is the more common. The Anacrusis maybe contracted (9 times
in the Attis).
The frequent resolutions and conversions give this verse a peculiarly wild character.
Et earum omnia adirem furibunda
latibula — — \TLi -e-
Quo nos deoet citatis celerare tri-
pudiiS — ^ ^
Itaque ut domum Cybebes tetigere
lassulae —
Super alta vectus Attis celeri rate
maria —
Jam jam dolet quod egi jam jam-
que paenitet — jl\j j.\j ^ ^ \j x.
775. Veeses Compounded of Iambi and Dactyls.
39. 1. lambelegus. Iambic Dimeter and Dactylic Penthêmîmeris.
Tu vina Torquato move | consul e
pressa meo. Hoe. yj x. yj — yj x. yj yx x. \j yj ^
Or as two verses :
^yjyx I -yjyj | ¡
a
versification.
365
776.
40. 2. Elegiambus {Dactylic Penthemimeris and lambic Dimeter).
Desinet imparibus | certare submo-
tus pudor. Hor. j:. ^ ^ ^ ^
Or as two verses :
I I Il
A
Saturnian Verse.
777. The Saturnian verse is an old Italian rhythm which
occurs in the earlier monuments of Latin literature. It divides
itself into two parts, with three Arses in each :—
The queen was in her parlor^
Eating hréad and honey.
Dabúnt malum Metelli Naevio poetae
Itenun triúmpáns in mrbem Romam rediit
Duello magno dirimundo regibtis subigmidis.
778. Lyric Metres oe Horace.
I. Aselëpiadêan Strophe Ho. 1. Lesser Asclêpiadêan Verse (Ho. 30)
repeated in tetrastiehs.
—— \j
Or thus: _> ]| l_ ||| _ w j H • 3
->l— I
_> l-vw I I 1
-> I —1^1 —II-^1 I
In Ud. i. 1 ; Iii. 30 ; iv. 8.
II. AsclSpiadean Strophe Ho. 2. Glycöneus (Ho. 24) and Lesser
AsclSpiadBan (Ho. 30) alternating, and so forming tetrastiehs.
-'L _ ^ v.. _ ^ _
—* W*-' — J-i.V-'V-' — V.» —
366
Or thus
VERSIFICATIOlSr.
— > I — v-» I _
A'
A'
_ > I »o- I _ ^ I _
_> I _ W I L_
In Od. i. 3, 13,19, 36 ; ii. 9,15, 19, 24, 25, 28 ; iv. 1, 3.
A'
'
-I-A"
3
3
3
3
III. AsclBpiadean Strophe No. 3. Three Lesser Ascl5piad5an Verses,
followed by a Glyconic (Nos. 30 and 24).
II ^ W \_f
^
— \J
A 3
_> 1 I ^1
_> 1 I »_
-> I I -
'W _ w _
' *.y _ «.y
A
A
3
3
3
3
A
In Od. i. 6, 15, 24, 33 ; ii. 12 ; Iii. 10, 16; iv. 5,12.
IV- Ascl5piad&an Strophe No. 4. Two Lesser Ascl5piad5an Verses
(No. 30), a Pherecratean (No. 23), and a Glyconic (No. 24).
I. _> |-v-vy 1 I _^| I. 3
e. \j II ^ — «w» __
_ ^
(- KJ — w —
-> I I >— I I - ^ I
II. -> I — I--!
A'
II.
_> _ V./ _
A'
3
3
•
>
4
4
In Od. i. 5, 14, 21, 23 ; iii. 7,13 ; iv. 313.
V. Asclepiadean Strophe No. 5. Greater AsclSpiadSan (No. 31), re¬
peated in fours.
Or thus :
_> I -V. i L_
_> 1 1 U_
->
-> 1— |L-
In Od. i. 11, 18 ; iv. 10.
_ w _
'W _ v-» _
A'
A'
I -'-■I -^1
-
3
2
8
3
2
3
á
2
S
8
VERSIFICATION.
367
VI. Sapphic Strophe. Three Lesser Sapphics (No. 26), and an Adonic
(No. 21), which is merely a clausula. In No. 26 Horace regularly breaks
the Dactyl.
— vyü — -¿■'f — V.» — — v->| — >1 —^00 I — vy I — \^|| 5
— vy|_>| —'|-o|_vy| — \j\ ®
— vy — — V.' — V.» —-j-GO | |
■£. \J \J -Í- \J -\J \J j — KJ I ?
In Od. i. 2,10,12, 20, 22, 25, 30, 32, 38 ; ii. 2, 4, 6,8,10,16 ; iii. 8,11,
14, 18, 20, 22, 27 ; iv. 2, 6,11 ; Carmen Sae(;uläre.
Word divided at the end of the third verse; Od, i. 2,19; 25,11; ii.
16, 7.
VII. Lesser Sapphic Strophe. Aristophanic (No. 22), and Greater
Sapphic (No. 32). Two pairs are combined into a tetrastich.
JL \J ^ \J \J
— vy KJ
Or thus :
I I^I _^1I 4
— ^ 1 —> I |l_
II *
a" 4
_ v.. I _> I I L_|I-^vy I _ I 1_ I _^|| 4
In Od. i. 8.
VIII. Alcaic Strophe. Two Alcaic verses of eleven syllables (No. 27)
one of nine (No. 4), and one of ten (No. 28).
J ^ ^ I I I I -A 1
_ vy I I I - ^ I _ . I
W ' ' * A'
V-/ II, > _ I >
^ ^ ^ ^ V-'
IL
_^i 1 _o |->^1 i
1 4
In Od. i. 9,16,17,26, 27, 29, 31, 34, 35, 37 ; ii. 1, 3, 5, 7, 9,11,13,14,15
17,19, 20 ; iii. 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6,17,31,23,26, 29 ; iv. 4, 9,15,17.
368
VERSIFICATION.
IX. Archilochian Strophe No. 1. Hexameter (No. 17), and Lesser
Archilochian (No. 14), two pairs to a tetrastich.
Jl. I JL I jü
Or thus :
_v:yv->| — (.yv>'| II
A 3
_ J-v. I 1 - t vT- 1 --"-I I --I1 3
— vyv.vl—o*-'! II
A 3
In Od. iv. 7.
X. Archilochian Strophe No. 2. A Dactylic Hexameter (No. 17), and
an lambelegus (No. 39).
M \j ^ I ^ JL \j \j ^
Or thus :
Epod. 13.
XI. Archilochian Strophe No. 3. An Iambic Trimeter (No. 9), fol¬
lowed by an Elegiambus (No. 40).
> . .1 >
Epod 11.
; 1 I _vy I _ .
' \y * A
XII. Archilochian Strophe No. 4. Greater Archilochian (No. 29), and
Trimeter Iambic Catalectic (No. 8). Two pairs combined to form a te¬
trastich
JL.
Od. i. 4.
Remark.—This verse is sometimes considered as logaoedic, or, better, trochaic.
VEESIFICATION. 369
> 1
1 > 1
>
00 '
oo '
oo
: - vy 1
-^1
vy
> 1
> 1
>
00 '
00 '
CO
: 1
1-^1
— vy
>
Vy • " I ^ I ' I 'A
4
II I 1^1 _^1 4
XIII. A.lcmanian Strophe. Dactylic Hexameter (No. 17). followed by
Catalectic Dactylic Tetrameter (No. 15).
In Od. i. 7, 28. Epod. 12.
Remahk.—The Tetrameter may be considered acatalectic with a spondee in the
fonrth place.
XIV. Iambic Trimeter repeated (No. 9).
\j ' vy ' ' vy ' A
In Epod. 17.
XV. Iambic Strophe. Iambic Trimeter (No. 9), and Dimeter (No. 7).
vy-c-w—w-c.«.y_vyj:.vy_ ^:_«.y|_^|_vyj_^|_w|_^
\j I vy I ' vy ' A
vy^vy_vyyL»y_ ^ _ vy j _ ^ | _ vy j - ^
In Epod. 1-10.
XVI. Pythiambic Strophe No. 1. Dactylic Hexameter No. 17 (Versus
Pythius), and Iambic Dimeter (No. 7).
Epod. 14,15.
XVII. Pythiambic Strophe No. 2. Dactylic Hexameter (No. 17), and
Iambic Trimeter (No. 9).
Epod. 16.
16*
370
VERSIFICATION.
XVIII. Trochaic Strophe. Catalectic Trochaic Dimeter (No. 3), and
a Catalectic Iambic Trimeter (No. 8). Two pairs make a tetrastich.
\j JL.
^ ^ \J J- \J
In Od. ii. 18.
XIX. Ionic System.
In Od. iii. 13. (See No. 37.)
779. Index of Hoeatian Odes and Metkes.
Book. Ode.
Metbe.
Book.
Ode.
Metbe.
I. 1
i.
II.
1
2
vi.
2
3
ii.
3
4
.... xii.
4
5
iv.
5
6
iii.
6
7
xiii.
7
viii.
8
vii.
8
vi.
9
9
viii.
10
vi.
10
11
v.
11
12
vi.
12
iii.
1.8 ii.
18
14
iv.
14
• • •
15
iii.
15
16
viii.
16
17
viii.
17
18
v.
18
19
. . . . ii.
19
viii.
20
vi.
20
31
23
.... . vi.
III.
1
23
iv.
2
24
iii.
3
25
vi.
4
viii.
26
viii.
5
viii.
27
viii.
6
28
xiii.
7
29
viii.
8
30
vi.
9
81
viii.
10
32
vi.
11
vi.
38
iii.
12
84 . .
viii.
13
35
viii.
14
vi.
36
ii.
15
37
viii.
16
38... .
17
Book. Gob. Metbe
III. 18 vi!
19 ii.
30 vi.
31 viii.
33 vi.
38 viii.
34 ii.
35 ii.
26 viii.
37 vi.
38 ii.
39 viii.
80 i.
IV. 1 ii.
3 vi.
8 ii.
4 viii.
5 iii.
6 vi.
7 ix.
8 i.
• • •
9 vni.
10...... .. V.
11 vi.
13 iii.
18 iv.
14 viii.
15.......... vm.
Carmen Saeculäre. vi.
Epod. 1-10 xv.
11 xi.
13 xiii.
18 x.
14 xvi.
15 xvi.
16 xvii.
17 xiv.
APPE]^DIX
ROMAN CALENDAR.
The names of the Roman months were originally adjectives. The
substantive mensis, months may or may not be expressed : (mensis) Janu¬
arius, Februärius, and so on. Before Augustus, the months July and
August were called, not Julius and Augustus, but Quintiiis and Sextâlis.
The Romans counted backward from three points in the month,
Calends (Kalendae), Nones (Nonae), and Ides (Ídüs), to which the names
of the months are added as adjectives: Kalendae Jänuäriae, Nönae Feb-
ruäriae, Idüs Martiae. The Calends are the first day, the Nones the
fifth, the Ides the thirteenth. In March, May, July, and October, the
Nones and Ides are two days later. Or thus :
In March, July, October, May,
The Ides are on the 15th day.
The Nones the 7th; but all besides
Have two days less for Nones and Ides.
In counting backward ("come next calends, next nones, next ides")
the Romans used for " the day before " prîdië with the accus, prîdië
kalendäs Jänuäriäs, Dec. 81, prîdië nönäs Jan. = Jan. 4, pridië Id. Jan.
= Jan. 12.
Tlie longer iutervals are expressed by ante diemtertium, quartum, etc.,
before the accusative, so that ante diem tertium kal. Jan. means " two
days before the calends of January; " ante diem quartum, or a.d.iv., or
iv. kal. Jan., " three days before," and so on. This remarkable combina¬
tion is treated as one word, so that it can be used with the prepositions
ex and in : ex ante diem iii. Nonas Jüniäs usque ad prîdië kal. Septem¬
bres, from June 3 to August 81 ; di£ferre aliquid in ante diem xv. kal.
Nov., to postpone a matter to the l^th of October.
Leap Year.—In leap year the intercalary day was counted _b^etween„.
a. dT^pkal. Mart, and a. d.(^^rkai. Mart. It was called a. d. bis sex-
tum kal. Mart., so that a. d. vii, kal. Mart, corresponded to our February
28d, just as in the ordinary year.
To turn Roman Dates into English.
For Nones and Ides.—I. Add one to the date of the Nones and Ides,
and subtract the given number.
For Calends.—II. Add two to the days of the preceding month, and
subtract the given number.
Examples : a. d. viii. Id. Jan. (18 -f 1 — 8) = Jan. 6 ; a. d. iv. Non.
Apr. (5 -f 1 — 4) = Apr. 2 ; a. d. xiv. Kal. Oct. (80 + 2 — 14) = Sept. 18.
IITDEX OF STXTAX.
The Figures refer to the Sections.
A.
Â, ah, abs, with ablative, 418 ; of
agent, 205,403 ; of origin, 395 ; of
part affected, 398, R. 1 ; ä ter go,
ab oriente, ä spatiö, 388, R. 2.
Abhinc, 400, R. 3.
Ablative, syntax of, 383-409; of
place where, 384-387; of place
whence, 388-390 ; of attendance,
391 ; of time when, 392-3 ; of
origin, 395; of material, 396; of
measure, 397-400, 566 ; of man¬
ner, 401 ; of quality, 402 ; of means,
403 ; of price, 404 ; with sundry
verbs, 405 ; of cause, 406 ; ablative
absolute, 408, 409 ; prepositions
with, 418,419 ; abl. of gerund and
gerundive, 432 ; of supine, 437.
Absolute ablative, 408 ; restrictions
of use, 409, R. 3.
Absque, w. abl., 418.
Abstract nouns in plural, 195, R.
5 ; as attribute and vice versa, 357,
R. 2.
Abator, 405, 428, R. 3.
Ac, atque, 479, 646.
Accedit, constr., 525, R. 3
Accidit, sequence after, 513, R. 2.
Accingor, constr., 332, R. 2.
Accipio, with two datives, 350.
Accusative, 327-340. Direct object,
inner, outer object, 327 ; general
view, 328 ; with active transitive
verbs, 329 ; with verbs compd.
with prepositions, 330; cognate,
331 ; adverbial, 331, R. 3 ; of part
affected, 332 ; double, 333, 334 ;
of local object (terminal accusa¬
tive), 342,410 ; of extent in space,
335, 336, in time, 337, 338 ; in ex¬
clamations and exclamatory ques¬
tions, 340 ; with inteijections,
340 ; with prepositions, 417 ; of
infinitive, 424 ; of gerund, 426 ; of
gerundive, 431 ; of supine, 436.
Accusative and infinitive, 341,
526.
Accusing and acquitting, verbs of,
—constr., 377.
Ac SÏ, 604.
Action, stage of, 213 ; period of,
213.
Active voice, 204; for passive, 205,
R. 1.
Active genitive, 361.
Ad, in compds. with acc., 330 ; with
dat., 346. Preposition with ac¬
cus., 356, R. 3, 417 ; whither, 342,
R. 2 ; ad Yestae, 360, R. 3 ; w.
gerund, 437, R. 2 ; od, hence, 400,
R. 3.
Adlre aliquem, 330, R. 2.
Adjective for substantive, 195, R.
1-4.—Adjective predicate, 202 ;
adj. attribute, 285-288; peculiar-
forms of, 289 foil. ; comparison
of, 311 ; as adverb, 324, R. 6. Ad¬
jective sentences, 505.
Adnominal genitive, 359.
Adûlor, constr. 347.
Advantage, dative of, 345.
Adverbial accus., 331, R. 3 ; abl.,
401, R.
Adverbial sentences, 507.
Adverbs of quality, place, extent
with gen., 371, R. 4. Compara¬
tive of constr., 399. Adverbs,
440. Position of, 441. Negative
adv., 442-450. Prepositions as
adv., 416, R. Adverbs of likeness
and unlikeuess with atque, 646.
INDEX OP SYNTAX.
373
Adversative particles for copula¬
tive, 484.
Adversative sentences, 486-493.
Adversus, w. accus., 356, R. 3, 417.
Aeger, w. gen., 374, R. 3.
Aemulor, 347.
Aequälis, 356, and R. 1.
Aequäre, 345, R. 1.
Aequï bonïque fació, 380, R. 3.
Aestimo, constr., 380, R. 1.
Affatim, w. gen., 371, R. 4.
Affection of the mind, 374, R. 3.
Affînis, constr., 356, and R. 1.
Affirmative, indefinite, and general,
448, R. 4.
Agent, abl. of, w. à {ah), 305, 403 ;
without ä {ah), 305, R. 3 ; dative
of, 306, 353, 353.
Agreement of predicate and sub¬
ject, 303, 381, 383 ; of attribute
and substantive, 385, 386 ; of rela-
_ tive and antecedent, 616.
Ajo, 651, R.
Aliènus, w. dat., 356; with gen.,
356, R. 1 ; w. abl., R. 5.
Aliquis, aliqui, 301.
Aliter with atque, 646; with sin,
593.
Alii—alii, 331.
Alius, 306 ; with abl., 399, R. 3 ;
with atque, 646.
Alter, 306. Alter—alt^\ 331.
Alius, 336.
Ambiguity in use of acc. and inf.,
537, R. 4.
Amicus, constr., 356 and R. 1.
An, 459, 463.
Anacolüthon, 694.
Animl, constr., 374, R. 3.
Annon, 461.
Ante, in compds., with acc., 330 ; w.
dat., 346. Awíe, w. acc., 417. A.
in expressions of time, 400, R. 3.
Antecedent, 615 ; repeated, 617 ; in¬
corporated, 618 ; attraction into,
619 ; omission of, 633.
Antequam, constr., 576 foil.
Aorist, 315.
Apodosis, 590 ; omitted, 603 foil.
Apodotic period, 686.
AposiopBsis, 691.
Apposition, 319. Partitive (restrict¬
ive), 330. Distributive, 331 ; with
nomen, 333; to a sentence, 333.
Predicative, 334. Apposition of
antecedent incorporated, 618.
Apud, w. accus., 417.'
Arrangement of words, 674 foil.; of
clauses, 685.
As, 334, R. 3.
Aspergo, constr., 348.
Asseverations, 355.
Assis, 379.
Assuétus, w. abl., 403, R. 3.
Asyndeton, 475, 483.
Attempted actions by present, 318,
R. 3 ; by imperf., 334.
Attendance, ablative of, 391.
Atque, for quam, 311, R. 6. See ac.
Atqul, 491.
Attraction of pronoun, 303, R. 5. At¬
traction of names of persons, 333.
Attraction of mood, 509, 665 ; w.
quod, 541, R. 3. Attraction of
relative, 619 ; inverted, 619, R. 3.
Aut, 495.
Autem, 486.
-Ax, verbals in, w. gen., 374.
B.
Becoming, verbs of, 197.
Belli, 413, R. 3.
Beseeching, verbs of, 546.
Bewaring, verbs of, 548.
Bene emere, rindere, 380, R. 3.
Bidding, verbs of, 345 and R. 1.
Birth, part, of, 395.
Boni consulo, 380, R. 3.
Brachylogy, 689.
C.
Capitis and capite, 377, R. 1.
Captus, w. abl., 398.
Cases, syntax of, 337-413; nom.,
194 ; voc., 194, R. 3 ; accus., 337-
340; dat., 343-356; gen., 357-
383 ; abl., 381-409 ; with prepo¬
sition, 417-419.
Causa, gratia, w. gen., 373, 407.
Causal particles, 500 ; sentences, 538
foil.
Causal participle, 669.
Causation, verbs of, w. partie., 537
Cause, abl. of, 406.
374
INDEX OP SYNTAX.
\j
Cavé, with subj. for iraperat., 264.
Caveo, w. acc. and dat., 347 ; né, ut,
548, R. 2.
Celo, 338 and R. 2.
Céterum, 493.
Chiasmus, 684.
Choosing, verbs of, 197, 334.
Circa, circiter, w. accus., 417.
Circum, compds. w. acc,, 330; cir-
cum, w. acc., 417.
Circumdo, constr., 348.
Cis, dirá, w. accus., 417.
Citations in abl., 385.
Cities, names of, 410-412.
Clam, w. abl., 417, R. 1.
Clauses, 474.
Coeptua sum, 424, R. 1.
Cognate accus., 331.
Cognätus, constr., 356, R. 1.
Coincident action, 583.
Collocdre in, w. abl., 384, R. 1.
Com, con, in compds., w. dat., 346.
Combination of relative sentences,
639.
Comitor, constr., 347.
Commünicäre, constr., 346, R. 1.
Communis, 356, R. 1.
Comparative degree with quam,
311, 647 foil. ; with abl., 399 ;
with gen., 370.
Comparative particles for copula¬
tives, 484. C. sentences, 645 foil.
Comparison, 311 ; standard of, omit¬
ted, 312 ; of qualities, 314.
Complementary final sentences, 544,
546.
Compos, w. gen., 373.
Compound sentences, 192, 474.
Compounds of preposit. with acc.,
330; w. two acc., 330, R. 1; w.
dat., 346.
Conceiving, verbs of, 523.
Concessive subj unctive, 257. Con¬
cessive sentences and conjunc¬
tions, 606. C. participles, 611,
670.
Concord of predicate, w. subj., 202,
281; number, 281 ; gender, 282;
of attribute, 285; common attri¬
bute, 286 ; of apposition, 319 ; of
relative, 616.
Concords, the three, 201.
Condemning, verbs of, 377.
Condition, resulting, 228, 233.
Conditional sentences, 590-604; lo¬
gical, 597 ; ideal, 598 ; unreal,
599 ; incomplete, 600 ; in oratio
obliqua, 659 foil.; conditional
participle, 670.
Condûcere, constr., 378.
Conjunctions.—Coordinate, copula¬
tive, 477-484 ; adversative, 485-
493; disjunctive, 494-497; cau¬
sal, 500 ; illative, 501-504 ; sub¬
ordinate, causal, 538; final, 543;
temporal, 561 ; conditional, 591.
Conscius, w. gen., 373, R. 5.
Considere in, 384, R. 1.
Consilium est, w. inf., 429, R. 3.
Consiituere in, 384, R. 1.
Consto, 378, 396.
Consulo, 347, 380, R. 2.
Construciio praegnans, 696.
Contentus, w. abl., 373, R. 1.
Continuance, verbs of, 424.
Contigit, sequence after, 513, R. 2.
Contra, as adv., 416, R. ; w. acc.,
417.
Contrarius, 356, R. 1.
Convenio, 347.
Convicting, verbs of, 377.
Coordinate conjunctions. See Con¬
junctions.
Copula, 196 ; omitted, 200 ; agree¬
ment with predicate, 202, R. 1.
Copulative conjunctions, 477-484 ;
inserted, 483 ; omitted, 475, 483.
Copulative verbs, 197.
Coram, with abl., 418.
Correlatives of si, 595. Correlatives
of qui, 620. Correlatives, list of,
645.
Cum, prep., abl., with and without,
391, 401 ; postpositive, 414, R. 1 ;
with abl., 418.
Cum {quum) primum, 563 ; cum
(constr.), 581 ; temporal, 582 ; co¬
incident action, 583; lapse of
time, 582, R. 3 ; conditional, 584 ;
iterative, 585 ; historical, 586 ;
causal, 587; concessive, adversa¬
tive, 588 ; cum—tum, 589.
-Cumque, compounds with, 246,
R. 4.
Cupidus, w. gen., 873.
Cupio, 532.
Cûjrd ut, 264.
INDEX OP SYNTAX.
375
D.
Dative, 848-356 ; "W. ti'ansitive verbs,
844; w, intrans. verbs, 345; w.
compd. verbs, 346; differs from
accus., 347 ; with verbs of giving
and putting, 348 ; with esse, 349 ;
of the object for which, 350 ; ethi¬
cal dat., 351 ; of agent, 353 ; with
gerund, 353 ; of participles, 354 ;
with derivative nouns, 355 ; with
adjectives, 356. Dative of gerund,
480.
Dë, with abl., 418 ; for gen., 371, R.
5, 377, R. 3 ; of time, 393, R. ; of
origin, 395 ; with abl. of measure,
398, R. 1.
Dëbèbam, 346, R. 3.
Deecre, 345, R. 1.
Declarative mood, 246.
Dëcerno, 546, R. 3.
Deficere, 345, R. 1.
Dëfïgere in, abl., 384, R. 1.
Definite price, 404.
Delay, verbs of, 551.
Demanding, verbs of, 546.
Demonstratives, use of, 390-393.
Deponent verbs, 311.
Depriving, verbs of, 389.
Derivative nouns with dat., 355.
Design, sentences of, 544 foil. ; re¬
presented, 544, R. 3.
Dësino, 434.
Desire, adj. of, w. gen., 373 ; verbs
of, w. inf., 533; w. partie., 537.
Dësitus sum, 434, R. 1.
Dëspëro, w. acc., 339, R. 1.
Destination, 377, R. 3.
Determinative pronouns, 393-398.
Dëterreo, constr., 548, R. 1.
Difference, abl. of, 400.
JM, dis, compounds with, 388, R. 1.
Dignor, 398, R. 3.
Dignus, 373, R. 3 ; 398*, R. 3. Dignus
qui, 556, R. 3.
Direct discourse, 509.
Direct object, 337.
Direct question, 454.
Disadvantage, dat. of, 345.
Disgust, adj. of, 373.
Disjunctive conjunctions, 494^499.
Dispar, 356, R. 1.
Disproportion, 313.
Distance, abl. of, 400, R. 3.
Distwre, w. dat., 388, R. 1 ; with
abl., 400, R. 1, 3 ; with acc., 335.
Distributives, 310.
Do, with two datives, 350.
Doceo, 333, 434, R. 3.
Doctus, constr., 403, R. 3.
Doleo, w. acc., 339, R. 1 ; w. quod,
543.
Doló, 401, R. 1.
Doml, 413, R. 3.
Domo, 411, R. 3.
Domos, domum, 410.
Donee. See Dum.
Doubt, verbs of, 551.
Dwcö, with two dat., 350; with gen.,
378.
Duhito an, 459, R.
Dubito, other constr., 550, R.
Dum, with pres., 317, R. 1, 572 ; w
ind., 571-573 ; with subj., 574.
Dum, Dummodo, 575.
E.
È or ex, with abl., 417; for gen.,
371, R. 4 ; of origin, 395 ; ex fuga,
388, R. 3.
Ecce, 340, R. 3.
Egeo, 389, R. 1.
Ellipsis of substantive, 195, R 1.
Ellipsis, 688.
Emo, 378.
Emotion, verbs of, 406, 543.
En, 340, R. 3.
End, verbs of, 424.
Endeavor, verbs of, 546.
Enim, 500.
Enumeration in abl., 384.
Eö, w. gen., 371, R. 4.
Engä, w. accus., 356, R. 3, 417.
Ergo, w. gen., 373.
Ergo, conj., 504.
Est qui, 634.
Et, 534 ; et ipse, 397, R. 3 ; et nëmo,
483 ; et non, 483, R. 1.
Etenim, 500.
Etiam, 480.
Ethical dative, 351
Etiamsl, etsl, 605, 606.
Exclamations, 340 ; with acc. and
inf., 534 ; with ut, 560.
Expers, w. gen., 373.
Exspectc>re, constr., 574.
376
INDEX OF SYNTAX.
Extent in space, 335, 336.
External qualities, 402, R.
Extra, as an adverb, 416, R. ; with
ace., 417.
F.
Fax, in circumlocutions, 264.
Facio,-with, gen., 865, R.1,378; w.
inf., 527, R. 1 ; w. part., 537 ; w.
subj., 557.
Feeling, dat. of, 351.
Fearing, verbs of, 347, 552.
FUo, 345, R. 1, 402.
Filling, verbs of, 373, R. 6,389.
Final sentences, 543 foil.
Fine, abl. of, 377, R. 1.
Fw, with two nom., 197 ; with two
dat., 350 ; with abl., 396, R. 1.
Fitness, adjectives of, 356.
Flâgito, 333 and R. 2.
Forbidding, verbs of, 345.
Forgetting, verbs of, with gen., 375.
Frequens, 324, R. 5.
Frequentative. See Iterative.
Fretus, with abl., 373, R. 1.
Friendliness, adj. of, 356.
Fruor, 405 ; fruendus, 428, R. 3.
Ful, perf. partie, pass, with, 242.
Fulness, adjectives of, 373.
Fungor, 405 ; fungendus, 428, R. 3.
Future, 234 ; periphrastic, 239 ; in
subjunctive, 514 ; inf., 529.
Future participle, 279.
Future perfect, 236 foil. ; iterative
use, 569.
Futurum esse, fore ut, 240, 531.
Futurum fuisse ut, 240, R. 2, 659.
G.
Gaudeo,yf. éXú,, 407; w. inf., 533;
w. quad, 542.
Generic relative with ind., 246, R. 4.
Genitive, 357-382; appositive gen.,
or gen. of specification, 359 ; pos¬
sess. gen., 360 ; active and passive,
361-363 ; gen. of quality, 364 ; as
a predicate, 365 ; partitive gen.,
366 foil. Q. generis, 367, R. ; gen.
with prepositional substantives,
372 ; with adj., 373 ; with verbals
and participles, 374; with verbs
of memory, 375 ; with verbs of
emotion, 376 ; w. judicial verbs,
377 ; with verbs of rating and
buying, 378-380; gen. with in-
terest and rèfert, 381, 382, appa¬
rent gen., 412 ; gen. of gerund
and gerundive, 429,
Gerund and gerundive, 426-432;
gerundive for gerund, 428; after
prepositions, 428, 433-4; gerun¬
dive formation restricted, 428, R.
2, 3 ; genitive of, 429 ; dative
of, 430 ; accus, of, 431 ; ablat. of
432.
Glonor, with abl., 407.
Gratia, with gen., 372, 407.
H.
Hàbeo, w. perf. part, pass., 230 ; with
two dat., 350; with gen., 378,;
with inf., 424, R. ; nihil habeo quod
and non habeo quid, 634.
Habit, verbs of, 424.
Happening, verbs of, 525, 558.
Haud, 442. Haud scio an, 459, R.
Hendiadys, 695.
Hei, 340, R. 2.
Heu, 340.
Hie, 290 ; of time, 392, R. 4.
Historical tenses, 216. Historical
present, 220. Historical cum, 586.
Hodiernus, 524, R. 6.
Hope, verbs of, 424, R. 3.
Horrère, w. accus., 329, R. 1.
I.
Ideal second person, 252, 267. Ideal
_ conditional sentence, 598.
Idem, 296 ; predicative use of, 324,
R. 2 ; with dat., 356, R. 6.
Idoneus, with dat., 356; qui, 556,
R. 2.
Igitur, 503.
Ignarus, w. gen., 373.
Ignorance, adjectives of, w. gen.,
373.
Illative conjunctions, 502-504.
llle, 292 ; of time, 392, R. 4.
Immemor, w. gen., 373.
Impedio, consti'., 548, 549.
index of syntax.
877
Imperative, 259-269 ; tenses, 259-
262; negative, 268; periphrases
for, 264 ; representatives of posi¬
tive imperative, 265 ; of negative,
266; of positive and negative,
267, 268 ; time of, 272 ; impei ative
in örätio obliqua, 655.
Imperfect tense, indicative, 222
foil. ; subjunctive, 252 ; in se¬
quence of tenses, 517 ; in unreal
conditional sentences, 599, R. 2 ;
used modally, 246, R. 2.
Impero, w. inf., 582, R. 1.
Impersonal verbs, 199.
Impertió, 848.
Imprimere in, abl., 884, R. 1.
In, in compounds with acc., 380 ;
with dat., 846. In, with abl. of
place, 884, R. ; with acc., 418, R. ;
with acc. and abl., 419. In, with
abl. of time, 898.
Inclination, verbs of, 824.
Incorporation of antecedents, 618.
Indefinite perfect, 215 ; pronouns,
800-806 ; antecedent, 623.
Indicative mood, 246 ; for subjunc¬
tive, 599, R. 2. See the diflerent
classes of sentences.
Indigeo, constr., 889, R. 2.
Indignus, w. abl., 878, R. 8 ; 898, R.
2. Indignus qui, 556, R. 2.
Indirect discourse. See örätio db-
llqua.
Indirect object, 208, 843.
Indirect questions, 462.
Induo, constr., 848.
In eo esse ut, 241.
Infinitive, tenses of, 278 foil. 580 ;
subject of, 341, 526 ; as a noun,
420, 422 ; as a subject, 428 ; as an
object, 424 ; as a predicate, 425 ;
accus, and inf., 526 ; ambiguity of
accus, and inf., 527, R. 4 ; accus,
and inf., with verbs of will and
desire, 582; with verbs of emo¬
tion, 588 ; in exclamations, 584 ;
accus, and inf., as a subject, 585 ;
in relative sentences, 688.
Infra, as an adverb, 416, R. ; with
accus., 417.
Inquam, 651, R. 1.
Inquiry, verbs of, 383.
Inscrlbere in, abl., 884, R.
Instar, with gen., 872.
Instrument, abl. of, 205,403.
Inter, in compound with dat., 846.
Inter, with accus., 417 ; with ac¬
cus. for gen., 871, R. 4. Inter sé,
212. Inter of time. 898, R.
Intercalary period, 686.
Interest, constr., 881-882.
Interjections, 194, R. 8; with divers
cases, 840.
Interrogative sentences, 451-473.
Intra, with accus., 417 ; of time,
898, R.
Intransitive verbs, 204, 845.
Inverted attraction, 619, R. 2.
Inmtus, 824, R. 6.
Ipse, use of, 297 foil.
Ire, with supine, 486, R. 2.
Islands, names of smaller, constr.,
410, 411, 412.
Itaque, 502.
Ita—ut, restrictive, 556, R. 5.
Item, itidem, 645.
Iterative tenses, 568-9.
J.
Jubeo, constr., 532, R. 1; 546, R. 1.
Jure, 898.
Jussü, 407.
Judo, w. accus., 345, R. 1.
E.
Knowledge, adjectives of, 873.
L.
Latus, constr., 886.
Lege, 398.
Letters, tenses in, 244; date, 411,
R. 8.
Libens, 824, R. 6.
Llber, 378, R. 4, libero, w. abl., 388.
Libro, and in llbrö, 885, R.
Licére, constr., 878.
Licet, constr., 585, R. 2, 609.
Likeness, adjectives of, 356 ; with
ac, 646.
Locare, constr., 378.
Locative, 412.
Zoco, 885, R.
378
INDEX TO SYNTAX.
Longe, with superl., 317.
Longue, w. accus., 386.
M.
Made, 324, R. 1.
Magie quam, 314.
Magnl, 377 ; magno, 380.
Making, verbs of, with two accus.,
334 ; passive of, w. two nom.,
197.
Male, emere, vendere, 380, R. 3.
Malo, const!*., 532, R. 3 ; 546, R. 3.
Manner, abl. of, 401.
Material, abl. of, 396.
Mô.tûtlnue, 324, R. 6.
Measure, abl. of, 398-400 ; of differ¬
ence, 400.
Medeor, w. dat., 345, R. 2; meden-
due, 428, R. 3.
Meliue, w. indie., 246, R. 1.
Meminl, w. pres. inf., 277, R.; w.
gen. 375.
Memor, w. gen., 373.
Memoria teneo, 277, R.
Memory, verbs of constr., 375.
Metuo, w. dat. and acc., 347.
Mllitiae, 412, R. 2.
Mille, 308.
Minôrie, 380.
Minor, minué, without quam, 311,
R. 4.
Mirärl, with accus., 329, R. 1.
Mlrum quantum, 469, R. 2.
Mieereor, mieerêeco, mieeret, w. gen.,
376.
Mittere, w. two dat., 350.
Moderor, with dat. and accus., 347.
3/öd<?,with subjunc., 575.
Modo-modo, 484.
Moneo, w. gen., 375 and R. 1 ; with
ut, 546 ; with inf., 546, R. 2.
Mood, attraction of, 509, 665.
Moods, 245 ; indie., 246 foil. ; sub¬
junctive, 247 foil. ; imperative,
259 ; infinitive, 245, R.
Mdrie est, 365, R. 1.
Moving cause, 407, R.
Multiplication of subjects, 280 foil.
Multitude, noun of, 202, R. 1.
Multé, with superlat., 317.
Multue, with et, 483.
Mütú, constr., 404, R.
N.
Nam, namque, 500.
Name, dat. of, 322 ; gen. of, 359.
Names of cities and small islands,
constr., 410,411,412.
Naming, verbs of, with two accus.,
334.
Nätue, w. accus., 338 ; w. abl., 395.
-Ne, 456, 462.
Ne, with optative subj., 253 ; with
impel*, subj., 256, 266 ; with im¬
pera t., 263, 264; with sentences
of design, 543 ; of result, 566, R.
4 ; ne, granted that, 610.
Nearness, adjectives of, 356.
Neceeee eel, 535, R. 1, 2.
Necessity, expressed how, 246, R. 1.
Necne, 461.
Nec non, 448, R 3.
Nédum, 484, R. 2.
Negative, of optative subjunctive,
253 ; of imperative, 263 ; nega¬
tives, 442 foil.; subdivision of,
444 ; position of, 447 ; two nega¬
tives, 448.
Nego, 446.
Nemo, 304.
Nempe, 500, R. 2.
Neque, 482. Ne-quidem, 444, 484.
Nlecio an,Mfy, R.
Neecix) quie, quomodo, with indie.,
469, R. 2.
Neuter adjective as substantive,
199, R. 4; as cognate accus., 331,
R. 2 ; as adverb, R. 3 ; with par¬
titive gen., 371.
Ni, 592, R. 5.
Nihil, 304 ; nihill, 379.
Niei and el nm, 592 ; niei and mei
el — only, 592, R. 2 ; niei quod, R.
3 ; niei forte, R. 4.
Nitor, with abl., 403, R. 3.
No, 473.
iVoZi, with inf. for imperat., 264.
Nolo, 532.
Nomen eet, 322. Nomen w. gen., 359.
Nominative, 194 ; double, 196 ; nom.
for accus., 527 R. 3 ; with inf., 528.
Nm, 442 ; position of, 447; nm
quod, quo, 541, R. 1.
Non aliue quam, 646, R. 2.
Nm modo—eôlum tantum, 484.
Nonne, 457.
INDEX OP SYNTAX.
3V9
Non possum non, 448, R. 1.
Nos = ego, 195, R. 7.
Nostrl, nostrum, 363 and R.
Nouns. See Substantive and Ad¬
jective.
Nûho, with dat., 345, R. 3.
Nullum, 301, 304 ; for non, R. 3.
Num, 458.
Number, singular for plural, 195, R.
7 and 8 ; agreement in, 303.
Nunc—nunc, 484.
O.
Ö, "with voc., 194, R. 3 ; w. accus.,
_340.
Ö SÏ, 354, 603.
Ob, in compds. with acc., 330 ; with
dat., 346. Ob, w. accus., 417.
Object, direct, 307; indirect, 308;
infin. as object, 424; object sen¬
tences, 533-537 ; with quod, 535 ;
with acc. and inf., 536 foil.
Object, for which, 350.
Obligation expressed, 346, R. 1.
Oblique cases, 337-408.
Obliquity, partial, 509.
Obllviscor, const!'., 375, R. 1.
Olere and redoUre, w. accus., 839, R.
Omitting, verbs of, 551.
Omnes, 368, R. 3.
OpHnione, 399, R. 1.
Oportet, 535, R. 1 ; 559, R. 1.
Optative, subjunctive, 353.
Opto, 434, R. 3 ; 546.
Opus, 390.
Oratio obliqua, 509, 651-666 ; moods
in, 509, 653, 654; tenses in, 656
foil. ; condit. sentences in, 659 ;
pronouns in, 663 ; involved, 665-6.
Ordinals for cardinals, 309.
Ordine, 401, R.
Origin, abl. of, 395.
Ortus, 395.
P.
Pa^nitet, 376 ; paenitendus, 438,
R. 3.
Par and dispar, constr., 356, R. 1.
Part, accus, of, 333.
Particeps, w. gen., 373.
Participial clauses, interrogative in,
471.
Participial sentences, 667 foil.
Participles, tenses, 378-9 , w. geni¬
tive, 374 ; subordination by
means of, 409, R. 3 ; 667, R. 1 ;
participle as substant., 438 ; as ad¬
ject., 439 ; after verbs of Percep¬
tion and Representation, 537, R.
1, 536; verbs of Causation and
Desire, 537.
Participation, adjectives of, 373.
Partition in English, none in Latin,
368, R. 1.
Partitive genitive, 366-371.
Partitive, use of attribute, 387, R. ;
apposition, 331.
Parum, w. gen., 371.
Parvl, 379.
Passionate Question, 368.
Passive voice, 305 ; passive of in¬
transitive verbs, 199, R. ; 305,
308 ; passive genitive, 361.
Pecûliâris, constr., 356, R. 1.
Pedibus, 401, R.
Penes, w. accus., 417.
Per, in compds. with acc., 330 ; per,
witb acc., 417 ; position, 415, R.
Per, of space, 335 ; of time, 337 ;
of manner, 401, R.
Perceiving, verbs of, constr., 537,
536.
Perfect, pnre, 337; historical, 331 ;
passive, 343; perfect in letters,
344; perfect subjunctive, poten¬
tial, 350 ; optative, 353 ; impera¬
tive, 356, 366, 3 ; time of, 371 ;
in sequence, 511 ; in sentences of
result, 513 ; perfect infin., 375 ; as
representative of indie., 377, 530,
R. ; perf. part., 378 ; after verbs of
causation and desire, 537 ; con¬
cessive, 670.
Period of action, 313.
Periphrastic conjugation, 338-343;
subj., 514-516 ; iufin., 531 ; in
oratio obliqua, 659.
Perltus, w. gen., 373.
Permitió ut, 533, R. 1.
Person, concord of, 303,383.
Personal pronoun omitted, 198 ;
gen. of, 363 ; personal pronoun w.
gerundive, 439, R. 1.
Person interested, 306.
380
INDEX OF SYNTAX.
Persuddeo^ 845, E. 3; w. inf., 546,
R. 3.
Pertaesum est, 876.
Peto, 333, R. 3.
Piget, 376.
Placing, verbs of, 384, R. 1.
Place, whither, 343, 410; where,
384-387,413 ; whence, 388 ; place,
as cause, manner, or instrument,
387.
Plenus, 373 and R. 3.
Pluperfect, 333; indie, for subj.,
346, R. 3 ; 599, R. 3 ; iterative,
569 ; pluperf. subj. as imperat. of
past, 366, R. 3 ; in sequence, 517 ;
iterative, 569, R. 3 ; in conditional,
599.
Plural of abstracts, 195, R, 5, 6 ; for
sing., R. 7.
Pluriml, 379.
Plüris, 379.
Plus, without quam, 311, R. 4.
Pone, w. accus., 417.
Pônere in, abl., 384, R. 1.
Poseo, const!'., 333 and R. 3.
Position of attribute, 887, 388 ; of
preposition, 414 foil. ; of adverb,
441 ; of negative, 447 foil. ; posi¬
tion, in interrogative sentences,
470 ; of relative, 614. See 674 foil.
Posse, for future, 340, R. 3; 659,
R. 1.
Possessive genitive, 360.
Possessive pronouns, use of, 399 ;
apposition with gen., 319, R. 3;
for genitive, 363 ; with rêfert and
interest, 381 ; reflexive, 395, R. 1,
531, R. 3.
Possessor, dative of, 349.
Possibility expressed, 346, R. 1.
Post, in compounds with dat., 346 ;
in expressions of time, 400, R. 3.
Post, w. accus., 417.
Post quam, 563-567.
Postulo, constr., 333, R. 3.
Potential subj unctive, 350 foil. ,519,
543.
Poteram, 346, R. 3.
Potior, const!'., 405, and R. 3.
Potius quam, 579, R., 647, R. 4.
Potuisse, for futurum fuisse ut, 659,
R. 3.
Power expressed, 346, R. 1 ; adjec¬
tives of, 373.
Prae, in compounds w. dat., 346 ;
with abl., 407, R, 418.
Praeditus, w. abl., 378, R. 1.
Praestolor, constr., 347.
Praeter, in compds., w, accus., 330.
Praeter, w. accus., 417.
Predicate, 193 ; predicative apposi¬
tion and attribution, 334.
Prepositions, 413-419 ; origin of
word, 413, R. 3 ; position of, 414,
415 ; repetition and omission of,
416 ; adverbial, 416, R. ; prepo¬
sitions w. acc., 417; with abl.,
418 ; with accus, and abl., 419 ;
with gerundive, 488,433-4 ; with
acc. and abl. gerund., 433-4.
Present indicat., 818-331 ; of en¬
deavor, 318, R. 3 ; for future, 819 ;
for past, 330; jam, jamdiü,
jamprldem, 831 ; present subjunc¬
tive, time of, 371 ; in sequence of
tenses, 517 ; for future, 514 ; in
conditional sentences, 598 ; pre¬
sent infinitive, 274 ; of contempo¬
raneous "action, 539 ; present par¬
ticiple, 378.
Preventing cause, 407, R. 3 ; verbs
of, 548,549.
Price, gen. of, 378 ; abl. of, 404.
Primo, prlmum, 334, R. 7.
Principal clauses, 474.
Prior, primus, as predicates, 334, R.
6, 7 ; w. gen., 370.
Prius quam, constr., 576-9.
Pro, interjection, 340, R. 3.
Pro, in compounds, w. dat., 346.
Pro, with abl., 418. Pro eö ut, 645,
R. 4.
Prohibeo, constr., 548.
ProlSpsis, 470.
Promise, verbs of, 434, R. 3.
Pronouns, 390-306 ; demonstrative,
390-393 ; reflexive, 894, 530-533 ;
determinative, 393-398 ; possess¬
ive, 399 ; indefinite, 300-306 ; in
örätia obliqua, 663.
Prope, w. accus., 417.
Propius, constr., 356, R. 4.
Proprius, 356, R. 1.
Propter, w. accus., 417.
Protasis, 590 ; omitted, 353, R. 1,
603.
Proxime, w. accus., 356, R. 4.
PrûÂens, as adv., 334, R. 5.
INDEX OP SYNTAX.
381
Pudet, 376.
Pure perfect, 227.
Pato, w. gen., 878.
Putting, verbs of, constr., 348, 384,
R. 1.
a.
Qua prüdentiä es, 618, R. 1.
Qualification of subject, 284.
Quâlis, 645.
Quality, gen. of, 364; ablative of,
402.
Qualities, two compared, 314.
Quam, w. comparatives, 311, 647;
w. superlatives, 317; quam pro, ut,
qui, 313 ; quam quod, 525 ; qtbam
si, 604 ; quam omitted, 311, R. 4.
Quamdiü, 570, 645.
Quamvls, 608.
Quando, quandoquidem, 538.
^anquam, 607.
Quanti, 379, 380 ; quantus^ 645.
Quasi, 604.
-Que, 478.
Questions. See Interrogative Sen¬
tences.
Qui, indef., 302.
Qui, 612 foil. See Relative.
Quia, 538 ; non quia, 541, R. 1.
^Icunque, 246, R. 4.
Quidam, 300.
^idem, 292, R. 4.
Quid me vis, 331, R. 3.
Quin, in questions, 268 ; quin, 550 ;
after verbs of omitting, etc., 551 ;
for qui non, 556 ; non quin, 541,
R. 1 ; 635.
Quis, indef., 302.
Quispiam, 303.
Quisquam, 304.
Quisque, 305 ; ut quisque, 645, R. 2.
Quisquis, w. ind.. 246, R. 4.
Quo, measure of difference, 400 ; —
that thereby, 545 ; quo quisque,
645,R. 2.
Quoad, with gen., 371, R. 4 ; constr.,
573.
Quod, in object sentences, 525 ; in
causal sentences, 538-541 ; w.
verbs of emotion, 542 foil. ; nisi
quod, 592, R. 3 ; quodsl ubi, 612,
R. 1.
Quominus, 549.
Quoniam, 538 foil.
Quoque, 481.
Quot, w. gen., 368, R. ; correlat.,
645.
Quoties, 569 ; correl., 645.
Quotquot, w. ind., 246, R. 4.
Quum, See cum.
Rating, verbs of, constr., 878.
Reciprocal relations, 212.
Recordor, 375, R. 2.
Recuso, constr., 548, R. 1.
Reddo, 334, R.
Rèfert, constr., 381, 382.
Refertus, constr., 373, R. 1.
Reflexive pronoun, 294 ; in subor¬
dinate sentences, 520-522.
Refraining, verbs of, 551.
Refusing, verbs of, 548.
Relative sentences, 506, 612 foil. ;
relative, position of, 614; con¬
cord of, 616 ; attraction of, 619 ;
correlatives of, 620 ; relative
clause, position of, 622 ; tenses in,
624, 625 ; moods in, 626 foil. ;
ind., 626 foil. ; subj., 629 foil. ; in
örätio obliqua, 630 ; by attraction,
631 ; when qui = ut is, 632-634 ;
when qui = cum is, 636 ; accus,
rel. and inf., 638 ; combination of
relative sentences, 639 ; relative
in ôTâtio obliqua, 658, R. 1 and 2 ;
relative represented by participle,
640, 671.
Relinquo, with two datives, 350.
Remaining, verbs of, 197.
Remembering, verbs of, 375.
Reminding, verbs of, 375.
Reminiscor, 375 and R. 2.
Repeated action. See Iterative.
RejDresentatives of imperative, 265-
268.
Representation, verbs of, with par¬
ticiple, 536.
Requiring, verbs of, 333.
Res, use of, 195, R. 4.
Resisting, verbs of, 345.
Restriction to the comparative,
315.
Restrictive apposition, 320.
Result, subjunctive of, 653 foil. ;
382
lîTDEX OF SYNTAX.
exceptional sequence in sentences
of result, 513.
Eesolve, verbs of, 424, and R. 2.
Rhetorical questions, 452, R. 2 ; in
oratio obliqua, 654, R.
Rldeo, w. accus., 329, R. 1.
Bogatâ, 407.
Rüre, 410, 411 ; rüs, 410.
Rürl, 412.
S.
Sacer, 356, R. 1.
Sacrifice, 403, R. 2.
Satü, w. gen., 371.
Saying, verbs of, constr., 529, 530.
fíciens, 324, R. 5.
Seat of feeling, 374, R. 8.
Sed, 487.
Seeming, verbs of, 197.
Sentences, simple, 192 ,* expanded,
280 ; compound, coordinate and
subordinate, 474 ; copulative, 477
foil. ; adversative, 480 foil. ; dis¬
junctive, 495 foil. ; causal, 500 ;
illative, 502 ; object, 523 foil. ;
causal, 538 foil. ; final, 543 foil. ;
consecutive, 553 foil. ; temporal,
ß62 foil. ; conditional, 590 foil. ;
concessive, 605 foil. ; relative,
612 foil. ; comparative, 641 foil. ;
abridged, 648 foil.
Separation, abl. of, 388.
Sequence of tenses, 510 foil.
Seu. See Swe.
Showing, verbs of, with two nom.,
197; with two accus., 334; with
accus, and infin., 526-529.
Si, whether, 462 ; if, 591.
Sign of conditional omitted, 600.
Silentiô, 401, R.
Similis, constr., 356, R. 1.
Simple sentences, 195; expanded,
280 foil.
Simul—simul, 484.
Simulac, 563.
Sin {minus, secus, aliter), 593.
nm, 592.
Sine, with abl., 418 ; not used with
gerund, 434.
Singular for plural, 195, R. 7 and 8.
Sino, w. accus, and inf., 424, R. 3 ;
without ut, 546, R. 3.
&tio, wdth accus., 329, R. 1.
Sine—slve, 498, 499.
Space, extent in, 335,336.
Spè, comparative with, 399, R. 1.
Specification, genitive of, 359.
Specific characteristic, 357.
Stage of action, 213.
Standard of comparison omitted,
812.
Staiuo in, w. abl., 384, R. 1.
Sto, constr., 378 ; with abl., 408,
R. 3.
Stultitiae est, 365, R.
Sub, in compounds with acc., 830 ;
with dat., 346 ; with acc. and abl.,
419 ; comp., 413, R.
Subject, the forms of, 195 ; object
for, 470; accus, subj. of infin.,
526, R. ; subject omitted, 527, R.
2 ; 532, R. 3 ; nom. subj. for ac¬
cus., 528.
Subjective genitive, 361.
Subjunctive, 247 ; ideal and unreal,
248 ; potential, 250 ; optative, 253 ;
in asseverations, 255 ; as impera¬
tive, 256 ,- as concessive, 257.
Subjunctive, future, how represent¬
ed, 514. See diiferent classes of
sentences.
Subllmis, 324, R. 6.
Subordinate clauses, 474.
Subordination by means of partici¬
ple, 409, R. 2.
Substantiva mobilia, 202.
Substantive, agreement of attribute
with, 285 foil. ; substantive sen¬
tences, 507.
Subter, in compounds with accus.,
330 ; with acc. and abl., 419.
Sul. See Refiexive.
Sum, with dat., 349, 350 ; w. dative
of gei'und, 430 ; with predicative
genitive, 365.
Sunt qui, 634.
Super, in compounds with acc.,
330 ; with dat., 346 ; super, with
acc., and abl., 419.
Superlative, 316; strengthened, 317 ;
with gen., 370.
Supine, 435-437 ; accus. 436 ; ablat.,
437.
Supplico, w. dat., 345, R. 2.
Suprä, as adv., 416, R. ; with accus.,
417.
Suus, use of, 294, 299, R.
INDEX OP SYNTAX.
383
ÄywöÄW, 203, R. 1.
Syntax, defined, 193.
T.
Table of temporal relations, 217.
Taedet, 376.
Taking, verbs of, 334.
Talis, 645.
Tamdiü, 645.
Tarnen, 493.
Tametsl, 606.
Tarn quam, tarn quam si, 604.
Toruti, 380 ; tantum ábest ut, 556,
R. 1 ; tantus, 645.
Teaching, verbs of, 333.
Tempero, constr., 347.
Temporal conjunctions for copula¬
tive, 484; conjunctions, 561 ; tem¬
poral relations, table of, 317.
Tempus est, 429, R. 3.
Tendency, sentences of, 553 foil.
Teneo, w. perf. part, pass., 330.
Tenses, 213 foil. ; number of, 314 ;
present, 318-331 ; perfect pure,
227-330; historical, 331 ; imper¬
fect, 333 foil. ; pluperfect, 233 ; fu¬
ture, 334-5 ; future perfect, 336-7 ;
periphrastic, 338 ; active, 239 ;
passive, 340-343 ; in letters, 344 ;
tenses of indicative, 370 ; subjunc¬
tive, 371 ; imperative, 273 ; in¬
finitive, 373 foil. ; participle, 378 ;
sequence of tenses, 510 foil. ;
dependent infinitive, 539 foil.,
iterative, 568, 569 ; in örätio ob¬
liqua, 656 foil.
Tenus, position, 414, R. ; with abl
and gen., 418.
Thinking, verbs of, 197 ; with ac¬
cus. and inf., 536-539.
Time, accus, of, 337-8 ; abl. of, 393,
393 ; with íti, 393; with ante, post,
abhinc, 400, R. 3 ; participle, 668.
Timeo, w. dat., 347.
Tot, 645.
Toties, 645.
Totus, of space, 386; of time, 393, R. 3.
Towns, names of, 410-413.
Trans, in compounds, w. accus.,
330 ; with two accus., 330, R. 3,
3 ; w. accus., 417.
Transient qualities, 403, R. 1.
Transitive verbs, 204, 339.
Tum—cum, 583.
Tum—tum, 484.
Tuus, 399, R.
TJ.
Ubi, w. gen., 371, R. 4 ; of time,
563.
Uilus, 304.
UUimus, 334, R. 6.
Ultra, as adv., 416, R. ; with accus.,
417.
Unreal conditional sentence, 599.
Ünus, ünus omnium, with superlat.,
_317.
Ünus, how translated, 334, R. 5 ;
ûnq,s qui, 633.
Urging, verbs of, 546.
Usus, 390, 559.
Ut—ita, concessive, 484.
Ut uti, design, 545 ; tendency, 554 ;
ut omitted, 546, R. 3 ; 647," R. 4.
Ut qui, 637, R., 636 ; ut, of cause,
645, R. 4.
Ut, in exclamatory questions, 560.
Ut non, 543 ; 556, R. 6.
Ut si, 604.
Ut quisque—ita, 645, R. 3.
Uter, 315, R.
Uterque, 370, R. 3.
Uiinam, 354.
Ûtor, 405 ; ûtendus, 438, R. 3.
Ut primum, 563.
Utrum, 460, 461, R.
V.
Vacare, 347.
Vacuus, constr., 388.
Vae, 340, R. 3.
Value, gen. of, 378
-Ve, 497.
Vel, with superl., 817 ; reí, 496.
Vel—vel, 496.
Velle, for future, 240, R. 3 ; relie sibi,
351, R.
Velut, relutsi, 604.
Vendo, 378.
Vêneo, 378.
Venio, with two dat., 350.
Venit in mentem, 375, R. 3
384
INDEX OP SYNTAX.
Verb, voices, active, 204; passive,
205 ; reflexive, 209 ; deponent,
211 ; tenses, 213 foil. ; moods,
245 foil. See Voice, Mood, Tense.
Verbal nouns, sequence after, 518.
Verhuni, w. gen.-, 359.
Vereor, 424,552; w. dat., 347.
Vero, 489.
Versus, position, 414 ; w. accus.,
417.
Verum, 488.
Verte, w. two dat., 350.
Vescor, 405 ; vescendus^ 428, R. 3.
Vesperilnus, 324, R. 5.
Vestrl nestrum, 362, R.
Veto, w. acc., 345, R. 1; with inf.,
424, D. 3.
Vid et ratiöne, 401, R.
Videre ne, 552, R. 2.
Vi et armls, 401, R.
Vivo, w. abl., 405, R. 3.
Vocative, 194, R. 3.
Voice, active, 204 ; passive, 205.
Volens, 324, R. 6 ; volenti, 354, R. 1.
Volo, 532, and R. 4; 526, and R. 3.
Vötl damnärl, S77, R. 3.
Vox, with gen., 359.
W.
Want, verbs of, 389 ; adj. of, 373, and
R. 1 ; 389, R. 2.
Warning, verbs of, 546.
Whither? 342, 410.
Wishing, verbs of, 532, 546,
Y.
Yes, 473.
Yielding, verbs of, w. dat., 345.
Z.
Zeugma, 690.
185
.
former
in the
N. E.
439
440
441
442
444
447
445
440
448
449
450
453
454
455
456-9
460
461
462
463
465-6
467-8
469
470-1
473
474
477
478
479
645
480
481
482
44811.3
444
483
484
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
495
496
498
499
497
500
502
503
[gildersleevb's latin grammar.]
)MPARATiyE SECTIONS OF SYNTAX
o
nunibei's in the first column of each division below indicate sections in
of the Grammar; those in the second refer to corresponding section!
Latin Grammar.
n. e.
0. e.
n. e.
O. e.
n. e.
0. e.
n. e.
0. e.
192-3
54
250-2
113
313
168
371
227
194
55-6
253-4
114
314
169
372
228
195
57
255
115
315
170
373
229
196-7
58
256
116
316
171
374
230
198
59
257
117
317
172
375
231
199
6C
259
118
319
173
376
232
200
61
260
119
320
174
377
233
202
62
261
120
321
175
378
234
202 R.4
63
262
121
322
176
379-80
2.35-9
202 R.5
64
263
122
323
177-8
381
240
204
• 65
264
123
324
179
382
241
205
66
265
R. 1-7
e. 2-8
ISO
412
242
206
67
266
124-5
32.5-6 !
181
383
243
207
68
267
126
327 1
182
384
244
208
69
268
127
329
183
412
245
209
70
269
128
330
184
385
246
210
71
270
129
331
185-6
3S6-7
247
211
72-3
271
130
332
187
388
248
212
74
272
131
333
188
411
249
213
75
274
132
334
189
389
250
214
76
275
133
342
190
390
251
216
77
277
134
410
191
391
252
217
78
278
135
335
192 a
.392
253
218
79
279
136 •
336
192 ft
393
251
218 R.2
80
281
137
337
193
395
255
219
81
282
138
338
194
398
256
220
82
281 R.2
139 (■
340
195
399
257
221
83
283
140 j
196-8
400-2
258
227-8
84
284
141
343
199
403
259
229
85
285
142
314
200
404
260
230
86
286
143
345
201
405
261
222-3
87
287
144
346
202
406-7
262
224
88
288
145
347
203
408-9
263
225
89 1
289
146
348
204
413
264
233
290
147
349
205
414
265-7
231-2
90
291
148
350
206
415
268-9 1
216
91-3
292
149
351
207
416
270 )
234
94
293
150
352
208
417
271
234 R.1
95
294
151
353
209
418
: 272
235
96
295
152
354
210
419
273
236
97
296
153
355
211
420
274
238
98 1
297
154
356
212
422
: 275
239
99 1
155
357
213
423
! 276
210
100
298
156
359
214
424
1 277
241
101
299
157
360
215
425
; 278
242
102
300
158
361
216-7
426
! 279 1
280 )
243
103
301
159
362
218
428
244
104
302
160
363
219
429
281 1
245
105
303
161
364
220
430
282 1"
106-7
305
162
365
221
431
283
246
108
306
163
366
222
432
284
109 1
304
164
367
223
435
285
247
110 f
165
368
224
436
286
248
111
311
166
369
225
437
287
249
112
312
167
370
226
438
288
186
o. E.
289 )
290 f
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301 I
302 Ç
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312 a
312 b
313
314
315
316
317
318
COMPARATIVE SECTIONS OF SYNTAX.
0. E.
N. E.
319
534
320
535
321
536
322
537
323-5 -|
539
540
326
541
327-9
542
330
543
331
546
332-4
545
335
547
335 R.3
552
336-7
550
338
549
339
544 R.2
340
553-5
341
557
342
558
343
556
344
559
345
560
346
554
347
556 R.4
348
632
349
561
350 1
351 f
562
352
563
353
564
354
565-6
O. E. N. E.
355
567
356
568-9
357
570
358
573
359
574
360
575
361
576
362
579
363
581
364
582
365
583
366
584
367
585
368
586
369
587
370
588
371
589
372
590
373
591
374
594
375
592
376
593
377
595
378
596
379-80
597
381-2
598
383-5
599
387
601
388
602
389-90
604
391
600
0. E.
N. E.
392^
592 R.
395
597 R.4
396
575
397
605
398
606
399
607
400
608
401
609
402
610
403
611
404-5
612
406
613
407
614
408
616
409
416
410
617
411
618
412
619
413
620
414
621
415
623
416
622
417
624
418
625
419
626
420
627
421
628
422
629
423
630
424
631
425
632-3
0. E.
N. E.
426
634-5
427
636-7
428
638
429
639
430
641
431
642
432
644
433-4
645
435
646
436
647
437
649
438
650
439
651-2
440
653
441
654
442
655
443
656
444
657-8
445-7
659
448-51
660
452
661
453-6
662
457
663
458
665
459
666
460
667
461
668
462
669
463
670
464
671
University Publishing Company's
"Hô TTertóa 'Fygmr^'h TA-g+.'Rrtnlrc
In
12mo. i o cts.
Adapted to young learners; interesting, practical, and very attractive In
the clear typography of its pages.
First French Reader. 12mo. 144 pages. 75 cts.
Elementary ■without being dull, it is noticeable for the happy gradation of
the exercises, as well as the variety and interest of the selections.
Grammar in French. i2mo. 528 pages, si.75.
Sachtleben's Guide to a Correct Pronunciation
of the French Language. i2mo. 60 cts.
Containing, in convenient, condensed farm, just such information as a mul¬
titude of Teachers desire, from a competent authority.
Gildersleeve's Latin Text-Books.
Latin Grammar. i2mo. 384 pages. $1.50.
Prof. Gildersleeve's Grammar has already received warm commendations
from high sources as an original and practical work. It is simple, clear, and
logical. It does not confuse the student with a multitude of doubtful exam¬
ples and exceptions; while its translations of illustrative quotations are singu¬
larly happy and idiomatical, and will distinguish it from all other Grammars.
Latin Exercise-Book. i2mo. 180 pages, si.oo.
" A most admirable manual of Latin composition, luminously graded,
aptly worded, logically developed, and in every way illustrating its author's
deep scholarship and delicate insight."
Latin Lessons and Reader. i2mo. (in preparation.)